xymtex (now lppl, minus manuals without sources)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@32182 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

39 files changed, 59057 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/aliphat.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/aliphat.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e8c0f377d16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/aliphat.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4767 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: aliphat.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1993,1996,1998,2001,2002,2004,2005,2009,2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% aliphat.sty
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files aliphat.dtx and aliphat.ins
+% and the derived file aliphat.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+% (Old Address)  Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+% (Present Address) Shinsaku Fujita
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and 
+%   Mathematical Chemistry
+%   fujita-sicimc@nifmail.jp
+%   
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF}% Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 20, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{July 20, 2005}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.03}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{November 07, 2009}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.05}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 02, 2013}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.01b}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{6477}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/06/26}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{Size reduction and clipping information}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/21}{The command \cs{dotorline} is added.}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{sfpicture environment, etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Variable size of a central atom}
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Tetrhedral units with wedges bonds}
+% \changes{v4.02a}{2004/12/27}{Bug fix: \cs{square} to \cs{squarecomplex}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2004/07/20}{Wave bonds}
+% \changes{v4.05}{2009/11/07}{Bug fix: \cs{@tetrahedral} to \cs{@@tetrahedral}} 
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{Bond Coloring and the LaTeX Project Public License; 
+% \cs{square} renamed into \cs{squareplanar}}
+% \changes{v5.01b}{2013/04/02}{Bug fix: \cs{Nothbond}, \cs{Southbond}, etc} 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/07/30}{Bug fix: \cs{yltetrahedralposition}, etc} 
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{aliphat.dtx}[2013/07/30 v5.01 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{aliphat.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Aliphatic compounds by {\sffamily aliphat.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kanagawa, 258-0019, Japan
+% Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% % Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% % Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% % Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{aliphat.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{aliphat:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% aliphat & aliphat.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*aliphat>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.01}
+\typeout{       -- Released July 20, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{aliphat}
+\def\versi@ndate{July 20, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for aliphat.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *********************************
+% * aliphat.sty: list of commands *
+% *********************************
+%
+% <Conventions for bond-setting>
+%
+%     \Northbond
+%     \Eastbond
+%     \Southbond
+%     \Westbond
+%     \NEBond
+%     \NEbond
+%     \SEBond
+%     \SEbond
+%     \NWBond
+%     \NWbond
+%     \SWBond
+%     \SWbond
+%
+%     \NEBOND
+%     \NWBOND
+%     \SEBOND
+%     \SWBOND
+%  
+%  <Macros for position adjustment>
+%     \ylrtrigonalposition 
+%     \ylRtrigonalposition 
+%     \ylltrigonalposition 
+%     \ylLtrigonalposition 
+%     \ylutrigonalposition 
+%     \ylUtrigonalposition 
+%     \yldtrigonalposition 
+%     \ylDtrigonalposition 
+%
+%     \yltethedralposition
+%     \ylsquareposition
+%
+%     \ylethylenepositiona
+%     \ylethylenepositionb
+%     \ylethylenevpositiona
+%     \ylethylenevpositionb
+%
+%  <Macros for tetravalent atoms>
+%
+%     \tetrahedral                       \@tetrahedral
+%     \square ---> \squarplanar          \@square ---> \@squareplanar
+%
+%  <Macros for trivalent atoms>
+%
+%     \rtrigonal                         \@rtrigonal
+%     \Rtrigonal                         \@Rtrigonal
+%     \ltrigonal                         \@ltrigonal
+%     \Ltrigonal                         \@Ltrigonal
+%     \utrigonal                         \@utrigonal
+%     \Utrigonal                         \@Utrigonal
+%     \dtrigonal                         \@dtrigonal
+%     \Dtrigonal                         \@Dtrigonal
+%
+%  <Macros for two-carbon compounds>
+%
+%     \ethylene                          \@ethylene
+%     \ethyleneh                         
+%     \Ethylene                          \@Ethylene
+%     \Ethyleneh                         
+%     \ethylenev                         \@ethylenev
+%     \Ethylenev                         \@Ethylenev
+%
+%  <Macros for stereo-projection>
+%
+%     \tetrastereo                       \@tetrastereo
+%     \dtetrastereo                      \@dtetrastereo
+%     \ethanestereo                      \@ethanestereo
+% 
+%  <Macros for tetrahedral units with wedged bonds>
+% 
+%     \rtetrahedralS                     \RtetrahedralS
+%     \ltetrahedralS                     \LtetrahedralS
+%     \utetrahedralS                     \UtetrahedralS
+%     \dtetrahedralS                     \DtetrahedralS
+%     \htetrahedralS
+%
+%  <Macros for trigonal bipyramidal intermediates>
+%
+%      \utrigpyramid                     \dtrigpyramid
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf aliphat.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Adding \cs{ifno@centeratom}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}
+\unitlength=0.1pt
+\newif\ifno@centeratom \no@centeratomfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Macros for bond-setting}
+%
+% Single, double and triple bonds of aliphatic compounds are represented 
+% by horizontal, vertical or sloped lines, 
+% which can be drawn by such commands as |\Eastbond|, 
+% |\Northbond| and |\SEbond|. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{NEBOND}, \cs{SEBOND}, \cs{NWBOND}, 
+% and \cs{SWBOND}}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/21}{The command \cs{dotorline} is added.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/06/13}{Bug fix: Northbond etc. A and B inversed}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Variable bond length.}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/04/02}{Bug fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Northbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************************
+% * Conventions for bond-setting *
+% ********************************
+\def\Northbond{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\N@rthbond}{\N@rthbond[]}}
+\def\N@rthbond[#1]{%
+\yl@xdiff=40
+\yl@ydiff=-15
+\def\@tempXX{#1}%
+\ifx\@tempXX\empty
+\@tempcnta=100\relax
+\@tempcntb=100\relax
+\else
+\@tempcnta=#1\relax
+\@tempcntb=#1\relax
+\fi
+\ifno@centeratom
+\advance\@tempcnta by52\relax
+\advance\@tempcntb by52\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavaluea{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb
+\ifno@centeratom\else%%added2013/4/2
+\advance\@tempcnta by52\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavalueb{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb
+\ifno@centeratom
+\advance\@tempcnta by15\relax%%67-52=15added2013/4/2
+\else
+\advance\@tempcnta by67\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavaluec{\the\@tempcnta}%
+%\begin{sfpicture}(100,200)(0,0)
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+\ifno@centeratom%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+%    \Multiput@Direct(-13,0)(26,0){2}{\line(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond up
+    \Multiput@Direct(-13,0)(26,0){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+%    \Multiput@Direct(-20,0)(20,0){3}{\line(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% triple bond up
+    \Multiput@Direct(-20,0)(20,0){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta <-- alpha 2002/6/13
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-8,0)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha <-- beta 2002/6/13 
+       \dotorline(0,0)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}/(0,0)(0,\@tempcntavalueb)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+        \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+%    \Multiput@Direct(-13,52)(26,0){2}{\line(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond up
+    \Multiput@Direct(-13,52)(26,0){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+%    \Multiput@Direct(-20,52)(20,0){3}{\line(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% triple bond up
+    \Multiput@Direct(-20,52)(20,0){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta <-- alpha 2002/6/13
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-8,52)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha <-- beta 2002/6/13 
+       \dotorline(0,52)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}/(0,52)(0,\@tempcntavalueb)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(0,52)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(0,52)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+        }%
+  \else \Put@Line(0,52)(0,1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi%
+  \putlratom{-40}{\@tempcntavaluec}{\@memberb}%==1 upper substituent
+\end{sfpicture}}%End of Northbond
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Variable bond length.}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/04/02}{Bug fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Eastbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Eastbond{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\E@stbond}{\E@stbond[]}}
+\def\E@stbond[#1]{%
+\yl@xdiff=-10
+\yl@ydiff=33
+\edef\@tempXX{#1}%
+\ifx\@tempXX\empty
+\@tempcnta=140\relax
+\@tempcntb=140\relax
+\else
+\@tempcnta=#1\relax
+\@tempcntb=#1\relax
+\fi
+\ifno@centeratom%
+\advance\@tempcnta by50\relax
+\advance\@tempcntb by50\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavaluea{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb
+\ifno@centeratom\else%%added 2013/4/2
+\advance\@tempcnta by63\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavalueb{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb
+\ifno@centeratom
+\advance\@tempcnta by13\relax%%63-50=13added 2013/4/2
+\else
+\advance\@tempcnta by50\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavaluec{\the\@tempcnta}%
+%\begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+ \ifno@centeratom%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(0,-13)(0,26){2}{\line(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond right
+     \Multiput@Direct(0,-13)(0,26){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(0,-20)(0,20){3}{\line(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond right
+     \Multiput@Direct(0,-20)(0,20){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta <-- alpha 2002/6/13
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha <-- beta 2002/6/13
+       \dotorline(0,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}/(0,0)(\@tempcntavaluec,0)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+       }%
+    \else \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(50,-13)(0,26){2}{\line(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond right
+     \Multiput@Direct(50,-13)(0,26){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(50,-20)(0,20){3}{\line(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond right
+     \Multiput@Direct(50,-20)(0,20){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta <-- alpha 2002/6/13
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(50,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha <-- beta 2002/6/13
+       \dotorline(50,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}/(50,0)(\@tempcntavaluec,0)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(50,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(50,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+       }%
+    \else \Put@Line(50,0)(1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi%
+  \putratom{\@tempcntavalueb}{-33}{\@memberb}%==2 right substituent
+\end{sfpicture}}%End of Eastbond
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Variable bond length.}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/04/02}{Bug fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Southbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Southbond{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\S@uthbond}{\S@uthbond[]}}
+\def\S@uthbond[#1]{%
+\yl@xdiff=40
+\yl@ydiff=95
+\def\@tempXX{#1}%
+\ifx\@tempXX\empty
+\@tempcnta=100\relax
+\@tempcntb=100\relax
+\else
+\@tempcnta=#1\relax
+\@tempcntb=#1\relax
+\fi
+\ifno@centeratom
+\advance\@tempcnta by48\relax
+\advance\@tempcntb by48\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavaluea{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\@tempcnta=-\@tempcntb
+\ifno@centeratom\else%%added2013/4/2
+\advance\@tempcnta by-48\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavalueb{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\@tempcnta=-\@tempcntb
+\ifno@centeratom
+\advance\@tempcnta by-90\relax%%143-48=98 (-8) added2013/4/2
+\else
+\advance\@tempcnta by-143\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavaluec{\the\@tempcnta}%
+%\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+ \ifno@centeratom%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(-13,0)(26,0){2}{\line(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond down
+     \Multiput@Direct(-13,0)(26,0){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(-20,0)(20,0){3}{\line(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond down
+     \Multiput@Direct(-20,0)(20,0){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta <-- alpha 2002/6/13
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-8,0)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha <-- beta 2002/6/13
+       \dotorline(0,0)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}/(0,0)(0,\@tempcntavalueb)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(0,-0)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(0,-0)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+       }%
+    \else \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(-13,-48)(26,0){2}{\line(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond down
+     \Multiput@Direct(-13,-48)(26,0){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(-20,-48)(20,0){3}{\line(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond down
+     \Multiput@Direct(-20,-48)(20,0){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta <-- alpha 2002/6/13
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-8,-48)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha <-- beta 2002/6/13
+       \dotorline(0,-48)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}/(0,-48)(0,\@tempcntavalueb)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(0,-48)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(0,-48)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+       }%
+    \else \Put@Line(0,-48)(0,-1){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi%
+  \putlratom{-40}{\@tempcntavaluec}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+\end{sfpicture}}%End of Southbond
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Variable bond length.}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/04/02}{Bug fix}
+%
+
+% \begin{macro}{\Westbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Westbond{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\W@stbond}{\W@stbond[]}}
+\def\W@stbond[#1]{%
+\yl@xdiff=10
+\yl@ydiff=33
+\def\@tempXX{#1}%
+\ifx\@tempXX\empty
+\@tempcnta=140\relax
+\@tempcntb=140\relax
+\else
+\@tempcnta=#1\relax
+\@tempcntb=#1\relax
+\fi
+\ifno@centeratom
+\advance\@tempcnta by50\relax
+\advance\@tempcntb by50\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavaluea{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\@tempcnta=-\@tempcntb
+\ifno@centeratom\else%%added 2013/4/2
+\advance\@tempcnta by-63\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavalueb{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb
+\ifno@centeratom
+\advance\@tempcnta by-13\relax%%63-50=13 added 2013/4/2
+\else%
+\advance\@tempcnta by50\relax
+\fi
+\edef\@tempcntavaluec{\the\@tempcnta}%
+%\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+ \ifno@centeratom%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(0,-13)(0,26){2}{\line(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond left
+     \Multiput@Direct(0,-13)(0,26){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(0,-20)(0,20){3}{\line(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond left
+     \Multiput@Direct(0,-20)(0,20){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta <-- alpha 2002/6/13
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha <-- beta 2002/6/13
+%%       \dotorline(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}/(\@tempcntavalueb,0)(-40,0)%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}/(0,0)(\@tempcntavalueb,0)%2013/04/02
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefine
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(-50,-13)(0,26){2}{\line(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond left
+     \Multiput@Direct(-50,-13)(0,26){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+%     \Multiput@Direct(-50,-20)(0,20){3}{\line(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% double bond left
+     \Multiput@Direct(-50,-20)(0,20){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}%2010/10/01
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta <-- alpha 2002/6/13
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-50,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha <-- beta 2002/6/13
+%%       \dotorline(-50,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}/(\@tempcntavalueb,0)(-40,0)%
+%       \dotorline(-50,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}/(0,0)(\@tempcntavalueb,0)%%2013/04/02
+       \dotorline(-50,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}/(-40,0)(\@tempcntavalueb,0)%%2013/06/16
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(-50,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(-50,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(-50,0)(-1,0){\@tempcntavaluea}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi%
+  \putlatom{\@tempcntavalueb}{-33}{\@memberb}%==4 left substituent
+\end{sfpicture}}%End of Westbond
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NEBond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NEBond{%degree 120
+\yl@xdiff=-9
+\yl@ydiff=13
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \Put@Line(33,48)(5,3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(47,26)(5,3){121}%northeast double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \Put@Line(31,52)(5,3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(40,37)(5,3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(49,22)(5,3){121}%northeast triple bond
+%  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(40,47)(5,3){121}}% single bond (alpha)
+%  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(40,47)(5,3){121}/(40,47)(161,120)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(40,47)(5,3){121}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(40,47)(5,3){121}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(40,47)(5,3){121}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putratom{170}{107}{\@memberb}%==2 (northeast substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NEbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NEbond{%degree 90
+\yl@xdiff=-5
+\yl@ydiff=10
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+     \Put@Line(31,46)(1,1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(49,28)(1,1){100}%northeast double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+     \Put@Line(27,50)(1,1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(40,37)(1,1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(53,24)(1,1){100}%northeast triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(40,47)(1,1){100}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(40,47)(1,1){100}/(40,47)(140,147)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(40,47)(1,1){100}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(40,47)(1,1){100}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(40,47)(1,1){100}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putratom{145}{137}{\@memberb}%==2 (northeast substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SEBond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SEBond{%degree 120
+\yl@xdiff=-9
+\yl@ydiff=67
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \Put@Line(33,-48)(5,-3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(47,-26)(5,-3){121}%southeast double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \Put@Line(31,-52)(5,-3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(40,-37)(5,-3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(49,-22)(5,-3){121}%southeast triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(40,-47)(5,-3){121}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(40,-47)(5,-3){121}/(40,-47)(161,-120)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(40,-47)(5,-3){121}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(40,-47)(5,-3){121}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(40,-47)(5,-3){121}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putratom{170}{-187}{\@memberb}%==2 (southeast substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SEbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SEbond{%degree 90
+\yl@xdiff=-5
+\yl@ydiff=56
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+     \Put@Line(31,-46)(1,-1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(49,-28)(1,-1){100}%southeast double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+     \Put@Line(27,-50)(1,-1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(40,-37)(1,-1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(53,-24)(1,-1){100}%southeast triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(53,-47)(1,-1){100}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(40,-47)(1,-1){100}/(40,-47)(140,-147)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(40,-47)(1,-1){100}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(40,-47)(1,-1){100}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(40,-47)(1,-1){100}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \putratom{145}{-203}{\@memberb}%==3 (southeast substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NWBbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NWBond{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+\yl@xdiff=9
+\yl@ydiff=13
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \Put@Line(-59,48)(-5,3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(-73,26)(-5,3){121}%northwest double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \Put@Line(-57,52)(-5,3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(-66,37)(-5,3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(-75,22)(-5,3){121}%northwest triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-66,47)(-5,3){121}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(-66,47)(-5,3){121}/(-66,47)(-187,120)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(-66,47)(-5,3){121}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(-66,47)(-5,3){121}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(-66,47)(-5,3){121}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putlatom{-196}{107}{\@memberb}%==2 (northwest substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NWbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NWbond{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+\yl@xdiff=13
+\yl@ydiff=10
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+     \Put@Line(-41,46)(-1,1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(-59,28)(-1,1){100}%northwest double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+     \Put@Line(-37,50)(-1,1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(-50,37)(-1,1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(-63,24)(-1,1){100}%northwest triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-50,47)(-1,1){100}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(-50,47)(-1,1){100}/(-50,47)(-137,147)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(-50,47)(-1,1){100}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(-50,47)(-1,1){100}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(-50,47)(-1,1){100}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putlatom{-163}{137}{\@memberb}%==2 (northwest substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SWBond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SWBond{%
+\yl@xdiff=9
+\yl@ydiff=67
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \Put@Line(-59,-48)(-5,-3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(-73,-26)(-5,-3){121}%southwest double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \Put@Line(-57,-52)(-5,-3){121}%
+    \Put@Line(-66,-37)(-5,-3){121}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    \Put@Line(-75,-22)(-5,-3){121}%southwest triple bond
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-66,-47)(-5,-3){121}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(-66,-47)(-5,-3){121}/(-66,-47)(-187,-120)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(-66,-47)(-5,-3){121}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+         \Put@Line(-66,-47)(-5,-3){121}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(-66,-47)(-5,-3){121}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putlatom{-196}{-187}{\@memberb}%==2 (southwest substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SWbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SWbond{%
+\yl@xdiff=13
+\yl@ydiff=56
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+     \Put@Line(-41,-46)(-1,-1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(-59,-28)(-1,-1){100}%southwest double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+     \Put@Line(-37,-50)(-1,-1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(-50,-37)(-1,-1){100}%
+     \Put@Line(-63,-24)(-1,-1){100}%southwest triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-50,-47)(-1,-1){100}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(-50,-47)(-1,-1){100}/(-50,-47)(-137,-147)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(-50,-47)(-1,-1){100}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(-50,-47)(-1,-1){100}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(-50,-47)(-1,-1){100}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \putlatom{-163}{-203}{\@memberb}%==3 (southwest substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{New command: \cs{NEBOND}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NEBOND}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NEBOND{%degree 120
+\yl@xdiff=-1
+\yl@ydiff=-10
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \Put@Line(48,33)(3,5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(26,47)(3,5){72}%northeast double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \Put@Line(52,31)(3,5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(37,40)(3,5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(22,49)(3,5){72}%northeast triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(40,47)(3,5){72}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(47,40)(3,5){72}/(47,40)(120,161)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(47,40)(3,5){72}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(47,40)(3,5){72}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(47,40)(3,5){72}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putratom{120}{170}{\@memberb}%==2 (northeast substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{New command: \cs{SEBOND}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SEBOND}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SEBOND{%degree 120
+\yl@xdiff=-1
+\yl@ydiff=70
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \Put@Line(48,-33)(3,-5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(26,-47)(3,-5){72}%southeast double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \Put@Line(52,-31)(3,-5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(37,-40)(3,-5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(22,-49)(3,-5){72}%southeast triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(47,-40)(3,-5){72}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(47,-40)(3,-5){72}/(47,-40)(120,-161)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(47,-40)(3,-5){72}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(47,-40)(3,-5){72}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(47,-40)(3,-5){72}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putratom{120}{-230}{\@memberb}%==2 (southeast substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{New command: \cs{NWBOND}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NWBOND}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NWBOND{%
+\yl@xdiff=1
+\yl@ydiff=-10
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \Put@Line(-48,33)(-3,5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(-26,47)(-3,5){72}%northwest double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \Put@Line(-52,31)(-3,5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(-37,40)(-3,5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(-22,49)(-3,5){72}%northwest triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-40,47)(-3,5){72}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(-47,40)(-3,5){72}/(-47,40)(-120,161)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(-47,40)(-3,5){72}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(-47,40)(-3,5){72}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(-47,40)(-3,5){72}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putlatom{-120}{170}{\@memberb}%==2 (northwest substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{New command: \cs{SWBOND}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SWBOND}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SWBOND{%
+\yl@xdiff=1
+\yl@ydiff=70
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \Put@Line(-48,-33)(-3,-5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(-26,-47)(-3,-5){72}%southwest double bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \Put@Line(-52,-31)(-3,-5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(-37,-40)(-3,-5){72}%
+    \Put@Line(-22,-49)(-3,-5){72}%southwest triple bond
+  \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+    {\thicklines\Put@Line(-47,-40)(-3,-5){72}}% single bond (alpha)
+  \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha
+       \dotorline(-47,-40)(-3,-5){72}/(-47,-40)(-120,-161)%
+  \else\if\@tmpb S%
+       \Put@Line(-47,-40)(-3,-5){72}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+       {%
+       \WaveBonds%
+       \Put@Line(-47,-40)(-3,-5){72}%
+       }%
+  \else \Put@Line(-47,-40)(-3,-5){72}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \putlatom{-120}{-230}{\@memberb}%==2 (southwest substituent)
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Tetrahedral unit}
+%
+% The macro |\tetrahedral| typesets a compound of tetravalency. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************
+% * tetrahedral unit *
+% ********************
+%
+%                1
+%
+%                |
+%          2  -- 0 --  4       0 <== the original point
+%                |
+%
+%                3
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \tetrahedral[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}<L1,L2,L3,L4>
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%        {0+} :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+% 
+% The arguments |Ln| (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) represents the bond length 
+% of the bond 0--n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4). This is used to realize variable 
+% bond lengths. The vacant for the |Ln| depicts a bond of the standard  
+% bond length. 
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Variable bond length.}
+% 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \tetrahedral{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \tetrahedral{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yltetrahedralposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Variable sized central atoms} 
+% \changes{v4.05}{2009/11/07}{bug fix: @tetrahedral to @@tetrahedral} 
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetrahedral}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tetrahedral}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetrahedral{\@ifnextchar[{\@tetrahedral[r}{\@tetrahedral[r]}}
+\def\@tetrahedral#1]#2{%
+\@ifnextchar<{\@@tetrahedral#1]{#2}}{\@@tetrahedral#1]{#2}<,,,>}}%bug @ added 2009/11/07
+\def\@@tetrahedral#1]#2<#3,#4,#5,#6>{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\yltetrahedralposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){tetrahedral}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{47}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%setting central atom%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tempdima=0pt
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%central atom
+\setbox9=\hbox{\@memberb}%
+\ifdim\wd9<0.72em
+\@tempdima=0.72em
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\hbox to.72em{\hss\@memberb\hss}}}%
+\else
+\ifWest@bond
+\@tempdima=\wd9
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\hbox to.72em{\hss\@memberb}}}%central atom
+%%%\global\West@bondfalse
+\else
+\@tempdima=\wd9
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\hbox to.72em{\@memberb\hss}}}%central atom
+\fi\fi
+\else%%no action
+\fi%end of ifcase%
+\fi\fi}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%setting four bonds%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+\or
+\ifWest@bond
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\Northbond[#3]}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\Northbond[#3]}%
+\else
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Northbond[#3]}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Northbond[#3]}%
+\fi
+\or{%
+\ifWest@bond
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\Westbond[#4]}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\Westbond[#4]}%
+\else
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Westbond[#4]}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Westbond[#4]}%
+\fi
+}%
+\or
+\ifWest@bond
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\Southbond[#5]}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\Southbond[#5]}%
+\else
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Southbond[#5]}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Southbond[#5]}%
+\fi
+\or{%
+\ifno@centeratom%
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Eastbond[#6]}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Eastbond[#6]}%
+\else%
+%\advance\@tempdima by-0.72em
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern\@tempdima\Eastbond[#6]}%
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern\@tempdima\kern-0.72em\Eastbond[#6]}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern\@tempdima\kern-0.72em\Eastbond[#6]}%
+\fi}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+}%end of macro tetrahedral
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Newly added macro: 
+% \cs{centralatomcheck}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\centralatomcheck}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\centralatomcheck#1{%
+\no@centeratomtrue%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax%
+\no@centeratomfalse%
+\else%no action
+\fi\fi%
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\yltetrahedralposition| is used in 
+% |\tetrahedral| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{yltetrahedralposition}}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Newly added switches: 
+% \cs{ifEast@bond} and \cs{ifWest@bond}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/7/30}{Bug fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yltetrahedralposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifEast@bond
+\newif\ifWest@bond
+\def\yltetrahedralposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\reset@@yl%%2013/07/30bug fix
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or%
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+  \else%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-52}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+  \fi%
+ \or%
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else%
+    \gdef\@ylii{52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi%
+  \East@bondtrue%W subst. on 1
+ \or% 
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%S subst. on 1
+  \else%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{52}\global\@ylswtrue%S subst. on 1
+  \fi%
+ \or% 
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+%   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%??????
+   \gdef\@ylii{-72}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%??????
+  \else%
+   \gdef\@ylii{-52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi%
+     \West@bondtrue%E subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Divalenth unit}
+%
+% The command |\divalenth| produces a length-variable divalent unit.
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/14}{New command: \cs{divalenth}} 
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring} 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ******************
+% * Divalenth unit *
+% ******************
+%
+%               
+%
+%          1  -- (group) --  2       0 <== the original point
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |GROUP|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \divalenth{GROUP}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |GROUP| designates a character strings representing 
+% a divalent group.  The locant number is fixed to be zero. 
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\divalenth}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\divalenth#1#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\yldivalenthposition{#1}{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,400)(-300,-200){\divalenth}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,200)%
+{\expandafter\@m@mb@r#1;\relax
+   \putratom{-30}{-33}{\@memberb}}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Westbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Westbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcnta,0){\Eastbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcnta,0){\Eastbond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%end of macro tetrahedral
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\yldivalenthposition| is used in 
+% |\tetrahedral| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/14}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{yldivalenthposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yldivalenthposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\yldivalenthposition#1#2{%
+{\expandafter\@m@mb@r#1;\relax
+   \setbox0=\hbox{\@memberb}%
+   \@tempcnta=\wd0
+   \@tempcntb=\unitlength
+   \divide\@tempcnta by\@tempcntb
+   \global\advance\@tempcnta by-62%
+   \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta \global\advance\@tempcntb by50\relax
+   }%
+\@@ylswfalse%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+ \or \edef\@ylii{-\the\@tempcntb}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%E subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Trigonal unit}
+% \subsection{Right-hand trigonal unit (narrow type)}
+%
+% The macro |\rtrigonal| typesets a compound of trivalency. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+% The two right-hand bonds form an angle of 90$^{\circ}$ (narrow type), 
+% while the left-hand bond is typeset horizontally.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************
+% * trigonal unit (right) *
+% *************************
+%
+%                      3
+%                    /
+%                  /
+%         1  --- 0  90      0 <== the original point
+%                 `
+%                   `
+%                     2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \rtrigonal[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%       {0+}:  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \rtrigonal{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \rtrigonal{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylrtrigonalposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtrigonal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@rtrigonal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtrigonal{\@ifnextchar[{\@rtrigonal[r}{\@rtrigonal[r]}}
+\def\@rtrigonal#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+\ylrtrigonalposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){rtrigonal}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Westbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Westbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEbond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro rtrigonal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylrtrigonalposition| is used in 
+% |\rtrigonal| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylrtrigonalposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylrtrigonalposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylrtrigonalposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% W subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SE subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NE subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Right-hand trigonal unit (broad type)}
+%
+% The macro |\Rtrigonal| typesets a compound of trivalency. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+% The two right-hand bonds form an angle of 120$^{\circ}$ (broad type), 
+% while the left-hand bond is typeset horizontally.  
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{New command: \cs{Rtrigonal}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************
+% * trigonal unit (right) *
+% *************************
+%
+%                      3
+%                    /
+%                  /
+%         1  --- 0  120      0 <== the original point
+%                 `
+%                   `
+%                     2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \rtrigonal[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%       {0+}:  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \rtrigonal{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \rtrigonal{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylRtrigonalposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Rtrigonal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Rtrigonal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Rtrigonal{\@ifnextchar[{\@Rtrigonal[r}{\@Rtrigonal[r]}}
+\def\@Rtrigonal#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+\ylRtrigonalposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){Rtrigonal}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Westbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Westbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEBOND}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEBOND}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEBOND}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEBOND}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro Rtrigonal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylRtrigonalposition| is used in 
+% |\Rtrigonal| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylRtrigonalposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylRtrigonalposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylRtrigonalposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% W subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-47}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% SE subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-47}\gdef\@yli{-40}\global\@ylswtrue% NE subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Left-hand trigonal unit (narrow type)}
+%
+% The macro |\ltrigonal| typesets a compound of trivalency. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+% The two left-hand bonds form an angle of 90$^{\circ}$ (narrow type), 
+% while the right-hand bond is typeset horizontally.  
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************
+% * trigonal unit (left) *
+% ************************
+%
+%         2
+%           ` 
+%             `
+%          90   0 --- 1       0 <== the original point
+%             /
+%           /
+%         3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \ltrigonal[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%      {0+} :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \ltrigonal{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \ltrigonal{0==C;1==Cl;2==F;3==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylltrigonalposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Variable sized central atoms} 
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ltrigonal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ltrigonal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltrigonal{\@ifnextchar[{\@ltrigonal[r}{\@ltrigonal[r]}}
+\def\@ltrigonal#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+\ylltrigonalposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){ltrigonal}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+\@tempdima=0pt
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+\setbox9=\hbox{\@memberb}%
+\ifdim\wd9<0.72em
+\@tempdima=0.72em
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\hbox to.72em{\hss\@memberb\hss}}}%central atom
+\else
+\ifWest@bond
+\@tempdima=\wd9
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\hbox to.72em{\hss\@memberb}}}%central atom
+\else
+\@tempdima=\wd9
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\hbox to.72em{\@memberb\hss}}}%central atom
+\fi\fi
+\else%%no action
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+\or{%
+\advance\@tempdima by-0.72em
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern\@tempdima\Eastbond}}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern\@tempdima\Eastbond}}%
+\or{%
+\ifWest@bond
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\NWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\NWbond}%
+\else
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWbond}%
+\fi
+}%
+\or{%
+\ifWest@bond
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\SWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\SWbond}%
+\else
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}%
+\fi
+}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+\endgroup}%end of macro ltrigonal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylltrigonalposition| is used in 
+% |\ltrigonal| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylltrigonalposition}}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Newly added switch: 
+% \cs{ifWest@bond}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylltrigonalposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylltrigonalposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% E subst. on 1
+      \West@bondtrue%
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NW subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SW subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Left-hand trigonal unit (broad type)}
+%
+% The macro |\Ltrigonal| typesets a compound of trivalency. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+% The two left-hand bonds form an angle of 120$^{\circ}$ (broad type), 
+% while the right-hand bond is typeset horizontally.  
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{New command: \cs{Ltrigonal}}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************
+% * trigonal unit (left) *
+% ************************
+%
+%         2
+%           ` 
+%             `
+%         120   0 --- 1       0 <== the original point
+%             /
+%           /
+%         3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \Ltrigonal[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%      {0+} :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \Ltrigonal{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \Ltrigonal{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylLtrigonalposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Variable sized central atoms} 
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/8/30}{Newly added switch: 
+% \cs{ifWest@bond}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Ltrigonal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Ltrigonal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Ltrigonal{\@ifnextchar[{\@Ltrigonal[r}{\@Ltrigonal[r]}}
+\def\@Ltrigonal#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+\ylLtrigonalposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){Ltrigonal}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+\@tempdima=0pt
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+\setbox9=\hbox{\@memberb}%
+\ifdim\wd9<0.72em
+\@tempdima=0.72em
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\hbox to.72em{\hss\@memberb\hss}}}%central atom
+\else
+\ifWest@bond
+\@tempdima=\wd9
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\hbox to.72em{\hss\@memberb}}}%central atom
+%%%%\global\West@bondfalse
+\else
+\@tempdima=\wd9
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\hbox to.72em{\@memberb\hss}}}%central atom
+\fi\fi
+\else%%no action
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+\or{%
+\advance\@tempdima by-0.72em
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern\@tempdima\Eastbond}}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern\@tempdima\Eastbond}}%
+\or{%
+\ifWest@bond
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\NWBOND}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\NWBOND}%
+\else
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWBOND}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWBOND}%
+\fi
+}%
+\or{%
+\ifWest@bond
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\SWBOND}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\kern-\@tempdima\kern0.72em\SWBOND}%
+\else
+\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWBOND}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWBOND}%
+\fi
+}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+\endgroup}%end of macro Ltrigonal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylLtrigonalposition| is used in 
+% |\Ltrigonal| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylLtrigonalposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylLtrigonalposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylLtrigonalposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% E subst. on 1
+     \West@bondtrue%
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{47}\gdef\@yli{-40}\global\@ylswtrue% NWB subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{47}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% SWB subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Upward trigonal unit (narrow type)}
+%
+% The macro |\utrigonal| typesets a compound of trivalency. 
+% The two upward bonds form an angle of 90$^{\circ}$ (narrow type), 
+% while the downward bond is typeset vertically.  
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************
+% * trigonal unit (up) *
+% **********************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%         3       .   2
+%           `   90  /
+%             `   /
+%               0        0 <== the original point
+%               |
+%               |
+%               1
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \utrigonal[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%      {0+}:  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \utrigonal{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \utrigonal{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylutrigonalposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\utrigonal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@utrigonal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\utrigonal{\@ifnextchar[{\@utrigonal[r}{\@utrigonal[r]}}
+\def\@utrigonal#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%2013/04/01 added 
+\ylutrigonalposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){utrigonal}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Southbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Southbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWbond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro utrigonal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylutrigonalposition| is used in 
+% |\utrigonal| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylutrigonalposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylutrigonalposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylutrigonalposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{52}\global\@ylswtrue%S subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NE subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NW subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Upward trigonal unit (broad type)}
+%
+% The macro |\Utrigonal| typesets a compound of trivalency. 
+% The two upward bonds form an angle of 120$^{\circ}$ (broad type), 
+% while the downward bond is typeset vertically.  
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************
+% * trigonal unit (up) *
+% **********************
+%
+%         3           2
+%           `  120  /
+%             `   /
+%               0        0 <== the original point
+%               |
+%               |
+%               1
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \Utrigonal[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%     {0+}:  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \Utrigonal{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \Utrigonal{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylutrigonalposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Utrigonal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Utrigonal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Utrigonal{\@ifnextchar[{\@Utrigonal[r}{\@Utrigonal[r]}}
+\def\@Utrigonal#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylUtrigonalposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){Utrigonal}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Southbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Southbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEBond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEBond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWBond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWBond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro Utrigonal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylUtrigonalposition| is used in 
+% |\Utrigonal| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylUtrigonalposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylUtrigonalposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylUtrigonalposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{52}\global\@ylswtrue%S subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NEB subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{66}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NWB subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Downward trigonal unit (narrow type)}
+%
+% The macro |\dtrigonal| typesets a compound of trivalency. 
+% The upward bond is typeset vertically.  
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************
+% * trigonal unit (down) *
+% ************************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                1
+%                |
+%                |
+%                0       0 <== the original point
+%              /  `
+%            /  90  `
+%          2          3
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \dtrigonal[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%     {0+} :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \dtrigonal{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \dtrigonal{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yldtrigonalposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dtrigonal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dtrigonal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dtrigonal{\@ifnextchar[{\@dtrigonal[r}{\@dtrigonal[r]}}
+\def\@dtrigonal#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\yldtrigonalposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){dtrigonal}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{37}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Northbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Northbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro dtrigonal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\yldtrigonalposition| is used in 
+% |\dtrigonal| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{yldtrigonalposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yldtrigonalposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\yldtrigonalposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-52}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SE subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SW subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Downward trigonal unit (broad type)}
+%
+% The macro |\Dtrigonal| typesets a compound of trivalency. 
+% The upward bond is typeset vertically.  
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************
+% * trigonal unit (down) *
+% ************************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                1
+%                |
+%                |
+%                0       0 <== the original point
+%              /  `
+%            /  120 `
+%          2          3
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \Dtrigonal[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%     {0+}:  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \Dtrigonal{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \Dtrigonal{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylDtrigonalposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Dtrigonal}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Dtrigonal}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Dtrigonal{\@ifnextchar[{\@Dtrigonal[r}{\@Dtrigonal[r]}}
+\def\@Dtrigonal#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylDtrigonalposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){Dtrigonal}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{37}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+{\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Northbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\Northbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEBond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEBond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWBond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWBond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro Dtrigonal
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylDtrigonalposition| is used in 
+% |\Dtrigonal| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylDtrigonalposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylDtrigonalposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylDtrigonalposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-52}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SEB subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{66}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SWB subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Ethylene derivative}
+% \subsection{Horizontal ethylene unit (narrow type)}
+%
+% The macro |\ethylene| typesets ethylene derivatives. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *****************
+% * ethylene unit *
+% *****************
+%
+%         1                4
+%           `            /
+%             `        /
+%          90  (1)===(2) 90     (1) <== the original point
+%             /        `
+%           /            `
+%         2                3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \ethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |BONDLIST| designates the bond between atom (1) and 
+% atom (2) as well as charges on these centeral atoms.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner bonds and charges
+%
+%           {n+}       :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on n-atom
+%             d        :  inner double bond (between (1) and (2))
+%             t        :  inner triple bond (between (1) and (2))
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |ATOMLIST| designates the list of central atoms. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of central atoms
+%           n          :  atom for n-position (e.g. 1==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \ethylene{}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \ethylene{}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylethylenepositiona}, 
+% \cs{ylethylenepositionb}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ethylene}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ethylene{\@ifnextchar[{\@ethylene}{\@ethylene[]}}
+\def\@ethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylethylenepositiona{#3}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylethylenepositionb{#3}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-230}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,600)(-300,-300){ethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+{\def\aaa{#1}\ifx\aaa\empty%
+% \Multiput@Direct(42,-13)(0,25){2}{\line(1,0){140}}\fi% double bond
+ \Multiput@Direct(42,-13)(0,25){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}}\fi%2010/10/01
+}%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+ \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 1\relax {\putratom{-27}{60}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}%
+   \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax {\putratom{203}{60}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}%
+   \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+%       {\Multiput@Direct(42,-13)(0,25){2}{\line(1,0){140}}}% double bond
+       {\Multiput@Direct(42,-13)(0,25){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}}}%2010/10/01
+   \else\if\@@tmpa t\relax%
+%     {\Multiput@Direct(42,-20)(0,20){3}{\line(1,0){140}}}% triple bond right
+     {\Multiput@Direct(42,-20)(0,20){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}}}%2010/10/01
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+{\def\aaa{#2}%
+\ifx\aaa\empty%
+\putratom{-40}{-33}{C}%central atom
+\putratom{190}{-33}{C}%central atom
+\else%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\or\putratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or\putratom{190}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\fi\fi}%end of ifcase
+\fi%
+}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#3\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(230,0){\SEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(230,0){\SEbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(230,0){\NEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(230,0){\NEbond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%end of macro ethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ethyleneh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ethyleneh=\ethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The commands |\ylethylenepositiona| and |\ylethylenepositiona| 
+% are  used in |\ethylene| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylethylenepositiona} and \cs{ylethylenepositionb}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylethylenepositiona}
+% \begin{macro}{\ylethylenepositionb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylethylenepositiona#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NW subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SW subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\def\ylethylenepositionb#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or%omit 
+ \or%omit
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SE subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NE subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal ethylene unit (broad type)}
+%
+% The macro |\Ethylene| typesets ethylene derivatives. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{New command: \cs{Ethylene}}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *****************
+% * ethylene unit *
+% *****************
+%
+%         1                4
+%           `            /
+%             `        /
+%         120  (1)===(2) 120     (1) <== the original point
+%             /        `
+%           /            `
+%         2                3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \Ethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |BONDLIST| designates the bond between atom (1) and 
+% atom (2) as well as charges on these centeral atoms.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner bonds and charges
+%
+%           {n+}       :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on n-atom
+%             d        :  inner double bond (between (1) and (2))
+%             t        :  inner triple bond (between (1) and (2))
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |SUBLIST| designates a set of substitutients. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |ATOMLIST| designates the list of central atoms. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of central atoms
+%           n          :  atom for n-position (e.g. 1==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \Ethylene{}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \Ethylene{}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylethylenepositiona}, 
+% \cs{ylethylenepositionb}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Ethylene}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Ethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Ethylene{\@ifnextchar[{\@Ethylene}{\@Ethylene[]}}%bug \@ethylene --> \@Ethylene
+\def\@Ethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylethylenepositiona{#3}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylethylenepositionb{#3}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-230}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,600)(-300,-300){Ethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+{\def\aaa{#1}\ifx\aaa\empty%
+% \Multiput@Direct(42,-13)(0,25){2}{\line(1,0){140}}\fi% double bond
+ \Multiput@Direct(42,-13)(0,25){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}}\fi%2010/10/01
+}%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+ \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 1\relax {\putratom{-27}{60}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}%
+   \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax {\putratom{203}{60}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}%
+   \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+%       {\Multiput@Direct(42,-13)(0,25){2}{\line(1,0){140}}}% double bond
+       {\Multiput@Direct(42,-13)(0,25){2}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}}}%2010/10/01
+   \else\if\@@tmpa t\relax%
+%     {\Multiput@Direct(42,-20)(0,20){3}{\line(1,0){140}}}% triple bond right
+     {\Multiput@Direct(42,-20)(0,20){3}{\Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}}}%2010/10/01
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+{\def\aaa{#2}%
+\ifx\aaa\empty%
+\putratom{-40}{-33}{C}%central atom
+\putratom{190}{-33}{C}%central atom
+\else%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\or\putratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or\putratom{190}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\fi\fi}%end of ifcase
+\fi%
+}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#3\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWBOND}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWBOND}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWBOND}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWBOND}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(230,0){\SEBOND}}%
+%\Put@Direct(230,0){\SEBOND}%
+\or\Put@Direct(230,0){\NEBOND}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%end of macro Ethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Ethyleneh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\Ethyleneh=\Ethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical ethylene unit (narrow type)}
+%
+% The macro |\ethylenev| typesets ethylene derivatives in a 
+% vatical manner. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * ethylene unit (vertical) *
+% ****************************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%         4          3
+%           `  90  /
+%             `  /
+%              (2)
+%               ||
+%               ||
+%              (1)  <== the original point
+%             /  `
+%           /  90 `
+%         1         2
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \ethylenev[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner bonds and charges
+%
+%           {n+}  :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on n-atom
+%             d   :  inner double bond (between (1) and (2))
+%             t   :  inner triple bond (between (1) and (2))
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of central atoms
+%           n          :  atom for n-position (e.g. 1==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \ethylenev{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \ethylenev{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylethylenevpositiona}, 
+% \cs{ylethylenevpositionb}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ethylenev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ethylenev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ethylenev{\@ifnextchar[{\@ethylenev}{\@ethylenev[]}}
+\def\@ethylenev[#1]#2#3{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylethylenevpositiona{#3}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylethylenevpositionb{#3}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{-230}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,800)(-300,-300){ethylenev}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\def\aaa{#1}\ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-20,47)(0,1){140}% vertical
+    \Put@Line(6,47)(0,1){140}\fi%  double bond
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+ \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 1\relax \putratom{37}{0}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}
+   \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax \putratom{37}{216}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}
+   \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+      \Put@Line(-13,47)(0,1){140}% vertical
+      \Put@Line(13,47)(0,1){140}%  double bond
+   \else\if\@@tmpa t\relax%
+      \Put@Line(-20,47)(0,1){140}% vertical
+      \Put@Line(-0,47)(0,1){140}%   triple bond
+      \Put@Line(20,47)(0,1){140}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\def\aaa{#2}%
+\ifx\aaa\empty%
+\putratom{-40}{-33}{C}%central atom
+\putratom{-40}{197}{C}%central atom
+\else%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\or\putratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or\putratom{-40}{197}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\fi\fi}%end of ifcase
+\fi% 
+\@forsemicol\member:=#3\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,230){\NEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,230){\NEbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,230){\NWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,230){\NWbond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%end of macro ethylenev
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The commands |\ylethylenevpositiona| and |\ylethylenevpositiona| 
+% are  used in |\ethylenev| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylethylenevpositiona} and \cs{ylethylenevpositionb}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylethylenepositiona}
+% \begin{macro}{\ylethylenepositionb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylethylenevpositiona#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SW subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SE subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\def\ylethylenevpositionb#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or%omit 
+ \or%omit
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NE subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NW subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical ethylene unit (broad type)}
+%
+% The macro |\Ethylenev| typesets ethylene derivatives in a 
+% vatical manner. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * ethylene unit (vertical) *
+% ****************************
+%
+%         4          3
+%           `  120 /
+%             `  /
+%              (2)
+%               ||
+%               ||
+%              (1)  <== the original point
+%             /  `
+%           /  120 `
+%         1          2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \Ethylenev[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner bonds and charges
+%
+%           {n+} :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on n-atom
+%             d  :  inner double bond (between (1) and (2))
+%             t  :  inner triple bond (between (1) and (2))
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of central atoms
+%           n          :  atom for n-position (e.g. 1==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \Ethylenev{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \Ethylenev{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylethylenevpositiona}, 
+% \cs{ylethylenevpositionb}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Ethylenev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Ethylenev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Ethylenev{\@ifnextchar[{\@Ethylenev}{\@Ethylenev[]}}
+\def\@Ethylenev[#1]#2#3{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylethylenevpositiona{#3}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylethylenevpositionb{#3}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{-230}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,800)(-300,-300){Ethylenev}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\def\aaa{#1}\ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-20,47)(0,1){140}% vertical
+    \Put@Line(6,47)(0,1){140}\fi%  double bond
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+ \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 1\relax \putratom{37}{0}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}
+   \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax \putratom{37}{216}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}
+   \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+      \Put@Line(-13,47)(0,1){140}% vertical
+      \Put@Line(13,47)(0,1){140}%   double bond
+   \else\if\@@tmpa t\relax%
+      \Put@Line(-20,47)(0,1){140}% vertical
+      \Put@Line(-0,47)(0,1){140}%   triple bond
+      \Put@Line(20,47)(0,1){140}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\def\aaa{#2}%
+\ifx\aaa\empty%
+\putratom{-40}{-33}{C}%central atom
+\putratom{-40}{197}{C}%central atom
+\else%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\or\putratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or\putratom{-40}{197}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\fi\fi}%end of ifcase
+\fi% 
+\@forsemicol\member:=#3\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWBond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWBond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEBond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEBond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,230){\NEBond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,230){\NEBond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,230){\NWBond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,230){\NWBond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%end of macro Ethylenev
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Square unit}
+%
+% The macro |\square| typesets a compound of tetravalency. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% Because |\square| is defined in the present LaTeX2e, 
+% the command |\squarecomplex| is newly defined. 
+%
+% \changes{v4.02a}{2004/12/27}{Bug fix: \cs{square} to \cs{squarecomplex}}
+% 
+% The command |\square| is renamed to be |\squareplanar|. The code is entirely replaced. 
+%
+% \changes{v4.05}{2009/11/08}{Bug fix: \cs{square} to \cs{squareplanar}}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***************
+% * square unit *
+% ***************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%         4          1
+%           `      /
+%             `  /
+%              (0)  <== the original point
+%             /  `
+%           /     `
+%         3         2
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \squareplanar[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%     {0+}:  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \squareplanar{0==C;1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \squareplanar{0==C;1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylsquareposition}, 
+% \cs{if@ylsw}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\squareplanar}
+% \begin{macro}{\@squareplanar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\squareplanar{\@ifnextchar[{\@squareplanar[r}{\@squareplanar[r]}}
+\def\@squareplanar#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylsquareposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){square}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{37}{0}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NEbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SEbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\SWbond}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWbond}}%
+%\Put@Direct(0,0){\NWbond}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%end of macro squareplanar
+\let\squarecomplex=\squareplanar
+\let\square=\squarplanar%combatible to the old version (<4.04)
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The commands |\ylsquarepositiona| and |\ylsquarepositiona| 
+% are  used in |\square| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command: \cs{ylsquareposition}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/07/30}{Bug fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylsquareposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylsquareposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\reset@@yl%%2013/07/30bug fix
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NE subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SE subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SW subst. on 1
+ \or \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NW subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Ball-stick models}
+% \subsection{Tetrahedral unit of stereo type}
+%
+% The macro |\tetrastereo| typesets a tetrahedral unit in a 
+% ball-stick fashion. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *****************************
+% * tetrahedral unit (stereo) *
+% *****************************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                1
+%
+%                |
+%          2  -- 0 --  4       0 <== the original point
+%                |
+%
+%                3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \tetrastereo[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%     {0+} :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           n          :  single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \tetrastereo{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \tetrastereo{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetrastereo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tetrastero}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetrastereo{\@ifnextchar[{\@tetrastereo[r}{\@tetrastereo[r]}}
+\def\@tetrastereo#1]#2{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(600,600)(-300,-300)
+  \OrigptOutput(300,300){tetrastereo}
+\Put@oCircle(0,0){200}%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax \putratom{87}{90}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}\fi}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa \putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(0,100)(0,1){70}}% behind 
+%   \Put@Line(0,100)(0,1){70}% behind 
+   \putlratom{-30}{180}{\@memberb}%   and up
+\or%
+  {\thicklines%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(-60,10)(-5,2){140}}%   in front
+%   \Put@Line(-60,10)(-5,2){140}%   in front
+   \putlatom{-205}{30}{\@memberb}}%  and left
+\or%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(0,-100)(0,-1){90}}%     behind and
+%   \Put@Line(0,-100)(0,-1){90}%     behind and
+   \putlratom{-30}{-260}{\@memberb}% down
+\or%
+  {\thicklines%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(60,10)(5,2){140}}%     in front
+%   \Put@Line(60,10)(5,2){140}%     in front
+   \putratom{210}{30}{\@memberb}}%   and right
+\fi\fi}%end of ifcase
+\end{sfpicture}}%end of macro tetrastereo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Tetrahedral unit of inverse stereo type}
+%
+% The macro |\dtetrastereo| typesets another tetrahedral unit in a 
+% ball-stick fashion. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *****************************
+% * tetrahedral unit (stereo) *
+% *****************************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                1
+%
+%                |
+%          2  -- 0 --  4       0 <== the original point
+%                |
+%
+%                3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \dtetrastereo[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%     {0+} :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           n          :  single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \dtetrastereo{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \dtetrastereo{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dtetrastereo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dtetrastereo}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dtetrastereo{\@ifnextchar[{\@dtetrastereo[r}{\@dtetrastereo[r]}}
+\def\@dtetrastereo#1]#2{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(600,600)(-300,-300)
+  \OrigptOutput(300,300){dtetrastereo}
+\Put@oCircle(0,0){200}%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax \putratom{87}{90}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}\fi}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa \putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(0,100)(0,1){70}}% behind 
+%   \Put@Line(0,100)(0,1){70}% behind 
+   \putlratom{-30}{180}{\@memberb}%   and up
+\or%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(-94,-10)(-5,-2){108}}%   in back
+%   \Put@Line(-94,-10)(-5,-2){108}%   in back
+   \putlatom{-205}{-110}{\@memberb}%  and left
+\or%
+  {\thicklines%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(0,-50)(0,-1){150}}%     behind and
+%   \Put@Line(0,-50)(0,-1){150}%     behind and
+   \putlratom{-30}{-260}{\@memberb}}% down
+\or%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(94,-10)(5,-2){108}}%     in back
+%   \Put@Line(94,-10)(5,-2){108}%     in back
+   \putratom{210}{-110}{\@memberb}%   and right
+\fi\fi}%end of ifcase
+\end{sfpicture}}%end of macro dtetrastereo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Ethane unit of stereo type}
+%
+% The macro |\ethanestereo| typesets an ethane molecule in a 
+% ball-stick fashion. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************
+% * ethane unit (vertical) *
+% **************************
+%
+%               5
+%               |
+%        6 --  (2) -- 4
+%               |
+%               |
+%        1 --  (1) -- 3 <== the original point
+%               |
+%               2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \ethanestereo[AUXLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST: list of charges
+%
+%     {n+}   :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          :  single bond at n-atom
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of central atoms
+%
+%           n          :  atom for n-position (e.g. 1==C)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \ethanestereo{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \ethanestereo{1==C;2==C}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ethanestereo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ethanestereo}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ethanestereo{\@ifnextchar[{\@ethanestereo}{\@ethanestereo[]}}
+\def\@ethanestereo[#1]#2#3{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(600,800)(-300,-300)
+  \OrigptOutput(300,300){ethanestereo}
+\Put@oCircle(0,0){200}%
+\Put@oCircle(0,270){200}%
+\Put@Line(0,100)(0,1){70}% central bond
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+ \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 1\relax \putratom{87}{90}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}
+   \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax \putratom{87}{360}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}
+   \fi\fi}%
+\def\aaa{#2}%
+\ifx\aaa\empty\else%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\or\putratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or\putratom{-40}{237}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\fi\fi}%end of ifcase
+\fi% 
+\@forsemicol\member:=#3\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa \putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(-94,-10)(-5,-2){108}}%   in back
+%   \Put@Line(-94,-10)(-5,-2){108}%   in back
+   \putlatom{-205}{-110}{\@memberb}%  and left
+\or%
+  {\thicklines%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(0,-50)(0,-1){150}}%     behind and
+%   \Put@Line(0,-50)(0,-1){150}%     behind and
+   \putlratom{-30}{-260}{\@memberb}}% down
+\or%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(94,-10)(5,-2){108}}%     in back
+%   \Put@Line(94,-10)(5,-2){108}%     in back
+   \putratom{210}{-110}{\@memberb}%   and right
+% %%%%%%%%
+\or%
+  {\thicklines%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(60,280)(5,2){140}}%     in front
+%   \Put@Line(60,280)(5,2){140}%     in front
+   \putratom{210}{300}{\@memberb}}%   and right
+\or%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(0,370)(0,1){70}}% behind 
+%   \Put@Line(0,370)(0,1){70}% behind 
+   \putlratom{-30}{450}{\@memberb}%   and up
+\or%
+  {\thicklines%
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Line(-60,280)(-5,2){140}}%   in front
+%   \Put@Line(-60,280)(-5,2){140}%   in front
+   \putlatom{-205}{300}{\@memberb}}%  and left
+\fi\fi}%end of ifcase
+\end{sfpicture}}%end of macro ethanestereo
+%</aliphat>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%<*aliphat>
+% \section{Wedged bonds for stereochemistry}
+% \subsection{Various tetrahedral units with wedged bonds}
+%
+% The macros |\rtetrahedralS| etc. typesets tetrahedral units weith bold wedged
+% bonds.  The following modes of numbering are adopted in these macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************************
+% * tetrahedral units with wedged bonds *
+% **************************************
+%
+%
+%                2
+%
+%                /
+%          1 -- 0        0 <== the original point
+%                | |
+%                3 4
+%                        1,2,3,4 <== substituents 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  This macro has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |AUXLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \rtetrahedralS[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \RtetrahedralS[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \ltetrahedralS[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \LtetrahedralS[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \utetrahedralS[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \UtetrahedralS[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \dtetrahedralS[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \DtetrahedralS[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \htetrahedralS[AUXLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The arugument |AUXLIST| designates an character on the central 
+% atom of the formula drawn by this macro.  It can be used a plus 
+% or minus charge on the center.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%     {0+} :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           n          :  single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 0          :  cetral atom (e.g. 0==C)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rtetrahedralS}
+% \begin{macro}{\@rtetrahedralS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtetrahedralS{\@ifnextchar[{\@rtetrahedralS[r}{\@rtetrahedralS[r]}}
+\def\@rtetrahedralS#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\ylrtetrahedralSposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){rtetrahedralS}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondh}%1 (-1,0)
+%\setatombondh%1 (-1,0)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondF}%2 (3,5)
+%\setatombondF%2 (3,5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombonde}%3  (5,-3)
+%\setatombonde%3  (5,-3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondE}%4 (3,-5)
+%\setatombondE%4 (3,-5)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro rtetrahedralS
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The command |\ylrtetrahedralSposition| is used in 
+% |\rtetrahedralS| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylrtetrahedralSposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylrtetrahedralSposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylrtetrahedralSposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{20}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-20}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltetrahedralS}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ltetrahedralS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltetrahedralS{\@ifnextchar[{\@ltetrahedralS[r}{\@ltetrahedralS[r]}}
+\def\@ltetrahedralS#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\ylltetrahedralSposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){ltetrahedralS}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondb}%1 (1,0)
+%\setatombondb%1 (1,0)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondD}%2 (-3,5)
+%\setatombondD%2 (-3,5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondg}%3 (-5,-3)
+%\setatombondg%3 (-5,-3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondG}%4 (-3,-5)
+%\setatombondG%4 (-3,-5)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro ltetrahedralS
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The command |\ylltetrahedralSposition| is used in 
+% |\ltetrahedralS| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylltetrahedralSposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylltetrahedralSposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylltetrahedralSposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{20}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{20}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\dtetrahedralS}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dtetrahedralS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dtetrahedralS{\@ifnextchar[{\@dtetrahedralS[r}{\@dtetrahedralS[r]}}
+\def\@dtetrahedralS#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\yldtetrahedralSposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){dtetrahedralS}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombonda}%1 (0,1)
+%\setatombonda%1 (0,1)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombonde}%5 (5,-3)
+%\setatombonde%5 (5,-3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondg}%3 (-5,-3)
+%\setatombondg%3 (-5,-3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondG}%4 (-3,-5)
+%\setatombondG%4 (-3,-5)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro dtetrahedralS
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\yldtetrahedralSposition| is used in 
+% |\dtetrahedralS| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{yldtetrahedralSposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yldtetrahedralSposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\yldtetrahedralSposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 2
+  \else
+%   \gdef\@ylii{-52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 2
+   \gdef\@ylii{-42}\gdef\@yli{20}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{20}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{20}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\DtetrahedralS}
+% \begin{macro}{\@DtetrahedralS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DtetrahedralS{\@ifnextchar[{\@DtetrahedralS[r}{\@DtetrahedralS[r]}}
+\def\@DtetrahedralS#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\ylDtetrahedralSposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){DtetrahedralS}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombonda}%1 (0,1)
+%\setatombonda%1 (0,1)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondg}%5 (-5,-3)
+%\setatombondg%5 (-5,-3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombonde}%3  (5,-3)
+%\setatombonde%3  (5,-3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondE}%4 (3,-5)
+%\setatombondE%4 (3,-5)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro DtetrahedralS
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylDtetrahedralSposition| is used in 
+% |\DtetrahedralS| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylDtetrahedralSposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylDtetrahedralSposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylDtetrahedralSposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{20}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{20}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-20}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\utetrahedralS}
+% \begin{macro}{\@utetrahedralS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\utetrahedralS{\@ifnextchar[{\@utetrahedralS[r}{\@utetrahedralS[r]}}
+\def\@utetrahedralS#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\ylutetrahedralSposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){utetrahedralS}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondc}%8 (0,-1)
+%\setatombondc%8 (0,-1)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondf}%3 (5,3)
+%\setatombondf%3 (5,3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondD}%1 (-3,5)
+%\setatombondD%1 (-3,5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondd}%3 (-5,3)
+%\setatombondd%3 (-5,3)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro utetrahedralS
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylutetrahedralSposition| is used in 
+% |\utetrahedralS| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylutetrahedralSposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylutetrahedralSposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylutetrahedralSposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-42}\gdef\@yli{-20}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{20}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-20}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\UtetrahedralS}
+% \begin{macro}{\@UtetrahedralS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UtetrahedralS{\@ifnextchar[{\@UtetrahedralS[r}{\@UtetrahedralS[r]}}
+\def\@UtetrahedralS#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\ylUtetrahedralSposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){UtetrahedralS}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondc}%1 (0,-1)
+%\setatombondc%1 (0,-1)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondd}%2 (-5,3)
+%\setatombondd%2 (-5,3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondF}%3 (3,5)
+%\setatombondF%3 (3,5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondf}%4 (5,3)
+%\setatombondf%4 (5,3)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro UtetrahedralS
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The command |\ylUtetrahedralSposition| is used in 
+% |\UtetrahedralS| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylUtetrahedralSposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylUtetrahedralSposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylUtetrahedralSposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-20}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-20}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-20}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\htetrahedralS}
+% \begin{macro}{\@htetrahedralS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\htetrahedralS{\@ifnextchar[{\@htetrahedralS[r}{\@htetrahedralS[r]}}
+\def\@htetrahedralS#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\ylhtetrahedralSposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){htetrahedralS}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondg}%5 (-5,-3)
+%\setatombondg%5 (-5,-3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombonde}%5 (5,-3)
+%\setatombonde%5 (5,-3)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondF}%1 (3,5)
+%\setatombondF%1 (3,5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondD}%1 (-3,5)
+%\setatombondD%1 (-3,5)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro htetrahedralS
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The command |\ylhtetrahedralSposition| is used in 
+% |\htetrahedralS| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylhtetrahedralSposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylhtetrahedralSposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylhtetrahedralSposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{30}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{30}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-20}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\RtetrahedralS}
+% \begin{macro}{\@RtetrahedralS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\RtetrahedralS{\@ifnextchar[{\@RtetrahedralS[r}{\@RtetrahedralS[r]}}
+\def\@RtetrahedralS#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\ylRtetrahedralSposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){RtetrahedralS}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or
+\setBScolor{\setatombondh}%1 (-1,0)
+%\setatombondh%1 (-1,0)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondE}%7 (3,-5)
+%\setatombondE%7 (3,-5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondF}%2 (3,5)
+%\setatombondF%2 (3,5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondf}%3 (5,3)
+%\setatombondf%3 (5,3)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro RtetrahedralS
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The command |\ylRtetrahedralSposition| is used in 
+% |\RtetrahedralS| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylRtetrahedralSposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylRtetrahedralSposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylRtetrahedralSposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-20}\gdef\@yli{-20}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\LtetrahedralS}
+% \begin{macro}{\@LtetrahedralS}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LtetrahedralS{\@ifnextchar[{\@LtetrahedralS[r}{\@LtetrahedralS[r]}}
+\def\@LtetrahedralS#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\ylLtetrahedralSposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){LtetrahedralS}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or
+\setBScolor{\setatombondb}%1 (1,0)
+%\setatombondb%1 (1,0)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondG}%2 (-3,-5)
+%\setatombondG%2 (-3,-5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondD}%3 (-3,5)
+%\setatombondD%3 (-3,5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondd}%4 (-5,3)
+%\setatombondd%4 (-5,3)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro LtetrahedralS
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The command |\ylLtetrahedralSposition| is used in 
+% |\LtetrahedralS| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylLtetrahedralSposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylLtetrahedralSposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylLtetrahedralSposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{20}\gdef\@yli{-20}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Trigonal bipyramidal uits for transition states}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\utrigpyramid}
+% \begin{macro}{\@utrigpyramid}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\utrigpyramid{\@ifnextchar[{\@utrigpyramid[r}{\@utrigpyramid[r]}}
+\def\@utrigpyramid#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\ylutrigpyramidposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){utrigpyramid}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondc}%1 (0,-1)
+%\setatombondc%1 (0,-1)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondF}%2 (3,5)
+%\setatombondF%2 (3,5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondD}%3 (-3,5)
+%\setatombondD%3 (-3,5)
+\or{\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline \setBScolor{\setatombondh}}%4 (-1,0)
+%{\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline \setatombondh}%4 (-1,0)
+\or{\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline \setBScolor{\setatombondb}}%5 (1,0)
+%{\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline \setatombondb}%5 (1,0)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro utrigpyramid
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylutrigpyramidposition| is used in 
+% |\utrigpyramid| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{ylutrigpyramidposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylutrigpyramidposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylutrigpyramidposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-20}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{20}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\dtrigpyramid}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dtrigpyramid}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dtrigpyramid{\@ifnextchar[{\@dtrigpyramid[r}{\@dtrigpyramid[r]}}
+\def\@dtrigpyramid#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\centralatomcheck{#2}%
+\ifno@centeratom\relax\@clipfusefalse\else\@clipfusetrue\fi%
+\yldtrigpyramidposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(600,600)(-300,-300){dtrigpyramid}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(300,300)%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \if\@@tmpa 0\relax {\putratom{-27}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}}\fi}%
+%set of bond and atoms
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa {\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}}%central atom
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombonda}%1 (0,1)
+%\setatombonda%1 (0,1)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondE}%2 (3,-5)
+%\setatombondE%2 (3,-5)
+\or\setBScolor{\setatombondG}%3 (-3,-5)
+%\setatombondG%3 (-3,-5)
+\or{\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline \setBScolor{\setatombondh}}%4 (-1,0)
+%{\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline \setatombondh}%4 (-1,0)
+\or{\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline \setBScolor{\setatombondb}}%5 (1,0)
+%{\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline \setatombondb}%5 (1,0)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+%\@clipfusefalse%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\endgroup}%end of macro dtrigpyramid
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The command |\yldtrigpyramidposition| is used in 
+% |\dtrigpyramid| to adjust a substitution position. 
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Newly added command: 
+% \cs{yldtrigpyramidposition}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yldtrigpyramidposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\yldtrigpyramidposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa\relax
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue%W subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-20}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{20}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi%
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%SE subst. on 3
+  \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%</aliphat>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/aliphat.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/aliphat.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..51a8d8c17b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/aliphat.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+\def\batchfile{aliphat.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996, 1998, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2009, 2010, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1996
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002
+Version 4.01 Released on August 30, 2004
+Version 4.02 Released on December 20, 2004
+Version 4.03 Released on July 20, 2005
+Version 4.05 Released on September 07, 2009
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+Version 5.01b Released on April 02, 2013
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.01 Released on July 20, 2013
+
+Copyright (C) 1996, 1998, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2009, 2010, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita, 
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files aliphat.dtx and aliphat.ins
+and the derived file aliphat.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{aliphat.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{aliphat.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{aliphat.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{aliphat.dtx}{aliphat}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/assurelatexmode.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/assurelatexmode.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cc8834aa14a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/assurelatexmode.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: assurelatexmode.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file (assurelatexmode.sty) is a successor to:
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files assurelatexmode.dtx and assurelatexmode.ins
+% and the derived file lewisstruc.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{assurelatexmode}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF}% Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{189}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{First release for XyMTeX5.00}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{assurelatexmode.dtx}[2010/10/01 v5.00 assurelatexmode package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{lewisstruc.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Dummy Declarations for assuring the \protect\TeX/\protect\LaTeX{} mode 
+by {\sffamily assurelatexmode.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and 
+Mathematical Chemistry \\
+Kanagawa, 258-0019 Japan 
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{assurelatexmode.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{assurelatexmode:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% assurelatexmode & assurelatexmode.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*assurelatexmode>
+\typeout{Part of XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.01}
+\typeout{       -- Released May 27, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{assurelatexmode}
+\def\versi@ndate{May 27, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{chemstr}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Dummy Declarations}
+% If a document written for the PostScript or PDF mode is processed by the TeX/LaTeX mode, 
+% some commands for the PS or PDF mode (defined in the \textsf{xymtx-ps} or \textsf{xymtx-pdf} 
+% package) cause errors of non-existence. To avoid these errors, 
+% dummy commands are defined as follows. These dummy commands are overwritten or replaced by 
+% equivalent commands when processed by the PS or PDF mode. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{changedashtowedge}
+% \begin{macro}{changewedgetodash}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{TeX/LaTeX, PS, and PDF modes: Switch for wedged bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@wedgesw \@wedgeswtrue
+\newif\if@hasheddashsw \@hasheddashswtrue
+\def\wedgehasheddash{\@wedgeswtrue\@hasheddashswtrue}
+\def\wedgehashedwedge{\@wedgeswtrue\@hasheddashswfalse}
+\def\dashhasheddash{\@wedgeswfalse\@hasheddashswtrue}
+\@ifundefined{ifmolfront}{\newif\ifmolfront \molfrontfalse}{}
+\@ifundefined{if@skbondlist}{\newif\if@skbondlist \@skbondlistfalse}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@thicklinesw etc.}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{TeX/LaTeX mode compatible to PS, and PDF modes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@thicklinesw \@thicklineswfalse
+\def\Thick@Lines{\@thicklineswtrue}%redefinition
+\def\Thin@Lines{\@thicklineswfalse}%redefinition
+\def\thickLineWidth{1.6pt}
+\def\thinLineWidth{0.4pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{WedgeAsSubst}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{TeX/LaTeX mode compatible to PS, and PDF modes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\WedgeAsSubstTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{%
+\begingroup
+\@thicklineswtrue \@wedgeswtrue
+\molfrontfalse \@skbondlistfalse
+\leavevmode
+\Put@@Line(#1,#2)(#3,#4){#5}%
+\endgroup}
+\let\WedgeAsSubst=\WedgeAsSubstTeXLaTeX%for compatibility to PS/PDF mode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\WedgeAsSubstX| has a starting point, 
+% an endpoint, and the width of a wedge as its arguments. 
+% Compare this command with |\WedgeAsSubst|, which has 
+% a starting point, a slope, and the width of a wedge 
+% as its arguments. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{WedgeAsSubstX}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/05/27}{TeX/LaTeX mode compatible to PS, and PDF modes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\WedgeAsSubstXTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4){%
+\@ifnextchar[{\Wedge@AsSubstXTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4)}%
+{\Wedge@AsSubstXTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4)[10]}}
+\def\Wedge@AsSubstXTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4)[#5]{%
+\begingroup
+%#5 not used
+\leavevmode \thicklines
+\drawline(#1,#2)(#3,#4)%
+\endgroup}
+\let\WedgeAsSubstX=\WedgeAsSubstXTeXLaTeX%for compatibility to PS/PDF mode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\PUT@@bondLINE| is used in the macro |\Put@@Line|, 
+% which draws a bond line. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PUT@@bondLINE}
+% \begin{macro}{\PutTeXLaTeXLine}
+% \begin{macro}{\PutBondLine}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{TeX/LaTeX mode compatible to PS, and PDF modes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PUT@@bondLINE(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{\begingroup%
+\linethickness{#5}\drawline(#1,#2)(#3,#4)%
+\endgroup}
+\let\PutTeXLaTeXLine=\PUT@@bondLINE%for user's use
+\let\PutBondLine=\PUT@@bondLINE%for user's use
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\PUT@@dashedLINE| is used to draw a dashed bond line, 
+% which usually links two non-adjacent atoms of a cyclic compound. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PUT@@dashedLINE}
+% \begin{macro}{\PutTeXLaTeXdashed}
+% \begin{macro}{\PutDashedBond}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{TeX/LaTeX mode compatible to PS, and PDF modes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PUT@@dashedLINE(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{%
+\begingroup
+\ifdim\unitlength>0.08pt
+\linethickness{#5}\dottedline{20}(#1,#2)(#3,#4)%
+%\dashline{2}[2](#1,#2)(#3,#4)%
+\else
+\linethickness{#5}\dottedline{20}(#1,#2)(#3,#4)
+%\dashline{1.8}[1.8](#1,#2)(#3,#4)%
+\fi
+\endgroup
+}
+\let\PutTeXLaTeXdashed=\PUT@@dashedLINE%for user's use
+\let\PutDashedBond=\PUT@@dashedLINE%for compatibility to PS and PDF mode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\HashWedgeAsSubst}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2010/05/27}{TeX/LaTeX mode compatible to PS, and PDF modes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\HashWedgeAsSubstTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{%
+\begingroup
+\SlopetoXY(#1,#2)(#3,#4){#5}%%replaced (code from chemstr.sty)
+\leavevmode
+\linethickness{1pt}\dottedline{20}(#1,#2)(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+\endgroup}
+\let\HashWedgeAsSubst=\HashWedgeAsSubstTeXLaTeX%for compatibility to PS and PDF mode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\HashWedgeAsSubstX| has a starting point, 
+% an endpoint, and the width of a wedge as its arguments. 
+% Compare this command with |\HashWedgeAsSubst|, which has 
+% a starting point, a slope, and the width of a wedge 
+% as its arguments. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\HashWedgeAsSubstX}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2010/05/27}{TeX/LaTeX mode compatible to PS, and PDF modes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\HashWedgeAsSubstXTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4){%
+\@ifnextchar[{\HashWedge@AsSubstXTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4)}%
+{\HashWedge@AsSubstXTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4)[10]}}
+\def\HashWedge@AsSubstXTeXLaTeX(#1,#2)(#3,#4)[#5]{%
+\begingroup
+\leavevmode\@tempdima=#5\unitlength
+\linethickness{\@tempdima}\dottedline{20}(#1,#2)(#3,#4)
+\endgroup}
+\let\HashWedgeAsSubstX=\HashWedgeAsSubstXTeXLaTeX%for compatibility to PS and PDF mode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\putRoundArrowTeXLaTeX| throws its main task to its inner 
+% macro |\putRound@rrowTeXLaTeX|, which is incapable of treating 
+% an optional argument for specifying the direction of an arrow head. 
+% The macro |\putRoundArrow| is defined as a user command to
+% assure the compatibility to the PostScript and the PDF mode. 
+% This command should be used in the PostScript or the PDF mode! 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\putRoundArrowTeXLaTeX}
+% \begin{macro}{\putRound@rrowTeXLaTeX}
+% \begin{macro}{\putRoundArrow}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For TeXLaTeX mode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\putRoundArrowTeXLaTeX{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\putRound@rrowTeXLaTeX}{\putRound@rrowTeXLaTeX[->]}}
+\def\putRound@rrowTeXLaTeX[#1]#2{\drawline#2%
+   \XyMTeXWarning{The command 
+   \string\putRoundArrow\space is unavailable in TeX/LaTeX mode. ^^J
+   Please try the PostScript or PDF mode}}
+\let\putRoundArrow=\putRoundArrowTeXLaTeX%for the compatibility to PDF and PS mode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thinlines}
+% \begin{macro}{\thicklines}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{TeX/LaTeX mode compatible to PS, and PDF modes}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\thinlines{\let\@linefnt\tenln \let\@circlefnt\tencirc
+  \@wholewidth=\thinLineWidth \@halfwidth .5\@wholewidth}
+\gdef\thicklines{\let\@linefnt\tenlnw \let\@circlefnt\tencircw
+  \@wholewidth=\thickLineWidth \@halfwidth .5\@wholewidth}
+\endinput
+%</assurelatexmode>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/assurelatexmode.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/assurelatexmode.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3f9e3466672
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/assurelatexmode.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+\def\batchfile{assurelatexmode.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+old Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+=======================================
+Version 5.01 Released on May 27, 2013
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files assurelatexmode.dtx and assurelatexmode.ins
+and the derived file assurelatexmode.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{assurelatexmode.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{assurelatexmode.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{assurelatexmode.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{assurelatexmode.dtx}{assurelatexmode}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/bondcolor.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/bondcolor.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fc86de1cec7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/bondcolor.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,738 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: bondcolor.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file (bondcolor.sty) is a successor to:
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files bondcolor.dtx and bondcolor.ins
+% and the derived file lewisstruc.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{bondcolor}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF}% Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{960}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{First release for XyMTeX5.00}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{bondcolor.dtx}[2010/10/01 v5.00 bondcolor package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{lewisstruc.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Bond Coloring by {\sffamily bondcolor.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and 
+Mathematical Chemistry \\
+Kanagawa, 258-0019 Japan 
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{bondcolor.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{bondcolor:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% bondcolor & bondcolor.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bondcolor>
+\typeout{Part of XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.00}
+\typeout{       -- Released October 01, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{bondcolor}
+\def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{chemstr}
+\RequirePackage{hetarom}
+\RequirePackage{hetaromh}
+\RequirePackage{methylen}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Substitution Bond Coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifcolorBLsw}
+% A switch |\ifcolorBLsw| is introduced to judging whether the present process 
+% is in BONDLIST or in ATOMLIST.  
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifcolorBLsw \colorBLswfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% The macro |\RightAtomBond| is defined to color substitution bonds (and substituents), 
+% when it is to be designated in ATOMLIST or in BONDLIST of a command for drawing 
+% a structural formula.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \RightAtomBond(x,y)[COLOR]<CLIPPING>{SUBSTLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The first optional argument (x,y) represents increments of x-, and y-coordinates, 
+% which may be added if adjustment is necessary. The default value is (0,0). 
+% The second optional argument [COLOR] is a command of coloring (e.g., |\red|). 
+% The default value is |\black|. 
+% The third optional argument <CLIPPING> accomodates \verb/<s>/ for non-clipping and 
+% a vacant or omitted argument represents a clipping of a corner. 
+% The defalt value is a vacant value. 
+% The fourth argument is a SUBSLIST, in which a substitution number 1--8 represents 
+% a bond slope to be drawn. Slopes to cover a right-handed half circle are numbered 
+% on a similar line to those of the |\ryl| macro, as follows: 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SLOPE    
+%       
+%       1      : (0,1)
+%       2      : (3,5)
+%       3      : (1,1)
+%       4      : (1,0)
+%       5      : (5,-3)
+%       6      : (1,-1)
+%       7      : (3,-5)
+%       8      : (0,-1)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% As for the format of the SUBSLIST, see the specification of the |\ryl| command. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RightAtomBond}
+% \begin{macro}{\Right@tomBond}
+% \begin{macro}{\Right@tomB@nd}
+% \begin{macro}{\Right@t@mB@nd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\RightAtomBond{%
+\@ifnextchar({\Right@tomBond}{\Right@tomBond(0,0)}}
+\def\Right@tomBond(#1,#2){%
+\@ifnextchar[{\Right@tomB@nd(#1,#2)}{\Right@tomB@nd(#1,#2)[\black]}}
+\def\Right@tomB@nd(#1,#2)[#3]{%
+\@ifnextchar<{\Right@t@mB@nd(#1,#2)[#3]}{\Right@t@mB@nd(#1,#2)[#3]<>}}
+\def\Right@t@mB@nd(#1,#2)[#3]<#4>#5{%
+\begingroup
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\futileFuseWarning
+\let\setbscolor=#3\relax
+\@ifundefined{@tmpb}{\edef\@tmpb{0}}{}%dummy
+\@ifundefined{@@tmpa}{\colorBLswfalse}{\if\@@tmpa @\relax\else
+\edef\@@tmpa{a}\colorBLswtrue\fi}%enforced setting
+%\@tempcntXa=\z@ \@tempcntYa=\z@
+\@tempcntXa=#1\relax \@tempcntYa=#2\relax
+\if\@tmpb s\relax
+  \@clipfusefalse
+\else
+ \if#4s\relax
+  \@clipfusefalse
+ \else
+   \ifcolorBLsw
+     \@clipfusetrue
+     \advance\@tempcntXa by5\relax%tentative value
+     \advance\@tempcntYa by-15\relax%tentative value
+   \colorBLswfalse
+  \else
+   \@clipfusetrue
+   \advance\@tempcntXa by40\relax%tentative value
+   \advance\@tempcntYa by38\relax%tentative value
+\fi\fi\fi
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#5\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\let\local@tmpa=\@tmpa%global to local 2002/5/30 by SF
+\ifcase\local@tmpa%
+\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{{\setbscolor\setatombonda}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01% 0 (upward) (0,1)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondF}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%1 (3,5)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondA}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%2 (1,1)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondf}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%3 (5,3)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondb}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%4 (1,0)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombonde}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%5 (5,-3)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondB}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or%6 (1,-1)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondE}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%7 (3,-5)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondc}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%8 (0,-1)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi}\endgroup}%end of definition of \RightAtomBond 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\LeftAtomBond| is defined to color substitution bonds (and substituents), 
+% when it is to be designated in ATOMLIST or in BONDLIST of a command for drawing 
+% a structural formula.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \LeftAtomBond(x,y)[COLOR]<CLIPPING>{SUBSTLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The first optional argument (x,y) represents increments of x-, and y-coordinates, 
+% which may be added if adjustment is necessary. The default value is (0,0). 
+% The second optional argument [COLOR] is a command of coloring (e.g., |\red|). 
+% The default value is |\black|. 
+% The third optional argument <CLIPPING> accomodates \verb/<s>/ for non-clipping and 
+% a vacant or omitted argument represents a clipping of a corner. 
+% The defalt value is a vacant value. 
+% The fourth argument is a SUBSLIST, in which a substitution number 1--8 represents 
+% a bond slope to be drawn. Slopes to cover a left-handed half circle are numbered 
+% on a similar line to those of the |\lyl| macro, as follows: 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SLOPE 
+%       1      : (0,1)
+%       2      : (-3,5)
+%       3      : (-1,1)
+%       4      : (-1,0)
+%       5      : (-5,-3)
+%       6      : (-1,-1)
+%       7      : (-3,-5)
+%       8      : (0,-1)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% As for the format of the SUBSLIST, see the specification of the |\lyl| command. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LeftAtomBond}
+% \begin{macro}{\Left@tomBond}
+% \begin{macro}{\Left@tomB@nd}
+% \begin{macro}{\Left@t@mB@nd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LeftAtomBond{%
+\@ifnextchar({\Left@tomBond}{\Left@tomBond(0,0)}}
+\def\Left@tomBond(#1,#2){%
+\@ifnextchar[{\Left@tomB@nd(#1,#2)}{\Left@tomB@nd(#1,#2)[\black]}}
+\def\Left@tomB@nd(#1,#2)[#3]{%
+\@ifnextchar<{\Left@t@mB@nd(#1,#2)[#3]}{\Left@t@mB@nd(#1,#2)[#3]<>}}
+\def\Left@t@mB@nd(#1,#2)[#3]<#4>#5{%
+\begingroup
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\futileFuseWarning
+\let\setbscolor=#3\relax
+\@ifundefined{@tmpb}{\edef\@tmpb{0}}{}%dummy
+\@ifundefined{@@tmpa}{\colorBLswfalse}{\if\@@tmpa @\relax\else
+\edef\@@tmpa{a}\colorBLswtrue\fi}%enforced setting
+%\@tempcntXa=\z@ \@tempcntYa=\z@
+\@tempcntXa=#1\relax \@tempcntYa=#2\relax
+\if\@tmpb s\relax
+  \@clipfusefalse
+\else
+ \if#4s\relax
+  \@clipfusefalse
+ \else
+   \ifcolorBLsw
+     \@clipfusetrue
+     \advance\@tempcntXa by5\relax%tentative value
+     \advance\@tempcntYa by-15\relax%tentative value
+   \colorBLswfalse
+  \else
+   \@clipfusetrue
+   \advance\@tempcntXa by40\relax%tentative value
+   \advance\@tempcntYa by38\relax%tentative value
+\fi\fi\fi
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#5\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\let\local@tmpa=\@tmpa%global to local 2002/5/30 by SF
+\ifcase\local@tmpa%
+\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{{\setbscolor\setatombonda}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01% 0 (upward) (0,1)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondD}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%1 (-3,5)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondH}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%2 (-1,1)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondd}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%3 (-5,3)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondh}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%4 (-1,0)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondg}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%5 (-5,-3)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondC}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%6 (-1,-1)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondG}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%7 (-3,-5)
+\or{\setbscolor\Put@Direct(\the\@tempcntXa,\the\@tempcntYa)%
+{\setatombondc}\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%%8 (0,-1)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi}\endgroup}%end of definition of \LeftAtomBond 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Double Bond Coloring}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\addvbonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\addvbonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of 
+% drawing six-membered vertical-type structural formulas, where 
+% the letter \texttt{v} of \texttt{add--v--bond--a} means a vertical type. 
+% The suffix \texttt{a} is a bond specifier. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addvbonda{\put(0,-406){\bonda}}
+\def\addvbondb{\put(-171,-303){\bondb}}
+\def\addvbondc{\put(-171,-103){\bondc}}
+\def\addvbondd{\put(0,0){\bondd}}
+\def\addvbonde{\put(171,-103){\bonde}}
+\def\addvbondf{\put(171,-303){\bondf}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addvibonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\addvibonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of 
+% drawing six-membered inverse-vertical-type structural formulas, 
+% where the letter \texttt{vi} 
+% of \texttt{add--vi--bond--a} means an inverse vertical type. 
+% The suffix \texttt{a} is a bond specifier. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addvibonda{\put(0,0){\bondc}}
+\def\addvibondb{\put(-171,-103){\bondb}}
+\def\addvibondc{\put(-171,-303){\bonda}}
+\def\addvibondd{\put(0,-406){\bondf}}
+\def\addvibonde{\put(171,-303){\bonde}}
+\def\addvibondf{\put(171,-103){\bondd}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addhbonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\addhbonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of 
+% drawing six-membered horizontal-type structural formulas, 
+% where the letter \texttt{h} 
+% of \texttt{add--h--bond--a} means a horizontal type. 
+% The suffix \texttt{a} is a bond specifier. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addhbonda{\put(0,0){\hbonda}}
+\def\addhbondb{\put(-103,-171){\hbondb}}
+\def\addhbondc{\put(-303,-171){\hbondc}}
+\def\addhbondd{\put(-406,0){\hbondd}}
+\def\addhbonde{\put(-303,171){\hbonde}}
+\def\addhbondf{\put(-103,171){\hbondf}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addhibonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\addhibonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of 
+% drawing six-membered inverse horizontal-type structural formulas, 
+% where the letter \texttt{hi} 
+% of \texttt{add--hi--bond--a} means an inverse horizontal type. 
+% The suffix \texttt{a} is a bond specifier. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addhibonda{\put(-403,0){\hbondc}}
+\def\addhibondb{\put(-303,-171){\hbondb}}
+\def\addhibondc{\put(-103,-171){\hbonda}}
+\def\addhibondd{\put(0,0){\hbondf}}
+\def\addhibonde{\put(-103,171){\hbonde}}
+\def\addhibondf{\put(-303,171){\hbondd}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addvvbonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\addvvbonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of 
+% drawing five-membered vertical-type structural formulas, where 
+% the first letter \texttt{v} of \texttt{add--v--v--bond--a} means 
+% a five-membered ring (roman numeral) and the latter \texttt{v} 
+% means a vertical type. 
+% The suffix \texttt{a} is a bond specifier. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addvvbonda{\put(0,0){\bondc}}
+\def\addvvbondb{\put(-171,-103){\bondb}}
+\def\addvvbondc{\put(-171,-103){\bondhoriz}}
+\def\addvvbondd{\put(171,-303){\bonde}}
+\def\addvvbonde{\put(171,-103){\bondd}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addvvibonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\addvvibonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of 
+% drawing five-membered inverse vertical-type structural formulas, where 
+% the first letter \texttt{v} of \texttt{add--v--vi--bond--a} means 
+% a five-membered ring (roman numeral) and the latter \texttt{vi} 
+% means an inverse vertical type. The suffix \texttt{a} is a bond specifier. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addvvibonda{\put(0,-406){\bonda}}
+\def\addvvibondb{\put(-171,-303){\bondb}}
+\def\addvvibondc{\put(-171,-103){\bondhorizi}}
+\def\addvvibondd{\put(171,-103){\bonde}}
+\def\addvvibonde{\put(171,-303){\bondf}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addvhbonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\addvhbonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of 
+% drawing five-membered horizontal-type structural formulas, where 
+% the first letter \texttt{v} of \texttt{add--v--h--bond--a} means 
+% a five-membered ring (roman numeral) and the latter \texttt{h} 
+% means a horizontal type. 
+% The suffix \texttt{a} is a bond specifier. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addvhbonda{\put(-403,0){\hbondc}}
+\def\addvhbondb{\put(-303,-171){\hbondb}}
+\def\addvhbondc{\put(-303,-171){\hbondvert}}
+%\def\addvhbondd{\put(0,0){\hbondf}}
+\def\addvhbondd{\put(-103,171){\hbonde}}
+\def\addvhbonde{\put(-303,171){\hbondd}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addvhibonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\addvhibonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of 
+% drawing five-membered inverse horizontal-type structural formulas, where 
+% the first letter \texttt{v} of \texttt{add--v--hi--bond--a} means 
+% a five-membered ring (roman numeral) and the latter \texttt{hi} 
+% means an inverse horizontal type. The suffix \texttt{a} is a bond specifier. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addvhibonda{\put(0,0){\hbonda}}
+\def\addvhibondb{\put(-103,-171){\hbondb}}
+\def\addvhibondc{\put(-303,-171){\hbondverti}}
+%\def\addvhibondd{\put(-406,0){\hbondd}}
+\def\addvhibondd{\put(-303,171){\hbonde}}
+\def\addvhibonde{\put(-103,171){\hbondf}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MethyleneBonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\MethyleneBonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of drawing dimethylene to decamethylene units 
+% of normal type, where the suffix \texttt{a}, etc. are bond specifiers. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MethyleneBonda{\Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondA}}
+\def\MethyleneBondb{\Put@Direct(0,-406){\bondB}}
+\def\MethyleneBondc{\Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondA}}
+\def\MethyleneBondd{\Put@Direct(0,-406){\bondB}}
+\def\MethyleneBonde{\Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondA}}
+\def\MethyleneBondf{\Put@Direct(0,-406){\bondB}}
+\def\MethyleneBondg{\Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondA}}
+\def\MethyleneBondh{\Put@Direct(0,-406){\bondB}}
+\def\MethyleneBondi{\Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondA}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MethyleneBondA etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\MethyleneBondA/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of drawing dimethylene to decamethylene units 
+% of normal type, where the suffix \texttt{A}, etc. are bond specifiers. 
+% A double bond corresponding to the suffix \texttt{A} appears an alternate side 
+% the counterpart due to the suffix \texttt{a}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MethyleneBondA{\Put@Direct(0,-406){\bondAA}}
+\def\MethyleneBondB{\Put@Direct(-171,-303){\bondBB}}
+\def\MethyleneBondC{\Put@Direct(0,-406){\bondAA}}
+\def\MethyleneBondD{\Put@Direct(-171,-303){\bondBB}}
+\def\MethyleneBondE{\Put@Direct(0,-406){\bondAA}}
+\def\MethyleneBondF{\Put@Direct(-171,-303){\bondBB}}
+\def\MethyleneBondG{\Put@Direct(0,-406){\bondAA}}
+\def\MethyleneBondH{\Put@Direct(-171,-303){\bondBB}}
+\def\MethyleneBondI{\Put@Direct(0,-406){\bondAA}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MethyleneiBonda etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\MethyleneiBonda/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of drawing dimethylene to decamethylene units 
+% of inverse type, where the suffix \texttt{a}, etc. are bond specifiers. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MethyleneiBonda{\Put@Direct(171,-103){\bondAi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondb{\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondBi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondc{\Put@Direct(171,-103){\bondAi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondd{\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondBi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBonde{\Put@Direct(171,-103){\bondAi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondf{\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondBi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondg{\Put@Direct(171,-103){\bondAi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondh{\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondBi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondi{\Put@Direct(171,-103){\bondAi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MethyleneiBondA etc.}
+% Basic commands \verb/\MethyleneiBondA/ etc. are used to add 
+% colored double bonds in commands of drawing dimethylene to decamethylene units 
+% of inverse type, where the suffix \texttt{A}, etc. are bond specifiers. 
+% A double bond corresponding to the suffix \texttt{A} appears an alternate side 
+% the counterpart due to the suffix \texttt{a}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MethyleneiBondA{\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondAAi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondB{\Put@Direct(-171,-103){\bondBBi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondC{\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondAAi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondD{\Put@Direct(-171,-103){\bondBBi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondE{\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondAAi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondF{\Put@Direct(-171,-103){\bondBBi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondG{\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondAAi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondH{\Put@Direct(-171,-103){\bondBBi}}
+\def\MethyleneiBondI{\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondAAi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adddbcolor}
+% The user command \verb/\adddbcolor/ is used to specify a color of 
+% a double bond to be changed. The first argument specifies types of 
+% structures to be drawn by designating \texttt{v}, \texttt{vi}, etc. 
+% The vacant argument and \texttt{i} correspond to polymethylene units 
+% defined in \textsf{methylen} package. 
+% The second argument specifies a color to be changed. 
+% The command \verb/\adddbcolor/ is placed in a bond list. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adddbcolor#1#2{%
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\futileFuseWarning
+\global\@dbondcolortrue
+\edef\@@tmpBondSp{#1}%
+\edef\@@tmpBondSpi{i}%
+\ifx\@@tmpBondSp\empty\relax%\tetrahemethylene etc.
+{\Put@Direct(0,0){#2\expandafter\csname MethyleneBond\@@tmpa\endcsname}}%
+\else\ifx\@@tmpBondSp\@@tmpBondSpi\relax%\tetramethyleni etc.
+{\Put@Direct(0,0){#2\csname MethyleneiBond\@@tmpa\endcsname}}%
+\else
+{\Put@Direct(0,0){#2\csname add#1bond\@@tmpa\endcsname}}%
+\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Skeletal Bond Coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addskbcolor}
+% The user command \verb/\addskbcolor/ is used to specify a color of 
+% a skeletal bond to be changed. The first argument specifies types of 
+% structures to be drawn by designating \texttt{v}, \texttt{h}, etc. 
+% The second argument specifies a color to be changed. 
+% The command \verb/\addskbcolor/ is placed in a skeletal bond list. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addskbcolor#1#2{%
+\iflongskbond
+{#2\expandafter\csname\skbondreplace\endcsname}%
+\else 
+\if#1\empty\relax
+{#2\expandafter\csname skbond\skbondreplace\endcsname}%
+\else\if#1v\relax
+{#2\expandafter\csname skbond\skbondreplace\endcsname}%
+\else
+{#2\expandafter\csname #1skbond\skbondreplace\endcsname}%
+\fi\fi\fi%
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\futileFuseWarning%for methylen package
+\global\@dbondcolortrue%for heterarom and heteraromh packages
+}
+%
+%\def\addskbcolor#1#2{%
+%      \edef\@@tmpsBondSp{#1}%
+%      \edef\@@tmpsBondSpv{v}%
+%\iflongskbond
+%{#2\expandafter\csname\skbondreplace\endcsname}%
+%\else 
+%\ifx\@@tmpsBondSp\empty\relax
+%{#2\expandafter\csname skbond\skbondreplace\endcsname}%
+%\else\ifx\@@tmpsBondSp\@@tmpsBondSpv\relax
+%{#2\expandafter\csname skbond\skbondreplace\endcsname}%
+%\else
+%{#2\expandafter\csname #1skbond\skbondreplace\endcsname}%
+%\fi\fi\fi%
+%\global\let\FuseWarning=\futileFuseWarning%for methylen package
+%\global\@dbondcolortrue%for heterarom and heteraromh packages
+%}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\red etc.}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{Colors for TeX/LaTeX mode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\red{\color{red}}
+\def\blue{\color{blue}}
+\def\green{\color{green}}
+\def\black{\color{black}}
+\def\cyan{\color{cyan}}
+\def\yellow{\color{yellow}}
+\def\magenta{\color{magenta}}
+\def\white{\color{white}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xymcolor}
+% \begin{macro}{\red etc.}
+% These macros are defined to avoid \texttt{**Warning** color stack underflow} 
+% during processing by the dvipdfmx converter. 
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{Added: Colors for TeX/LaTeX mode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\xymcolor#1#2{\mbox{\color{#1}#2}}
+\def\redx#1{\xymcolor{red}{#1}}
+\def\bluex#1{\xymcolor{blue}{#1}}
+\def\greenx#1{\xymcolor{green}{#1}}
+\def\blackx#1{\xymcolor{black}{#1}}
+\def\cyanx#1{\xymcolor{cyan}{#1}}
+\def\yellowx#1{\xymcolor{yellow}{#1}}
+\def\magentax#1{\xymcolor{magenta}{#1}}
+\def\whitex#1{\xymcolor{white}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Color@@Line}
+% \begin{macro}{\Color@Line}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{Colors for TeX/LaTeX mode}
+% The |\Color@Line| macro is used to erase an old line by setting color to be white. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Color@@Line{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\C@lor@@Line}{\C@lor@@Line[0.4pt]}}
+\def\C@lor@@Line[#1](#2,#3)(#4,#5)#6#7{%
+\begingroup
+\@tempdima=#1\relax
+\ifdim\@tempdima=0.4pt\else
+\XyMTeXWarning{The line width is ineffective for TeX/LaTeX mode}%
+\fi
+\put(0,0){\csname #7\endcsname \Put@Line(#2,#3)(#4,#5){#6}}%
+\endgroup}%end of \Color@@Line
+\let\Color@Line=\Color@@Line%for TeX/LaTeX mode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\replaceSKbond}
+% The user command \verb/\replaceSKbond/ is used to specify a color of 
+% a skeletal bond to be changed. The first optional argument specifies 
+% the bond width to be changed if necessary. 
+% The arguments in the first pair of parentheses specify the original point. 
+% The arguments in the second pair of parentheses specify the slope e.g., (5,3). 
+% The next argument indicates the projection length to the x-axis. 
+% The last argument indicates a color to be applied. 
+% The command \verb/\replaceSKbond/ is placed in a bond list. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\replaceSKbond{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\repl@ceSKbond}{\repl@ceSKbond[0.4pt]}}
+\def\repl@ceSKbond[#1](#2,#3)(#4,#5)#6#7{\begingroup%
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\futileFuseWarning
+\global\@dbondcolortrue
+\def\thinLineWidth{#1}%
+\@tempdima=#1 \advance\@tempdima by1.2pt
+\put(0,0){\Color@Line[\the\@tempdima](#2,#3)(#4,#5){#6}{white}}%
+\put(0,0){#7\Put@Line(#2,#3)(#4,#5){#6}}\endgroup}%
+%
+%\def\replaceSKbond{%
+%\@ifnextchar[{\repl@ceSKbond}{\repl@ceSKbond[0.4pt]}}
+%\def\repl@ceSKbond[#1](#2,#3)(#4,#5)#6#7{\begingroup%
+%\global\let\FuseWarning=\futileFuseWarning
+%\global\@dbondcolortrue
+%\def\thinLineWidth{#1}%
+%\@tempdima=#1 \advance\@tempdima by1.2pt
+%\put(0,0){\edef\thinLineWidth{\the\@tempdima}\white\Put@Line(#2,#3)(#4,#5){#6}}%
+%\put(0,0){#7\Put@Line(#2,#3)(#4,#5){#6}}\endgroup}%
+%
+\endinput
+%</bondcolor>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/bondcolor.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/bondcolor.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..27b9ef956ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/bondcolor.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+\def\batchfile{bondcolor.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files bondcolor.dtx and bondcolor.ins
+and the derived file bondcolor.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{bondcolor.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{bondcolor.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{bondcolor.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{bondcolor.dtx}{bondcolor}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/carom.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/carom.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e85f329f8cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/carom.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4172 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: carom.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1993,1996,1998,2000,2001,2002, 2004 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% carom.sty
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files xymtx-pdf.dtx and xymtx-pdf.ins
+% and the derived file xymtx-pdf.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology,
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology,
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606, Japan
+%
+% New address:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 14, 2000}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00a}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{carom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{2982}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/08/16}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00a}{2000/06/14}{bug fix}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/30}{Size reduction}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{sfpicture enviromnent etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2002/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{carom.dtx}[2010/10/01 v5.00 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{carom.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Drawing carbocyclic compounds by {\sffamily carom.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, 
+Kanagawa-Ken, 258-0019 Japan 
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% % Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% % Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% % Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{carom.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{carom:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% carom & carom.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*carom>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.00}
+\typeout{       -- Released October 01, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{carom}
+\def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for carom.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *******************************
+% * carom.sty: list of commands *
+% *******************************
+%
+%   <VERTICAL TYPE>
+%
+%     \cyclohexanev               \@cyclohexanev
+%     \bzdrv                      \@bzdrv
+%     \decalinev                  \@decalinev
+%     \decalinevb                 \@decalinevb
+%     \decalinevt                 \@decalinevt
+%     \naphdrv                    \@naphdrv
+%     \naphdrvb                   \@naphdrvb
+%     \naphdrvt                   \@naphdrvt
+%     \tetralinev                 \@tetralinev
+%     \tetralinevb                \@tetralinevb
+%     \tetralinevt                \@tetralinevt
+%     \hanthracenev               \@hanthracenev
+%     \anthracenev                \@anthracenev
+%     \hphenanthrenev             \@hphenanthrenev
+%     \phenanthrenev              \@phenanthrenev
+%     \steroid                    \@steroid
+%     \steroidchain               \@steroidchain
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   <HORIZONTAL TYPE>
+%
+%     \cyclohexaneh               \@cyclohexaneh
+%     \bzdrh                      \@bzdrh
+%     \decalineh                  \@decalineh
+%     \naphdrh                    \@naphdrh
+%     \tetralineh                 \@tetralineh
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf carom.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{decaheterov}{\input hetarom.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{decaheteroh}{\input hetaromh.sty\relax}{}
+\unitlength=0.1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Cyclohexane derivatives}
+% \subsection{Vertical cyclohexanes}
+%
+% The macro |\cyclohexanev| is used for drawing cyclohexane derivatives 
+% of vertical type.  The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\setsixringv|. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***************************
+% * cyclohexane derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)        *
+% ***************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          1
+%          *  
+%     6  *   *  2
+%       |     |
+%       |     |
+%     5  *   *  3
+%          *
+%          4 <===== the original point
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\cyclohexanev| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \cyclohexanev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to f as well as A, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  cyclohexane
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specifed) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \cyclohexanev{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \cyclohexanev[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \cyclohexanev[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclohexanev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclohexanev{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclohexanev[@}{\@cyclohexanev[@]}}
+\def\@cyclohexanev[#1]#2{\sixheterov[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following definition has been deleted. 
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{Adding \cs{set@fusionadd@sixv}}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{cyclohexanev}: Old definition deleted.}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal cyclohexanes}
+%
+% The macro |cyclohexaneh| is used for drawing cyclohexane derivatives 
+% of vertical type.  The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\setsixringh|. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***************************
+% * cyclohexane derivatives *
+% *  (horizontal type)      *
+% ***************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                2      3
+%                                 -----
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 1 *           * 4
+%          (0,0)                *       *
+%                                 -----
+%                                6      5
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\cyclohexaneh| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \cyclohexaneh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to f as well as A, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  cyclohexane
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specifed) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \cyclohexaneh{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \cyclohexaneh[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \cyclohexaneh[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00a}{2000/06/14}{bug fix: changed letter [r] to [@] 
+% in \cs{cycohexaneh} for horizontal cyclohexanes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclohexaneh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclohexaneh{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclohexaneh[@}{\@cyclohexaneh[@]}}
+\def\@cyclohexaneh[#1]#2{\sixheteroh[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following definition has been deleted. 
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/29}{Adding \cs{set@fusionadd@sixv} for 
+% fused rings}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{cyclohexaneh}: Old definition deleted.}
+%
+% \section{Benzene and benzoquinone derivatives}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\bzdrv| (|\benzenev|) is used for drawing benzene derivatives 
+% of vertical type as well as benzoquinone derivatives of 
+% vertical type. The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\cyclohexanev| defined above. 
+% 
+% The macro |\bzdrv| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{benzenev} added}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************************
+% * benzene and benzoquinone derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)                     *
+% ****************************************
+%
+%   \bzdrv[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \benzenev[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one character (r, l or c) for designate
+% aromatic bond patterns or two characters (p? or o?) for quinone 
+% bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     OPT: (bond pattern)
+%
+%           none  or r :  right-handed set of double bonds 
+%           l          :  left-handed set of double bonds 
+%           c          :  aromatic circle
+%
+%           p or pa    :  p-quinone (A)
+%           pb         :  p-quinone (B)
+%           pc         :  p-quinone (C)
+%
+%           o or oa    :  o-quinone (A)
+%           ob         :  o-quinone (B)
+%           oc         :  o-quinone (C)
+%           od         :  o-quinone (D)
+%           oe         :  o-quinone (E)
+%           of         :  o-quinone (F)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        \bzdrv{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \bzdrv[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \bzdrv[pa]{1D==O;4D==O;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bzdrv}
+% \begin{macro}{\benzenev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bzdrv{\@ifnextchar[{\@bzdrv}{\@bzdrv[r]}}
+\def\@bzdrv[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `bzdrv' is based on `cyclohexanev'.}\fi%
+%\expandafter\twoch@r#1{}%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R#1//%
+\if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty
+  \cyclohexanev[bdf]{#2}%
+ \fi
+\else\if\@tmpa l%left-handed set of double bonds
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty
+  \cyclohexanev[ace]{#2}%
+ \fi
+\else\if\@tmpa c%aromatic circle
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty
+  \cyclohexanev[A]{#2}%
+ \fi
+\else\if\@tmpa p%p-quinone
+ \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+  \cyclohexanev[be]{#2}%
+ \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+  \cyclohexanev[be]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+  \cyclohexanev[cf]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)
+  \cyclohexanev[ad]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa o%o-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+   \cyclohexanev[ce]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+   \cyclohexanev[ce]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%o-quinone (B)
+   \cyclohexanev[df]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%o-quinone (C)
+   \cyclohexanev[ae]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%o-quinone (D)
+   \cyclohexanev[bf]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%o-quinone (E)
+   \cyclohexanev[ac]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%o-quinone (F)
+   \cyclohexanev[bd]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% added 1998/11/15 by S. Fujita
+   \cyclohexanev[@#1]{#2}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \bzdrv macro
+\let\benzenev=\bzdrv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\bzdrh| (|\benzeneh|) is used for drawing benzene derivatives 
+% of vertical type as well as benzoquinone derivatives of 
+% vertical type. The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\cyclohexanev| defined above. 
+% 
+% The macro |\bzdrh| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{benzeneh} added}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************************
+% * benzene and benzoquinone derivatives *
+% *  (horizontal type)                   *
+% ****************************************
+%
+%   \bzdrh[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \benzeneh[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one character (r, l or c) for designate
+% aromatic bond patterns or two characters (p? or o?) for quinone 
+% bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     OPT: (bond pattern)
+%
+%           none  or r :  right-handed set of double bonds 
+%           l          :  left-handed set of double bonds 
+%           c          :  aromatic circle
+%
+%           p or pa    :  p-quinone (A)
+%           pb         :  p-quinone (B)
+%           pc         :  p-quinone (C)
+%
+%           o or oa    :  o-quinone (A)
+%           ob         :  o-quinone (B)
+%           oc         :  o-quinone (C)
+%           od         :  o-quinone (D)
+%           oe         :  o-quinone (E)
+%           of         :  o-quinone (F)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       e.g. 
+%        \bzdrh{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \bzdrh[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \bzdrh[pa]{1D==O;4D==O;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bzdrh}
+% \begin{macro}{\benzeneh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bzdrh{\@ifnextchar[{\@bzdrh}{\@bzdrh[r]}}
+\def\@bzdrh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `bzdrh' is based on `cyclohexaneh'.}\fi%
+%\expandafter\twoch@r#1{}%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R#1//%
+%\begin{sfpicture}(800,880)(-\noshift,-\noshift)
+\if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+  \cyclohexaneh[bdf]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa l%left-handed set of double bonds
+  \cyclohexaneh[ace]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa c%aromatic circle
+  \cyclohexaneh[A]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa p%p-quinone
+ \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+  \cyclohexaneh[be]{#2}%
+ \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+  \cyclohexaneh[be]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+  \cyclohexaneh[cf]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)
+  \cyclohexaneh[ad]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa o%o-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+   \cyclohexaneh[ce]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+   \cyclohexaneh[ce]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%o-quinone (B)
+   \cyclohexaneh[df]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%o-quinone (C)
+   \cyclohexaneh[ae]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%o-quinone (D)
+   \cyclohexaneh[bf]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%o-quinone (E)
+   \cyclohexaneh[ac]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%o-quinone (F)
+   \cyclohexaneh[bd]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% added 1998/11/15 by S. Fujita
+   \cyclohexaneh[@#1]{#2}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+%\end{sfpicture}
+}%               %end of \bzdrh macro
+\let\benzeneh=\bzdrh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Decaline derivatives}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\decalinev| is used for drawing decaline derivatives 
+% of vertical type.  The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\setdecaringv|. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************
+% * decaline derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)     *
+% ************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          8 (0G)1
+%          *  8a *
+%     7  *   * *   *  2
+%       |     |     |
+%       |     |     |
+%     6  *   * *   *  3
+%          *  4a *
+%          5 (0F)4
+%          ^
+%          |
+%          the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decalinev| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decalinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to k, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. The character A or B indicates aromatic bond patterns (circles). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{BONDLIST: k and K at the fused bond}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  decaline
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond
+%           d          :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e          :  5,4a-double bond
+%           f          :  5,6-double bond
+%           g          :  6,7-double bond
+%           h          :  8,7-double bond
+%           i          :  8,8a-double bond
+%           j          :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k          :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K          :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A          :  left aromatic circle 
+%           B          :  right aromatic circle 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%        for 0 (fused positions)
+%
+%           0FA        :  alpha single bond at 8a 
+%           0FB        :  beta single bond at 8a
+%           0FU        :  unspecified single bond at 8a
+%           0GA        :  alpha single bond at 4a 
+%           0GB        :  beta single bond at 4a
+%           0GU        :  unspecified single bond at 4a
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decalinev{1==Cl;2==F;0FA==;0GA==}
+%        \decalinev[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decalinev[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decalinev| has been changed into a subsidiary macro 
+% of |\decaheterov| (version 2.00). 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decalinev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decalinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@decalinev[@}{\@decalinev[@]}}
+\def\@decalinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `decalinev' is based on `decaheterov'.}\fi%
+\decaheterov[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% The following definition has been stopped using. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw}
+% \cs{ylfusedposition}, 
+% \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{@@ylii}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@yli}, 
+% \cs{@yli}, \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: fused rings}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{decalinev}: Old definition deleted.}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-bottom type}
+%
+% The macro |\decalinevb| is used for drawing decaline derivatives 
+% of vertical-bottom type (numbering from the bottom to the left-upper part). 
+% The word ``vertical'' means that each benzene ring is a vertical type.  
+% The word ``bottom'' means that the benzene ring with young locant numbers 
+% is located at the bottom. 
+% The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are drawn directly, 
+% while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by useing 
+% the inner macro |\setsixringv|. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/13}{Newly added command}
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***************************
+% * decaline derivatives    *
+% *  (vertical bottom type) *
+% ***************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          7 
+%          *  
+%     6  *   * 8
+%       |     |
+%       |     | 0G (4a)
+%     5  *   * *
+%  0F(4a)  *     * 1
+%          |     |
+%          |     |
+%        4  *   *  2
+%             *
+%             3
+%             ^
+%             |
+%            the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decalinevb| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decalinevb[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to k, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. The character A or B indicates aromatic bond patterns (circles). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{BONDLIST: k and K at the fused bond}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  decaline
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond
+%           d          :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e          :  5,4a-double bond
+%           f          :  5,6-double bond
+%           g          :  6,7-double bond
+%           h          :  8,7-double bond
+%           i          :  8,8a-double bond
+%           j          :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k          :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K          :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A          :  left aromatic circle 
+%           B          :  right aromatic circle 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%        for 0 (fused positions)
+%
+%           0FA        :  alpha single bond at 8a 
+%           0FB        :  beta single bond at 8a
+%           0FU        :  unspecified single bond at 8a
+%           0GA        :  alpha single bond at 4a 
+%           0GB        :  beta single bond at 4a
+%           0GU        :  unspecified single bond at 4a
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decalinevb{1==Cl;2==F;0FA==;0GA==}
+%        \decalinevb[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decalinevb[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decalinevb| has been changed into a subsidiary macro 
+% of |\decaheterovb| (version 2.00). 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decalinevb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decalinevb{\@ifnextchar[{\@decalinevb[@}{\@decalinevb[@]}}
+\def\@decalinevb[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `decalinevb' is based on `decaheterovb'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovb[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following old definition has been stopped using. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw}
+% \cs{ylfusedposition}, 
+% \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{@@ylii}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@yli}, 
+% \cs{@yli}, \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Add: Fused rings}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{decalinevb}: Old definition deleted.}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-top type}
+%
+% The macro |\decalinevt| is used for drawing decaline derivatives 
+% of vertical-bottom type (numbering from the top to the left-down part). 
+% The word ``vertical'' means that each benzene ring is a vertical type.  
+% The word ``top'' means that the benzene ring with young locant numbers 
+% is located at the top. 
+% The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are drawn directly, 
+% while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by useing 
+% the inner macro |\setsixringv|. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/13}{Newly added command}
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************
+% * decaline derivatives *
+% *  (vertical-top type) *
+% ************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                     2
+%                     *  
+%                1  *   * 3
+%                  |     |
+%                  |     | 
+%         0G (8a)   *   * 4
+%             8   *   * 0F(4a)
+%                |     | 
+%                |     |
+%              7  *   *  5
+%                   *
+%                   6
+%                   ^
+%                   |
+%                   the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decalinevt| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decalinevt[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to k, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. The character A or B indicates aromatic bond patterns (circles). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{BONDLIST: k and K at the fused bond}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  decaline
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond
+%           d          :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e          :  5,4a-double bond
+%           f          :  5,6-double bond
+%           g          :  6,7-double bond
+%           h          :  8,7-double bond
+%           i          :  8,8a-double bond
+%           j          :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k          :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K          :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A          :  left aromatic circle 
+%           B          :  right aromatic circle 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%        for 0 (fused positions)
+%
+%           0FA        :  alpha single bond at 8a 
+%           0FB        :  beta single bond at 8a
+%           0FU        :  unspecified single bond at 8a
+%           0GA        :  alpha single bond at 4a 
+%           0GB        :  beta single bond at 4a
+%           0GU        :  unspecified single bond at 4a
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decalinevt{1==Cl;2==F;0FA==;0GA==}
+%        \decalinevt[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decalinevt[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decalinevt| has been changed into a subsidiary macro 
+% of |\decaheterovt| (version 2.00). 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decalinevt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decalinevt{\@ifnextchar[{\@decalinevt[@}{\@decalinevt[@]}}
+\def\@decalinevt[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `decalinevt' is based on `decaheterovt'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovt[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following old definition has been stopped using. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{ylfusedposition}, 
+% \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{@@ylii}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@yli}, 
+% \cs{@yli}, \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: fused rings}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{decalinevt}: Old definition deleted.}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\decalineh| is used for drawing decaline derivatives 
+% of vertical type.  The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macros |\setsixringh| and |\setfusedbond|. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************
+% * decaline derivatives *
+% *  (horizontal type)   *
+% ************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                2      3
+%                                 -----
+%                               *       *
+%                           1  *          * 4
+%                               *       *
+%                        8a (0G)  -----  4a (0F)
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 8 *           * 5
+%          (0,0)                *       *
+%                                 -----
+%                                7      6
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decalineh| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decalineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to k, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. The character A or B indicates aromatic bond patterns (circles). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{BONDLIST: k and K at the fused bond}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  decaline
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond
+%           d          :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e          :  5,4a-double bond
+%           f          :  5,6-double bond
+%           g          :  6,7-double bond
+%           h          :  8,7-double bond
+%           i          :  8,8a-double bond
+%           j          :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k          :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K          :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A          :  left aromatic circle 
+%           B          :  right aromatic circle 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%        for 0 (fused positions)
+%
+%           0FA        :  alpha single bond at 8a 
+%           0FB        :  beta single bond at 8a
+%           0FU        :  unspecified single bond at 8a
+%           0GA        :  alpha single bond at 4a 
+%           0GB        :  beta single bond at 4a
+%           0GU        :  unspecified single bond at 4a
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decalineh{1==Cl;2==F;0FA==;0GA==}
+%        \decalineh[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decalineh[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decalineh| has been changed into a subsidiary macro 
+% of |\decaheteroh| (version 2.00). 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decalineh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decalineh{\@ifnextchar[{\@decalineh[@}{\@decalineh[@]}}
+\def\@decalineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `decalineh' is based on `decaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\decaheteroh[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following old definition has been stopped using. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw}
+% \cs{ylfusedposition}, 
+% \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{@@ylii}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@yli}, 
+% \cs{@yli}, \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/30}{Add: fused rings}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{decalineh}: Old definition deleted.}
+%
+% \section{Naphthalene and naphtoquinone derivatives}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\naphdrv| (|\naphthalenev|) is used for drawing 
+% naphthalene derivatives 
+% of vertical type as well as naphthoquinone derivatives of 
+% vertical type. The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\decalinev|. 
+% 
+% The macro |\naphdrv| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{naphthalenev} added}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************************
+% * naphthalene and naphthoquinone derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)                           *
+% **********************************************
+%
+%   \naphdrv[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \naphthalenev[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters.  
+%
+% The character `A' is used for designating an aromatic bond pattern, in 
+% which each of the six-membered rings has a central circle. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OPT (bond pattern)
+%
+%           none       :  naphthalene
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `p' or two characters (p?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate a p-quinone nucleus, which is present in the 
+% right-hand ring for the case of `p' or `pa' and in the 
+% left-hand ring for the case of `pb'.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%           p or pa    :  1,4-quinone (A) left aromatic, right quinone
+%           pb         :  1,4-quinone (B) right aromatic, left quinone
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `o' or two characters (o?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate an o-quinone nucleus in either side of the fused ring. 
+% The second character of each argument indicates one of the possible 
+% type of bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%           o or oa    :  o-quinone (A)
+%           ob         :  o-quinone (B)
+%           oc         :  o-quinone (C)
+%           od         :  o-quinone (D)
+%           oe         :  o-quinone (E)
+%           of         :  o-quinone (F)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `q' or two characters (q?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate an 2,6-, 1,5- or 1,7-quinone nucleus. 
+% The second character of each argument indicates one of the possible 
+% type of bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%           q or qa    :  2,6-quinone (A)
+%           qb         :  2,6-quinone (B)  3,7
+%           qc         :  1,5-quinone (C)
+%           qd         :  1,5-quinone (D)  4,8
+%           qe         :  1,7-quinone (E)
+%           qf         :  1,7-quinone (F)  2,8
+%           qg         :  1,7-quinone (G)  4,6
+%           qh         :  1,7-quinone (H)  3,5
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `P' or two characters (P?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate a 1,4,5,8- or 1,2,5,8-quinone nucleus. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%           P or Pa    :  1,4,5,8-quinone (A)
+%           Pb         :  1,2,5,8-quinone (B)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `Q' or `O' or two characters (O?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate quinone nuclei of remaining types. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%           Q          :  1,2,3,4-quinone
+%
+%           O or Oa    :  1,2,5,6-quinone (A)
+%           Ob         :  1,2,7,8-quinone (B)
+%           Oc         :  1,2,3,5-quinone (C)
+%           Od         :  1,2,3,7-quinone (D)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        \naphdrv{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \naphdrv[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\naphdrv}
+% \begin{macro}{\naphthalenev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\naphdrv{\@ifnextchar[{\@naphdrv}{\@naphdrv[r]}}
+\def\@naphdrv[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `naphdrv' is based on `decalinev'.}\fi%
+ \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%
+\if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+  \decalinev[acfhk]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+  \decalinev[AB]{#2}%
+%
+\else\if\@tmpa p%p-quinone
+ \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+  \decalinev[bfhk]{#2}%
+ \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+  \decalinev[bfhk]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+  \decalinev[acgk]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi%
+\else%
+ \if\@tmpa o%o-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+   \decalinev[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+   \decalinev[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%o-quinone (B)
+   \decalinev[dfhj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%o-quinone (C)
+   \decalinev[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%o-quinone (D)
+   \decalinev[achk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%o-quinone (E)
+   \decalinev[acei]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%o-quinone (F)
+   \decalinev[acfk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi%
+%%%
+\else\if\@tmpa q%various quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)2,6-type
+   \decalinev[cehj]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)2,6-type
+   \decalinev[cehj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%2,6-quinone (B)
+   \decalinev[adfi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%1,5-quinone (C)
+   \decalinev[bdgi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%1,5-quinone (D)
+   \decalinev[begj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%1,7-quinone (E)
+   \decalinev[bdfi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%1,7-quinone (F)
+   \decalinev[cegj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb g%1,7-quinone (G)
+   \decalinev[behj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb h%1,7-quinone (H)
+   \decalinev[adgi]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa P%quinone having 4 carbonyl groups
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)1,4,5,8-type
+   \decalinev[bgk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)1,4,5,8-type
+   \decalinev[bgk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)1,2,5,8-type
+   \decalinev[cgk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa Q%1,2,3,4
+   \decalinev[fhk]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa O%quinone having 4 carbonyl groups
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)1,2,5,6-type
+   \decalinev[chk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)1,2,5,6-type
+   \decalinev[chk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)1,2,7,8-type
+   \decalinev[cfk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)1,2,3,5-type
+   \decalinev[dgi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d% (D)1,2,3,7-type
+   \decalinev[dfi]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% added 1998/11/23 by S. Fujita
+   \decalinev[@#1]{#2}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \naphdrv macro
+\let\naphthalenev=\naphdrv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-bottom type}
+%
+% The macro |\naphdrvb| (|\naphthalenevb|) is used for drawing 
+% naphthalene derivatives 
+% of vertical-bottom type as well as naphthoquinone derivatives of 
+% vertical-bottom type. The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\decalinevb|. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{Newly added command}
+% 
+% The macro |\naphdrvb| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{naphthalenevb} added}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************************
+% * naphthalene and naphthoquinone derivatives *
+% *  (vertical-bottom type)                    *
+% **********************************************
+%
+%   \naphdrvb[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \naphthalenevb[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters.  
+%
+% The character `A' is used for designating an aromatic bond pattern, in 
+% which each of the six-membered rings has a central circle. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OPT (bond pattern)
+%
+%           none       :  naphthalene
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `p' or two characters (p?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate a p-quinone nucleus, which is present in the 
+% right-hand ring for the case of `p' or `pa' and in the 
+% left-hand ring for the case of `pb'.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%           p or pa    :  1,4-quinone (A) left aromatic, right quinone
+%           pb         :  1,4-quinone (B) right aromatic, left quinone
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `o' or two characters (o?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate an o-quinone nucleus in either side of the fused ring. 
+% The second character of each argument indicates one of the possible 
+% type of bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%           o or oa    :  o-quinone (A)
+%           ob         :  o-quinone (B)
+%           oc         :  o-quinone (C)
+%           od         :  o-quinone (D)
+%           oe         :  o-quinone (E)
+%           of         :  o-quinone (F)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `q' or two characters (q?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate an 2,6-, 1,5- or 1,7-quinone nucleus. 
+% The second character of each argument indicates one of the possible 
+% type of bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%           q or qa    :  2,6-quinone (A)
+%           qb         :  2,6-quinone (B)  3,7
+%           qc         :  1,5-quinone (C)
+%           qd         :  1,5-quinone (D)  4,8
+%           qe         :  1,7-quinone (E)
+%           qf         :  1,7-quinone (F)  2,8
+%           qg         :  1,7-quinone (G)  4,6
+%           qh         :  1,7-quinone (H)  3,5
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `P' or two characters (P?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate a 1,4,5,8- or 1,2,5,8-quinone nucleus. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%           P or Pa    :  1,4,5,8-quinone (A)
+%           Pb         :  1,2,5,8-quinone (B)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `Q' or `O' or two characters (O?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate quinone nuclei of remaining types. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%           Q          :  1,2,3,4-quinone
+%
+%           O or Oa    :  1,2,5,6-quinone (A)
+%           Ob         :  1,2,7,8-quinone (B)
+%           Oc         :  1,2,3,5-quinone (C)
+%           Od         :  1,2,3,7-quinone (D)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        \naphdrvb{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \naphdrvb[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\naphdrvb}
+% \begin{macro}{\napphathaleneb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\naphdrvb{\@ifnextchar[{\@naphdrvb}{\@naphdrvb[r]}}
+\def\@naphdrvb[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `naphdrvb' is based on `decalinevb'.}\fi%
+ \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%
+\if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+  \decalinevb[acfhk]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+  \decalinevb[AB]{#2}%
+%
+\else\if\@tmpa p%p-quinone
+ \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+  \decalinevb[bfhk]{#2}%
+ \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+  \decalinevb[bfhk]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+  \decalinevb[acgk]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi%
+\else%
+ \if\@tmpa o%o-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+   \decalinevb[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+   \decalinevb[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%o-quinone (B)
+   \decalinevb[dfhj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%o-quinone (C)
+   \decalinevb[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%o-quinone (D)
+   \decalinevb[achk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%o-quinone (E)
+   \decalinevb[acei]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%o-quinone (F)
+   \decalinevb[acfk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi%
+%%%
+\else\if\@tmpa q%various quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)2,6-type
+   \decalinevb[cehj]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)2,6-type
+   \decalinevb[cehj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%2,6-quinone (B)
+   \decalinevb[adfi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%1,5-quinone (C)
+   \decalinevb[bdgi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%1,5-quinone (D)
+   \decalinevb[begj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%1,7-quinone (E)
+   \decalinevb[bdfi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%1,7-quinone (F)
+   \decalinevb[cegj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb g%1,7-quinone (G)
+   \decalinevb[behj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb h%1,7-quinone (H)
+   \decalinevb[adgi]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa P%quinone having 4 carbonyl groups
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)1,4,5,8-type
+   \decalinevb[bgk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)1,4,5,8-type
+   \decalinevb[bgk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)1,2,5,8-type
+   \decalinevb[cgk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa Q%1,2,3,4
+   \decalinevb[fhk]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa O%quinone having 4 carbonyl groups
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)1,2,5,6-type
+   \decalinevb[chk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)1,2,5,6-type
+   \decalinevb[chk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)1,2,7,8-type
+   \decalinevb[cfk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)1,2,3,5-type
+   \decalinevb[dgi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d% (D)1,2,3,7-type
+   \decalinevb[dfi]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% added 1998/11/23 by S. Fujita
+   \decalinevb[@#1]{#2}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \naphdrvb macro
+\let\naphthalenevb=\naphdrvb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-top type}
+%
+% The macro |\naphdrvt| (|\naphthalenevt|) is used for drawing 
+% naphthalene derivatives 
+% of vertical-top type as well as naphthoquinone derivatives of 
+% vertical-top type. The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\decalinevt|. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{Newly added command}
+% 
+% The macro |\naphdrvt| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{naphthalenevt} added}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************************
+% * naphthalene and naphthoquinone derivatives *
+% *  (vertical-top type)                       *
+% **********************************************
+%
+%   \naphdrvt[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \naphthalenevt[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters.  
+%
+% The character `A' is used for designating an aromatic bond pattern, in 
+% which each of the six-membered rings has a central circle. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OPT (bond pattern)
+%
+%           none       :  naphthalene
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `p' or two characters (p?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate a p-quinone nucleus, which is present in the 
+% right-hand ring for the case of `p' or `pa' and in the 
+% left-hand ring for the case of `pb'.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%           p or pa    :  1,4-quinone (A) left aromatic, right quinone
+%           pb         :  1,4-quinone (B) right aromatic, left quinone
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `o' or two characters (o?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate an o-quinone nucleus in either side of the fused ring. 
+% The second character of each argument indicates one of the possible 
+% type of bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%           o or oa    :  o-quinone (A)
+%           ob         :  o-quinone (B)
+%           oc         :  o-quinone (C)
+%           od         :  o-quinone (D)
+%           oe         :  o-quinone (E)
+%           of         :  o-quinone (F)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `q' or two characters (q?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate an 2,6-, 1,5- or 1,7-quinone nucleus. 
+% The second character of each argument indicates one of the possible 
+% type of bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%           q or qa    :  2,6-quinone (A)
+%           qb         :  2,6-quinone (B)  3,7
+%           qc         :  1,5-quinone (C)
+%           qd         :  1,5-quinone (D)  4,8
+%           qe         :  1,7-quinone (E)
+%           qf         :  1,7-quinone (F)  2,8
+%           qg         :  1,7-quinone (G)  4,6
+%           qh         :  1,7-quinone (H)  3,5
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `P' or two characters (P?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate a 1,4,5,8- or 1,2,5,8-quinone nucleus. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%           P or Pa    :  1,4,5,8-quinone (A)
+%           Pb         :  1,2,5,8-quinone (B)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% One character `Q' or `O' or two characters (O?) in the |OPT| argument 
+% designate quinone nuclei of remaining types. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%           Q          :  1,2,3,4-quinone
+%
+%           O or Oa    :  1,2,5,6-quinone (A)
+%           Ob         :  1,2,7,8-quinone (B)
+%           Oc         :  1,2,3,5-quinone (C)
+%           Od         :  1,2,3,7-quinone (D)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        \naphdrvt{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \naphdrvt[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\naphdrvt}
+% \begin{macro}{\naphthalenevt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\naphdrvt{\@ifnextchar[{\@naphdrvt}{\@naphdrvt[r]}}
+\def\@naphdrvt[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `naphdrvt' is based on `decalinevt'.}\fi%
+ \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%
+\if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+  \decalinevt[acfhk]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+  \decalinevt[AB]{#2}%
+%
+\else\if\@tmpa p%p-quinone
+ \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+  \decalinevt[bfhk]{#2}%
+ \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+  \decalinevt[bfhk]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+  \decalinevt[acgk]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi%
+\else%
+ \if\@tmpa o%o-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+   \decalinevt[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+   \decalinevt[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%o-quinone (B)
+   \decalinevt[dfhj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%o-quinone (C)
+   \decalinevt[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%o-quinone (D)
+   \decalinevt[achk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%o-quinone (E)
+   \decalinevt[acei]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%o-quinone (F)
+   \decalinevt[acfk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi%
+%%%
+\else\if\@tmpa q%various quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)2,6-type
+   \decalinevt[cehj]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)2,6-type
+   \decalinevt[cehj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%2,6-quinone (B)
+   \decalinevt[adfi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%1,5-quinone (C)
+   \decalinevt[bdgi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%1,5-quinone (D)
+   \decalinevt[begj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%1,7-quinone (E)
+   \decalinevt[bdfi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%1,7-quinone (F)
+   \decalinevt[cegj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb g%1,7-quinone (G)
+   \decalinevt[behj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb h%1,7-quinone (H)
+   \decalinevt[adgi]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa P%quinone having 4 carbonyl groups
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)1,4,5,8-type
+   \decalinevt[bgk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)1,4,5,8-type
+   \decalinevt[bgk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)1,2,5,8-type
+   \decalinevt[cgk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa Q%1,2,3,4
+   \decalinevt[fhk]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa O%quinone having 4 carbonyl groups
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)1,2,5,6-type
+   \decalinevt[chk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)1,2,5,6-type
+   \decalinevt[chk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)1,2,7,8-type
+   \decalinevt[cfk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)1,2,3,5-type
+   \decalinevt[dgi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d% (D)1,2,3,7-type
+   \decalinevt[dfi]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% added 1998/11/23 by S. Fujita
+   \decalinevt[@#1]{#2}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \naphdrvt macro
+\let\naphthalenevt=\naphdrvt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\naphdrh| is used for drawing naphthalene derivatives 
+% of horizontal type as well as naphtoquinone derivatives of 
+% horizontal type. The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\decalineh|. 
+% 
+% The macro |\naphdrh| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{naphthaleneh} added}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************************
+% * naphthalene and naphthoquinone derivatives *
+% *  (horizontal type)                         *
+% **********************************************
+%
+%   \naphdrh[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \naphthaleneh[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters for designate
+% aromatic bond patterns or for naphthoquinone bond patterns. 
+% The meaning of these characters is the same as described in 
+% the definition of the macro |\naphdrv|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OPT (bond pattern)
+%
+%           none       :  naphthalene
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%
+%           p or pa    :  1,4-quinone (A) left aromatic, right quinone
+%           pb         :  1,4-quinone (B) right aromatic, left quinone
+%
+%           o or oa    :  o-quinone (A)
+%           ob         :  o-quinone (B)
+%           oc         :  o-quinone (C)
+%           od         :  o-quinone (D)
+%           oe         :  o-quinone (E)
+%           of         :  o-quinone (F)
+%
+%           q or qa    :  2,6-quinone (A)
+%           qb         :  2,6-quinone (B)  3,7
+%           qc         :  1,5-quinone (C)
+%           qd         :  1,5-quinone (D)  4,8
+%           qe         :  1,7-quinone (E)
+%           qf         :  1,7-quinone (F)  2,8
+%           qg         :  1,7-quinone (G)  4,6
+%           qh         :  1,7-quinone (H)  3,5
+%
+%           P or Pa    :  1,4,5,8-quinone (A)
+%           Pb         :  1,2,5,8-quinone (B)
+%
+%           Q          :  1,2,3,4-quinone
+%
+%           O or Oa    :  1,2,5,6-quinone (A)
+%           Ob         :  1,2,7,8-quinone (B)
+%           Oc         :  1,2,3,5-quinone (C)
+%           Od         :  1,2,3,7-quinone (D)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        \naphdrh{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \naphdrh[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\naphdrh}
+% \begin{macro}{\naphthaleneh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\naphdrh{\@ifnextchar[{\@naphdrh}{\@naphdrh[r]}}
+\def\@naphdrh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `nathdrh' is based on `decalineh'.}\fi%
+ \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%
+\if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+  \decalineh[acfhk]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+  \decalineh[AB]{#2}%
+%
+\else\if\@tmpa p%p-quinone
+ \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+  \decalineh[bfhk]{#2}%
+ \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+  \decalineh[bfhk]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+  \decalineh[acgk]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi%
+\else%
+ \if\@tmpa o%o-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)
+   \decalineh[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+   \decalineh[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%o-quinone (B)
+   \decalineh[dfhj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%o-quinone (C)
+   \decalineh[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%o-quinone (D)
+   \decalineh[achk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%o-quinone (E)
+   \decalineh[acei]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%o-quinone (F)
+   \decalineh[acfk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi%
+% %%
+\else\if\@tmpa q%various quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)2,6-type
+   \decalineh[cehj]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)2,6-type
+   \decalineh[cehj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b%2,6-quinone (B)
+   \decalineh[adfi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c%1,5-quinone (C)
+   \decalineh[bdgi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d%1,5-quinone (D)
+   \decalineh[begj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb e%1,7-quinone (E)
+   \decalineh[bdfi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb f%1,7-quinone (F)
+   \decalineh[cegj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb g%1,7-quinone (G)
+   \decalineh[behj]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb h%1,7-quinone (H)
+   \decalineh[adgi]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa P%quinone having 4 carbonyl groups
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)1,4,5,8-type
+   \decalineh[bgk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)1,4,5,8-type
+   \decalineh[bgk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)1,2,5,8-type
+   \decalineh[cgk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi%
+\else\if\@tmpa Q%1,2,3,4
+   \decalineh[fhk]{#2}%
+\else\if\@tmpa O%quinone having 4 carbonyl groups
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)1,2,5,6-type
+   \decalineh[chk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)1,2,5,6-type
+   \decalineh[chk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)1,2,7,8-type
+   \decalineh[cfk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)1,2,3,5-type
+   \decalineh[dgi]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb d% (D)1,2,3,7-type
+   \decalineh[dfi]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% added 1998/11/23 by S. Fujita
+   \decalineh[@#1]{#2}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \naphdrh macro
+\let\naphthaleneh=\naphdrh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Tetraline derivatives}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\tetralinev| is used for drawing naphthalene derivatives 
+% of vertical type as well as naphthoquinone derivatives of 
+% vertical type. The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\decalinev|. 
+% 
+% The macro |\tetralinev| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************
+% * tetraline derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)      *
+% *************************
+%
+%   \tetralinev[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters for designate
+% aromatic bond patterns or for naphthoquinone bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     OPT = none       :  tetraline
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%
+%           e or ea    :  1,2-double bond
+%           eb         :  2,3-double bond
+%           ec         :  3,4-double bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%        for n=5 or 8 
+%
+%           nSa        :  bias bond
+%                        This option can be used to avoid over-crowding 
+%                        betweem 1 and 8 or between 4 and 5. 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \tetralinev{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \tetralinev[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \tetralinev[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetralinev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetralinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@tetralinev}{\@tetralinev[r]}}
+\def\@tetralinev[#1]#2{%
+ \iforigpt \typeout{command `tetralinev' is based on `decalinev'.}\fi%
+ \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%
+ \if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+    \decalinev[fhk]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+    \decalinev[A]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa e%inner double bond
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \decalinev[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \decalinev[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+    \decalinev[bfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)
+    \decalinev[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else%1998/11/23 by Shinsaku Fujita
+    \decalinev[@#1]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \tetralinev macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-bottom type}
+%
+% The macro |\tetralinevb| is used for drawing naphthalene derivatives 
+% of vertical-bottom type as well as naphthoquinone derivatives of 
+% vertical type. The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\decalinevb|. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{Newly added command}
+% 
+% The macro |\tetralinevb| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************
+% * tetraline derivatives        *
+% *  (vertical-bottom type)      *
+% ********************************
+%
+%   \tetralinevb[OPT]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters for designate
+% aromatic bond patterns or for naphthoquinone bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     OPT = none       :  tetraline
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%
+%           e or ea    :  1,2-double bond
+%           eb         :  2,3-double bond
+%           ec         :  3,4-double bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%        for n=5 or 8 
+%
+%           nSa        :  bias bond
+%                        This option can be used to avoid over-crowding 
+%                        betweem 1 and 8 or between 4 and 5. 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \tetralinevb{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \tetralinevb[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \tetralinevb[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetralinevb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetralinevb{\@ifnextchar[{\@tetralinevb}{\@tetralinevb[r]}}
+\def\@tetralinevb[#1]#2{%
+ \iforigpt \typeout{command `tetralinevb' is based on `decalinevb'.}\fi%
+ \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%
+ \if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+    \decalinevb[fhK]{#2}%  %[fhK] in place of [fhk]
+ \else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+    \decalinevb[A]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa e%inner double bond
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \decalinevb[afhK]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \decalinevb[afhK]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+    \decalinevb[bfhK]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)
+    \decalinevb[cfhK]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else%1998/11/23 by Shinsaku Fujita
+    \decalinevb[@#1]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \tetralinevb macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-top type}
+%
+% The macro |\tetralinevt| is used for drawing naphthalene derivatives 
+% of vertical-top type as well as naphthoquinone derivatives of 
+% vertical type. The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are
+% drawn directly, while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by 
+% useing the inner macro |\decalinevt|. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{Newly added command}
+% 
+% The macro |\tetralinevt| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************
+% * tetraline derivatives        *
+% *  (vertical-bottom type)      *
+% ********************************
+%
+%   \tetralinevt[OPT]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters for designate
+% aromatic bond patterns or for naphthoquinone bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     OPT = none       :  tetraline
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%
+%           e or ea    :  1,2-double bond
+%           eb         :  2,3-double bond
+%           ec         :  3,4-double bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%        for n=5 or 8 
+%
+%           nSa        :  bias bond
+%                        This option can be used to avoid over-crowding 
+%                        betweem 1 and 8 or between 4 and 5. 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \tetralinevt{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \tetralinevt[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \tetralinevt[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetralinevt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetralinevt{\@ifnextchar[{\@tetralinevt}{\@tetralinevt[r]}}
+\def\@tetralinevt[#1]#2{%
+ \iforigpt \typeout{command `tetralinevt' is based on `decalinevt'.}\fi%
+ \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%
+ \if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+    \decalinevt[fhk]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+    \decalinevt[A]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa e%inner double bond
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \decalinevt[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \decalinevt[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+    \decalinevt[bfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)
+    \decalinevt[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else%1998/11/23 by Shinsaku Fujita
+    \decalinevt[@#1]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \tetralinevt macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\tetralineh| is used for drawing tetraline derivatives 
+% of horizontal type. 
+% 
+% The macro |\tetralineh| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************
+% * tetraline derivatives *
+% *  (horizontal type)    *
+% *************************
+%
+%   \tetralineh[OPT]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters for designate
+% aromatic bond patterns or for naphthoquinone bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OPT = none       :  tetraline
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%
+%           e or ea    :  1,2-double bond
+%           eb         :  2,3-double bond
+%           ec         :  3,4-double bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%        for n=5 or 8 
+%
+%           nSa        :  bias bond
+%                        This option can be used to avoid over-crowding 
+%                        betweem 1 and 8 or between 4 and 5. 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \tetralineh{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \tetralineh[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \tetralineh[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetralineh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetralineh{\@ifnextchar[{\@tetralineh}{\@tetralineh[r]}}
+\def\@tetralineh[#1]#2{%
+ \iforigpt \typeout{command `tetralineh' is based on `decalineh'.}\fi%
+ \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%
+ \if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+    \decalineh[fhk]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+    \decalineh[A]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa e%inner double bond
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \decalineh[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \decalineh[afhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+    \decalineh[bfhk]{#2}%
+  \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)
+    \decalineh[cfhk]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% added 1998/11/23 by S. Fujita
+   \decalineh[@#1]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \tetralineh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Anthracene derivatives}
+% \subsection{Perhydro-anthracene derivatives of Vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\hanthracenev| is used for drawing perhydroanthracene 
+% derivatives of vertical type. 
+% 
+% The macro |\hanthracenev| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************************
+% * perhydro anthracene derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)                *
+% ***********************************
+%
+%   \hanthracenev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to p, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. The character A, B, or C indicates an aromatic bond 
+% pattern (circle). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{BONDLIST: o, O, p and P at the fused bond}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  hanthracene
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond
+%           d          :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e          :  10,4a-double bond
+%           f          :  10,10a-double bond
+%           g          :  5,10a-double bond
+%           h          :  5,6-double bond
+%           i          :  6,7-double bond
+%           j          :  8,7-double bond
+%           k          :  8,8a-double bond
+%           l          :  9,8a-double bond
+%           m          :  9,9a-double bond
+%           n          :  1,9a-double bond
+%           o          :  4a,9a-double bond
+%           O          :  4a,9a-double bond in the other ring
+%           p          :  10a,8a-double bond
+%           P          :  10a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A          :  right aromatic circle 
+%           B          :  central aromatic circle 
+%           C          :  left aromatic circle 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 10
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%        for 11 (fused positions, 9a and 4a) 
+%
+%           11FA       :  alpha single bond at 9a 
+%           11FB       :  beta single bond at 9a
+%           11FU       :  unspecified single bond at 9a
+%           11GA       :  alpha single bond at 4a 
+%           11GB       :  beta single bond at 4a
+%           11GU       :  unspecified single bond at 4a
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%        for 12 (fused positions, 8a and 10a) 
+%
+%           12FA       :  alpha single bond at 8a 
+%           12FB       :  beta single bond at 8a
+%           12FU       :  unspecified single bond at 8a
+%           12GA       :  alpha single bond at 10a 
+%           12GB       :  beta single bond at 10a
+%           12GU       :  unspecified single bond at 10a
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \hanthracenev{1==Cl;2==F;{{10}}==OH}
+%        \hanthracenev[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$;
+%            {{11}FA}==OH;{{11}FB}==OH}
+%        \hanthracenev[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{The command \cs{setdecaringv} has 
+% been stopped to use.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw}
+% \cs{ylfusedposition}, 
+% \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{@@ylii}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@yli}, 
+% \cs{@yli}, \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Added: fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hanthracenev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hanthracenev{\@ifnextchar[{\@hanthracenev[@}{\@hanthracenev[r]}}
+\def\@hanthracenev[#1]#2{%
+% bonds for outer skeleton
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\ylposition{#2}{-7}{0}{2}{0}%  %for 8 positions
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else\ylposition{#2}{-1}{3}{7}{0}% for 5 to 7 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#2}{0}{0}{5}{0}% for 1 to 4 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-684}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-8}{0}{2}{0}%for 9-position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-6}{3}{5}{0}%for 10-position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylfusedposition{#2}{-11}{-1}{1}{0}% for 9a and 4a
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylfusedposition{#2}{-12}{-1}{1}{0}% for 8a and 10a
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii 
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli 
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(1200,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+  \origptoutput{hanthracenev}%
+\fi
+  \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){171}%       %bond 8-7
+  \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){171}%        %bond 8-8a
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){171}%          %bond 5-6
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){171}%           %bond 5-10a
+  \Put@Line(171,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 10a-8a
+  \Put@Line(-171,103)(0,1){200}%      %bond 6-7
+  \Put@Line(342,406)(-5,-3){171}%     %bond 9-8a
+  \Put@Line(342,406)(5,-3){171}%      %bond 9-9a
+  \Put@Line(342,0)(-5,3){171}%        %bond 10-10a
+  \Put@Line(342,0)(5,3){171}%         %bond 10-4a
+  \Put@Line(513,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 4a-9a
+  %%%%
+  \Put@Line(684,406)(-5,-3){171}%     %bond 1-9a    1-6
+  \Put@Line(684,406)(5,-3){171}%      %bond 1-2     1-2
+  \Put@Line(855,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 3-2     3-2
+  \Put@Line(684,0)(5,3){171}%         %bond 4-3     4-3
+  \Put@Line(684,0)(-5,3){171}%        %bond 4-4a    4-5
+% inner double bonds
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic double bonds
+\else\if\member a%
+  \Put@Line(690,364)(5,-3){126}%      %double bond 1-2
+\else\if\member b%
+  \Put@Line(822,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 3-2
+\else\if\member c%
+  \Put@Line(690,42)(5,3){126}%        %double bond 4-3
+\else\if\member d%
+  \Put@Line(690,42)(-5,3){126}%       %double bond 4-4a
+\else\if\member e%
+  \Put@Line(348,42)(5,3){126}%        %double bond 10-4a
+\else\if\member f%
+  \Put@Line(348,42)(-5,3){126}%       %double bond 10-10a
+\else\if\member g%
+  \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){126}%          %double bond 5-10a
+\else\if\member h%
+  \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){126}%        %double bond 5-6
+\else\if\member i%
+  \Put@Line(-138,129)(0,1){148}%      %double bond 6-7
+\else\if\member j%
+  \Put@Line(-6,364)(-5,-3){126}%      %double bond 8-7
+\else\if\member k%
+  \Put@Line(6,364)(5,-3){126}%        %double bond 8-8a   
+\else\if\member l%
+  \Put@Line(348,364)(-5,-3){126}%     %double bond 9-8a
+\else\if\member m%
+  \Put@Line(348,364)(5,-3){126}%      %double bond 9-9a
+\else\if\member n%
+  \Put@Line(690,364)(-5,-3){126}%     %double bond 1-9a
+\else\if\member o%
+  \Put@Line(544,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 4a-9a
+\else\if\member O%
+  \Put@Line(482,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 4a-9a at the other ring
+\else\if\member p%
+  \Put@Line(138,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 10a-8a
+\else\if\member P%
+  \Put@Line(204,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 10a-8a at the other ring
+\else\if\member C%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%            %circle
+\else\if\member B%right aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(342,203){240}%          %circle
+\else\if\member A%right aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(684,203){240}%          %circle
+\else
+%setting fused rings
+  \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+  \set@fusion@hanthrav
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%exocyclic bonds and substituents
+\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#2}{-7}{0}{2}{0}}%  %for 8 positions
+\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#2}{-1}{3}{7}{0}}%  %for 5 to 7 positions
+\Put@Direct(684,0){\setsixringv{#2}{0}{0}{5}{0}}% %for 1 to 4 positions
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setsixringv{#2}{-8}{0}{2}{0}}%for 9-position
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setsixringv{#2}{-6}{3}{5}{0}}%for 10-position
+%bonds and substituents for fused positions
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setfusedbond{#2}{-12}{-1}{1}{0}}% for 8a and 10a
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setfusedbond{#2}{-11}{-1}{1}{0}}% for 9a and 4a
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \hanthracenev macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Anthracene and anthraquinone derivatives}
+%
+% The macro |\anthracenev| is used for drawing anthracene derivatives 
+% of vertical type. 
+% 
+% The macro |\anthracenev| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************************
+% * anthracene and anthraquinone derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)                         *
+% ********************************************
+%
+%   \anthracenev[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters for designate
+% aromatic bond patterns or for naphthoquinone bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OPT (bond pattern) 
+%
+%           none or r  :  right-handed double bonds
+%           l          :  left-handed double bonds
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%
+%           p or pa    :  9,10-anthraquinone (A) 
+%           pA         :  9,10-anthraquinone (circle type)
+%
+%           o          :  1,2-anthraquinone (A)
+%           oa         :  1,2-anthraquinone (A')
+%           oA         :  1,2-anthraquinone (circle type)
+%           ob         :  2,3-antharquinone (B)
+%           oc         :  1,2-anthraquinone (C)
+%
+%           q          :  1,4-anthraquinone (A)
+%           qa         :  1,4-anthraquinone (A')
+%           qA         :  1,4-anthraquinone (circle type)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 10
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \anthracenev{1==Cl;2==F;0FA==;0GA==}
+%        \anthracenev[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \anthracenev[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;%
+%             5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\anthracenev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\anthracenev{\@ifnextchar[{\@anthracenev}{\@anthracenev[r]}}
+\def\@anthracenev[#1]#2{%
+ \iforigpt \typeout{command `anthracenev' is %
+                    based on `hanthracenev'.}\fi%
+%% \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%error1998/11/23 by Shinsaku Fujita
+ \expandafter\twoCH@R#1//%
+ \if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+    \hanthracenev[acflhjo]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa l% left-handed set of double bonds
+    \hanthracenev[acehjmp]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+    \hanthracenev[ABC]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa p%9,10-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \hanthracenev[achjop]{#2}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \hanthracenev[achjop]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A% circle type
+    \hanthracenev[AC]{#2}%
+   \else 
+    \hanthracenev[achjop]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi%
+ \else\if\@tmpa o%o-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \hanthracenev[cfjhlo]{#2}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \hanthracenev[cehjmp]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+    \hanthracenev[dfhjln]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)
+    \hanthracenev[aehjmp]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A% cicle type
+    \hanthracenev[cBC]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else\if\@tmpa q%1,4-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \hanthracenev[bfhjlo]{#2}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \hanthracenev[behjmp]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A% circle type
+    \hanthracenev[bBC]{#2}%
+   \else% 
+    \hanthracenev[behjmp]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi%
+ \else
+    \hanthracenev[@#1]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \anthracenev macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Phenanthrene derivatives}
+% \subsection{Perhydro-phenanthrene derivatives of Vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\hphenanthrenev| is used for drawing perhydrophenanthrene 
+% derivatives of vertical type. 
+% 
+% The macro |\hphenanthrenev| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an 
+% optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************************
+% * perhydro phenanthrene derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)                  *
+% *************************************
+%
+%   \hphenanthrenev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to p, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. The character A, B, or C indicates an aromatic bond 
+% pattern (circle). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{BONDLIST: o, O, p and P at the fused bond}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  hphenanthrene
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond
+%           d          :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e          :  4a,4b-double bond
+%           f          :  4b,5-double bond
+%           g          :  5,6-double bond
+%           h          :  6,7-double bond
+%           i          :  7,8-double bond
+%           j          :  8,8a-double bond
+%           k          :  8a,9-double bond
+%           l          :  9,10-double bond
+%           m          :  10,10a-double bond
+%           n          :  1,10a-double bond
+%           o          :  4a,10a-double bond
+%           O          :  4a,10a-double bond in the other ring
+%           p          :  4b,8a-double bond
+%           P          :  4b,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A          :  right aromatic circle 
+%           B          :  central aromatic circle 
+%           C          :  left aromatic circle 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 10
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%        for 11 (fused positions, 4a and 10a) 
+%
+%           11FA       :  alpha single bond at 4a 
+%           11FB       :  beta single bond at 4a
+%           11FC       :  alpha single bond (downward) at 4a 
+%           11FD       :  beta single bond (downward) at 4a
+%           11FU       :  unspecified single bond at 4a
+%           11GA       :  alpha single bond at 10a 
+%           11GB       :  beta single bond at 10a
+%           11FC       :  alpha single bond (upward) at 10a
+%           11FD       :  beta single bond (upward) at 10a
+%           11GU       :  unspecified single bond at 10a
+%
+%        for 12 (fused positions, 4b and 8a) 
+%
+%           12FA       :  alpha single bond at 4b 
+%           12FB       :  beta single bond at 4b
+%           12FU       :  unspecified single bond at 4b
+%           12GA       :  alpha single bond at 8a 
+%           12GB       :  beta single bond at 8a
+%           12GU       :  unspecified single bond at 8a
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \hphenanthrenev{1==Cl;2==F;{{10}}==OH}
+%        \hphenanthrenev[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$;
+%            {{11}FA}==OH;{{11}FB}==OH}
+%        \hphenanthrenev[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;
+%                   5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/15}{The command \cs{setdecaringv} has 
+% been stopped to use.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw}
+% \cs{ylfusedposition}, 
+% \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{@@ylii}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@yli}, 
+% \cs{@yli}, \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{Added: Fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hphenanthrenev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hphenanthrenev{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@hphenanthrenev[@}{\@hphenanthrenev[r]}}
+\def\@hphenanthrenev[#1]#2{%
+% bonds for outer skeleton
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\ylposition{#2}{-4}{0}{2}{0}%   %for 5 position
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{12}{3}{7}{-1}%   %for 6 to 8 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#2}{13}{2}{5}{-1}%   %for 9 to 10 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#2}{4}{0}{4}{-1}% %for 1 to 3 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-513}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#2}{2}{5}{7}{0}%  %for 4-position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-513}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi\else
+\ylfusedposition{#2}{-12}{-1}{1}{0}%  % for 4b and 8a
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylfusedposition{#2}{-10}{0}{2}{0}% % for 4a and 10a
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii 
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli 
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(1200,1200)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)
+  \origptoutput{hphenanthrenev}%
+\fi
+  \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){171}%       %bond 6-5
+  \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){171}%        %bond 5-4a
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){171}%          %bond 8-7
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){171}%            %bond 8-8a
+  \Put@Line(171,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 8a-4b
+  \Put@Line(-171,103)(0,1){200}%      %bond 7-6
+  \Put@Line(342,406)(-5,-3){171}%     %bond 4a-4b
+  \Put@Line(342,406)(5,-3){171}%      %bond 4a-10a
+  \Put@Line(342,0)(-5,3){171}%        %bond 9-8a
+  \Put@Line(342,0)(5,3){171}%         %bond 9-10
+  \Put@Line(513,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 10-10a
+  %%%%
+  \Put@Line(342,406)(0,1){200}%       %bond 4a-4
+  \Put@Line(513,709)(-5,-3){171}%     %bond 3-4
+  \Put@Line(513,709)(5,-3){171}%      %bond 3-2
+  \Put@Line(684,406)(0,1){200}%       %bond 1-2
+  \Put@Line(513,303)(5,3){171}%       %bond 10a-1
+% inner double bonds
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic double bonds
+\else\if\member a%
+  \Put@Line(651,432)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 1-2
+\else\if\member b%
+  \Put@Line(519,667)(5,-3){126}%      %double bond 3-2
+\else\if\member c%
+  \Put@Line(519,667)(-5,-3){126}%     %double bond 3-4
+\else\if\member d%
+  \Put@Line(375,432)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 4a-4
+\else\if\member e%
+  \Put@Line(348,364)(-5,-3){126}%     %double bond 4a-4b
+\else\if\member f%
+  \Put@Line(6,364)(5,-3){126}%        %double bond 5-4b
+\else\if\member g%
+  \Put@Line(-6,364)(-5,-3){126}%      %double bond 5-6
+\else\if\member h%
+  \Put@Line(-138,129)(0,1){148}%      %double bond 6-7
+\else\if\member i%
+  \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){126}%        %double bond 8-7
+\else\if\member j%
+  \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){126}%          %double bond 8-8a
+\else\if\member k%
+  \Put@Line(348,42)(-5,3){126}%       %double bond 9-8a
+\else\if\member l%
+  \Put@Line(348,42)(5,3){126}%        %double bond 9-10
+\else\if\member m%
+  \Put@Line(482,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 10-10a
+\else\if\member n%
+  \Put@Line(519,345)(5,3){126}%       %double bond 10a-1
+\else\if\member o%
+  \Put@Line(507,345)(-5,3){126}%      %double bond 10a-4a
+\else\if\member O%
+  \Put@Line(348,364)(5,-3){126}%     %double bond 4a-10a
+\else\if\member p%
+  \Put@Line(138,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 8a-4b
+\else\if\member P%
+  \Put@Line(204,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 8a-4b
+\else\if\member C%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%            %circle
+\else\if\member B%right aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(342,203){240}%          %circle
+\else\if\member A%right aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(513,506){240}%          %circle
+\else
+% setting fused rings
+  \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+  \set@fusion@hphenanv
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%exocyclic bonds and substituents
+\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#2}{-4}{0}{2}{0}}%   %for 5 position
+\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#2}{12}{3}{7}{-1}}%   %for 6 to 8 positions
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setsixringv{#2}{13}{2}{5}{-1}}%   %for 9 to 10 positions
+\Put@Direct(513,303){\setsixringv{#2}{4}{0}{4}{-1}}% %for 1 to 3 positions
+\Put@Direct(513,303){\setsixringv{#2}{2}{5}{7}{0}}%  %for 4-position
+%bonds and substituents for fused positions
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setfusedbond{#2}{-12}{-1}{1}{0}}%  % for 4b and 8a
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setfusedbond{#2}{-10}{0}{2}{0}}% % for 4a and 10a
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \hphenanthrenev macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Phenanthrene and phenanthroquinone derivatives}
+%
+% The macro |\phenanthrenev| is used for drawing phenanthrene derivatives 
+% of vertical type. 
+% 
+% The macro |\anthracenev| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |OPT|.  The latter designates a bond pattern in place of  
+% individual exocyclic bonds. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *********************************
+% * phenanthrene and  derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)              *
+% *********************************
+%
+%   \phenanthrenev[OPT]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |OPT| argument contains one or two characters for designate
+% aromatic bond patterns or for naphthoquinone bond patterns. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OPT (bond pattern) 
+%
+%           none or r  :  right-handed double bonds
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%
+%           p or pa    :  1,4-quinone (A) 
+%           pA         :  1,4-quinone (circle type)
+%
+%           o or oa    :  1,2-quinone (A)
+%           oA         :  1,2-quinone (circle type)
+%           ob         :  2,3-quinone (B)
+%           oc         :  3,4-anthraquinone (C)
+%
+%           q or qa    :  9,10-quinone
+%           qA         :  9,10-quinone (circle type)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 10
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \phenanthrenev{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \phenanthrenev[A]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \phenanthrenev[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;%
+%               5W==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\phenanthrenev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\phenanthrenev{\@ifnextchar[{\@phenanthrenev}{\@phenanthrenev[r]}}
+\def\@phenanthrenev[#1]#2{%
+ \iforigpt \typeout{command `phenanthrenev' is %
+    based on `hphenantherenv'.}\fi%
+ \expandafter\threech@r#1{}{}%
+ \if\@tmpa r% right-handed set of double bonds
+    \hphenanthrenev[acgilop]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa A%aromatic circle
+    \hphenanthrenev[ABC]{#2}%
+ \else\if\@tmpa p%1,4-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \hphenanthrenev[bgilop]{#2}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \hphenanthrenev[bgilop]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A% circle type
+    \hphenanthrenev[BCb]{#2}%
+   \else 
+    \hphenanthrenev[bgilop]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi%
+ \else\if\@tmpa o%o-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \hphenanthrenev[cgilop]{#2}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \hphenanthrenev[cgilop]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb b% (B)
+    \hphenanthrenev[dgilnp]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb c% (C)
+    \hphenanthrenev[agilop]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A% cicle type
+    \hphenanthrenev[cBC]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else\if\@tmpa q%9,10-quinone
+  \if\@tmpb a% (A)%
+    \hphenanthrenev[acgiop]{#2}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty% (A)
+    \hphenanthrenev[acgiop]{#2}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A% circle type
+    \hphenanthrenev[AC]{#2}%
+   \else 
+    \hphenanthrenev[acgiop]{#2}%
+  \fi\fi\fi%
+ \else 
+    \hphenanthrenev[@#1]{#2}%
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%               %end of \phenanthrenev macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Steroids}
+% \subsection{Steroids without a chain}
+%
+% The macro |\steroid| is used for drawing steroids.  
+% 
+% The macro |\steroid| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an 
+% optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************
+% * steroid derivatives *
+% ***********************
+%  
+%   \steroid[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to t, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. The character A, B, or C indicates an aromatic bond 
+% pattern (circle). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/15}{BONDLIST: k, K, h, H, o and O 
+% at the fused bond}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none:  steroid skeleton
+%           a   :  1,2-double bond        b   :  2,3-double bond
+%           c   :  3,4-double bond        d   :  4,5-double bond
+%           e   :  6,5-double bond        f   :  6,7-double bond
+%           g   :  7,8-double bond        
+%           h   :  9,8-double bond
+%           h   :  9,8-double bond in the other bond
+%           i   :  9,10-double bond       j   :  1,10-double bond
+%           k   :  5,10-double bond
+%           K   :  5,10-double bond in the other bond
+%           l   :  9,11-double bond
+%           m   :  12,11-double bond      n   :  12,13-double bond
+%           o   :  14,13-double bond
+%           O   :  14,13-double bond in the other bond
+%           p   :  8,14-double bond
+%           q   :  14,15-double bond      r   :  15,16-double bond
+%           s   :  17,16-double bond      t   :  17,13-double bond
+%           A   :  aromatic A ring        B   :  aromatic B ring
+%           C   :  aromatic C ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 17 (execpt fused positions)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For numbers larger than 9 (two digits), you should designate
+% the SUBSLIST as 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%             {{11}A}==Cl;{{12}SA}==H;{{12}SB}==Cl;
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       for n = 5,8,9,10,13 and 14 (fused positions)
+%
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nU         :  unspecified single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \steroid{1==Cl;2==F;{{10}}==OH}
+%        \steroid[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$;
+%            {{11}SA}==OH;{{11}SB}==OH}
+%        \steroid[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;
+%                   5==Cl;6==Cl;7==Cl;8==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/15}{The command \cs{setdecaringv} has 
+% been stopped to use.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw}
+% \cs{ylfusedposition}, 
+% \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{@@ylii}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@yli}, 
+% \cs{@yli}, \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Inner commands \cs{yl@steroidposition} 
+% and \cs{@steroidskeleton} are separated from the \cs{@steroid} command.}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroid}
+% \begin{macro}{\yl@steroidposition}
+% \begin{macro}{\@steroidskeleton}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\steroid{\@ifnextchar[{\@steroid[@}{\@steroid[Z]}}
+\def\@steroid[#1]#2{%
+%initialize bug fix 2010/10/01
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+% bonds for outer skeleton
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\yl@steroidposition{#2}%
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii 
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli 
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(1600,1300)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)
+  \origptoutput{steroid}%
+\fi
+  \Put@Direct(0,0){\@steroidskeleton{#1}{#2}}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \steroid macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\yl@steroidposition| is derived from |\ylposition| and 
+% |\ylatombondposition| to use in the |\steroid| command as well as 
+% in the |\steroidchain| command.
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Inner commands \cs{yl@steroidposition} 
+% and \cs{@steroidskeleton} are separated from the \cs{@steroid} command.}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\yl@steroidposition#1{%
+\ylposition{#1}{0}{0}{2}{0}%  %for 1
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#1}{8}{3}{7}{-1}%  %for 2 to 4 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#1}{10}{2}{5}{-1}% %for 6 to 7 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#1}{-11}{0}{2}{0}%for 12 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-513}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#1}{-5}{5}{7}{0}% %for 11 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-513}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#1}{18}{0}{4}{-1}%for 15 to 17 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-855}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi\else
+\ylatombondposition{#1}{-4}{7}%     % for 5
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-103}\fi\else
+\ylatombondposition{#1}{-9}{1}%     % for 10
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi\else
+\ylatombondposition{#1}{-7}{1}%     % for 8
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-513}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi\else
+\ylatombondposition{#1}{-8}{7}%     % for 9
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{-406}\fi\else
+\ylatombondposition{#1}{-13}{7}%    % for 14
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-684}\def\@@yli{-406}\fi\else
+\ylatombondposition{#1}{-12}{1}%    % for 13
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-684}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi\fi%
+}% end of \yl@steroidposition
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\@steroidskeleton| is separated from the definition of |\steroid| 
+% so as to be used also in the definition of |\steroidchain|. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Inner commands \cs{yl@steroidposition} 
+% and \cs{@steroidskeleton} are separated from the \cs{@steroid} command.}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{Added: fused rings}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@steroidskeleton#1#2{%
+  \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){171}%       %bond 1-2
+  \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){171}%        %bond 1-10
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){171}%          %bond 4-3
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){171}%           %bond 4-5
+  \Put@Line(171,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 5-10
+  \Put@Line(-171,103)(0,1){200}%      %bond 3-2
+  \Put@Line(342,406)(-5,-3){171}%     %bond 9-10
+  \Put@Line(342,406)(5,-3){171}%      %bond 9-8
+  \Put@Line(342,0)(-5,3){171}%        %bond 6-5
+  \Put@Line(342,0)(5,3){171}%         %bond 6-7
+  \Put@Line(513,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 7-8
+  %%%%
+  \Put@Line(342,406)(0,1){200}%       %bond 9-11
+  \Put@Line(513,709)(-5,-3){171}%     %bond 12-11
+  \Put@Line(513,709)(5,-3){171}%      %bond 12-13
+  \Put@Line(684,406)(0,1){200}%       %bond 14-13
+  \Put@Line(513,303)(5,3){171}%       %bond 8-14
+  %%%%
+  \Put@Line(855,709)(-5,-3){171}%     %bond 17-13
+  \Put@Line(855,709)(5,-3){171}%      %bond 17-16
+  \Put@Line(1026,406)(0,1){200}%      %bond 15-16
+  \Put@Line(684,406)(1,0){342}%       %bond 14-15
+% inner double bonds
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member Z%no endcyclic double bonds
+\else\if\member a%
+  \Put@Line(-6,364)(-5,-3){126}%      %double bond 1-2 5-6
+\else\if\member b%
+  \Put@Line(-138,129)(0,1){148}%      %double bond 3-2 6-7
+\else\if\member c%
+  \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){126}%        %double bond 4-3 8-7
+\else\if\member d%
+  \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){126}%          %double bond 4-5 8-8a
+\else\if\member e%
+  \Put@Line(348,42)(-5,3){126}%       %double bond 6-5 9-8a
+\else\if\member f%
+  \Put@Line(348,42)(5,3){126}%        %double bond 6-7 9-10
+\else\if\member g%
+  \Put@Line(482,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 7-8 10-10a
+\else\if\member h%
+  \Put@Line(507,345)(-5,3){126}%      %double bond 8-9  10a-4a
+\else\if\member H%
+  \Put@Line(348,364)(5,-3){126}%     %double bond 9-8  4a-10a
+\else\if\member i%
+  \Put@Line(348,364)(-5,-3){126}%     %double bond 9-10  4a-4b
+\else\if\member j%
+  \Put@Line(6,364)(5,-3){126}%        %double bond 1-10 5-4b
+\else\if\member k%
+  \Put@Line(138,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 5-10 8a-4b
+\else\if\member K%
+  \Put@Line(204,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 5-10 8a-4b
+\else\if\member l%
+  \Put@Line(375,432)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 9-11    4-5
+\else\if\member m%
+  \Put@Line(519,667)(-5,-3){126}%     %double bond 12-11   3-4
+\else\if\member n%
+  \Put@Line(519,667)(5,-3){126}%      %double bond 12-13   3-2
+\else\if\member o%
+  \Put@Line(651,432)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 13-14  1-2
+\else\if\member O%
+  \Put@Line(717,432)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 13-14  1-2
+\else\if\member p%
+  \Put@Line(519,345)(5,3){126}%       %double bond 8-14 10a-1
+\else\if\member q%
+  \Put@Line(720,439)(1,0){260}%       %double bond 14-15
+\else\if\member r%
+  \Put@Line(993,432)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 15-16  1-2
+\else\if\member s%
+  \Put@Line(861,667)(5,-3){126}%      %double bond 17-16   3-2
+\else\if\member t%
+  \Put@Line(861,667)(-5,-3){126}%     %double bond 17-13   3-4
+\else\if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%            %circle
+\else\if\member B%right aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(342,203){240}%          %circle
+\else\if\member C%right aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(513,506){240}%          %circle
+\else
+% setting fused rings
+  \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+  \set@fusion@steroid
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%exocyclic bonds and substituents
+\iniflag
+\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#2}{0}{0}{2}{0}}%  %for 1
+\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#2}{8}{3}{7}{-1}}%  %for 2 to 4 positions
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setsixringv{#2}{10}{2}{5}{-1}}% %for 6 to 7 positions
+\Put@Direct(513,303){\setsixringv{#2}{-11}{0}{2}{0}}%for 12 position
+\Put@Direct(513,303){\setsixringv{#2}{-5}{5}{7}{0}}% %for 11 position
+\Put@Direct(855,303){\setsixringv{#2}{18}{0}{4}{-1}}%for 15 to 17 positions
+%bonds and substituents for fused positions
+\Put@Direct(171,103){\setatombond{#2}{-4}{7}}%     % for 5
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombond{#2}{-9}{1}}%     % for 10
+\Put@Direct(513,303){\setatombond{#2}{-7}{1}}%     % for 8
+\Put@Direct(342,406){\setatombond{#2}{-8}{7}}%     % for 9
+\Put@Direct(684,406){\setatombond{#2}{-13}{7}}%    % for 14
+\Put@Direct(684,606){\setatombond{#2}{-12}{1}}%    % for 13
+}% end of \@steroidskeleton
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@steroid| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\steroidskeleton|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@steroid}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@steroid}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@steroid{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `d'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `D'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `e'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `E'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `f'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `f'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `g'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `g'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `h'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `H'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `i'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `I'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `j'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `J'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa k%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `k'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa K%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `K'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa l%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `l'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa L%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `L'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa m%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa M%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa n%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `n'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa N%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `N'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa o%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `o'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa O%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `O'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa p%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `N'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa P%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `N'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa q%
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Mismatched dimension for bond `q'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa Q%
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Mismatched dimension for bond `Q'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa r%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(855,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa R%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(855,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa s%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(855,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa S%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(855,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa t%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(855,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `t'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa T%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(855,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `T'}%
+      \fi
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@steroid
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Steroids with a chain}
+%
+% The macro |\steroidchain| is used for drawing steroids.  
+% 
+% The macro |\steroidchain| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an 
+% optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************************
+% * steroid derivatives having a chain *
+% **************************************
+%  
+%   \steroidchain[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected form a to t, each of which indicates 
+% the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding 
+% position. The character A, B, or C indicates an aromatic bond 
+% pattern (circle).  A two-character string `Z?' indicates 
+% a double bond in the side-chain. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%       (double bonds for the steroid skeleton)
+%           none:  no action on the steroid skeleton
+%           a   :  1,2-double bond        b   :  2,3-double bond
+%           c   :  3,4-double bond        d   :  4,5-double bond
+%           e   :  6,5-double bond        f   :  6,7-double bond
+%           g   :  7,8-double bond        h   :  9,8-double bond
+%           i   :  9,10-double bond       j   :  1,10-double bond
+%           k   :  5,10-double bond       l   :  9,11-double bond
+%           m   :  12,11-double bond      n   :  12,13-double bond
+%           o   :  14,13-double bond      p   :  8,14-double bond
+%           q   :  14,15-double bond      r   :  15,16-double bond
+%           s   :  17,16-double bond      t   :  17,13-double bond
+%           A   :  aromatic A ring        B   :  aromatic B ring
+%           C   :  aromatic C ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       (double bonds for the side chain)
+%           Z   :  no action
+%          Za   :  17,20-double bond     Zb   :  20,22-double bond
+%          Zc   :  22,23-double bond     Zd   :  23,24-double bond
+%          Ze   :  24,25-double bond     Zf   :  25,26-double bond
+%          Zg   :  25,27-double bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%  For a two-character indicator, you should write the BONDLIST 
+%  as, e.g.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%              [b{Za}{Zc}...]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 24 (execpt fused positions)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For numbers larger than 9 (two digits), you should designate
+% the SUBSLIST as 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%             {{11}A}==Cl;{{12}SA}==H;{{12}SB}==Cl; ...
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       for n = 5,8,9,10,13,14,and 25 (fused positions etc.)
+%
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nU         :  unspecified single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \steroidchain{1==Cl;2==F;{{10}}==OH}
+%        \steroidchain[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$;%
+%            {{11}SA}==OH;{{11}SB}==OH}
+%        \steroidchain[b]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;%
+%                   ;6==Cl;7==Cl;11==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw}
+% \cs{ylfusedposition}, 
+% \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{@@ylii}, \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@yli}, 
+% \cs{@yli}, \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{The inner commands \cs{yl@steroidposition} 
+% is used.  The old \cs{steroid} is replaced by \cs{@steroidskeleton}.}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/31}{Add: fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidchain}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\steroidchain{\@ifnextchar[{\@steroidchain[@}{\@steroidchain[Z]}}
+\def\@steroidchain[#1]#2{%
+%shift due to the steroid skeleton
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\yl@steroidposition{#2}%
+%shift due to the side chain
+\ylposition{#2}{-21}{0}{3}{0}%for 22 and 23 positions
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}%for 20 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-20}{3}{5}{0}%for 24 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1197}\def\@@yli{-709}\fi\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-24}{4}%      % for 5
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1397}\def\@@yli{-709}\fi\fi
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii 
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli 
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(2000,1500)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+  \iforigpt \typeout{command `steroidchain' is based on `steroid'.}\fi%
+\fi
+% steroid skeleton
+  \Put@Direct(0,0){\@steroidskeleton{#1}{#2}}%
+% bonds for the side chain (carbons 20 to 27 (except 21))
+  \Put@Line(855,709)(0,1){200}%       %bond 17-20
+  \Put@Line(1026,1012)(-5,-3){171}%   %bond 22-20
+  \Put@Line(1026,1012)(5,-3){171}%    %bond 22-23
+  \Put@Line(1197,709)(0,1){200}%      %bond 24-23
+  \Put@Line(1197,709)(1,0){200}%      %bond 24-25
+  \Put@Line(1397,709)(3,5){103}%      %bond 25-26
+  \Put@Line(1397,709)(3,-5){103}%     %bond 25-27
+% double bonds along the side chain
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\member//\relax%
+\if\@tmpa Z\relax%
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty%no action
+ \else\if\@tmpb a%
+  \Put@Line(888,735)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 17-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb b%
+  \Put@Line(1020,970)(-5,-3){126}%    %double bond 22-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb c%
+  \Put@Line(1032,970)(5,-3){126}%     %double bond 22-23
+ \else\if\@tmpb d%
+  \Put@Line(1164,735)(0,1){148}%      %double bond 24-23
+ \else\if\@tmpb e%
+  \Put@Line(1233,742)(1,0){140}%      %double bond 24-25
+ \else\if\@tmpb f%
+  \Put@Line(1433,715)(3,5){72}%       %double bond 25-26
+ \else\if\@tmpb g%
+  \Put@Line(1433,697)(3,-5){72}%      %double bond 25-27
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+% substitution on the side chain
+%\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-21}{0}{3}{0}}%for 22 and 23 positions
+%\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}}%for 20 position
+\Put@Direct(1197,709){\setsixringv{#2}{-20}{3}{5}{0}}%for 24 position
+\Put@Direct(1397,709){\setatombond{#2}{-24}{4}}%      % for 5
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \steroidchain macro%
+%</carom>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/carom.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/carom.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3c10ed92a68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/carom.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+\def\batchfile{carom.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996, 1988, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996 
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1998 
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.00a Released on June 14, 2000
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.01 Released on August 30, 2004
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files carom.dtx and carom.ins
+and the derived file carom.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{carom.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{carom.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{carom.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{carom.dtx}{carom}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/ccycle.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/ccycle.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e059d5564e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/ccycle.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,3481 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: ccycle.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1993,1996,1998,2001,2002,2004,2009,2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% ccycle.sty
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files ccycle.dtx and ccycle.ins
+% and the derived file ccycle.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{March 05, 1994}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01a}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 20, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 15, 2009}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.04}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 01, 2013}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.01b}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 26, 2013}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.01bb}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{3681}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.01a}{1996/06/17}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{Size reduction and Clipping information}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/21}{The command \cs{dotorline} is added.}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{sfpicture environment, etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Wedge bonds}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/6/15}{Wavy bonds}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{bond coloring and the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \changes{v5.01b}{2013/04/01}{Wavy bonds for \cs{bornane}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/24}{bornane, adamantane, hadamantane: front-to-back crossing}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/25}{bornane 7SU and 7SV added, bug fix}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/26}{bug fix, added 7SA, 7SB, 7Su, 7Sd}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/07/23}{background color}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ccycle.dtx}[2013/07/23 v5.01 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ccycle.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Further Cyclic Compounds by {\sffamily ccycle.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %% (old address)
+% %% Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% %% Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% %% Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{ccycle.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{ccycle:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% ccycle & ccycle.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ccycle>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.01}
+\typeout{       -- Released July 23, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{ccycle}
+\def\versi@ndate{July 23, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for ccycle.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************
+% * ccycle.sty: list of commands *
+% ********************************
+%
+%  Setting of Bonds
+%
+%     \@chaira (for cyclohexane chair)
+%     \@chairb
+%     \@chairc
+%     \@chaird
+%     \@chaire
+%     \@chairf
+%
+%     \@borna (for bornanes)
+%     \@bornb
+%     \@bornc
+%     \@bornd
+%     \@borne
+%     \@bornf
+%     \@borng
+%
+%  Basic Macros
+%
+%     \chair                     \@chair
+%     \bicychepv                 \@bicychepv
+%     \bicycheph                 \@bicycheph
+%     \bornane                   \@bornane
+%     \adamantane                \@damantane
+%
+%  (Added March 05, 1994 by Shinsaku Fujita)
+%  Setting of Bonds
+%
+%     \@chairia (for cyclohexane chair inversed)
+%     \@chairib  \@chairic  \@chairid
+%     \@chairie  \@chairif
+%
+%  Basic Macros
+%
+%     \chairi                     \@chairi
+% 
+%  (Added June 16, 1996 by Shinsaku Fujita)
+%  Setting of Bonds
+%
+%     \@chairiI (for horizontal-type adamantane)
+%     \@chairiII    \@chairiIII    \@chairiIV
+%     \@chairiV     \@chairiVI     \@chairiVII
+%     \@chairiVIII  \@chairiIX     \@chairiX
+%     
+%  Basic Macros
+%
+%     \hadamantane                \@hadamantane
+%
+%  Macros for adjusting substitution sites (for Version 1.02)
+%
+%     \ylchairposition
+%     \ylchairiposition
+%     \ylbornaneposition
+%     \yladamanposition
+%     \ylhadamanposition
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf ccycle.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}
+\unitlength=0.1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmolfront}
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Avoid wedged front bonds} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ifmolfront}{\newif\ifmolfront \molfrontfalse}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Chair-form cyclohexanes}
+% \subsection{Macros for setting substituents}
+% 
+% Macros |\@chaira| to |\@chairf| are used to set substituents 
+% on each position of cyclohexane. Note that comments (conerning locant 
+% numbers) on the end of each row have lost the exact meaning, 
+% since such a command moiety is used in many macros after copying. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chaira}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **********************************************
+% * treatment of the chair form of cyclohexane *
+% **********************************************
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 1 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chaira{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{110}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){168}% single bond at 1 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{180}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=44
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-160}{-130}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \putlatom{-130}{110}{\@memberb}% left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 1
+           }%
+%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(-10,-10)(-1,1){120}% double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(10,10)(-1,1){120}% double bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{110}{\@memberb}% left type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{110}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairb}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 2 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairb{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=70
+           \Put@Line(170,-226)(-1,-1){120}% single bond at 2
+           \putlatom{40}{-416}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+           \Put@Line(170,-226)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 2 axial
+           \putlratom{138}{-486}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=34
+           \Put@Line(170,-226)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 2 equatorial
+           \putlatom{10}{-174}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=70
+           \putlatom{40}{-416}{\@memberb}% left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(170,-226)(-1,-1){120}% single bond at 2
+           }%
+%           
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=70
+           \Put@Line(160,-216)(-1,-1){120}% double bond at 2
+           \Put@Line(180,-236)(-1,-1){120}% double bond at 2
+           \putlatom{40}{-416}{\@memberb}% left type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=70
+           \Put@Line(170,-226)(-1,-1){120}% single bond at 2
+           \putlatom{40}{-416}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairc}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 3 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairc{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=24
+           \Put@Line(573,-91)(5,4){170}% single bond at 3
+           \putratom{753}{21}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=-24
+           \Put@Line(573,-91)(0,1){168}% single bond at 3 axial
+           \putlratom{533}{101}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-36
+     \yl@ydiff=83
+           \Put@Line(573,-91)(5,-3){144}% single bond at 3 equatorial
+           \putlatom{753}{-260}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=24
+           \putratom{753}{21}{\@memberb}% right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(573,-91)(5,4){170}% single bond at 3
+           }%
+%           
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=0
+           \Put@Line(563,-83)(5,4){170}% double bond at 3
+           \Put@Line(583,-99)(5,4){170}% double bond at 3
+           \putratom{733}{41}{\@memberb}% right type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=24
+           \Put@Line(573,-91)(5,4){170}% single bond at 3
+           \putratom{753}{21}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chaird}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 4 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chaird{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=70
+           \Put@Line(843,-181)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 4
+           \putratom{953}{-371}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=91
+           \Put@Line(843,-181)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 4 axial
+           \putlratom{801}{-440}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-16
+     \yl@ydiff=16
+           \Put@Line(843,-181)(5,3){144}% single bond at 4 equatorial
+           \putratom{1003}{-111}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=70
+           \putratom{953}{-371}{\@memberb}% right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(843,-181)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 4
+           }%
+%           
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=70
+           \Put@Line(833,-191)(1,-1){120}% double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(853,-171)(1,-1){120}% double bond at 4
+           \putratom{953}{-371}{\@memberb}% right type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=70
+           \Put@Line(843,-181)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 4
+           \putratom{953}{-371}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chaire}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 5 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chaire{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(673,46)(1,1){120}% single bond at 5
+           \putratom{803}{158}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=-24
+           \Put@Line(673,46)(0,1){168}% single bond at 5 axial
+           \putlratom{633}{238}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-6
+     \yl@ydiff=63
+           \Put@Line(673,46)(5,-3){144}% single bond at 5 equatorial
+           \putratom{823}{-103}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \putratom{803}{158}{\@memberb}% right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(673,46)(1,1){120}% single bond at 5
+           }%
+%           
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(663,53)(1,1){120}% double bond at 5
+           \Put@Line(683,38)(1,1){120}% double bond at 5
+           \putratom{803}{158}{\@memberb}%  right type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=24
+           \Put@Line(673,46)(5,4){170}% single bond at 5
+           \putratom{853}{158}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairf}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 6 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairf{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=54
+           \Put@Line(270,-90)(-5,-4){170}% single bond at 6
+           \putlatom{100}{-280}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+           \Put@Line(270,-90)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 6 axial
+           \putlratom{238}{-350}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=26
+     \yl@ydiff=-14
+           \Put@Line(270,-90)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 6 equatorial
+           \putratom{100}{18}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=54
+           \putlatom{100}{-280}{\@memberb}% left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(270,-90)(-5,-4){170}% single bond at 6
+           }%
+%           
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=54
+           \Put@Line(260,-80)(-5,-4){170}% double bond at 2
+           \Put@Line(280,-100)(-5,-4){170}% double bond at 2
+           \putlatom{100}{-280}{\@memberb}% left or right type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=54
+           \Put@Line(270,-90)(-5,-4){170}% single bond at 2
+           \putlatom{100}{-280}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Drawing of Chair-form cyclohexanes}
+% 
+% The standard skeleton of a chair form of cyclohexane is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***************************
+% * cyclohexane derivatives *
+% *  (chair type)           *
+% ***************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                 5 
+%              /  3  *
+%     1  *  6  /    *  4
+%        *  2 
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\chair| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \chair[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  cyclohexane
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 12 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           nSa        :  axial single bond at n-atom
+%           nSe        :  equatorial single bond at n-atom
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%        \chair{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \chair[a]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \chair[eb]{1D==O;4Se==MeO;4Sa==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\@chair| uses a picture environment, in which 
+% bonds are put directly, while subsituents are typset by using 
+% the macros |\@chaira| to |\@chairf| described above.  
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylchairposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chair}
+% \begin{macro}{\chair}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\chair{\@ifnextchar[{\@chair}{\@chair[r]}}
+\def\@chair[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylchairposition{#2}%
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1600,800)(-400,-500){chair}%
+(400,500)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%skeletal bonds
+   {\thicklines%
+    \molfronttrue%
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-4){170}%          % bond 1 to 2
+      \Put@Line(170,-226)(3,1){403}%      %      2 to 3
+      \Put@Line(573,-91)(3,-1){270}%      %      3 to 4
+   }%
+   \thinlines%
+      \Put@Line(843,-181)(-3,4){170}%     %      4 to 5
+      \Put@Line(673,46)(-3,-1){403}%      %      5 to 6
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-1){270}%          %      1 to 6
+% inner double bonds
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic bonds
+\else \if\member a%
+      \Put@Line(76,-42)(3,-4){110}%       % double bond 1 to 2
+\else \if\member b%
+      \Put@Line(200,-186)(3,1){343}%      %             2 to 3
+\else \if\member c%
+      \Put@Line(603,-70)(3,-1){190}%      %             3 to 4
+\else \if\member d%
+      \Put@Line(780,-141)(-3,4){110}%     %             4 to 5
+\else \if\member e%
+      \Put@Line(661,6)(-3,-1){343}%       %             5 to 6
+\else \if\member f%
+      \Put@Line(75,-50)(3,-1){170}%       %             1 to 6
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+% setting substituents
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chaira}% subst. on 1
+% \@chaira% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairb}% subst. on 2
+% \@chairb% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairc}% subst. on 3
+% \@chairc% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chaird}% subst. on 4
+% \@chaird% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chaire}% subst. on 5
+% \@chaire% subst. on 5
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairf}% subst. on 6
+% \@chairf% subst. on 6
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%               %end of \chair macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylchairposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/23}{New ommands for setting substituents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylchairposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylchairposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-170}\gdef\@yli{226}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-573}\gdef\@yli{91}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-843}\gdef\@yli{181}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 4
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-673}\gdef\@yli{-46}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 5
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-270}\gdef\@yli{90}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 6
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Inverse chair-form cyclohexanes}
+% \subsection{Macros for setting substituents}
+% 
+% Macros |\@chairia| to |\@chairif| are used to set substituents 
+% on each position of cyclohexane.  Note that they corresopond to 
+% the counterparts of chair-form cyclohexanes described above. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairia}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/6/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************************************************
+% * treatment of the chair form (inverse) of cyclohexane *
+% *  added March 05, 1994 by Shinsaku Fujita             *
+% ********************************************************
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 1 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairia{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=90
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{-210}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 1 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{-260}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-160}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlatom{-130}{-210}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=90
+           \Put@Line(-10,10)(-1,-1){120}% double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(10,-10)(-1,-1){120}% double bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{-210}{\@memberb}% left type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=90
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{-210}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairif}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 6 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairif{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 6
+           \putratom{40}{316}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(0,1){168}% single bond at 6 axial
+           \putlratom{138}{406}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=46
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(-5,-3){144}% single bond at 6 equatorial
+           \putlatom{10}{94}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putratom{40}{316}{\@memberb}% right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 6
+           }%
+%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(160,216)(-1,1){120}% double bond at 6
+           \Put@Line(180,236)(-1,1){120}% double bond at 6
+           \putlatom{40}{316}{\@memberb}% left type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 6
+           \putlatom{40}{316}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairie}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 5 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairie{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=76
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(5,-4){170}% single bond at 5
+           \putratom{753}{-101}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=104
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 5 axial
+           \putlratom{533}{-181}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-36
+     \yl@ydiff=3
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(5,3){144}% single bond at 5 equatorial
+           \putlatom{753}{180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=76
+           \putratom{753}{-101}{\@memberb}% right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(5,-4){170}% single bond at 5
+           }%
+%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=96
+           \Put@Line(563,83)(5,-4){170}% double bond at 5
+           \Put@Line(583,99)(5,-4){170}% double bond at 5
+           \putratom{733}{-141}{\@memberb}% right type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=76
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(5,-4){170}% single bond at 5
+           \putratom{753}{-121}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairid}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 4 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairid{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(1,1){120}% single bond at 4
+           \putratom{953}{271}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-11
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(0,1){168}% single bond at 4 axial
+           \putlratom{801}{360}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-16
+     \yl@ydiff=64
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(5,-3){144}% single bond at 4 equatorial
+           \putratom{1003}{31}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \putratom{953}{271}{\@memberb}% right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(1,1){120}% single bond at 4
+           }%
+%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(833,191)(1,1){120}% double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(853,171)(1,1){120}% double bond at 4
+           \putratom{953}{271}{\@memberb}% right type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(1,1){120}% single bond at 4
+           \putratom{953}{271}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairic}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 3 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairic{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 3
+           \putratom{803}{-258}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=110
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 3 axial
+           \putlratom{633}{-318}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-6
+     \yl@ydiff=17
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(5,3){144}% single bond at 3 equatorial
+           \putratom{823}{23}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+           \putratom{803}{-258}{\@memberb}% right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 3
+           }%
+%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-5
+     \yl@ydiff=96
+           \Put@Line(663,-53)(1,-1){120}% double bond at 3
+           \Put@Line(683,-38)(1,-1){120}% double bond at 3
+           \putratom{803}{-258}{\@memberb}%  right type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=76
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(5,-4){170}% single bond at 3
+           \putratom{853}{-258}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairib}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 2 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairib{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=46
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(-5,4){170}% single bond at 2
+           \putlatom{100}{180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(0,1){168}% single bond at 2 axial
+           \putlratom{238}{270}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=26
+     \yl@ydiff=94
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(-5,-3){144}% single bond at 2 equatorial
+           \putratom{100}{-98}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2009/06/15
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=46
+           \putlatom{100}{180}{\@memberb}% left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(-5,4){170}% single bond at 2
+           }%
+%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=26
+           \Put@Line(260,80)(-5,4){170}% double bond at 2
+           \Put@Line(280,100)(-5,4){170}% double bond at 2
+           \putlatom{100}{200}{\@memberb}% left or right type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=26
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(-5,4){170}% single bond at 2
+           \putlatom{100}{200}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Drawing of inverse chair-form cyclohexanes}
+% 
+% The standard skeleton of an inverse chair form of cyclohexane is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***************************
+% * cyclohexane derivatives *
+% *  (inverse chair type)   *
+% ***************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          6            4
+%       *      `  5  *
+%     1  *  2        *
+%              `  3
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\chairi| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \chairi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  cyclohexane
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 8 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           nSa        :  axial single bond at n-atom
+%           nSe        :  equatorial single bond at n-atom
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \chairi[eb]{1D==O;4Se==MeO;4Sa==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\@chairi| uses a picture environment, in which 
+% bonds are put directly, while subsituents are typset by using 
+% the macros |\@chairia| to |\@chairif| described above.  
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylchairiposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairi}
+% \begin{macro}{\chairi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\chairi{\@ifnextchar[{\@chairi}{\@chairi[r]}}
+\def\@chairi[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylchairiposition{#2}%
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1600,800)(-400,-319){chairi}%
+(400,319)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+% skeletal bonds
+   \thinlines%
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,4){170}%         % bond 1 to 6
+      \Put@Line(170,226)(3,-1){403}%    %      6 to 5
+      \Put@Line(573,91)(3,1){270}%      %      5 to 4
+   {\thicklines%
+    \molfronttrue%
+      \Put@Line(843,181)(-3,-4){170}%    %      4 to 3
+      \Put@Line(673,-46)(-3,1){403}%     %      3 to 2
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,1){270}%          %      1 to 2
+   }%
+   \thinlines%
+% inner double bonds
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic bonds
+\else \if\member c%%%a%
+       \Put@Line(767,139)(-3,-4){110}%   % double bond 3 to 4
+\else \if\member b%%%d%%%b%
+      \Put@Line(640,-5)(-3,1){343}%      %             4 to 5
+\else \if\member a%%%e%%%%c%
+       \Put@Line(240,111)(-3,-1){190}%   %             5 to 6
+\else \if\member f%%%d%
+      \Put@Line(63,40)(3,4){110}%        %             6 to 7
+\else \if\member e%%%l%
+      \Put@Line(182,187)(3,-1){343}%     %             7 to 10
+\else \if\member d%%%k%%%f%
+      \Put@Line(768,131)(-3,-1){170}%    %             10 to 3
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+% %
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairia}% subst. on 1
+% \@chairia% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairib}% subst. on 2
+% \@chairib% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairic}% subst. on 3
+% \@chairic% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairid}% subst. on 4
+% \@chairid% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairie}% subst. on 5
+% \@chairie% subst. on 5
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairif}% subst. on 6
+% \@chairif% subst. on 6
+\fi %end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}\end{ShiftPicEnvB}}%               %end of \chairi macro
+% End of addition 1994/03/05 SF
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylchairiposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/23}{New ommands for setting substituents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylchairiposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylchairiposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-270}\gdef\@yli{-90}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-673}\gdef\@yli{46}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-843}\gdef\@yli{-181}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 4
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-573}\gdef\@yli{-91}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 5
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-170}\gdef\@yli{-226}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 6
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Bicycloheptanes}
+% \subsection{Drawing of a flat and vertical type}
+%
+% The flat-and-vertical-type skeleton of bicycloheptanes is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************************
+% * bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane derivatives *
+% *  (flat, vertical type)            *
+% *************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          1
+%          * 
+%     6  *   *  2
+%       |  7  |
+%       |     |
+%     5  *   *  3
+%          *
+%          4 <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\bicyclohepv| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \bicychepv[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST} 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% In order to put dimethyl subsitutents on the top position (7), 
+% the character `7' is used in the |BONDLIST|.  The delocalization 
+% of $\pi$-electron can be described with the character `A' written in 
+% the |BONDLIST|. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           7          :  7,7-dimethyl
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument takes the standard format of \XyMTeX{}, in which 
+% more substitution descriptors are separated from each other 
+% by a semicolon.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 12 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 7 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specifed) single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%     \bicychepv{1==Cl;2==F}
+%     \bicychepv[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%     \bicychepv[eb]{1D==O;4==Me;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\@bicyclohepv| uses a picture environment, in which 
+% bonds are put directly, while subsituents are typset by using 
+% the macro |\setsixringv| defined in chemstr.sty of \XyMTeX{} system.
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bicyclohepv}
+% \begin{macro}{\bicyclohepv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bicychepv{\@ifnextchar[{\@bicychepv}{\@bicychepv[r]}}
+\def\@bicychepv[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#2}{0}{0}{7}{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-400,-240){bicychepv}%
+(400,240)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+  \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){171}%       %bond 1-6
+  \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){171}%        %bond 1-2
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){171}%          %bond 4-5
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){171}%           %bond 4-3
+  \Put@Line(171,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 3-2
+  \Put@Line(-171,103)(0,1){200}%      %bond 5-6
+{\thicklines%
+  \molfronttrue%
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(1,4){51}%            %bond 4-7
+  \Put@Line(0,406)(1,-4){51}}%         %bond 1-7
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic double bonds
+\else \if\member a%
+  \Put@Line(6,364)(5,-3){126}%        %double bond 1-2
+\else \if\member b%
+  \Put@Line(138,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 3-2
+\else \if\member c%
+  \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){126}%          %double bond 4-3
+\else \if\member d%
+  \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){126}%        %double bond 4-5
+\else \if\member e%
+  \Put@Line(-138,129)(0,1){148}%      %double bond 5-6
+\else \if\member f%
+  \Put@Line(-6,364)(-5,-3){126}%      %double bond 1-6
+\else \if\member 7%
+ {\thicklines%
+  \Put@Line(51,204)(-1,0){70}%        %7,7-dimethyl
+  \Put@Line(51,204)(1,0){70}}%      
+\else \if\member A%aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%            %circle
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+% %
+\setsixringv{#2}{0}{0}{7}{0}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+}%               %end of \bicychepv macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Drawing of a flat and horizontal type}
+%
+% The flat-and-horizontal-type skeleton of bicycloheptanes is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************************
+% * bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane derivatives *
+% *  (flat, horizontal type)          *
+% *************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                2      3
+%                                 -----
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 1 *     7     * 4
+%          (0,0)                *       *
+%                                 -----
+%                                6      5
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\bicycloheph| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \bicycheph[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% In order to put dimethyl subsitutents on the top position (7), 
+% the character `7' is used in the |BONDLIST|.  The delocalization 
+% of $\pi$-electron can be described with the character `A' written in 
+% the |BONDLIST|. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           7          :  7,7-dimethyl
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument takes the standard format of \XyMTeX{}, in which 
+% more substitution descriptors are separated from each other 
+% by a semicolon.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 8 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specifed) single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \bicycheph{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \bicycheph[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \bicycheph[eb]{1D==O;4==Me;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\@bicycloheph| uses a picture environment, in which 
+% bonds are put directly, while subsituents are typset by using 
+% the macro |\setsixringh| defined in chemstr.sty of \XyMTeX{} system.
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bicycloheph}
+% \begin{macro}{\bicycloheph}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bicycheph{\@ifnextchar[{\@bicycheph}{\@bicycheph[r]}}
+\def\@bicycheph[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpositionh{#2}{0}{0}{7}{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(880,800)(-240,-400){bicycheph}%
+(240,400)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){103}%          %bond 1-2
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){103}%          %bond 1-6
+  \Put@Line(406,0)(-3,5){103}%        %bond 4-3
+  \Put@Line(406,0)(-3,-5){103}%       %bond 4-3
+  \Put@Line(103,171)(1,0){200}%       %bond 2-3
+  \Put@Line(103,-171)(1,0){200}%      %bond 6-5
+{\thicklines%
+  \molfronttrue%
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(4,1){203}%            %bond 4-7
+  \Put@Line(406,0)(-4,1){203}}%         %bond 1-7
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic double bonds
+\else \if\member a%
+  \Put@Line(42,6)(3,5){78}%           %double bond 1-2
+\else \if\member b%
+  \Put@Line(129,138)(1,0){148}%       %double bond 2-3
+\else \if\member c%
+  \Put@Line(364,6)(-3,5){78}%         %double bond 4-3
+\else \if\member d%
+  \Put@Line(364,-6)(-3,-5){78}%       %double bond 4-5
+\else \if\member e%
+  \Put@Line(129,-138)(1,0){148}%      %double bond 6-5
+\else \if\member f%
+  \Put@Line(42,-6)(3,-5){78}%         %double bond 1-6
+\else \if\member 7%
+ {\thicklines%
+  \Put@Line(204,51)(0,-1){70}%        %7,7-dimethyl
+  \Put@Line(204,51)(0,1){70}}%      
+\else \if\member A%aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%            %circle
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+% %
+\setsixringh{#2}{0}{0}{7}{0}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+}%               %end of \bicycheph macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Drawing of a stereo type}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Macros for setting substituents}
+% 
+% Macros |\@borna| to |\@borng| are used to set substituents 
+% on each position of bornane.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@borna}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/26}{Adding A, B}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***********************************************
+% * setting bonds and substituents for bornanes *
+% * (bicycloe[2.2.1]heptane derivatives)        *
+% ***********************************************
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 1 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@borna{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=8
+     \yl@ydiff=3
+          \Put@Line(318,247)(2,5){40}%      % single bond 1
+           \putratom{350}{360}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=8
+     \yl@ydiff=3
+          \Put@Line(318,247)(2,5){40}%      % single bond 1
+           \putratom{350}{360}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=8
+     \yl@ydiff=3
+          \Put@Line(318,247)(2,5){40}%      % single bond 1
+          \putratom{350}{360}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2013/04/01
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(318,247)(2,5){40}%      % wavy bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{350}{360}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%2013/06/26
+    \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha 
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax
+          \dotorline(318,247)(2,5){40}/(318,247)(358,347)% 
+          \putratom{350}{360}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%2013/06/26
+    \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(318,247)(2,5){40}%      % wavy bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{350}{360}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%
+   \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=8
+     \yl@ydiff=3
+          \Put@Line(318,247)(2,5){40}%      % single bond 1
+           \putratom{350}{360}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bornb}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/26}{Bug fix exchange A and B}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 2 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@bornb{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=20
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,2){160}% 
+           \putratom{170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=-5
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(4,3){140}%         % endo (a)
+           }%
+           \putratom{140}{115}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+       \dotorline(0,0)(5,-2){140}/(0,0)(140,-56)%
+       \putratom{150}{-86}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,-2){140}%        % endo (a)
+           \putratom{150}{-86}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(4,3){140}%         % exo (b)
+           \putratom{140}{115}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=20
+           \Put@Line(-10,-15)(5,2){160}% 
+           \Put@Line(-5,15)(5,2){160}% 
+           \putratom{170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % right type
+   \else \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=20
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,2){160}% 
+           }%
+           \putratom{170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % right type
+   \else \if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=20
+       \dotorline(0,0)(5,2){160}/(0,0)(160,64)%
+       \putratom{170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % right type
+%2013/04/01
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=20\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,2){160}% % wavy bond at 2
+           }%
+           \putratom{170}{44}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+%
+   \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=20
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,2){160}% 
+           \putratom{170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bornc}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/26}{Bug fix exchange A and B}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 3 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@bornc{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,-2){140}%
+           \putratom{150}{-86}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,2){140}%        % endo (a)
+           }%
+           \putratom{150}{26}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=40
+       \dotorline(0,0)(4,-3){140}/(0,0)(140,-105)%% exo (b)
+       \putratom{140}{-145}{\@memberb}%   % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=40
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(4,-3){140}%       % endo (a)
+           \putratom{140}{-145}{\@memberb}%   % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,2){140}%        % exo (b)
+           \putratom{150}{26}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=50
+           \Put@Line(10,15)(5,-2){160}% 
+           \Put@Line(5,-15)(5,-2){160}% 
+           \putratom{170}{-124}{\@memberb}%   % right type
+   \else \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,-2){140}%       % endo (a)
+           }%
+           \putratom{150}{-86}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+   \else \if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+       \dotorline(0,0)(5,-2){140}/(0,0)(140,-56)% exo (b)
+       \putratom{150}{-86}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+%2013/04/01
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=20\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,2){160}% % wavy bond at 3
+           }%
+           \putratom{170}{44}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+%
+   \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=20
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,2){160}% 
+           \putratom{170}{44}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bornd}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/26}{Adding A, B}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 4 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@bornd{%
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=30
+     \yl@ydiff=87
+          \Put@Line(237,47)(-2,-5){40}%      % single bond 4
+          \putlratom{167}{-150}{\@memberb}%    % left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=30
+     \yl@ydiff=87
+          \Put@Line(237,47)(-2,-5){40}%      % single bond 4
+          \putlratom{167}{-150}{\@memberb}%    % left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=30
+     \yl@ydiff=87
+          \Put@Line(237,47)(-2,-5){40}%      % single bond 4
+          \putlratom{167}{-150}{\@memberb}%    % left & right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+%2013/04/01
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha, beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=87\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+          \Put@Line(237,47)(-2,-5){40}%      % single bond 4
+           }%
+          \putlratom{167}{-150}{\@memberb}%    % left & right type
+%2013/06/26
+    \else\if\@tmpb A%(A) alpha 
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=87\relax
+          \dotorline(237,47)(-2,-5){40}/(237,47)(197,-53)% 
+          \putlratom{167}{-150}{\@memberb}%    % left & right type
+%2013/06/26
+    \else\if\@tmpb B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=87\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+          \Put@Line(237,47)(-2,-5){40}%      % single bond 4
+           }%
+          \putlratom{167}{-150}{\@memberb}%    % left & right type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=30
+     \yl@ydiff=87
+          \Put@Line(237,47)(-2,-5){40}%      % single bond 4
+          \putlratom{167}{-150}{\@memberb}%    % left & right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@borne}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/26}{Bug fix exchange A and B}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 5 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@borne{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-2){140}%
+           \putlatom{-150}{-86}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,2){140}%        % endo (a)
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-150}{26}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=40
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-4,-3){140}/(0,0)(-140,-105)%% exo (b)
+       \putlatom{-140}{-145}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-4,-3){140}%       % endo (a)
+           \putlatom{-140}{-145}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,2){140}%        % exo (b)
+           \putlatom{-150}{26}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=64
+           \Put@Line(-10,15)(-5,-2){160}% 
+           \Put@Line(-5,-15)(-5,-2){160}% 
+           \putlatom{-170}{-124}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-2){140}%       % endo (a)
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-150}{-86}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+   \else \if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-5,-2){140}/(0,0)(-140,-56)%% exo (b)
+       \putlatom{-150}{-86}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+%2013/04/01
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=20\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,2){160}%  wavy bond at 5
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-170}{44}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+%
+   \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=20
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,2){160}% 
+           \putlatom{-170}{44}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bornf}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/26}{Bug fix exchange A and B}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 6 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@bornf{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,2){160}% 
+           \putlatom{-170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-4,3){140}%         % endo (a)
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-140}{115}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-5,-2){140}/(0,0)(-140,-56)%% exo (b)
+       \putlatom{-150}{-86}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-2){140}%        % endo (a)
+           \putlatom{-150}{-86}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-4,3){140}%         % exo (b)
+           \putlatom{-140}{115}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=20
+           \Put@Line(10,-15)(-5,2){160}% 
+           \Put@Line(5,15)(-5,2){160}% 
+           \putlatom{-170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % left type
+   \else \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,2){160}% 
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % left type
+   \else \if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond%bug fix 2013/06/26
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-5,2){160}/(0,0)(-160,64)%
+       \putlatom{-170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % left type
+%2013/04/01
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=20\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,2){160}%  wavy bond at 6
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-170}{44}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+%
+   \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=20
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,2){160}% 
+           \putlatom{-170}{44}{\@memberb}%      % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@borng}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/26}{Adding SU, SV, SA, SB, Su, Sd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 7 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@borng{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=-20
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){160}% 
+           \putlratom{-40}{180}{\@memberb}%      % left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) left
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-4,3){140}%          % left (a)
+           \putlatom{-140}{115}{\@memberb}%      % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) right
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(4,3){140}%           % right (b)
+           \putratom{140}{115}{\@memberb}%       % right type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-4,3){140}%          % left (U)
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-140}{115}{\@memberb}%      % left type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(4,3){140}%           % right (V)
+           }%
+           \putratom{140}{115}{\@memberb}%       % right type
+%2013/06/26
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha 
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-4,3){140}/(0,0)(-140,105)% 
+           \putlatom{-140}{115}{\@memberb}%      % left type
+%2013/06/26
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(4,3){140}%           % 
+           }%
+           \putratom{140}{115}{\@memberb}%       % right type
+%2013/06/26
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) beta alternative
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-4,3){140}%           % 
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-140}{115}{\@memberb}%       % left type
+%2013/06/26
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) alpha alternative
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \dotorline(0,0)(4,3){140}/(0,0)(140,105)% 
+           \putratom{140}{115}{\@memberb}%      % right type
+%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    %\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=-20
+           \Put@Line(-10,0)(0,1){160}% 
+           \Put@Line(10,0)(0,1){160}% 
+           \putlratom{-40}{180}{\@memberb}%      % left & right type
+   \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=-20
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){160}% 
+           \putlratom{-40}{180}{\@memberb}%      % left & right type
+   \fi\fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Drawing of borane derivatives}
+% 
+% The stereo-type skeleton of bicycloheptanes is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************************************
+% * bornane derivatives                         *
+% * (bicycloe[2.2.1]heptane derivatives)        *
+% ***********************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                7   g
+%           f    / `
+%            _  / - 1_ a
+%     e    6  / h     - 2
+%       *    /        *
+%     5  -  4       * b
+%        d     c` 3
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\bornane| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \bornane[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to h, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           g          :  1,7-double bond
+%           h          :  4,7-double bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument takes the standard format of \XyMTeX{}, in which 
+% more substitution descriptors are separated from each other 
+% by a semicolon.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 7 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+% The 7-position of a bornane skeleton cannot be specified by 
+% capital characters `A' and `B'.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       for n = 7 (bridge position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at 7-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at 7-atom
+%           nSa        :  left single bond at 7-atom
+%           nSb        :  right single bond at 7-atom
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \bornane{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \bornane[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \bornane[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4==MeO;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\@bicycloheph| uses a picture environment, in which 
+% bonds are put directly, while subsituents are typset by using 
+% the macro |\@borna| to |\@borng| defined in chemstr.sty of \XyMTeX{} 
+% system.
+%
+% \changes{v1.01b}{1998/10/08}{The drawing are of \cs{bornane} 
+% has been changed by SF.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylbornaneposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/24}{bornane front-to-back crossing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bornane}
+% \begin{macro}{\iffrontthicktothin}
+% \begin{macro}{\bornane}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\BackGroundColor{\color{white}}%default color for background 2013/07/23
+\newif\iffrontthicktothin \frontthicktothinfalse%default front thickline2013/06/24
+\def\bornane{\@ifnextchar[{\@bornane}{\@bornane[r]}}
+\def\@bornane[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylbornaneposition{#2}%
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1000,1000)(-200,-240){bornane}%
+(200,240)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+% skeletal bonds
+ \thinlines%
+  \Put@Line(462,-43)(2,5){80}%         % bond 3 to 2 (b)
+  \Put@Line(543,157)(-5,2){225}%       % bond 2 to 1 (a)
+  \Put@Line(318,247)(-5,-1){237}%      % bond 1 to 6 (f)
+  \Put@Line(80,200)(-2,-5){80}%        % bond 6 to 5 (e)
+  \Put@Line(318,247)(-2,5){80}%        % back part of bridge (g)
+ {\iffrontthicktothin\thinlines\else\thicklines\fi%2013/06/24
+  \molfronttrue
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(5,1){237}%            % bond 5 to 4 (d)
+  \Put@Line(237,47)(5,-2){225}%        % bond 4 to 3 (c)
+  {\def\thinLineWidth{5pt}\BackGroundColor% front-to-back crossing2013/06/24-07/23
+  \thinlines%                          %
+  \Put@Line(237,200)(0,1){80}}%        % front-to-back crossing2013/06/24-07/23
+  \Put@Line(237,47)(0,1){400}%         % front part of bridge (h)
+ }%
+% inner double bond
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic bonds
+\else \if\member a%%%%
+   \Put@Line(513,127)(-5,2){180}%       % bond 2 to 1
+\else \if\member b%%%%
+   \Put@Line(446,-3)(2,5){60}%          % bond 3 to 2
+\else \if\member c%%%%
+   \Put@Line(267,77)(5,-2){180}%        % bond 4 to 3
+\else \if\member d%%%%
+   \Put@Line(40,42)(5,1){180}%          % double bond 5 to 4
+\else \if\member e%%%
+   \Put@Line(100,180)(-2,-5){60}%       % bond 6 to 5
+\else \if\member f%
+   \Put@Line(288,207)(-5,-1){180}%      % bond 1 to 6
+\else \if\member g%
+  \Put@Line(288,260)(-2,5){40}%         % back part of bridge (g)
+\else \if\member h%
+  \Put@Line(257,77)(0,1){290}%          % front part of bridge (h)
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\@borna}% subst. on 1
+% \@borna% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(543,157){\@bornb}}% subst. on 2
+% \Put@Direct(543,157){\@bornb}% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(462,-43){\@bornc}}% subst. on 3
+% \Put@Direct(462,-43){\@bornc}% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\@bornd}% subst. on 4
+% \@bornd% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\@borne}}% subst. on 5
+% \Put@Direct(0,0){\@borne}% subst. on 5
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(80,200){\@bornf}}% subst. on 6
+% \Put@Direct(80,200){\@bornf}% subst. on 6
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(237,440){\@borng}}% subst. on 7
+% \Put@Direct(237,440){\@borng}% subst. on 7
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \bornane macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylbornaneposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/23}{New ommands for setting substituents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylbornaneposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylbornaneposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-318}\gdef\@yli{-247}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-543}\gdef\@yli{-157}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-462}\gdef\@yli{43}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-237}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 4
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 5
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-80}\gdef\@yli{-200}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 6
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-237}\gdef\@yli{-440}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 7
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Adamantanes}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical drawing}
+% 
+% The macros |\@adamanea| to |\@adamanej| are used to 
+% set substituents on each edge of an adamantane skeleton 
+% drawn by the |\adamantane| commands. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{The macros \cs{@adamanea} to \cs{@adamanej} 
+% are separated from the original definition of \cs{adamantane}.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamanea}
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamaneb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamanec}
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamaned}
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamanee}
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamanef}
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamaneg}
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamaneh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamanei}
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamanej}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 1 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamanea{%
+     \yl@xdiff=12
+     \yl@ydiff=21
+   \Put@Direct(-360,720){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 1
+ \if\@tmpb a%
+   \Put@Line(-240,660)(-4,3){108}%                %bond 1
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+   \Put@Line(-240,660)(-4,3){108}%                %bond 1
+ \fi\fi}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 2 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamaneb{%
+  \if\@tmpb a%
+     \yl@xdiff=6
+     \yl@ydiff=-16
+   \Put@Line(0,780)(1,4){26}%                     %bond 2-ax
+   \Put@Direct(20,900){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%       %atom 2-ax
+  \else \if\@tmpb b%
+     \yl@xdiff=-6
+     \yl@ydiff=-16
+   \Put@Line(0,780)(-1,4){26}%                    %bond 2-eq
+   \Put@Direct(-20,900){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%      %atom 2-eq
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-22
+   \Put@Direct(-42,910){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%      %atom 2
+   \Put@Line(0,780)(0,1){108}%                    %bond 2
+  \else \if\@tmpb D%
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-22
+   \putlratom{-42}{910}{\@memberb}%                 %atom 2
+   \Put@Line(-12,780)(0,1){108}%                  %double bond 2
+   \Put@Line(12,780)(0,1){108}%                   %double bond 2
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 3 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamanec{%
+     \yl@xdiff=-12
+     \yl@ydiff=21
+   \Put@Direct(360,720){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%      %atom 3
+%  \if\@tmpb S%
+  \if\@tmpb a%1998/10/24 by SF
+   \Put@Line(240,660)(4,3){108}%                  %bond 3
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+   \Put@Line(240,660)(4,3){108}%                  %bond 3
+ \fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 4 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamaned{%
+  \if\@tmpb a%
+     \yl@xdiff=-17
+     \yl@ydiff=33
+   \Put@Line(300,420)(4,-3){103}%                 %bond 4-ax
+   \Put@Direct(420,310){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%      %atom 4-ax
+  \else \if\@tmpb b%
+     \yl@xdiff=26
+     \yl@ydiff=-26
+   \Put@Line(300,420)(1,4){26}%                   %bond 4-eq
+   \Put@Direct(300,540){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%      %atom 4-eq
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-17
+     \yl@ydiff=33
+   \Put@Line(300,420)(4,-3){103}%                 %bond 4
+   \Put@Direct(420,310){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%      %atom 4
+  \else \if\@tmpb D%
+     \yl@xdiff=-17
+     \yl@ydiff=33
+   \Put@Line(296,432)(5,-3){103}%                 %double bond 4
+   \Put@Line(292,408)(5,-3){103}%                 %double bond 4
+   \Put@Direct(420,310){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%      %atom 4
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 5 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamanee{%
+     \yl@xdiff=20
+     \yl@ydiff=110
+%  \if\@tmpb S%
+  \if\@tmpb a%1998/10/24 by SF
+   \Put@Line(60,240)(1,-5){30}%                   %bond 5
+   \Put@Direct(70,-20){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb  \hss}}%      %atom 5
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+   \Put@Line(60,240)(1,-5){30}%                   %bond 5
+   \Put@Direct(70,-20){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb  \hss}}%      %atom 5
+  \fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 6 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamanef{%
+  \if\@tmpb a%
+     \yl@xdiff=33
+     \yl@ydiff=103
+   \Put@Line(0,0)(4,-3){103}%                     %bond 6-ax
+   \Put@Direct(70,-180){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%      %atom 6-ax
+  \else \if\@tmpb b%
+     \yl@xdiff=-33
+     \yl@ydiff=103
+   \Put@Line(0,0)(-4,-3){103}%                    %bond 6-eq
+   \Put@Direct(-70,-180){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 6-eq
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=22
+     \yl@ydiff=94
+   \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){108}%                     %bond 6
+   \Put@Direct(-22,-202){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 6
+  \else \if\@tmpb D%
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=94
+   \Put@Line(-12,0)(0,-1){108}%                   %double bond 6
+   \Put@Line(12,0)(0,-1){108}%                    %double bond 6
+   \putlratom{-42}{-202}{\@memberb}%                %atom 6
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 7 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamaneg{%
+     \yl@xdiff=-20
+     \yl@ydiff=110
+%  \if\@tmpb S%
+  \if\@tmpb a%1998/10/24 by SF
+   \Put@Line(-60,240)(-1,-5){30}%                 %bond 7
+   \Put@Direct(-70,-20){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%      %atom 7
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+   \Put@Line(-60,240)(-1,-5){30}%                 %bond 7
+   \Put@Direct(-70,-20){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%      %atom 7-eq
+  \fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 8 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamaneh{%
+  \if\@tmpb a%
+     \yl@xdiff=17
+     \yl@ydiff=33
+   \Put@Line(-300,420)(-4,-3){103}%               %bond 8-ax
+   \Put@Direct(-420,310){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 8-ax
+  \else \if\@tmpb b%
+     \yl@xdiff=-26
+     \yl@ydiff=-16
+   \Put@Line(-300,420)(-1,4){26}%                 %bond 8-eq
+   \Put@Direct(-300,540){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 8-eq
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=17
+     \yl@ydiff=33
+   \Put@Line(-300,420)(-4,-3){103}%               %bond 8
+   \Put@Direct(-420,310){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 8
+  \else \if\@tmpb D%
+     \yl@xdiff=17
+     \yl@ydiff=50
+   \Put@Line(-300,432)(-5,-3){103}%               %double bond 8
+   \Put@Line(-303,408)(-5,-3){103}%               %double bond 8
+   \Put@Direct(-420,310){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 8
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 9 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamanei{%
+  \if\@tmpb a%
+     \yl@xdiff=-43
+     \yl@ydiff=93
+   \Put@Line(-180,420)(-4,-3){103}%               %bond 9-ax
+   \Put@Direct(-240,250){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 9-ax
+  \else \if\@tmpb b%
+     \yl@xdiff=26
+     \yl@ydiff=-16
+   \Put@Line(-180,420)(1,4){26}%                  %bond 9-eq
+   \Put@Direct(-180,540){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%     %atom 9-eq
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=17
+     \yl@ydiff=93
+   \Put@Line(-180,420)(-4,-3){103}%               %bond 9
+   \Put@Direct(-300,250){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 9
+  \else \if\@tmpb D%
+     \yl@xdiff=17
+     \yl@ydiff=113
+   \Put@Line(-183,432)(-5,-3){103}%               %double bond 9
+   \Put@Line(-180,408)(-5,-3){103}%               %double bond 9
+   \Put@Direct(-300,250){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%     %atom 9
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{A new command for setting substituents}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 10 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@adamanej{%
+  \if\@tmpb a%
+     \yl@xdiff=43
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+  \Put@Line(180,420)(4,-3){103}%                 %bond 10-ax
+  \Put@Direct(240,250){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb  \hss}}%     %atom 10-ax
+  \else \if\@tmpb b%
+     \yl@xdiff=-26
+     \yl@ydiff=-16
+  \Put@Line(180,420)(-1,4){26}%                  %bond 10-eq
+  \Put@Direct(180,540){\hbox to0pt{\hss \@memberb}}%      %atom 10-eq
+  \else \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=43
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+   \Put@Line(180,420)(4,-3){103}%                %bond 10
+   \Put@Direct(240,250){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%     %atom 10
+  \else \if\@tmpb D%
+     \yl@xdiff=3
+     \yl@ydiff=112
+   \Put@Line(176,432)(5,-3){103}%                %double bond 10
+   \Put@Line(172,408)(5,-3){103}%                %double bond 10
+   \Put@Direct(280,250){\hbox to0pt{\@memberb \hss}}%     %atom 10
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The stereo-type skeleton of adamantane is selected 
+% to have the following specification.  The |\adamantane| 
+% command prints a vertical-type  formula in which two bridge carbons 
+% are placed at the top and the bottom. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************************************
+% * For preparing adamantane derivatives          *
+% *   with 4 substituents on bridgehead positions *
+% *         (1, 3, 5 and 7)                       *
+% *   with 12 substituents on bridge positions    *
+% *         (2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10)                   *
+% *************************************************
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\adamantane| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \adamantane[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The adamantane skeleton scarcely takes an inner (endcyclic) double bond.
+% Hence we have 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: not effective
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument takes the standard format of \XyMTeX{}, in which 
+% more substitution descriptors are separated from each other 
+% by a semicolon.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 10 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1, 3, 5, and 7 (bridgeheads)
+%
+%           n or na    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for n = 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, and 10 (bridges)
+%
+%           na         :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom (axial)
+%           nb         :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom (equatorial)
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom (2 and 6)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+% For numbers larger than 9 (two digits), you should designate
+% the |SUBSLIST| as, e.g., 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%             {{10}a}==Cl; ...
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\@adamantane| uses a picture environment, in which 
+% both bonds are substituents are put directly. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yladamanposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/24}{adamantane front-to-back crossing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@adamantane}
+% \begin{macro}{\adamantane}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/24}{The macros \cs{@adamanea} to \cs{@adamanej} 
+% are separated from the original definition of \cs{adamantane}.}
+\def\adamantane{\@ifnextchar[{\@mantane}{\@damantane[Z]}}
+\def\@damantane[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\yladamanposition{#2}%
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1100,1300)(-550,-300){adamantane}%
+(550,300)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%bonds for an adamantane skeleton
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,4){60}%                      %bond 6-7
+  \Put@Line(0,780)(2,-1){240}%                   %bond 2-3
+  \Put@Line(0,780)(-2,-1){240}%                  %bond 2-1
+  \Put@Line(-60,240)(-4,3){240}%                 %bond 7-8
+  \Put@Line(-300,420)(1,4){60}%                  %bond 8-1
+  \Put@Line(240,660)(-1,-4){60}%                 %bond 3-10
+  \Put@Line(-60,240)(4,3){240}%                  %bond 10-7
+{\iffrontthicktothin\thinlines\else\thicklines\fi%2013/06/24
+  \molfronttrue%added for v4.02 (2004/12/20)
+  \Put@Line(300,420)(-1,4){60}%                  %bond 4-3
+  \Put@Line(-240,660)(1,-4){60}%                 %bond 1-9
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(1,4){60}%                       %bond 6-5
+  \Put@Line(60,240)(4,3){240}%                   %bond 5-4
+  {\def\thinLineWidth{5pt}\BackGroundColor%      % front-to-back crossing2013/06/24-07/23
+  \thinlines%                          %
+  \Put@Line(40,255)(-4,3){80}}%        % front-to-back crossing2013/06/24-07/23
+  \Put@Line(60,240)(-4,3){240}%                  %bond 5-9
+}%
+%substituents
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamanea}% subst. on 1
+%\@adamanea% subst. on 1
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamaneb}% subst. on 2
+%\@adamaneb% subst. on 2
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamanec}% subst. on 3
+%\@adamanec% subst. on 3
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamaned}% subst. on 4
+%\@adamaned% subst. on 4
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamanee}% subst. on 5
+%\@adamanee% subst. on 5
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamanef}% subst. on 6
+%\@adamanef% subst. on 6
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamaneg}% subst. on 7
+%\@adamaneg% subst. on 7
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamaneh}% subst. on 8
+%\@adamaneh% subst. on 8
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamanei}% subst. on 9
+%\@adamanei% subst. on 9
+\or\setBScolor{\@adamanej}% subst. on 10
+%\@adamanej% subst. on 10
+\fi%the end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%                          %end of \adamantane macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\yladamanposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/23}{New commands for setting substituents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yladamanposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\yladamanposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{240}\gdef\@yli{-660}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-780}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-240}\gdef\@yli{-660}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-300}\gdef\@yli{-420}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 4
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-60}\gdef\@yli{-240}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 5
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 6
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{60}\gdef\@yli{-240}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 7
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{300}\gdef\@yli{-420}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 8
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{180}\gdef\@yli{-420}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 9
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-180}\gdef\@yli{-420}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 10
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal drawing}
+%
+% The stereo-type skeleton of adamantane is selected 
+% to have the following specification.  The |\hadamantane| 
+% command prints a horizontal-type formula in which one bridge-head carbon 
+% is put at the top position and a chair-form cyclohexane moiety is 
+% placed at the bottom position. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************************
+% * adamantane derivatives (horizontal type) *
+% ********************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                1
+%           h //   `
+%           //i      ` a
+%          89          `
+%         g||            2
+%          ||j           | b
+%       f  7|   l     k  3
+%       *   |   ` 10  *
+%     6  *  5        * c
+%        e    d`  4
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************************************
+% * For preparing adamantane derivatives          *
+% *   with 4 substituents on bridgehead positions *
+% *         (1, 3, 5 and 7)                       *
+% *   with 12 substituents on bridge positions    *
+% *         (2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10)                   *
+% *************************************************
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\hadamantane| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \hadamantane[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The adamantane skeleton scarcely takes an inner (endcyclic) double bond.
+% However, we can designate |BONDLIST|. (This point is different from the
+% specification of the |\adamantane| command.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  adamantane skeleton
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,7-double bond
+%           g          :  7,8-double bond
+%           h          :  8,1-double bond
+%           i          :  9,1-double bond
+%           j          :  5,9-double bond
+%           k          :  3,10-double bond
+%           l          :  7,10-double bond
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument takes the standard format of \XyMTeX{}, in which 
+% more substitution descriptors are separated from each other 
+% by a semicolon.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 10 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1, 3, 5, and 7 (bridgeheads)
+%
+%           n or na    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for n = 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, and 10 (bridges)
+%
+%           na         :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom (axial)
+%           nb         :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom (equatorial)
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom (2 and 6)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Moreover, bond modifieer used for chair-form cyclohexanes 
+% such as $n$Sa and $n$Se (see above) can be also used in the |SUBSLIST| 
+% of the |\hdadamantane| command. 
+% 
+% For numbers larger than 9 (two digits), you should designate
+% the |SUBSLIST| as, e.g., 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%             {{10}a}==Cl; ...
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\@hadamantane| uses a picture environment, in which 
+% bonds are put directly, while subsituents are typset by using 
+% the macro |\@chairiI| to |\@chairX| defined below. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylhadamanposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/24}{hadamantane front-to-back crossing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@hadamantane}
+% \begin{macro}{\hadamantane}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\def\hadamantane{\@ifnextchar[{\@hadamantane}{\@hadamantane[H]}}
+\def\@hadamantane[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylhadamanposition{#2}%
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1600,1400)(-400,-319){hadamantane}%
+(400,319)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+   \thinlines%
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,4){170}%          % bond 6 to 7
+      \Put@Line(170,226)(3,-1){403}%     %      7 to 10
+      \Put@Line(573,91)(3,1){270}%       %      10 to 3
+% %%%
+      \Put@Line(170,226)(0,1){360}%      %      7 to 8
+      \Put@Line(170,586)(3,1){270}%      %      8 to 1
+      \Put@Line(843,181)(0,1){360}%      %      3 to 2
+      \Put@Line(843,541)(-3,1){403}%     %      2 to 1
+   {\iffrontthicktothin\thinlines\else\thicklines\fi%2013/06/24
+      \molfronttrue
+      \Put@Line(843,181)(-3,-4){170}%    %      3 to 4
+      \Put@Line(673,-46)(-3,1){403}%     %      4 to 5
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,1){270}%          %      6 to 5
+% %%%
+     {\def\thinLineWidth{5pt}\BackGroundColor% front-to-back crossing2013/06/24-07/23
+     \thinlines%                        %
+     \Put@Line(270,150)(0,1){80}}%      % front-to-back crossing2013/06/24-07/23
+     \Put@Line(270,90)(0,1){360}%       %      5 to 9
+     \Put@Line(270,450)(3,4){170}%      %      9 to 1
+   }%
+   \thinlines%
+% inner double bonds
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endocyclic bonds
+\else \if\member a%
+      \Put@Line(450,636)(3,-1){373}%     % double bond 1 to 2
+\else \if\member b%
+      \Put@Line(803,206)(0,1){320}%      %             3 to 2
+\else \if\member c%%%a%
+       \Put@Line(767,139)(-3,-4){110}%   %             3 to 4
+\else \if\member d%%%b%
+      \Put@Line(640,-5)(-3,1){343}%      %             4 to 5
+\else \if\member e%%%%c%
+       \Put@Line(240,111)(-3,-1){190}%   %             5 to 6
+\else \if\member f%%%d%
+      \Put@Line(63,40)(3,4){110}%        %             6 to 7
+\else \if\member g%
+      \Put@Line(200,246)(0,1){320}%      %             7 to 8
+\else \if\member h%
+       \Put@Line(400,626)(-3,-1){190}%   %             8 to 1
+\else \if\member i%
+      \Put@Line(450,636)(-3,-4){150}%    %             9 to 1
+\else \if\member j%
+      \Put@Line(300,110)(0,1){320}%      %             5 to 9
+\else \if\member k%%%f%
+      \Put@Line(768,131)(-3,-1){170}%    %             3 to 10
+\else \if\member l%
+      \Put@Line(182,187)(3,-1){343}%     %             7 to 10
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+% %
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%                  %0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(440,676){\@chairiI}}%  %subst. on 1%%%9
+% \Put@Direct(440,676){\@chairiI}%  %subst. on 1%%%9
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(843,541){\@chairiII}}% %subst. on 2%%10
+% \Put@Direct(843,541){\@chairiII}% %subst. on 2%%10
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairiIII}%               %subst. on 3%%%4
+% \@chairiIII%               %subst. on 3%%%4
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairiIV}%                %subst. on 4%%%3
+% \@chairiIV%                %subst. on 4%%%3
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairiV}%                 %subst. on 5%%%2
+% \@chairiV%                 %subst. on 5%%%2
+ \or
+ \setBScolor{\@chairiVI}%                %subst. on 6%%%1
+% \@chairiVI%                %subst. on 6%%%1
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairiVII}%               %subst. on 7%%%6
+% \@chairiVII%               %subst. on 7%%%6
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(170,586){\@chairiVIII}}%subst. on 8%%%8
+% \Put@Direct(170,586){\@chairiVIII}%subst. on 8%%%8
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(270,450){\@chairiIX}}% %subst. on 9%%%7
+% \Put@Direct(270,450){\@chairiIX}% %subst. on 9%%%7
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairiX}%                 %subst. on 10%%5
+% \@chairiX%                 %subst. on 10%%5
+\fi %end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%               %end of \hadamantane macro
+% End of addition 1994/03/05 SF
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylhadamanposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/23}{New commands for setting substituents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylhadamanposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylhadamanposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-440}\gdef\@yli{-676}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-843}\gdef\@yli{-541}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-843}\gdef\@yli{-181}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-673}\gdef\@yli{46}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 4
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-270}\gdef\@yli{-90}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 5
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 6
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-170}\gdef\@yli{-226}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 7
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-170}\gdef\@yli{-586}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 8
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-270}\gdef\@yli{-450}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 9
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-573}\gdef\@yli{-91}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 10
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Hereafter, the definitions of the commands |\@chairiI| to |\@chairiX| 
+% are described. Each of the commands can treat $n$a-type bond modifiers 
+% as well as $n$Sa-type bond modifiers. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairiVI}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************************************************
+% * treatment of the chair form (inverse) of cyclohexane *
+% *  added March 05, 1994 by Shinsaku Fujita             *
+% ********************************************************
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 6 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiVI{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 6 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{-260}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb b%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 6 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-160}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=90
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}% single bond at 6
+           \putlatom{-130}{-210}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 6 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{-260}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 6 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-160}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=90
+           \putlatom{-130}{-210}{\@memberb}% left type
+           \Put@Line(-10,10)(-1,-1){120}% double bond at 6
+           \Put@Line(10,-10)(-1,-1){120}% double bond at 6
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=90
+           \putlatom{-130}{-210}{\@memberb}% left type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}% single bond at 6
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairiVII}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 7 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiVII{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=26
+     \yl@ydiff=46
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(-5,-3){144}% single bond at 7 equatorial
+           \putlatom{10}{94}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=26
+     \yl@ydiff=46
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(-5,-3){144}% single bond at 7 equatorial
+           \putlatom{10}{94}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 7
+           \putratom{40}{316}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=12
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(0,1){168}% single bond at 7 axial
+           \putlratom{138}{406}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=26
+     \yl@ydiff=46
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(-5,-3){144}% single bond at 7 equatorial
+           \putlatom{10}{94}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \putlatom{40}{316}{\@memberb}% left type
+           \Put@Line(160,216)(-1,1){120}% double bond at 7
+           \Put@Line(180,236)(-1,1){120}% double bond at 7
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \putlatom{40}{316}{\@memberb}% left type
+           \Put@Line(170,226)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 7
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairiX}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 10 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiX{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=104
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 5 axial
+           \putlratom{533}{-181}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb b%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-36
+     \yl@ydiff=3
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(5,3){144}% single bond at 5 equatorial
+           \putlatom{753}{180}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=56
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(5,-4){170}% single bond at 5
+           \putratom{753}{-101}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=104
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 5 axial
+           \putlratom{533}{-181}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-36
+     \yl@ydiff=3
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(5,3){144}% single bond at 5 equatorial
+           \putlatom{753}{180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=86
+           \putratom{733}{-141}{\@memberb}% right type
+           \Put@Line(563,83)(5,-4){170}% double bond at 5
+           \Put@Line(583,99)(5,-4){170}% double bond at 5
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=76
+           \Put@Line(573,91)(5,-4){170}% single bond at 5
+           \putratom{753}{-121}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairiIII}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 3 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiIII{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-16
+     \yl@ydiff=64
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(5,-3){144}% single bond at 3 equatorial
+           \putratom{1003}{31}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-16
+     \yl@ydiff=64
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(5,-3){144}% single bond at 3 equatorial
+           \putratom{1003}{31}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(1,1){120}% single bond at 3
+           \putratom{953}{271}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=11
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(0,1){168}% single bond at 3 axial
+           \putlratom{801}{360}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-16
+     \yl@ydiff=64
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(5,-3){144}% single bond at 3 equatorial
+           \putratom{1003}{31}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \putratom{953}{271}{\@memberb}% right type
+           \Put@Line(833,191)(1,1){120}% double bond at 3
+           \Put@Line(853,171)(1,1){120}% double bond at 3
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(843,181)(1,1){120}% single bond at 3
+           \putratom{953}{271}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairiIV}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 4 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiIV{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=104
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 4 axial
+           \putlratom{633}{-318}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb b%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-6
+     \yl@ydiff=17
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(5,3){144}% single bond at 4 equatorial
+           \putratom{823}{23}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 4
+           \putratom{803}{-258}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=40
+     \yl@ydiff=104
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(0,-1){168}% single bond at 4 axial
+           \putlratom{633}{-318}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-6
+     \yl@ydiff=17
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(5,3){144}% single bond at 4 equatorial
+           \putratom{823}{23}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=92
+           \putratom{803}{-258}{\@memberb}%  right type
+           \Put@Line(663,-53)(1,-1){120}% double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(683,-38)(1,-1){120}% double bond at 4
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=76
+           \Put@Line(673,-46)(5,-4){170}% single bond at 4
+           \putratom{853}{-258}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairiV}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 5 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiV{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=26
+     \yl@ydiff=102
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(-5,-3){144}% single bond at 5 equatorial
+           \putratom{100}{-98}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=26
+     \yl@ydiff=102
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(-5,-3){144}% single bond at 5 equatorial
+           \putratom{100}{-98}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=46
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(-5,4){170}% single bond at 5
+           \putlatom{100}{180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=12
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(0,1){168}% single bond at 5 axial
+           \putlratom{238}{270}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=36
+     \yl@ydiff=102
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(-5,-3){144}% single bond at 5 equatorial
+           \putratom{100}{-98}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \putlatom{100}{200}{\@memberb}% left or right type
+           \Put@Line(260,80)(-5,4){170}% double bond at 5
+           \Put@Line(280,100)(-5,4){170}% double bond at 5
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=26
+           \putlatom{100}{200}{\@memberb}% left type
+           \Put@Line(270,90)(-5,4){170}% single bond at 5
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairiI}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 1 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiI{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){168}% single bond at 1 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{178}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){168}% single bond at 1 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{178}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){168}% single bond at 1 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{178}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){168}% single bond at 1 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{178}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){168}% single bond at 1 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{178}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+  \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){168}% single bond at 1 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{178}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=42
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){168}% single bond at 1 axial
+           \putlratom{-42}{178}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairiII}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 2 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiII{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=13
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,1){190}% single bond at 6 equatorial
+           \putratom{200}{50}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb b%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=0
+            \Put@Line(0,0)(3,4){120}%          % bond 1 to 6
+            \putratom{130}{160}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+     \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+      \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) axial
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=0
+            \Put@Line(0,0)(3,4){120}%          % bond 1 to 6
+            \putratom{130}{160}{\@memberb}% left type
+     \else\if\@tmpc e%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=13
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,1){190}% single bond at 6 equatorial
+           \putratom{200}{50}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \putratom{130}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+           \Put@Line(-10,10)(1,1){120}% double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(10,-10)(1,1){120}% double bond at 1
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=-10
+           \putratom{130}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}% single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairigVIII}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 8 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiVIII{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-160}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb b%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=0
+            \Put@Line(0,0)(3,4){120}%          % bond 1 to 6
+            \putratom{130}{160}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=4
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-140}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e% right-hand
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=0
+            \Put@Line(0,0)(3,4){120}%          % bond 1 to 6
+            \putratom{130}{160}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a% left-hand
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-160}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=4
+     \yl@ydiff=26
+            \putlatom{-140}{60}{\@memberb}% left type
+           \Put@Line(10,10)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \Put@Line(0,-10)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=4
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-140}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chairiIX}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 9 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@chairiIX{%
+   \if\@tmpb a%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-160}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb b%single bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-16
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){144}% single bond at 6 equatorial
+           \putratom{160}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=4
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-140}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc e% right-hand
+     \yl@xdiff=-16
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){144}% single bond at 6 equatorial
+           \putratom{160}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a% left-hand
+     \yl@xdiff=16
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-160}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=4
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \putlatom{-140}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+           \Put@Line(10,10)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \Put@Line(0,-10)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=4
+     \yl@ydiff=36
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){144}% single bond at 1 equatorial
+           \putlatom{-140}{50}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%</ccycle>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/ccycle.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/ccycle.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ee9cc619266
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/ccycle.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+\def\batchfile{ccycle.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996,1998,2001,2002, 2004, 2009, 2010, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996 
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1996 
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.01 Released on August 30, 2004
+Version 4.02 Released on December 20, 2004
+Version 4.04 Released on June 15, 2009
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+Version 5.01b Released on April 01, 2013
+Version 5.01bb Released on June 26, 2013
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.01 Released on July 23, 2013
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files ccycle.dtx and ccycle.ins
+and the derived file ccycle.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{ccycle.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{ccycle.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{ccycle.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{ccycle.dtx}{ccycle}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/chemstr.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/chemstr.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6e437826b83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/chemstr.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,9531 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: chemstr.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1993,1996,1998,2001,2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% chemstr.sty
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files chemstr.dtx and chemstr.ins
+% and the derived file chemstr.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Bug Fix:
+%   1993/11/14 S. Fujita 
+%     A and B are interchanged.
+%     a and b are interchanged.
+%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF}% % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% (No Distribution)
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{November 11, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01a}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 20, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{July 20, 2005}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.03}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{September 5, 2006}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.03b}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{July 7, 2009}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.04a}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 25, 2009}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.05}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+% \def\versi@ndate{February 24, 2011}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.01b}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{14811}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/06/26}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{Size reduction}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/21}{The command \cs{dotorline} is added.}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{picture to sfpicture, etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv environment}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v4.01a}{2004/11/11}{Bug fix}
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Adjustment for \cs{setbondatom..}}
+% \changes{v4.02a}{2004/12/27}{Bug fix: change \cs{ggg} to \cs{gggA}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{wave bonds for stereochemistry}
+% \changes{v4.03b}{2006/9/5}{\cs{ggg} to \cs{gggA} in \cs{test@vertix}}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/7/7}{Bug fix for the \cs{XyMTeX} logo}
+% \changes{v4.05}{2009/10/25}{Bug fix for the \cs{XyMTeX} logo}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{bond coloring and the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \changes{v5.01b}{2011/02/24}{added commands for bond coloring of the PostScript Mode}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2011/03/22}{\cs{SetTwoAtoms} added}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2011/04/06}{bug fix}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2011/06/19}{bug fix: \cs{ylposition}}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+ \ProvidesFile{chemstr.dtx}[2013/03/22 v5.01 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{chemstr.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 4%%%
+\makeatletter
+\def\select@@Upsionfont{%
+\edef\test@rm{\rmdefault}%
+\edef\test@sf{\sfdefault}%
+\edef\test@tt{\ttdefault}%
+\ifx\f@family \test@rm\relax
+{\expandafter\csname OT1/cmr/\f@series/\f@shape/\f@size%
+\endcsname\char'7}%
+\else\ifx\f@family \test@sf\relax
+{\expandafter\csname OT1/cmss/\f@series/\f@shape/\f@size%
+\endcsname\char'7}%
+\else\ifx\f@family \test@tt\relax
+{\expandafter\csname OT1/cmtt/\f@series/\f@shape/\f@size%
+\endcsname\char'7}%
+\else{\expandafter\csname OT1/cmr/\f@series/\f@shape/\f@size%
+\endcsname
+\char'7}\fi\fi\fi%
+}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox to0.8em{\hss\select@@Upsionfont%
+\hss}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+\makeatother
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Basic Commands for Drawing  Chemical Structures 
+by {\sffamily chemstr.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and 
+Mathematical Chemistry \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa, \\
+258-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% % (old old address)
+% % Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% % Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% % Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{chemstr.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{chemstr:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% chemstr & chemstr.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*chemstr>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.01}
+\typeout{       -- Released June 19, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{chemstr}
+\def\versi@ndate{June 19, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for chemstr.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *********************************
+% * chemstr.sty: list of commands *
+% *********************************
+%
+%  <For separating an augument list to each argument>
+%
+%     \@forsemicol
+%     \@forl@@p
+%     \@iforl@@p
+%     \@m@mb@r
+%     \twoch@r
+%     \twoCH@R (terminater //)
+%     \twoch@@r
+%     \twoCH@@R (terminater //)
+%     \threech@r
+%
+%  <For designating coordinates for drawing round arrows>
+%
+%     \@forendparenthesis
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  <Convention>
+%
+%     \rmoiety
+%     \lmoiety
+%     \putlatom
+%     \putratom
+%     \putlratom
+%     \Putlratom
+%
+%     \dotorline
+%  
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  <Treatment of substitution positions>
+%
+%     \if@clip  \@clipfalse  \@cliptrue
+%     \if@aclip \@aclipfalse \@acliptrue
+%     \if@bclip \@bclipfalse \@bcliptrue
+%     \if@cclip \@cclipfalse \@ccliptrue
+%     \if@eclip \@eclipfalse \@ecliptrue
+%     \if@fclip \@fclipfalse \@fcliptrue
+%     \iforigpt \origptfalse \origpttrue
+%     \@tmpaa (counter)
+%
+%     \clipinfo \storeclipinfo \developclipinfo
+%
+%  <Structures as substituents>
+%     \@yl
+%     \yl@xdiff \yl@ydiff
+%     \yl@shiftii
+%     \yl@shifti
+%     \@ylii
+%     \@yli
+%     \@@ylii
+%     \@@yli
+%
+%  <Fused positions check>
+%     \fuseAx \fuseAy
+%     \fuseBx \fuseBy
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  <VERTICAL SETTING>
+%   Substitution 
+%
+%     \@substa
+%     \@substb
+%     \@substc
+%     \@substd
+%     \@subste
+%     \@substf
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   Setting of atoms and bonds 
+%
+%     \setsixringv      (on a vertical six-membered ring)
+%     \setdecaringv     (on a decaline (six-six) ring)
+%     \setfusedbond     (at fused bond positions)
+%     \if@clipfuse \@clipfusefalse \@clipfusetrue
+%     \setatombond      (at an appropiate position)
+%
+%   Placing structures as substituents
+%     \ylposition
+%     \ylfusedpostion
+%     \ylatombondposition
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  <HORIZONTAL SETTING>
+%   Substitution
+%
+%     \@hsubsta
+%     \@hsubstb
+%     \@hsubstc
+%     \@hsubstd
+%     \@hsubste
+%     \@hsubstf
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   Setting of atoms and bonds 
+%
+%     \setsixringh       (on a horizontal six-membered ring)
+%
+%   Placing structures as substituents
+%
+%     \ylpositionh
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  <Linking units>
+%
+%     \ryl       (right linking unit) 
+%     \lyl       (left linking unit)
+
+
+% <Minor Linking Units>
+%
+%    \ayl
+%
+%    \upnobond
+%    \downnobond 
+%
+%    \BiFunc
+%
+%  <Setting fused rings>
+%
+%     \set@fusionadd@sixv     \set@fusion@sixv
+%     \set@fusionadd@sixvi    \set@fusion@sixvi
+%     \set@fusionadd@sixh     \set@fusion@sixh
+%     \set@fusionadd@sixhi    \set@fusion@sixhi
+%
+%     \set@fusion@decav
+%     \set@fusion@decavb
+%     \set@fusion@decavt
+%     \set@fusion@decah
+%
+%     \set@fusion@hanthrav
+%     \set@fusion@hphenanv
+%
+%     \set@fusionadd@fivev     \set@fusion@fivev
+%     \set@fusionadd@fivevi    \set@fusion@fivevi
+%     \set@fusionadd@fiveh     \set@fusion@fiveh
+%     \set@fusionadd@fivehi    \set@fusion@fivehi
+%
+%     \set@fusion@nonav        \set@fusion@nonavi
+%     \set@fusion@nonah        \set@fusion@nonahi
+%     
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  <For PostScript output>
+%
+%     \let\Put@Direct=\put
+%     \let\Multiput@Direct=\multiput
+%     \Put@@@Line
+%     \Put@@@sCircle
+%     \Put@@@oCircle
+%
+%  <ShiftPicEnv environments>
+%
+%     ShiftPicEnv
+%     ShiftPicEnvB
+%     \let\sfpicture=\picture
+%     \let\endsfpicture=\endpicture
+%
+%  <Wave bonds for stereochemistry>
+%     \ifwavebond, \WaveBonds
+%
+% <Bond coloring>
+%     \addbscolor, 
+%     \setbscolor, \setBScolor
+%     \bscolorswON, \bscolorswOFF
+%     \defineXyMcolor
+%     \XyMcolor
+%
+% <Truncation for two or more atoms>
+%    \SetTwoAtoms
+%    \SetTwoAtomx
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Initialization and conventions}
+% \subsection{Logos}
+%
+% The logo of \XyMTeX{} is defined in two ways.  The first definition uses 
+% the \verb/\fam/ command, which sometimes shows unusual behavior. The 
+% second definition is adopted in the present version of \XyMTeX{}, since 
+% this aims at the compatibility to \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\XyMTeX}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***************
+% * XyMTeX Logo *
+% ***************
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 1%%%
+% \newcount\TestCount
+% \def\XyM{\ifnum\fam=-1\relax\fam=0\relax\fi\TestCount=\fam%
+% X\kern-.30em\smash{\raise.50ex\hbox{$\fam\TestCount\Upsilon$}}%
+% \kern-.30em{M}}
+% \def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+% \def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+% \def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+% \def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 3%%%2009/07/07
+% \edef\test@it{\itdefault}
+% \edef\test@sf{\sfdefault}
+% \edef\test@tt{\ttdefault}
+% \edef\test@sl{\sldefault}
+% \edef\test@bx{\bfdefault}
+% \def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+% \raise.50ex\hbox to0.8em{\hss%
+% \ifx\f@series \test@bx\relax
+% $\mathbf{\Upsilon}$%
+% \else\ifx\f@shape \test@it\relax
+% $\mathit{\Upsilon}$%
+% \else\ifx\f@family \test@sf\relax
+% $\mathsf{\Upsilon}$%
+% \else\ifx\f@family \test@tt\relax
+% $\mathtt{\Upsilon}$%
+% \else\ifx\f@shape \test@sl\relax
+% $\mathit{\Upsilon}$%
+% \else
+% $\Upsilon$\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% \hss}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+% \def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 4%%%2009/10/25
+\def\select@@Upsionfont{%
+\edef\test@rm{\rmdefault}%
+\edef\test@sf{\sfdefault}%
+\edef\test@tt{\ttdefault}%
+\ifx\f@family \test@rm\relax
+{\expandafter\csname OT1/cmr/\f@series/\f@shape/\f@size%
+\endcsname\char'7}%
+\else\ifx\f@family \test@sf\relax
+{\expandafter\csname OT1/cmss/\f@series/\f@shape/\f@size%
+\endcsname\char'7}%
+\else\ifx\f@family \test@tt\relax
+{\expandafter\csname OT1/cmtt/\f@series/\f@shape/\f@size%
+\endcsname\char'7}%
+\else{\expandafter\csname OT1/cmr/\f@series/\f@shape/\f@size%
+\endcsname
+\char'7}\fi\fi\fi%
+}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox to0.8em{\hss\select@@Upsionfont%
+\hss}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Switches for Three Modes}
+% 
+% Switches for determining three modes 
+% are added in the \XyMTeX{} system (Version 5.00). 
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{bond coloring and the LaTeX Project Public License}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifPSmode etc.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifPSmode \PSmodefalse
+\newif\ifPDFmode \PDFmodefalse
+\newif\ifTeXLaTeXmode \TeXLaTeXmodetrue%default TeX/LaTeX mode. 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Temporary Counters and Dimentions}
+%
+% The following counter registers are used to draw wavy bonds 
+% by Bezier technique. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempcntXa etc.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@tempcntXa \newcount\@tempcntYa \newcount\@tempcntz
+\newcount\@tempcntXb \newcount\@tempcntYb \newcount\@tempcntzz
+\newcount\@tempcntXc \newcount\@tempcntYc \newcount\@tempcntzzz
+\newcount\@tempcntXd \newcount\@tempcntYd \newcount\@tempcntzzzz
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following dimension registers can be used temporarily 
+% in addition to |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb| of LaTeX 
+% utility. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dimtempa etc.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@dimtempa
+\newdimen\@tempdimd
+\newdimen\@tempdime
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Wavy Bonds}
+%
+% Wavy bonds that represent unspecified stereochemistry are supported by using 
+% PostScript technique. To assure compatibility, the non-PostScript mode 
+% is revised to support wavy bonds. 
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Wavy Bonds} 
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\waveunitA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\waveunitA(#1,#2)#3{%
+\@tempcntz=#1\relax
+\@tempcntzz=#2\relax
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%middle point parameters%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifnum\@tempcntz=3\relax%
+ \ifnum\@tempcntzz=5\relax%
+  \@tempcntXa=-16 \@tempcntYa=10\relax%
+  \@tempcntXd=16 \@tempcntYd=-10\relax
+ \else\ifnum\@tempcntzz=-5\relax%
+  \@tempcntXa=-16 \@tempcntYa=-10\relax
+  \@tempcntXd=16 \@tempcntYd=10\relax
+ \fi\fi 
+\else\ifnum\@tempcntz=-3\relax%
+ \ifnum\@tempcntzz=5\relax%
+  \@tempcntXa=-16 \@tempcntYa=-10\relax%
+  \@tempcntXd=16 \@tempcntYd=10\relax
+ \else\ifnum\@tempcntzz=-5\relax%
+  \@tempcntXa=-16 \@tempcntYa=10\relax
+  \@tempcntXd=16 \@tempcntYd=-10\relax
+ \fi\fi 
+\else\ifnum\@tempcntz=5\relax
+ \ifnum\@tempcntzz=3\relax
+  \@tempcntXa=-10 \@tempcntYa=16\relax
+  \@tempcntXd=10 \@tempcntYd=-16\relax
+ \else\ifnum\@tempcntzz=-3\relax
+  \@tempcntXa=-10 \@tempcntYa=-16\relax
+  \@tempcntXd=10 \@tempcntYd=16\relax
+ \fi\fi
+\else\ifnum\@tempcntz=-5\relax
+ \ifnum\@tempcntzz=3\relax
+  \@tempcntXa=10 \@tempcntYa=16\relax
+  \@tempcntXd=10 \@tempcntYd=-16\relax
+ \else\ifnum\@tempcntzz=-3\relax
+  \@tempcntXa=10 \@tempcntYa=-16\relax
+  \@tempcntXd=-10 \@tempcntYd=16\relax
+ \fi\fi
+\else\ifnum\@tempcntz=1\relax
+ \ifnum\@tempcntzz=0\relax
+  \@tempcntXa=0 \@tempcntYa=20\relax
+  \@tempcntXd=0 \@tempcntYd=-20\relax
+ \fi
+\else\ifnum\@tempcntz=-1\relax
+ \ifnum\@tempcntzz=0\relax
+  \@tempcntXa=0 \@tempcntYa=-20\relax
+  \@tempcntXd=0 \@tempcntYd=20\relax
+ \fi
+\else\ifnum\@tempcntz=0\relax
+ \ifnum\@tempcntzz=1\relax
+  \@tempcntXa=-20 \@tempcntYa=0\relax
+  \@tempcntXd=20 \@tempcntYd=0\relax
+ \fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% start and ending %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifnum\@tempcntzz=0\relax%(1,0) (-1,0)
+ \ifnum\@tempcntz>0\relax
+ \@tempcntXb=#3\relax
+ \else
+ \@tempcntXb=-#3\relax
+ \fi
+ \@tempcntYb=0
+ \ifnum\@tempcntz>0\relax
+ \@tempcntXa=#3\relax
+ \else
+ \@tempcntXa=-#3\relax
+ \fi
+ \divide\@tempcntXa by2\relax 
+ \@tempcntXd=\@tempcntXa
+\else\ifnum\@tempcntz=0\relax%(0,1) (0,-1)
+ \@tempcntXb=0\relax
+ \ifnum\@tempcntzz>0\relax
+ \@tempcntYb=#3\relax
+ \@tempcntYa=#3\relax
+ \else
+ \@tempcntYb=-#3\relax
+ \@tempcntYa=-#3\relax
+ \fi
+ \divide\@tempcntYa by2\relax 
+ \@tempcntYd=\@tempcntYa
+\else
+\ifnum\@tempcntz>0\relax
+\@tempcntXb=#3\relax
+\else
+\@tempcntXb=-#3\relax
+\fi
+\ifnum\@tempcntzz>0\relax
+\@tempcntYb=#3\relax
+\else
+\@tempcntYb=-#3\relax
+\fi
+\ifnum\@tempcntzz>0\relax
+\@tempcntzzzz=#2\relax
+\else
+\@tempcntzzzz=-#2\relax
+\fi
+\multiply\@tempcntYb by10\relax
+\multiply\@tempcntYb by\@tempcntzzzz\relax
+\ifnum\@tempcntz>0\relax
+\@tempcntzzzz=#1\relax
+\else
+\@tempcntzzzz=-#1\relax
+\fi
+\divide\@tempcntYb by\@tempcntzzzz\relax
+\divide\@tempcntYb by10\relax
+\@tempcntzzzz=\@tempcntXb
+\divide\@tempcntzzzz by2\relax
+\advance\@tempcntXa by\@tempcntzzzz
+\advance\@tempcntXd by\@tempcntzzzz
+\@tempcntzzzz=\@tempcntYb
+\divide\@tempcntzzzz by2\relax
+\advance\@tempcntYa by\@tempcntzzzz
+\advance\@tempcntYd by\@tempcntzzzz
+\fi\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Bezier curves %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tempcntXc=\@tempcntXb
+\multiply\@tempcntXc by2\relax
+\@tempcntYc=\@tempcntYb
+\multiply\@tempcntYc by2\relax
+\begin{picture}(0,0)(0,0)%
+\multiput(0,0)(\@tempcntXc,\@tempcntYc){3}{%
+\qbezier(0,0)(\@tempcntXa,\@tempcntYa)(\@tempcntXb,\@tempcntYb)}%
+\multiput(\@tempcntXb,\@tempcntYb)(\@tempcntXc,\@tempcntYc){2}{%
+\qbezier(0,0)(\@tempcntXd,\@tempcntYd)(\@tempcntXb,\@tempcntYb)}%
+\end{picture}%
+}%end of \waveunitA
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% A new switch for wave bonds for stereochemistry is 
+% added:  |\ifwavebond|.  
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{New switch: \cs{ifwavebond}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifwavebond}
+% \begin{macro}{\WaveBonds}
+% \begin{macro}{\NormalBonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifwavebond \wavebondfalse
+\def\WaveBonds{\wavebondtrue} 
+\def\NormalBonds{\wavebondfalse} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Renewed command: \cs{Put@@Line}} 
+% \begin{macro}{\Put@@Line}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Put@@Line(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{\Put@Direct(#1,#2){%
+\ifwavebond \@tempcnta=#5\relax
+\divide\@tempcnta by5\relax
+\waveunitA(#3,#4){\@tempcnta}\else
+\line(#3,#4){#5}\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions for PostScript}
+%
+% The picture environment is switched to be acceptable 
+% to another system such as PostScript. 
+%
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/5/30}{New commands: \cs{Put@@Line}, 
+%   \cs{Put@@sCircle}, and \cs{Put@@oCircle}}
+% \begin{macro}{\Put@@Line}
+% \begin{macro}{\Put@@sCircle}
+% \begin{macro}{\Put@@oCircle}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\global\let\@ldline=\line%store the oridinal line command of picture enviroment
+\global\let\@ldthicklines=\thicklines
+\global\let\@ldthinlines=\thinlines
+%%\def\Put@@Line(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\line(#3,#4){#5}}}
+\def\Put@@sCircle(#1,#2)#3{\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\circle*{#3}}}
+\def\Put@@oCircle(#1,#2)#3{\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\circle{#3}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The initial setting is the original LaTeX picture environment. 
+% To switch the size-reduction meachism and the pstricks mechanism, 
+% we can use a switching command such as |\originalpicture|. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{New environment: sfpicture}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/5/30}{New command: \cs{originalpicture}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\originalpicture}
+% \begin{macro}{\sfpicture}
+% \begin{macro}{\Put@Direct}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifxymtexpssw\xymtexpsswfalse
+\def\originalpicture{%
+\let\sfpicture=\picture
+\let\endsfpicture=\endpicture
+\let\Put@Direct=\put
+\let\Multiput@Direct=\multiput
+\let\line=\@ldline
+\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline
+\let\thicklines=\@ldthicklines
+\let\thinlines=\@ldthinlines
+\thinlines
+\let\Put@Line=\Put@@Line
+\let\Put@sCircle=\Put@@sCircle
+\let\Put@oCircle=\Put@@oCircle
+\xymtexpsswfalse
+\@ifundefined{@changeunitlength}{}{%
+\let\changeunitlength=\@changeunitlength}%
+\unitlength=0.1pt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% To switch from XyMTeX to XyMTeX with pstricks, we use the following command:  
+% \begin{macro}{\changexymtextops}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\changexymtextops{\xymtexpsswtrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SlopetoXY}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{New command: \cs{SlopetoXY}}
+% This command is extracted from |\Put@@@Line}| of the \textsf{xymtx-ps} package 
+% so as to be a common code for defining |\Put@@@Line}| (\textsf{xymtx-ps} package), 
+% |\Color@@@Line| (\textsf{xymtx-ps} package), |\Color@@@@Line| (\textsf{xymtx-pdf} package), 
+% and so on. This command changes a set of line specifiers (a starting point, a slope, and 
+% a line length of the \LaTeX{} picture environment) into another set 
+% (a starting point and a terminal point (|\@tempcntXa|,|\@tempcntYa|)). 
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SlopetoXY(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{%
+%%x-coordinate
+\@tempcntXa=0\relax
+\ifnum#3>0\relax \@tempcntXa=#5\relax
+\else\ifnum#3<0\relax\@tempcntXa=-#5\relax\fi\fi
+\advance\@tempcntXa by#1\relax
+%%y-coordinate
+\@tempcntYa=#5\relax
+\ifnum#3=0\relax\else
+\multiply\@tempcntYa by#4\relax\multiply\@tempcntYa by10\relax
+\divide\@tempcntYa by#3\relax\divide\@tempcntYa by10\relax\fi
+\ifnum\@tempcntYa<0\relax
+\ifnum#4>0\relax\@tempcntYa=-\@tempcntYa\fi
+\else
+\ifnum\@tempcntYa>0\relax
+\ifnum#4<0\relax\@tempcntYa=-\@tempcntYa\fi\fi
+\fi
+\advance\@tempcntYa by#2\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Macros for treating argumets}
+% 
+% For separating each argument (BONDLIST, SUBSLIST or ATOMLIST) into 
+% components (descriptors), we define several useful macros. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@forsemicol}
+% \begin{macro}{\@forl@@p}
+% \begin{macro}{\@iforl@@p}
+%
+% The macro |\@forsemicol| resembles the |\@for| macro that is 
+% the \LaTeX{} original macro; however a semicolon is used as 
+% a separating key in place of a comma.  
+%
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/07/06}{\cs{@forsemicol}: \cs{edef}
+% to \cs{expandafter}}
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/07/06}{\cs{@iforl@@p} replaced by 
+% a LaTeX2e-like definitiion}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ****************************************************
+% * For separating an augument list to each argument *
+% ****************************************************
+%
+\def\@forsemicol#1:=#2\do#3{%
+%  \edef\@fortmp{#2}%1996/07/06 by S. Fujita
+   \expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}%
+    \ifx\@fortmp\@empty \else%
+    \expandafter\@forl@@p#2;\@nil;\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}
+\long\def\@forl@@p#1;#2;#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else%
+       #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@iforl@@p #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}
+\long\def\@iforl@@p#1;#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil%
+       \expandafter\@fornoop \else
+      #4\relax\expandafter\@iforl@@p\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}
+%\def\@iforl@@p#1;#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil%
+%       \let\@nextwhile=\@fornoop \else%
+%      #4\relax\let\@nextwhile=\@iforl@@p\fi\@nextwhile#2\@@#3{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\@m@mb@r| separates a character string into to portions 
+% by using a double equality symbol (|==|) and a semicolon as delimiters. 
+% The first potion consists of a locant number and a bond modifier (stored 
+% in |\@membera|), which are further separated by the macro |\twoch@r|, 
+% |\twoch@@r| or |\threech@r|. 
+% The second potion shows a substituent (stored in |\@memberb|), 
+% which is printed by means of an appropiate command. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@m@mb@r}
+% \begin{macro}{\twoch@r}
+% \begin{macro}{\twoch@@r}
+% \begin{macro}{\threech@r}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@m@mb@r#1==#2;{\gdef\@membera{#1}\gdef\@memberb{#2}}
+\def\@m@mb@r#1==#2;{\def\@membera{#1}\def\@memberb{#2}}
+\def\twoch@r#1#2{\gdef\@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@tmpb{#2}}
+\def\twoch@@r#1#2{\gdef\@@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@@tmpb{#2}}
+%\def\threech@r#1#2#3{\gdef\@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@tmpb{#2}\gdef\@tmpc{#3}}%redefined
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\threech@r| is redefined by using |\@get@first@char|
+% in order to give a warning of a two-digit number.  
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{\cs{@get@first@char} has been added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@get@first@char}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifdrawsamesubst\drawsamesubstfalse
+\def\@get@first@char#1{\if\noexpand#1\relax\else
+\@cnttempa=`#1\relax
+\ifnum\@cnttempa>47\relax
+\ifnum\@cnttempa<58\relax
+\XyMTeXWarning{The second number (\@tmpb) of a two-digit number (\@tmpa\@tmpb) 
+is missed. ^^J\space This should be written in braces,   
+^^J\space e.g. `{\@tmpa\@tmpb}D==substituent' and `{{\@tmpa\@tmpb}}==substituent'.}
+\fi\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{\cs{threech@r} has been redefined.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threech@r}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threech@r#1#2#3{\gdef\@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@tmpb{#2}\gdef\@tmpc{#3}%
+\begingroup
+\ifdrawsamesubst\ifx\@tmpa\empty\relax\else\ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax\else
+\setbox0=\hbox{\@get@first@char#2\relax}\fi\fi\fi
+\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following two commands are added to treat spiro fusion.
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{Added for spiro fusion}
+% To avoid the bugs in drawing multi-nested fused compounds, |\gdef| is 
+% changed to |\def| in the definitions of |\twoCH@@R| and |\twoCH@R|. 
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{Bug fix for \cs{twoCH@@R} and \cs{twoCH@R}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twoCH@R}
+% \begin{macro}{\twoCH@@R}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\twoCH@@R#1#2//{\gdef\@@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@@tmpb{#2}}
+\def\twoCH@@R#1#2//{\def\@@tmpa{#1}\def\@@tmpb{#2}}
+%\def\twoCH@R#1#2//{\gdef\@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@tmpb{#2}}
+\def\twoCH@R#1#2//{\def\@tmpa{#1}\def\@tmpb{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+
+% \begin{macro}{\@forendparenthesis}
+%
+% The macro |\@forendparenthesis| resembles the |\@for| macro that is 
+% the \LaTeX{} original macro; however a close parenthesis is used as 
+% a separating key in place of a comma.  
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for drawing round arrows} 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ************************************
+% * For coordinates for round arrows *
+% ************************************
+%
+\def\@forendparenthesis#1:=#2\do#3{%
+   \expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}%
+    \ifx\@fortmp\@empty \else%
+    \expandafter\@forL@@P#2)\@nil)\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}
+\long\def\@forL@@P#1)#2)#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else%
+       #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@iforL@@P #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}
+\long\def\@iforL@@P#1)#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil%
+       \expandafter\@fornoop \else
+      #4\relax\expandafter\@iforL@@P\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions}
+%
+% Switches for characterizing substitution sites as 
+% left, right or left-right boxes become effective in 
+% the commands |\putlatom|, |\putratom| and |\putlratom|. 
+% They are used for warning wrong or unnecessary usages of 
+% |\lmoiety| or |\rmoiety|. 
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Switches \cs{@leftput} added}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@leftput}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@rightput}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@leftrightput}
+% \begin{macro}{\resetlrput}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@rightput \@rightputfalse
+\newif\if@leftput \@leftputfalse
+\newif\if@leftrightput \@leftrightputfalse
+\def\resetlrput{\@rightputfalse\@leftputfalse
+\@leftrightputfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We can use the macro |\rmoiety| for drawing a right-hand substituent 
+% and the macro |\lmoiety| for drawing a left-hand substituent. 
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The definitions of \cs{rmoiety} and 
+% \cs{lmoiety} are changed. Warning function is added.}
+%
+% When you use a |\rmoiety| command in a left box produced by 
+% a |\putlatom| command, the warning ``Wrong |\rmoiety|'' is reported. 
+% When you use a |\lmoiety| command in a right box produced by 
+% a |\putratom| command, the warning ``Wrong |\lmoiety|'' is reported. 
+% If the ``draft'' option is effective, these cases are designated by 
+% solid squares at the corresponding positions on pages. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rmoiety}
+% \begin{macro}{\lmoiety}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **************
+% * Convention *
+% **************
+% %\def\rmoiety#1{#1 \hss}
+% %\def\lmoiety#1{\hss #1}
+\def\rmoiety#1{\if@leftput
+\XyMTeXWarning{Wrong \string\rmoiety\space used in a left box}%
+\hbox to0pt{%
+\hbox to0pt{\hss\vrule width\overfullrule height\overfullrule}#1\hss}%
+\else\if@rightput\XyMTeXWarning{Unnecessary \string\rmoiety\space 
+used in a right box}\hbox to0pt{#1\hss}%
+\else\if@leftrightput\hbox to0pt{#1\hss}%
+\fi\fi\fi\resetlrput}
+\def\lmoiety#1{\if@rightput
+\XyMTeXWarning{Wrong \string\lmoiety\space used in a right box}%
+\hbox to0pt{\hss#1\kern-.72em%
+\hbox to0pt{\vrule width\overfullrule height\overfullrule\hss}}\else 
+\if@leftput\XyMTeXWarning{Unnecessary \string\lmoiety\space 
+used in a left box}\hbox to0pt{\hss#1}%
+\else\if@leftrightput\hbox to0pt{\hss#1\kern-.72em}%
+\else\hbox to0pt{\hss#1\kern-.72em}\fi\fi\fi\resetlrput}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Warnings from \XyMTeX{} are concerned with commands 
+% |\rmoiety| and |\lmoiety|. 
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{if@dbondcolor} added for bondcolor package}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\XyMTeXWarning}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@dbondcolor \@dbondcolorfalse
+\def\XyMTeXWarning#1{%
+\begingroup
+\if@dbondcolor\else
+ \let\protect\string
+ \immediate\write\@unused{^^IXyMTeX Warning: #1\space 
+   on input line \the\inputlineno^^I}%
+\fi
+\endgroup%
+\global\@dbondcolorfalse%2010/10/01 for bond coloring
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Warnings concerned with ring fusion are based on 
+% the command |\FuseWarning| of \XyMTeX{}.
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{Warning function is added.}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{futileFuseWarning} added for bondcolor package}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cnttempa}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cnttempb}
+% \begin{macro}{\FuseWarning}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@cnttempa
+\newcount\@cnttempb
+\def\FuseW@rning#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+\@tempcnta=#1 \@tempcntb=#2
+\@cnttempa=#3 \advance\@cnttempa-#5
+\@cnttempb=#4 \advance\@cnttempb-#6
+\ifnum\@tempcnta=\@cnttempa
+ \ifnum\@tempcntb=\@cnttempb\else
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Mismatched fusion at bond `#7'}%
+ \fi
+\else
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Mismatched fusion at bond `#7'}%
+\fi}
+\def\futileFuseWarning#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{}
+\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The font of a substituent and its size are designated explicitly.
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/5/30}{%
+% The comands \cs{substfont} and \cs{substfontsize} are added to 
+% \cs{putlatom}, etc.}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\substfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\substfontsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\substfont=\normalfont
+\let\substfontsize=\normalsize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The original \LaTeX{} command |\put| is changed into macros suitable to 
+% more specific uses as follows. 
+% 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The definition is changed. Warning function 
+% for \cs{rmoiety} is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\putlatom}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\putlatom#1#2#3{\begingroup\resetlrput
+\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\@leftputtrue\substfont\substfontsize
+\hbox to0pt{\hss #3}\@leftputfalse}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The definition is changed. Warning function 
+% for \cs{lmoiety} is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\putratom}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\putratom#1#2#3{\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\hbox to0pt{#3 \hss}}}
+\def\putratom#1#2#3{\begingroup\resetlrput
+\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\@rightputtrue\substfont\substfontsize
+\hbox to0pt{#3 \hss}\@rightputfalse}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/5/30}{The mechanism of centering the 
+% first letter of a substituent by \cs{@getcharwidthput} is added to 
+% \cs{putlratom}.}
+%
+% \changes{v4.01a}{2004/11/11}{The mechanism of \cs{@getcharwidthput} 
+% is altered (one argument to two arguments). Treatments of \$ and commands are added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@getcharwidthput}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifspecial@ylcs \special@ylcsfalse
+\def\@getcharwidthput#1#2\owari{%
+\global\special@ylcsfalse
+\if\noexpand#1\relax \global\special@ylcstrue \else%\if the category #1 is 'command'
+\ifcat#1$\relax \global\special@ylcstrue\else%if the category of #1 is 'special letter' 
+\ifcat#1a\relax%if the category of #1 is 'letter'
+\setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+\global\@dimtempa=0.7em 
+\global\advance\@dimtempa by-\wd0\relax
+\global\divide\@dimtempa by2\relax
+\else\global\@dimtempa=0em\relax\fi\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The definition is changed. Warning function 
+% for \cs{lmoiety} and \cs{rmoiety|} is added.}
+% \changes{v4.01a}{2004/11/11}{The mechanism of \cs{@getcharwidthput} 
+% is altered (one argument to two arguments).}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\putlratom}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\putlratom#1#2#3{\begingroup\resetlrput
+\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\@leftrightputtrue\substfont\substfontsize
+\setbox1=\hbox{%
+\expandafter\@getcharwidthput#3\relax\owari}%the centering mechanism
+\@tempdima=\@dimtempa%global to local
+\ifspecial@ylcs\hbox to.72em{#3\hss}\else
+\hbox to0.72em{\kern\@tempdima #3\hss}\kern-\@tempdima
+\fi}%
+\@leftrightputfalse\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.01b}{1998/10/06}{\cs{putlratom}: delete \sc{setbox0}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The old definition is 
+% totally replaced by the new definition}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% % old definitions
+% %    \begin{macrocode}
+% % changed to avoid Overfull warnings 1993/11/11/S.Fujita
+% % \newif\if@moiety \@moietyfalse
+% % \def\putlratom#1#2#3{%
+% % \def\lmoiety##1{\global\@moietytrue}%
+% % \setbox0=\hbox{#3}%deleted by S. Fujita
+% % \if@moiety\def\lmoiety##1{\hss ##1}%
+% % \Put@Direct(#1,#2){\hbox to.72em{#3}}\global\@moietyfalse
+% % \else\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\hbox to.6em{#3\hss}}\fi}%
+% % \def\putlratom#1#2#3{\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\hbox to.6em{#3}}}
+% %    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Putlratom}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Putlratom#1#2#3{\Put@Direct(#1,#2){\substfont\substfontsize
+\hbox to.8em{#3}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2000/6/20}{New command: \cs{dotorline}}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotorline}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\d@t@rline(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5/(#6,#7)(#8,#9){%
+  \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%
+   \XyMTeXWarning{A dottedline is replaced by a solid line.}%
+    \Put@Line(#1,#2)(#3,#4){#5}%
+     }{{\thicklines%
+        \ifdim\unitlength>0.08pt
+          \dottedline{20}(#6,#7)(#8,#9)%
+        \else
+          \dottedline{30}(#6,#7)(#8,#9)\fi}}}
+\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Parameters}
+%
+% The original point for drawing a structural formula is shifted to an 
+% appropriate position, which is designated by the following parmeters 
+% (counters) for coordinates.
+% 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\noshift}
+% \begin{macro}{\shifti}
+% \begin{macro}{\shiftii}
+% \begin{macro}{\shiftiii}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *******************************
+% * Parameters for Coordinates  *
+% *******************************
+\newcount\noshift \noshift=0\relax%
+\newcount\shifti \shifti=240\relax%
+\newcount\shiftii \shiftii=400\relax%
+\newcount\shiftiii \shiftiii=800\relax%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The unit length for \XyMTeX{} is selected to be 0.1pt. This value 
+% should not be maintained as possible as you can.  A smaller value 
+% may disapper a sloped line of short length. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\unitlength.1pt%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Parameters for ring fusion are used in fusering.sty. 
+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/2/16}{This has been added to process the old XyMTeX 
+% manual for Version 1.01} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fuseAx}
+% \begin{macro}{\fuseBx}
+% \begin{macro}{\fuseAy}
+% \begin{macro}{\fuseBy}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fuseAx{0}
+\def\fuseBx{0}
+\def\fuseAy{0}
+\def\fuseBy{0}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Various switchs}
+%
+% These macros are used for clipping spaces at substitution positions. 
+% Note that |\if@clip| is used in place of |\if@dclip|. 
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{New Command: \cs{originoutput}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@clip}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@aclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@bclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@cclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@eclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@fclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\iforigpt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tmpaa}
+% \begin{macro}{\oriptoutput}
+% \begin{macro}{\OriptOutput}
+% \begin{macro}{\OriptOutputA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***************************************
+% * various flags (switches)            *
+% * treatment of substitution positions *
+% ***************************************
+%
+% for 6- or lower-membered cycles
+%
+\newif\if@clip \@clipfalse%   % switch for clipping at 4 
+\newif\if@aclip \@aclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 1
+\newif\if@bclip \@bclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 2
+\newif\if@cclip \@cclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 3
+\newif\if@eclip \@eclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 5
+\newif\if@fclip \@fclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 6
+\newif\iforigpt \origptfalse% % switch for showing the original point
+\newcount\@tmpaa%to use as a local counter
+\def\@rigpt@utput#1{\iforigpt
+   \Put@sCircle(-\shiftii,-\shifti){50}%
+   \Put@oCircle(-\noshift,-\noshift){50}%
+   \typeout{command `#1' origin: %
+   (\the\noshift,\the\noshift) ---> (\the\shiftii,\the\shifti)}\fi}
+\def\OrigptOutput(#1,#2)#3{\iforigpt
+   \Put@sCircle(-#1,-#2){50}\Put@oCircle(0,0){50}%
+   \typeout{command `#3' origin: (0,0) ---> (#1,#2)}\fi}
+\def\OrigptOutputA(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{\iforigpt
+   \Put@sCircle(-#1,-#2){50}\Put@oCircle(-#3,-#4){50}%
+   \typeout{command `#5' origin: (#3,#4) ---> (#1,#2)}\fi}
+\def\origptoutput{\@ifnextchar({\@origptoutput}{\@origptoutput(,)}}
+\def\@origptoutput(#1){%
+\@ifnextchar({\@@origptoutput(#1)}{\@@origptoutput(#1)(,)}}
+\def\@@origptoutput(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{%
+\def\TEMParga{#1}\def\TEMPargb{#3}%
+\ifx\TEMParga\empty\relax
+\@rigpt@utput{#5}\else\ifx\TEMPargb\empty\relax
+\OrigptOutput(#1,#2){#5}\else
+\OrigptOutputA(#1,#2)(#3,#4){#5}\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@gclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@hclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@iclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@jclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@xclip}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%
+% for further-membered cycles
+%
+\newif\if@gclip \@gclipfalse%
+\newif\if@hclip \@hclipfalse%
+\newif\if@iclip \@iclipfalse%
+\newif\if@jclip \@jclipfalse%
+\newif\if@xclip \@xclipfalse%added for temp. 2013/03/24
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The yl-function provides some difficulties in carrying 
+% out an |\if@aclip| switch etc. if |\@acliptrue| etc. are 
+% declared globally.  In Version 2.01, |\@acliptrue| etc. are 
+% declared locally by the grouping mechanism of \TeX. In order to 
+% communicate information on |\@acliptrue| etc. outside the grouping,  
+% the command |\clipinfo| (globally declared) stores tentatively 
+% information on |@acliptrue| etc. in the form of a,b,c,$\ldots$. 
+% Out side the grouping, the command |\developclipinfo| is 
+% declared to reset |\@acliptrue| etc.
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{Newly defined to communicate clipping
+% information.} 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/3/24}{\cs{if@xclip} added}
+% \begin{macro}{\clipinfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\storeclipinfo}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\clipinfo{}
+\def\storeclipinfo{%
+\if@aclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo a,}\fi
+\if@bclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo b,}\fi
+\if@cclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo c,}\fi
+\if@clip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo d,}\fi
+\if@eclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo e,}\fi
+\if@fclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo f,}\fi
+\if@gclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo g,}\fi
+\if@hclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo h,}\fi
+\if@iclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo i,}\fi
+\if@jclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo j,}\fi
+\if@xclip \xdef\clipinfo{\clipinfo x,}\fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% locally declared
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\developclipinfo}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\developclipinfo{%
+\expandafter\@tfor\expandafter\MEMBER\expandafter:%
+\expandafter=\clipinfo\do{%
+\if\MEMBER a\relax \@acliptrue\fi
+\if\MEMBER b\relax \@bcliptrue\fi
+\if\MEMBER c\relax \@ccliptrue\fi
+\if\MEMBER d\relax \@cliptrue\fi
+\if\MEMBER e\relax \@ecliptrue\fi
+\if\MEMBER f\relax \@fcliptrue\fi
+\if\MEMBER g\relax \@gcliptrue\fi
+\if\MEMBER h\relax \@hcliptrue\fi
+\if\MEMBER i\relax \@icliptrue\fi
+\if\MEMBER j\relax \@jcliptrue\fi}%
+\gdef\clipinfo{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Various commands and switchs for using substituents}
+%
+% For drawing a structure as a substituent, the argument (yl) can
+% be used.  The following commands and counters are used for shifting
+% the substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Commands for setting substituents}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Added: \cs{reset@yl@xydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@yl}
+% \begin{macro}{\yl@xdiff}
+% \begin{macro}{\yl@ydiff}
+% \begin{macro}{\yl@shiftii}
+% \begin{macro}{\yl@shifti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ylii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yli}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@ylii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@yli}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@yl{(yl)}
+\newcount\yl@xdiff
+\newcount\yl@ydiff
+\newcount\yl@shiftii
+\newcount\yl@shifti
+\def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{0}
+\def\@@ylii{}\def\@@yli{}
+\def\reset@@yl{\gdef\@@ylii{}\gdef\@@yli{}}
+\def\reset@yl@xydiff{\yl@xdiff=0 \yl@ydiff=0\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following switches are used for shifting the substituent. 
+% The locant flags such as |\@ylatrue| have been stoped to use. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/11}{Delete \cs{@ylatrue} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Commands for setting substituents}
+%
+% Old definition:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%% \newif\if@yla \@ylafalse
+% %%%%% \newif\if@ylb \@ylbfalse
+% %%%%% \newif\if@ylc \@ylcfalse
+% %%%%% \newif\if@yld \@yldfalse
+% %%%%% \newif\if@yle \@ylefalse
+% %%%%% \newif\if@ylf \@ylffalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@ylsw}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@@ylsw}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@ylsw \@ylswfalse
+\newif\if@@ylsw \@@ylswfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% Old definition:
+% %    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%% \def\@reset@ylsw{\@ylafalse\@ylbfalse\@ylcfalse
+% %%%%% \@yldfalse\@ylefalse\@ylffalse\@ylswfalse}
+% %    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@reset@ylsw}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@reset@ylsw{\@ylswfalse\@@ylswfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{ShiftPicEnv and ShiftPicEnvB}
+%
+% For supporting the yl-function of the XyM notation system, 
+% the mechanism for sifting the original point of each picture 
+% enviroment is encapsulated so as to create the ShiftPicEnv and 
+% the ShiftPicEnvB environments. 
+%
+% \changes{v3.01}{2002/4/30}{Commands for shift of picture environment}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/5/30}{New environment: ShiftPicEnv}
+%
+% The original point and the size of a picture environment is shifted 
+% due to whether a yl-function is declared or not. The first set of 
+% coordinates is usually set as (0,0), which means that the subsituent 
+% produced by a yl-funtions has no dimensions. 
+%
+% Old definition for fused rings: 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \if@sixfuseposv
+%  \yl@shiftii=-\fuseAx
+%  \yl@shifti=-\fuseAy
+%  \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+%  \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+%  \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)
+%  \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+% \else
+%  \begin{sfpicture}(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+%   \origptoutput{sixfusev}%
+% \fi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For monocyclic compounds:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \ShiftPicEnv[1]%%[0] not for a fusion unit, [1] for a fusion usit
+%   (0,0)(xshift,yshift)/%%picture after the action of yl function
+%                        %%no dimension
+%   (x_size,y_size)(xshift,yshift)%%orginal picture
+%   {name}%%name of control sequence
+%   (xx_size,yy_size)(xxshift,yyshift)%%option to typeout abnormal shifts
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ShiftPicEnv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifshiftpicsw\shiftpicswfalse
+\newif\if@sixfuseposv\@sixfuseposvfalse
+\def\ShiftPicEnv{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\ShiftPicEnv@}{\ShiftPicEnv@[0]}}
+\def\ShiftPicEnv@[#1](#2)(#3)/(#4)(#5)#6{%
+\@ifnextchar({\@ShiftPicEnv[#1](#2)(#3)/(#4)(#5){#6}}%
+{\@ShiftPicEnv[#1](#2)(#3)/(#4)(#5){#6}(,)}}
+\def\@ShiftPicEnv[#1](#2)(#3)/(#4)(#5)#6(#7){%
+\@ifnextchar({\@@ShiftPicEnv[#1](#2)(#3)/(#4)(#5){#6}(#7)}%
+{\@@ShiftPicEnv[#1](#2)(#3)/(#4)(#5){#6}(#7)(,)}}
+\def\@@ShiftPicEnv[#1](#2)(#3)/(#4)(#5)#6(#7)(#8){%
+\shiftpicswfalse%initialize
+\ifcase#1\relax%%%non-fused ring
+\if@ylsw \shiftpicswtrue
+\yl@shiftii=\@ylii
+\yl@shifti=\@yli
+\fi
+\or%%%fused ring
+\if@sixfuseposv \shiftpicswtrue
+ \yl@shiftii=-\fuseAx
+ \yl@shifti=-\fuseAy
+\fi
+\fi
+\ifshiftpicsw
+\advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+\advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+\begin{sfpicture}(#2)(#3)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+\begin{sfpicture}(#4)(#5)%
+  \origptoutput(#7)(#8){#6}%
+\fi}
+\def\endShiftPicEnv{\end{sfpicture}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Old definition for bicyclic rings: 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \if@ylsw
+%  \yl@shiftii=\@ylii
+%  \yl@shifti=\@yli
+%  \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii
+%  \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli
+%  \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+%  \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+%  \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)
+%  \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+% \else
+%  \begin{sfpicture}(1200,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+%   \origptoutput{nonaheterov}%
+% \fi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For bicyclic compounds or others:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \ShiftPicEnvB(0,0)(xshift,yshift)/%%picture after the action of yl function
+%   (x_size,y_size)(xshift,yshift)%%orginal picture
+%   {name}%%name of control sequence
+%   (xx_size,yy_size)(xxshift,yyshift)%%option to typeout abnormal shifts
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ShiftPicEnvB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ShiftPicEnvB(#1)(#2)/(#3)(#4)#5{%
+\@ifnextchar({\@ShiftPicEnvB(#1)(#2)/(#3)(#4){#5}}%
+{\@ShiftPicEnvB(#1)(#2)/(#3)(#4){#5}(,)}}
+\def\@ShiftPicEnvB(#1)(#2)/(#3)(#4)#5(#6){%
+\@ifnextchar({\@@ShiftPicEnvB(#1)(#2)/(#3)(#4){#5}(#6)}%
+{\@@ShiftPicEnvB(#1)(#2)/(#3)(#4){#5}(#6)(,)}}
+\def\@@ShiftPicEnvB(#1)(#2)/(#3)(#4)#5(#6)(#7){%
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(#1)(#2)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(#3)(#4)%
+  \origptoutput(#6)(#7){#5}%
+\fi}
+\def\endShiftPicEnvB{\end{sfpicture}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The further fusion of a three- or four-membered ring at a center bond 
+% of a six-six or six-five ring is permitted, while that of a five- 
+% or more-membered ring is not permitted.  The macro |\@smallringsw| 
+% is used for such switching (fusering.sty). 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\if@smallringsw}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@smallringsw \@smallringswfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Initialization}
+%
+% The |\iniflag| command initializes all of the clipping flags. 
+% The |\iniatom| command initializes all of the strings of temporary use 
+% such as |\aaa| and |\bbb|, which are associated with respective 
+% atom positions. 
+% The |\resetbdsw| command resets all of the strings of temporary use 
+% such as |\@aaa| and |\@bbb|, which are associated with respective 
+% bond positions. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\iniflag}
+% \begin{macro}{\iniatom}
+% \begin{macro}{\resetbdsw}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{Delete \sc{global}}
+% \changes{v4.02a}{2004/12/27}{Change \sc{ggg} to \sc{ggg}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %\def\iniflag{%
+% %\global\@aclipfalse\global\@bclipfalse%
+% %\global\@cclipfalse\global\@clipfalse\global\@eclipfalse%
+% %\global\@fclipfalse\global\@gclipfalse\global\@hclipfalse%
+% %\global\@iclipfalse\global\@jclipfalse%
+% %\global\@clipfusefalse}%
+% %\def\iniatom{%
+% %\gdef\aaa{}\gdef\bbb{}\gdef\ccc{}\gdef\ddd{}%
+% %\gdef\eee{}\gdef\fff{}%
+% %\gdef\gggA{}\gdef\hhh{}\gdef\iii{}\gdef\jjj{}%
+% %\gdef\@aaa{}\gdef\@bbb{}\gdef\@ccc{}\gdef\@ddd{}%
+% %\gdef\@eee{}\gdef\@fff{}%
+% %}%
+% %\def\resetbdsw{\gdef\@aaa{a}\gdef\@bbb{b}\gdef\@ccc{c}%
+% %\gdef\@ddd{d}\gdef\@eee{e}\gdef\@fff{f}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\iniflag{%
+\@aclipfalse\@bclipfalse\@cclipfalse\@clipfalse\@eclipfalse%
+\@fclipfalse\@gclipfalse\@hclipfalse%
+\@iclipfalse\@jclipfalse\@clipfusefalse%
+\global\@smallringswfalse%
+}%
+\def\iniatom{%
+\def\aaa{}\def\bbb{}\def\ccc{}\gdef\ddd{}%
+\def\eee{}\def\fff{}%
+\def\gggA{}\def\hhh{}\def\iii{}\gdef\jjj{}%
+\def\@aaa{}\def\@bbb{}\def\@ccc{}\def\@ddd{}%
+\def\@eee{}\def\@fff{}%
+\def\@ggg{}\def\@hhh{}\def\@iii{}%
+\def\@jjj{}\def\@kkk{}%
+}%
+\def\resetbdsw{\def\@aaa{a}\def\@bbb{b}\def\@ccc{c}%
+\def\@ddd{d}\def\@eee{e}\def\@fff{f}%
+\def\@ggg{g}\def\@hhh{h}\def\@iii{i}%
+\def\@jjj{j}\def\@kkk{k}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% At the beginning of \XyMTeX\ processing, we initialize atom 
+% information by the command |\iniatom|.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\iniatom
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Macros for Vertical Formulas}
+% \subsection{Placing substituents for vertical formulas}
+%
+% Such a drawing command as |\setsixringv| uses several inner macros 
+% for placing substituents with bonds. The first set of inner macros 
+% are shown as follows. 
+%
+% The command |\ylposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% The locant flags such as |\@ylatrue| have been stoped to use. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/11}{Delete \cs{@ylatrue} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Commands for setting substituents}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/19}{bug fix: initial setting of \cs{reset@@yl}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylposition#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\reset@@yl%%2013/06/19bug fix
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifnum#5<0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax\fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa>#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa<#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The flags |\@lyatrue| etc are not used in a revised edition. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \or\ifx\aaa\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-406}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-442}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\bbb\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-303}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\ccc\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\ddd\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{36}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\eee\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{213}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\fff\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{171}\gdef\@yli{-303}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+    \fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@substa| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 1-position (top) of a vertical six-membered ring.  The bond linking 
+% between the substituent and the 1-position is drawn in the light of 
+% the corresponding bond modifier (|\@tmpc| = Sa, Sb, SA, SB etc.). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substa}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 1 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@substa{%
+\if@aclip% %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-18,436)(-3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+       \dotorline(18,436)(3,5){60}/(18,436)(72,526)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(18,436)(3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+       \dotorline(-18,436)(-3,5){60}/(-18,436)(-72,526)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \Put@Line(-18,436)(-3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \Put@Line(18,436)(3,5){60}%      % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-18,436)(-3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(18,436)(3,5){60}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(-12,436)(0,1){110}%    % double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(12,436)(0,1){110}%     % double bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \dotorline(0,436)(0,1){110}/(0,436)(0,546)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single wave bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(0,406){\setatombondd}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(0,406){\setatombondf}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+\else% % no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \dotorline(0,406)(3,5){72}/(0,406)(72,526)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) upper --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \dotorline(0,406)(-3,5){72}/(0,406)(-72,526)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(3,5){72}%       % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(3,5){72}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(-12,406)(0,1){140}%    % double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(12,406)(0,1){140}%     % double bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \dotorline(0,406)(0,1){140}/(0,406)(0,546)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single wave bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(0,406){\setatombondd}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(0,406){\setatombondf}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi}% end of \@substa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@substb| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 2-position (upper-right) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 2 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@substb{%
+ \if@bclip %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(201,327)(5,3){100}%    % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putratom{268}{420}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(201,358)(3,5){60}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(201,303)(1,0){100}/(201,303)(301,303)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(201,303)(1,0){100}%    % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putratom{268}{420}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(201,358)(3,5){60}/(201,358)(261,458)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putratom{268}{420}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(201,358)(3,5){60}%     % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha%
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(201,303)(1,0){100}%    % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putratom{268}{420}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(201,358)(3,5){60}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alphau undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(201,303)(1,0){100}%    % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax
+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(194,331)(5,3){100}%    % double bond at 2
+           \Put@Line(200,305)(5,3){100}%    % double bond at 2
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(201,327)(5,3){100}%    % single bond at 2
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(201,327)(5,3){100}/(201,327)(301,387)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(210,327)(5,3){100}%      % single wave bond at 2
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombonda}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombonde}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(201,327)(5,3){100}%    % single bond at 2
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+ \else% %no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(5,3){120}%    % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax
+           \putratom{258}{410}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(3,5){72}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(171,303)(1,0){140}/(171,303)(311,303)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(1,0){140}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax
+           \putratom{258}{410}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(171,303)(3,5){72}/(171,303)(243,423)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax
+           \putratom{258}{410}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(3,5){72}%     % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(1,0){140}%    % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax
+           \putratom{258}{410}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(3,5){72}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined 
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(1,0){140}%    % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=6\relax
+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(168,310)(5,3){120}%    % double bond at 2
+           \Put@Line(174,284)(5,3){120}%    % double bond at 2
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(5,3){120}%    % single bond at 2
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(171,303)(5,3){120}/(171,303)(291,375)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(5,3){120}%      % single wave bond at 2
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombonda}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombonde}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(5,3){120}%    % single bond at 2
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi}% end of \@substb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@substc| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 3-position (lower-right) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff|} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substc}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 3 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@substc{%
+ \if@cclip %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(201,79)(5,-3){110}%    % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putratom{268}{-80}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(201,48)(3,-5){60}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \dotorline(201,103)(1,0){100}/(201,103)(301,103)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(201,103)(1,0){100}%    % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putratom{268}{-80}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(201,48)(3,-5){60}/(201,48)(261,-52)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putratom{268}{-80}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(201,48)(3,-5){60}%     % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \Put@Line(201,103)(1,0){100}%    % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putratom{268}{-80}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(201,48)(3,-5){60}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(201,103)(1,0){100}%    % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax
+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(194,76)(5,-3){100}%    % double bond at 3
+           \Put@Line(200,101)(5,-3){100}%   % double bond at 3
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(201,79)(5,-3){100}%    % single bond at 3
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(201,79)(5,-3){100}/(201,79)(301,19)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(210,79)(5,-3){100}%      % single wave bond at 3
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(171,103){\setatombondf}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(171,103){\setatombondc}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(201,79)(5,-3){100}%    % single bond at 3
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+ \else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=48\relax
+           \putratom{258}{-70}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(3,-5){72}%    % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \dotorline(171,103)(1,0){140}/(171,103)(311,103)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(1,0){140}%    % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=48\relax
+           \putratom{258}{-70}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(171,103)(3,-5){72}/(171,103)(243,-17)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=48\relax
+           \putratom{258}{-70}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(3,-5){72}%    % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(1,0){140}%    % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=48\relax
+           \putratom{258}{-70}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(3,-5){72}%    % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(1,0){140}%    % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=65\relax
+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(168,96)(5,-3){120}%    % double bond at 3
+           \Put@Line(174,121)(5,-3){120}%   % double bond at 3
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at 3
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(171,103)(5,-3){120}/(171,103)(291,31)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(5,-3){120}%      % single wave bond at 3
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(171,103){\setatombondf}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(171,103){\setatombondc}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+     \Put@Line(171,103)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at 3
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi
+}% end of \@substc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@substd| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 4-position (bottom) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 4 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@substd{%
+\if@clip %clipping
+    \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+            \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(18,-30)(3,-5){60}/(18,-30)(72,-120)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(18,-30)(3,-5){60}%     % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}/(-18,-30)(-78,-130)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(18,-30)(3,-5){60}%     % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(18,-30)(3,-5){60}%     % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(-12,-30)(0,-1){110}%   % double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(12,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % double bond at 4
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \dotorline(0,-30)(0,-1){110}/(0,-30)(0,-140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%      % single wave bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\setatombonde}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\setatombondg}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%     % single bond at 4
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+ \else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+            \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(0,0)(3,-5){72}/(0,0)(72,-120)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){72}%        % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-3,-5){72}/(0,0)(-72,-120)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){72}%        % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){72}%        % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(-12,0)(0,-1){140}%     % double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(12,0)(0,-1){140}%      % double bond at 4
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \dotorline(0,0)(0,-1){140}/(0,0)(0,-140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single wave bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\setatombonde}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\setatombondg}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%       % single bond at 4
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi}%end of \@substd
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@subste| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 5-position (lower-left) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@subste}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 5 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@subste{%
+ \if@eclip%clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-201,79)(-5,-3){110}%  % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putlatom{-268}{-80}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-201,48)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putlatom{-318}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \dotorline(-201,103)(-1,0){100}/(-201,103)(-301,103)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u% (u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putlatom{-318}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-201,103)(-1,0){100}%  % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d% (d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putlatom{-268}{-80}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-201,48)(-3,-5){60}/(-201,48)(-261,-52)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putlatom{-268}{-80}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-201,48)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putlatom{-318}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \Put@Line(-201,103)(-1,0){100}%  % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=7\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putlatom{-268}{-80}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-201,48)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putlatom{-318}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-201,103)(-1,0){100}%  % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=62\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-194,76)(-5,-3){100}%  % double bond at 5
+           \Put@Line(-200,101)(-5,-3){100}% % double bond at 5
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-201,79)(-5,-3){100}%  % single bond at 5
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-201,79)(-5,-3){100}/(-201,79)(-301,21)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-220,79)(-5,-3){100}%      % single wave bond at 5
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(-171,103){\setatombondc}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(-171,103){\setatombondd}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-201,79)(-5,-3){100}%  % single bond at 5
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+\else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=56\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-171,103)(-5,-3){120}% % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=63\relax
+           \putlatom{-258}{-70}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-171,103)(-3,-5){72}%  % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putlatom{-326}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \dotorline(-171,103)(-1,0){140}/(-171,103)(-311,103)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putlatom{-326}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-171,103)(-1,0){140}%  % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=63\relax
+           \putlatom{-258}{-70}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-171,103)(-3,-5){72}/(-171,103)(-243,-17)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=63\relax
+           \putlatom{-258}{-70}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-171,103)(-3,-5){72}%  % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putlatom{-326}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \Put@Line(-171,103)(-1,0){140}%  % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=63\relax
+           \putlatom{-258}{-70}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-171,103)(-3,-5){72}%  % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax
+           \putlatom{-326}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-171,103)(-1,0){140}%  % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=62\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-168,96)(-5,-3){120}%  % double bond at 5
+           \Put@Line(-174,121)(-5,-3){120}% % double bond at 5
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=56\relax
+            \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-171,103)(-5,-3){120}% % single bond at 5
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=56\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+           \dotorline(-171,103)(-5,-3){120}/(-171,103)(-311,31)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=56\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-171,103)(-5,-3){120}%      % single wave bond at 5
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(-171,103){\setatombondc}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(-171,103){\setatombondd}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=56\relax
+            \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+            \Put@Line(-171,103)(-5,-3){120}%% single bond at 5
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi}% end of \@subste
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@substf| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 6-position (upper-left) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substf}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 6 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@substf{%
+ \if@fclip %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-201,327)(-5,3){100}%  % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putlatom{-268}{420}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-201,358)(-3,5){60}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putlatom{-318}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-201,303)(-1,0){100}/(-201,303)(-301,303)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putlatom{-318}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-201,303)(-1,0){100}%  % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putlatom{-268}{420}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-201,358)(-3,5){60}/(-201,358)(-261,458)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putlatom{-268}{420}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-201,358)(-3,5){60}%   % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putlatom{-318}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-201,303)(-1,0){100}%  % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax
+           \putlatom{-268}{420}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-201,358)(-3,5){60}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putlatom{-318}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-201,303)(-1,0){100}%  % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=6\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-194,331)(-5,3){100}%  % double bond at 6
+           \Put@Line(-200,305)(-5,3){100}%  % double bond at 6
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-201,327)(-5,3){100}%  % single bond at 6
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-201,327)(-5,3){100}/(-201,327)(-301,387)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-211,327)(-5,3){100}%      % single wave bond at 6
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\setatombondg}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\setatombonda}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax
+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-201,327)(-5,3){100}%  % single bond at 6
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-5,3){120}%  % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax
+           \putlatom{-258}{410}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-3,5){72}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putlatom{-326}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-171,303)(-1,0){140}/(-171,303)(-311,303)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putlatom{-326}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-1,0){140}%  % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax
+           \putlatom{-258}{410}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-171,303)(-3,5){72}/(-171,303)(-243,423)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax
+           \putlatom{-258}{410}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-3,5){72}%   % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putlatom{-326}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-1,0){140}%  % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax
+           \putlatom{-258}{410}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-3,5){72}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax
+           \putlatom{-326}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-1,0){140}%  % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=6\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-168,310)(-5,3){120}%  % double bond at 6
+           \Put@Line(-174,284)(-5,3){120}%  % double bond at 6
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-5,3){120}%  % single bond at 6
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-171,303)(-5,3){120}/(-171,303)(-311,375)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-5,3){120}%      % single wave bond at 6
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\setatombondg}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\setatombonda}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax
+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-5,3){120}%  % single bond at 6
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\fi}% end of \@substf
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Coloring Atoms and Bonds}
+%
+% The \textsf{xcolor} package is loaded to color atoms and bonds. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2011/02/24}{Added}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{xcolor}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The command |\addbscolor| is defined to color substitution bonds.
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{Bond coloring}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2011/02/24}{Bond coloring: \cs{addbscolor} changed and 
+% \cs{Addbscolor} added. But deleted.}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  e.g., \addbscolor{\cyan}{CH$_{3}$}
+%  e.g., \Addbscolor{cyan}{CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addbscolor}
+% \begin{macro}{\Addbscolor}
+% \begin{macro}{\setbscolor}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bondsubstcolor{}
+%\def\psbondsubstcolor{black}%added 2011/02/24
+\def\addbscolor#1#2{#2\gdef\bondsubstcolor{#1}}
+%\def\addbscolor#1#2{#2\gdef\bondsubstcolor{#1}%changed 2011/02/24
+%\gdef\psbondsubstcolor{\expandafter\@gobble\string #1}}
+%\def\Addbscolor#1#2{#2%added 2011/02/24
+%\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\bondsubstcolor\expandafter{\csname #1\endcsname}%
+%\gdef\psbondsubstcolor{#1}}
+\newif\ifbscolor
+\def\setbscolor{\addbscolor{}{}%
+\edef\@tmptmpb{\@tmpb}\edef\@tmptmpc{\@tmpc}%store original values
+\ifbscolor\setbox0=\hbox{\@memberb}\bondsubstcolor\setbox0=\hbox{}\fi
+\edef\@tmpb{\@tmptmpb}\edef\@tmpc{\@tmptmpc}%recover the original values
+}%
+\def\setBScolor#1{\begingroup\setbscolor#1\addbscolor{}{}\endgroup}%
+\def\bscolorswON{\bscolortrue}
+\def\bscolorswOFF{\bscolorfalse}
+\bscolorswON%default bond coloring
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% In addition to standard colors (e.g., \verb/\cyan/), 
+% any colors can be created by using \verb/\defineXyMcolor/. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2011/02/24}{New color: \cs{defineXyMcolor}}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  \defineXyMcolor{My color name}{Color model}{Color value}
+%  e.g., 
+%  \defineXyMcolor{MyXyMcolor}{cmyk}{1,0,1,0}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% This defines a color named ``MyXyMcolor'' and the 
+% corresponding control sequence \verb/MyXyMcolor/, 
+% just as ``cyan'' corresponds to \verb/\cyan/. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\defineXyMcolor}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\defineXyMcolor#1#2#3{%
+\definecolor{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+\@ifundefined{psset}{%
+\expandafter\def\csname#1\endcsname{\color{#1}}}%
+{\expandafter\def\csname#1\endcsname{\color{#1}%
+\psset{linecolor=#1}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Pre-defined colors (e.g., olive) in the \textsf{xcolor} package 
+% can be renamed to be applied to atom- and bond-coloring. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2011/02/24}{New color: \cs{XyMcolor}}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  \XyMcolor{new color_name}[color_model]{pre-defined color_name}
+% \end{verbatime}
+% e.g., 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  \XyMcolor{XyMolive}{olive}
+% \end{verbatime}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\XyMcolor}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\XyMcolor#1{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@XyMcolor{#1}}{\@XyMcolor{#1}[]}}
+\def\@XyMcolor#1[#2]#3{%
+\edef\tempColorModel{#2}%
+\ifx\tempColorModel\@empty\colorlet{#1}{#3}\else
+\colorlet{#1}[#2]{#3}\fi
+\@ifundefined{psset}{%
+\expandafter\def\csname#1\endcsname{\color{#1}}}%
+{\expandafter\def\csname#1\endcsname{\color{#1}%
+\psset{linecolor=#1}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds on a six-membered ring}
+%
+% The |\setsixringv| takes 5 arguments. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************************************************
+% * setting of atoms and bonds on a vertical six-membered ring *
+% **************************************************************
+%
+%    \setsixringv{SUBSLIST}{AD}{LOWER}{UPPER}{ORDER}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The first argument |SUBSLIST| is a list of substituents, which is 
+% represented in the standard format of \XyMTeX{}. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 6 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The second argument |AD| is an adjustment value, which adjusts the original 
+% set of locant numbers into the standard one between 1 to 6 for drawing 
+% a six-membered ring. 
+% The effective range of the standared set of locant numbers is 
+% restricted by the auguments |LOWER| and |UPPER|.  A minus value of 
+% the last argument shows the anti-clockwise numbering, while zero or 
+% a plus value represents the clockwise numbering. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%    AD       : adjustment      e.g. 0 for six-membered rings
+%    LOWER    : lower limit     LOWER < effective range < UPPER
+%    UPPER    : upper limit
+%    ORDER     : >= 0 clockwise, <0 anti-clockwise
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding switches \cs{@yla} etc.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setsixringv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setsixringv#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following commands are not used in a revised version
+% because of the direct use of |\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else...\fi|.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %\or \if@yla\else\@substa\fi% subst. on 1
+% %\or \if@ylb\else\@substb\fi% subst. on 2
+% %\or \if@ylc\else\@substc\fi% subst. on 3
+% %\or \if@yld\else\@substd\fi% subst. on 4
+% %\or \if@yle\else\@subste\fi% subst. on 5
+% %\or \if@ylf\else\@substf\fi% subst. on 6
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \or{\setbscolor\@substa\addbscolor{}{}}%% subst. on 1
+ \or{\setbscolor\@substb\addbscolor{}{}}%% subst. on 2
+ \or{\setbscolor\@substc\addbscolor{}{}}%% subst. on 3
+ \or{\setbscolor\@substd\addbscolor{}{}}%% subst. on 4
+ \or{\setbscolor\@subste\addbscolor{}{}}%% subst. on 5
+ \or{\setbscolor\@substf\addbscolor{}{}}%% subst. on 6
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds on a decaline ring}
+%
+% The command |\setdecaringv| 
+% has been stopped to use and replaced by |\setsixringv|
+% (version 1.02). 
+%
+% Definition of |\setdecaringv| has been deleted (version 2.01). 
+%
+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds at fused positions}
+%
+% The command |\ylfusedposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% The locant flags such as |\@ylatrue| have been stopped to use. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/11}{Delete \cs{@ylatrue} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/13}{Adding \cs{@fused@link} condition}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Commands for setting substituents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylfusedposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylfusedposition#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@@ylswfalse%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifnum#5<0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax%
+\@fused@linktrue
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax
+\@fused@linkfalse\fi%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% 0 fused positions   % F == (171,303)  G == (171,103)
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 
+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (fused position)
+    \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 0
+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (fused position)
+    \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-103}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 0
+ \fi\fi%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\or% subst. on 1  F == (0,406), G == (171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse
+   % subst. on 1  G == (0,406), F == (171,303) for \@fused@linktrue
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@fused@link
+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at F (5,-3) fusion
+      \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-406}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at G
+      \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+ \fi\fi%
+\else
+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (5,-3) fusion
+      \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-406}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G
+      \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+ \fi\fi%
+\fi
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\or% subst. on 2  F == (0,406), G == (-171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse
+   % subst. on 2  G == (0,406), F == (-171,303) for \@fused@linktrue
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@fused@link
+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at (-5,-3) fusion
+      \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-406}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 2
+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at G
+      \def\@ylii{171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 2
+ \fi\fi%
+\else
+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at (-5,-3) fusion
+      \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-406}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 2
+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G
+      \def\@ylii{171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 2
+ \fi\fi%
+\fi
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\or %3 fused positions   % G == (303,171)  F == (103,171)
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 
+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (fused position)
+      \def\@ylii{-303}\def\@yli{-171}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 3
+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (fused position)
+      \def\@ylii{-103}\def\@yli{-171}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 3
+ \fi\fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}% end of \ylfusedposition
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The bond-setting commands |\GFbonda|, |\GFbondb|, |\GFbondc| and 
+% |\GFbondd|, which are separated from the old |\setfusedbond| command, 
+% are used to place a bond and a substituent at a fulsed position of 
+% such a compound as a decaline.  
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/12}{Separate \cs{GFbonda} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbonda}
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbonda@a}
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbonda@b}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GFbonda{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% 0 fused positions   % F == (171,303)  G == (171,103)
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 
+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (fused position)
+   \GFbonda@a
+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (fused position)
+   \GFbonda@b
+ \fi\fi%
+}%end of GFbonda
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GFbonda@a{%
+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)
+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(0,1){140}%    % single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)
+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \dotorline(171,303)(0,1){140}/(171,303)(171,443)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U% unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)
+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+%           \Put@Direct(168,303){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at F
+%           \Put@Direct(168,353){$\wr$}%
+%           \Put@Direct(168,403){$\wr$}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(0,1){140}%      % single wave bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)
+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+             \Put@Line(171,303)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at F
+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)
+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+             \Put@Line(171,303)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at F
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GFbonda@b{%
+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)
+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(0,-1){140}%   % single bond at G
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)
+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \dotorline(171,103)(0,-1){140}/(171,103)(171,-37)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)
+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+%           \Put@Direct(168,43){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at G
+%           \Put@Direct(168,-8){$\wr$}% 
+%           \Put@Direct(168,-57){$\wr$}% 
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(0,-1){140}%      % single wave bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)
+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(0,-1){140}%   % single bond at G
+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)
+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(171,103)(0,-1){140}%   % single bond at G
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondb}
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondb@a}
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondb@b}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GFbondb{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% subst. on 1  F == (0,406), G == (171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse
+% subst. on 1  G == (0,406), F == (171,303) for \@fused@linktrue
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ \if@fused@link
+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (5,-3) fusion
+    \GFbondb@a
+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at F
+    \GFbondb@b
+ \fi\fi%
+ \else
+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (5,-3) fusion
+    \GFbondb@a
+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G
+    \GFbondb@b
+ \fi\fi%
+ \fi
+}% end of \GFbondb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GFbondb@a{%
+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%
+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,3){120}%     % single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%
+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(0,406)(-5,3){120}/(0,406)(-120,478)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%
+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,3){120}%     % single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%
+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,3){120}%     % single bond at F
+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%
+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,3){120}%     % single bond at F
+   \else\if\@tmpc D%beta single bond (downward)
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%
+           \putlratom{-31}{176}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,-1){140}%     % single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc C%alpha single bond (downward)
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%
+           \putlratom{-31}{176}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \dotorline(0,406)(0,-1){140}/(0,406)(0,266)%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of \GFbondb@a
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GFbondb@b{%
+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%
+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at G
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%
+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(171,303)(5,-3){120}/(171,303)(291,231)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%
+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at G
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%
+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at G
+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%
+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at G
+   \else\if\@tmpc D%beta single bond (upward)
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%
+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(171,303)(0,1){140}%    % single bond at G
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc C%alpha single bond (upward)
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%
+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \dotorline(171,303)(0,1){140}/(171,303)(171,443)%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of \GFbondb@b
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondc}
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondc@a}
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondc@b}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GFbondc{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% subst. on 2  F == (0,406), G == (-171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse
+% subst. on 2  G == (0,406), F == (-171,303) for \@fused@linktrue
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@fused@link
+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at (-5,-3) fusion
+      \GFbondc@a
+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at F
+      \GFbondc@b
+ \fi\fi%
+\else
+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at (-5,-3) fusion
+      \GFbondc@a
+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G
+      \GFbondc@b
+ \fi\fi%
+\fi
+}% end of \GFbondc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\GFbondc@a{%
+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%
+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(5,3){120}%      % single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%
+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(0,406)(5,3){120}/(0,406)(120,478)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%
+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(5,3){120}%      % single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%
+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(5,3){120}%      % single bond at F
+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%
+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(5,3){120}%      % single bond at F
+   \else\if\@tmpc D%beta single bond (downward)
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%
+           \putlratom{-31}{176}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,-1){140}%     % single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc C%alpha single bond (downward)
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%
+           \putlratom{-31}{176}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \dotorline(0,406)(0,-1){140}/(0,406)(0,266)%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of \GFbondc@a
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GFbondc@b{%
+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%
+            \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(-5,-3){120}% % single bond at G
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%
+           \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+           \dotorline(-171,303)(-5,-3){120}/(-171,303)(-291,231)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%
+            \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+            \Put@Line(-171,303)(-5,-3){120}%  single bond at G
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%
+            \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+            \Put@Line(-171,303)(-5,-3){120}%  single bond at G
+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%
+            \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+            \Put@Line(-171,303)(-5,-3){120}%  single bond at G
+   \else\if\@tmpc D%beta single bond (upward)
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%
+           \putlratom{201}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-171,303)(0,1){140}%   % single bond at G
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc C%alpha single bond (upward)
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%
+           \putlratom{201}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \dotorline(-171,303)(0,1){140}/(-171,303)(-171,443)%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of \GFbondc@b
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GFbondd{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% 3 fused positions   % G == (303,171)  F == (103,171)
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 
+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (fused position)
+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(1,0){140}%    % single bond at G
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \dotorline(303,171)(1,0){140}/(303,171)(443,171)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U% unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+%           \Put@Direct(303,148){$\sim$}% unspecified single bond at G
+%           \Put@Direct(353,148){$\sim$}%
+%           \Put@Direct(403,148){$\sim$}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+            \Put@Line(303,171)(1,0){140}%  single bond at G
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(1,0){140}%    % single bond at G
+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(1,0){140}%    % single bond at G
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (fused position)
+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+%           \putlratom{-127}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-1,0){140}%   % single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+           \dotorline(103,171)(-1,0){140}/(103,171)(-37,171)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+%           \Put@Direct(40,148){$\sim$}% unspecified single bond at F
+%           \Put@Direct(-13,148){$\sim$}% 
+%           \Put@Direct(-62,148){$\sim$}% 
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+            \Put@Line(103,171)(-1,0){140}%  single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-1,0){140}%   % single bond at F
+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%
+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-1,0){140}%   % single bond at F
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi\fi%
+}% end of \GFbondd
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\setfusedbond| takes 5 arguments. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ******************************************************
+% * setting of atoms and bonds at fused bond positions *
+% ******************************************************
+%
+%   \setfusedbond{SUBSLIST}{AD}{LOWER}{UPPER}{ORDER}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The first argument |SUBSLIST| is a list of substituents, which is 
+% represented in the standard format of \XyMTeX{}. 
+% Substituents at the fused positions (vertical bonds) are designated by 
+% the number 0 and the following bond modifiers.   
+% They are placed by means of the |\GFbonda| command. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 3 substitution positions)
+%
+%        for 0 (vertical (0,1) fused positions)
+%                F == (171,303)  G == (171,103)
+%
+%           0FA        :  alpha single bond at F 
+%           0FB        :  beta single bond at F
+%           0FU        :  unspecified single bond at F
+%           0GA        :  alpha single bond at G 
+%           0GB        :  beta single bond at G
+%           0GU        :  unspecified single bond at G
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Substituents at the fused positions (diagonal bonds) are designated by 
+% the number 1 and the following bond modifiers.   
+% They are placed by means of the |\GFbondb| command. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%        for 1 (diagonal (5,-3) fused positions)
+%                F == (0,406), G == (171,303)
+%
+%           1FA        :  alpha single bond at F 
+%           1FB        :  beta single bond at F
+%           1FC        :  alpha single bond (downward) at F 
+%           1FD        :  beta single bond (downward) at F
+%           1FU        :  unspecified single bond at F
+%           1GA        :  alpha single bond at G 
+%           1GB        :  beta single bond at G
+%           1GC        :  alpha single bond (upward) at G
+%           1GD        :  beta single bond (upward) at G
+%           1GU        :  unspecified single bond at G
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Substituents at the fused positions (other diagonal bonds) are designated by 
+% the number 2 and the following bond modifiers.   
+% They are placed by means of the |\GFbondc| command. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%        for 2 (diagonal (-5,-3) fused positions)
+%                F == (0,406), G == (-171,303)
+%
+%           2FA        :  alpha single bond at F 
+%           2FB        :  beta single bond at F
+%           2FC        :  alpha single bond (upward) at F 
+%           2FD        :  beta single bond (upward) at F
+%           2FU        :  unspecified single bond at F
+%           2GA        :  alpha single bond at G 
+%           2GB        :  beta single bond at G
+%           2GC        :  alpha single bond (downward) at G
+%           2GD        :  beta single bond (downward) at G
+%           2GU        :  unspecified single bond at G
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Substituents at the fused positions (horizontal bonds) are designated by 
+% the number 3 and the following bond modifiers.   
+% They are placed by means of the |\GFbondd| command. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%        for 3 (horizontal (1,0) fused positions)
+%                G == (303,171)  F == (103,171)
+% %%%%                F == (303,171)  G == (103,171)
+%
+%           3FA        :  alpha single bond at F 
+%           3FB        :  beta single bond at F
+%           3FU        :  unspecified single bond at F
+%           3GA        :  alpha single bond at G 
+%           3GB        :  beta single bond at G
+%           3GU        :  unspecified single bond at G
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The second argument |AD| is an adjustment value, which adjusts the original 
+% set of locant numbers into the standard one between 0 to 3 for drawing 
+% substituents on fused positions. 
+% The effective range of the standared set of locant numbers is 
+% restricted by the auguments |LOWER| and |UPPER|.  A minus value of 
+% the last argument shows the anti-clockwise numbering, while zero or 
+% a plus value represents the clockwise numbering. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%    AD       : adjustment      e.g. 0 for six-membered rings
+%    LOWER    : lower limit     LOWER < effective range < UPPER
+%    UPPER    : upper limit
+%    ORDER    : >= 0 clockwise, <0 anti-clockwise
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding the \cs{\@memberb=\@y} condition}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Separate \cs{GFbonda} etc.}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{Coloring Substitution Bond}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setfusedbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@fused@link \@fused@linkfalse
+\def\setfusedbond#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifnum#5<0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax\@fused@linktrue
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax
+\@fused@linkfalse\fi%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% 0 fused positions   % F == (171,303)  G == (171,103)
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 
+{\setbscolor\GFbonda\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\or% subst. on 1  F == (0,406), G == (171,303)
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\setbscolor\GFbondb\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%\GFbondb
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\or% subst. on 2  F == (0,406), G == (-171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse
+   % subst. on 2  G == (0,406), F == (-171,303) for \@fused@linktrue
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\setbscolor\GFbondc\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%\GFbondc
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\or %3 fused positions   % G == (303,171)  F == (103,171)
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 
+{\setbscolor\GFbondd\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%\GFbondd
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds at a given position}
+%
+% The |\setatombond| takes 3 arguments. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************************************
+% * setting of atoms and bonds at an appropiate position *
+% ********************************************************
+%
+%   \setatombond{SUBSLIST}{AD}{SLOPE}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The first argument |SUBSLIST| is a list of substituents, which is 
+% represented in the standard format of \XyMTeX{}. 
+% Substituents at the fused positions (vertical bonds) are designated by 
+% the number 0 and the following bond modifiers.   
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 3 substitution positions)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%    
+% The second argument |AD| is an adjustment value, which adjusts the original 
+% locant number into 1. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AD       : adjustment, 
+%         Set AD as being 1  = position number - AD
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |SLOPE| has the following meanings. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SLOPE    
+%       
+%       1      : (0,1)              7     : (0,-1)
+%       2      : (3,5)              8     : (-3,-5)
+%       3      : (5,3)              9     : (-5,-3)
+%       4      : (1,0)             10     : (-1,0)
+%       5      : (5,-3)            11     : (-5,3)
+%       6      : (3,-5)            12     : (-3,5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{The bond-setting commands such as 
+%   \cs{setatombonda} ... \cs{setatombondh} are separated from 
+%   the original \cs{setatombond}.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@clipfuse \@clipfusefalse
+\def\setatombond#1#2#3{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >0\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <2\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\or% subst. on 1
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% (0,1)
+%
+ \ifnum#3=1\relax%(upward)
+{\setbscolor\setatombonda\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%   \setatombonda
+%
+% (1,0)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=4\relax%(right)
+{\setbscolor\setatombondb\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%   \setatombondb
+%
+% (0,-1)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=7\relax%(downward)
+{\setbscolor\setatombondc\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%   \setatombondc
+%
+% (-5,3)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=11\relax%
+{\setbscolor\setatombondd\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%   \setatombondd
+%
+% (5,-3)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=5\relax%
+{\setbscolor\setatombonde\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%   \setatombonde
+%
+% (5,3)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=3\relax%
+{\setbscolor\setatombondf\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%   \setatombondf
+%
+% (-5,-3)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=9\relax%
+{\setbscolor\setatombondg\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%   \setatombondg
+%
+% (-1,0)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=10\relax%(left)
+{\setbscolor\setatombondh\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01
+%   \setatombondh
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\setatombond| uses the following bond-setting 
+% commands.
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombonda}
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondb}
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondc}
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondd}
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombonde}
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondf}
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondg}
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondh}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombonda{%upward (0,1)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,40)(0,1){100}%  % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \dotorline(0,40)(0,1){100}/(0,40)(0,140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U% unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,30){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 1
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,80){$\wr$}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+            \Put@Line(0,40)(0,1){100}%  single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,40)(0,1){100}%  % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(-10,40)(0,1){100}%  % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(10,40)(0,1){100}%  % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(-15,40)(0,1){100}%  % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,40)(0,1){100}%  % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(15,40)(0,1){100}%  % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,40)(0,1){100}%  % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlratom{-31}{157}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+  \else%no clip
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \dotorline(0,0)(0,1){140}/(0,0)(0,140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U% unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,0){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 1
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,50){$\wr$}%
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,100){$\wr$}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+            \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){140}%  single bond at F
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(-10,0)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(10,0)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(-15,0)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(15,0)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){140}%  % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlratom{-31}{157}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombonda
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondb{%(right) (1,0)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(30,0)(1,0){110}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \dotorline(30,0)(1,0){110}/(30,0)(140,0)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(30,0)(1,0){110}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \Put@Line(40,0)(1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \Put@Line(40,10)(1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(40,-10)(1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \Put@Line(40,15)(1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(40,0)(1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(40,-15)(1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \Put@Line(40,0)(1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+  \else%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \dotorline(0,0)(1,0){140}/(0,0)(140,0)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,10)(1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,-10)(1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,-15)(1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,15)(1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondc{%(downward) (0,-1)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,-40)(0,-1){100}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \dotorline(0,-40)(0,-1){100}/(0,-40)(0,-140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,-90){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 1
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,-140){$\wr$}% 
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,-40)(0,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,-40)(0,-1){100}%    % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(10,-40)(0,-1){100}%    % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-10,-40)(0,-1){100}%    % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(15,-40)(0,-1){100}%    % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,-40)(0,-1){100}%    % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-15,-40)(0,-1){100}%    % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,-40)(0,-1){100}%    % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+       \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}% % left or right type
+  \else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \dotorline(0,0)(0,-1){140}/(0,0)(0,-140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,-60){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 1
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,-110){$\wr$}% 
+%           \Put@Direct(-3,-160){$\wr$}% 
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(10,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-10,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(15,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-15,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+       \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}% % left or right type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondd{% (-5,3)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-30,18)(-5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(-30,18)(-5,3){100}/(-30,18)(-130,78)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-30,18)(-5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-30,18)(-5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-36,8)(-5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-24,24)(-5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-39,3)(-5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-30,18)(-5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-21,33)(-5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-30,18)(-5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-150}{60}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+  \else%no clipping
+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-5,3){130}/(0,0)(-130,78)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(6,10)(-5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-6,-10)(-5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(9,15)(-5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-9,-15)(-5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-150}{60}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondd
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombonde{%(5,-3)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(30,-18)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(30,-18)(5,-3){100}/(30,-18)(130,-78)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(30,-18)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(30,-18)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(36,-12)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(24,-28)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(39,-3)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(30,-18)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(21,-33)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(30,-18)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{140}{-130}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+  \else%no clipping
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(5,-3){130}/(0,0)(130,-78)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(6,10)(5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-6,-10)(5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(9,15)(5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-9,-15)(5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{140}{-130}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombonde
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondf{%% (5,3)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(30,18)(5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(30,18)(5,3){100}/(30,18)(130,78)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(30,18)(5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(30,18)(5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(36,8)(5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(24,24)(5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(39,3)(5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(30,18)(5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(21,33)(5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(30,18)(5,3){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{160}{60}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \else%no clipping
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(5,3){120}/(0,0)(130,78)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(6,-10)(5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-6,10)(5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(9,-15)(5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-9,15)(5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){130}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{160}{60}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondf
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondg{%% (-5,-3)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax%1999/1/6 by Shinsaku Fujita
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-30,-18)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+%           \dotorline(-30,-18)(-5,-3){100}/(-20,-12)(-120,-72)%
+           \dotorline(-35,-21)(-5,-3){100}/(-35,-21)(-120,-72)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-35,-21)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond
+%           \Put@Line(-30,-18)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-35,-21)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+           \Put@Line(-36,-12)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-24,-28)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond
+           \Put@Line(-39,-3)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-30,-18)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-21,-33)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+  \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond
+%           \Put@Line(-30,-18)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-35,-21)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-130}{-130}{\@memberb}% % left type
+  \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=62\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax%1999/1/6 by Shinsaku Fujita
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-5,-3){130}/(0,0)(-130,-78)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(-6,10)(-5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(6,-10)(-5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(-9,15)(-5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(9,-15)(-5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-3){130}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-130}{-130}{\@memberb}% % left type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondg
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondh{% (-1,0)
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-30,0)(-1,0){110}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(-30,0)(-1,0){110}/(-30,0)(-140,0)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-30,0)(-1,0){110}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(-40,0)(-1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(-40,10)(-1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-40,-10)(-1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(-40,15)(-1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-40,0)(-1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-40,-15)(-1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(-40,0)(-1,0){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only
+  \else%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-1,0){140}/(0,0)(-140,0)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,10)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,-10)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,-15)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,15)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\ylatombondposition| is used to calculate the shift values 
+% (|\@ylii| and |\@yli|) for applying the |\setatombond| command. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/15}{New command: \cs{ylatombondposition} 
+% for setting substituents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylatombondposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylatombondposition#1#2#3{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >0\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <2\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\or% subst. on 1
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% (0,1)
+%
+ \ifnum#3=1\relax%upward
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-48}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi
+%   \setatombonda
+%
+% (1,0)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=4\relax%(right)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi
+%   \setatombondb
+%
+% (0,-1)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=7\relax%(downward)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{48}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi
+%   \setatombondc
+%
+% (-5,3)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=11\relax%
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{-30}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi
+%   \setatombondd
+%
+% (5,-3)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=5\relax%
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \gdef\@ylii{-50}\gdef\@yli{30}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi
+%   \setatombonde
+%
+% (5,3)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=3\relax%
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \gdef\@ylii{-50}\gdef\@yli{-30}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi
+%   \setatombondf
+%
+% (-5,-3)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=9\relax%
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{30}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi
+%   \setatombondg
+%
+% (-1,0)
+%
+ \else\ifnum#3=10\relax%(left)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi
+%   \setatombondh
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi}}% end of \ylatombondposition
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for horizontal formulas}
+% \subsection{Placing substituents for horizontal formulas}
+%
+% Such a drawing command as |\setsixringh| uses several inner macros 
+% for placing substituents with bonds. The first set of inner macros 
+% are shown as follows. 
+%
+% The command |\ylpositionh| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard point 
+% of a substituent. 
+% The locant flags such as |\@ylatrue| have been stopped to use. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}. 
+% Commands for setting substituents}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/19}{bug fix: initial setting of \cs{reset@@yl}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylpositionh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylpositionh#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\reset@@yl%%2013/06/19bug fix
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifnum#5<0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax\fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa>#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa<#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+ \or\ifx\aaa\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{30}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\bbb\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-103}\gdef\@yli{-171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+     \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-73}\gdef\@yli{-223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+     \fi
+ \or \ifx\ccc\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-303}\gdef\@yli{-171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+     \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-333}\gdef\@yli{-223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+     \fi
+ \or\ifx\ddd\empty
+       \gdef\@ylii{-406}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+     \else
+       \gdef\@ylii{-436}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+     \fi
+ \or\ifx\eee\empty
+       \gdef\@ylii{-303}\gdef\@yli{171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+      \else
+       \gdef\@ylii{-333}\gdef\@yli{223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+      \fi
+ \or \ifx\fff\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-103}\gdef\@yli{171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+     \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-73}\gdef\@yli{223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+     \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% The |\@hsubsta| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 1-position (top) of a vertical six-membered ring.  The bond linking 
+% between the substituent and the 1-position is drawn in the light of 
+% the corresponding bond modifier (|\@tmpc| = Sa, Sb, SA, SB etc.). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubsta}
+% *************************************************************
+% * treatment of substitution positions for a horizontal type *
+% *************************************************************
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 1 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@hsubsta{%
+\if@aclip %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only
+           \Put@Line(-30,0)(-1,0){110}%      % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-30,18)(-5,3){100}%     % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(-30,-18)(-5,-3){100}/(-30,-18)(-120,-72)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-30,-18)(-5,-3){100}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           \dotorline(-30,18)(-5,3){100}/(-30,18)(-130,78)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \Put@Line(-30,18)(-5,3){100}%     % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-30,-18)(-5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-30,18)(-5,3){100}%     % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-30,-18)(-5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only
+           \Put@Line(-30,-12)(-1,0){110}%    % double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-30,12)(-1,0){110}%     % double bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-30,0)(-1,0){110}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only
+           \dotorline(-30,0)(-1,0){110}/(-30,0)(-140,0)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-30,0)(-1,0){110}%      % single wave bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\setatombondG}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\setatombondD}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only
+           \Put@Line(-40,0)(-1,0){100}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+\else%% no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){140}%        % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){120}%        % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-5,-3){120}/(0,0)(-120,-72)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-3){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-5,3){120}/(0,0)(-120,72)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){120}%        % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-3){120}%       % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){120}%        % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,-3){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only
+           \Put@Line(0,-12)(-1,0){140}%     % double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,12)(-1,0){140}%      % double bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-1,0){140}/(0,0)(-140,0)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){140}%      % single wave bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\setatombondG}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\setatombondD}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){140}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi}%end of \@hsubsta
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@hsubstb| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 2-position (upper-left) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubstb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 2 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@hsubstb{%
+ \if@bclip %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           \putlratom{-37}{331}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(79,221)(-3,5){63}% % single bond at 2 (62=>63)
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax
+           \putlatom{-41}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(59,201)(-5,3){100}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \putratom{73}{331}{\@memberb}%      % right type
+           \dotorline(103,221)(0,1){100}/(103,221)(103,321)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \putlratom{73}{331}{\@memberb}%      % left-right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(103,221)(0,1){100}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax
+           \putlatom{-41}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           \dotorline(59,201)(-5,3){100}/(59,201)(-41,261)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax
+           \putlatom{-41}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           \Put@Line(59,201)(-5,3){100}%     % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \putlratom{73}{331}{\@memberb}%      % left-right type
+           \Put@Line(103,221)(0,1){100}%     % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax
+           \putlatom{-41}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(59,201)(-5,3){100}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \putlratom{73}{331}{\@memberb}%      % left-right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(103,221)(0,1){100}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-13\relax
+           \putlratom{-37}{331}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(78,208)(-3,5){63}% % double bond at 2(62->63)
+           \Put@Line(100,219)(-3,5){63}% % double bond at 2(62->63)
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           \putlratom{-37}{331}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(79,221)(-3,5){63}% % single bond at 2 (62->63)
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           \putlratom{-37}{331}{\@memberb}%
+           \dotorline(79,221)(-3,5){63}/(79,221)(16,326)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           \putlratom{-37}{331}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(79,221)(-3,5){63}%      % single wave bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(103,171){\setatombondh}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(103,171){\setatombondF}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           \putlratom{-37}{331}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(79,221)(-3,5){63}% % single bond at 2 (62->63)
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \else%%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=58\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-21\relax
+           \putlratom{-27}{311}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-3,5){72}%     % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=14\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-3\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-5,3){120}%    % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putlratom{73}{331}{\@memberb}%      % left-right type
+           \dotorline(103,171)(0,1){140}/(103,171)(103,311)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putlratom{73}{331}{\@memberb}%      % left-right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(0,1){140}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=14\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-3\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           \dotorline(103,171)(-5,3){120}/(103,171)(-7,243)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=14\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-3\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-5,3){120}%    % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putlratom{73}{331}{\@memberb}%      % left-right type
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(0,1){140}%     % single bond at 2
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=14\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-3\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-5,3){120}%    % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putlratom{73}{331}{\@memberb}%      % left-right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(0,1){140}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=64\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-21\relax
+           \putlratom{-27}{311}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(96,168)(-3,5){72}%      % double bond at 2
+           \Put@Line(121,174)(-3,5){72}%     % double bond at 2
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=58\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-21\relax
+           \putlratom{-27}{311}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-3,5){72}%     % single bond at 2
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=58\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-21\relax
+           \putlratom{-27}{311}{\@memberb}%
+           \dotorline(103,171)(-3,5){72}/(103,171)(31,291)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=58\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-21\relax
+           \putlratom{-27}{311}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-3,5){72}%      % single wave bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(103,171){\setatombondh}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(103,171){\setatombondF}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=58\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-21\relax
+           \putlratom{-27}{311}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(103,171)(-3,5){72}%     % single bond at 2
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi}% end of \@hsubstb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@hsubstc| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 3-position (upper-right) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubstc}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 3 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@hsubstc{%
+ \if@cclip %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+         \putratom{373}{331}{\@memberb}%       
+         \Put@Line(343,221)(3,5){63}% % single bond at 3 (62->63)
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax
+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(343,201)(5,3){100}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax
+           \putlratom{273}{331}{\@memberb}%     % left-right type
+           \dotorline(303,221)(0,1){110}/(303,221)(303,321)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax
+           \putlratom{273}{331}{\@memberb}%     % left-right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(303,221)(0,1){100}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax
+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \dotorline(343,201)(5,3){100}/(343,201)(443,261)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax
+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \Put@Line(343,201)(5,3){100}%     % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax
+           \putlratom{273}{331}{\@memberb}%     % left-right type
+           \Put@Line(303,221)(0,1){100}%     % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax
+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(343,201)(5,3){100}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax
+           \putlratom{273}{331}{\@memberb}%     % left-right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(303,221)(0,1){100}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-18\relax
+           \putratom{373}{331}{\@memberb}%       
+           \Put@Line(328,208)(3,5){63}%  % double bond at 3
+           \Put@Line(303,214)(3,5){63}%  % double bond at 3
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           \putratom{373}{331}{\@memberb}%       
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(343,221)(3,5){63}%  % single bond at 3
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           \putratom{373}{331}{\@memberb}%       
+           \dotorline(343,221)(3,5){63}/(343,221)(406,326)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           \putratom{373}{331}{\@memberb}%       
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(343,221)(3,5){63}%      % single wave bond at 3
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(303,171){\setatombondD}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(303,171){\setatombondb}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           \putratom{373}{331}{\@memberb}%       
+           \Put@Line(343,221)(3,5){63}%  % single bond at 3 (62->63)
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{363}{311}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(3,5){72}%      % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax
+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(5,3){120}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{273}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \dotorline(303,171)(0,1){140}/(303,171)(303,311)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up  --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{273}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(0,1){140}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax
+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \dotorline(303,171)(5,3){120}/(303,171)(423,243)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax
+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(5,3){120}%     % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{273}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(0,1){140}%     % single bond at 3
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax
+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(5,3){120}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{273}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(0,1){140}%     % single bond at 3
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=6\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{363}{311}{\@memberb}%       
+           \Put@Line(310,168)(3,5){72}%      % double bond at 3
+           \Put@Line(284,174)(3,5){72}%      % double bond at 3
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{363}{311}{\@memberb}%       
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(3,5){72}%      % single bond at 3
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{363}{311}{\@memberb}%       
+           \dotorline(303,171)(3,5){72}/(303,171)(375,291)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{363}{311}{\@memberb}%       
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(3,5){72}%      % single wave bond at 3
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(303,171){\setatombondD}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(303,171){\setatombondb}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax
+           \putratom{363}{311}{\@memberb}%       
+           \Put@Line(303,171)(3,5){72}%      % single bond at 3
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi}% end of \@hsubstc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@hsubstd| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 4-position (right-hand) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 4 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@hsubstd{%
+\if@clip %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+            \Put@Line(436,0)(1,0){110}%     % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax
+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(436,18)(5,3){100}%     % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+           \dotorline(436,-18)(5,-3){100}/(436,-18)(526,-72)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(436,-18)(5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax
+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only
+           \dotorline(436,18)(5,3){100}/(436,18)(536,78)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax
+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only
+           \Put@Line(436,18)(5,3){100}%     % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+           \Put@Line(436,-18)(5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax
+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(436,18)(5,3){100}%     % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(436,-18)(5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+           \Put@Line(436,-12)(1,0){110}%    % double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(436,12)(1,0){110}%     % double bond at 4
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+            \Put@Line(436,0)(1,0){110}%     % single bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+           \dotorline(436,0)(1,0){110}/(436,0)(546,0)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(436,0)(1,0){110}%      % single wave bond at 3
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(406,0){\setatombondF}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(406,0){\setatombondE}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+            \Put@Line(436,0)(1,0){110}%     % single bond at 4
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\else%% no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+            \Put@Line(406,0)(1,0){140}%     % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(406,0)(5,3){120}%      % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+           \dotorline(406,0)(5,-3){120}/(406,0)(526,-72)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(406,0)(5,-3){120}%     % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only
+           \dotorline(406,0)(5,3){120}/(406,0)(526,72)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only
+           \Put@Line(406,0)(5,3){120}%      % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+           \Put@Line(406,0)(5,-3){120}%     % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(406,0)(5,3){120}%      % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(406,0)(5,-3){120}%     % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+           \Put@Line(406,-12)(1,0){140}%    % double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(406,12)(1,0){140}%     % double bond at 4
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+            \Put@Line(406,0)(1,0){140}%     % single bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+           \dotorline(406,0)(1,0){140}/(406,0)(546,0)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(406,0)(1,0){140}%      % single wave bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(406,0){\setatombondF}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(406,0){\setatombondE}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax
+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only
+            \Put@Line(406,0)(1,0){140}%     % single bond at 4
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi}% end of \@hsubstd
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@hsubste| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 5-position (lower-right) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2003/4/1}{Bug fix}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubste}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 5 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@hsubste{%
+ \if@eclip %clipping
+  \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+%      \yl@xdiff=43\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+%           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \putratom{373}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(343,-221)(3,-5){63}%% single bond at 5 (62=>63)
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=41\relax
+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(343,-201)(5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=71\relax
+%           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \putlratom{273}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % left-right type
+%           \dotorline(303,-221)(0,-1){110}/(303,-221)(303,-321)%
+           \dotorline(303,-221)(0,-1){110}/(303,-221)(303,-311)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=71\relax
+%           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \putlratom{273}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % left-right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(303,-221)(0,-1){100}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=41\relax
+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(343,-201)(5,-3){100}/(343,-201)(443,-260)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=41\relax
+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(343,-201)(5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=71\relax
+%           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \putratom{273}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % left-right type
+           \Put@Line(303,-221)(0,-1){100}%   % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=41\relax
+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(343,-201)(5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=71\relax
+           \putratom{273}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % left-right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(303,-221)(0,-1){100}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=22\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=82\relax
+%           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \putratom{373}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(328,-208)(3,-5){63}% % double bond at 5 (62->63)
+           \Put@Line(306,-224)(3,-5){63}% % double bond at 5 (62->63)
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=43\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+%           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \putratom{373}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(343,-221)(3,-5){63}%% single bond at 5(62->63)
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+           \putratom{373}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \dotorline(343,-221)(3,-5){63}/(343,-221)(406,-326)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+           \putratom{373}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(343,-221)(3,-5){63}%      % single wave bond at 5
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(303,-171){\setatombondb}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(303,-171){\setatombondG}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+%      \yl@xdiff=43\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=33\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+%         \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+         \putratom{373}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+         \Put@Line(343,-221)(3,-5){63}% % single bond at 5(62->63)
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=9\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=111\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+%           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \putratom{363}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(3,-5){72}%    % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax
+%           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \putratom{273}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+%           \dotorline(303,-171)(0,-1){140}/(303,-171)(303,-321)%
+           \dotorline(303,-171)(0,-1){140}/(303,-171)(303,-311)%2002/5/30
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax
+%           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \putratom{273}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(0,-1){140}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(303,-171)(5,-3){120}/(303,-171)(423,-243)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax
+%           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \putratom{273}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(0,-1){140}%   % single bond at 5
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(5,-3){120}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax
+           \putratom{273}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(0,-1){140}%   % single bond at 5
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=3\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=111\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+           \putratom{363}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+%           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+            \Put@Line(310,-168)(3,-5){72}%   % double bond at 5
+            \Put@Line(284,-174)(3,-5){72}%   % double bond at 5
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=9\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=111\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+           \putratom{363}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+%           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(3,-5){72}%    % single bond at 5
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=9\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+           \putratom{363}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+           \dotorline(303,-171)(3,-5){72}/(303,-171)(375,-291)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=9\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+           \putratom{363}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(3,-5){72}%      % single wave bond at 5
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(303,-171){\setatombondb}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(303,-171){\setatombondG}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=9\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=111\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+%           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \putratom{363}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(303,-171)(3,-5){72}%    % single bond at 5
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi}% end of \@hsubste
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\@hsubstf| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 
+% the 6-position (lower-left) of a vertical six-membered ring. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Wave bonds for stereochemistry: U, FU, GU, SU, SV}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubstf}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 6 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@hsubstf{%
+ \if@fclip %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+%      \yl@xdiff=43\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+%          \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+          \putlratom{-37}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+          \Put@Line(79,-221)(-3,-5){63}% % single bond at 6 (62=>63)
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=40\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(59,-201)(-5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax
+%           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \putlratom{73}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % left-right type
+           \dotorline(103,-221)(0,-1){100}/(103,-221)(103,-321)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax
+%           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \putlratom{73}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % left-right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(103,-221)(0,-1){100}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=40\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(59,-201)(-5,-3){100}/(59,-201)(-41,-261)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=40\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(59,-201)(-5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax
+%           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \putratom{73}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \Put@Line(103,-221)(0,-1){100}%   % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=40\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(59,-201)(-5,-3){100}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax
+           \putratom{73}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(103,-221)(0,-1){100}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=49\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=82\relax
+%            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+            \putlratom{-37}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(78,-208)(-3,-5){63}% % double bond at 6 (62->63)
+           \Put@Line(106,-219)(-3,-5){63}% % double bond at 6 (62->63)
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=43\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+%            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+            \putlratom{-37}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(79,-221)(-3,-5){63}% % single bond at 6 (62=>63)
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+           \putlratom{-37}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \dotorline(79,-221)(-3,-5){63}/(79,-221)(16,-326)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+           \putlratom{-37}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(79,-221)(-3,-5){63}%      % single wave bond at 6
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(103,-171){\setatombondE}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue
+      \Put@Direct(103,-171){\setatombondh}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+%      \yl@xdiff=43\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=53\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax
+%           \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \putlratom{-37}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+           \Put@Line(79,-221)(-3,-5){63}% % single bond at 6(62->63)
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \else%%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+%      \yl@xdiff=59\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=63\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=111\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+%            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+            \putlratom{-27}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+            \Put@Line(108,-171)(-3,-5){72}%  % single bond at 6
+%   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta single bond%1998/10/11 by S. Fujita
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(103,-171)(-5,-3){120}%  % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+%           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \putlratom{73}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % left-right type
+           \dotorline(103,-171)(0,-1){140}/(103,-171)(103,-311)%
+   \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+%           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \putlratom{73}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % left-right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(103,-171)(0,-1){140}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \dotorline(103,-171)(-5,-3){120}/(103,-171)(-17,-243)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(103,-171)(-5,-3){120}%  % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+%      \yl@xdiff=20\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+%           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \putlratom{73}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right-left type
+           \Put@Line(103,-171)(0,-1){140}%   % single bond at 6
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(103,-171)(-5,-3){120}%  % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+           \putlratom{73}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right-left type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(103,-171)(0,-1){140}%   % single bond at 6
+           }%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=65\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=111\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+%            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+            \putlratom{-27}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+            \Put@Line(96,-168)(-3,-5){72}%   % double bond at 6
+            \Put@Line(121,-174)(-3,-5){72}%  % double bond at 6
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=111\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+%            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+            \putlratom{-27}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+            \Put@Line(108,-171)(-3,-5){72}%  % single bond at 6
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+            \Put@Line(108,-171)(-3,-5){72}%  % single bond at 6
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+           \putlratom{-27}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+           \dotorline(108,-171)(-3,-5){72}/(103,-171)(31,-291)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+           \putlratom{-27}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(108,-171)(-3,-5){72}%      % single wave bond at 6
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(103,-171){\setatombondE}%
+     }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond
+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse
+      \Put@Direct(103,-171){\setatombondh}%
+     }%
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=111\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax
+%            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%
+            \putlratom{-27}{-382}{\@memberb}%
+            \Put@Line(108,-171)(-3,-5){72}%  % single bond at 6
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi}% end of \@hsubstf
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds on a six-membered ring}
+%
+% The |\setsixringh| macro takes 5 arguments, which have the same meanings 
+% as described in the definition of the |\setsixringv| macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************************************************
+% * setting of atoms and bonds on a horizontal six-membered ring *
+% ****************************************************************
+%
+%    \setsixringh{SUBSLIST}{AD}{LOWER}{UPPER}{ORDER}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The first argument |SUBSLIST| is a list of substituents, which is 
+% represented in the standard format of \XyMTeX{}. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 6 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The second argument |AD| is an adjustment value, which adjusts the original 
+% set of locant numbers into the standard one between 1 to 6 for drawing 
+% a six-membered ring. 
+% The effective range of the standared set of locant numbers is 
+% restricted by the auguments |LOWER| and |UPPER|.  A minus value of 
+% the last argument shows the anti-clockwise numbering, while zero or 
+% a plus value represents the clockwise numbering. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%    AD       : adjustment      e.g. 0 for six-membered rings
+%    LOWER    : lower limit     LOWER < effective range < UPPER
+%    UPPER    : upper limit
+%    ORDER     : >= 0 clockwise, <0 anti-clockwise
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/11}{Adding switches \cs{@yla} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Deleting switches \cs{@yla} etc.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setsixringh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setsixringh#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following commands are not used in a revised version
+% because of the direct use of |\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else...\fi|.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %\or \if@yla\else\@hsubsta\fi% subst. on 1
+% %\or \if@ylb\else\@hsubstb\fi% subst. on 2
+% %\or \if@ylc\else\@hsubstc\fi% subst. on 3
+% %\or \if@yld\else\@hsubstd\fi% subst. on 4
+% %\or \if@yle\else\@hsubste\fi% subst. on 5
+% %\or \if@ylf\else\@hsubstf\fi% subst. on 6
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\or{\setbscolor\@hsubsta\addbscolor{}{}}% subst. on 1%2010/10/01
+\or{\setbscolor\@hsubstb\addbscolor{}{}}% subst. on 2%2010/10/01
+\or{\setbscolor\@hsubstc\addbscolor{}{}}% subst. on 3%2010/10/01
+\or{\setbscolor\@hsubstd\addbscolor{}{}}% subst. on 4%2010/10/01
+\or{\setbscolor\@hsubste\addbscolor{}{}}% subst. on 5%2010/10/01
+\or{\setbscolor\@hsubstf\addbscolor{}{}}% subst. on 6%2010/10/01
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}% %end of setsixringh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Mocros linking Substituents}
+% \subsection{Right-handed linking unit}
+%
+% A structure-drawing command can be used to typeset a substituent 
+% by using a (yl)-argument. Moreover, the macro |\ryl| permits us 
+% to draw an intermediate linking unit. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{ryl} etc.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ryl}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ryl}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\x@ryl
+\newcount\y@ryl
+\def\ryl{\@ifnextchar({\@ryl}{\@ryl()}}
+\def\@ryl(#1)#2{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\def\centeraaa{}%
+\x@ryl=0\y@ryl=0
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@ylsw%
+\XyMTeXWarning{Duplicated items in the first augument of \string\ryl}%
+\else%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\settowidth{\dimen0}{\@memberb}%
+\x@ryl=\dimen0%%%dimension => counter
+\divide\x@ryl\unitlength
+\advance\x@ryl by-70
+\y@ryl=0
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\y@ryl by50
+\or%1
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by30
+\advance\y@ryl by50
+\or%2
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by40
+\advance\y@ryl by40
+\or%3
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by50
+\advance\y@ryl by30
+\or%4
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by50
+\advance\y@ryl by0
+\or%5
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by50
+\advance\y@ryl by-30
+\or%6
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by50
+\advance\y@ryl by-50
+\or%7
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by30
+\advance\y@ryl by-50
+\or%8
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\y@ryl by-50
+\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+ \yl@shiftii=\x@ryl
+ \yl@shifti=-\y@ryl
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifx\centeraaa\empty\else%
+   \@clipfusetrue
+   \putlatom{40}{-30}{\centeraaa}%  % left type
+\fi%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\let\local@tmpa=\@tmpa%global to local 2002/5/30 by SF
+\ifcase\local@tmpa%
+{\setbscolor\setatombonda\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\setatombonda% 0 (upward) (0,1)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondF\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondF%1 (3,5)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondA\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondA%2 (1,1)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondf\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondf%3 (5,3)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondb\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondb%4 (1,0)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombonde\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombonde%5 (5,-3)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondB\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondB%6 (1,-1)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondE\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondE%7 (3,-5)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondc\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondc%8 (0,-1)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi
+}\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \ryl macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The substituent-setting commands |\setatombondF| etc. are used 
+% in the macro |\ryl|. 
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondF}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondF}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondF{%% (3,5)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(30,50)(3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \dotorline(30,50)(3,5){60}/(30,50)(90,150)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(30,50)(3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(30,50)(3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(40,44)(3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(20,56)(3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(45,41)(3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(30,50)(3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(15,59)(3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(30,50)(3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{80}{160}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \dotorline(0,0)(3,5){90}/(0,0)(90,150)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(10,-6)(3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-10,6)(3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(15,-9)(3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-15,9)(3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{80}{160}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondF
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondE}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondE}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondE{%% (3,-5)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=70\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(30,-50)(3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(30,-50)(3,-5){60}/(30,-50)(90,-150)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(30,-50)(3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(30,-50)(3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+           \Put@Line(40,-44)(3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(20,-56)(3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond
+           \Put@Line(45,-41)(3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(30,-50)(3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(15,-59)(3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(30,-50)(3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+%           \putratom{80}{-220}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \putratom{80}{-240}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \else%no clipping
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=70\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(3,-5){90}/(0,0)(90,-150)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(10,6)(3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-10,-6)(3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(15,9)(3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-15,-9)(3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+%           \putratom{80}{-220}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \putratom{80}{-240}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondE
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondA}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondA}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondA{%% (1,1)
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(40,40)(1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(40,40)(1,1){100}/(40,40)(140,140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(40,40)(1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(40,40)(1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+           \Put@Line(46,36)(1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(36,46)(1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond
+           \Put@Line(50,30)(1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(40,40)(1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(30,50)(1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(40,40)(1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{140}{140}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(1,1){120}/(0,0)(120,120)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(6,-6)(1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-6,6)(1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(10,-10)(1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-10,10)(1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{120}{120}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondA
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondB}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondB}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondB{%% (1,-1)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(40,-40)(1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(40,-40)(1,-1){100}/(40,-40)(140,-140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(40,-40)(1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(40,-40)(1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+           \Put@Line(46,-36)(1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(36,-46)(1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond
+           \Put@Line(50,-30)(1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(40,-40)(1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(30,-50)(1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(40,-40)(1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{140}{-200}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \else%no clipping
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(1,-1){120}/(0,0)(120,-120)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(6,6)(1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-6,-6)(1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(10,10)(1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-10,-10)(1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putratom{120}{-180}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondB
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Left-handed linking unit}
+%
+% A structure-drawing command can be used to typeset a substituent 
+% by using a (yl)-argument. Moreover, the macro |\lyl| permits us 
+% to draw an intermediate linking unit. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{lyl} etc.}
+% \begin{macro}{\lyl}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lyl{\@ifnextchar({\@lyl}{\@lyl()}}
+\def\@lyl(#1)#2{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\def\centeraaa{}%
+\x@ryl=0\y@ryl=0
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@ylsw%
+\XyMTeXWarning{Duplicated items in the first augument of \string\ryl}%
+\else%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\settowidth{\dimen0}{\@memberb}%
+\x@ryl=\dimen0%%%dimension => counter
+\divide\x@ryl\unitlength
+\advance\x@ryl by-80
+\y@ryl=0
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+%\advance\x@ryl by0
+\advance\y@ryl by50
+\or%1
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by30
+\advance\y@ryl by50
+\or%2
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by40
+\advance\y@ryl by40
+\or%3
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by50
+\advance\y@ryl by30
+\or%4
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by50
+\advance\y@ryl by0
+\or%5
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by50
+\advance\y@ryl by-30
+\or%6
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by50
+\advance\y@ryl by-50
+\or%7
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+\advance\x@ryl by30
+\advance\y@ryl by-50
+\or%8
+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue
+%\advance\x@ryl by0
+\advance\y@ryl by-50
+\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+ \yl@shiftii=-\x@ryl
+ \yl@shifti=-\y@ryl
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifx\centeraaa\empty\else%
+   \@clipfusetrue
+   \putratom{-40}{-30}{\centeraaa}%  % right type
+\fi%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\let\local@tmpa=\@tmpa%global to local 2002/5/30 by SF
+\ifcase\local@tmpa%
+{\setbscolor\setatombonda\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\setatombonda% 0 (upward) (0,1)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondD\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondD%1 (-3,5)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondH\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondH%2 (-1,1)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondd\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondd%3 (-5,3)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondh\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondh%4 (-1,0)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondg\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondg%5 (-5,-3)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondC\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondC%6 (-1,-1)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondG\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondG%7 (-3,-5)
+\or{\setbscolor\setatombondc\addbscolor{}{}}%2010/10/01%\or\setatombondc%8 (0,-1)
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi
+}\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \lyl macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The substituent-setting commands |\setatombondD| etc. are used 
+% in the macro |\ryl|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondD}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondD}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondD{%% (-3,5)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-30,50)(-3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \dotorline(-30,50)(-3,5){60}/(-30,50)(-90,150)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-30,50)(-3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(-30,50)(-3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(-40,44)(-3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-20,56)(-3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(-45,41)(-3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-30,50)(-3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-15,59)(-3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(-30,50)(-3,5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+%           \putlatom{-80}{160}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \putlatom{-100}{160}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+  \else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-3,5){90}/(0,0)(-90,150)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(-10,-6)(-3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(10,6)(-3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(-15,-9)(-3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(15,9)(-3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+%      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+%           \putlatom{-80}{160}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \putlatom{-100}{160}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondD
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondG}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondG}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondG{%% (-3,-5)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=70\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-30,-50)(-3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(-30,-50)(-3,-5){60}/(-30,-50)(-90,-150)%
+%           \dotorline(-33,-55)(-3,-5){60}/(-30,-50)(-90,-150)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-30,-50)(-3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-30,-50)(-3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+           \Put@Line(-40,-44)(-3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-20,-56)(-3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond
+           \Put@Line(-45,-41)(-3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-30,-50)(-3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-15,-59)(-3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-30,-50)(-3,-5){60}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+%           \putlatom{-80}{-220}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \putlatom{-80}{-240}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+  \else%no clipping
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+%      \yl@ydiff=70\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-3,-5){90}/(0,0)(-90,-150)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-10,6)(-3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(10,-6)(-3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-15,9)(-3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(15,-9)(-3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){90}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+%           \putlatom{-80}{-220}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \putlatom{-80}{-240}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondG
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondH}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondH}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondH{%% (-1,1)
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax
+  \if@clipfuse%
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-40,40)(-1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(-40,40)(-1,1){100}/(-40,40)(-140,140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-40,40)(-1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-40,40)(-1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+           \Put@Line(-46,36)(-1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-36,46)(-1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond
+           \Put@Line(-50,30)(-1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-40,40)(-1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-30,50)(-1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-40,40)(-1,1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-140}{140}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+  \else%no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-1,1){120}/(0,0)(-120,120)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-6,-6)(-1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(6,6)(-1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-10,-10)(-1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(10,10)(-1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-120}{120}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondH
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondC}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondC}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Concrete wave bonds for stereochemistry: FU, GU}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setatombondC{%% (-1,-1)
+  \if@clipfuse%
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-40,-40)(-1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(-40,-40)(-1,-1){100}/(-40,-40)(-140,-140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-40,-40)(-1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-40,-40)(-1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+           \Put@Line(-46,-36)(-1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-36,-46)(-1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond
+           \Put@Line(-50,-30)(-1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-40,-40)(-1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(-30,-50)(-1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-40,-40)(-1,-1){100}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-140}{-200}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+  \else%no clipping
+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax
+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+           \dotorline(0,0)(-1,-1){120}/(0,0)(-120,-120)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-6,6)(-1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(6,-6)(-1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(-10,10)(-1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(10,-10)(-1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}%       % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+           \putlatom{-120}{-180}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+  \fi%
+}% end of \setatombondC
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Minor Linking Units}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ayl}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ayl{\@ifnextchar({\@ayl@}{\@ayl@(10,40)}}
+\def\@ayl@(#1,#2)#3{\begingroup\yl@xdiff=0 \yl@ydiff=0%
+\kern#1\unitlength\raise#2\unitlength\hbox to0pt{#3\hss}%
+\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\upnobond}
+% \begin{macro}{\downnobond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\upnobond#1#2{%
+\hbox{\hbox to0.72em{\hss#1\hss}\kern-0.72em\raise2.2ex\hbox{#2}}}
+\def\downnobond#1#2{%
+\hbox{\hbox to0.72em{\hss#1\hss}\kern-0.72em\lower2.2ex\hbox{#2}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BiFunc}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/14}{\cs{BiFunc} added to biphenyl-type derivative}
+% The format (slope){length}{moietyA}{moietyB} supports the function for 
+% linking moiety A and moiety B through a bond with a given slope. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\BiFunc(#1,#2)#3#4#5{%
+\SlopetoXY(0,0)(#1,#2){#3}%
+\begin{picture}(\@tempcntXa,\@tempcntYa)(0,0)%
+\Put@Line(0,0)(#1,#2){#3}%
+\put(0,0){#4}%
+\put(\@tempcntXa,\@tempcntYa){#5}%
+\end{picture}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Spriro-Ring Commands}
+% \subsection{Basic Commands for Six-Membered Rings}
+%
+% For treating spiro-ring fusion, the following basic commands 
+% (|\test@vertix| and |\test@vertix@sixv|) are added at the 
+% time of releasing Version 2.00.  These commands are generally 
+% used for detecting hetero atoms at respective vertices of a 
+% heterocyclic ring. 
+%
+% The command |\test@vertix| is used in |\test@vertix@sixv|. 
+% which is designed to test the existence of a hetero atom 
+% (or an equivalent) at each vertix of a six-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix}
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix@sixv}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{test@vertix} and 
+% \cs{test@vertix@sixv}}
+% \changes{v4.03b}{2006/9/6}{\cs{ggg} is changed into \cs{gggA} for \cs{test@vertix} and 
+% \cs{test@vertix@sixv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vertix#1{%
+ \def\tempG{#1}\relax%%%added 2006/9/6
+ \if\tempG g\relax
+   \expandafter\def\csname #1#1#1A\endcsname{@}%
+   \if\@tmpb h\relax
+    \expandafter\def\csname #1#1#1A\endcsname{@}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+   \expandafter\def\csname #1#1#1A\endcsname{}%
+   \fi\fi
+ \else
+   \expandafter\def\csname #1#1#1\endcsname{@}%
+   \if\@tmpb h\relax
+    \expandafter\def\csname #1#1#1\endcsname{@}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+   \expandafter\def\csname #1#1#1\endcsname{}%
+   \fi\fi
+ \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The command |\test@vertix@sixv| is designed to test 
+% the existence of a hetero atom (or an equivalent) 
+% at each vertix of a six-membered ring.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vertix@sixv#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty \relax\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+% \changes{v2.00}{1996/11/14}{@ in place of a net value}
+ \or \test@vertix{#2}%
+ \or \test@vertix{#3}%
+ \or \test@vertix{#4}%
+ \or 
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+     \def\iii{@}%
+   \else
+     \test@vertix{#5}%
+   \fi
+ \or \test@vertix{#6}%
+ \or \test@vertix{#7}%
+\fi\fi}}% end of \test@vertix@sixv
+%\def\test@vertix@sixv#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+%\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+%\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+%\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+%\ifcase\@tmpa%
+%% \changes{v2.00}{1996/11/14}{@ in place of a net value}
+% \or \test@vertix{#2}%
+% \or \test@vertix{#3}%
+% \or \test@vertix{#4}%
+% \or \test@vertix{#5}%
+% \or \test@vertix{#6}%
+% \or \test@vertix{#7}%
+%\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\set@hetatom@sixv| is to set a spiro group 
+% (stored as |\@memberb|) 
+% at a vertix designated by |\@tmpaa| (or originally by |\@tmpa|). 
+% The atom modifier `s' designates that the spiro group contains 
+% a carbon atom (a vertix) at a spiro position, while `h' 
+% represents the presence of a hetero atom at a spiro position. 
+% The absence of such atom modifiers shows the substitution 
+% of a usual hetero atom.  The command |\set@hetatom@sixv| is 
+% used in such commands as |\sixheterov| and |\sixheterovi| 
+% for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 
+% e.g. |1==N;1s==\sixheterov{}{1==(yl)}|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@hetatom@sixv}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@hetatom@sixv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@hetatom@sixv#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty \relax\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}\relax%
+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa \relax%
+\or%position 1
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putratom{0}{356}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@aclipfalse%
+     \putratom{0}{406}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else\relax
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putratom{-31}{356}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 2
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putratom{135}{280}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@bclipfalse%
+     \putratom{175}{303}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else\relax
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putratom{135}{280}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 3
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{135}{95}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@cclipfalse%
+     \putratom{175}{103}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else\relax
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{135}{65}{\@memberb}%   % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 4
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@cliptrue%
+     \putratom{0}{50}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@clipfalse%
+     \putratom{0}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else\relax
+     \@cliptrue%
+     \putratom{-31}{-10}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 5
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ecliptrue%
+     \putlatom{-135}{95}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@eclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{-175}{103}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else\relax
+     \@ecliptrue%
+     \putlatom{-135}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 6
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@fcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{-135}{280}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@fclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{-175}{303}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else\relax
+     \@fcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{-135}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\fi% end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@sixv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\set@hetatom@sixh| is to set a spiro group 
+% (stored as |\@memberb|) 
+% at a vertix designated by |\@tmpaa| (or originally by |\@tmpa|). 
+% The atom modifier `s' designates that the spiro group contains 
+% a carbon atom (a vertix) at a spiro position, while `h' 
+% represents the presence of a hetero atom at a spiro position. 
+% The absence of such atom modifiers shows the substitution 
+% of a usual hetero atom.  The command |\set@hetatom@sixh| is 
+% used in such commands as |\sixheteroh| and |\sixheterohi| 
+% for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 
+% e.g. |1==N;1s==\sixheteroh{}{1==(yl)}|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@hetatom@sixh}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@hetatom@sixh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@hetatom@sixh#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+%\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+\or%position 1
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{60}{0}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@aclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{0}{0}{\@memberb}%              % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{60}{-36}{\@memberb}%              % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 2
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{135}{141}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@bclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{103}{171}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{135}{141}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 3
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{273}{141}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@cclipfalse%
+     \putratom{303}{171}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{273}{141}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 4
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@cliptrue%
+   \putratom{346}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@clipfalse%
+   \putratom{406}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@cliptrue%
+   \putratom{346}{-36}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 5
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ecliptrue%
+     \putratom{283}{-131}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@eclipfalse%
+     \putratom{303}{-171}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@ecliptrue%
+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 6
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@fcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{125}{-131}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@fclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{103}{-171}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@fcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\fi% end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@sixh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Basic Commands for Six-Six Rings}
+%
+% The command |\test@vertix@decav| is designed to test 
+% the existence of a hetero atom (or an equivalent) 
+% at each vertix of a six-six fused ring.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix@decav}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vertix@decav#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\relax\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa \relax%
+ \or\or\or\or\or\or
+ \or \test@vertix{#2}%
+ \or
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+     \def\jjj{@}%
+   \else
+     \test@vertix{#3}%
+   \fi
+ \or \test@vertix{#4}%
+ \or \test@vertix{#5}%
+% \or \test@vertix{#6}%
+% \or \test@vertix{#7}%
+\fi\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\set@vrtx@fuse| is to set an atom (stored as 
+% |\@memberb|) at one (stored as |\@tmpa|) of the fused vertices 
+% of a six-six ring.  
+% These vertices are incapable of accomodating a spiro group. 
+% On the other hand, the other positions can take spiro groups 
+% (stored as |\@memberb|), which are treated by means of 
+% the command |\set@hetatom@sixv|. 
+% The command |\set@vrtx@fuse| is used in such commands 
+% as |\decaheterov| for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@fuse}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@vrtx@fuse}}
+% \changes{v2.01}{1998/11/15}{The prefix \cs{\global} are omitted.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@fuse#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or
+ \or
+ \or
+ \or%%%%4
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+ \or%5
+ \or%6
+ \or%7
+ \or%
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+\or%9 (= 4a)
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+\or%10 (= 8a)
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@fuse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\set@vrtx@fuseh| is to set an atom (stored as 
+% |\@memberb|) at one (stored as |\@tmpa|) of the fused vertices 
+% of a six-six ring.  
+% These vertices are incapable of accomodating a spiro group. 
+% On the other hand, the other positions can take spiro groups 
+% (stored as |\@memberb|), which are treated by means of 
+% the command |\set@hetatom@sixh|. 
+% The command |\set@vrtx@fuseh| is used in such commands 
+% as |\decaheteroh| for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@fuseh}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@vrtx@fuseh}}
+% \changes{v2.01}{1998/11/15}{The prefix \cs{\global} are omitted.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@fuseh#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or
+ \or
+ \or
+ \or%%%%4
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % right type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+ \or%5
+ \or%6
+ \or%7
+ \or%
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita%
+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+\or%9 (= 4a)
+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % right type
+   \else
+     \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden spiro ring for the 4a position}%
+   \fi
+\or%10 (= 8a)
+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % left type
+   \else
+     \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden spiro ring for the 8a position}%
+   \fi
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@fuseh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Six-Membered Rings}
+% \subsection{Normal Vertical Type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@sixv| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\sixheterov| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@sixv|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@sixv}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@sixv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@sixv{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{88}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{-90}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{-90}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@sixv
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@sixv| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@sixv}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@sixv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@sixv{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%         % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, h, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, H, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f, j, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F, J, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c, e, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C, E, or other}%
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@sixv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse Vertical Type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@sixvi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\sixheterovi| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@sixvi|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@sixvi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@sixvi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@sixvi{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{88}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{-90}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{-90}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@sixvi
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusionadd@sixvi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@sixvi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@sixvi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@sixvi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@sixvi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ \if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F or other}%
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the marcro \set@fusion@sixvi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Normal Horizontal Type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@sixh| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\sixheteroh| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@sixh|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@sixh}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@sixh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@sixh{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{68}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@sixh
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@sixh| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@sixh}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@sixh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@sixh{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%         % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, h, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, H, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f, j, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F, J, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c, e, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+%        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%
+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C, E, or other}%
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@sixh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse Horizontal Type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@sixhi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\sixheterohi| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@sixhi|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@sixhi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/29}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@sixhi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@sixhi{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{68}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@sixhi
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@sixhi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@sixhi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@sixhi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@sixhi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa F\relax%
+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%         % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F, J, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f, j, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, H, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, h, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C, E, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c, e, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@sixhi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Six-Six Fused Rings}
+% \subsection{Conventions for Warning}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\UnfavorableFusion}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/23}{New command: \cs{UnfavorableFusion}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UnfavorableFusion#1{\if@smallringsw\else
+\XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `#1'}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ForbiddenFusion}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/23}{New command: \cs{ForbiddenFusion}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ForbiddenFusion#1{\if@smallringsw\else
+\XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `#1'}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Normal Vertical Type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@decav| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\decalinev| and |\decaheterov|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decav}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decav}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@decav{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa k%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{k}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa K%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{K}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@decav
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-Bottom  Type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@decavb| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\decalinevb| and |\decaheterovb| etc., 
+% where  the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decavb}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decavb}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@decavb{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa k%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{k}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa K%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{K}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@decavb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-Top  Type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@decavt| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\decalinevt| and |\decaheterovt| etc., 
+% where  the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decavt}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decavt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@decavt{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa k%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{k}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa K%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{K}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of \set@fusion@decavt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Normal Horizontal Type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@decah| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\decalineh| and |\decaheteroh|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixh|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decah}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decah}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@decah{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa k%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{k}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa K%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{K}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@decah
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Six-Six-Six Fused Rings}
+% \subsection{Normal Vertical Type of Anthracenes}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@hanthrav| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\hanthracenev|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@hanthrav}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@hanthrav}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@hanthrav{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{f}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{F}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{g}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{G}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa k%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{k}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa K%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{K}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa l%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{l}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa L%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{L}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa m%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{m}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa M%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{M}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa n%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{n}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa N%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{N}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa o%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{o}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa O%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{O}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa p%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{p}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa P%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{P}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@hanthrav
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Normal Vertical Type of Phenanthrenes}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@hphenanv| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\hphenanthrenev|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@hphenanv}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@phenanv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@hphenanv{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{f}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{F}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa k%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{k}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa K%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{K}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa l%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa L%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa m%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{m}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa M%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{M}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa n%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{n}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa N%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{N}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa o%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{o}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa O%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{O}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa p%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{p}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa P%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{P}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@hphananv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Five-Membered Rings}
+% \subsection{Normal vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@fivev| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\fiveheterov| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@fivev|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@fivev}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/4}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@fivev}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@fivev{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{88}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{150}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@fivev
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusionadd@fivev
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@fivev| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@fivev}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/4}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@fivev}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iffusesw \fuseswfalse 
+\def\set@fusion@fivev{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ \if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax
+        \iffusesw
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \else 
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+        \fi
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \iffusesw
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \else
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+        \fi
+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E}%
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the marcro \set@fusion@fivev
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@fivevi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\fiveheterov| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@fivevi|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@fivevi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/4}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@fivevi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@fivevi{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{-60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{213}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@fivevi
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusionadd@fivevi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@fivevi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@fivevi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/4}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@fivevi}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@fivevi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, j, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, J, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax
+        \iffusesw
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \else
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+        \fi
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \iffusesw
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \else
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+        \fi
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@fivevi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Normal horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@fiveh| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\fiveheteroh| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@fiveh|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@fiveh}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/29}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@fiveh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@fiveh{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putratom{196}{-30}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@fiveh
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@fiveh| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@fiveh}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@fiveh}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@fiveh{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%         % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, J, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, j, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax
+        \iffusesw 
+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \else
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+        \fi
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \iffusesw 
+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \else
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+        \fi
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@fiveh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@fivehi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\fiveheterohi| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@fivehi|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@fivehi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@fivehi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@fivehi{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{-60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putratom{140}{-30}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@fivehi
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@fivehi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@fivehi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@fivehi}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@fivehi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, j, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, J, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax
+        \iffusesw 
+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \else
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+        \fi
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \iffusesw 
+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+        \else
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+        \fi
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@sixhi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Six-Five-fused Rings}
+% \subsection{Normal vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@nonav| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\indanev| and |\nonaheterov|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixvi|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@nonav}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@nonav{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C\relax%
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{h}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{H}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{j}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{J}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@nonav
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@nonavi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\indanevi| and |\nonaheterovi|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@nonavi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@nonavi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@nonavi{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C\relax%
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{h}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{H}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{j}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{J}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@nonavi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Normal horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@nonah| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\nonaheteroh|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixhi|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@nonah}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/6}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@nonah}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@nonah{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C\relax%
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{h}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{H}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{j}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{J}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@nonah
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@nonahi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\indanehi| and |\nonaheterohi|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixh|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@nonahi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@nonahi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@nonahi{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C\relax%
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{h}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{H}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{j}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%
+      \ForbiddenFusion{J}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@nonahi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Truncation for two or more atoms}
+%
+% The macros |SetTwoAtoms| and |SetTwoAtomx| are user commands for 
+% truncating a vertex to accommodate two or more atoms.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{SetTwoAtoms}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/22}{New command: \cs{SetTwoAtoms}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetTwoAtoms#1{\setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+{\white \rule{\wd0}{\ht0}}\kern-\wd0{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{SetTwoAtomx}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/04/06}{New command: \cs{SetTwoAtomx}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetTwoAtomx#1{{\setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+\@tempdimd=\wd0 \advance\@tempdimd by8\unitlength%
+\@tempdime=\ht0 \advance\@tempdime by8\unitlength%
+\kern-4\unitlength{\white \rule[-4\unitlength]{\@tempdimd}{\@tempdime}}%
+\kern-\@tempdimd{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Original Setting}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{originalsetting}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\originalpicture%initial setting
+%</chemstr>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/chemstr.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/chemstr.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..374b426a158
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/chemstr.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+\def\batchfile{chemstr.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996, 1998, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1998 (private version)
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.01 Released on August 30, 2004
+Version 4.01a Released on November 11, 2004
+Version 4.02 Released on December 20, 2004
+Version 4.03 Released on July 20, 2005
+Version 4.03b Released on September 5, 2006
+Version 4.04a Released on July 7, 2009
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+Version 5.01b Released on February 24, 2011
+Version 5.01 Released on March 22, 2013
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.01 Released on June 19, 2013
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files chemstr.dtx and chemstr.ins
+and the derived file chemstr.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{chemstr.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{chemstr.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{chemstr.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{chemstr.dtx}{chemstr}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/doins.bat b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/doins.bat
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..96a60aed40c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/doins.bat
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+platex aliphat.ins
+platex carom.ins
+platex ccycle.ins
+platex chemist.ins
+platex chemstr.ins
+platex hcycle.ins
+platex hetarom.ins
+platex hetaromh.ins
+platex locant.ins
+platex lowcycle.ins
+platex polymers.ins
+platex methylen.ins
+platex fusering.ins
+platex sizeredc.ins
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/fusering.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/fusering.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1d7facf5839
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/fusering.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4597 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: fusering.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1998,2001,2002,2004,2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files fusering.dtx and fusering.ins
+% and the derived file fusering.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{fusering}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{fusering}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{fusering}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{fusering}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{fusering}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{3906}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{Size reduction and 
+% clipping information}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{sfpicture environment, etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{fusering.dtx}[2010/10/01 v5.00 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{fusering.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Fusing Ring Units by {\sffamily fusering.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %% (old address)
+% %% Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% %% Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% %% Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{fusering.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{methylen:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% fusering & fusering.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fusering>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.00}
+\typeout{       -- Released October 01, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{fusering}
+\def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for fusering.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************
+% * fusering.sty: list of commands * 
+% **********************************
+%
+%  <Six-membered fused ring units>
+%    \sixfusev       \@sixfusev        \sixfuseposv
+%    \sixfusevi      \@sixfusevi       \sixfuseposvi
+%    \sixfuseh       \@sixfuseh        \sixfuseposh
+%    \sixfusehi      \@sixfusehi       \sixfuseposhi
+%
+%  <Five-membered fused ring units>
+%    \fivefusev      \@fivefusev       \fivefuseposv
+%    \fivefusevi     \@fivefusevi      \fivefuseposvi
+%    \fivefuseh      \@fivefuseh       \fivefuseposh
+%    \fivefusehi     \@fivefusehi      \fivefuseposhi
+%
+%  <Four-membered fused ring units>
+%    \fourfuse       \@fourfuse        \fourfusepos
+%
+%  <Three-membered fused ring units>
+%    \threefusev     \@threefusev       \threefuseposv
+%    \threefusevi    \@threefusevi      \threefuseposvi
+%    \threefuseh     \@threefuseh       \threefuseposh
+%    \threefusehi    \@threefusehi      \threefuseposhi
+
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf polymers.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} etc. for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{bzdrv}{\input carom.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{hbonde}{\input hetaromh.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{bonde}{\input hetarom.sty\relax}{}
+\unitlength=0.1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Six-Membered Fusing Units}
+% \subsection{Vertical Type}
+% 
+% The command |\sixfusev| produces a six-membered fusing unit 
+% of vertical type.  The structure produced lacks a given bond 
+% in order to realize ring fusion, which produces a new ring system. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+% Note that the difference between |\sixfusev| and |\sixuniv|, 
+% the latter of which is designed as an inner command for giving 
+% a building block with no adjustment of attached sites, while 
+% the former has a function of such adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *****************************
+% * six-membered fusing unit  *
+% *  (vertical type)          *
+% *****************************
+%
+%          1
+%      f   *  a
+%     6  *   *  2
+%     d |     | b
+%       |     |
+%     5  *   *  3
+%       d  * c
+%          4 <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixfusev| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |FUSE|  as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixfusev(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SKBONDLIST =  
+%            A:      dotted bond for an alpha (down) bond
+%            B:      boldfaced bond for a beta (upper) bond
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST =
+%
+%           none       :  fully saturated
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixfusev{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{e}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{New command: \cs{sixfusev}} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@skbondlist}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\newif\if@skbondlist
+%\@skbondlistfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}% to hetarom.sty
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixfusev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@fusev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@@fusev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixfusev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixfusev{\@ifnextchar({\@six@fusev(@}{\@six@fusev(@)}}
+\def\@six@fusev(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@six@@fusev(#1)[@}%
+{\@six@@fusev(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@six@@fusev(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@sixfusev(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@sixfusev(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@sixfusev(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{b}{c}{d}{e}{f}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of attached positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\sixfuseposv{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){sixfusev}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% changed FUSE into a list 1993/11/21 by Shinsaku Fujita
+{%
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{c}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{d}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbondd etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{f}% bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member l\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax% 
+  \bonda%
+\else\if\member b\relax% 
+   \bondb%
+\else\if\member c\relax%
+   \bondc%
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+   \bondd%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+   \bonde%
+\else\if\member f\relax%
+   \bondf%
+\else\if\member A\relax%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%               %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+     \set@fusionadd@sixv
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{0}{7}{0}%    %atom 1--6%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringv{#4}{0}{0}{7}{0}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\sixfuseposv{#5}%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \sixfusev macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\sixfuseposv| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\sixfusev| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sixfuseposv}
+% \begin{macro}{\sixfuseposv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@sixfuseposv \@sixfuseposvfalse
+\def\fuseAx{0}
+\def\fuseAy{0}
+\def\fuseBx{0}
+\def\fuseBy{0}
+\def\sixfuseposv#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{406}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{406}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `c'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `C'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer d\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `d'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `D'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `e'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `E'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer f\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `f'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{406}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer F\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `F'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{406}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi}}}% end of the macro \sixfuseposv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\@bond@fuse@omit| is used in |\sixfusev| etc. 
+% for detecting omitted bonds, where |\@aaa| etc. are empty if 
+% they are omitted. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bond@fuse@omit}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bond@fuse@omit#1#2{%
+\ifx#1a\relax\gdef\@aaa{}\fi
+\ifx#1b\relax\gdef\@bbb{}\fi
+\ifx#1c\relax\gdef\@ccc{}\fi
+\ifx#1d\relax\gdef\@ddd{}\fi
+\ifx#1e\relax\gdef\@eee{}\fi
+\ifx#1f\relax\gdef\@fff{}\fi
+\ifx#1A\relax\gdef\@aaa{}\fi
+\ifx#1B\relax\gdef\@bbb{}\fi
+\ifx#1C\relax\gdef\@ccc{}\fi
+\ifx#1D\relax\gdef\@ddd{}\fi
+\ifx#1E\relax\gdef\@eee{}\fi
+\ifx#1F\relax\gdef\@fff{}\fi
+%%%%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#2\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax\gdef\@aaa{}%
+ \ifx#1a\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `a' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax\gdef\@aaa{}%
+ \ifx#1a\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `a' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax\gdef\@bbb{}%
+ \ifx#1b\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `b' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax\gdef\@bbb{}%
+ \ifx#1b\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `b' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax\gdef\@ccc{}%
+ \ifx#1c\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `c' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax\gdef\@ccc{}%
+ \ifx#1c\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `c' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer d\relax\gdef\@ddd{}%
+ \ifx#1d\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `d' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax\gdef\@ddd{}%
+ \ifx#1d\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `d' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax\gdef\@eee{}%
+ \ifx#1e\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `e' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax\gdef\@eee{}%
+ \ifx#1e\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `e' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer f\relax\gdef\@fff{}%
+ \ifx#1f\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `f' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer F\relax\gdef\@fff{}%
+ \ifx#1f\relax
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double spec. of bond `f' in FUSE and OMIT}\fi
+\fi%
+}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\sixunitv| has been revived for compativility. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{Revived command: \cs{sixunitv}} 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\sixunitv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixunitv{\@ifnextchar[{\@six@unitv}{\@six@unitv[@]}}
+\def\@six@unitv[#1]#2#3#4{\sixfusev[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse Vertical Type}
+% 
+% The command |\sixfusevi| produces a six-membered fusing unit 
+% of vertical type.  The structure produced lacks a given bond 
+% in order to realize ring fusion, which produces a new ring system. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+% Note that the difference between |\sixfusevi| and |\sixunivi|, 
+% the latter of which is designed as an inner command for giving 
+% a building block with no adjustment of attached sites, while 
+% the former has a function of such adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *****************************
+% * six-membered fusing unit  *
+% *  (inverse vertical type)  *
+% *****************************
+%
+%          4
+%       d  *  c
+%     5  *   *  3
+%     e |     | b
+%       |     |
+%     6  *   *  2
+%       f  * a
+%          1 <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixfusevi| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |FUSE| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixfusevi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SKBONDLIST =  
+%            A:      dotted bond for an alpha (down) bond
+%            B:      boldfaced bond for a beta (upper) bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST =
+%
+%           none       :  fully saturated
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixfusevi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{e}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{New command: \cs{sixfusevi}} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixfusevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@fusevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@@fusevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixfusevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixfusevi{\@ifnextchar({\@six@fusevi(@}{\@six@fusevi(@)}}
+\def\@six@fusevi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@six@@fusevi(#1)[@}%
+{\@six@@fusevi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@six@@fusevi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@sixfusevi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@sixfusevi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@sixfusevi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{c}{b}{a}{f}{e}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of attached positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\sixfuseposvi{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){sixfusevi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% changed FUSE into a list 1993/11/21 by Shinsaku Fujita
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{a}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{f}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbondf etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{d}% bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \skbondd etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member l\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax% 
+  \bondc%
+\else\if\member b\relax% 
+   \bondb%
+\else\if\member c\relax%
+   \bonda%
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+   \bondf%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+   \bonde%
+\else\if\member f\relax%
+   \bondd%
+\else\if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%               %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+     \set@fusionadd@sixvi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%    %atom 1--4%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%   %atom 5 and 6%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringv{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%    %subst 1--4
+\setsixringv{#4}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%   %subst 5 and 6
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\sixfuseposvi{#5}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \sixfusevi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\sixfuseposvi| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\sixfusevi| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixfuseposvi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixfuseposvi#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `c'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{406}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `C'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{406}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer f\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `f'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer F\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `F'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `e'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `E'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer d\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `d'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{406}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `D'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{406}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+}}}% end of the macro \sixfuseposvi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\sixunitvi| has been revived for compativility. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{Revived command: \cs{sixunitvi}} 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\sixunitvi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixunitvi{\@ifnextchar[{\@six@unitvi}{\@six@unitvi[@]}}
+\def\@six@unitvi[#1]#2#3#4{\sixfusevi[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Normal Horizontal Type}
+% 
+% The command |\sixfuseh| produces a six-membered fusing unit 
+% of horizontal type.  The structure produced lacks a given bond 
+% in order to realize ring fusion, which produces a new ring system. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+% Note that the difference between |\sixfuseh| and |\sixunih|, 
+% the latter of which is designed as an inner command for giving 
+% a building block with no adjustment of attached sites, while 
+% the former has a function of such adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *****************************
+% * six-membered fusing unit  *
+% *     (horizontal type)     *
+% *****************************
+%                                   b
+%                                2      3  
+%                            a    -----    c
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 1 *           * 4
+%          (0,0)                *       *  d
+%                            f    -----
+%                                6      5 
+%                                   e
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixfuseh| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |FUSE| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|. 
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixfuseh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  fully saturated
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixfuseh{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{e}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\sixfuseh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringh|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/29}{New command: \cs{sixfuseh}} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixfuseh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@fuseh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@@fuseh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixfuseh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixfuseh{\@ifnextchar({\@six@fuseh(@}{\@six@fuseh(@)}}
+\def\@six@fuseh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@six@@fuseh(#1)[@}%
+{\@six@@fuseh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@six@@fuseh(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@sixfuseh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@sixfuseh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@sixfuseh(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize%
+\test@vrtx@sixh{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of attached positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\sixfuseposh{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-240,-400){sixfuseh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% changed FUSE into a list 1993/11/21 by Shinsaku Fujita
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbonda etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{c}{c}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \hskbondc etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{d}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \hskbondd etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \hskbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{f}{f}% bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \hskbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else \if\member l\relax%
+\else \if\member a\relax%
+  \hbonda%
+\else \if\member b\relax%
+   \hbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax%
+   \hbondc%
+\else \if\member d\relax%
+   \hbondd%
+\else \if\member e\relax%
+   \hbonde%
+\else \if\member f\relax%
+   \hbondf%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%                %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+     \set@fusionadd@sixh
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{0}{7}{0}%    %atom 1--6%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringh{#4}{0}{0}{7}{0}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\sixfuseposh{#5}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \sixfuseh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\sixfuseposh| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\sixfuseh| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixfuseposh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixfuseposh#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `c'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{406}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `C'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{406}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer d\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `d'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{406}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `D'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{406}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `e'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `E'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer f\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `f'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer F\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `F'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi}}}% end of the macro \sixfuseposh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\sixunith| has been revived for compativility. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{Revived command: \cs{sixunith}} 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\sixunith}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixunith{\@ifnextchar[{\@six@unith}{\@six@unith[@]}}
+\def\@six@unith[#1]#2#3#4{\sixfuseh[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse Horizontal Type}
+% 
+% The command |\sixfusehi| produces a six-membered fusing unit 
+% of inverse horizontal type.  The structure produced lacks a given bond 
+% in order to realize ring fusion, which produces a new ring system. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *****************************
+% * six-membered fusing unit  *
+% * (inverse horizontal type) *
+% *****************************
+%           b
+%        3      2 
+%    c    -----    a
+%       *        *
+%    4 *           * 1 <== the original point (0,0)
+%        *       * f
+%    d    -----
+%        5      6 
+%           e
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixfusehi| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |FUSE| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|. 
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixfusehi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  fully saturated
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixfusehi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{e}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/29}{New command: \cs{sixfusehi}} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixfusehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@fusehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@@fusehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixfusehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixfusehi{\@ifnextchar({\@six@fusehi(@}{\@six@fusehi(@)}}
+\def\@six@fusehi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@six@@fusehi(#1)[@}%
+{\@six@@fusehi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@six@@fusehi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@sixfusehi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@sixfusehi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@sixfusehi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize%
+\test@vrtx@sixhi{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of attached positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\sixfuseposhi{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-240,-400){sixfusehi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% changed FUSE into a list 1993/11/21 by Shinsaku Fujita
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbondc etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{c}{a}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \hskbonda etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{f}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \hskbondf etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \hskbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{f}{d}% bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \hskbondd etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else \if\member l\relax%
+\else \if\member a\relax%
+  \hbondc%
+\else \if\member b\relax%
+   \hbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax%
+   \hbonda%
+\else \if\member d\relax%
+   \hbondf%
+\else \if\member e\relax%
+   \hbonde%
+\else \if\member f\relax%
+   \hbondd%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%                %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+     \set@fusionadd@sixhi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%               %subst 1--4
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%              %subst 5 and 6
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringh{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%               %subst 1--4
+\setsixringh{#4}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%              %subst 5 and 6
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\sixfuseposhi{#5}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \sixfusehi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\sixfuseposhi| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\sixfusehi| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixfuseposhi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixfuseposhi#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer C\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `C'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `c'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{406}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{406}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer F\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `F'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{406}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer f\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `f'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{406}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `E'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `e'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `D'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer d\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `d'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi}}}% end of the macro \sixfuseposhi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The macros |\sixunithi| has been revived for compativility. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{Revived command: \cs{sixunithi}} 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\sixunithi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixunithi{\@ifnextchar[{\@six@unithi}{\@six@unithi[@]}}
+\def\@six@unithi[#1]#2#3#4{\sixfusehi[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Five-membered fused ring unit}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefusev| is a five-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another 
+% ring structure to produce a new ring system. The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************
+% * five-membered fused*
+% *  (vertical type)   *
+% **********************
+%
+%     4 _______ 3
+%       |     |
+%       |     |
+%     5  *   *  2
+%          *
+%          1 <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefusev| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |FUSE| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fivefusev(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of 
+% which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted for fusion. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fivefusev{1==N}{1==H;2==F}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivefusev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@fusev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@@fusev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fivefusev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivefusev{\@ifnextchar({\@five@fusev(@}{\@five@fusev(@)}}
+\def\@five@fusev(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@five@@fusev(#1)[@}%
+{\@five@@fusev(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@five@@fusev(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fivefusev(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@fivefusev(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@fivefusev(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{c}{b}{f}{e}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of attached positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\fivefuseposv{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){fivefusev}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %% outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% changed FUSE to a list 1993/11/21 by Shinsaku Fujita
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondhoriz}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondhoriz etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{e}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{d}% bond between 5 and 1 \@eee -> \skbondd etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %% inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r%
+\else\if\member a\relax%
+   \bondc%
+\else\if\member b\relax%
+  \bondb%
+\else\if\member c\relax%
+   \bondhoriz%
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+  \bonde%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+  \bondd%
+\else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fivev
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting heteroatoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%   % for 1 to 3
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{10}{4}{7}{-1}%  % for 4 to 5
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringv{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%   % for 1 to 3
+\setsixringv{#4}{10}{4}{7}{-1}%  % for 4 to 5
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+{\let\XyMTeXWarning\@gobble
+\fivefuseposv{#5}}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag}%end of \fivefusev macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefuseposv| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\fivefusev| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivefuseposv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivefuseposv#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+\fi
+\if\memBer C\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+\fi
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `f'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `F'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer d\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `e'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `E'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+}}}% end of the macro \fivefuseposv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\fiveunitv| has been revived for compativility. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{Revived command: \cs{fiveunitv}} 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveunitv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveunitv{\@ifnextchar[{\@five@unitv}{\@five@unitv[@]}}
+\def\@five@unitv[#1]#2#3#4{\fivefusev[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefusevi| typesets a five-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another 
+% ring structure to produce a new ring system. The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************************
+% * five-membered fusing unit        *
+% *  (vertical type, inverse type)   *
+% ************************************
+%
+%          1
+%          * 
+%     6  *   *  2
+%       |     |
+%       |_____|
+%     4         3
+%          *
+%        (0,0) <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefusevi| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |FUSE| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fivefusevi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fivefusevi{1==N}{1==H;2==F}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivefusevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@fusevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@@fusevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fivefusevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivefusevi{\@ifnextchar({\@five@fusevi(@}{\@five@fusevi(@)}}
+\def\@five@fusevi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@five@@fusevi(#1)[@}%
+{\@five@@fusevi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@five@@fusevi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fivefusevi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@fivefusevi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@fivefusevi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{b}{c}{e}{f}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of attached positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\fivefuseposvi{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){fivefusevi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% changed FUSE to a list 1993/11/21 by Shinsaku Fujita
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondhorizi}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondhorizi etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{e}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{f}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r%
+\else\if\member a\relax%
+   \bonda%
+\else\if\member b\relax%
+  \bondb%
+\else\if\member c\relax%
+   \bondhorizi%
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+  \bonde%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+  \bondf%
+\else 
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fivevi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting heteroatoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{0}{4}{0}%  % for 1 to 3
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{1}{4}{7}{0}%  % for 4 to 5
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringv{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}%  % for 1 to 3
+\setsixringv{#4}{1}{4}{7}{0}%  % for 4 to 5
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+{\let\XyMTeXWarning\@gobble
+\fivefuseposvi{#5}}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag}%               %end of \fivefusevi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefuseposvi| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\fivefusev| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivefuseposvi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivefuseposvi#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{406}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{406}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+\fi
+\if\memBer C\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+\fi
+\if\memBer d\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `d'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `D'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `e'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{406}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `e'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{406}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi}}}% end of the macro \fivefuseposvi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\fiveunitvi| has been revived for compativility. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{Revived command: \cs{fiveunitvi}} 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveunitvi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveunitvi{\@ifnextchar[{\@five@unitvi}{\@five@unitvi[@]}}
+\def\@five@unitvi[#1]#2#3#4{\fivefusevi[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizonatl type}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefuseh| is a five-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another 
+% ring structure to produce a new ring system. The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************
+% * five-membered unit *
+% *  (horizontal type) *
+% **********************
+%
+%     3  _____  2
+%       |       *
+%       |         * 1 <===== the original point
+%       |       *
+%     4  -----  5
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefuseh| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |FUSE| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fivefuseh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus (or others) at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fivefuseh{1==N}{1==H;2==F}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivefuseh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@fuseh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@@fuseh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fivefuseh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivefuseh{\@ifnextchar({\@five@fuseh(@}{\@five@fuseh(@)}}
+\def\@five@fuseh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@five@@fuseh(#1)[@}%
+{\@five@@fuseh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@five@@fuseh(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fivefuseh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@fivefuseh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@fivefuseh(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{c}{b}{f}{e}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of attached positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\fivefuseposh{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-240,-400){fivefuseh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% changed FUSE to a list 1993/11/21 by Shinsaku Fujita
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{hskbondvert}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \hskbondvert etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{e}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{d}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \skbondd etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r%
+\else \if\member a\relax%
+   \hbondc%
+\else \if\member b\relax%
+  \hbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax%
+   \hbondvert%
+\else \if\member d\relax%
+  \hbonde%
+\else \if\member e\relax%
+  \hbondd%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(233,0){180}%               %circle
+\else 
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fiveh
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting heteroatoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%   % for 1 to 3
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{10}{4}{7}{-1}%  % for 4 to 5
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringh{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%   % for 1 to 3
+\setsixringh{#4}{10}{4}{7}{-1}%  % for 4 to 5
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+{\let\XyMTeXWarning\@gobble
+\fivefuseposh{#5}}%for FuseWaring when nested%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%  %end of \fivefuseh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefuseposh| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\sixfusehi| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivefuseposh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivefuseposh#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+\fi
+\if\memBer C\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+\fi
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{406}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{406}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `E'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{406}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `e'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{406}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `D'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer d\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `d'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+}}}% end of the macro \fivefuseposh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\fiveunith| has been revived for compativility. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{Revived command: \cs{fiveunith}} 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveunith}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveunith{\@ifnextchar[{\@five@unith}{\@five@unith[@]}}
+\def\@five@unith[#1]#2#3#4{\fivefuseh[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefusehi| typesets a five-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another 
+% ring structure to produce a new ring system. The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************************
+% * five-membered fusing unit        *
+% *  (horizontal type, inverse type) *
+% ************************************
+%
+%                       2  -----  3
+%                        *       |
+% the original point 1 *         |
+%                        *       |
+%                           _____|
+%                        5        4
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefusehi| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |FUSE| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fivefusehi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus (or others) at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fivefusehi{1==N}{1==H;2==F}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivefusehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@fusehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@@fusehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fivefusehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivefusehi{\@ifnextchar({\@five@fusehi(@}{\@five@fusehi(@)}}
+\def\@five@fusehi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@five@@fusehi(#1)[@}%
+{\@five@@fusehi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@five@@fusehi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fivefusehi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@fivefusehi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@fivefusehi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{b}{c}{e}{f}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of attached positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\fivefuseposhi{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-240,-400){fivefusehi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% changed FUSE to a list 1993/11/21 by Shinsaku Fujita
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbonda etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{hskbondverti}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \hskbondverti etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{e}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \hskbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{f}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \hskbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r%
+\else \if\member a\relax%
+   \hbonda%
+\else \if\member b\relax%
+  \hbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax%
+   \hbondverti%
+\else \if\member d\relax%
+  \hbonde%
+\else \if\member e\relax%
+  \hbondf%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(173,0){180}%                %circle
+\else 
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+    \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fivehi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting heteroatoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{0}{4}{0}%  % for 1 to 3
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{1}{4}{7}{0}%  % for 4 to 5
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringh{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}%  % for 1 to 3
+\setsixringh{#4}{1}{4}{7}{0}%  % for 4 to 5
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+{\let\XyMTeXWarning\@gobble
+\fivefuseposhi{#5}}%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag}%      %end of \fivefusehi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\fivefuseposhi| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\sixfuseh| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivefuseposhi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivefuseposhi#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%
+\fi
+\if\memBer C\relax
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%
+\fi
+\if\memBer d\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `d'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{303}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `D'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{303}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `e'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{103}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `E'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{103}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi}}}% end of the macro \fivefuseposhi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\fiveunithi| has been revived for compativility. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{Revived command: \cs{fiveunithi}} 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveunithi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveunithi{\@ifnextchar[{\@five@unithi}{\@five@unithi[@]}}
+\def\@five@unithi[#1]#2#3#4{\fivefusehi[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Four-membered fused ring unit}
+%
+% The macro |\fourfuse| typesets a four-membered ring unit for ring fusion.  
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************
+% * fourfuse derivatives   *
+% *  (vertical type)       *
+% **************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          c
+%     4  _____  3
+%    d  |     |  b
+%       |     |
+%     1  -----  2<===== the original point
+%          a
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fourfuse| has two arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| and |FUSE| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fourfuse(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $4$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           e          :  4,1-double bond
+%
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 4)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 4 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, or d)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, or d)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fourfuse{1==N}{1==H;2==F}{c}
+%        \fourfuse[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fourfuse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@four@fuse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@four@@fuse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fourfuse}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fourfuse{\@ifnextchar({\@four@fuse(@}{\@four@fuse(@)}}
+\def\@four@fuse(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@four@@fuse(#1)[@}%
+{\@four@@fuse(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@four@@fuse(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fourfuse(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@fourfuse(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@fourfuse(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{e}{c}{b}{f}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\fourfusepos{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-571,-137){fourfuse}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(571,137)(171,-103)%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{a}{skbondshorizi}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondshorizi etc
+\Put@Direct(-142,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondshoriz}}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondshoriz etc
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{e}}%
+     % bond between 4 and 1 \@ddd -> \skbonde etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r%
+\else\if\member a\relax \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondshorizi}%
+\else\if\member b\relax \Put@Direct(-142,0){\bondb}%
+\else\if\member c\relax \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondshoriz}%
+\else\if\member d\relax \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonde}%
+\else 
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fourv
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting heteroatoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-142,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{5}{1}{4}{-1}%
+\storeclipinfo
+}% for 2 to 3
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{4}{4}{6}{0}%
+\storeclipinfo
+}% for 1
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{2}{5}{7}{0}
+\storeclipinfo
+}% for 4
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-142,0){\setsixringv{#4}{5}{1}{4}{-1}}% for 2 to 3
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{4}{4}{6}{0}}% for 1
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{2}{5}{7}{0}}% for 4
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\fourfusepos{#5}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag
+\global\@smallringswtrue%for permition at a center bond
+}%     %end of \fourfuse macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\fourfusepos| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\sixfuseh| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fourfusepos}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fourfusepos#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{29}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{29}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{29}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{29}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{29}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{29}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `c'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{29}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `C'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{29}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer d\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `d'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `D'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{303}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+}}}% end of the macro \fourfusepos
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Three-membered fusing unit}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\threefusev| typesets a three-membered ring to be fused.  
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************
+% * theree fusing unit *
+% *  (vertical type)   *
+% **********************
+%
+%         b
+%     3--------2
+%    c `     / a
+%        `1/ <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\threefusev| has two arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| and 
+% |FUSE| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \threefusev(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $3$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=4$ to $6$) represents a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, or c)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, or c)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \threefusev{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{b}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threefusev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@fusev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@@fusev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@threefusev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threefusev{\@ifnextchar({\@three@fusev(@}{\@three@fusev(@)}}
+\def\@three@fusev(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@three@@fusev(#1)[@}%
+{\@three@@fusev(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@three@@fusev(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@threefusev(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@threefusev(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@threefusev(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{b}{f}{@}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\threefuseposv{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,580)(-468,-240){threefusev}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(468,240)(68,0)%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{a}{skbondtria}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondtria etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-132){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{b}{skbondshoriz}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondtrib}}%
+       % bond between 3 and 1 \@ccc -> \skbondtria etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax\Put@Direct(-68,0){\bondtria}%
+\else\if\member b\relax\Put@Direct(0,-126){\bondshoriz}%
+\else\if\member c\relax\Put@Direct(-68,0){\bondtrib}%
+\else\if\member A\relax% aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(-70,108){100}%               %circle
+\else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@threev
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{3}{3}{5}{0}%
+%\if@clip\global\@cliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 1
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-142,-132){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{1}{3}{0}%
+%\if@bclip\global\@bcliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 2
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,-132){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{3}{5}{7}{0}%
+%\if@fclip\global\@fcliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 3
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\setsixringv{#4}{3}{3}{5}{0}}%subst 1
+\Put@Direct(-142,-132){\setsixringv{#4}{0}{1}{3}{0}}%subst 2
+\Put@Direct(0,-132){\setsixringv{#4}{3}{5}{7}{0}}%subst 3
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\threefuseposv{#5}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag
+\global\@smallringswtrue%for permition at a center bond
+}%     %end of \threefusev macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\threefuseposv| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\threefusev| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threefuseposv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threefuseposv#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-68}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+%  \gdef\fuseBx{29}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{35}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%corrected
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+%  \gdef\fuseBx{-68}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-74}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%corrected
+  \gdef\fuseAx{29}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{29}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{29}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `c'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-68}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `C'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-68}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+}}}% end of the macro \threefuseposv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\threefusevi| typesets a three-membered ring of 
+% inverse vertical type.  The following numbering is adopted 
+% in this macro. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{threefusevi}}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * thereehetero derivatives *
+% *  (inverse vertical type) *
+% ****************************
+%
+%        /1` <===== the original point
+%    c /     ` a
+%     3--------2
+%         b
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\threefusevi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| and |FUSE|
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \threefusevi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $3$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=4$ to $6$) represents a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, or c)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, or c)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \threefusevi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{c}
+%        \threefusevi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;3==F;2==CH$_{3}$}{a}
+%        \threefusevi{1==N}{1D==O}{b}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threefusevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@fusevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@@fusevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@threefusevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threefusevi{\@ifnextchar({\@three@fusevi(@}{\@three@fusevi(@)}}
+\def\@three@fusevi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@three@@fusevi(#1)[@}%
+{\@three@@fusevi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@three@@fusevi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@threefusevi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@threefusevi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@threefusevi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{c}{e}{@}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\threefuseposvi{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,580)(-468,-340){threefusevi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(468,340)(68,0)%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{a}{skBondtria}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skBondtria etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-275){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{b}{skbondshorizi}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skBondtrib}}%
+       % bond between 3 and 1 \@ccc -> \skBondtrib etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax\Put@Direct(-68,0){\Bondtria}%
+\else\if\member b\relax\Put@Direct(0,-274){\bondshorizi}%
+\else\if\member c\relax\Put@Direct(-68,0){\Bondtrib}%
+\else\if\member A\relax% aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(-70,-108){100}%               %circle
+\else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@threevi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-68,-406){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{0}{2}{0}%
+%\if@aclip\global\@acliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 1
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,-275){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{2}{4}{6}{0}%
+%\if@cclip\global\@ccliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 3
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-142,-275){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{1}{2}{4}{0}%
+%\if@eclip\global\@ecliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 2
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-68,-406){\setsixringv{#4}{0}{0}{2}{0}}%subst 1
+\Put@Direct(0,-275){\setsixringv{#4}{2}{4}{6}{0}}%subst 3
+\Put@Direct(-142,-275){\setsixringv{#4}{1}{2}{4}{0}}%subst 2
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\threefuseposvi{#5}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag
+\global\@smallringswtrue%for permition at a center bond
+}%     %end of \threefusevi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\threefuseposvi| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\threefusev| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threefuseposvi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threefuseposvi#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-68}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+%  \gdef\fuseBx{29}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{35}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%corrected
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+%  \gdef\fuseBx{-68}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-74}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%corrected
+  \gdef\fuseAx{29}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{29}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{29}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `c'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-68}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `C'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{-171}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-68}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+}}}% end of the macro \threefuseposvi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\threefuseh| typesets a three-membered ring to be fused.  
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * thereehetero fusing unit *
+% *  (horizontal type)       *
+% ****************************
+
+%   aaa fff
+%    3
+%    | ` c
+%  b |    1 bbb ccc
+%    |  / a
+%    2/
+%    ddd eee
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\threefuseh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| and |FUSE| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \threefuseh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $3$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=4$ to $6$) represents a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, or c)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, or c)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \threefuseh{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{c}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threefuseh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@fuseh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@@fuseh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@threefuseh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threefuseh{\@ifnextchar({\@three@fuseh(@}{\@three@fuseh(@)}}
+\def\@three@fuseh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@three@@fuseh(#1)[@}%
+{\@three@@fuseh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@three@@fuseh(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@threefuseh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@threefuseh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@threefuseh(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{f}{b}{@}{@}{@}%tentative use for six-h
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\threefuseposh{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(580,700)(-200,-240){threefuseh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,200)%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % retreatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{c}{e}{a}{@}{@}{@}%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{b}{d}{f}{@}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{c}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(171,-103){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{e}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-200){\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{a}}%
+       % bond between 3 and 1 \@ccc -> \skbonda etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondc}%
+\else\if\member b\relax\Put@Direct(171,-103){\bonde}%
+\else\if\member c\relax\Put@Direct(0,-200){\bonda}%
+\else\if\member A\relax% aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(70,103){100}%               %circle
+\else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@threeh
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+%\Put@Direct(-235,103){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{3}{3}{5}{0}%
+\Put@Direct(-215,103){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{3}{3}{5}{0}%
+%\if@clip \global\@cliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 1 <--six h 4
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-103,29){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{-1}{1}{3}{0}%
+%\if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 3 <--six h 2
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-103,171){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{4}{5}{7}{0}%
+%\if@fclip \global\@fcliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 2 <--six h 6
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-235,103){\setsixringh{#4}{3}{3}{5}{0}}%subst 1
+\Put@Direct(-103,29){\setsixringh{#4}{-1}{1}{3}{0}}%subst 3
+\Put@Direct(-103,171){\setsixringh{#4}{4}{5}{7}{0}}%subst 2
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\threefuseposh{#5}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag
+\global\@smallringswtrue%for permition at a center bond
+}%     %end of \threefuseh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\threefuseposh| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\threefusev| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threefuseposh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threefuseposh#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%corrected
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{200}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{200}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `c'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{200}%
+%  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{171}\gdef\fuseBy{97}%corrected
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `C'}%
+ \else
+%  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{200}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{206}%corrected
+  \gdef\fuseAx{171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+}}}% end of the macro \threefuseposh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\threefusehi| typesets a three-membered ring to be fused.  
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *******************************
+% * thereehetero fusing unit    *
+% *  (vertical horizontal type) *
+% *******************************
+%
+%          aaa bbb
+%     c    3
+%       /  |
+% eee  1   | b
+% fff   a` |
+%          2 <---original point
+%          ccc ddd
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\threefusehi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| and |FUSE|
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \threefusehi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{FUSE}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $3$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=4$ to $6$) represents a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |FUSE| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     FUSE:  one bond omitted (a, b, or c)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges are regarded as non-fused positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, or c)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \threefusehi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{c}
+%        \threefusehi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;3==F;2==CH$_{3}$}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threefusehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@fusehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@@fusehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@threefusehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threefusehi{\@ifnextchar({\@three@fusehi(@}{\@three@fusehi(@)}}
+\def\@three@fusehi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@three@@fusehi(#1)[@}%
+{\@three@@fusehi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@three@@fusehi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@threefusehi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@}%
+{\@threefusehi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}[@]}}
+\def\@threefusehi(#1)[#2]#3#4#5[#6]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{e}{c}{@}{@}{@}%tentative use for six-h
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\threefuseposhi{#5}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}[1](0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(580,700)(-400,-240){threefusehi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(400,200)%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % retreatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{e}{c}{a}{@}{@}{@}%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{f}{d}{b}{@}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@fuse@omit{#5}{#6}%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{d}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(-171,-103){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-200){\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{f}}%
+       % bond between 3 and 1 \@ccc -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}%
+\else\if\member b\relax\Put@Direct(-171,-103){\bondb}%
+\else\if\member c\relax\Put@Direct(0,-200){\bondf}%
+\else\if\member A\relax% aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(70,103){100}%               %circle
+\else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@threehi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+\Put@Direct(-171,103){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{0}{2}{0}%
+%\if@aclip \global\@acliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 1 <--six h 1
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-303,29){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{2}{4}{0}%
+%\if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 3 <--six h 3
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-303,171){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{3}{4}{6}{0}%
+%\if@eclip \global\@ecliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 2 <--six h 5
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-171,103){\setsixringh{#4}{0}{0}{2}{0}}%subst 1
+\Put@Direct(-303,29){\setsixringh{#4}{0}{2}{4}{0}}%subst 3
+\Put@Direct(-303,171){\setsixringh{#4}{3}{4}{6}{0}}%subst 2
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\threefuseposhi{#5}%%for FuseWaring when nested
+\iniatom\iniflag
+\global\@smallringswtrue%for permition at a center bond
+}%     %end of \threefusehi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\threefuseposhi| is used in the definition of 
+% the |\threefusev| macro to detect a fused edge, where 
+% the coordinates of a reference terminal (|\fuseAx| and |\fuseAy|) 
+% and of the other terminal of the edge (|\fuseBx| and |\fuseBy|) 
+% are given for the successive process of adjustment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threefuseposhi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threefuseposhi#1{%
+\global\@sixfuseposvfalse
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `a'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%corrected
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `A'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bond at bond `b'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{200}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `B'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{0}%
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{200}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `c'}%
+ \else
+  \gdef\fuseAx{0}\gdef\fuseAy{200}%
+%  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{103}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{-171}\gdef\fuseBy{97}%corrected
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax
+ \if@sixfuseposv
+  \XyMTeXWarning{Double fused bonds at bond `C'}%
+ \else
+%  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{200}%
+  \gdef\fuseBx{0}\gdef\fuseBy{206}%corrected
+  \gdef\fuseAx{-171}\gdef\fuseAy{103}%
+  \global\@sixfuseposvtrue
+ \fi
+\fi%
+}}}% end of the macro \threefuseposhi
+%</fusering>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/fusering.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/fusering.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c12b5e9e3b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/fusering.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+\def\batchfile{fusering.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1998,2001,2002,2004,2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1998 (private version)
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998 
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.01 Released on August 30, 2004
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files fusering.dtx and fusering.ins
+and the derived file fusering.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{fusering.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{fusering.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{fusering.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{fusering.dtx}{fusering}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hcycle.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hcycle.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..87909359c34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hcycle.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,3897 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: hcycle.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1993,1996,1998,2001,2002,2004,2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% hcycle.sty
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files hcycle.dtx and hcycle.ins
+% and the derived file hcycle.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{March 31, 2013}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.01b}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{3807}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/06/26}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Command for Sugars} (private version)
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{Command for Sugars}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{bond coloring and the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \changes{v5.01b}{2013/03/30}{Improvement of this documentation}
+% \changes{v5.01bb}{2013/03/31}{\cs{pyranosew} etc. added}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/25}{\cs{sixsugarhw} etc. added. Wavy bonds added}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{hcycle.dtx}[2013/06/25 v5.01 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{hcycle.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Further Hetrocycles by {\sffamily hcycle.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %% (old address)
+% %% Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% %% Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% %% Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{hcycle.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{hcycle:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% hcycle & hcycle.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hcycle>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.01}
+\typeout{       -- Released June 25, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{hcycle}
+\def\versi@ndate{June 25, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for hcycle.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************
+% * hcycle.sty: list of commands *
+% ********************************
+%
+% <Convention for bond-setting>
+%
+%     \@pyrana
+%     \@pyranb
+%     \@pyranbb
+%     \@pyranbB
+%     \@pyranbC
+%     \@pyranc
+%
+% <Pyranose and Furanose>
+%
+%  construction: 
+%     \pyranose                 \@pyranose
+%     \Pyranose                 \@Pyranose
+%     \furanose                 \@furanose
+%     \Furanose                 \@Furanose
+%
+%     \pyranosew                \@pyranosew
+%     \Pyranosew                \@Pyranosew
+%     \furanosew                \@furanosew
+%     \Furanosew                \@Furanosew
+%
+%   adjustment: 
+%     \ylpyranoseposition
+%     \ylfuranoseposition
+%
+% <Six-membered Sugars>
+%   large dimension: 
+%    (construction)
+%     \SixSugarh \@Six@Sugarh \@Six@@Sugarh \@SixSugarh
+%
+%    (adjustment)
+%     \ylSixSugarhposition     \test@vrtx@SixSugarh
+%     \set@skel@Sugarhbond     \set@hetatom@Sugarh
+%
+%    (bond)
+%     \Sugarhskbonda   \Sugarhskbondc   \Sugarhskbondd
+%     \Sugarhskbondb   \Sugarhskbonde   \Sugarhskbondf
+%
+%     \Sugarhbonda     \Sugarhbondf      \Sugarhbondc
+%     \Sugarhbondd     \Sugarhbonde      \Sugarhbondb
+%
+%   normal dimension: 
+%    (construction)
+%     \sixsugarh \@six@sugarh \@six@@sugarh \@sixsugarh
+%     \sixsugarhw \@six@sugarhw 
+%
+%    (adjustment)
+%     \set@skel@sugarhbond     \set@hetatom@sugarh
+%
+%    (bond)
+%     \sugarhskbonda   \sugarhskbondc   \sugarhskbondd
+%     \sugarhskbondb   \sugarhskbonde   \sugarhskbondf
+%
+%     \sugarhbonda     \sugarhbondf      \sugarhbondc
+%     \sugarhbondd     \sugarhbonde      \sugarhbondb
+%
+% <Five-membered Sugars>
+%
+%   large dimension: 
+%    (construction)
+%     \FiveSugarh \@Five@Sugarh \@Five@@Sugarh \@FiveSugarh
+%
+%    (adjustment)
+%     \ylFiveSugarhposition
+%     \set@hteatom@FiveSugarh
+%
+%    (bond)
+%     \fSugarhskbondd   \fSugarhskbonde   
+%
+%     \fSugarhbondd     \fSugarhbonde
+%
+%   normal dimension: 
+%    (construction)
+%     \fivesugarh \@five@sugarh \@five@@sugarh \@fivesugarh
+%     \fivesugarhw \@five@sugarhw 
+%
+%    (adjustment)
+%     \ylfiveSugarhposition
+%     \set@hteatom@fivesugarh
+%
+%    (bond)
+%     \fsugarhskbondd   \fsugarhskbonde   
+%
+%     \fsugarhbondd     \fsugarhbonde
+%
+% <Applications>
+%     \cyclitol          \@cyclitol
+%     \Cyclitol          \@Cyclitol
+%
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf hcycle.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}
+\unitlength=0.1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Pyranoses and Furanoses}
+% \subsection{Macros for setting substituents}
+% 
+% Macros |\@pyrana| to |\@pyranc| are used to set substituents 
+% on each position of a pyranose and furanose. Note that 
+% comments (conerning locant numbers) on the end of each row have 
+% lost the exact meaning, 
+% since such a command moiety is used in many macros after copying. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pyrana}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pyranb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pyranbb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pyranbB}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pyranc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pyranbC}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Adding \cs{\@pyranbC}}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/6/25}{Adding wavy bonds}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **************************************************
+% * setting substituents for pyranose and furanose *
+% **************************************************
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 1 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newif\if@clipping \@clippingfalse
+\def\@pyrana{%
+ \if@clipping%clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(45,0)(1,0){80}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-30}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,-45)(0,-1){73}% single bond at 1 alpha (down)
+           \putratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,45)(0,1){73}% single bond at 1 beta (up)
+           \putratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A% alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(25,-25)(1,-1){100}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B% beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(25,25)(1,1){100}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{110}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(30,-15)(1,0){90}% double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(30,15)(1,0){90}% double bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-30}{\@memberb}% right type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(25,0)(1,0){100}%      % wavy bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{130}{-30}{\@memberb}% right type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(45,0)(1,0){90}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-30}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi
+   \fi\fi
+ \else
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-30}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){118}% single bond at 1 alpha (down)
+           \putratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){118}% single bond at 1 beta (up)
+           \putratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A% alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B% beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{110}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,-15)(1,0){120}% double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,15)(1,0){120}% double bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-30}{\@memberb}% right type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){120}%      % wavy bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{130}{-30}{\@memberb}% right type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,0){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-30}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{\cs{@pyranb} is divided into 
+% \cs{@pyranb}, \cs{@pyranbb} and \cs{@pyranbB}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 2,3,5 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 2 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@pyranb{%
+ \if@clipping%clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(45,-45)(1,-1){100}% single bond at 2
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,-45)(0,-1){73}% single bond alpha (down)
+           \putlratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,45)(0,1){73}% single bond beta (up)
+           \putlratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=40
+           \Put@Line(40,-40)(1,-1){100}% single bond at 2
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=40
+           \Put@Line(-40,-40)(-1,-1){100}% single bond at 2
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond: Added by SF 1998/10/25
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(15,-45)(1,-1){100}% double bond at 2
+           \Put@Line(45,-15)(1,-1){100}% double bond at 2
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=40\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(40,-40)(1,-1){90}%      % wavy bond at 2
+           }%
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(45,45)(1,1){100}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{110}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \else
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){118}% single bond alpha (down)
+           \putlratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){118}% single bond beta (up)
+           \putlratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond: Added by SF 1998/10/25
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(-15,-15)(1,-1){120}% double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,15)(1,-1){120}% double bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}%      % wavy bond at 2
+           }%
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{110}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 3 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@pyranbb{%
+ \if@clipping%clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(45,-45)(1,-1){100}% single bond at 3
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,-45)(0,-1){73}% single bond alpha (down)
+           \putlratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,45)(0,1){73}% single bond beta (up)
+           \putlratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) beta%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10
+      \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(45,-45)(1,-1){100}% single bond at 3
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=10
+      \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(-45,-45)(-1,-1){100}% single bond at 3
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond: Added by SF 1998/10/25
+     \yl@xdiff=20
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(-15,-45)(-1,-1){100}% double bond at 3
+           \Put@Line(-45,-15)(-1,-1){100}% double bond at 3
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}%left type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-40,-40)(-1,-1){90}%      % wavy bond at 2
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(-45,-45)(-1,-1){100}% single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \else
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){118}% single bond alpha (down)
+           \putlratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){118}% single bond beta (up)
+           \putlratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond: Added by SF 1998/10/25
+     \yl@xdiff=20
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(15,-15)(-1,-1){120}% double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(0,15)(-1,-1){120}% double bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}%left type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}%      % wavy bond at 2
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 5 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@pyranbB{%
+ \if@clipping%clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=-60
+           \Put@Line(-45,45)(-1,1){100}% single bond at 5
+           \putlatom{-130}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,-45)(0,-1){73}% single bond alpha (down)
+           \putlratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,45)(0,1){73}% single bond beta (up)
+           \putlratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=-60
+           \Put@Line(-45,45)(-1,1){100}% single bond at 5
+           \putlatom{-130}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(45,45)(1,1){100}% single bond at 5
+           \putratom{130}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond: Added by SF 1998/10/25
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=-20
+           \Put@Line(-15,45)(-1,1){100}% double bond at 5
+           \Put@Line(-45,15)(-1,1){100}% double bond at 5
+           \putlatom{-120}{140}{\@memberb}%left type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-60\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-40,40)(-1,1){90}%      % wavy bond at 5
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-130}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=-60
+           \Put@Line(-45,45)(-1,1){100}% single bond at 5
+           \putlatom{-130}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \else
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 5
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){118}% single bond alpha (down)
+           \putlratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){118}% single bond beta (up)
+           \putlratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond: Added by SF 1998/10/25
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=-20
+           \Put@Line(15,15)(-1,1){120}% double bond at 5
+           \Put@Line(0,-15)(-1,1){120}% double bond at 5
+           \putlatom{-120}{140}{\@memberb}%left type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-60\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}%      % wavy bond at 5
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-130}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=-20
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{140}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 4 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@pyranc{%
+ \if@clipping%clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(-45,0)(-1,0){80}% single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{-30}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=-32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,-45)(0,-1){80}% single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,45)(0,1){80}% single bond at 4 beta (up)
+           \putlatom{32}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A% alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(-30,-30)(-1,-1){100}% single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B% beta
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(-30,30)(-1,1){100}% single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{110}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(-30,-15)(-1,0){100}% double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(-30,15)(-1,0){100}% double bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{-30}{\@memberb}% left type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-30,0)(-1,0){100}%      % wavy bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-130}{-30}{\@memberb}% left type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(-45,0)(-1,0){80}% single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{-30}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \else
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){120}% single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{-30}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=-32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){118}% single bond at 4 alpha (down)
+           \putlatom{32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(e) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=-32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){118}% single bond at 4 beta (up)
+           \putlatom{32}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A% alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,-1){120}% single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B% beta
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=10
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,1){120}% single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{110}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,-15)(-1,0){120}% double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(0,15)(-1,0){120}% double bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{-30}{\@memberb}% left type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){120}%      % wavy bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-130}{-30}{\@memberb}% left type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=30
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-1,0){120}% single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-130}{-30}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{New command for SixSugar}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % subst. on 6 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\@pyranbC{%
+ \if@clipping%clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=5
+     \yl@ydiff=5
+           \Put@Line(45,45)(1,1){100}% single bond at 6
+           \putratom{130}{140}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,-45)(0,-1){73}% single bond alpha (down)
+           \putlratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,45)(0,1){73}% single bond beta (up)
+           \putlratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A)
+     \yl@xdiff=5
+     \yl@ydiff=5
+           \Put@Line(45,45)(1,1){100}% single bond at 6
+           \putratom{130}{140}{\@memberb}% right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B)
+     \yl@xdiff=5
+     \yl@ydiff=-15
+           \Put@Line(-45,45)(-1,1){100}% single bond at 6
+           \putlatom{-130}{140}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond: Added by SF 1998/10/25
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=-20
+           \Put@Line(45,15)(1,1){100}% double bond at 6
+           \Put@Line(15,45)(1,1){100}% double bond at 6
+           \putratom{130}{140}{\@memberb}%right type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=5\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(40,40)(1,1){90}%      % wavy bond at 6
+           }%
+           \putratom{130}{130}{\@memberb}% right type
+%
+     \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=5
+     \yl@ydiff=5
+           \Put@Line(45,45)(1,1){100}% single bond at 6
+           \putratom{130}{140}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \else
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+     \yl@xdiff=-10
+     \yl@ydiff=60
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,-1){120}% single bond at 6
+           \putratom{130}{-180}{\@memberb}% left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=72
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){118}% single bond alpha (down)
+           \putlratom{-32}{-190}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+     \yl@xdiff=32
+     \yl@ydiff=-12
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,1){118}% single bond beta (up)
+           \putlratom{-32}{130}{\@memberb}% left & right type
+    \fi\fi\fi%\fi\fi%
+   \else \if\@tmpb D%double bond: Added by SF 1998/10/25
+     \yl@xdiff=0
+     \yl@ydiff=-20
+           \Put@Line(15,-15)(1,1){120}% double bond at 6
+           \Put@Line(0,15)(1,1){120}% double bond at 6
+           \putratom{130}{140}{\@memberb}%right type
+%2013/06/25
+    \else\if\@tmpb U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=5\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}%      % wavy bond at 6
+           }%
+           \putratom{130}{130}{\@memberb}% right type
+%
+          \else%
+     \yl@xdiff=10
+     \yl@ydiff=-20
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(1,1){120}% single bond at 6
+           \putratom{130}{140}{\@memberb}% right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi
+}%
+%</hcycle>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Pyranose derivatives}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of pyranose is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************
+% * pyranose derivative *
+% ***********************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                5  e  6
+%                                 ----O
+%                             d *       * f
+%   the original point ===> 4 *           * 1
+%          (0,0)                *       * a
+%                             c   -----
+%                                3  b   2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\pyranose| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%   \pyranose[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  mother skeleton
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 5 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  single bond (down) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSB        :  single bond (up) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSa        :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \pyranose{1Sb==Cl;2Sa==F}
+%        \pyranose{1Sb==Cl;4Sa==F;2Sa==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \pyranose[a]{3Sb==OAc;4Sb==\lmoiety{MeO};5Sb==CH$_{2}$OAc}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\@pyranose| uses a picture environment, in which 
+% bonds are put directly, while subsituents are typset by using 
+% the macros |\@pyrana| to |\@pyranc| described above.  
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpyranoseposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The definition has been changed: 
+% the old \cs{pyranose} to \cs{pyranoseold}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyranoseold}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pyranoseold}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hcycleold>
+\def\pyranoseold{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyranoseold}{\@pyranoseold[r]}}
+\def\@pyranoseold[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpyranoseposition{#2}%
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(880,800)(-240,-400){pyranose}%
+(240,400)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){120}%           %bond 4-5
+  \Put@Line(120,200)(1,0){252}%       %bond 5-6
+  \Put@Line(532,0)(-3,5){96}%         %bond 1-6
+ {\thicklines%
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){120}%          %bond 4-3
+  \Put@Line(412,-200)(3,5){120}%      %bond 2-1
+  \Put@Line(120,-200)(1,0){292}}%     %bond 3-2
+  \putratom{382}{160}{O}% left type
+  %
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic double bonds
+\else \if\member a%
+  \Put@Line(400,-150)(3,5){90}%       %double bond 2-1
+\else \if\member b%
+  \Put@Line(150,-160)(1,0){232}%      %double bond 3-2
+\else \if\member c%
+  \Put@Line(50,-12)(3,-5){90}%        %double bond 4-3
+\else \if\member d%
+  \Put@Line(50,12)(3,5){90}%          %double bond 4-5
+\else \if\member e%
+  \Put@Line(150,160)(1,0){232}%       %double bond 5-6
+\else \if\member f%
+  \Put@Line(482,12)(-3,5){70}%        %double bond 1-6
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(532,0){%
+  \if@clip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyrana}}% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(412,-200){%
+  \if@eclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranb}}% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(120,-200){%
+  \if@fclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbb}}% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){%
+  \if@aclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranc}}% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(120,200){%
+  \if@bclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbB}}% subst. on 5
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(412,200){%
+  \if@cclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbC}}% subst. on 6%%added 2001/6/20
+\fi %end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%               %end of \pyranose macro
+%</hcycleold>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The new definition for \cs{pyranose}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyranose}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pyranose}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hcycle>
+\def\pyranose{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyranose}{\@pyranose[]}}
+\def\@pyranose[#1]#2{\sixsugarh[#1]{6==O}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The front skeletal bonds of a pyranose ring are typeset with a bold line and wedged lines. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/31}{added the definition for \cs{pyranosew}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyranosew}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pyranosew}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyranosew{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyranosew}{\@pyranosew[]}}
+\def\@pyranosew[#1]#2{%
+\sixsugarh[#1]{6==O;1s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(-3,-5){120};4s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(3,-5){120};%
+3s==\PutBondLine(-17,0)(307,0){2.8pt}}{#2}[abc]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Pyranose derivatives of slightly large dimension can be 
+% drawn by the |\Pyranose| macro. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{New command: \cs{Pyranose}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Pyranose}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Pyranose}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Pyranose{\@ifnextchar[{\@Pyranose}{\@Pyranose[]}}
+\def\@Pyranose[#1]#2{\SixSugarh[#1]{6==O}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The front skeletal bonds of a pyranose ring are typeset with a bold line and wedged lines. 
+% This command cannot be used in |\TeX|/|\LaTeX| mode. The PostScript mode or the PDF mode 
+% should be used. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/31}{added the definition for \cs{Pyranosew}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Pyranosew}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Pyranosew}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Pyranosew{\@ifnextchar[{\@Pyranosew}{\@Pyranosew[]}}
+\def\@Pyranosew[#1]#2{%
+\SixSugarh[#1]{6==O;1s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(-3,-5){153};4s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(3,-5){153};%
+3s==\PutBondLine(-17,0)(376,0){2.8pt}}{#2}[abc]}
+%</hcycle>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Furanose derivatives}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of furanose is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************
+% * furanose derivative *
+% ***********************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                   5
+%                                   O
+%                             d  *     * e
+%   the original point ===> 4 *           * 1
+%          (0,0)                *       * a
+%                             c   -----
+%                                3  b   2
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\furanose| has an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional 
+% argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \furanose[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}          
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  mother skeleton
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 4 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  single bond (down) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSB        :  single bond (up) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSa        :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \furanose{1Sa==Cl;2Sb==F}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\@furanose| uses a picture environment, in which 
+% bonds are put directly, while subsituents are typset by using 
+% the macros |\@pyrana| to |\@pyranc| described above.  
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylfuranoseposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\furanoseold}
+% \begin{macro}{\@furanoseold}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hcycleold>
+\def\furanoseold{\@ifnextchar[{\@furanoseold}{\@furanoseold[r]}}
+\def\@furanoseold[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylfuranoseposition{#2}%
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(880,800)(-240,-400){furanose}%
+(240,400)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+   \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){236}%          %bond 4-5
+   \Put@Line(532,0)(-5,3){236}%       %bond 1-5
+ {\thicklines%
+  \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){120}%          %bond 4-3
+  \Put@Line(412,-200)(3,5){120}%      %bond 2-1
+  \Put@Line(120,-200)(1,0){292}}%     %bond 3-2
+  \putratom{236}{130}{O}% left type
+%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic double bonds
+\else \if\member a%
+  \Put@Line(400,-150)(3,5){80}%       %double bond 2-1
+\else \if\member b%
+  \Put@Line(150,-160)(1,0){232}%      %double bond 3-2
+\else \if\member c%
+  \Put@Line(50,-12)(3,-5){80}%        %double bond 4-3
+\else \if\member d%
+  \Put@Line(50,0)(5,3){180}%          %double bond 4-5
+\else \if\member e%
+  \Put@Line(482,0)(-5,3){180}%        %double bond 1-5
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(532,0){\@pyrana}}% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(412,-200){\@pyranb}}% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(120,-200){\@pyranbb}}% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\@pyranc}}% subst. on 4
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%               %end of \furanoseold macro
+%</hcycleold>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The new definition for \cs{furanose}}
+% \begin{macro}{\furanose}
+% \begin{macro}{\@furanose}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hcycle>
+\def\furanose{\@ifnextchar[{\@furanose}{\@furanose[]}}
+\def\@furanose[#1]#2{\fivesugarh[#1]{5==O}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The front skeletal bonds of a pyranose ring are typeset with a bold line and wedged lines. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/31}{New command \cs{furanosew}}
+% \begin{macro}{\furanosew}
+% \begin{macro}{\@furanosew}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\furanosew{\@ifnextchar[{\@furanosew}{\@furanosew[]}}
+\def\@furanosew[#1]#2{%
+\fivesugarh[#1]{5==O;1s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(-3,-5){120};%
+4s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(3,-5){120};%
+3s==\PutBondLine(-17,0)(307,0){2.8pt}}{#2}[abc]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Furanose derivatives of slightly large dimension can be 
+% drawn by the |\Furanose| macro. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{New command: \cs{Furanose}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Furanose}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Furanose}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Furanose{\@ifnextchar[{\@Furanose}{\@Furanose[]}}
+\def\@Furanose[#1]#2{\FiveSugarh[#1]{5==O}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The front skeletal bonds of a pyranose ring are typeset with a bold line and wedged lines. 
+% This command cannot be used in |\TeX|/|\LaTeX| mode. The PostScript mode or the PDF mode 
+% should be used. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/31}{New command \cs{Furanosew}}
+% \begin{macro}{\Furanosew}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Furanosew}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Furanosew{\@ifnextchar[{\@Furanosew}{\@Furanosew[]}}
+\def\@Furanosew[#1]#2{%
+\FiveSugarh[#1]{5==O;1s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(-3,-5){153};%
+4s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(3,-5){153};%
+3s==\PutBondLine(-17,0)(376,0){2.8pt}}{#2}[abc]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Six-Membered Sugar Derivatives of Large Dimension}
+% \subsection{General Conventions}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of cyclitol is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************
+% * Sugarh derivative *
+% ********************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                5  e  6
+%                                 ----
+%                             d *       * f
+%   the original point ===> 4 *           * 1
+%          (0,0)                *       * a
+%                             c   -----
+%                                3  b   2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% The macro |\SixSugarh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \SixSugarh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%           none or [] :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 4)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 6 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  single bond (down) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSB        :  single bond (up) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSa        :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g.
+%        \SixSugarh{6==O}{1Sa==OH;2Sa==OH}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\SixSugarh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents dirctly 
+%         (cf. |\setsixringh| for a |\sixheteroh|)
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SixSugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Six@Sugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Six@@Sugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@SixSugarh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SixSugarh{\@ifnextchar({\@Six@Sugarh(@}{\@Six@Sugarh(@)}}
+\def\@Six@Sugarh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@Six@@Sugarh(#1)[@}%
+{\@Six@@Sugarh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@Six@@Sugarh(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@SixSugarh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@SixSugarh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@SixSugarh(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@SixSugarh{#3}%
+%test for a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylSixSugarhposition{#4}%shift values
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(880,800)(-240,-400){SixSugarh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%%%|\@aaa| etc. are empty if they are omitted. 
+\molfronttrue
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{a}{a}%
+  %bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \Sugarhskbonda etc
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{b}{b}%
+ %bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \Sugarhskbondb etc
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{c}{c}%
+ %bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \Sugarhskbondc etc
+\molfrontfalse
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{d}{d}%
+ %bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \Sugarhskbondd etc
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{e}{e}%
+ %bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \Sugarhskbonde etc
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{f}{f}%
+ %bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \Sugarhskbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax \Sugarhbondd \Sugarhbondf \Sugarhbondb%
+\else \if\member l\relax \Sugarhbonda \Sugarhbondc \Sugarhbonde%
+\else \if\member a\relax \Sugarhbonda%
+\else \if\member b\relax \Sugarhbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax \Sugarhbondc%
+\else \if\member d\relax \Sugarhbondd%
+\else \if\member e\relax \Sugarhbonde%
+\else \if\member f\relax \Sugarhbondf%
+\else \if\member A% no action: %%left aromatic circle 
+%  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%               %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \set@fusionadd@sixhi
+  \ifx\@@tmpa\empty%
+   \XyMTeXWarning{Fused function is unavailable for SixSugarh.}\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\set@hetatom@Sugarh{#3}{-3}{0}{5}{1}%               %subst 4--6
+\set@hetatom@Sugarh{#3}{3}{3}{7}{1}%              %subst 1 -- 3
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#4\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(668,0){%
+  \if@clip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyrana}}% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(513,-255){%
+  \if@eclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranb}}% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(153,-255){%
+  \if@fclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbb}}% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){%
+  \if@aclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranc}}% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(153,255){%
+  \if@bclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbB}}% subst. on 5
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(513,255){%
+  \if@cclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbC}}% subst. on 6
+\fi %end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \SixSugarh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\test@vrtx@SixSugarh| is used to test the presence of 
+% a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex of the 
+% sixheteroh nucleus. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vrtx@SixSugarh}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vrtx@SixSugarh#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\aaa{}\else\def\aaa{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\bbb{}\else\def\bbb{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ccc{}\else\def\ccc{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ddd{}\else\def\ddd{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\eee{}\else\def\eee{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\fff{}\else\def\fff{@}\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of \test@vrtx@SixSugarh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylSixSugarhposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New commands for setting substituents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylSixSugarhposition}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylSixSugarhposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-668}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-513}\gdef\@yli{255}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-153}\gdef\@yli{255}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 4
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-153}\gdef\@yli{-255}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 5
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-513}\gdef\@yli{-255}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 6
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Skeletal bonds of Sugarhs}
+%
+% The macro |\set@skel@Sugarhbond| is used in |\SixSugarh| etc. 
+% for setting skeletal bonds (outer bonds), when |\@aaa| etc. 
+% (produced by |\csname|...|\endcsname|) are equal to `a' 
+% etc. (given as \#2).  Thinline, thickline and dotted-line 
+% skeletal bonds are available. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@skel@Sugarhbond}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmolfront \molfrontfalse
+\newif\if@fivemembered \@fivememberedfalse
+\def\set@skel@Sugarhbond#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\if\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname #2\relax%OK
+                               % \if\@aaa #2\relax%OK
+  \@skbondlistfalse
+  \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+      \if\@@tmpb A\relax%
+        \if@fivemembered
+         \expandafter\csname fdothskbond#3\endcsname% \dothskbonda etc.
+        \else
+         \expandafter\csname dothskbond#3\endcsname% \dothskbonda etc.
+        \fi
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \else\if\@@tmpb B\relax%
+        {\thicklines 
+         \if@fivemembered
+          \expandafter\csname fSugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \dothskbonda etc.
+         \else
+          \expandafter\csname Sugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+         \fi
+        }%
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \fi\fi
+     \fi%
+    }%
+   \if@skbondlist\else
+    \ifmolfront
+     {\thicklines 
+       \if@fivemembered
+         \expandafter\csname fSugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \dothskbonda etc.
+       \else
+         \expandafter\csname Sugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+       \fi
+     }%
+    \else
+     {\thinlines 
+       \if@fivemembered
+         \expandafter\csname fSugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \dothskbonda etc.
+       \else
+        \expandafter\csname Sugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+       \fi
+     }%
+    \fi
+   \fi%
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname \empty\relax%
+                                %    \ifx\@aaa\empty\relax
+    \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+     \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+      \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unavailable bond `#2' in SKBONDLIST}\fi
+    }%
+  \fi\fi
+}% end of \set@skel@Sugarhbond
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% The macros |\SixSugarh| uses inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\Sugarhskbonda| to |\Sugarhskbondf| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************************
+% * setting skeletal bonds of Sugarhs *
+% ************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                   e
+%                          (eee) 5      6  (fff)
+%                            d    -----    c
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 4 * (ddd)     * 1  (aaa)
+%          (0,0)                *       *  a
+%                            c    -----
+%                          (ccc) 3      2  (bbb)
+%                                   b
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhskbonda}
+% The macro |\Sugarhskbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\Sugarhskbonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(668,0)(-3,-5){153}%           %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(668,0)(-3,-5){120}%            %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(635,-55)(-3,-5){120}%          %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(635,-55)(-3,-5){93}%          %bond 1-2
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhskbondf}
+% The macro |\Sugarhskbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 6
+\def\Sugarhskbondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(668,0)(-3,5){153}%           %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(668,0)(-3,5){120}%            %bond 1-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(635,55)(-3,5){120}%          %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(635,55)(-3,5){93}%          %bond 1-6
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhskbondc}
+% The macro |\Sugarhskbondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ccc| and |\ddd|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 3
+\def\Sugarhskbondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){153}%           %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){120}%            %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(33,-55)(3,-5){120}%          %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(33,-55)(3,-5){93}%          %bond 4-3
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhskbondd}
+% The macro |\Sugarhskbondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\Sugarhskbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){153}%           %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){120}%            %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(33,55)(3,5){120}%          %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(33,55)(3,5){93}%          %bond 4-5
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhskbondb}
+% The macro |\Sugarhskbondb| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 3 and 2
+\def\Sugarhskbondb{%
+  \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(153,-255)(1,0){360}%           %bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(153,-255)(1,0){314}%            %bond 3-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(199,-255)(1,0){314}%          %bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(199,-255)(1,0){278}%          %bond 3-2
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhskbonde}
+% The macro |\Sugarhskbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 6
+\def\Sugarhskbonde{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(153,255)(1,0){360}%           %bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(153,255)(1,0){314}%            %bond 5-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(199,255)(1,0){314}%          %bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(199,255)(1,0){278}%          %bond 5-6
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+
+%
+% \subsection{Inner Double Bonds of Sugarhs}
+%
+% The macros |\SixSugarh| uses inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\Sugarhbonda| to |\Sugarhbondf| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************************
+% * setting skeletal bonds (horizontal type) *
+% ********************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                   e
+%                          (eee) 5      6  (fff)
+%                            d    -----    c
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 4 * (ddd)     * 1  (aaa)
+%          (0,0)                *       *  a
+%                            c    -----
+%                          (ccc) 3      2  (bbb)
+%                                   b
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhbonda}
+% The macro |\Sugarhbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\Sugarhbonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(605,-22)(-3,-5){100}%           %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(604,-15)(-3,-5){93}%            %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(587,-52)(-3,-5){93}%          %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(593,-42)(-3,-5){93}%          %bond 1-2
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhbondf}
+% The macro |\Sugarhbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 6
+\def\Sugarhbondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(605,22)(-3,5){100}%           %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(604,15)(-3,5){97}%            %bond 1-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(587,52)(-3,5){93}%          %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(593,42)(-3,5){93}%          %bond 1-6
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhbondc}
+% The macro |\Sugarhbondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ccc| and |\ddd|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 3
+\def\Sugarhbondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(63,-22)(3,-5){100}%           %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(64,-15)(3,-5){97}%            %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(81,-52)(3,-5){93}%          %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(75,-42)(3,-5){93}%          %bond 4-3
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhbondd}
+% The macro |\Sugarhbondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\Sugarhbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(63,22)(3,5){100}%           %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(64,15)(3,5){97}%            %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(81,52)(3,5){93}%          %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(75,42)(3,5){93}%          %bond 4-5
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhbondb}
+% The macro |\Sugarhbondb| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 3 and 2
+\def\Sugarhbondb{%
+  \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(183,-205)(1,0){300}%           %bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(183,-205)(1,0){275}%            %bond 3-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(203,-205)(1,0){275}%          %bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(198,-205)(1,0){270}%          %bond 3-2
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Sugarhbonde}
+% The macro |\Sugarhbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 6
+\def\Sugarhbonde{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(183,205)(1,0){300}%           %bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(183,205)(1,0){275}%            %bond 5-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(203,205)(1,0){275}%          %bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(198,205)(1,0){270}%          %bond 5-6
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \subsection{Hetero Atoms on Sugarh Skeletons}
+%
+% The command |\set@hetatom@Sugarh| is to set a spiro group 
+% (stored as |\@memberb|) 
+% at a vertix designated by |\@tmpaa| (or originally by |\@tmpa|). 
+% The atom modifier `s' designates that the spiro group contains 
+% a carbon atom (a vertix) at a spiro position, while `h' 
+% represents the presence of a hetero atom at a spiro position. 
+% The absence of such atom modifiers shows the substitution 
+% of a usual hetero atom.  The command |\set@hetatom@Sugarh| is 
+% used in such commands as |\SixSugarh| for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 
+% e.g. |1==N;1s==\SixSugarh{}{1==(yl)}|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@hetatom@Sugarh}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{New command: \cs{set@hetatom@Sugarh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@hetatom@Sugarh#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+\or%position 1
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{60}{0}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@aclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{0}{0}{\@memberb}%              % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{60}{-36}{\@memberb}%              % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 2
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{185}{225}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@bclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{153}{255}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{185}{225}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 3
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{483}{225}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@cclipfalse%
+     \putratom{513}{255}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{483}{225}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 4
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@cliptrue%
+   \putratom{608}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@clipfalse%
+   \putratom{668}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@cliptrue%
+   \putratom{608}{-36}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 5
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ecliptrue%
+     \putratom{493}{-225}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@eclipfalse%
+     \putratom{513}{-255}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@ecliptrue%
+     \putratom{483}{-295}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 6
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@fcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{175}{-215}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@fclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{153}{-255}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@fcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{185}{-295}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\fi% end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@Sugarh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Six-Membered Sugar Derivatives of Normal Dimension}
+% \subsection{General Conventions}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of cyclitol is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *********************
+% * sugarh derivative *
+% *********************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                5  e  6
+%                                 ----
+%                             d *       * f
+%   the original point ===> 4 *           * 1
+%          (0,0)                *       * a
+%                             c   -----
+%                                3  b   2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% The macro |\sixsugarh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixsugarh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option  `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none or [] :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  not supproted (+ at the n-hetro atom, n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 6 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  single bond (down) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSB        :  single bond (up) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSa        :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g.
+%        \sixsugarh{6==O}{1Sa==OH;2Sa==OH}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\sixsugarh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents dirctly 
+%         (cf. |\setsixringh| for a |\sixheteroh|)
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixsugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@sugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@@sugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixsugarh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixsugarh{\@ifnextchar({\@six@sugarh(@}{\@six@sugarh(@)}}
+\def\@six@sugarh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@six@@sugarh(#1)[@}%
+{\@six@@sugarh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@six@@sugarh(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@sixsugarh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@sixsugarh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@sixsugarh(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@SixSugarh{#3}%
+%test for a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpyranoseposition{#4}%shift values
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(880,800)(-240,-400){sixsugarh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%%%|\@aaa| etc. are empty if they are omitted. 
+\@fivememberedfalse%not five-membered ring
+\molfronttrue%boldfaced lines (thicklines)
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{a}{a}%
+  %bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \sugarhskbonda etc
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{b}{b}%
+ %bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \sugarhskbondb etc
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{c}{c}%
+ %bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \sugarhskbondc etc
+\molfrontfalse%normal lines (thinelines)
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{d}{d}%
+ %bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \sugarhskbondd etc
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{e}{e}%
+ %bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \sugarhskbonde etc
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{f}{f}%
+ %bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \sugarhskbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax \sugarhbondd \sugarhbondf \sugarhbondb%
+\else \if\member l\relax \sugarhbonda \sugarhbondc \sugarhbonde%
+\else \if\member a\relax \sugarhbonda%
+\else \if\member b\relax \sugarhbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax \sugarhbondc%
+\else \if\member d\relax \sugarhbondd%
+\else \if\member e\relax \sugarhbonde%
+\else \if\member f\relax \sugarhbondf%
+\else \if\member A% no action: %%left aromatic circle 
+%  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%               %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \set@fusionadd@sixhi
+  \ifx\@@tmpa\empty%
+   \XyMTeXWarning{Fused function is unavailable for sixsugarh.}\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\set@hetatom@sugarh{#3}{-3}{0}{5}{1}%               %subst 4--6
+\set@hetatom@sugarh{#3}{3}{3}{7}{1}%              %subst 1 -- 3
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#4\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(532,0){%
+  \if@clip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyrana}}% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(412,-200){%
+  \if@eclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranb}}% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(120,-200){%
+  \if@fclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbb}}% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){%
+  \if@aclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranc}}% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(120,200){%
+  \if@bclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbB}}% subst. on 5
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(412,200){%
+  \if@cclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbC}}% subst. on 6
+\fi %end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \sixsugarh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylpyranoseposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New commands for setting substituents}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Added for position 6}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylpyranoseposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylpyranoseposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-532}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-412}\gdef\@yli{200}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-120}\gdef\@yli{200}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 4
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-120}\gdef\@yli{-200}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 5
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-412}\gdef\@yli{-200}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 6
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The front skeletal bonds of a pyranose ring are typeset with a bold line and wedged lines. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/25}{added the definition for \cs{sixsugarhw}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixsugarhw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixsugarhw}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixsugarhw{\@ifnextchar[{\@sixsugarhw}{\@sixsugarhw[]}}
+\def\@sixsugarhw[#1]#2#3{%
+\sixsugarh[#1]{6==O;1s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(-3,-5){120};%
+4s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(3,-5){120};%
+3s==\PutBondLine(-17,0)(307,0){2.8pt};#2}{#3}[abc]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Skeletal bonds of sugarhs}
+%
+% The macro |\set@skel@sugarhbond| is used in |\sixsugarh| etc. 
+% for setting skeletal bonds (outer bonds), when |\@aaa| etc. 
+% (produced by |\csname|...|\endcsname|) are equal to `a' 
+% etc. (given as \#2).  Thinline, thickline and dotted-line 
+% skeletal bonds are available. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@skel@sugarhbond}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@skel@sugarhbond#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\if\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname #2\relax%OK
+                               % \if\@aaa #2\relax%OK
+  \@skbondlistfalse
+  \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+      \if\@@tmpb A\relax%
+       \if@fivemembered
+        \expandafter\csname fdothskbond#3\endcsname% \dothskbonda etc.
+       \else
+        \expandafter\csname dothskbond#3\endcsname% \dothskbonda etc.
+       \fi
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \else\if\@@tmpb B\relax%
+        {\thicklines 
+        \if@fivemembered
+         \expandafter\csname fsugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+        \else
+         \expandafter\csname sugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+        \fi
+        }%
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \fi\fi
+     \fi%
+    }%
+   \if@skbondlist\else
+    \ifmolfront
+     {\thicklines 
+      \if@fivemembered
+        \expandafter\csname fsugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+      \else
+        \expandafter\csname sugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+      \fi
+     }%
+    \else
+     {\thinlines 
+      \if@fivemembered
+        \expandafter\csname fsugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc
+      \else
+        \expandafter\csname sugarhskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+      \fi
+     }%
+    \fi
+   \fi%
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname \empty\relax%
+                                %    \ifx\@aaa\empty\relax
+    \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+     \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+      \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unavailable bond `#2' in SKBONDLIST}\fi
+    }%
+  \fi\fi
+}% end of \set@skel@sugarhbond
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% The macros |\sixsugarh| uses inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\sugarhskbonda| to |\sugarhskbondf| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************************
+% * setting skeletal bonds of sugarhs *
+% ************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                   e
+%                          (eee) 5      6  (fff)
+%                            d    -----    c
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 4 * (ddd)     * 1  (aaa)
+%          (0,0)                *       *  a
+%                            c    -----
+%                          (ccc) 3      2  (bbb)
+%                                   b
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhskbonda}
+% The macro |\sugarhskbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\sugarhskbonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(532,0)(-3,-5){120}%           %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(532,0)(-3,-5){96}%            %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+%     \Put@Line(635,-55)(-3,-5){120}%          %bond 1-2
+     \Put@Line(511,-35)(-3,-5){96}%          %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(511,-35)(-3,-5){80}%          %bond 1-2
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhskbondf}
+% The macro |\sugarhskbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 6
+\def\sugarhskbondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(532,0)(-3,5){120}%           %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(532,0)(-3,5){96}%            %bond 1-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(511,35)(-3,5){96}%          %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(511,35)(-3,5){80}%          %bond 1-6
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhskbondc}
+% The macro |\sugarhskbondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ccc| and |\ddd|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 3
+\def\sugarhskbondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){120}%           %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){96}%            %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(21,-35)(3,-5){96}%          %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(21,-35)(3,-5){80}%          %bond 4-3
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhskbondd}
+% The macro |\sugarhskbondd| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\sugarhskbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){120}%           %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){97}%            %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(21,35)(3,5){97}%          %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(21,35)(3,5){80}%          %bond 4-5
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhskbondb}
+% The macro |\sugarhskbondb| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 3 and 2
+\def\sugarhskbondb{%
+  \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(120,-200)(1,0){292}%           %bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(120,-200)(1,0){252}%            %bond 3-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(160,-200)(1,0){252}%          %bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(160,-200)(1,0){212}%          %bond 3-2
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhskbonde}
+% The macro |\sugarhskbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 6
+\def\sugarhskbonde{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(120,200)(1,0){292}%           %bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(120,200)(1,0){252}%            %bond 5-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(160,200)(1,0){252}%          %bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(160,200)(1,0){212}%          %bond 5-6
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \subsection{Hetero Atoms on sugarh Skeletons}
+%
+% The command |\set@hetatom@sugarh| is to set a spiro group 
+% (stored as |\@memberb|) 
+% at a vertix designated by |\@tmpaa| (or originally by |\@tmpa|). 
+% The atom modifier `s' designates that the spiro group contains 
+% a carbon atom (a vertix) at a spiro position, while `h' 
+% represents the presence of a hetero atom at a spiro position. 
+% The absence of such atom modifiers shows the substitution 
+% of a usual hetero atom.  The command |\set@hetatom@sugarh| is 
+% used in such commands as |\sixsugarh| for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 
+% e.g. |1==N;1s==\sixsugarh{}{1==(yl)}|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@hetatom@sugarh}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{New command: \cs{set@hetatom@sugarh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@hetatom@sugarh#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+\or%position 1
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{60}{0}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@aclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{0}{0}{\@memberb}%              % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{60}{-36}{\@memberb}%              % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 2
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{155}{180}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@bclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{120}{200}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{155}{180}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 3
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{382}{180}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@cclipfalse%
+     \putratom{412}{200}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{382}{180}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 4
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@cliptrue%
+   \putratom{472}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@clipfalse%
+   \putratom{532}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@cliptrue%
+   \putratom{472}{-36}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 5
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ecliptrue%
+     \putratom{382}{-240}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@eclipfalse%
+     \putratom{412}{-200}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@ecliptrue%
+     \putratom{382}{-240}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 6
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@fcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{155}{-240}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@fclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{120}{-200}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@fcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{155}{-240}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\fi% end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@sugarh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inner Double Bonds of sugarhs}
+%
+% The macros |\sixsugarh| uses inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\sugarhbonda| to |\sugarhbondf| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************************
+% * setting skeletal bonds (horizontal type) *
+% ********************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%                                   e
+%                          (eee) 5      6  (fff)
+%                            d    -----    c
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 4 * (ddd)     * 1  (aaa)
+%          (0,0)                *       *  a
+%                            c    -----
+%                          (ccc) 3      2  (bbb)
+%                                   b
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhbonda}
+% The macro |\sugarhbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+%\else \if\member a%
+\def\sugarhbonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(482,-12)(-3,-5){90}%        %double bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(482,-12)(-3,-5){80}%        %double bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(394,-160)(3,5){70}%       %double bond 2-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(394,-160)(3,5){70}%       %double bond 2-1
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhbondf}
+% The macro |\sugarhbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 6
+\def\sugarhbondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(482,12)(-3,5){90}%        %double bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(482,12)(-3,5){80}%        %double bond 1-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(394,160)(3,-5){70}%       %double bond 6-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(394,160)(3,-5){70}%       %double bond 6-1
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhbondc}
+% The macro |\sugarhbondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ccc| and |\ddd|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 3
+\def\sugarhbondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(50,-12)(3,-5){90}%        %double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(50,-12)(3,-5){80}%        %double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(138,-160)(-3,5){70}%       %double bond 3-4
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(138,-160)(-3,5){70}%       %double bond 3-4
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhbondd}
+% The macro |\sugarhbondd| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\sugarhbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(50,12)(3,5){90}%        %double bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(50,12)(3,5){80}%        %double bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(138,160)(-3,-5){70}%       %double bond 5-4
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(138,160)(-3,-5){70}%       %double bond 5-4
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhbondb}
+% The macro |\sugarhbondb| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 3 and 2
+\def\sugarhbondb{%
+  \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(150,-160)(1,0){232}%      %double bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(160,-160)(1,0){217}%      %double bond 3-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(170,-160)(1,0){217}%      %double bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(170,-160)(1,0){197}%      %double bond 3-2
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+
+% \begin{macro}{\sugarhbonde}
+% The macro |\sugarhbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 6
+\def\sugarhbonde{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(150,160)(1,0){232}%      %double bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(160,160)(1,0){217}%      %double bond 5-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(170,160)(1,0){217}%      %double bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(170,160)(1,0){197}%      %double bond 5-6
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \section{Cyclitol Derivaives}
+%
+% Cyclitol derivatives can be drawn by the |\cyclitol| macro. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{New command: \cs{cyclitol}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclitol}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cyclitol}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclitol{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclitol}{\@cyclitol[]}}
+\def\@cyclitol[#1]#2{\sixsugarh[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Cyclitol derivatives of slightly large dimension can be 
+% drawn by the |\Cyclitol| macro. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{New command: \cs{Cyclitol}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Cyclitol}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Cyclitol}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Cyclitol{\@ifnextchar[{\@Cyclitol}{\@Cyclitol[]}}
+\def\@Cyclitol[#1]#2{\SixSugarh[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Five-Membered Sugar Derivatives of Normal Dimension}
+% \subsection{General Conventions}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of cyclitol is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************
+% * five-sugarh derivative *
+% **************************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                   5
+%                                   *
+%                             d  *     * e
+%   the original point ===> 4 *           * 1
+%          (0,0)                *       * a
+%                             c   -----
+%                                3  b   2
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fivesugarh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fivesugarh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `e' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none or [] :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  not supported (+ at the n-nitrogen atom, n = 1 to 4)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 5 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  single bond (down) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSB        :  single bond (up) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSa        :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g.
+%        \fivesugarh{5==O}{1Sa==OH;2Sa==OH}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fivesugarh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\fiveheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents dirctly 
+%         (cf. |\setsixringh| for a |\fiveheteroh|)
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2001/6/25}{bug fix for position 5}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivesugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@sugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@@sugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fivesugarh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivesugarh{\@ifnextchar({\@five@sugarh(@}{\@five@sugarh(@)}}
+\def\@five@sugarh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@five@@sugarh(#1)[@}%
+{\@five@@sugarh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@five@@sugarh(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fivesugarh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@fivesugarh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@fivesugarh(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@SixSugarh{#3}%
+%test for a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylfuranoseposition{#4}%shift values
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(880,800)(-240,-400){fivesugarh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%%%|\@aaa| etc. are empty if they are omitted. 
+\@fivememberedfalse%common bonds to a six-membered ring
+\molfronttrue%boldfaced lines (thicklines)
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{a}{a}%
+  %bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \sugarhskbonda etc
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{b}{b}%
+ %bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \sugarhskbondb etc
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{c}{c}%
+ %bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \sugarhskbondc etc
+\@fivememberedtrue%bonds for a five-membered ring
+\molfrontfalse%normal lines (thinelines)
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{d}{d}%
+ %bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \fsugarhskbondd etc
+\set@skel@sugarhbond{#1}{e}{e}%
+ %bond between 5 and 1 \@eee -> \fsugarhskbonde etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax %no action \sugarhbondd \sugarhbondf \sugarhbondb%
+\else \if\member l\relax %no action \sugarhbonda \sugarhbondc \sugarhbonde%
+\else \if\member a\relax \sugarhbonda%
+\else \if\member b\relax \sugarhbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax \sugarhbondc%
+\else \if\member d\relax \fsugarhbondd%
+\else \if\member e\relax \fsugarhbonde%
+\else \if\member A% no action: %%left aromatic circle 
+%  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%               %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else%no action
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%  \set@fusionadd@sixhi
+%  \ifx\@@tmpa\empty%
+%   \XyMTeXWarning{Fused function is unavailable for fivesugarh.}\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag%initialize
+\set@hetatom@sugarh{#3}{-3}{0}{2}{1}%       %subst 4
+\set@hetatom@sugarh{#3}{3}{3}{7}{1}%        %subst 1 -- 3
+\set@hteatom@fivesugarh{#3}%                %subsituent 5
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#4\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(532,0){%
+  \if@clip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyrana}}% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(412,-200){%
+  \if@eclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranb}}% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(120,-200){%
+  \if@fclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbb}}% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){%
+  \if@aclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranc}}% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(266,160){%
+  %\if@bclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  %\@pyranbB}}% subst. on 5
+  {\if@bclip \@acliptrue \put(0,-386){\@substa}%subst. on 5 bug fix 2013/06/25
+    \else \@aclipfalse% subst. on 5 bug fix 2013/06/25
+    \put(0,-406){\@substa}\fi}\@aclipfalse}}%%%\@pyranbB}}% subst. on 5 bug fix 2013/06/25
+\fi %end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \fivesugarh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\resetflags}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% (undefined)
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The front skeletal bonds of a furanose ring are typeset with a bold line and wedged lines. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/25}{added the definition for \cs{fivesugarhw}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fivesugarhw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fivesugarhw}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fivesugarhw{\@ifnextchar[{\@fivesugarhw}{\@fivesugarhw[]}}
+\def\@fivesugarhw[#1]#2#3{%
+\fivesugarh[#1]{5==O;1s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(-3,-5){120};%
+4s==\WedgeAsSubst(0,0)(3,-5){120};%
+3s==\PutBondLine(-17,0)(307,0){2.8pt};#2}{#3}[abc]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylfuranoseposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/23}{New commands for setting substituents}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Added for position 5}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylfuranoseposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylfuranoseposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-532}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-412}\gdef\@yli{200}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-120}\gdef\@yli{200}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 4
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-266}\gdef\@yli{-160}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 5
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Skeletal Bonds of fivesugarh}
+%
+% The macros |\fivesugarh| uses inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\sugarhskbonda| to |\sugarhskbondc| 
+% (common to |\sixsugarh|) as well as 
+% |\fsugarhskbondd| to |\fsugarhskbonde| 
+% to set a bond on each edge of a five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fsugarhskbondd}
+% The macro |\fsugarhskbondd| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fsugarhskbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){266}%           %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){231}%            %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(35,21)(5,3){231}%          %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(35,21)(5,3){200}%          %bond 4-5
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fsugarhskbonde}
+% The macro |\fsugarhskbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\aaa|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 1
+\def\fsugarhskbonde{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(532,0)(-5,3){266}%           %bond 5-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(532,0)(-5,3){231}%            %bond 5-1
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(497,21)(-5,3){231}%          %bond 5-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(497,21)(-5,3){200}%          %bond 5-1
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+
+% \begin{macro}{\set@hteatom@fivesugarh}
+% The macro |\set@hteatom@fivesugarh| put a hetero atom 
+% on vertex no. 5 of |\fivesugarh|. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@hteatom@fivesugarh#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax
+\ifnum\@tmpaa=5\relax
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putratom{236}{130}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@bclipfalse%
+     \putratom{266}{160}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putratom{236}{130}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\fi% end of ifnum
+\fi
+}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@fivesugarh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \subsection{Inner Double Bonds of fivesugarh}
+%
+% The macros |\fivesugarh| uses inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\fsugarhbonda| to |\sugarhbondc| 
+% (common to |\sixsugarh|) as well as 
+% |\fsugarhbondd| and |\sugarhbonde| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fsugarhbondd}
+% The macro |\fsugarhbondd| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\fsugarhbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(60,-10)(5,3){190}%        %double bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(60,-10)(5,3){170}%        %double bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(80,6)(5,3){170}%       %double bond 5-4
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(80,6)(5,3){160}%       %double bond 5-4
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fsugarhbonde}
+% The macro |\fsugarhbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 1
+\def\fsugarhbonde{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(472,-10)(-5,3){190}%        %double bond 5-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(472,-10)(-5,3){170}%        %double bond 5-1
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(452,6)(-5,3){170}%       %double bond 5-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(452,6)(-5,3){160}%       %double bond 5-1
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \section{Five-Membered Sugar Derivatives of Large Dimension}
+% \subsection{General Conventions}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of cyclitol is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************
+% * Sugarh derivative *
+% ********************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%
+%                                   5
+%                                   *
+%                             d  *     * e
+%   the original point ===> 4 *           * 1
+%          (0,0)                *       * a
+%                             c   -----
+%                                3  b   2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% The macro |\FiveSugarh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \FiveSugarh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `e' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option  `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none or [] :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  not suported: plus at n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 5 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  single bond (down) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSB        :  single bond (up) at n-atom (for n=1)
+%           nSa        :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g.
+%        \FiveSugarh{6==O}{1Sa==OH;2Sa==OH}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\FiveSugarh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents dirctly 
+%         (cf. |\setsixringh| for a |\sixheteroh|)
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\FiveSugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Five@Sugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Five@@Sugarh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@FiveSugarh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\FiveSugarh{\@ifnextchar({\@Five@Sugarh(@}{\@Five@Sugarh(@)}}
+\def\@Five@Sugarh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@Five@@Sugarh(#1)[@}%
+{\@Five@@Sugarh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@Five@@Sugarh(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@FiveSugarh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@FiveSugarh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@FiveSugarh(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@SixSugarh{#3}%common to six-membered ring
+%test for a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylFiveSugarhposition{#4}%shift values
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1100,800)(-240,-400){FiveSugarh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%%%|\@aaa| etc. are empty if they are omitted. 
+\molfronttrue
+\@fivememberedfalse%common bonds to a six-membered ring
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{a}{a}%
+  %bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \Sugarhskbonda etc
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{b}{b}%
+ %bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \Sugarhskbondb etc
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{c}{c}%
+ %bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \Sugarhskbondc etc
+\molfrontfalse
+\@fivememberedtrue%only five-membered ring
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{d}{d}%
+ %bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \fSugarhskbondd etc
+\set@skel@Sugarhbond{#1}{e}{e}%
+ %bond between 5 and 1 \@eee -> \fSugarhskbonde etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax %%% no action \Sugarhbondd \Sugarhbondf \Sugarhbondb%
+\else \if\member l\relax %% noaction \Sugarhbonda \Sugarhbondc \Sugarhbonde%
+\else \if\member a\relax \Sugarhbonda%
+\else \if\member b\relax \Sugarhbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax \Sugarhbondc%
+\else \if\member d\relax \fSugarhbondd%
+\else \if\member e\relax \fSugarhbonde%
+\else \if\member A% no action: %%left aromatic circle 
+%  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%               %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%  \set@fusionadd@sixhi
+%  \ifx\@@tmpa\empty%
+%   \XyMTeXWarning{Fused function is unavailable for FiveSugarh.}\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\set@hetatom@Sugarh{#3}{-3}{0}{2}{1}%               %subst 4
+\set@hetatom@Sugarh{#3}{3}{3}{7}{1}%              %subst 1 -- 3
+\set@hteatom@FiveSugarh{#3}%                      %subst 5
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#4\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(668,0){%
+  \if@clip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyrana}}% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(513,-255){%
+  \if@eclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranb}}% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(153,-255){%
+  \if@fclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbb}}% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){%
+  \if@aclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranc}}% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(333,200){%
+  \if@bclip \@clippingtrue \else \@clippingfalse\fi
+  \@pyranbB}}% subst. on 5
+\fi %end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \FiveSugarh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylFiveSugarhposition| is to obtain the shift values 
+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 
+% point of a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New commands for setting substituents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylFiveSugarhposition}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylFiveSugarhposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-668}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-513}\gdef\@yli{255}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-153}\gdef\@yli{255}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 4
+ \or\gdef\@ylii{-333}\gdef\@yli{-200}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 5
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Skeletal Bonds of FiveSugarh}
+%
+% The macros |\FiveSugarh| uses inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\sugarhskbonda| to |\sugarhskbondc| 
+% (common to |\sixsugarh|) as well as 
+% |\fSugarhskbondd| to |\fSugarhskbonde| 
+% to set a bond on each edge of a five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fSugarhskbondd}
+% The macro |\fSugarhskbondd| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fSugarhskbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){333}%           %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){298}%            %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(35,21)(5,3){298}%          %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(35,21)(5,3){263}%          %bond 4-5
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fSugarhskbonde}
+% The macro |\fSugarhskbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\aaa|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 1
+\def\fSugarhskbonde{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(668,0)(-5,3){333}%           %bond 5-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(668,0)(-5,3){298}%            %bond 5-1
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(633,21)(-5,3){298}%          %bond 5-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(633,21)(-5,3){263}%          %bond 5-1
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+
+% \begin{macro}{\set@hteatom@FiveSugarh}
+% The macro |\set@hteatom@FiveSugarh| put a hetero atom 
+% on vertex no. 5 of |\FiveSugarh|. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@hteatom@FiveSugarh#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax
+\ifnum\@tmpaa=5\relax
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putratom{303}{170}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@bclipfalse%
+     \putratom{333}{200}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putratom{303}{170}{\@memberb}% left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\fi% end of ifnum
+\fi
+}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@FiveSugarh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \subsection{Inner Double Bonds of FiveSugarh}
+%
+% The macros |\FiveSugarh| uses inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\Sugarhbonda| to |\Sugarhbondc| 
+% (common to |\SixSugarh|) as well as 
+% |\fSugarhbondd| and |\fSugarhbonde| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fSugarhbondd}
+% The macro |\fSugarhbondd| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\fSugarhbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(60,-10)(5,3){257}%        %double bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(60,-10)(5,3){237}%        %double bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(80,6)(5,3){237}%       %double bond 5-4
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(80,6)(5,3){227}%       %double bond 5-4
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fSugarhbonde}
+% The macro |\fSugarhbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Newly defined.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 1
+\def\fSugarhbonde{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(608,-10)(-5,3){257}%        %double bond 5-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(608,-10)(-5,3){237}%        %double bond 5-1
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(588,6)(-5,3){237}%       %double bond 5-1
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(588,6)(-5,3){227}%       %double bond 5-1
+    \fi\fi}%
+%</hcycle>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
+%</hcycle>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hcycle.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hcycle.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..14129d36baf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hcycle.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+\def\batchfile{hcycle.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996,1998,2001,2002,2004,2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996 
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1996 (private version)
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.01 Released on August 30, 2002
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+Version 5.01b Released on March 30, 2013
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.01 Released on June 25, 2013
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files hcycle.dtx and hcycle.ins
+and the derived file hcycle.sty.
+
+=======================================
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{hcycle.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{hcycle.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{hcycle.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{hcycle.dtx}{hcycle}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetarom.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetarom.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a61bca3e297
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetarom.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,8620 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: hetarom.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1993,1996,1998,2000,2002,2004,2006,2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% hetarom.sty
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files hetarom.dtx and hetarom.ins
+% and the derived file hetarom.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{November 11, 2000}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00a}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 20, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{September 5, 2006}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.03b}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{9032}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/06/27}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00a}{1998/11/11}{bug fix}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{Size reduction and Clip infomation}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/21}{The command \cs{dotorline} is added.}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{sfpicture environment etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Exception to wedged bonds}
+% \changes{v4.02a}{2004/12/27}{Bug fix: \cs{ggg} to \cs{gggA}}
+% \changes{v4.03b}{2006/9/5}{Bug fix: \cs{decahetero} and \cs{nonahetero}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring and the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/19}{Three and four-membered specfic commands are added}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{hetarom.dtx}[2013/03/19 v5.01 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{hetarom.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Heterocycles of vertical type by {\sffamily hetarom.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %% (old address)
+% %% Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% %% Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% %% Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{hetarom.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{hetarom:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% hetarom & hetarom.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hetarom>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.01}
+\typeout{       -- Released March 19, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{hetarom}
+\def\versi@ndate{March 19, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for hetarom.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *********************************
+% * hetarom.sty: list of commands *
+% *********************************
+%
+% <Various flags (switches)>
+%
+%     \if@gclip \@gclipfalse \@gcliptrue
+%     \if@hclip \@hclipfalse \@hcliptrue
+%     \if@iclip \@iclipfalse \@icliptrue
+%     \if@jclip \@jclipfalse \@jcliptrue
+%     \iniflag
+%     \iniatom
+%     \aaa
+%     \bbb
+%     \ccc
+%     \ddd
+%     \eee
+%     \fff
+%     \gggA
+%     \hhh
+%     \iii
+%     \jjj
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Six-Membered Heterocycles>
+%    Setting inner double bonds
+%
+%     \bonda
+%     \bondb
+%     \bondc
+%     \bondd
+%     \bonde
+%     \bondf
+%     \bondhoriz
+%     \bondhorizi
+%
+%    Setting skeletal bonds
+%
+%     \skbonda
+%     \skbondf
+%     \skbondc
+%     \skbondd
+%     \skbondb
+%     \skbonde
+%     \skbondhoriz
+%     \skbondhorizi
+%
+%    Setting dotted skeletal bonds
+%
+%     \dotskbonda
+%     \dotskbondf
+%     \dotskbondc
+%     \dotskbondd
+%     \dotskbondb
+%     \dotskbonde
+%     \dotskbondhoriz
+%     \dotskbondhorizi
+%
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     \sixheterov               \@sixheterov
+%     \sixheterovi              \@sixheterovi
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%     \pyridinev                \@pyridinev
+%     \pyridinevi               \@pyridinevi
+%     \pyrazinev                \@pyrazinev
+%     \pyrimidinev              \@pyrimidinev
+%     \pyrimidinevi             \@pyrimidinevi
+%     \pyridazinev              \@pyridazinev
+%     \pyridazinevi             \@pyridazinevi
+%     \triazinev                \@triazinev
+%     \triazinevi               \@triazinevi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Five-Membered Heterocycles>
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     \fiveheterov              \@fiveheterov
+%     \fiveheterovi             \@fiveheterovi
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%     \pyrrolev                 \@pyrrolev
+%     \pyrazolev                \@pyrazolev
+%     \imidazolev               \@imidazolev
+%     \isoxazolev               \@isoxazolev
+%     \oxazolev                 \@oxazolev
+%
+%     \furanv                   \@furanv
+%     \thiophenev               \@thiophenev
+%
+%     \pyrrolevi                \@pyrrolevi
+%     \pyrazolevi               \@pyrazolevi
+%     \imidazolevi              \@imidazolevi
+%     \isoxazolevi              \@isoxazolevi
+%     \oxazolevi                \@oxazolevi
+%
+%     \furanvi                   \@furanvi
+%     \thiophenevi               \@thiophenevi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Six-Six-Fused Heterocycles>
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     \decaheterov              \@decaheterov
+%     \decaheterovi             \@decaheterovi
+%     \decaheterovb             \@decaheterovb
+%     \decaheterovt             \@decaheterovt
+%
+%   Adjustment Macros (for structures as substituents)
+%   \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/16}{Newly added command}
+%
+%     \clipdetection
+%     \ylhetposition
+%     \ylhetpositionb
+%     \ylhetpositiont
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%     \quinolinev               \@quinolinev
+%     \quinolinevi              \@quinolinevi
+%     \quinolinevb              \@quinolinevb
+%     \quinolinevt              \@quinolinevt
+%
+%     \isoquinolinev            \@isoquinolinev
+%     \isoquinolinevi           \@isoquinolinevi
+%     \isoquinolinevb           \@isoquinolinevb
+%     \isoquinolinevt           \@isoquinolinevt
+%
+%     \quinoxalinev             \@quinoxalinev
+%     \quinoxalinevi            \@quinoxalinevi
+%     \quinoxalinevb            \@quinoxalinevb
+%     \quinoxalinevt            \@quinoxalinevt
+%
+%     \quinazolinev             \@quinazolinev
+%     \quinazolinevi            \@quinazolinevi
+%     \quinazolinevb            \@quinazolinevb
+%     \quinazolinevt            \@quinazolinevt
+%
+%     \cinnolinev               \@cinnolinev
+%     \cinnolinevi              \@cinnolinevi
+%     \cinnolinevb              \@cinnolinevb
+%     \cinnolinevt              \@cinnolinevt
+%
+%     \pteridinev               \@pteridinev
+%     \pteridinevi              \@pteridinevi
+%     \pteridinevb              \@pteridinevb
+%     \pteridinevt              \@pteridinevt
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Six-Five-Fused Heterocycles>
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     \nonaheterov              \@nonaheterov
+%     \nonaheterovi             \@nonaheterovi
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%     \purinev                  \@purinev
+%     \purinevi                 \@purinevi
+%     \indolev                  \@indolev
+%     \indolevi                 \@indolevi
+%     \indolizinev              \@indolizinev
+%     \indolizinevi             \@indolizinevi
+%     \isoindolev               \@isoindolev
+%     \isoindolevi              \@isoindolevi
+%     \benzofuranev             \@benzofuranev
+%     \benzofuranevi            \@benzofuranevi
+%     \isobenzofuranev          \@isobenzofuranev
+%     \isobenzofuranevi         \@isobenzofuranevi
+%     \benzoxazolev             \@benzoxazolev
+%     \benzoxazolevi            \@benzoxazolevi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Four-Membered Heterocycles>
+%    Setting bonds
+%     \bondshoriz               \bondshorizi
+%     \skbondshoriz             \skbondshorizi
+%
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     \fourhetero               \@fourhetero
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%    \oxetane
+%    \azetidine
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Four-Membered Heterocycles>
+%    Setting inner double bonds
+%
+%     \bondtria                 \bondtrib
+%     \skbondtria               \skbondtrib
+%     \Bondtria                 \Bondtrib
+%     \skBondtria               \skBondtrib
+%
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     (\fourhetero)              (\@fourhetero)
+%     \set@fusionadd@fourv       \set@fusion@fourv
+%
+%  <Three-Membered Heterocycles>
+%
+%     \threehetero              \@threehetero
+%     \threeheteroi             \@threeheteroi
+%
+%     \threeheterov              \@threeheterov
+%     \threeheterovi             \@threeheterovi
+%
+%     \set@fusionadd@threev        \set@fusion@threev
+%     \set@fusionadd@threevi        \set@fusion@threevi
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%    \oxiranev    \oxiranevi
+%    \aziridinev  \aziridinevi
+%    \thiiranev   \thiiranevi
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Building Units>
+%
+%     \sixunitv                 \@sixunitv
+%     \fiveunitv                \@fiveunitv
+%     \fiveunitvi               \@fiveunitvi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf hetarom.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}%
+\unitlength=0.1pt%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following switches and macros have been moved to {\sf chemstr.sty}; 
+% hence, they are commented out. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% % ****************************
+% % * various flags (switches) *
+% % ****************************
+% \newif\if@gclip \@gclipfalse%
+% \newif\if@hclip \@hclipfalse%
+% \newif\if@iclip \@iclipfalse%
+% \newif\if@jclip \@jclipfalse%
+% \def\iniflag{%
+% \@aclipfalse \@bclipfalse\@cclipfalse\@clipfalse\@eclipfalse%
+% \@fclipfalse\@gclipfalse\@hclipfalse\@iclipfalse\@jclipfalse%
+% \@clipfusefalse}%
+% \def\iniatom{%
+% \def\aaa{}\def\bbb{}\def\ccc{}\def\ddd{}\def\eee{}\def\fff{}%
+% \def\gggA{}\def\hhh{}\def\iii{}\def\jjj{}%
+% \def\@aaa{}\def\@bbb{}\def\@ccc{}\def\@ddd{}\def\@eee{}\def\@fff{}%
+% }%
+% \def\resetbdsw{\gdef\@aaa{a}\gdef\@bbb{b}\gdef\@ccc{c}%
+% \gdef\@ddd{d}\gdef\@eee{e}\gdef\@fff{f}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Initialization}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\iniatom%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Macros for setting bonds}
+% \subsection{Inner double bonds}
+% 
+% The macros |\sixhetero| and |\fivehetero| use internal macros for setting 
+% inner double bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\bonda| to |\bondf| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring; and 
+% the inner macros |\bondz| to |\bondzi| draw horizontal bonds 
+% of a five-membered ring. 
+% 
+% Note that 
+% comments (conerning locant numbers) on the end of each row have 
+% lost the exact meaning, 
+% since such a command moiety is used in many macros after copying. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ******************************
+% * setting inner double bonds *
+% ******************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in these macros. 
+%                   aaa
+%                    1
+%                  f * a
+%           fff 6  *   *  2 bbb
+%             e   |     |   b
+%                 |     |
+%           eee 5  *   *  3 ccc
+%                 d  *  c
+%                    4 <===== the original point
+%                   ddd
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bonda}
+% The macro |\bonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 1 and 2
+\def\bonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+   \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \Put@Line(6,364)(5,-3){126}%         %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(6,364)(5,-3){100}%         %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \Put@Line(35,340)(5,-3){100}%        %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(35,352)(5,-3){100}%        %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%                                    % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondb}
+% The macro |\bondb| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 3 and 2
+ \def\bondb{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(138,129)(0,1){148}%        %double bond 3-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(138,143)(0,1){134}%        %double bond 3-2
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(138,129)(0,1){134}%        %double bond 3-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(138,143)(0,1){110}%        %double bond 3-2
+   \fi%
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondc}
+% The macro |\bondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 4 and 3
+ \def\bondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){126}%           %double bond 4-3
+   \else% 
+    \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){100}%           %double bond 4-3
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(35,66)(5,3){100}%          %double bond 4-3
+   \else% 
+    \Put@Line(35,60)(5,3){100}%          %double bond 4-3
+   \fi%                                    % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondd}
+% The macro |\bondd| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 4 and 5
+ \def\bondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+   \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){126}%         %double bond 4-5
+   \else% 
+    \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){100}%         %double bond 4-5
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-35,66)(-5,3){100}%        %double bond 4-5
+   \else% 
+    \Put@Line(-35,60)(-5,3){100}%        %double bond 4-5
+   \fi%                                    % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bonde}
+% The macro |\bonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\fff| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 5 and 6
+\def\bonde{%
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+   \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-138,129)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 5-6
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-138,143)(0,1){134}%       %double bond 5-6
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-138,129)(0,1){134}%       %double bond 5-6
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-138,143)(0,1){110}%       %double bond 5-6
+   \fi%
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondf}
+% The macro |\bondf| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 1 and 6
+\def\bondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+   \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-6,364)(-5,-3){126}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-6,364)(-5,-3){100}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-35,340)(-5,-3){100}%       %double bond 1-6
+%    \Put@Line(-6,364)(-5,-3){126}%       %double bond 1-6 bug fix 2010/10/01
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-35,352)(-5,-3){100}%       %double bond 1-6
+   \fi%                                     % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondz}
+% The macro |\bondz| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\fff| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% horizontal inner bond for five-membered rings
+\def\bondhoriz{%
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-138,270)(1,0){277}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-138,270)(1,0){258}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-120,270)(1,0){258}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-120,270)(1,0){239}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondzi}
+% The macro |\bondzi| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% horizontal inner bond for five-membered rings (inverse type) 
+\def\bondhorizi{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-138,136)(1,0){277}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-138,136)(1,0){258}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-120,136)(1,0){258}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-120,136)(1,0){239}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Skeletal bonds}
+% 
+% The macros |\sixhetero| and |\fivehetero| use inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\skbonda| to |\skbondf| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring; and 
+% the inner macros |\skbondz| to |\skbondzi| draw horizontal bonds 
+% of a five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************
+% * setting skeletal bonds *
+% **************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%                   aaa
+%                    1
+%                  f * a
+%           fff 6  *   *  2 bbb
+%             e   |     |   b
+%                 |     |
+%           eee 5  *   *  3 ccc
+%                 d  *  c
+%                    4 <===== the original point
+%                   ddd
+% 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbonda}
+% The macro |\skbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\skbonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){171}%        %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){136}%        %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(35,385)(5,-3){136}%       %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(35,385)(5,-3){100}%       %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+   \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondf}
+% The macro |\skbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 6
+\def\skbondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){171}%       %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){136}%       %bond 1-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-35,385)(-5,-3){136}%     %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-35,385)(-5,-3){100}%     %bond 1-6
+    \fi%
+   \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondc}
+% The macro |\skbondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ccc| and |\ddd|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 3
+\def\skbondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){171}%           %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){136}%           %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(35,21)(5,3){138}%         %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(35,21)(5,3){100}%         %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondd}
+% The macro |\skbondd| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\skbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){171}%          %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){136}%          %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-35,21)(-5,3){138}%       %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-35,21)(-5,3){100}%        %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondb}
+% The macro |\skbondb| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 3 and 2
+\def\skbondb{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%%
+     \Put@Line(171,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(171,143)(0,1){160}%       %bond 3-2
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%%
+     \Put@Line(171,103)(0,1){150}%       %bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(171,143)(0,1){110}%       %bond 3-2
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbonde}
+% The macro |\skbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 6
+\def\skbonde{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-171,103)(0,1){200}%       %bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-171,103)(0,1){150}%       %bond 5-6
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-171,143)(0,1){160}%       %bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-171,143)(0,1){110}%       %bond 5-6
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondhoriz}
+% The macro |\skbondhoriz| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\fff| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%horizontal bond for five-membered rings
+\def\skbondhoriz{%
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-171,303)(1,0){342}%      %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-171,303)(1,0){300}%      %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(171,303)(-1,0){300}%      %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-129,303)(1,0){258}%      %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondhorizi}
+% The macro |\skbondhorizi| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%horizontal bond for five-membered rings (inverse type)
+\def\skbondhorizi{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-171,103)(1,0){342}%      %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-171,103)(1,0){300}%      %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(171,103)(-1,0){300}%      %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-129,103)(1,0){258}%      %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@outskel@sixv}
+% The macro |\set@outskel@sixv| is to typeset a series of 
+% outer-skeleton bonds to six rings. It is 
+% used in |\sixheterov| and |\sixheterovi|. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@outskel@sixv{%
+ \skbonda% bond between 1 and 2
+ \skbondf% bond between 1 and 6
+ \skbondc% bond between 4 and 3
+ \skbondd% bond between 4 and 5
+ \skbondb% bond between 3 and 2
+ \skbonde% bond between 5 and 6
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Dotted Skeletal Bonds}
+% 
+% The macros |\sixfusev| etc. use inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\dotskbonda| to |\dotskbondf| are used 
+% to set a dotted bond on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbonda}
+% The macro |\dotskbonda| is the dotted couterpart of |\skbonda|, 
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\dotskbonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(0,406)(5,-3){171}/(0,406)(171,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,406)(5,-3){136}/(0,406)(136,324)%
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(35,385)(5,-3){136}/(35,386)(171,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(35,385)(5,-3){100}/(35,386)(136,324)%
+    \fi%
+   \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondb}
+% The macro |\dotskbondb| is the dotted couterpart of |\skbondb|, 
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 3 and 2
+\def\dotskbondb{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%%
+       \dotorline(171,103)(0,1){200}/(171,103)(171,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(171,143)(0,1){160}/(171,143)(171,303)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%%
+       \dotorline(171,103)(0,1){150}/(171,103)(171,253)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(171,143)(0,1){110}/(171,143)(171,253)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondc}
+% The macro |\dotskbondc| is the dotted couterpart of |\skbondc|, 
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ccc| and |\ddd|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 3
+\def\dotskbondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(5,3){171}/(0,0)(171,103)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(5,3){136}/(0,0)(136,81)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(35,21)(5,3){138}/(35,21)(171,103)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(35,21)(5,3){100}/(35,21)(136,81)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondd}
+% The macro |\dotskbondd| is the dotted couterpart of |\skbondd|, 
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\dotskbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-5,3){171}/(0,0)(-171,103)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-5,3){136}/(0,0)(-136,81)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+       \dotorline(-35,21)(-5,3){138}/(-35,21)(-171,103)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-35,21)(-5,3){100}/(-35,21)(-136,81)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbonde}
+% The macro |\dotskbonde| is the dotted couterpart of |\skbonde|, 
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 6
+\def\dotskbonde{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+       \dotorline(-171,103)(0,1){200}/(-171,103)(-171,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-171,103)(0,1){150}/(-171,103)(-171,253)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+       \dotorline(-171,143)(0,1){160}/(-171,143)(-171,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-171,143)(0,1){110}/(-171,143)(-171,253)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondf}
+% The macro |\dotskbondf| is the dotted couterpart of |\skbondf|, 
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 6
+\def\dotskbondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+       \dotorline(0,406)(-5,-3){171}/(0,406)(-171,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,406)(-5,-3){136}/(0,406)(-136,325)%
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+       \dotorline(-35,385)(-5,-3){136}/(-35,385)(-171,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-35,385)(-5,-3){100}/(-35,385)(-136,325)%
+    \fi%
+   \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondhoriz}
+% The macro |\dotskbondhoriz| is the dotted couterpart of |\skbondhoriz|, 
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\fff| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%horizontal bond for five-membered rings
+\def\dotskbondhoriz{%
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(-171,303)(1,0){342}/(-171,303)(171,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-171,303)(1,0){300}/(-171,303)(129,303)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(171,303)(-1,0){300}/(171,303)(-129,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-129,303)(1,0){258}/(-129,303)(129,303)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondhorizi}
+% The macro |\dotskbondhorizi| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%horizontal bond for five-membered rings (inverse type)
+\def\dotskbondhorizi{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(-171,103)(1,0){342}/(-171,103)(171,103)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-171,103)(1,0){300}/(-171,103)(129,103)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(171,103)(-1,0){300}/(171,103)(-129,103)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-129,103)(1,0){258}/(-129,103)(129,103)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@skel@bond| is used in such commands as |\sixheterov| 
+% and |\sixfusev| for setting skeletal bonds (outer bonds), 
+% when |\@aaa| etc. (produced by |\csname|...|\endcsname|) are equal 
+% to `a' etc. (given as \#2).  Thinline, thickline and dotted-line 
+% skeletal bonds are available. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@skbondlist}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@skbondlist
+\@skbondlistfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}% from fusering.sty to hetarom.sty
+%
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{The positions of \cs{@skbondlisttrue} are changed.}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@skel@bond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@skel@bond#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\if\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname #2\relax%OK
+                               % \if\@aaa #2\relax%OK
+  \def\skbondreplace{#3}%
+  \@skbondlistfalse
+  \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+      \if\@@tmpb A\relax%
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+        \expandafter\csname dotskbond#3\endcsname% \dotskbonda etc.
+%        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \else\if\@@tmpb B\relax%
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+        {\thicklines
+        \expandafter\csname skbond#3\endcsname% \skbonda etc.
+        }%
+%        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \else%%%added for color 2010/10/01
+        \@skbondlisttrue%
+        \put(0,0){\@@tmpb}%
+      \fi\fi
+     \fi%
+    }%
+   \if@skbondlist\else
+     {\thinlines
+        \expandafter\csname skbond#3\endcsname% \skbonda etc.
+     }%
+   \fi%
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname \empty\relax%
+                                %    \ifx\@aaa\empty\relax
+    \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+     \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+      \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unavailable bond `#2' in SKBONDLIST}\fi
+    }%
+  \fi\fi
+}% end of \set@skel@bond
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@skel@longbond| is used in |\fivefusev| etc. 
+% for setting skeletal bonds (outer bonds), when |\@aaa| etc. 
+% (produced by |\csname|...|\endcsname|) are equal to `a' 
+% etc. (given as \#2).  Thinline, thickline and dotted-line 
+% skeletal bonds are available. 
+%
+% hetarom.dtx
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{The positions of \cs{@skbondlisttrue} are changed.}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@skel@longbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iflongskbond \longskbondfalse
+\def\set@skel@longbond#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\if\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname #2\relax%OK
+                               % \if\@aaa #2\relax%OK
+  \def\skbondreplace{#3}%
+  \longskbondtrue%
+  \@skbondlistfalse
+  \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+      \if\@@tmpb A\relax%
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+        \expandafter\csname dot#3\endcsname% \dotskbonda etc.
+%        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \else\if\@@tmpb B\relax%
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+        {\thicklines
+        \expandafter\csname #3\endcsname% \skbonda etc.
+        }%
+%        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \else%%%added for color 2010/10/01
+        \@skbondlisttrue%
+        \put(0,0){\@@tmpb}%
+      \fi\fi
+     \fi%
+    }%
+   \if@skbondlist\else
+     {\thinlines
+        \expandafter\csname #3\endcsname% \skbonda etc.
+     }%
+   \fi%
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname \empty\relax%
+                                %    \ifx\@aaa\empty\relax
+    \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+     \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+      \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unavailable bond `#2' in SKBONDLIST}\fi
+    }%
+  \fi\fi
+  \longskbondfalse
+}% end of \set@skel@longbond
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\@bond@@omit| is used in |\sixheterov| etc. 
+% for detecting omitted bonds, where |\@aaa| etc. are empty if 
+% they are omitted. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bond@@omit}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bond@@omit#1{%
+\@tfor\memBer:=#1\do{%
+\if\memBer a\relax\gdef\@aaa{}\fi%
+\if\memBer A\relax\gdef\@aaa{}\fi%
+\if\memBer b\relax\gdef\@bbb{}\fi%
+\if\memBer B\relax\gdef\@bbb{}\fi%
+\if\memBer c\relax\gdef\@ccc{}\fi%
+\if\memBer C\relax\gdef\@ccc{}\fi%
+\if\memBer d\relax\gdef\@ddd{}\fi%
+\if\memBer D\relax\gdef\@ddd{}\fi%
+\if\memBer e\relax\gdef\@eee{}\fi%
+\if\memBer E\relax\gdef\@eee{}\fi%
+\if\memBer f\relax\gdef\@fff{}\fi%
+\if\memBer F\relax\gdef\@fff{}\fi%
+\if\memBer g\relax\gdef\@ggg{}\fi%
+\if\memBer G\relax\gdef\@ggg{}\fi%
+\if\memBer h\relax\gdef\@hhh{}\fi%
+\if\memBer H\relax\gdef\@hhh{}\fi%
+\if\memBer i\relax\gdef\@iii{}\fi%
+\if\memBer I\relax\gdef\@iii{}\fi%
+\if\memBer j\relax\gdef\@jjj{}\fi%
+\if\memBer J\relax\gdef\@jjj{}\fi%
+\if\memBer k\relax\gdef\@kkk{}\fi%
+\if\memBer K\relax\gdef\@kkk{}\fi%
+}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Six-membered heterocyles}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-membered heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************
+% * sixhetero derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)      *
+% *************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          1
+%          * 
+%     6  *   *  2
+%       |     |
+%       |     |
+%     5  *   *  3
+%          *
+%          4 <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixheterov| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixheterov(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none or r  :  sixhetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  sixhetero (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixheterov{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \sixheterov[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \sixheterov[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\sixheterov| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by |\setsixringv|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{Adding \cs{test@vertix@sixv}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixheterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@heterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@@heterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixheterov}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixheterov{\@ifnextchar({\@six@heterov(@}{\@six@heterov(@)}}
+\def\@six@heterov(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@six@@heterov(#1)[@}%
+{\@six@@heterov(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@six@@heterov(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@sixheterov(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@sixheterov(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@sixheterov(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.01}{2002/4/30}{Replaced by \cs{ShiftPicEnv}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{b}{c}{d}{e}{f}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#4}{0}{0}{7}{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){sixheterov}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{%
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{c}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{d}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbondd etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{f}% bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+%%%%%\set@outskel@sixv % replaced by above 1998/12/30
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax \bondd \bondf \bondb%
+\else\if\member l\relax \bonda \bondc \bonde%
+\else\if\member a\relax \bonda%
+\else\if\member b\relax \bondb%
+\else\if\member c\relax \bondc%
+\else\if\member d\relax \bondd%
+\else\if\member e\relax \bonde%
+\else\if\member f\relax \bondf%
+\else\if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%               %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@sixv%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{0}{7}{0}%    %atom 1--6%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringv{#4}{0}{0}{7}{0}%    %subst 1--6
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \sixheterov macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-membered heterocycle of inverse type 
+% is selected to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************
+% * sixhetero derivatives          *
+% *  (vertical type, inverse type) *
+% **********************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          4
+%          * 
+%     5  *   *  3
+%       |     |
+%       |     |
+%     6  *   *  2
+%          *
+%          1 <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixheterovi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixheterovi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none or r  :  sixhetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  sixhetero (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixheterovi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \sixheterovi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \sixheterovi[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\sixheterovi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by |\setsixringv|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixheterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@heterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@@heterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixheterovi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixheterovi{\@ifnextchar({\@six@heterovi(@}{\@six@heterovi(@)}}
+\def\@six@heterovi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@six@@heterovi(#1)[@}%
+{\@six@@heterovi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@six@@heterovi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@sixheterovi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@sixheterovi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@sixheterovi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.01}{2002/4/30}{Replaced by \cs{ShiftPicEnv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{c}{b}{a}{f}{e}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%    %subst 1--4
+\ylposition{#4}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%   %subst 5 and 6
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){sixheterovi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{a}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{f}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbondf etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{d}% bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \skbondd etc
+}%
+%%%\set@outskel@sixv% replaced by the above 1998/12/30
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax \bondd \bondf \bondb%
+\else\if\member l\relax \bonda \bondc \bonde%
+\else\if\member a\relax \bondc%
+\else\if\member b\relax \bondb%
+\else\if\member c\relax \bonda%
+\else\if\member d\relax \bondf%
+\else\if\member e\relax \bonde%
+\else\if\member f\relax \bondd%
+\else\if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%               %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+   \set@fusionadd@sixvi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%    %atom 1--4%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%   %atom 5 and 6%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringv{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%    %subst 1--4
+\setsixringv{#4}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%   %subst 5 and 6
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \sixheterovi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Pyridine derivatives of vertical type}
+%
+% The macros |\sixheterov| and |\sixheterovi| can be used in the 
+% form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  Hence, the resulting commands for 
+% drawing a six-membered heterocyle with one or more nitrogen atoms 
+% have an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************
+% * pyridine derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)     *
+% ************************
+%
+%   \pyridinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyridinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrazinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrimidinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrimidinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \triazinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \triazinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none or r  :  pyridine (right-handed)
+%           l          :  pyridine (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated ring
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \pyridinev{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \pyridinev[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \pyridinev[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pridinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\pridinevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyridinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyridinev[@}{\@pyridinev[r]}}
+\def\@pyridinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyridinev' %
+   is based on `sixheterov'.}\fi%
+\sixheterov[#1]{1==N}{#2}}%end of \pyridinev macro
+\def\pyridinevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyridinevi[@}{\@pyridinevi[r]}}
+\def\@pyridinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyridinevi' %
+   is based on `sixheterovi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterovi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}%end of \pyridinevi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrazinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrazinevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyrazinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrazinev[@}{\@pyrazinev[r]}}
+\def\@pyrazinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrazinev' %
+   is based on `sixheterov'.}\fi%
+\sixheterov[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}%end of \pyrazinev macro
+%the same formula with an alternative locant numbering
+\def\pyrazinevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrazinevi[@}{\@pyrazinevi[r]}}
+\def\@pyrazinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrazinevi' %
+   is based on `sixheterovi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterovi[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}%end of \pyrazinevi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrimidinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrimidinevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyrimidinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrimidinev[@}{\@pyrimidinev[r]}}
+\def\@pyrimidinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrimidinev' %
+   is based on `sixheterov'.}\fi%
+\sixheterov[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}%end of \pyrimidinev macro
+\def\pyrimidinevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrimidinevi[@}{\@pyrimidinevi[r]}}
+\def\@pyrimidinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrimidinevi' %
+   is based on `sixheterovi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterovi[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}%end of \pyrimidinevi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyridazinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyridazinevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyridazinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyridazinev[@}{\@pyridazinev[r]}}
+\def\@pyridazinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyridazinev' %
+   is based on `sixheterov'.}\fi%
+\sixheterov[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}%end of \pyridazinev macro
+\def\pyridazinevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyridazinevi[@}{\@pyridazinevi[r]}}
+\def\@pyridazinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyridazinev' %
+   is based on `sixheterovi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterovi[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}%end of \pyridazinevi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\triazinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\triazinevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\triazinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@triazinev[@}{\@triazinev[r]}}
+\def\@triazinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `triazinev' %
+   is based on `sixheterov'.}\fi%
+\sixheterov[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N}{#2}}%end of \triazinev macro
+\def\triazinevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@triazinevi[@}{\@triazinevi[r]}}
+\def\@triazinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `triazinevi' %
+   is based on `sixheterovi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterovi[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N}{#2}}%end of \triazinevi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Five-membered heterocycles}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a five-membered heterocycle 
+% is selected to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************
+% * fivehetero derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)       *
+% **************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%     4  _____  3
+%       |     |
+%       |     |
+%     5  *   *  2
+%          *
+%          1 <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveheterov| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fiveheterov(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `e' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus (or minus) at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fiveheterov{1==N}{1==H;2==F}
+%        \fiveheterov[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \fiveheterov[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fiveheterov| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/10/31}{Add: fused and spiro rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveheterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@heterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@@heterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fiveheterov}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveheterov{\@ifnextchar({\@five@heterov(@}{\@five@heterov(@)}}
+\def\@five@heterov(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@five@@heterov(#1)[@}%
+{\@five@@heterov(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@five@@heterov(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fiveheterov(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@fiveheterov(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@fiveheterov(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{c}{b}{f}{e}{a}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.01}{2002/4/30}{Replaced by \cs{ShiftPicEnv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%   % for 1 to 3
+\ylposition{#4}{10}{4}{7}{-1}%  % for 4 to 5
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){fiveheterov}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondhoriz}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondhoriz etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{e}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{d}% bond between 5 and 1 \@eee -> \skbondd etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r%
+\else\if\member a\relax \bondc%
+\else\if\member b\relax \bondb%
+\else\if\member c\relax \bondhoriz%
+\else\if\member d\relax \bonde%
+\else\if\member e\relax \bondd%
+\else\if\member A\relax%
+ \Put@oCircle(0,173){180}%aromatic circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else
+    \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fivev
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting heteroatoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%   % for 1 to 3
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{10}{4}{7}{-1}%  % for 4 to 5
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringv{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%   % for 1 to 3
+\setsixringv{#4}{10}{4}{7}{-1}%  % for 4 to 5
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \fiveheterov macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a five-membered heterocycle of inverse type 
+% is selected to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *****************************
+% * fivehetero derivatives    *
+% *  (vertical type, inverse) *
+% *****************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          1
+%          * 
+%     6  *   *  2
+%       |     |
+%       |_____|
+%     4         3
+%          *
+%        (0,0) <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveheterovi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fiveheterovi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus (or minus) at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fiveheterovi{1==N}{1==H;2==F}
+%        \fiveheterovi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \fiveheterovi[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fiveheterovi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveheterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@heterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@@heterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fiveheterovi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveheterovi{\@ifnextchar({\@five@heterovi(@}{\@five@heterovi(@)}}
+\def\@five@heterovi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@five@@heterovi(#1)[@}%
+{\@five@@heterovi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@five@@heterovi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fiveheterovi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@fiveheterovi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@fiveheterovi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.01}{2002/4/30}{Replaced by \cs{ShiftPicEnv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{b}{c}{e}{f}{d}% d -- dummy
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}%  % for 1 to 3
+\ylposition{#4}{1}{4}{7}{0}%  % for 4 to 5
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){fiveheterov}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondhorizi}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondhorizi etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{e}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{f}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r%
+\else\if\member a\relax \bonda%
+\else\if\member b\relax \bondb%
+\else\if\member c\relax \bondhorizi%
+\else\if\member d\relax \bonde%
+\else\if\member e\relax \bondf%
+\else\if\member A\relax%
+ \Put@oCircle(0,233){180}%aromatic circle
+\else
+    \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fivevi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting heteroatoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{0}{4}{0}%  % for 1 to 3
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{1}{4}{7}{0}%  % for 4 to 5
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringv{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}%  % for 1 to 3
+\setsixringv{#4}{1}{4}{7}{0}%  % for 4 to 5
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \fiveheterovi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Pyrrole derivatives of vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveheterov| can be used in the 
+% form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  Hence, the resulting commands for 
+% drawing a five-membered heterocyle with one or more nitrogen atoms 
+% have an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************************
+% * pyrrole derivatives  and others *
+% *  (vertical type)                *
+% ***********************************
+%
+%   \pyrrolev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrazolev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \imidazolev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoxazolev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \oxazolev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           none       :  mother nucleus
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \pyrrolev{1==H;2==F}
+%        \pyrrolev[]{1==H;2==F}
+%        \imidazolev[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \isoxazolev[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrrolev}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrazolev}
+% \begin{macro}{\imidazolev}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoxazolev}
+% \begin{macro}{\oxazolev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyrrolev{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrrolev[@}{\@pyrrolev[bd]}}
+\def\@pyrrolev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrrolev' %
+  is based on `fiveheterov'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterov[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\pyrazolev{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrazolev[@}{\@pyrazolev[bd]}}
+\def\@pyrazolev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrazolev' %
+  is based on `fiveheterov'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterov[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}
+\def\imidazolev{\@ifnextchar[{\@imidazolev[@}{\@imidazolev[bd]}}
+\def\@imidazolev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `imidazolev' %
+  is based on `fiveheterov'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterov[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}
+\def\isoxazolev{\@ifnextchar[{\@isoxazolev[@}{\@isoxazolev[bd]}}
+\def\@isoxazolev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoxazolev' %
+  is based on `fiveheterov'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterov[#1]{1==O;2==N}{#2}}
+\def\oxazolev{\@ifnextchar[{\@oxazolev[@}{\@oxazolev[bd]}}
+\def\@oxazolev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `oxazolev' %
+  is based on `fiveheterov'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterov[#1]{1==O;3==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\furanv}
+% \begin{macro}{\thiophenev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\furanv{\@ifnextchar[{\@furanv[@}{\@furanv[bd]}}
+\def\@furanv[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `furanv' %
+  is based on `fiveheterov'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterov[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\thiophenev{\@ifnextchar[{\@thiophenev[@}{\@thiophenev[bd]}}
+\def\@thiophenev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `thiophenev' %
+  is based on `fiveheterov'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterov[#1]{1==S}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Pyrrole derivatives of inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveheterovi| can be used in the 
+% form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  Hence, the resulting commands for 
+% drawing a five-membered heterocyle with one or more nitrogen atoms 
+% have an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************************
+% * pyrrole derivatives  and others *
+% *  (vertical type, inverse)       *
+% ***********************************
+%
+%   \pyrrolevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrazolevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \imidazolevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoxazolevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \oxazolevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           none       :  mother nucleus
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 6 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \pyrrolevi{1==H;2==F}
+%        \pyrrolevi[]{1==H;2==F}
+%        \imidazolevi[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \isoxazolevi[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrrolevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrazolevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\imidazolevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoxazolevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\oxazolevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyrrolevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrrolevi[@}{\@pyrrolevi[bd]}}
+\def\@pyrrolevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrrolevi' %
+  is based on `fiveheterovi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterovi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\pyrazolevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrazolevi[@}{\@pyrazolevi[bd]}}
+\def\@pyrazolevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrazolevi' %
+  is based on `fiveheterovi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterovi[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}
+\def\imidazolevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@imidazolevi[@}{\@imidazolevi[bd]}}
+\def\@imidazolevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `imidazolevi' %
+  is based on `fiveheterovi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterovi[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}
+\def\isoxazolevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@isoxazolevi[@}{\@isoxazolevi[bd]}}
+\def\@isoxazolevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoxazolevi' %
+  is based on `fiveheterovi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterovi[#1]{1==O;2==N}{#2}}
+\def\oxazolevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@oxazolevi[@}{\@oxazolevi[bd]}}
+\def\@oxazolevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `oxazolevi' %
+  is based on `fiveheterovi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterovi[#1]{1==O;3==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\furanvi}
+% \begin{macro}{\thiophenevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\furanvi{\@ifnextchar[{\@furanvi[@}{\@furanvi[bd]}}
+\def\@furanvi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `furanvi' %
+  is based on `fiveheterovi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterovi[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\thiophenevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@thiophenevi[@}{\@thiophenevi[bd]}}
+\def\@thiophenevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `thiophenevi' %
+  is based on `fiveheterovi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterovi[#1]{1==S}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Six-to-six fused heterocyles}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-to-six fused heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************
+% * decahetero derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)       *
+% **************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          8 (10)1
+%          *  8a *
+%     7  *   * *   *  2
+%       |     |     |
+%       |     |     |
+%     6  *   * *   *  3
+%          *  4a *
+%          5 (9) 4
+%          ^
+%          |
+%          the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decaheterov| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decaheterov(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `k' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to k, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $10$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  decahetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  decahetero (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  4,3-double bond      d    :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e    :  4a,5-double bond     f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,8-double bond
+%           i    :  8,8a-double bond     j    :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k    :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           A    :  aromatic circle      B    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 10)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 10 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 4a or 8b (n=4 or 8)
+%                        e.g. 4a==N (or 9==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             8a==N (or {{10}}==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 9 (4a position) and 10 (8a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to k: see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decaheterov{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \decaheterov[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decaheterov[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\decaheterov| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| several times. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Spiro rings and fused rings
+% \cs{test@vertix@sixv}, \cs{test@vertix@decav}, etc.}
+% \changes{v4.03b}{2006/9/5}{bug fix \cs{ggg} to \cs{gggA} etc. in \cs{test@vertix@sixv}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decaheterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@heterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@@heterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@decaheterov}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decaheterov{\@ifnextchar({\@deca@heterov(@}{\@deca@heterov(@)}}
+\def\@deca@heterov(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@deca@@heterov(#1)[@}%
+{\@deca@@heterov(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@deca@@heterov(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@decaheterov(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@decaheterov(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}%
+\def\@decaheterov(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{b}{c}{d}{e}{f}%
+\test@vertix@decav{#3}{g}{h}{i}{j}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylhetposition{#4}{0}{0}{5}{0}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylhetposition{#4}{-1}{3}{7}{0}% %substituents on 5 to 7
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylhetposition{#4}{-7}{0}{2}{0}% %substituent on 8
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{7}%   %9 %for 4a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-103}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-9}{1}%  %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1200,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){decaheterov}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{a}}%
+  % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbonda etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}}%
+  % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{c}}%
+  % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{d}}%
+  % bond between 4 and 4a \@ddd -> \skbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{k}{e}}%
+  % bond between 4a and 8a \@kkk -> \skbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{j}{f}}%
+  % bond between 8a and 1 \@jjj -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee \let\eee=\fff \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii \let\bbb=\jjj%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{i}{a}% bond between 8 and 8a \@iii -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{c}% bond between 5 and 4a \@eee -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{d}% bond between 5 and 6 \@fff -> \skbondd etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{g}{e}% bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{h}{f}% bond between 7 and 8 \@hhh -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bonda}% bond between 1 and 2
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 8a and 4a
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 8 and 7
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else\if\member l\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bonda}% bond between 1 and 2
+\else\if\member b\relax
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondb}% bond between 2 and 3
+\else\if\member c\relax
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondd}% bond between 4 and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii \let\ddd=\eee%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondc}% bond between 5 and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member f\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\eee \let\eee=\fff%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else\if\member g\relax%
+{\let\eee=\fff \let\fff=\gggA% 
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonde}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member h\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 8 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member i\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonda}% bond between 8 and 8a
+}%
+\else\if\member j\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondf}% bond between 1 and 8a
+}%
+\else\if\member k\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 8a and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member K\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bonde}% bond between 8a and 4a in the other ring
+}%
+\else\if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%               %circle
+\else\if\member B%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(342,203){240}%             %circle
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{8a}\def\aay{4a}\def\aaz{10}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%                  % plus charge etc.
+        \putratom{304}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{402}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{402}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{304}{68}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{68}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+%      \else\if\@@tmpa 10\relax%
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aaz\relax%1998/10/17
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+   \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@decav
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/11}{The 
+% \cs{iniflag} command is added to 5- and 8-substitution.}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+% \changes{v4.03b}{2006/9/5}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command, bugfixed}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms and spiro rings %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{0}{5}{0}%
+%   \if@aclip \global\@acliptrue\fi
+%   \if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+%   \if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+%   \if@clip \global\@cliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo%2001/06/20
+}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+{%
+%\developclipinfo%2001/06/20 %2006/9/5deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\iniflag%2000/11/11 by S. Fujita
+   \set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{-1}{3}{7}{0}%
+%   \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \global\@gcliptrue \fi%
+%   \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \global\@fcliptrue \fi%
+%   \@eclipfalse \if@clip \global\@ecliptrue \fi
+%
+   \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \@gcliptrue \fi%
+   \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+   \@eclipfalse \if@clip \@ecliptrue \fi
+   \@clipfalse%2006/9/5added
+%
+\storeclipinfo%2001/06/20
+}%substituents on 5 to 7
+}{%
+%\developclipinfo%2001/06/20 2006/9/5deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\iniflag%2000/11/11 by S. Fujita
+  \set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{-7}{0}{2}{0}%
+%%  \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \global\@hcliptrue \fi
+  \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \fi
+  \@aclipfalse%2006/9/5added
+\storeclipinfo%%2001/06/20
+%%====\clipinfo====%%%2006/9/5test
+}%%substituent on 8
+}{%
+%\developclipinfo%%2001/06/20 2006/9/5deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@fuse{#3}%
+%  \if@iclip \global\@icliptrue \fi
+%  \if@jclip \global\@jcliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo%%2001/06/20
+}% fused positions
+}%
+%====\clipinfo====%%2006/9/5test
+\developclipinfo%%2001/06/20
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+{%2006/9/5bugfix
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setsixringv{#4}{0}{0}{5}{0}}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+}%
+\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+{%
+ \@clipfalse \if@eclip \@cliptrue \fi%   %substituents on 5 to 7
+ \@eclipfalse \if@fclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@gclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{-1}{3}{7}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@aclipfalse \if@hclip \@acliptrue \fi%   %substituent on 8
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{-7}{0}{2}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \Put@Direct(171,103){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{7}}%   %9 %for 4a position
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+  \Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombond{#4}{-9}{1}}%  %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \decaheterov macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\clipdetection| command is used for the detection of 
+% clippings for a six-six ring.  In particular, the clippings 
+% at the fused positions are detected in the |\decaheterov| command, 
+% where the data are applied to the command 
+% |\ylatombondposition| (chemstr.dtx). 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/16}{Newly added command}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clipdetection}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\clipdetection{%
+% hetero atom on 1
+\ifx\aaa\empty\else%
+     \@acliptrue%
+\fi%
+% hetero atom on 2
+\ifx\bbb\empty\else%
+     \@bcliptrue%
+\fi%
+% hetero atom on 3
+\ifx\ccc\empty\else%
+     \@ccliptrue%
+\fi%
+% hetero atom on 4
+\ifx\ddd\empty\else%
+   \@cliptrue%
+\fi%
+% hetero atom on 4a
+{\let\eee=\iii%
+\ifx\eee\empty\else%
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+    \@icliptrue%
+    \storeclipinfo%2001/06/20
+\fi%
+}%
+\developclipinfo%2001/06/20
+% hetero atom on 8a
+{\let\fff=\jjj%
+\ifx\fff\empty\else%
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+    \@jcliptrue%
+    \storeclipinfo%2001/06/20
+\fi%
+}%
+\developclipinfo%2001/06/20
+% hetero atom on 5
+{\let\ddd=\eee%
+\ifx\ddd\empty\else
+%    \global\@ecliptrue%
+    \@ecliptrue%
+    \storeclipinfo%2001/06/20
+\fi%
+}%
+\developclipinfo%2001/06/20
+% hetero atom on 6
+{\let\eee=\fff%
+\ifx\eee\empty\else%
+%     \global\@fcliptrue%
+    \@fcliptrue%
+    \storeclipinfo%2001/06/20
+\fi%
+}%
+\developclipinfo%2001/06/20
+% hetero atom on 7
+{\let\fff=\gggA%
+\ifx\fff\empty\else%
+%     \global\@gcliptrue%
+     \@gcliptrue%
+     \storeclipinfo%2001/06/20
+\fi%
+}%
+\developclipinfo%2001/06/20
+% hetero atom on 8
+{\let\aaa=\hhh%
+\ifx\aaa\empty\else%
+%     \global\@hcliptrue%
+     \@hcliptrue%
+     \storeclipinfo%2001/06/20
+\fi%
+}%
+\developclipinfo%2001/06/20
+}% end \clipdetection
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylhetposition| is used in the |\decaheterov| command, 
+% giving the sift values for drawing a structure as a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/16}{Newly added command}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2012/03/25}{Bug fixed}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylhetposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylhetposition#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifnum#5<0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax\fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa>#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa<#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The flags |\@lyatrue| etc are not used in a revised edition. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \or
+    \ifx\aaa\empty
+     \ifx\hhh\empty% aaa and hhh are absent
+       \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-406}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+     \else% hhh is present
+       \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-442}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+     \fi
+    \else%aaa is present
+      \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-442}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\bbb\empty
+      \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+%      \def\@ylii{-513}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+    \else
+      \def\@ylii{-213}\def\@yli{-327}\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+%      \def\@ylii{-555}\def\@yli{-327}\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\ccc\empty
+      \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-103}\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+%      \def\@ylii{-513}\def\@yli{-103}\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+    \else
+      \def\@ylii{-213}\def\@yli{-79}\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+%      \def\@ylii{-555}\def\@yli{-79}\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\ddd\empty
+     \ifx\eee\empty% ddd and eee are absent
+       \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+      \else% eee present
+       \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{36}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+     \fi
+    \else% ddd present
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{36}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+    \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\eee\empty
+     \ifx\iii\empty
+      \ifx\fff\empty% eee, iii and fff are absent
+%        \def\@ylii{173}\def\@yli{-103}\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+        \def\@ylii{171}\def\@yli{-103}\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5 refined 2013/03/25
+      \else% fff is present 
+        \def\@ylii{213}\def\@yli{-79}\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+      \fi
+%     \else% iii is present; fused position => no action here
+%        \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-36}\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+     \fi
+    \else% eee is present
+%      \def\@ylii{213}\def\@yli{-79}\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+       \def\@ylii{171}\def\@yli{-103}\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5 bug fix 2013/03/25
+   \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\fff\empty
+     \ifx\jjj\empty
+      \ifx\gggA\empty% fff, jjj, and ggg are absent
+%        \def\@ylii{173}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6 
+        \def\@ylii{171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6 refined 2013/03/25
+      \else%ggg is present
+        \def\@ylii{213}\def\@yli{-327}\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+      \fi
+%     \else%jjj is present; fused position => no action here
+%       \def\@ylii{213}\def\@yli{-327}\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+     \fi
+    \else%fff is present
+      \def\@ylii{213}\def\@yli{-327}\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+    \fi%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-to-six fused heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************
+% * decahetero derivatives         *
+% *  (vertical type, inverse type) *
+% **********************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          5 (9) 4
+%          *  4a *
+%     6  *   * *   *  3
+%       |     |     |
+%       |     |     |
+%     7  *   * *   *  2
+%          *  8a *
+%          8 (10)1
+%          ^
+%          |
+%          the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decaheterovi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decaheterovi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `k' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to k, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The options `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles in two rings. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $10$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}  
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  decahetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  decahetero (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  4,3-double bond      d    :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e    :  4a,5-double bond     f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,8-double bond
+%           i    :  8,8a-double bond     j    :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k    :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K    :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle      B    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 10)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 10 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 4a or 8b (n=4 or 8)
+%                        e.g. 4a==N (or 9==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             8a==N (or {{10}}==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 9 (4a position) and 10 (8a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to k: see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decaheterovi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \decaheterovi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decaheterovi[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\decaheterovi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterovi|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| several times. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Spiro rings and fused rings: 
+% \cs{test@vertix@decavi}, etc.}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command, etc.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decaheterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@heterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@@heterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@decaheterovi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decaheterovi{\@ifnextchar({\@deca@heterovi(@}{\@deca@heterovi(@)}}
+\def\@deca@heterovi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@deca@@heterovi(#1)[@}%
+{\@deca@@heterovi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@deca@@heterovi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@decaheterovi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@decaheterovi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@decaheterovi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+%%\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{c}{b}{a}{h}{g}%
+%%\test@vertix@decav{#3}{f}{e}{i}{j}{@}{@}%{i}{j} fixed
+\test@vertix@decavi{#3}%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylhetposition{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylhetposition{#4}{12}{3}{7}{-1}% %substituents on 6 to 8
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylhetposition{#4}{-4}{0}{2}{0}% %substituent on 5
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \ylatombondposition{#4}{-9}{7}%  %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-103}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{1}%   %9 for 4a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1200,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){decaheterovi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{a}}%
+  % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbonda etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}}%
+  % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{c}}%
+  % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{j}{d}}%
+  % bond between 4 and 4a \@ddd -> \skbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{k}{e}}%
+  % bond between 4a and 8a \@kkk -> \skbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{f}}%
+  % bond between 8a and 1 \@jjj -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{a}% bond between 8 and 8a \@eee -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{i}{c}% bond between 5 and 4a \@iii -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{h}{d}% bond between 5 and 6 \@hhh -> \skbondd etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{g}{e}% bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{f}% bond between 7 and 8 \@fff -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bonda}% bond between 1 and 2
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 8a and 4a
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 8 and 7
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else\if\member l\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+\else\if\member b\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondb}% bond between 2 and 3
+\else\if\member c\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bonda}% bond between 1 and 2
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondf}% bond between 1 and 8a
+}%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonda}% bond between 8 and 8a
+}%
+\else\if\member f\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 8 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member g\relax%
+{\let\eee=\fff \let\fff=\gggA% 
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonde}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member h\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\eee \let\eee=\fff%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else\if\member i\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii \let\ddd=\eee%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondc}% bond between 5 and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member j\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondd}% bond between 4 and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member k\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 8a and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member K\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bonde}% bond between 8a and 4a in the other ring
+}%
+\else\if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%               %circle
+\else\if\member B%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(342,203){240}%             %circle
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{4a}\def\aay{8a}\def\aaz{10}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 4\relax%                  % plus charge etc.
+        \putratom{304}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{402}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{402}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{304}{68}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aaz\relax% 1998/10/17 by S. Fujita
+%      \else\if\@@tmpa 10\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{68}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+   \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@decavi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms and spiro rings %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@tmpclipfalse
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{12}{3}{7}{-1}%
+% \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \global\@gcliptrue \fi%
+% \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \global\@fcliptrue \fi%      
+% \@eclipfalse \if@clip \global\@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \@gcliptrue \fi%%bug fix 2013/03/25
+ \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \@fcliptrue \fi%%bug fix 2013/03/25      
+ \@eclipfalse \if@clip \@ecliptrue \@clipfalse \fi%%bug fix 2013/03/25
+\storeclipinfo
+}%substituents on 6 to 8
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{-4}{0}{2}{0}%
+% \@aclipfalse \if@aclip \global\@hcliptrue \fi%
+% \@aclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \fi%
+ \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \@aclipfalse\fi%bug fix 2013/03/25
+ \storeclipinfo
+}%%substituent on 5
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@decafusevi{#3}%
+  \@tmpclipfalse
+%  \if@iclip \global\@tmpcliptrue \fi
+%  \if@jclip \global\@icliptrue \fi
+%  \if@tmpclip \global\@jcliptrue \fi
+  \if@iclip \@tmpcliptrue \fi
+  \if@jclip \@icliptrue \fi
+  \if@tmpclip \@jcliptrue \fi
+  \storeclipinfo
+}% fused positions
+\developclipinfo
+%to be done after all
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%
+%   \if@aclip \global\@acliptrue\fi
+%   \if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+%   \if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+%   \if@clip \global\@cliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setsixringv{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+{\@clipfalse \if@eclip \@cliptrue \fi%      %substituents on 6 to 8
+ \@eclipfalse \if@fclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@gclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{12}{3}{7}{-1}}%
+}%
+{\@aclipfalse \if@hclip \@acliptrue \fi%    %substituent on 5
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{-4}{0}{2}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \Put@Direct(171,103){\setatombond{#4}{-9}{7}}%    %10 for 8a position
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+  \Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{1}}%   %9 for 4a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \decaheterovi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\test@vertix@decavi| is used to test the presence of 
+% a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex of the 
+% decaheterovi nucleus. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@tmpclip}
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix@decavi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@tmpclip \@tmpclipfalse
+\def\test@vertix@decavi#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or%
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ddd{}\else\def\ddd{@}\fi
+ \or%2
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ccc{}\else\def\ccc{@}\fi
+ \or%3
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\bbb{}\else\def\bbb{@}\fi
+ \or%
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \def\jjj{@}%4a
+   \else\if\@tmpb s%
+     \def\aaa{}%4
+   \else\if\@tmpb h%
+     \def\aaa{@}%4
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \def\aaa{@}%4
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \or%5
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\hhh{}\else\def\hhh{@}\fi
+ \or%6
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\gggA{}\else\def\gggA{@}\fi
+ \or%7
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\fff{}\else\def\fff{@}\fi
+ \or%
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \xdef\iii{@}%8a
+   \else\if\@tmpb s%
+     \xdef\eee{}%8s
+   \else\if\@tmpb h%
+     \xdef\eee{@}%8h
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \xdef\eee{@}%8
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\or%9 (= 4a)
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\jjj{}\else\def\jjj{@}\fi
+\or%10 (= 8a)
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\iii{}\else\def\iii{@}\fi
+\fi\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@vrtx@decafusevi| is used to set 
+% a hetero atom or on a vertex of a bridgehead location.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@decafusevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@decafusevi#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa\or\or\or
+ \or%%%%4
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+ \or\or\or
+ \or%8
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+\or%9 (= 4a)
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+\or%10 (= 8a)
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@decafusevi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@decavi| is used to set 
+% a fused ring or on an edge of the decaheterovi nucleus. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decavi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@decavi{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `d'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `D'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `e'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `E'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `i'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `I'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `j'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `J'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa k%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `k'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa K%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `K'}%
+      \fi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@decavi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-bottom type}
+% The macro |\decaheterovb| is used for drawing six-six heterocyclic 
+% derivatives of vertical-bottom type (numbering from the bottom 
+% to the left-upper part). 
+% The word ``vertical'' means that each benzene ring is a vertical type.  
+% The word ``bottom'' means that the benzene ring with young locant numbers 
+% is located at the bottom. 
+% The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are drawn directly, 
+% while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by useing 
+% the inner macro |\setsixringv|. 
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-to-six fused heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/16}{Newly added command}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command, etc.}
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***************************
+% * decahetro derivatives   *
+% *  (vertical bottom type) *
+% ***************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          7 
+%          *  
+%     6  *   * 8
+%       |     |
+%       |     | 0G (4a)
+%     5  *   * *
+%  0F(4a)  *     * 1
+%          |     |
+%          |     |
+%        4  *   *  2
+%             *
+%             3
+%             ^
+%             |
+%            the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decaheterovb| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decaheterovb(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `k' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to k, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $10$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  decahetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  decahetero (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  4,3-double bond      d    :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e    :  4a,5-double bond     f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,8-double bond
+%           i    :  8,8a-double bond     j    :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k    :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K    :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle      B    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 10)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 10 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 4a or 8b (n=4 or 8)
+%                        e.g. 4a==N (or 9==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             8a==N (or {{10}}==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 9 (4a position) and 10 (8a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to k: see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decaheterovb{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \decaheterovb[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decaheterovb[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\decaheterovb| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| several times. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Spiro rings and fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decaheterovb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@heterovb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@@heterovb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@decaheterovb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decaheterovb{\@ifnextchar({\@deca@heterovb(@}{\@deca@heterovb(@)}}
+\def\@deca@heterovb(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@deca@@heterovb(#1)[@}%
+{\@deca@@heterovb(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@deca@@heterovb(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@decaheterovb(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@decaheterovb(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@decaheterovb(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\test@vertix@decavb{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\let\eee=\ddd\let\ddd=\ccc
+\let\ccc=\bbb\let\bbb=\aaa
+\ylhetpositionb{#4}{1}{1}{6}{0}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylhetpositionb{#4}{0}{4}{7}{0}% %substituents on 5 to 6
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\else
+{\let\aaa=\gggA \let\bbb=\hhh
+\ylhetpositionb{#4}{-6}{0}{3}{0}% %substituents on 7 to 8
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{9}%   %9 %for 4a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-9}{3}%  %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{-406}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1000,1200)(-550,-240){decaheterob}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{\let\eee=\ddd\let\ddd=\ccc
+ \let\ccc=\bbb\let\bbb=\aaa
+ \let\aaa=\jjj \let\fff=\iii
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{j}{a}% bond between 8a and 1 \@jjj -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{b}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{c}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{d}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondd etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{e}% bond between 4 and 4a \@ddd -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{k}{f}% bond between 4a and 8a \@kkk -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\gggA\let\bbb=\hhh\let\ccc=\jjj\let\ddd=\iii
+\Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{h}{a}}%
+  % bond between 7 and 8 \@hhh -> \skbonda etc
+\Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{i}{b}}%
+  % bond between 8 and 8a \@iii -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{d}}%
+  % bond between 4a and 5 \@eee -> \skbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{e}}%
+  % bond between 5 and 6 \@fff -> \skbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{g}{f}}%
+  % bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\gggA\let\bbb=\hhh\let\ccc=\jjj\let\ddd=\iii
+ \Put@Direct(-171,303){\bonda}% bond between 7 and 8
+ \Put@Direct(-171,303){\bonde}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+{\let\eee=\ddd\let\ddd=\ccc
+ \let\ccc=\bbb\let\bbb=\aaa
+ \let\aaa=\jjj \let\fff=\iii
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 1 and 2
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 3 and 4
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 4a and 4b
+}%
+\else\if\member l\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\bbb\let\bbb=\aaa
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 1 and 2
+}%
+\else\if\member b\relax
+{\let\ddd=\ccc\let\ccc=\bbb
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondc}% bond between 2 and 3
+}%
+\else\if\member c\relax
+{\let\eee=\ddd\let\ddd=\ccc
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 3 and 4
+}%
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+{\let\fff=\eee\let\eee=\ddd
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonde}% bond between 4 and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(-171,303){\bondd}% bond between 5 and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member f\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(-171,303){\bonde}% bond between 5 and 6
+\else\if\member g\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\gggA
+ \Put@Direct(-171,303){\bondf}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member h\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\gggA \let\bbb=\hhh%
+ \Put@Direct(-171,303){\bonda}% bond between 8 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member i\relax%
+{\let\bbb=\hhh \let\ccc=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(-171,303){\bondb}% bond between 8 and 8a
+}%
+\else\if\member j\relax%
+{\let\bbb=\aaa\let\aaa=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonda}% bond between 1 and 8a
+}%
+\else\if\member k\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\jjj\let\fff=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 8a and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member K\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\jjj\let\ddd=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(-171,303){\bondc}% bond between 8a and 4a in the other ring
+}%
+\else\if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(-171,506){240}%               %circle
+\else\if\member B%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%             %circle
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{8a}\def\aay{4a}\def\aaz{10}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%                  % plus charge etc.
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{68}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-120}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putlatom{-209}{431}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putlatom{-209}{546}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putratom{-209}{585}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putratom{-111}{546}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aaz\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax%
+        \putratom{-209}{371}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+   \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@decavb
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/11}{The 
+% \cs{iniflag} command is added to 5- and 8-substitution.}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/23}{bug fix subs 7 to 8.}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom
+\Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{4}{7}{0}%
+%\if@eclip \global\@ecliptrue\fi%
+%\if@fclip \global\@fcliptrue\fi%
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 5 to 6
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-171,303){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{-6}{0}{3}{0}%
+% \@gclipfalse \if@aclip \global\@gcliptrue \fi%
+% \@hclipfalse \if@bclip \global\@hcliptrue \fi%
+ \@gclipfalse \if@aclip \@gcliptrue \fi%
+% \@hclipfalse \if@bclip \@hcliptrue \fi%
+ \@hclipfalse \if@bclip \@hcliptrue \@bclipfalse \fi%bugfix 2013/03/23
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 7 to 8
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@decafusevb{#3}%
+%  \if@iclip \global\@icliptrue \fi
+%  \if@jclip \global\@jcliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%9 %for 4a position, %10 for 8a position
+\developclipinfo
+%to be done after all
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\iniflag%2000/11/11 by S. Fujita
+\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{1}{1}{6}{0}%
+%\@aclipfalse \if@bclip \global\@acliptrue \fi%
+%\@bclipfalse \if@cclip \global\@bcliptrue \fi%
+%\@cclipfalse \if@clip \global\@ccliptrue \fi%
+%\@clipfalse \if@eclip \global\@cliptrue \fi%
+\@aclipfalse \if@bclip \@acliptrue \fi%
+\@bclipfalse \if@cclip \@bcliptrue \fi%
+\@cclipfalse \if@clip \@ccliptrue \fi%
+\@clipfalse \if@eclip \@cliptrue \fi%
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+{%
+\@eclipfalse \if@clip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+\@clipfalse \if@cclip \@cliptrue \fi%
+\@cclipfalse \if@bclip \@ccliptrue \fi%
+\@bclipfalse \if@aclip \@bcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{1}{1}{6}{0}}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+}%
+\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+{%
+\Put@Direct(-171,303){\setsixringv{#4}{0}{4}{7}{0}}% %substituents on 5 to 6
+}%
+{%
+ \@aclipfalse \if@gclip \@acliptrue \fi%
+ \@bclipfalse \if@hclip \@bcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(-171,303){\setsixringv{#4}{-6}{0}{3}{0}}% %substituents on 7 to 8
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \Put@Direct(-171,303){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{9}}%   %9 %for 4a position
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+  \Put@Direct(0,406){\setatombond{#4}{-9}{3}}%  %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \decaheterovb macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylhetpositionb| is used in the |\decaheterovb| command, 
+% giving the sift values for drawing a structure as a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/16}{Newly added command}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylhetpositionb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylhetpositionb#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifnum#5<0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax\fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa>#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa<#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+ \or
+    \ifx\aaa\empty%
+     \ifx\gggA\empty% aaa and ggg are absent
+       \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-406}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+     \else% ggg is present
+       \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-442}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+     \fi
+    \else%aaa is present
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-442}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\bbb\empty
+     \ifx\hhh\empty% aaa and hhh are absent
+      \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-303}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+     \else%hhh is present
+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+     \fi
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+    \fi
+ \or\ifx\ccc\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+    \fi
+ \or
+   \ifx\ddd\empty
+       \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+    \else% ddd present
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{36}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+    \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\eee\empty
+       \gdef\@ylii{173}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+    \else% eee is present
+       \gdef\@ylii{223}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+   \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\fff\empty
+       \gdef\@ylii{173}\gdef\@yli{-303}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+    \else%fff is present
+      \gdef\@ylii{213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+    \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\test@vertix@decavb| determines the presence of 
+% a hetro atom or a spriro ring at each of the vertices. 
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Added: spiro rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix@decavb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vertix@decavb#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or% \xdef\aaa{\@memberb}%1
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\aaa{}\else\def\aaa{@}\fi
+ \or% \xdef\bbb{\@memberb}%2
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\bbb{}\else\def\bbb{@}\fi
+ \or% \xdef\ccc{\@memberb}%3
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ccc{}\else\def\ccc{@}\fi
+ \or%
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \def\iii{@}%4a
+   \else\if\@tmpb s%
+     \def\ddd{}%4
+   \else\if\@tmpb h%
+     \def\ddd{@}%4
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \def\ddd{@}%4
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \or% \xdef\eee{\@memberb}%5
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\eee{}\else\def\eee{@}\fi
+ \or% \xdef\fff{\@memberb}%6
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\fff{}\else\def\fff{@}\fi
+ \or% \xdef\gggA{\@memberb}%7
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\gggA{}\else\def\gggA{@}\fi
+ \or%
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \def\jjj{@}%8a
+   \else\if\@tmpb s%
+     \def\hhh{}%8
+   \else\if\@tmpb h%
+     \def\hhh{@}%4
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \def\hhh{@}%4
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\or% \xdef\iii{\@memberb}%9 (= 4a)
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\iii{}\else\def\iii{@}\fi
+\or% \xdef\jjj{\@memberb}%10 (= 8a)
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\jjj{}\else\def\jjj{@}\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \test@vertix@decavb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@vrtx@decafusevb| typesets a hetero atom 
+% at each fused position. 
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Added: spiro rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{\cs{global} omitted}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@decafusevb}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@decafusevb#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa\or\or\or
+ \or%%%%4
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{-135}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+ \or\or\or
+ \or%8
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putratom{-31}{356}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+\or%9 (= 4a)
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{-135}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+\or%10 (= 8a)
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putratom{-31}{356}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@decafusevb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical-top type}
+%
+% The macro |\decaheterovt| is used for drawing six-to-six fused derivatives 
+% of vertical-bottom type (numbering from the top to the left-down part). 
+% The word ``vertical'' means that each benzene ring is a vertical type.  
+% The word ``top'' means that the benzene ring with young locant numbers 
+% is located at the top. 
+% The skeleton and endocyclic double bonds are drawn directly, 
+% while substituents and exocyclic bonds are placed by useing 
+% the inner macro |\setsixringv|. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/18}{Newly added command}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command, etc.}
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * decaheterovt derivatives *
+% *  (vertical-top type)     *
+% ****************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                     2
+%                     *  
+%                1  *   * 3
+%                  |     |
+%                  |     | 
+%         0G (8a)   *   * 4
+%             8   *   * 0F(4a)
+%                |     | 
+%                |     |
+%              7  *   *  5
+%                   *
+%                   6
+%                   ^
+%                   |
+%                   the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decaheterovt| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decaheterovt(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `k' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to k, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $10$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  decahetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  decahetero (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  4,3-double bond      d    :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e    :  4a,5-double bond     f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,8-double bond
+%           i    :  8,8a-double bond     j    :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k    :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K    :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle      B    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 10)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 10 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 4a or 8b (n=4 or 8)
+%                        e.g. 4a==N (or 9==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             8a==N (or {{10}}==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 9 (4a position) and 10 (8a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to k: see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decaheterovt{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \decaheterovt[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decaheterovt[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\decaheterovt| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| several times. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/10/31}{Add: Spiro and fused rings}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/23}{Bug fix: omit vacant at 1 position}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decaheterovt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@heterovt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@@heterovt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@decaheterovt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decaheterovt{\@ifnextchar({\@deca@heterovt(@}{\@deca@heterovt(@)}}
+\def\@deca@heterovt(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@deca@@heterovt(#1)[@}%
+{\@deca@@heterovt(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@deca@@heterovt(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@decaheterovt(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@decaheterovt(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@decaheterovt(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\test@vertix@decavb{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\let\fff=\aaa
+\ylhetpositiont{#4}{5}{5}{7}{0}% %substituent on 1
+}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\else
+{\let\aaa=\bbb\let\bbb=\ccc\let\ccc=\ddd
+\ylhetpositiont{#4}{-1}{0}{4}{0}% %substituents on 2 to 4
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\else
+{\let\ccc=\eee\let\ddd=\fff
+\let\eee=\gggA\let\fff=\hhh
+\ylhetpositiont{#4}{-2}{2}{7}{0}% %substituents on 5 to 8
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{5}%   %9 %for 4a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-9}{11}%  %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{-406}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1200,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){decaheterovt}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{%
+ \let\fff=\aaa \let\aaa=\bbb \let\bbb=\ccc
+ \let\ccc=\ddd \let\ddd=\iii \let\eee=\jjj
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{a}}%
+  % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbonda etc
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{b}}%
+  % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{c}}%
+  % bond between 4 and 4a \@ddd -> \skbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{k}{d}}%
+  % bond between 4a and 8a \@kkk -> \skbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{j}{e}}%
+  % bond between 8a and 1 \@jjj -> \skbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{f}}%
+  % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+{%
+ \let\aaa=\jjj\let\bbb=\iii
+ \let\ccc=\eee\let\ddd=\fff
+ \let\eee=\gggA\let\fff=\hhh
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{b}% bond between 4a and 5 \@eee -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{c}% bond between 5 and 6 \@fff -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{g}{d}% bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \skbondd etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{h}{e}% bond between 7 and 8 \@hhh -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{i}{f}% bond between 8 and 8a \@iii -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{%
+ \let\ccc=\eee\let\ddd=\fff\let\eee=\gggA\let\fff=\gggA
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondc}% bond between 7 and 8
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonde}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+{%
+ \let\fff=\aaa\let\aaa=\bbb
+ \let\bbb=\ccc\let\ccc=\ddd
+ \let\ddd=\iii\let\eee=\jjj
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\bondf}% bond between 1 and 2
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\bondb}% bond between 3 and 4
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\bondd}% bond between 4a and 8a
+}%
+\else\if\member l\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax%
+{\let\fff=\aaa\let\aaa=\bbb
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\bondf}% bond between 1 and 2
+}%
+\else\if\member b\relax
+{\let\aaa=\bbb\let\bbb=\ccc
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\bonda}% bond between 2 and 3
+}%
+\else\if\member c\relax
+{\let\bbb=\ccc\let\ccc=\ddd
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\bondb}% bond between 3 and 4
+}%
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\ddd\let\ddd=\eee
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\bondc}% bond between 4 and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\eee\let\bbb=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 5 and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member f\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\eee\let\ddd=\fff
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondc}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else\if\member g\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\fff\let\eee=\gggA
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member h\relax%
+{\let\eee=\gggA \let\fff=\hhh%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonde}% bond between 8 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member i\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\jjj \let\fff=\hhh%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 8 and 8a
+}%
+\else\if\member j\relax%
+{\let\fff=\aaa\let\eee=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\bonde}% bond between 1 and 8a
+}%
+\else\if\member k\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\jjj\let\bbb=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonda}% bond between 8a and 4a
+}%
+\else\if\member K\relax%
+{\let\eee=\jjj\let\ddd=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\bondd}% bond between 8a and 4a in the other ring
+}%
+\else\if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(171,506){240}%               %circle
+\else\if\member B%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%             %circle
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{8a}\def\aay{4a}\def\aaz{10}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%                  % plus charge etc.
+        \putlatom{111}{546}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putlatom{209}{585}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{209}{546}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{209}{431}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{68}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putratom{-120}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aaz\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+  \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@decavt
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{-2}{2}{7}{0}%
+% \@hclipfalse \if@fclip \global\@hcliptrue \fi%
+% \@gclipfalse \if@eclip \global\@gcliptrue \fi%
+% \@fclipfalse \if@clip \global\@fcliptrue \fi%
+% \@eclipfalse \if@cclip \global\@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@hclipfalse \if@fclip \@hcliptrue \fi%
+ \@gclipfalse \if@eclip \@gcliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@clip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+ \@eclipfalse \if@cclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 5 to 8
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@decafusevt{#3}%
+%  \if@iclip \global\@icliptrue \fi
+%  \if@jclip \global\@jcliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%9 %for 4a position, %10 for 8a position
+\developclipinfo
+%to be done after all (exept aclip)
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{-1}{0}{4}{0}%
+%\@clipfalse \if@cclip \global\@cliptrue \fi%
+%\@cclipfalse \if@bclip \global\@ccliptrue \fi%
+%\@bclipfalse \if@aclip \global\@bcliptrue \fi%
+\@clipfalse \if@cclip \@cliptrue \fi%
+\@cclipfalse \if@bclip \@ccliptrue \fi%
+%\@bclipfalse \if@aclip \@bcliptrue \fi%bug fix 2013/03/23
+\@bclipfalse \if@aclip \@bcliptrue \@aclipfalse \fi%
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 2 to 4
+\developclipinfo
+{%
+\@fclipfalse%locally cancelled 1999/2/15 by Shinsaku Fujita
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{5}{5}{7}{0}%
+%\@aclipfalse \if@fclip \global\@acliptrue \fi%
+\@aclipfalse \if@fclip \@acliptrue \fi%
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituent on 1
+\developclipinfo
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+{%
+\@fclipfalse \if@aclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\setsixringv{#4}{5}{5}{7}{0}}% %substituent on 1
+}%
+\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+{%
+\@aclipfalse \if@bclip \@acliptrue \fi%
+\@bclipfalse \if@cclip \@bcliptrue \fi%
+\@cclipfalse \if@clip \@ccliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(171,303){\setsixringv{#4}{-1}{0}{4}{0}}% %substituents on 2 to 4
+}%
+{%
+ \@cclipfalse \if@eclip \@ccliptrue \fi%
+ \@clipfalse \if@fclip \@cliptrue \fi%
+ \@eclipfalse \if@gclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@hclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{-2}{2}{7}{0}}% %substituents on 5 to 8
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{5}}%   %9 %for 4a position
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+  \Put@Direct(0,406){\setatombond{#4}{-9}{11}}%  %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \decaheterovt macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylhetpositiont| is used in the |\decaheterovt| command, 
+% giving the sift values for drawing a structure as a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/18}{Newly added command}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylhetpositiont}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylhetpositiont#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifnum#5<0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax\fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa>#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa<#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+ \or
+    \ifx\aaa\empty%
+     \ifx\bbb\empty% aaa and bbb are absent
+       \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-406}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+     \else% bbb is present
+       \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-442}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+     \fi
+    \else%aaa is present
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-442}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\bbb\empty
+     \ifx\ccc\empty% aaa and ccc are absent
+      \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-303}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+     \else%ccc is present
+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+     \fi
+    \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+    \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\ccc\empty
+     \ifx\ddd\empty
+      \ifx\eee\empty% ccc, ddd, eee are absent
+       \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue%subst. on 3
+      \else%eee is present 
+       \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+      \fi
+     \else%ddd is present
+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+     \fi
+    \else%ccc is present
+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+    \fi
+ \or
+   \ifx\ddd\empty
+     \ifx\fff\empty%ddd and fff are absent
+       \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+     \else%fff present
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{36}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+     \fi
+    \else% ddd present
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{36}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+    \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\eee\empty
+     \ifx\gggA\empty%eee and ggg are absent
+       \gdef\@ylii{173}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+     \else% ggg is present
+       \gdef\@ylii{223}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+     \fi
+    \else% eee is present
+       \gdef\@ylii{223}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+    \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\fff\empty
+     \ifx\hhh\empty%fff and hhh are absent
+       \gdef\@ylii{173}\gdef\@yli{-303}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+     \else%hhh is present
+      \gdef\@ylii{213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+     \fi
+    \else%fff is present
+      \gdef\@ylii{213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+    \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@vrtx@decafusevt| is used to typeset a hetero 
+% atom at each fused vertex (4a or 8a) of a decaheterovt ring. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@decafusevt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@decafusevt#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa\or\or\or
+ \or%%%%4
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \global\@icliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putratom{135}{280}{\@memberb}% % right type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+ \or\or\or
+ \or%8
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{31}{356}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+\or%9 (= 4a)
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putratom{135}{280}{\@memberb}% % right type
+\or%10 (= 8a)
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{31}{356}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@decafusevt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Short-cut commands for fused heterocycles}
+%
+% The macros |\decaheterov|, |\decaheterovb|, and 
+% |\decaheterovt| can be used in the form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  
+% Hence, the resulting commands for drawing a fused heterocyle 
+% with one or more nitrogen atoms have an argument |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************************************
+% * heterocycles having two fused six-membered rings *
+% *  (vertical type)                                 *
+% ****************************************************
+%
+%   \quinolinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinolinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinolinevb[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinolinevt[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \isoquinolinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoquinolinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoquinolinevb[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoquinolinevt[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \quinoxalinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinoxalinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinoxalinevb[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinoxalinevt[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \quinazolinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinazolinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinazolinevb[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinazolinevt[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \cinnolinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \cinnolinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \cinnolinevb[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \cinnolinevt[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \pteridinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pteridinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pteridinevb[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pteridinevt[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected 
+% from a to k (K), each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The optiona `A' and `B' typeset aromatic circles. 
+% The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $10$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  decahetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  decahetero (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  4,3-double bond      d    :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e    :  4a,5-double bond     f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,8-double bond
+%           i    :  8,8a-double bond     j    :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k    :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K    :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle      B    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}     :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 10)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 9 (4a position) and 10 (8a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \quinolinev{3==Cl;2==F}
+%        \quinolinev{3==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\quinolinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinolinevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinolinevb}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinolinevt}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/18}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{quinolinevb} and \cs{quinolinevt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\quinolinev{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinolinev[@}{\@quinolinev[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinolinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinolinev' %
+  is based on `decaheterov'.}\fi%
+\decaheterov[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\quinolinevi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinolinevi[@}{\@quinolinevi[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinolinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinolinevi' %
+ is based on `decaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\quinolinevb{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinolinevb[@}{\@quinolinevb[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinolinevb[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinolinevb' %
+ is based on `decaheterovb'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovb[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\quinolinevt{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinolinevt[@}{\@quinolinevt[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinolinevt[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinolinevt' %
+ is based on `decaheterovt'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovt[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\isoquinolinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoquinolinevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoquinolinevb}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoquinolinevt}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/18}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{isoquinolinevb} and \cs{isoquinolinevt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\isoquinolinev{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@isoquinolinev[@}{\@isoquinolinev[acfhk]}}
+\def\@isoquinolinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoquinolinev' %
+ is based on `decaheterov'.}\fi%
+\decaheterov[#1]{2==N}{#2}}
+\def\isoquinolinevi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@isoquinolinevi[@}{\@isoquinolinevi[acfhk]}}
+\def\@isoquinolinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoquinolinevi' %
+ is based on `decaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovi[#1]{2==N}{#2}}%
+\def\isoquinolinevb{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@isoquinolinevb[@}{\@isoquinolinevb[acfhk]}}
+\def\@isoquinolinevb[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoquinolinevb' %
+ is based on `decaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovb[#1]{2==N}{#2}}%
+\def\isoquinolinevt{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@isoquinolinevt[@}{\@isoquinolinevt[acfhk]}}
+\def\@isoquinolinevt[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoquinolinevt' %
+ is based on `decaheterovt'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovt[#1]{2==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\quinoxalinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinoxalinevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinoxalinevb}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinoxalinevt}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/18}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{quinoxalinevb} and \cs{quinoxalinevt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\quinoxalinev{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinoxalinev[@}{\@quinoxalinev[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinoxalinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinoxalinev' %
+ is based on `decaheterov'.}\fi%
+\decaheterov[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}
+\def\quinoxalinevi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinoxalinevi[@}{\@quinoxalinevi[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinoxalinevi[#1]#2{%but v--->vi 2013/03/22
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinoxalinevi' %
+ is based on `decaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovi[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}
+\def\quinoxalinevb{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinoxalinevb[@}{\@quinoxalinevb[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinoxalinevb[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinoxalinevb' %
+ is based on `decaheterovb'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovb[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}
+\def\quinoxalinevt{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinoxalinevt[@}{\@quinoxalinevt[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinoxalinevt[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinoxalinevt' %
+ is based on `decaheterovt'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovt[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\quinazolinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinazolinevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinazolinevb}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinazolinevt}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/18}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{quinazolinevb} and \cs{quinazolinevt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\quinazolinev{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinazolinev[@}{\@quinazolinev[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinazolinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinazolinev' %
+ is based on `decaheterov'.}\fi%
+\decaheterov[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}
+\def\quinazolinevi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinazolinevi[@}{\@quinazolinevi[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinazolinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinazolinevi' %
+ is based on `decaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovi[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}
+\def\quinazolinevb{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinazolinevb[@}{\@quinazolinevb[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinazolinevb[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinazolinevb' %
+ is based on `decaheterovb'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovb[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}
+\def\quinazolinevt{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinazolinevt[@}{\@quinazolinevt[acfhk]}}
+\def\@quinazolinevt[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinazolinevt' %
+ is based on `decaheterovt'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovt[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cinnolinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\cinnolinevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\cinnolinevb}
+% \begin{macro}{\cinnolinevt}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/18}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{cinnolinevb} and \cs{cinnolinevt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cinnolinev{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@cinnolinev[@}{\@cinnolinev[acfhk]}}
+\def\@cinnolinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cinnolinev' %
+ is based on `decaheterov'.}\fi%
+\decaheterov[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}
+\def\cinnolinevi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@cinnolinevi[@}{\@cinnolinevi[acfhk]}}
+\def\@cinnolinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cinnolinevi' %
+ is based on `decaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovi[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}
+\def\cinnolinevb{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@cinnolinevb[@}{\@cinnolinevb[acfhk]}}
+\def\@cinnolinevb[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cinnolinevb' %
+ is based on `decaheterovb'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovb[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}
+\def\cinnolinevt{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@cinnolinevt[@}{\@cinnolinevt[acfhk]}}
+\def\@cinnolinevt[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cinnolinevt' %
+ is based on `decaheterovt'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovt[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pteridinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\pteridinevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\pteridinevb}
+% \begin{macro}{\pteridinevt}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/18}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{pteridinevb} and \cs{pteridinevt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pteridinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@pteridinev[@}{\@pteridinev[acfhk]}}
+\def\@pteridinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pteridinev' %
+ is based on `decaheterov'.}\fi%
+\decaheterov[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;8==N}{#2}}
+\def\pteridinevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pteridinevi[@}{\@pteridinevi[acfhk]}}
+\def\@pteridinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pteridinevi' %
+ is based on `decaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovi[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;8==N}{#2}}
+\def\pteridinevb{\@ifnextchar[{\@pteridinevb[@}{\@pteridinevb[acfhk]}}
+\def\@pteridinevb[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pteridinevb' %
+ is based on `decaheterovb'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovb[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;8==N}{#2}}
+\def\pteridinevt{\@ifnextchar[{\@pteridinevt[@}{\@pteridinevt[acfhk]}}
+\def\@pteridinevt[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pteridinevt' %
+ is based on `decaheterovt'.}\fi%
+\decaheterovt[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;8==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Six-to-five fused heterocycles}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-to-five fused heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************
+% * nonahetero derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)       *
+% **************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          4
+%          *  3a(8) 
+%     5  *   * _____  3
+%       |     |     |
+%       |     |     |
+%     6  *   * *   *  2
+%          *  7a *
+%          7 (9) 1
+%          ^
+%          |
+%          the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\nonaheterov| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \nonaheterov(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `j' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to j, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The options `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles in two rings. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $9$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}  
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  aromatic six-membered ring
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  3,3a-double bond     d    :  4,3a-double bond
+%           e    :  4,5-double bond      f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,7a-double bond
+%           i    :  1,7a-double bond     
+%           j    :  3a,4a-double bond
+%           J    :  3a,4a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle (six-membered ring)
+%           B    :  aromatic circle (five-membered ring)
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 9)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 9 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 7
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 3a or 7b (n=3 or 7)
+%                        e.g. 3a==N (or 8==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             7a==N (or 9==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 8 (3a position) and 9 (7a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to j: see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \nonaheterov{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \nonaheterov[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\nonaheterov| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| several times in 
+% a restricted fashion. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: fused and spiro rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nonaheterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nona@heterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nona@@heterov}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nonaheterov}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonaheterov{\@ifnextchar({\@nona@heterov(@}{\@nona@heterov(@)}}
+\def\@nona@heterov(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@nona@@heterov(#1)[@}%
+{\@nona@@heterov(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@nona@@heterov(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@nonaheterov(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@nonaheterov(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@nonaheterov(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\test@vertix@nonav{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}% %substituents on 1 to 3
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty\relax
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA
+\ylposition{#4}{11}{3}{7}{-1}% %substituents on 5 to 7
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty\relax
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\let\aaa=\hhh
+\ylposition{#4}{-3}{0}{2}{0}%%substituent on 4
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty\relax
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{7}%   %9 %for 7a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty\relax
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-103}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-7}{1}%   %8 for 3a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty\relax
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1200,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){nonaheterov}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{c}}%
+  % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}}%
+  % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondhoriz}}%
+  % bond between 3 and 3a \@ccc -> \skbondhoriz etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{j}{e}}%
+  % bond between 3a and 7a \@jjj -> \skbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{i}{d}}%
+  % bond between 7a and 1 \@iii -> \skbondd etc
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{a}% bond between 3a and 4 \@ddd -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{h}{c}% bond between 7 and 7a \@hhh -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{g}{d}% bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \skbondd etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@fff -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{f}% bond between 4 and 5 \@eee -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 3a and 7a
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 4 and 5
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member l\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+\else\if\member b\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondb}% bond between 2 and 3
+\else\if\member c\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondhoriz}% bond between 3 and 3a
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonda}% bond between 4 and 3a
+}%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 4 and 5
+}%
+\else\if\member f\relax%
+{\let\eee=\fff \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonde}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else\if\member g\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\eee \let\eee=\fff%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else\if\member h\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii \let\ddd=\eee%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondc}% bond between 7 and 7a
+}%
+\else\if\member i\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondd}% bond between 1 and 7a
+}%
+\else\if\member j\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 7a and 3a
+}%
+\else\if\member J\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bonde}% bond between 7a and 3a
+}%
+\else\if\member A\relax%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%               %circle
+\else\if\member B\relax%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(342,173){180}%               %circle 1993/11/20 S.Fujita
+\else 
+ \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{7a}\def\aay{3a}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{304}{68}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{402}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{402}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{68}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+   \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@nonav
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms and spiro rings %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@tmpclipfalse
+%position 7 should be treated before 
+%position 1 (using the same \if@clip)
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{11}{3}{7}{-1}%
+% \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \global\@gcliptrue \fi%
+% \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \global\@fcliptrue \fi%
+% \@eclipfalse \if@clip \global\@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \@gcliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+ \@eclipfalse \if@clip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@clipfalse%2006/9/5added
+\storeclipinfo
+}%substituents on 5 to 7
+%\developclipinfo%2006/9/5 deleted
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%
+%   \if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+%   \if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+%   \if@clip \global\@cliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 1 to 3
+%\developclipinfo%2006/9/5 deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{-3}{0}{2}{0}%
+% \@aclipfalse \if@aclip \global\@hcliptrue \fi%
+ \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \fi%
+\storeclipinfo
+}%%substituent on 4
+%\developclipinfo%2006/9/5 deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@nonafusev{#3}%
+  \@tmpclipfalse
+%  \if@iclip \global\@tmpcliptrue \fi
+%  \if@jclip \global\@icliptrue \fi
+%  \if@tmpclip \global\@jcliptrue \fi
+  \if@iclip \@tmpcliptrue \fi
+%  \if@jclip \@icliptrue \fi
+%  \if@tmpclip \@jcliptrue \fi
+  \if@jclip \@icliptrue \else \@iclipfalse \fi
+  \if@tmpclip \@jcliptrue \else \@jclipfalse \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+%%%====\clipinfo====%%%2006/9/5test
+}% fused positions
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setsixringv{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}}% %substituents on 1 to 3
+{\@clipfalse \if@eclip \@cliptrue \fi%      %substituents on 5 to 7
+ \@eclipfalse \if@fclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@gclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{11}{3}{7}{-1}}%
+}%
+{\@aclipfalse \if@hclip \@acliptrue \fi%    %substituent on 4
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{-3}{0}{2}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \Put@Direct(171,103){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{7}}%    %9 for 7a position
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+  \Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombond{#4}{-7}{1}}%   %8 for 3a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \nonaheterov macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\test@vertix@nonav| is used to test the presence of 
+% a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex of the 
+% nonaheterov nucleus. 
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/05}{New command: \cs{test@vertix@nonav}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix@nonav}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vertix@nonav#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or%
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ddd{}\else\def\ddd{@}\fi
+ \or%2
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ccc{}\else\def\ccc{@}\fi
+ \or%3%
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+     \def\jjj{@}%3a
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax%
+     \def\bbb{}%3
+   \else\if\@tmpb h\relax%
+     \def\bbb{@}%3
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax%
+     \def\bbb{@}%3
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \or%4
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\hhh{}\else\def\hhh{@}\fi
+ \or%5
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\gggA{}\else\def\gggA{@}\fi
+ \or%6
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\fff{}\else\def\fff{@}\fi
+ \or%7
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \xdef\iii{@}%7a
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax%
+     \xdef\eee{}%7s
+   \else\if\@tmpb h\relax%
+     \xdef\eee{@}%7h
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax%
+     \xdef\eee{@}%7
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\or%8 (= 3a)
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\jjj{}\else\def\jjj{@}\fi
+\or%9 (= 7a)
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\iii{}\else\def\iii{@}\fi
+\fi\fi}}% end of \test@vertix@nonav
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@vrtx@nonafusev| is used to set 
+% a hetero atom or on a vertex of a bridgehead location.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@nonafusev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@nonafusev#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty \relax\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa\or\or
+ \or%%%%3
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%20001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+ \or\or\or
+ \or%7
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%20001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+\or%8 (= 3a)
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%%20001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+\or%9 (= 7a)
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%20001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@nonafusev
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-to-five fused heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************
+% * nonahetero derivatives         *
+% *  (vertical type, inverse type) *
+% **********************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          7(10) 1
+%          * 7a  *
+%     6  *   * *   *  2
+%       |     |     |
+%       |     |_____|
+%     5  *   *        3
+%          *  3a(8) 
+%          4 
+%          ^
+%          |
+%          the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\nonaheterovi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \nonaheterovi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `j' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to j, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The options `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles in two rings. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $9$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  aromatic six-membered ring
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  3,3a-double bond     d    :  4,3a-double bond
+%           e    :  4,5-double bond      f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,7a-double bond
+%           i    :  1,7a-double bond     
+%           j    :  3a,4a-double bond
+%           J    :  3a,4a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle (six-membered ring)
+%           B    :  aromatic circle (five-membered ring)
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 9)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 9 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 7
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 3a or 7b (n=3 or 7)
+%                        e.g. 3a==N (or 8==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             7a==N (or 9==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 8 (3a position) and 9 (7a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to j: see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \nonaheterovi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \nonaheterovi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\nonaheterovi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| several times in 
+% a restricted fashion. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/05}{Added: spiro and fused rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nonaheterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nona@heterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nona@@heterovi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nonaheterovi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonaheterovi{\@ifnextchar({\@nona@heterovi(@}{\@nona@heterovi(@)}}
+\def\@nona@heterovi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@nona@@heterovi(#1)[@}%
+{\@nona@@heterovi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@nona@@heterovi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@nonaheterovi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@nonaheterovi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@nonaheterovi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%initialize
+\test@vertix@nonavi{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}% %substituents on 1 to 3
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA
+\ylposition{#4}{0}{3}{7}{0}%%substituents on 4 to 6
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\let\aaa=\hhh
+\ylposition{#4}{-6}{0}{2}{0}%%substituent on 7
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-7}{7}%   %8 for 3a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-103}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{1}%  %9 for 7a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-171}\def\@@yli{-303}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1200,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti){nonaheterovi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{a}}%
+  % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbonda etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}}%
+  % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondhorizi}}%
+  % bond between 3 and 3a \@ccc -> \skbondhoriz etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{j}{e}}%
+  % bond between 3a and 7a \@jjj -> \skbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{i}{f}}%
+  % bond between 7a and 1 \@iii -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{h}{a}% bond between 7a and 7 \@hhh -> \skbonda etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{c}% bond between 3a and 4 \@ddd -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{e}{d}% bond between 4 and 5 \@eee -> \skbondd etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{f}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@fff -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bond{#1}{g}{f}% bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 3a and 7a
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 6 and 7
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 4 and 5
+}%
+\else\if\member l\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bonda}% bond between 1 and 2
+\else\if\member b\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondb}% bond between 2 and 3
+\else\if\member c\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondhorizi}% bond between 3 and 3a
+\else\if\member d\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii \let\ddd=\eee%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondc}% bond between 4 and 3a
+}%
+\else\if\member e\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}% bond between 4 and 5
+}%
+\else\if\member f\relax%
+{\let\eee=\fff \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonde}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else\if\member g\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondf}% bond between 7 and 6
+}%
+\else\if\member h\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonda}% bond between 7 and 7a
+}%
+\else\if\member i\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bondf}% bond between 1 and 7a
+}%
+\else\if\member j\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondb}% bond between 7a and 3a
+}%
+\else\if\member J\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(342,0){\bonde}% bond between 7a and 3a
+}%
+\else\if\member A\relax%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%               %circle
+\else\if\member B\relax%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(342,233){180}%               %circle 1993/11/20 S.Fujita
+\else 
+ \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{7a}\def\aay{3a}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{304}{282}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{402}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{402}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putlatom{-60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-38}{68}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+   \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@nonavi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms and spiro rings %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{0}{4}{0}%
+%   \if@aclip \global\@acliptrue\fi
+%   \if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+%   \if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+  \@xclipfalse \if@aclip \@xcliptrue \@aclipfalse\fi%avoid conflict position 7 2013/03/24
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 1 to 3
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{3}{7}{0}%
+   \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \@gcliptrue \fi%
+   \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+   \@eclipfalse \if@clip \@ecliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%substituents on 4 to 6
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{-6}{0}{2}{0}%
+  \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%%substituent on 7
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@nonafusevi{#3}%
+\storeclipinfo
+}% fused positions
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{%
+\@aclipfalse \if@xclip \@acliptrue \fi%   %avoid conflict 2013/3/24
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\setsixringv{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}}% %substituents on 1 to 3
+}%
+{\@clipfalse \if@eclip \@cliptrue \fi%     %substituents on 4 to 6
+ \@eclipfalse \if@fclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@gclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{0}{3}{7}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@aclipfalse \if@hclip \@acliptrue \fi%   %substituent on 7
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{-6}{0}{2}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \Put@Direct(171,103){\setatombond{#4}{-7}{7}}%   %8 for 3a position
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+  \Put@Direct(171,303){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{1}}%  %9 for 7a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \nonaheterovi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\test@vertix@nonavi| is used to test the presence of 
+% a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex of the 
+% nonaheterovi nucleus. 
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/05}{New command: \cs{test@vertix@nonavi}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix@nonavi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vertix@nonavi#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or%
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\aaa{}\else\def\aaa{@}\fi
+ \or%2
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\bbb{}\else\def\bbb{@}\fi
+ \or%3%
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+     \def\iii{@}%3a
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax%
+     \def\ccc{}%3
+   \else\if\@tmpb h\relax%
+     \def\ccc{@}%3
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax%
+     \def\ccc{@}%3
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \or%4
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\eee{}\else\def\eee{@}\fi
+ \or%5
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\fff{}\else\def\fff{@}\fi
+ \or%6
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\gggA{}\else\def\gggA{@}\fi
+ \or%7
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \xdef\jjj{@}%7a
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax%
+     \xdef\hhh{}%7s
+   \else\if\@tmpb h\relax%
+     \xdef\hhh{@}%7h
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax%
+     \xdef\hhh{@}%7
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\or%8 (= 3a)
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\iii{}\else\def\iii{@}\fi
+\or%9 (= 7a)
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\jjj{}\else\def\jjj{@}\fi
+\fi\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@vrtx@nonafusevi| is used to set 
+% a hetero atom on a vertex of a bridgehead location.  
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/05}{New command: \cs{set@vrtx@nonafusevi}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@nonafusevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@nonafusevi#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa\or\or
+ \or%%%%3
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%%20001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+ \or\or\or
+ \or%7
+   \if\@tmpb a\relax%
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%20001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+\or%8 (= 3a)
+%     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \@icliptrue%%20001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+\or%9 (= 7a)
+%     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \@jcliptrue%%20001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@nonafusevi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Short-cut commands for fused heterocycles}
+%
+% The macros |\nonaheterov| and |\nonaheterovi| can be used in the 
+% form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  Hence, the resulting commands for 
+% drawing a fused heterocyle with one or more nitrogen atoms 
+% have an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************************************
+% * heterocycles having fused six- and five-membered rings *
+% *  (vertical type)                                       *
+% **********************************************************
+%
+%   N-heterocycles:
+%
+%   \indolev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \indolevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \isoindolev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoindolevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \indolizinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \indolizinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%          (different from the IUPAC numbering)
+%
+%   \purinev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \purinevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%          (different from the IUPAC numbering)
+%
+%   O-heterocycles:
+%
+%   \benzofuranev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \benzofuranevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \isobenzofuranevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \benzoxazolev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \benzoxazolevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to j, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The optiona `A' and `B' typeset aromatic circles. 
+% The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $9$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}  
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  aromatic six-membered ring
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  3,3a-double bond     d    :  4,3a-double bond
+%           e    :  4,5-double bond      f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,7a-double bond
+%           i    :  1,7a-double bond     
+%           J    :  3a,4a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 9)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 8 (3a position) and 9 (7a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \indolev{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \indolev[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\purinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\purinevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\purinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@purinev[@}{\@purinev[ra]}}
+\def\@purinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `purinev' %
+  is based on `nonaheterov'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterov[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;7==N}{#2}}
+\def\purinevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@purinevi[@}{\@purinevi[ra]}}
+\def\@purinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `purinevi' %
+  is based on `nonaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterovi[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;7==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indolev}
+% \begin{macro}{\indolevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indolev{\@ifnextchar[{\@indolev[@}{\@indolev[rb]}}
+\def\@indolev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indolev' %
+ is based on `nonaheterov'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterov[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\indolevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@indolevi[@}{\@indolevi[rb]}}
+\def\@indolevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indolevi' %
+ is based on `nonaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterovi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indolizinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\indolizinevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indolizinev{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@indolizinev[@}{\@indolizinev[aceg]}}
+\def\@indolizinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indolizinev' %
+  is based on `nonaheterov'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterov[#1]{7a==N}{#2}}
+\def\indolizinevi{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@indolizinevi[@}{\@indolizinevi[aceg]}}
+\def\@indolizinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indolizinevi' %
+  is based on `nonaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterovi[#1]{7a==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\isoindolev}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoindolevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\isoindolev{\@ifnextchar[{\@isoindolev[@}{\@isoindolev[cegi]}}
+\def\@isoindolev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoindolev' %
+  is based on `nonaheterov'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterov[#1]{2==N}{#2}}
+\def\isoindolevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@isoindolevi[@}{\@isoindolevi[cegi]}}
+\def\@isoindolevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoindolevi' %
+  is based on `nonaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterovi[#1]{2==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\benzofuranev}
+% \begin{macro}{\benzofuranevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\benzofuranev{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@benzofuranev[@}{\@benzofuranev[rb]}}
+\def\@benzofuranev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `benzofuranev' %
+  is based on `nonaheterov'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterov[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\benzofuranevi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@benzofuranevi[@}{\@benzofuranevi[rb]}}
+\def\@benzofuranevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `benzofuranevi' %
+  is based on `nonaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterovi[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\isobenzofuranev}
+% \begin{macro}{\isobenzofuranevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\isobenzofuranev{\@ifnextchar[{\@isobenzofuranev[@}%
+ {\@isobenzofuranev[cegi]}}
+\def\@isobenzofuranev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isobenzofuranev' %
+  is based on `nonaheterov'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterov[#1]{2==O}{#2}}
+\def\isobenzofuranevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@isobenzofuranevi[@}%
+ {\@isobenzofuranevi[cegi]}}
+\def\@isobenzofuranevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isobenzofuranevi' %
+  is based on `nonaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterovi[#1]{2==O}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\benzoxazolev}
+% \begin{macro}{\benzoxazolevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\benzoxazolev{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@benzoxazolev[@}{\@benzoxazolev[rb]}}
+\def\@benzoxazolev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `benzoxazolev' %
+  is based on `nonaheterov'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterov[#1]{1==O;3==N}{#2}}
+\def\benzoxazolevi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@benzoxazolevi[@}{\@benzoxazolevi[rb]}}
+\def\@benzoxazolevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `benzoxazolevi' %
+ is based on `nonaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterovi[#1]{1==O;3==N}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Building blocks}
+% \subsection{Six-membered ring unit}
+%
+% The old function (v1.01) of |\sixunitv| as a fusing ring unit 
+% is succeeded by |\sixfusev| and |\sixfusevi|. 
+% The command |\sixunitv| has been changed into a subsidiary 
+% command of |\sixheterov| (v2.00). 
+%
+% The macro |\sixunitv| is a six-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another ring structure to produce a new ring system. 
+% The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************
+% * six-membered unit  *
+% *  (vertical type)   *
+% **********************
+%
+%          1
+%          *  
+%     6  *   *  2
+%       |     |
+%       |     |
+%     5  *   *  3
+%          *
+%          4 <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixunitv| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |OMIT| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixunitv[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{OMIT}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST =
+%
+%           none       :  fully saturated
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixhunitv{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{e}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\sixunitv| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \changes{v1.01a}{1998/06/08}{\cs{sixunitv} bug fix: 
+%  \cs{bbb} to \cs{fff} and \cs{ccc} to \cs{eee}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixunitv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixunitv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixunitv{\@ifnextchar[{\@sixunitv[@}{\@sixunitv[@]}}
+\def\@sixunitv[#1]#2#3#4{\sixheterov[#1]{#2}{#3}[#4]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{sixunitv}: Old definition deleted.} 
+% 
+% \subsection{Five-membered ring unit}
+% \subsubsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The old function (v1.01) of |\fiveunitv| as a fusing ring unit 
+% is succeeded by |\fivefusev|. 
+% The command |\fiveunitv| has been changed into a subsidiary 
+% command of |\fiveheterov| (v2.00). 
+%
+% The macro |\fiveunitv| is a five-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another 
+% ring structure to produce a new ring system. The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************
+% * five-membered unit *
+% *  (vertical type)   *
+% **********************
+%
+%     4 _______ 3
+%       |     |
+%       |     |
+%     5  *   *  2
+%          *
+%          1 <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveunitv| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |OMIT| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fiveunitv[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{OMIT}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fiveunitv{1==N}{1==H;2==F}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fiveunitv| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\fiveheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveunitv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fiveunitv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveunitv{\@ifnextchar[{\@fiveunitv[@}{\@fiveunitv[r]}}
+\def\@fiveunitv[#1]#2#3#4{\fiveheterov[#1]{#2}{#3}[#4]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{fivunitv}: Old definition deleted.} 
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Inverse vertical type}
+%
+% The old function (v1.01) of |\fiveunitvi| as a fusing ring unit 
+% is succeeded by |\fivefusevi|. 
+% The command |\fiveunitvi| has been changed into a subsidiary 
+% command of |\fiveheterovi| (v2.00). 
+%
+% The macro |\fiveunitvi| typesets a five-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another 
+% ring structure to produce a new ring system. The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************************
+% * five-membered unit               *
+% *  (vertical type, inverse type)   *
+% ************************************
+%
+%          1
+%          * 
+%     6  *   *  2
+%       |     |
+%       |_____|
+%     4         3
+%          *
+%        (0,0) <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveunitvi| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |OMIT| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fiveunitvi[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{OMIT}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fiveunitvi{1==N}{1==H;2==F}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fiveunitvi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveunitvi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fiveunitvi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveunitvi{\@ifnextchar[{\@fiveunitvi[@}{\@fiveunitvi[r]}}
+\def\@fiveunitvi[#1]#2#3#4{\fiveheterovi[#1]{#2}{#3}[#4]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{\cs{fivunitvi}: Old definition deleted.} 
+%
+% \section{Four-membered heterocycles}
+% \subsection{Horizontal bonds}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondshoriz}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % horizontal bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% horizontal inner bond for four-membered rings
+\def\bondshoriz{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,300)(0,0)
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-138,270)(1,0){134}%double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-138,270)(1,0){115}%double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-120,270)(1,0){115}%double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-120,270)(1,0){96}%double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+% horizontal inner bond for four-membered rings (inverse type) 
+\def\bondshorizi{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,300)(0,0)
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-138,136)(1,0){134}%double bond 4-3
+    \else%%
+     \Put@Line(-138,136)(1,0){115}%double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-120,136)(1,0){115}%double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-120,136)(1,0){96}%double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondshoriz}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%horizontal bond for four-membered rings
+\def\skbondshoriz{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,300)(0,0)
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-171,303)(1,0){200}%bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-171,303)(1,0){158}%bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(29,303)(-1,0){158}%bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-129,303)(1,0){116}%bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondshorizi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%horizontal bond for four-membered rings (inverse type)
+\def\skbondshorizi{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,300)(0,0)
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-171,103)(1,0){200}%bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-171,103)(1,0){158}%bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(29,103)(-1,0){158}%bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-129,103)(1,0){116}%bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondshoriz}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%horizontal bond for four-membered rings
+\def\dotskbondshoriz{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,300)(0,0)
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(-171,303)(1,0){200}/(-171,303)(29,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-171,303)(1,0){158}/(-171,303)(-29,303)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(29,303)(-1,0){158}/(29,303)(-129,303)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-129,303)(1,0){116}/(-129,303)(-13,303)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondshorizi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%horizontal bond for four-membered rings (inverse type)
+\def\dotskbondshorizi{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,300)(0,0)
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(-171,103)(1,0){200}/(-171,103)(29,103)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-171,103)(1,0){158}/(-171,103)(-29,103)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(29,103)(-1,0){158}/(29,103)(-129,103)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-129,103)(1,0){116}/(-129,103)(-13,103)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Drawing four-membered heterocycles}
+%
+% The macro |\fourhetero| typesets a four-membered ring.  The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************
+% * fourhetero derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)       *
+% **************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          c
+%     4  _____  3
+%    d  |     |  b
+%       |     |
+%     1  -----  2<===== the original point
+%          a
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fourhetero| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fourhetero(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `d' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $4$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           e          :  4,1-double bond
+%
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 4)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 4 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to d: see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fourhetero{1==N}{1==H;2==F}
+%        \fourhetero[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \fourhetero[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fourhetero| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fourhetero}
+% \begin{macro}{\@four@hetero}
+% \begin{macro}{\@four@@hetero}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fourhetero}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fourhetero{\@ifnextchar({\@four@hetero(@}{\@four@hetero(@)}}
+\def\@four@hetero(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@four@@hetero(#1)[@}%
+{\@four@@hetero(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@four@@hetero(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fourhetero(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@fourhetero(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@fourhetero(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{e}{c}{b}{f}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#4}{5}{1}{4}{-1}% for 2 to 3
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{142}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#4}{4}{4}{6}{0}% for 1
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#4}{2}{5}{7}{0}% for 4
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-571,-137){fourhetero}%
+(571,137)(171,-103)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{a}{skbondshorizi}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondshorizi etc
+\Put@Direct(-142,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondshoriz}}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondshoriz etc
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{d}{e}}%
+     % bond between 4 and 1 \@ddd -> \skbonde etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondshorizi}%
+\else\if\member b\relax \Put@Direct(-142,0){\bondb}%
+\else\if\member c\relax \Put@Direct(0,0){\bondshoriz}%
+\else\if\member d\relax \Put@Direct(0,0){\bonde}%
+\else 
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fourv
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting heteroatoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-142,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{5}{1}{4}{-1}%
+\storeclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+}% for 2 to 3
+\developclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{4}{4}{6}{0}%
+\storeclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+}% for 1
+\developclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{2}{5}{7}{0}%
+\storeclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+}% for 4
+\developclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-142,0){\setsixringv{#4}{5}{1}{4}{-1}}% for 2 to 3
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{4}{4}{6}{0}}% for 1
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringv{#4}{2}{5}{7}{0}}% for 4
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \fourhetero macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@fourv| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\fourhetero| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@fourv|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@fourv}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@fourv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@fourv{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putlatom{-200}{120}{\scriptsize \@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{120}{\scriptsize \@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{60}{233}{\scriptsize \@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putlatom{-200}{233}{\scriptsize \@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@fourv
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@fourv| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@fourv}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@fourv}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@fourv{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{-173}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{27}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{27}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{27}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{27}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@fourv
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/3/19}{added \cs{oxetane}, \cs{thietane}, and \cs{azetidine} }
+% \begin{macro}{\oxetane}
+% \begin{macro}{\azetidine}
+% \begin{macro}{\thietane}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oxetane{\@ifnextchar[{\@oxetane[@}{\@oxetane[]}}
+\def\@oxetane[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `oxetane' %
+  is based on `fourhetero'.}\fi%
+\fourhetero[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\azetidine{\@ifnextchar[{\@azetidine[@}{\@azetidine[]}}
+\def\@azetidine[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `azetidine' %
+  is based on `fourhetero'.}\fi%
+\fourhetero[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\thietane{\@ifnextchar[{\@thietane[@}{\@thietane[]}}
+\def\@thietane[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `thietane' %
+  is based on `fourhetero'.}\fi%
+\fourhetero[#1]{1==S}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Three-membered heterocycles}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+% \subsubsection{Sloped bonds}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondtria}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **********************
+% * bonds for triangle *
+% **********************
+% fff 3--------2bbb
+%      `     /
+%   ddd  `1/ <===== the original point
+% bond between 1 and 2
+ \def\bondtria{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+   \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-6,42)(3,5){72}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-6,42)(3,5){60}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \Put@Line(6,62)(3,5){60}%            %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(10,32)(3,5){60}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%                                    
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondtrib}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 1 and 3
+ \def\bondtrib{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+   \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \Put@Line(6,42)(-3,5){72}%           %double bond 1-3
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(6,42)(-3,5){60}%           %double bond 1-3
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-6,62)(-3,5){60}%          %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(6,42)(-3,5){60}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%                                    
+  \fi%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondtria}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\skbondtria{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){103}%           %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){80}%            %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(103,171)(-3,-5){80}%      %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(35,21)(3,5){60}%          %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\skbondtrib}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 3
+\def\skbondtrib{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,5){103}%         %bond 1-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,5){80}%          %bond 1-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+%    \ifx\eee\empty%bug fix 1993/11/19
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-103,171)(3,-5){80}%     %bond 1-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-35,21)(-3,5){60}%       %bond 1-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondtria}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\dotskbondtria{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,5){103}/(0,0)(103,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,5){80}/(0,0)(80,133)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(103,171)(-3,-5){80}/(103,171)(23,38)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(35,21)(3,5){60}/(35,21)(95,121)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskbondtrib}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 3
+\def\dotskbondtrib{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-3,5){103}/(0,0)(-103,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-3,5){80}/(0,0)(-80,133)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+       \dotorline(-103,171)(3,-5){80}/(-103,171)(-23,38)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-35,21)(-3,5){60}/(-35,21)(-95,121)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Drawing three-membered heterocycles}
+%
+% The macro |\threehetero| typesets a three-membered ring.  The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * thereehetero derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)         *
+% ****************************
+%
+%         b
+%     3--------2
+%    c `     / a
+%        `1/ <===== the original point
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\threehetero| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \threehetero(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+%   \threeheterov(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `c' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $3$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=4$ to $6$) represents a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to c: see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \threehetero{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \threehetero[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \threehetero{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\threehetero| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threehetero}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@hetero}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@@hetero}
+% \begin{macro}{\@threehetero}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threehetero{\@ifnextchar({\@three@hetero(@}{\@three@hetero(@)}}
+\def\@three@hetero(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@three@@hetero(#1)[@}%
+{\@three@@hetero(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@three@@hetero(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@threehetero(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@threehetero(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@threehetero(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{b}{f}{@}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#4}{3}{3}{5}{0}%subst 1
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{68}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#4}{0}{1}{3}{0}%subst 2
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{142}\def\@@yli{132}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#4}{3}{5}{7}{0}%subst 3
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{132}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,580)(-468,-240){threeheterov}%
+(468,240)(68,0)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{a}{skbondtria}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondtria etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-132){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{b}{skbondshoriz}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skbondtrib}}%
+       % bond between 3 and 1 \@ccc -> \skbondtria etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax\Put@Direct(-68,0){\bondtria}%
+\else\if\member b\relax\Put@Direct(0,-126){\bondshoriz}%
+\else\if\member c\relax\Put@Direct(-68,0){\bondtrib}%
+\else\if\member A\relax% aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(-70,108){100}%               %circle
+\else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@threev
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{3}{3}{5}{0}%
+%\if@clip\global\@cliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 1
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-142,-132){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{1}{3}{0}%
+%\if@bclip\global\@bcliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 2
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,-132){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{3}{5}{7}{0}%
+%\if@fclip\global\@fcliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 3
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\setsixringv{#4}{3}{3}{5}{0}}%subst 1
+\Put@Direct(-142,-132){\setsixringv{#4}{0}{1}{3}{0}}%subst 2
+\Put@Direct(0,-132){\setsixringv{#4}{3}{5}{7}{0}}%subst 3
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \threehetero macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threeheterov}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\threeheterov=\threehetero
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@threev| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\threehetero| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@threev|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@threev}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@threev}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@threev{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putratom{-94}{92}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{-94}{60}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{-52}{120}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{-126}{126}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%    % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-30}{-20}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{52}{110}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{-250}{110}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%    % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@threev
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@threev| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@threev}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@threev}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@threev{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{29}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{171}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{-68}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{29}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{171}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{-68}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@threev
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/3/19}{added \cs{oxiranev}, \cs{aziridinev}, and \cs{thiiranev} }
+% \begin{macro}{\oxiranev}
+% \begin{macro}{\aziridinev}
+% \begin{macro}{\thiiranev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oxiranev{\@ifnextchar[{\@oxiranev[@}{\@oxiranev[]}}
+\def\@oxiranev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `oxiranev' %
+  is based on `threeheterov'.}\fi%
+\threeheterov[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\aziridinev{\@ifnextchar[{\@aziridinev[@}{\@aziridinev[]}}
+\def\@aziridinev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `aziridinev' %
+  is based on `threeheterov'.}\fi%
+\threeheterov[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\thiiranev{\@ifnextchar[{\@thiiranev[@}{\@thiiranev[]}}
+\def\@thiiranev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `thiiranev' %
+  is based on `threeheterov'.}\fi%
+\threeheterov[#1]{1==S}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}
+% \subsubsection{Sloped bonds}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{Bondtria}}
+% \begin{macro}{\Bondtria}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **********************
+% * bonds for triangle *
+% **********************
+%
+%   aaa /1` <===== the original point
+%      /    `   
+% eee 3--------2ccc
+% bond between 1 and 2
+ \def\Bondtria{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-6,-42)(3,-5){72}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-6,-42)(3,-5){60}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(6,-62)(3,-5){60}%            %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(10,-32)(3,-5){60}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%                                    
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added commands: \cs{Bondtrib}}
+% \begin{macro}{\Bondtrib}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 1 and 3
+ \def\Bondtrib{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+   \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \Put@Line(6,-42)(-3,-5){72}%           %double bond 1-3
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(6,-42)(-3,-5){60}%           %double bond 1-3
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-6,-62)(-3,-5){60}%          %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(6,-42)(-3,-5){60}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%                                    
+  \fi%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{skBondtria}}
+% \begin{macro}{\skBondtria}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\skBondtria{%
+% \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+% \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){103}%           %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){80}%            %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(103,-171)(-3,5){80}%      %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(35,-21)(3,-5){60}%          %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+%\end{sfpicture}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{skBondtrib}}
+% \begin{macro}{\skBondtrib}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 3
+\def\skBondtrib{%
+% \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+% \begin{sfpicture}(200,200)(0,0)
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){103}%         %bond 1-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){80}%          %bond 1-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-103,-171)(3,5){80}%     %bond 1-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-35,-21)(-3,-5){60}%       %bond 1-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+%\end{sfpicture}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{dotskBondtria}}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskBondtria}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\dotskBondtria{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,-5){103}/(0,0)(103,-171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,-5){80}/(0,0)(80,-133)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(103,-171)(-3,5){80}/(103,-171)(23,-38)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(35,-21)(3,-5){60}/(35,-21)(95,-121)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{dotskBondtrib}}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotskBondtrib}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 3
+\def\dotskBondtrib{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-3,-5){103}/(0,0)(-103,-171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-3,-5){80}/(0,0)(-80,-133)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+       \dotorline(-103,-171)(3,5){80}/(-103,-171)(-23,-38)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(-35,-21)(-3,-5){60}/(-35,-21)(-95,-121)%
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Drawing three-membered heterocycles (inverse)}
+%
+% The macro |\threeheteroi| typesets a three-membered ring of 
+% inverse vertical type.  The following numbering is adopted 
+% in this macro. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added commands: 
+% \cs{threeheteroi}}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * thereehetero derivatives *
+% *  (inverse vertical type) *
+% ****************************
+%
+%        /1` <===== the original point
+%    c /     ` a
+%     3--------2
+%         b
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\threeheteroi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \threeheteroi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+%   \threeheterovi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `c' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $3$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=4$ to $6$) represents a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to c: see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \threeheteroi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \threeheteroi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \threeheteroi{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\threehetero| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threeheteroi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@heteroi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@@heteroi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@threeheteroi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threeheteroi{\@ifnextchar({\@three@heteroi(@}{\@three@heteroi(@)}}
+\def\@three@heteroi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@three@@heteroi(#1)[@}%
+{\@three@@heteroi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@three@@heteroi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@threeheteroi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@threeheteroi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@threeheteroi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{c}{e}{@}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylposition{#4}{0}{0}{2}{0}%subst 1
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{68}\def\@@yli{406}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#4}{1}{2}{4}{0}%subst 2
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{142}\def\@@yli{275}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#4}{2}{4}{6}{0}%subst 3
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{275}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,580)(-468,-340){threeheterovi}%
+(468,340)(68,0)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{a}{skBondtria}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skBondtria etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-275){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{b}{skbondshorizi}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(-68,0){\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{skBondtrib}}%
+       % bond between 3 and 1 \@ccc -> \skBondtrib etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax\Put@Direct(-68,0){\Bondtria}%
+\else\if\member b\relax\Put@Direct(0,-274){\bondshorizi}%
+\else\if\member c\relax\Put@Direct(-68,0){\Bondtrib}%
+\else\if\member A\relax% aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(-70,-108){100}%               %circle
+\else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@threevi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-68,-406){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{0}{0}{2}{0}%
+%\if@aclip\global\@acliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 1
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,-275){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{2}{4}{6}{0}%
+%\if@eclip\global\@ecliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 3
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-142,-275){\set@hetatom@sixv{#3}{1}{2}{4}{0}%
+%\if@cclip\global\@ccliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 2
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-68,-406){\setsixringv{#4}{0}{0}{2}{0}}%subst 1
+\Put@Direct(0,-275){\setsixringv{#4}{2}{4}{6}{0}}%subst 3
+\Put@Direct(-142,-275){\setsixringv{#4}{1}{2}{4}{0}}%subst 2
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}\iniatom\iniflag}% %end of \threeheteroi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threeheterovi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\threeheterovi=\threeheteroi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@threevi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\threeheteroi| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@threevi|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@threevi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@threevi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@threevi{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putratom{-94}{-120}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{-94}{-80}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{-52}{-150}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{-126}{-150}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%    % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{-30}{0}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{32}{-130}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{-230}{-130}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%    % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@threevi
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@threevi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@threevi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@threevi}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@threevi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{29}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+  \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+  \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{-68}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+  \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{29}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+  \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+  \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{-68}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@threevi
+%</hetarom>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/3/19}{added \cs{oxiranev}, \cs{aziridinev}, and \cs{thiiranev} }
+% \begin{macro}{\oxiranevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\aziridinevi}
+% \begin{macro}{\thiiranevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oxiranevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@oxiranevi[@}{\@oxiranevi[]}}
+\def\@oxiranevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `oxiranevi' %
+  is based on `threeheterovi'.}\fi%
+\threeheterovi[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\aziridinevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@aziridinevi[@}{\@aziridinevi[]}}
+\def\@aziridinevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `aziridinevi' %
+  is based on `threeheterovi'.}\fi%
+\threeheterovi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\thiiranevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@thiiranevi[@}{\@thiiranevi[]}}
+\def\@thiiranevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `thiiranevi' %
+  is based on `threeheterovi'.}\fi%
+\threeheterovi[#1]{1==S}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetarom.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetarom.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dc95b4b86fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetarom.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+\def\batchfile{hetarom.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996, 1998, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2006, 2010, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996 
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1998 (private version)
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.00a Released on November 11, 2000
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.00 Released on August 30, 2004
+Version 4.02 Released on December 20, 2004
+Version 4.03b Released on September 5, 2006 (decaheterov, nonaheterov bug fix)
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.01 Released on March 19, 2013
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files hetarom.dtx and hetarom.ins
+and the derived file hetarom.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{hetarom.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{hetarom.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{hetarom.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{hetarom.dtx}{hetarom}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetaromh.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetaromh.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..88374187ae8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetaromh.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,6287 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: hetaromh.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1993,1996,1998,2000,2001,2002,2004,2006,2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% hetaromh.sty
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+%\typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files hetaromh.dtx and hetaromh.ins
+% and the derived file hetaromh.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{November 11, 2000}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00a}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 20, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{September 5, 2006}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.03b}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{5645}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/06/26}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/11}{bug fix}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Size reduction and clipping information}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{sfpicture enviroment etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Exception to wedged bonds}
+% \changes{v4.02a}{2004/12/27}{Bug fix: \cs{ggg} to \cs{gggA}}
+% \changes{v4.03b}{2006/9/5}{Bug fix: \cs{ggg} to \cs{gggA} revised}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/19}{added \cs{pyrazinehi}, \cs{oxiraneh}, etc.}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{hetaromh.dtx}[2013/03/19 v5.01 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{hetaromh.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Heterocycles of horizontal type by {\sffamily hetaromh.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %% (old address)
+% %% Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% %% Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% %% Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{hetaromh.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{hetaromh:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% hetaromh & hetaromh.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hetaromh>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.01}
+\typeout{       -- Released March 19, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{hetaromh}
+\def\versi@ndate{March 19, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for hetaromh.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+% **********************************
+% * hetaromh.sty: list of commands *
+% **********************************
+%
+% <Conventions for bond-setting>
+%
+%     \hbonda
+%     \hbondf
+%     \hbondb
+%     \hbondc
+%     \hbondd
+%     \hbonde
+%     \hbondvert
+%     \hbondverti
+%
+%     \hskbonda
+%     \hskbondf
+%     \hskbondc
+%     \hskbondd
+%     \hskbondb
+%     \hskbonde
+%     \hskbondvert
+%     \hskbondverti
+%
+%     \dothskbonda
+%     \dothskbondf
+%     \dothskbondc
+%     \dothskbondd
+%     \dothskbondb
+%     \dothskbonde
+%     \dothskbondvert
+%     \dothskbondverti
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Six-membered heterocycles (horizontal)>
+%
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     \sixheteroh                \@sixheteroh
+%     \sixheterohi               \@sixheterohi
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%     \pyridineh                 \@pyridineh
+%     \pyridinehi                \@pyridinehi
+%     \pyrazineh                 \@pyrazineh
+%     \pyrazinehi                \@pyrazinehi
+%     \pyrimidineh               \@pyrimidineh
+%     \pyrimidinehi              \@pyrimidinehi
+%     \pyridazineh               \@pyridazineh
+%     \pyridazinehi              \@pyridazinehi
+%     \triazineh                 \@triazineh
+%     \triazinehi                \@triazinehi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Five-membered heterocycles (horizontal)>
+%
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     \fiveheteroh               \@fiveheteroh
+%     \fiveheterohi              \@fiveheterohi
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%     \pyrroleh                  \@pyrroleh
+%     \pyrazoleh                 \@pyrazoleh
+%     \imidazoleh                \@imidazoleh
+%     \isoxazoleh                \@isoxazoleh
+%     \oxazoleh                  \@oxazoleh
+%
+%     \furanh                    \@furanh
+%     \thiopheneh                \@thiopheneh
+%
+%     \pyrrolehi                 \@pyrrolehi
+%     \pyrazolehi                \@pyrazolehi
+%     \imidazolehi               \@imidazolehi
+%     \isoxazolehi               \@isoxazolehi
+%     \oxazolehi                 \@oxazolehi
+%
+%     \furanhi                   \@furanhi
+%     \thiophenehi               \@thiophenehi
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Six-Six fused heterocycles (horizontal)>
+%
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     \decaheteroh               \@decaheteroh
+%     \decaheterohi              \@decaheterohi
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%     \quinolineh                \@quinolineh
+%     \quinolinehi               \@quinolinehi
+%     \isoquinolineh             \@isoquinolineh
+%     \isoquinolinehi            \@isoquinolinehi
+%     \quinoxalineh              \@quinoxalineh
+%     \quinoxalinehi             \@quinoxalinehi
+%     \quinazolineh              \@quinazolineh
+%     \quinazolinehi             \@quinazolinehi
+%     \cinnolineh                \@cinnolineh
+%     \cinnolinehi               \@cinnolinehi
+%     \pteridineh                \@pteridineh
+%     \pteridinehi               \@pteridinehi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  <Six-Five fused heterocycles (horizontal)>
+%
+%    Basic Macros
+%
+%     \nonaheteroh               \@nonaheteroh
+%     \nonaheterohi              \@nonaheterohi
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%
+%     \purineh                   \@purineh
+%     \purinehi                  \@purinehi
+%     \indoleh                   \@indoleh
+%     \indolehi                  \@indolehi
+%     \indolizineh               \@indolizineh
+%     \indolizinehi              \@indolizinehi
+%     \isoindoleh                \@isoindoleh
+%     \isoindolehi               \@isoindolehi
+%     \benzofuraneh              \@benzofuraneh
+%     \benzofuranehi             \@benzofuranehi
+%     \isobenzofuraneh           \@isobenzofuraneh
+%     \isobenzofuranehi          \@isobenzofuranehi
+%     \benzoxazoleh              \@benzoxazoleh
+%     \benzoxazolehi             \@benzoxazolehi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%   <Building units>
+%
+%     \sixunith                  \@sixunith
+%     \fiveunith                 \@fiveunith
+%     \fiveunithi                \@fiveunithi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%   <Three-membered rings>
+%
+%     \threeheteroh              \@threeheteroh
+%     \threeheterohi             \@threeheterohi
+%
+%    Application Macros
+%     \oxiraneh     \oxiranehi
+%     \aziridineh   \aziridinehi
+%     \thiiraneh    \thiiranehi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf hetaromh.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}%
+\@ifundefined{test@vertix@decavi}{\input hetarom.sty\relax}{}%
+\unitlength=0.1pt%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Various switches}
+%
+% These control sequences have been commented out, since they are 
+% defined elsewhere. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% % ****************************
+% % * various flags (switches) *
+% % ****************************
+% \newif\if@gclip \@gclipfalse%
+% \newif\if@hclip \@hclipfalse%
+% \newif\if@iclip \@iclipfalse%
+% \newif\if@jclip \@jclipfalse%
+% \def\iniflag{%
+% \@aclipfalse \@bclipfalse\@cclipfalse\@clipfalse\@eclipfalse%
+% \@fclipfalse\@gclipfalse\@hclipfalse\@iclipfalse\@jclipfalse%
+% \@clipfusefalse}%
+% \def\iniatom{%
+% \def\aaa{}\def\bbb{}\def\ccc{}\def\ddd{}\def\eee{}\def\fff{}%
+% \def\gggA{}\def\hhh{}\def\iii{}\def\jjj{}%
+% \def\@aaa{}\def\@bbb{}\def\@ccc{}\def\@ddd{}\def\@eee{}\def\@fff{}%
+% }%
+% \def\resetbdsw{\gdef\@aaa{a}\gdef\@bbb{b}\gdef\@ccc{c}%
+% \gdef\@ddd{d}\gdef\@eee{e}\gdef\@fff{f}}%
+%
+\iniatom%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Macros for setting bonds}
+% \subsection{Inner double bonds}
+% 
+% The macros |\sixheteroh| and |\fiveheteroh| use internal macros for setting 
+% inner double bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\hbonda| to |\hbondf| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring; and 
+% the inner macros |\hbondvert| and |\hbondverti| draw vertical bonds 
+% of a five-membered ring. 
+% 
+% Note that 
+% comments (conerning locant numbers) on the end of each row have 
+% lost the exact meaning, 
+% since such a command moiety is used in many macros after copying. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ******************************
+% * setting inner double bonds *
+% ******************************
+%
+%                                   b
+%                          (bbb) 2      3  (ccc)
+%                            a    -----    c
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 1 * (aaa)     * 4  (ddd)
+%          (0,0)                *       *  c
+%                            f    -----
+%                          (fff) 6      5  (eee)
+%                                   e
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbonda}
+% The macro |\hbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 1 and 2
+\def\hbonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+   \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(42,6)(3,5){78}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+     \Put@Line(42,6)(3,5){62}%           %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(57,36)(3,5){62}%          %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+     \Put@Line(57,36)(3,5){62}%          %double bond 1-2
+   \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbondf}
+% The macro |\hbondf| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 1 and 6
+\def\hbondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+   \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \Put@Line(42,-6)(3,-5){78}%          %double bond 1-6
+   \else%
+     \Put@Line(42,-6)(3,-5){62}%         %double bond 1-6
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(57,-36)(3,-5){62}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \else%
+     \Put@Line(57,-36)(3,-5){62}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbondb}
+% The macro |\hbondf| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 3 and 2
+ \def\hbondb{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(129,138)(1,0){148}%        %double bond 2-3
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(129,138)(1,0){134}%        %double bond 3-2
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(143,138)(1,0){134}%        %double bond 3-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(143,138)(1,0){110}%        %double bond 3-2
+   \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbondc}
+% The macro |\hbondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 4 and 3
+ \def\hbondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(364,6)(-3,5){78}%          %double bond 4-3
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(364,6)(-3,5){62}%          %double bond 4-3
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(349,36)(-3,5){62}%         %double bond 4-3
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(349,36)(-3,5){62}%         %double bond 4-3
+   \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbondd}
+% The macro |\hbondf| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 4 and 5
+ \def\hbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+   \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \Put@Line(364,-6)(-3,-5){78}%        %double bond 4-5
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(364,-6)(-3,-5){62}%        %double bond 4-5
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \Put@Line(349,-36)(-3,-5){62}%       %double bond 4-5
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(349,-36)(-3,-5){62}%       %double bond 4-5
+   \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbonde}
+% The macro |\hbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\fff| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% bond between 5 and 6
+\def\hbonde{%
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+   \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \Put@Line(129,-138)(1,0){148}%       %double bond 6-5
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(129,-138)(1,0){134}%       %double bond 5-6
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \Put@Line(143,-138)(1,0){134}%       %double bond 5-6
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(143,-138)(1,0){110}%       %double bond 5-6
+   \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbondvert}
+% The macro |\hbondvert| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\fff| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% vertical inner bond for five-membered rings
+\def\hbondvert{%
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(136,-138)(0,1){277}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(136,-138)(0,1){258}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(136,-120)(0,1){258}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \else
+     \Put@Line(136,-120)(0,1){239}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbondverti}
+% The macro |\hbondverti| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ccc| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% horizontal inner bond for five-membered rings (inverse type) 
+\def\hbondverti{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(270,-138)(0,0){277}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(270,-138)(0,1){258}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(270,-120)(0,1){258}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(270,-120)(0,1){239}%      %double bond 4-3
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Skeletal bonds}
+% 
+% The macros |\sixheteroh| and |\fiveheteroh| use inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\skbonda| to |\skbondf| are used to set a bond 
+% on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring; and 
+% the inner macros |\hskibondverti| to |\hskibondverti| draw vertical bonds 
+% of a five-membered ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************************
+% * setting skeletal bonds (horizontal type) *
+% ********************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                   b
+%                          (bbb) 2      3  (ccc)
+%                            a    -----    c
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 1 * (aaa)     * 4  (ddd)
+%          (0,0)                *       *  d
+%                            f    -----
+%                          (fff) 6      5  (eee)
+%                                   e
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hskbonda}
+% The macro |\hskbonda| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\hskbonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){103}%           %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,5){79}%            %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(24,40)(3,5){79}%          %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(24,40)(3,5){62}%          %bond 1-2
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hskbondf}
+% The macro |\hskbondf| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 6
+\def\hskbondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){103}%          %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){79}%           %bond 1-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(24,-40)(3,-5){79}%        %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(24,-40)(3,-5){62}%        %bond 1-6
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hskbondc}
+% The macro |\hskbondc| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 3
+\def\hskbondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(406,0)(-3,5){103}%         %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(406,0)(-3,5){79}%         %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(382,40)(-3,5){79}%        %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(382,40)(-3,5){62}%        %bond 4-3
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hskbondd}
+% The macro |\hskbondd| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\hskbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(406,0)(-3,-5){103}%       %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(406,0)(-3,-5){79}%        %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+     \Put@Line(382,-40)(-3,-5){79}%      %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(382,-40)(-3,-5){62}%      %bond 4-5
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hskbondb}
+% The macro |\hskbondb| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 3 and 2
+\def\hskbondb{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(103,171)(1,0){200}%       %bond 2-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(103,171)(1,0){160}%       %bond 3-2
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(143,171)(1,0){160}%       %bond 3-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(143,171)(1,0){120}%       %bond 3-2
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hskbonde}
+% The macro |\hskbonde| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 6
+\def\hskbonde{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(103,-171)(1,0){200}%      %bond 6-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(143,-171)(1,0){160}%      %bond 5-6
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+     \Put@Line(103,-171)(1,0){160}%      %bond 5-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(143,-171)(1,0){120}%      %bond 5-6
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hskbondvert}
+% The macro |\hskbondvert| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%vertical bond for five-membered rings
+\def\hskbondvert{%
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(103,-171)(0,1){342}%      %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(103,-171)(0,1){300}%      %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+     \Put@Line(103,171)(0,-1){300}%      %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(103,-129)(0,1){258}%      %bond 4-3
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hskbondverti}
+% The macro |\hskbondverti| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%vertical bond for five-membered rings (inverse type)
+\def\hskbondverti{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(303,-171)(0,1){342}%      %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(303,-171)(0,1){300}%      %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(303,171)(0,-1){300}%      %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(303,-129)(0,1){258}%      %bond 4-3
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \subsection{Dotted Skeletal Bonds}
+% 
+% The macros |\sixfuseh| etc. use inner macros for setting 
+% skeletal bonds in accordance with the presence or the absence of 
+% hetero atoms.  During the processes of such setting,  
+% the inner macros |\dothskbonda| to |\dothskbondf| are used 
+% to set a dotted bond on each edge of a six- or five-membered ring.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dothskbonda}
+% The macro |\dothskbonda| is the dotted counterpart of |\hskbonda|,
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\bbb|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 2
+\def\dothskbonda{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,5){103}/(0,0)(103,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,5){79}/(0,0)(79,132)%
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(24,40)(3,5){79}/(24,40)(103,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(24,40)(3,5){62}/(24,40)(86,143)%
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dothskbondb}
+% The macro |\dothskbondb| is the dotted counterpart of |\hskbondb|,
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 3 and 2
+\def\dothskbondb{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(103,171)(1,0){200}/(103,171)(303,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(103,171)(1,0){160}/(103,171)(263,171)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(143,171)(1,0){160}/(143,171)(303,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(143,171)(1,0){120}/(143,171)(263,171)%
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dothskbondc}
+% The macro |\dothskbondc| is the dotted counterpart of |\hskbondc|,
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 3
+\def\dothskbondc{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(406,0)(-3,5){103}/(406,0)(303,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(406,0)(-3,5){79}/(406,0)(327,132)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(382,40)(-3,5){79}/(382,40)(303,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(382,40)(-3,5){62}/(382,40)(320,143)%
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dothskbondd}
+% The macro |\dothskbondd| is the dotted counterpart of |\hskbondd|,
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\ddd| and |\eee|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 4 and 5
+\def\dothskbondd{%
+  \ifx\ddd\empty%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+       \dotorline(406,0)(-3,-5){103}/(406,0)(303,-171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(406,0)(-3,-5){79}/(406,0)(327,-132)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\eee\empty%
+       \dotorline(382,-40)(-3,-5){79}/(382,-40)(303,-171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(382,-40)(-3,-5){62}/(382,-40)(320,-143)%
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dothskbonde}
+% The macro |\dothskbonde| is the dotted counterpart of |\hskbonde|,
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 5 and 6
+\def\dothskbonde{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+       \dotorline(103,-171)(1,0){200}/(103,-171)(303,-171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(143,-171)(1,0){160}/(143,-171)(303,-171)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+       \dotorline(103,-171)(1,0){160}/(103,-171)(263,-171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(143,-171)(1,0){120}/(143,-171)(263,-171)%
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dothskbondf}
+% The macro |\dothskbondf| is the dotted counterpart of |\hskbondf|,
+% which refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\aaa| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%bond between 1 and 6
+\def\dothskbondf{%
+  \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \ifx\fff\empty
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,-5){103}/(0,0)(103,-171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,-5){79}/(0,0)(79,-131)%
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\fff\empty%
+       \dotorline(24,-40)(3,-5){79}/(24,-40)(103,-171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(24,-40)(3,-5){62}/(24,-40)(86,-143)%
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dothskbondvert}
+% The macro |\dothskbondvert| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\bbb| and |\fff|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%vertical bond for five-membered rings
+\def\dothskbondvert{%
+  \ifx\fff\empty%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(103,-171)(0,1){342}/(103,-171)(103,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(103,-171)(0,1){300}/(103,-171)(103,129)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\bbb\empty%
+       \dotorline(103,171)(0,-1){300}/(103,171)(103,-129)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(103,-129)(0,1){258}/(103,-129)(103,129)%
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dothskbondverti}
+% The macro |\dothskbondverti| refers to the control sequences representing 
+% atoms on both of the terminal vertices (|\eee| and |\ccc|) and 
+% examine whether these are empty or not.  Thereby, 
+% it decides the vertices to be truncated. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%vertical bond for five-membered rings (inverse type)
+\def\dothskbondverti{%
+  \ifx\eee\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(303,-171)(0,1){342}/(303,-171)(303,171)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(303,-171)(0,1){300}/(303,-171)(303,129)%
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+       \dotorline(303,171)(0,-1){300}/(303,171)(303,-129)%
+    \else%
+       \dotorline(303,-129)(0,1){258}/(303,-129)(303,129)%
+    \fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% The macro |\set@skel@bondh| is used in |\sixfuseh| etc. 
+% for setting skeletal bonds (outer bonds), when |\@aaa| etc. 
+% (produced by |\csname|...|\endcsname|) are equal to `a' 
+% etc. (given as \#2).  Thinline, thickline and dotted-line 
+% skeletal bonds are available. 
+%
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{The positions of \cs{@skbondlisttrue} are changed.}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@skel@bondh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@skel@bondh#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\if\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname #2\relax%OK
+                               % \if\@aaa #2\relax%OK
+  \def\skbondreplace{#3}%
+  \@skbondlistfalse
+  \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+      \if\@@tmpb A\relax%
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+        \expandafter\csname dothskbond#3\endcsname% \dothskbonda etc.
+%        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \else\if\@@tmpb B\relax%
+        \@skbondlisttrue
+        {\thicklines 
+        \expandafter\csname hskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+        }%
+%        \@skbondlisttrue
+      \else%%%added for color 2010/10/01
+        \@skbondlisttrue%
+        \put(0,0){\@@tmpb}%
+      \fi\fi
+     \fi%
+    }%
+   \if@skbondlist\else
+     {\thinlines 
+        \expandafter\csname hskbond#3\endcsname% \hskbonda etc.
+     }%
+   \fi%
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname @#2#2#2\endcsname \empty\relax%
+                                %    \ifx\@aaa\empty\relax
+    \@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+     \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+      \if\@@tmpa #2\relax%
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unavailable bond `#2' in SKBONDLIST}\fi
+    }%
+  \fi\fi
+}% end of \set@skel@bondh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Six-membered heterocyles}
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-membered heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************
+% * sixhetero derivatives *
+% *  (horizontal type)    *
+% *************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                   b
+%                                2      3  
+%                            a    -----    c
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 1 *           * 4
+%          (0,0)                *       *  d
+%                            f    -----
+%                                6      5 
+%                                   e
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixheterovh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixheteroh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none or r  :  sixhetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  sixhetero (left-handed)
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 6 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixheteroh{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \sixheteroh[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \sixheteroh[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\sixheteroh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by |\setsixringh|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/29}{Add: Spiro and fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixheteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixheteroh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixheteroh{\@ifnextchar({\@six@heteroh(@}{\@six@heteroh(@)}}
+\def\@six@heteroh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@six@@heteroh(#1)[@}%
+{\@six@@heteroh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@six@@heteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@sixheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@sixheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@sixheteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.01}{2002/4/30}{Replaced by \cs{ShiftPicEnv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@sixh{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment of attached positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpositionh{#4}{0}{0}{7}{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(880,800)(-240,-400){sixheteroh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{%
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbonda etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{c}{c}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \hskbondc etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{d}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \hskbondd etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \hskbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{f}{f}% bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \hskbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax \hbondd\hbondf\hbondb%
+\else \if\member l\relax \hbonda\hbondc\hbonde%
+\else \if\member a\relax \hbonda%
+\else \if\member b\relax \hbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax \hbondc%
+\else \if\member d\relax \hbondd%
+\else \if\member e\relax \hbonde%
+\else \if\member f\relax \hbondf%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+%  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%                %circle
+  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%                %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+     \set@fusionadd@sixh
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{0}{7}{0}%    %atom 1--6%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringh{#4}{0}{0}{7}{0}%              %subst 1--6
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \sixheteroh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\test@vrtx@sixh| is used to test the presence of 
+% a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex of the 
+% sixheteroh nucleus. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vrtx@sixh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vrtx@sixh#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or% \xdef\aaa{\@memberb}%
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\aaa{}\else\def\aaa{@}\fi
+ \or% \xdef\bbb{\@memberb}%
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\bbb{}\else\def\bbb{@}\fi
+ \or% \xdef\ccc{\@memberb}%
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ccc{}\else\def\ccc{@}\fi
+ \or% \xdef\ddd{\@memberb}%
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ddd{}\else\def\ddd{@}\fi
+ \or% \xdef\eee{\@memberb}%
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\eee{}\else\def\eee{@}\fi
+ \or% \xdef\fff{\@memberb}%
+   \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\fff{}\else\def\fff{@}\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of \test@vrtx@sixh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro} 
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-membered heterocycle of inverse type 
+% is selected to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************************
+% * sixhetero derivatives            *
+% *  (horizontal type, inverse type) *
+% ************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                                   b
+%                                3      2  
+%                            c    -----    a
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 4 *           * 1
+%          (0,0)                *       *  f
+%                            d    -----
+%                                5      6 
+%                                   e
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixheterohi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixheterohi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `f' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none or r  :  sixhetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  sixhetero (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 4)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 6 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixheterohi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \sixheterohi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \sixheterohi[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\sixheterohi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by |\setsixringh|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/29}{Add: Spiro and fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixheterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@six@@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixheterohi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixheterohi{\@ifnextchar({\@six@heterohi(@}{\@six@heterohi(@)}}
+\def\@six@heterohi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@six@@heterohi(#1)[@}%
+{\@six@@heterohi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@six@@heterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@sixheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@sixheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@sixheterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.01}{2002/4/30}{Replaced by \cs{ShiftPicEnv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@sixhi{#3}%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpositionh{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%               %subst 1--4
+\ylpositionh{#4}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%              %subst 5 and 6
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(880,800)(-240,-400){sixheterohi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbondc etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{c}{a}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \hskbonda etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{f}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \hskbondf etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{e}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \hskbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{f}{d}% bond between 6 and 1 \@fff -> \hskbondd etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax \hbondd \hbondf \hbondb%
+\else \if\member l\relax \hbonda \hbondc \hbonde%
+\else \if\member a\relax \hbondc%
+\else \if\member b\relax \hbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax \hbonda%
+\else \if\member d\relax \hbondf%
+\else \if\member e\relax \hbonde%
+\else \if\member f\relax \hbondd%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+%  \Put@oCircle(0,203){240}%               %circle
+  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%               %circle
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+     \set@fusionadd@sixhi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%               %subst 1--4
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%              %subst 5 and 6
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringh{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%               %subst 1--4
+\setsixringh{#4}{11}{4}{7}{-1}%              %subst 5 and 6
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \sixheterohi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\test@vrtx@sixhi| is used to test the presence of 
+% a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex of the 
+% sixheteroh nucleus. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vrtx@sixhi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vrtx@sixhi#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ddd{}\else\def\ddd{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ccc{}\else\def\ccc{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\bbb{}\else\def\bbb{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\aaa{}\else\def\aaa{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\fff{}\else\def\fff{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\eee{}\else\def\eee{@}\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of \test@vrtx@sixhi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Pyridine derivatives of horizontal type}
+%
+% The macros |\sixheteroh| and |\sixheterohi| can be used in the 
+% form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  Hence, the resulting commands for 
+% drawing a six-membered heterocyle with one or more nitrogen atoms 
+% have an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************
+% * pyridine derivatives *
+% *  (horizontal type)   *
+% ************************
+%
+%   \pyridineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyridinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrazineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrazinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrimidineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrimidinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \triazineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \triazinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none or r  :  pyridine (right-handed)
+%           l          :  pyridine (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated ring
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the nitrogen atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \pyridineh{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \pyridineh[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \pyridineh[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5W==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/29}{Add: fused rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyridineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyridinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyridineh{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyridineh[@}{\@pyridineh[r]}}%
+\def\@pyridineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyridineh' %
+ is based on `sixheteroh'.}\fi%
+\sixheteroh[#1]{1==N}{#2}}%end of \pyridineh macro
+\def\pyridinehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyridinehi}{\@pyridinehi[r]}}%
+\def\@pyridinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyridinehi' %
+ is based on `sixheterohi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterohi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}% %end of \pyridinehi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrazineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrazinehi}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/17}{Add: pyrazinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyrazineh{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrazineh[@}{\@pyrazineh[r]}}%
+\def\@pyrazineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrazineh' %
+ is based on `sixheteroh'.}\fi%
+\sixheteroh[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}%end of \pyrazineh macro
+\def\pyrazinehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrazinehi[@}{\@pyrazinehi[r]}}%
+\def\@pyrazinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrazinehi' %
+ is based on `sixheterohi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterohi[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}%end of \pyrazinehi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrimidineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrimidinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyrimidineh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@pyrimidineh[@}{\@pyrimidineh[r]}}%
+\def\@pyrimidineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrimidineh' %
+ is based on `sixheteroh'.}\fi%
+\sixheteroh[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}%
+   %end of \pyrimidineh macro
+\def\pyrimidinehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@pyrimidinehi[@}{\@pyrimidinehi[r]}}%
+\def\@pyrimidinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrimidinehi' %
+ is based on `sixheterohi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterohi[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}%end of \pyrimidinehi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyridazineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyridazinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyridazineh{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyridazineh[@}{\@pyridazineh[r]}}%
+\def\@pyridazineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyridazineh' %
+ is based on `sixheteroh'.}\fi%
+\sixheteroh[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}%
+   %end of \pyridazineh macro
+\def\pyridazinehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@pyridazinehi}{\@pyridazinehi[r]}}%
+\def\@pyridazinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyridazinehi' %
+ is based on `sixheterohi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterohi[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}%end of \pyridazinehi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\triazineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\triazinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\triazineh{\@ifnextchar[{\@triazineh[@}{\@triazineh[r]}}%
+\def\@triazineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `triazineh' %
+ is based on `sixheteroh'.}\fi%
+\sixheteroh[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N}{#2}}%end of \triazineh macro
+\def\triazinehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@triazinehi[@}{\@triazinehi[r]}}%
+\def\@triazinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `triazinehi' %
+ is based on `sixheterohi'.}\fi%
+\sixheterohi[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N}{#2}}%end of \triazinehi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Five-membered heterocycles}
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a five-membered heterocycle 
+% is selected to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * fivehetero derivatives   *
+% *  (horizontal type)       *
+% ****************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%     3  _____  2
+%       |       *
+%       |         * 1 <===== the original point
+%       |       *
+%     4  -----  5
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveheteroh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fiveheteroh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `e' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. The option 
+% `$0+$' represents a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}  
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus (or others) at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fiveheteroh{1==N}{1==H;2==F}
+%        \fiveheteroh[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \fiveheteroh[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fiveheteroh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by |\setsixringh| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: fused and spiro rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveheteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fiveheteroh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveheteroh{\@ifnextchar({\@five@heteroh(@}{\@five@heteroh(@)}}
+\def\@five@heteroh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@five@@heteroh(#1)[@}%
+{\@five@@heteroh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@five@@heteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fiveheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@fiveheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@fiveheteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@vrtx@fivehi{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpositionh{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%   % for 1 to 3
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylpositionh{#4}{10}{4}{7}{-1}%  % for 4 to 5
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-240,-400){fiveheteroh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondc etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{hskbondvert}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \skbondhoriz etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{e}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{d}% bond between 5 and 1 \@eee -> \skbondd etc
+}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r%
+\else \if\member a\relax \hbondc%
+\else \if\member b\relax \hbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax \hbondvert%
+\else \if\member d\relax \hbonde%
+\else \if\member e\relax \hbondd%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(233,0){180}%               %circle
+\else 
+    \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fiveh
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%
+\storeclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+}%   % for 1 to 3
+\developclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{10}{4}{7}{-1}%
+\storeclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+}%  % for 4 to 5
+\developclipinfo%added 2001/06/20 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringh{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}}%   % for 1 to 3
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringh{#4}{10}{4}{7}{-1}}%  % for 4 to 5
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%      %end of \fiveheteroh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\test@vrtx@fivehi| is used to test the presence of 
+% a hetero atom or a spiro substituent on a vertex of the 
+% fiveheteroh nucleus. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vrtx@fivehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vrtx@fivehi#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ddd{}\else\def\ddd{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\ccc{}\else\def\ccc{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\bbb{}\else\def\bbb{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\fff{}\else\def\fff{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\eee{}\else\def\eee{@}\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\def\aaa{}\else\def\aaa{@}\fi% dummy
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of \test@vrtx@sixhi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a five-membered heterocycle of inverse type 
+% is selected to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *******************************
+% * fivehetero derivatives      *
+% *  (horizontal type, inverse) *
+% *******************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%                       2  -----  3
+%                        *       |
+% the original point 1 *         |
+%                        *       |
+%                           _____|
+%                        5        4
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveheterohi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fiveheterohi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `e' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' represents an aromatic circle. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. The option 
+% `$0+$' represents a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus (or others) at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a, b, c, d, or e)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fiveheterohi{1==N}{1==H;2==F}
+%        \fiveheterohi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \fiveheterohi[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fiveheterohi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by |\setsixringh| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: fused and spiro rings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveheterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@five@@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fiveheterohi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveheterohi{\@ifnextchar({\@five@heterohi(@}{\@five@heterohi(@)}}
+\def\@five@heterohi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@five@@heterohi(#1)[@}%
+{\@five@@heterohi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@five@@heterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@fiveheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@fiveheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@fiveheterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{b}{c}{e}{f}{d}%d--dummy
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpositionh{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}%              % for 1 to 3
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+\ylpositionh{#4}{1}{4}{7}{0}%              % for 4 to 5
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(800,880)(-240,-400){fiveheterohi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbonda etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{hskbondverti}%
+      % bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \hskbondverti etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{e}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \hskbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{f}% bond between 5 and 6 \@eee -> \hskbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r%
+\else \if\member a\relax \hbonda%
+\else \if\member b\relax \hbondb%
+\else \if\member c\relax \hbondverti%
+\else \if\member d\relax \hbonde%
+\else \if\member e\relax \hbondf%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(173,0){180}%               %circle
+\else 
+    \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@fivehi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{0}{4}{0}%              % for 1 to 3
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{1}{4}{7}{0}%              % for 4 to 5
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setsixringh{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}%              % for 1 to 3
+\setsixringh{#4}{1}{4}{7}{0}%              % for 4 to 5
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%         %end of \fiveheterohi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Pyrrole derivatives of horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveheteroh| can be used in the 
+% form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  Hence, the resulting commands for 
+% drawing a five-membered heterocyle with one or more nitrogen atoms 
+% have an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************************
+% * pyrrole derivatives  and others *
+% *  (horizontal type)              *
+% ***********************************
+%
+%   \pyrroleh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrazoleh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \imidazoleh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoxazoleh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \oxazoleh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           none       :  mother nucleus
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \pyrroleh{1==H;2==F}
+%        \pyrroleh[]{1==H;2==F}
+%        \imidazoleh[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \isoxazoleh[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrroleh}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrazoleh}
+% \begin{macro}{\imidazoleh}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoxazoleh}
+% \begin{macro}{\oxazoleh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyrroleh{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrroleh[@}{\@pyrroleh[bd]}}%
+\def\@pyrroleh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrroleh' %
+ is based on `fiveheteroh'.}\fi%
+\fiveheteroh[#1]{1==N}{#2}}%
+\def\pyrazoleh{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrazoleh[@}{\@pyrazoleh[bd]}}%
+\def\@pyrazoleh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrazoleh' %
+ is based on `fiveheteroh'.}\fi%
+\fiveheteroh[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}%
+\def\imidazoleh{\@ifnextchar[{\@imidazoleh[@}{\@imidazoleh[bd]}}%
+\def\@imidazoleh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `imidazoleh' %
+ is based on `fiveheteroh'.}\fi%
+\fiveheteroh[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}%
+\def\isoxazoleh{\@ifnextchar[{\@isoxazoleh[@}{\@isoxazoleh[bd]}}%
+\def\@isoxazoleh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoxazoleh' %
+ is based on `fiveheteroh'.}\fi%
+\fiveheteroh[#1]{1==O;2==N}{#2}}%
+\def\oxazoleh{\@ifnextchar[{\@oxazoleh[@}{\@oxazoleh[bd]}}%
+\def\@oxazoleh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `oxazoleh' %
+ is based on `fiveheteroh'.}\fi%
+\fiveheteroh[#1]{1==O;3==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\furanh}
+% \begin{macro}{\thiopheneh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\furanh{\@ifnextchar[{\@furanh[@}{\@furanh[bd]}}
+\def\@furanh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `furanh' %
+  is based on `fiveheteroh'.}\fi%
+\fiveheteroh[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\thiopheneh{\@ifnextchar[{\@thiopheneh[@}{\@thiopheneh[bd]}}
+\def\@thiopheneh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `thiopheneh' %
+  is based on `fiveheteroh'.}\fi%
+\fiveheteroh[#1]{1==S}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Pyrrole derivatives of inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveheterohi| can be used in the 
+% form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  Hence, the resulting commands for 
+% drawing a five-membered heterocyle with one or more nitrogen atoms 
+% have an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *************************************
+% * pyrrole derivatives  and others   *
+% *  (horizontal type, inverse)       *
+% *************************************
+%
+%   \pyrrolehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pyrazolehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \imidazolehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoxazolehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \oxazolehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           none       :  mother nucleus
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \pyrrolehi{1==H;2==F}
+%        \pyrrolehi[]{1==H;2==F}
+%        \imidazolehi[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \isoxazolehi[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrrolehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyrazolehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\imidazolehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoxazolehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\oxazolehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyrrolehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrrolehi[@}{\@pyrrolehi[bd]}}%
+\def\@pyrrolehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrrolehi' %
+ is based on `fiveheterohi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterohi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}%
+\def\pyrazolehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyrazolehi[@}{\@pyrazolehi[bd]}}%
+\def\@pyrazolehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pyrazolehi' %
+ is based on `fiveheterohi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterohi[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}%
+\def\imidazolehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@imidazolehi[@}{\@imidazolehi[bd]}}%
+\def\@imidazolehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `imidazolehi' %
+ is based on `fiveheterohi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterohi[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}%
+\def\isoxazolehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@isoxazolehi[@}{\@isoxazolehi[bd]}}%
+\def\@isoxazolehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoxazolehi' %
+ is based on `fiveheterohi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterohi[#1]{1==O;2==N}{#2}}%
+\def\oxazolehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@oxazolehi[@}{\@oxazolehi[bd]}}%
+\def\@oxazolehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `oxazolehi' %
+ is based on `fiveheterohi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterohi[#1]{1==O;3==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\furanhi}
+% \begin{macro}{\thiophenehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\furanhi{\@ifnextchar[{\@furanhi[@}{\@furanhi[bd]}}
+\def\@furanhi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `furanhi' %
+  is based on `fiveheterohi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterohi[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\thiophenehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@thiophenehi[@}{\@thiophenehi[bd]}}
+\def\@thiophenehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `thiophenehi' %
+  is based on `fiveheterohi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterohi[#1]{1==S}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Six-to-six fused heterocyles}
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-to-six fused heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * decahetero derivatives   *
+% *  (horizontal type)       *
+% ****************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%           2   3
+%
+%      *1          4           (*1 origin)
+%
+%      (10)8a   4a(9)
+%
+%       8          5
+%
+%           7   6
+%   ____                     ____
+%  |cf.                          |
+%  |        8 (10)1              |
+%  |        *  8a *              |
+%  |   7  *   * *   *  2         |
+%  |     |     |     |           |
+%  |     |     |     |           |
+%  |   6  *   * *   *  3         |
+%  |        *  4a *              |
+%  |        5 (9) 4              |
+%  |        ^                    |
+%  |        |                    |
+%  |        the original point   |
+%  |____                     ____|
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decaheteroh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decaheteroh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `k' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to k, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles. The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $10$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  decahetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  no action
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  4,3-double bond      d    :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e    :  4a,5-double bond     f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,8-double bond
+%           i    :  8,8a-double bond     j    :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k    :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K    :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle      B    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 10)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 10 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 4a or 8b (n=4 or 8)
+%                        e.g. 4a==N (or 9==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             8a==N (or {{10}}==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 9 (4a position) and 10 (8a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to k; see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decaheteroh{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \decaheteroh[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decaheteroh[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\decaheteroh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringh| several times. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/30}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+% \changes{v4.03b}{2006/9/5}{bug fix \cs{ggg} etc. for \cs{test@vertix@sixv}
+%  in chemstr.sty}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decaheteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@decaheteroh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decaheteroh{\@ifnextchar({\@deca@heteroh(@}{\@deca@heteroh(@)}}
+\def\@deca@heteroh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@deca@@heteroh(#1)[@}%
+{\@deca@@heteroh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@deca@@heteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@decaheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@decaheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@decaheteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{b}{c}{d}{e}{f}%
+\test@vertix@decav{#3}{g}{h}{i}{j}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylhetpositionh{#4}{0}{0}{5}{0}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA
+\ylhetpositionh{#4}{-1}{3}{7}{0}% %substituents on 5 to 7
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{342}\fi
+\else
+{\let\aaa=\hhh
+\ylhetpositionh{#4}{-7}{0}{2}{0}% %substituent on 8
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{342}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{4}%   %9 for 4a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-303}\def\@@yli{171}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-9}{10}% %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-103}\def\@@yli{171}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1200,1200)(-400,-800){decaheteroh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbonda etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{c}{c}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \hskbondc etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{d}% bond between 4 and 5 \@ddd -> \skbondd etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{k}{e}% bond between 7 and 8 \@kkk -> \skbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{j}{f}% bond between 7 and 8 \@jjj -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{i}{a}}%
+  % bond between 8a and 8 \@iii -> \hskbonda etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{c}}%
+  % bond between 4a and 5 \@eee -> \hskbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{f}{d}}%
+  % bond between 5 and 6 \@fff -> \hskbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{g}{e}}%
+  % bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \hskbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{h}{f}}%
+  % bond between 7 and 8 \@hhh -> \hskbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbonda}% bond between 1 and 2%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondc}% bond between 3 and 4%
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondb}% bond between 8a and 4a
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondf}% bond between 8 and 7
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondd}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else \if\member l\relax%
+\else \if\member a\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbonda}% bond between 1 and 2
+\else \if\member b\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondb}% bond between 2 and 3
+\else \if\member c\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+% \Put@Direct(342,0){\hbondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+\else \if\member d\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondd}% bond between 4 and 4a
+}%
+\else \if\member e\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii \let\ddd=\eee%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondc}% bond between 5 and 4a
+}%
+\else \if\member f\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\eee \let\eee=\fff%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondd}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else \if\member g\relax%
+{\let\eee=\fff \let\fff=\gggA% 
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbonde}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else \if\member h\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondf}% bond between 8 and 7
+}%
+\else \if\member i\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbonda}% bond between 8 and 8a
+}%
+\else \if\member j\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondf}% bond between 1 and 8a
+}%
+\else \if\member k\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondb}% bond between 8a and 4a
+}%
+\else \if\member K\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbonde}% bond between 8a and 4a in the other ring
+}%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%                %circle
+\else \if\member B%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(203,-342){240}%             %circle
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{8a}\def\aay{4a}\def\aaz{10}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{68}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aaz\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-360}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putratom{68}{-360}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-452}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-452}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+   \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@decah
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/11}{The 
+% \cs{iniflag} command is added to 5- and 8-substitution.}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2006/9/5}{The \cs{storeclipinfo} command, bugfixed}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{0}{5}{0}%
+%   \if@aclip \global\@acliptrue\fi
+%   \if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+%   \if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+%   \if@clip \global\@cliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\iniflag%2000/11/11 by Shinsaku Fujita
+   \set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{-1}{3}{7}{0}%
+%   \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \global\@gcliptrue \fi%
+%   \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \global\@fcliptrue \fi%
+%   \@eclipfalse \if@clip \global\@ecliptrue \fi
+   \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \@gcliptrue \fi%
+   \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+   \@eclipfalse \if@clip \@ecliptrue \fi
+   \@clipfalse%2006/9/5added
+\storeclipinfo
+}%substituents on 5 to 7
+%\developclipinfo%%2006/9/5 deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\iniflag%2000/11/11 by Shinsaku Fujita
+  \set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{-7}{0}{2}{0}%
+%  \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \global\@hcliptrue \fi
+  \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \fi
+  \@aclipfalse%2006/9/5added
+\storeclipinfo
+}%%substituent on 8
+%\developclipinfo%%2006/9/5 deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@fuseh{#3}%
+%  \if@iclip \global\@icliptrue \fi
+%  \if@jclip \global\@jcliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}% fused positions
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringh{#4}{0}{0}{5}{0}}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+{\@clipfalse \if@eclip \@cliptrue \fi%   %substituents on 5 to 7
+ \@eclipfalse \if@fclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@gclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\setsixringh{#4}{-1}{3}{7}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@aclipfalse \if@hclip \@acliptrue \fi%   %substituent on 8
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\setsixringh{#4}{-7}{0}{2}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \Put@Direct(303,-171){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{4}}%   %9 for 4a position
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+  \Put@Direct(103,-171){\setatombond{#4}{-9}{10}}% %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%      %end of \decaheteroh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\ylhetpositionh| is used in the |\decaheteroh| command, 
+% giving the sift values for drawing a structure as a substituent. 
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/16}{Newly added command}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylhetpositionh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylhetpositionh#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifnum#5<0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax\fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa>#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa<#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+ \or
+  \ifx\aaa\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+  \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{30}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifx\bbb\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-103}\gdef\@yli{-171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+  \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-73}\gdef\@yli{-223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifx\ccc\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-303}\gdef\@yli{-171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+  \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-333}\gdef\@yli{-223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3
+  \fi
+ \or
+  \ifx\ddd\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-406}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+   \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-436}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4
+   \fi
+ \or
+    \ifx\eee\empty
+     \gdef\@ylii{-303}\gdef\@yli{171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+    \else
+     \gdef\@ylii{-333}\gdef\@yli{223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5
+    \fi
+ \or
+   \ifx\fff\empty
+      \gdef\@ylii{-103}\gdef\@yli{171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+     \else
+      \gdef\@ylii{-73}\gdef\@yli{223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6
+     \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-to-six fused heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************************
+% * decahetero derivatives           *
+% *  (horizonatl type, inverse type) *
+% ************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%           3   2
+%
+%      *4          1           (*4 origin)
+%
+%       (8)4a   8a(10)
+%
+%       5          8
+%
+%           6   7
+%   ____                     ____
+%  |cf.                          |
+%  |        5 (9) 4              |
+%  |        *  4a *              |
+%  |   6  *   * *   *  3         |
+%  |     |     |     |           |
+%  |     |     |     |           |
+%  |   7  *   * *   *  2         |
+%  |        *  8a *              |
+%  |        8 (9) 1              |
+%  |        ^                    |
+%  |        |                    |
+%  |        the original point   |
+%  |____                     ____|
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\decaheterohi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \decaheterohi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `k' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to k, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The options `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles in two rings. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $10$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  decahetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  no action
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  4,3-double bond      d    :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e    :  4a,5-double bond     f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,8-double bond
+%           i    :  8,8a-double bond     j    :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k    :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           K    :  4a,8a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle      B    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 10)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 10 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 4a or 8b (n=4 or 8)
+%                        e.g. 4a==N (or 9==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             8a==N (or {{10}}==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 9 (4a position) and 10 (8a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to k; see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decaheterohi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \decaheterohi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \decaheterohi[eb]{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\decaheterohi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringh| several times. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/1}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decaheterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@deca@@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@decaheterohi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decaheterohi{\@ifnextchar({\@deca@heterohi(@}{\@deca@heterohi(@)}}
+\def\@deca@heterohi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@deca@@heterohi(#1)[@}%
+{\@deca@@heterohi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@deca@@heterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@decaheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@decaheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@decaheterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\test@vertix@decavi{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylhetpositionh{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA
+\ylhetpositionh{#4}{12}{3}{7}{-1}% %substituents on 6 to 8
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{342}\fi
+\else
+{\let\aaa=\hhh
+\ylhetpositionh{#4}{-4}{0}{2}{0}% %substituent on 5
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{342}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-9}{4}%   %10 for 8a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-303}\def\@@yli{171}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{10}% %9 for 4a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-103}\def\@@yli{171}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1200,1200)(-400,-800){decaheterohi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbondc etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{c}{a}% bond between 3 and 4 \@ccc -> \hskbonda etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{f}% bond between 4 and 4a \@ddd -> \hskbondf etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{k}{e}% bond between 4a and 8a \@kkk -> \hskbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{j}{d}% bond between 8a and 1 \@jjj -> \hskbondd etc
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{a}}%
+  % bond between 4a and 5 \@eee -> \hskbonda etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{i}{c}}%
+  % bond between 8a and 8 \@iii -> \hskbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{h}{d}}%
+  % bond between 7 and 8 \@hhh -> \hskbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{g}{e}}%
+  % bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \hskbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{f}{f}}%
+  % bond between 5 and 6 \@fff -> \hskbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbonda}% bond between 1 and 2
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondb}% bond between 8a and 4a
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondf}% bond between 8 and 7
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondd}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else \if\member l\relax%
+\else \if\member a\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+\else \if\member b\relax
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondb}% bond between 2 and 3
+\else \if\member c\relax
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbonda}% bond between 1 and 2
+\else \if\member d\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondf}% bond between 1 and 8a
+}%
+\else \if\member e\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbonda}% bond between 8 and 8a
+}%
+\else \if\member f\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondf}% bond between 8 and 7
+}%
+\else \if\member g\relax%
+{\let\eee=\fff \let\fff=\gggA% 
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbonde}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else \if\member h\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\eee \let\eee=\fff%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondd}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else \if\member i\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii \let\ddd=\eee%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondc}% bond between 5 and 4a
+}%
+\else \if\member j\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondd}% bond between 4 and 4a
+}%
+\else \if\member k\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondb}% bond between 8a and 4a
+}%
+\else \if\member K\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbonde}% bond between 8a and 4a
+}%
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle
+  \Put@oCircle(203,0){240}%                %circle
+\else \if\member B%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(203,-342){240}%             %circle
+\else \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{8a}\def\aay{4a}\def\aaz{10}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{68}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aaz\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{68}{-360}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-360}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-452}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-452}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+   \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@decahi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/11}{The 
+% \cs{iniflag} command is added to 8-substitution.}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+\@tmpclipfalse
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{5}{0}{5}{-1}%
+%   \if@aclip \global\@acliptrue\fi
+%   \if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+%   \if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+%   \if@clip \global\@cliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\iniflag%2000/11/11 by Shinsaku Fujita
+ \set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{12}{3}{7}{-1}%
+% \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \global\@gcliptrue \fi%
+% \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \global\@fcliptrue \fi%      
+% \@eclipfalse \if@clip \global\@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \@gcliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \@fcliptrue \fi%      
+ \@eclipfalse \if@clip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+\storeclipinfo
+}%substituents on 6 to 8
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{-4}{0}{2}{0}%
+% \@aclipfalse \if@aclip \global\@hcliptrue \fi%
+ \@aclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \fi%
+\storeclipinfo
+}%%substituent on 5
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@decafusehi{#3}%
+  \@tmpclipfalse
+%  \if@iclip \global\@tmpcliptrue \fi
+%  \if@jclip \global\@icliptrue \fi
+%  \if@tmpclip \global\@jcliptrue \fi
+  \if@iclip \@tmpcliptrue \fi
+  \if@jclip \@icliptrue \fi
+  \if@tmpclip \@jcliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}% fused positions
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\global\drawsamesubsttrue%2002/05/30 warning on
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringh{#4}{5}{0}{5}{-1}}% %substituents on 1 to 4
+\global\drawsamesubstfalse%2002/05/30 warning off
+{\@clipfalse \if@eclip \@cliptrue \fi%    %substituents on 6 to 8
+ \@eclipfalse \if@fclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@gclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\setsixringh{#4}{12}{3}{7}{-1}}%
+}%
+{\@aclipfalse \if@hclip \@acliptrue \fi%    %substituent on 5
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\setsixringh{#4}{-4}{0}{2}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \Put@Direct(303,-171){\setatombond{#4}{-9}{4}}%   %10 for 8a position
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi
+  \Put@Direct(103,-171){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{10}}% %9 for 4a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%      %end of \decaheterohi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@vrtx@decafusehi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\decaheterohi|, where the macro is used to set 
+% a hetero atom or on a vertex of a bridgehead location.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@decafusehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@decafusehi#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa\or\or\or
+ \or%%%%4
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%             % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb h%
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `4a' or `9'}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb s%
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `4a' or `9'}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax
+   \else
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `4a' or `9'}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \or\or\or
+ \or%8
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%             % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb h%
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `8a' or `10'}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb s%
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `8a' or `10'}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax
+   \else
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `8a' or `10'}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\or%9 (= 4a)
+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%             % left type
+   \else
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `4a' or `9'}%
+   \fi
+\or%10 (= 8a)
+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%             % right type
+   \else
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `8a' or `10'}%
+   \fi
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@decafusehi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusion@decahi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\decaheterohi|, where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixhi|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decahi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decahi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@decahi{%
+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb
+  \if\@tmpa a%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa A%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa b%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa B%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa c%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa C%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa d%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `d'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa D%
+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `D'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa e%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `e'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa E%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `E'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa f%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa F%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa g%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa G%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa h%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa H%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+  \else\if\@tmpa i%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `i'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa I%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `I'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa j%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `j'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa J%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `J'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa k%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `k'}%
+      \fi
+  \else\if\@tmpa K%
+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%
+      \Put@Direct(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%
+      \if@smallringsw\else
+       \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `K'}%
+      \fi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@decahi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Short-cut commands for fused heterocycles}
+%
+% The macro |\decaheteroh| can be used in the 
+% form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  Hence, the resulting commands for 
+% drawing a fused heterocyle with one or more nitrogen atoms 
+% have an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************************************
+% * heterocycles having two fused six-membered rings *
+% *  (horizontal type)                               *
+% ****************************************************
+%
+%   \quinolineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinolinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoquinolineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoquinolinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinoxalineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinoxalinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinazolineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \quinazolinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \cinnolineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \cinnolinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pteridineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \pteridinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to k, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The optiona `A' and `B' typeset aromatic circles. 
+% The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $10$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  decahetero (right-handed)
+%           l          :  decahetero (left-handed)
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  4,3-double bond      d    :  4,4a-double bond
+%           e    :  4a,5-double bond     f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,8-double bond
+%           i    :  8,8a-double bond     j    :  1,8a-double bond
+%           k    :  4a,8a-double bond
+%           A    :  aromatic circle      B    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 10)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 9 (4a position) and 10 (8a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \quinolineh{2==Cl;3==F}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\quinolineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinolinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\quinolineh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinolineh[@}{\@quinolineh[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@quinolineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinolineh' %
+ is based on `decaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\decaheteroh[#1]{1==N}{#2}}%
+\def\quinolinehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinolinehi[@}{\@quinolinehi[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@quinolinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinolinehi' %
+ is based on `decaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterohi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\isoquinolineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoquinolinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\isoquinolineh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@isoquinolineh[@}{\@isoquinolineh[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@isoquinolineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoquinolineh' %
+ is based on `decaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\decaheteroh[#1]{2==N}{#2}}%
+\def\isoquinolinehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@isoquinolinehi[@}{\@isoquinolinehi[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@isoquinolinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoquinolinehi' %
+ is based on `decaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterohi[#1]{2==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{quinoxalineh}
+% \begin{macro}{quinoxalinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\quinoxalineh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinoxalineh[@}{\@quinoxalineh[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@quinoxalineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinoxalineh' %
+ is based on `decaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\decaheteroh[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}%
+\def\quinoxalinehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinoxalinehi[@}{\@quinoxalinehi[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@quinoxalinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinoxalinehi' %
+ is based on `decaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterohi[#1]{1==N;4==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\quinazolineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\quinazolinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\quinazolineh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinazolineh[@}{\@quinazolineh[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@quinazolineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinazolineh' %
+ is based on `decaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\decaheteroh[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}%
+\def\quinazolinehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@quinazolinehi[@}{\@quinazolinehi[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@quinazolinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `quinazolinehi' %
+ is based on `decaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterohi[#1]{1==N;3==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cinnolineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\cinnolinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cinnolineh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@cinnolineh[@}{\@cinnolineh[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@cinnolineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cinnolineh' %
+ is based on `decaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\decaheteroh[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}%
+\def\cinnolinehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@cinnolinehi[@}{\@cinnolinehi[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@cinnolinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cinnolinehi' %
+ is based on `decaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterohi[#1]{1==N;2==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pteridineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\pteridinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pteridineh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@pteridineh[@}{\@pteridineh[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@pteridineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pteridineh' %
+ is based on `decaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\decaheteroh[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;8==N}{#2}}%
+\def\pteridinehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@pteridinehi[@}{\@pteridinehi[acfhk]}}%
+\def\@pteridinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `pteridinehi' %
+  is based on `decaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\decaheterohi[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;8==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Six-to-five fused heterocycles}
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-to-five fused heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **************************
+% * nonahetero derivatives *
+% *  (horizontal type)     *
+% **************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%           3   2
+%
+%                  1           (*1 origin)
+%
+%       (8)3a   7a(9)
+%
+%       4          7
+%
+%           5   6
+%   ____                     ____
+%  |cf.                          |
+%  |        4 (8)               |
+%  |        *  3a                |
+%  |   5  *   * -----  3         |
+%  |     |     |     |           |
+%  |     |     |     |           |
+%  |   6  *   * *   *  2         |
+%  |        *  7a *              |
+%  |        7 (9) 1              |
+%  |        ^                    |
+%  |        |                    |
+%  |        the original point   |
+%  |____                     ____|
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\nonaheteroh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \nonaheteroh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `j' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to j, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The options `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles in two rings. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $9$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  aromatic six-membered ring
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  3,3a-double bond     d    :  4,3a-double bond
+%           e    :  4,5-double bond      f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,7a-double bond
+%           i    :  1,7a-double bond 
+%           j    :  3a,4a-double bond
+%           J    :  3a,4a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle (six-membered)
+%           B    :  aromatic circle (five-membered)
+%           {n+} :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 9)
+%           {0+} :  plus (or others) at the center 
+%                    of the five-membered cycle
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 9 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 7
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 3a or 7b (n=3 or 7)
+%                        e.g. 3a==N (or 8==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             7a==N (or 9==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 8 (3a position) and 9 (7a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to j; see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \nonaheteroh{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \nonaheteroh[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\nonaheteroh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringh| several times in 
+% a restricted fashion. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/05}{Add: fused and spiro rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nonaheteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nona@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nona@@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nonaheteroh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonaheteroh{\@ifnextchar({\@nona@heteroh(@}{\@nona@heteroh(@)}}
+\def\@nona@heteroh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@nona@@heteroh(#1)[@}%
+{\@nona@@heteroh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@nona@@heteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@nonaheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@nonaheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@nonaheteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\test@vertix@nonav{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpositionh{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%  %substituents on 1 to 3
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA
+\ylpositionh{#4}{11}{3}{7}{-1}% %substituents on 5 to 7
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{342}\fi
+\else
+{\let\aaa=\hhh
+\ylpositionh{#4}{-3}{0}{2}{0}%%substituent on 4
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{342}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{4}%   %9 for 7a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-303}\def\@@yli{171}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-7}{10}% %8 for 3a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-103}\def\@@yli{171}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1200,1200)(-400,-800){nonaheteroh}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{c}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbondc etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{hskbondvert}%
+      % bond between 3 and 3a \@ccc -> \hskbondhoriz etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{j}{e}% bond between 3a and 7a \@jjj -> \hskbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{i}{d}% bond between 7a and 1 \@iii -> \hskbondd etc
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{a}}%
+  % bond between 3a and 4 \@ddd -> \hskbonda etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{h}{c}}%
+  % bond between 7a and 7 \@hhh -> \hskbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{g}{d}}%
+  % bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \hskbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{f}{e}}%
+  % bond between 5 and 6 \@fff -> \hskbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{f}}%
+  % bond between 4 and 5 \@eee -> \hskbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondb}% bond between 3a and 7a
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondf}% bond between 4 and 5
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondd}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else \if\member l\relax%
+\else \if\member a\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondc}% bond between 3 and 4
+\else \if\member b\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondb}% bond between 2 and 3
+\else \if\member c\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondvert}% bond between 3 and 3a
+\else \if\member d\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbonda}% bond between 4 and 3a
+}%
+\else \if\member e\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondf}% bond between 4 and 5
+}%
+\else \if\member f\relax%
+{\let\eee=\fff \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbonde}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else \if\member g\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\eee \let\eee=\fff%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondd}% bond between 6 and 7
+}%
+\else \if\member h\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii \let\ddd=\eee%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondc}% bond between 7 and 7a
+}%
+\else \if\member i\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondd}% bond between 1 and 7a
+}%
+\else \if\member j\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondb}% bond between 7a and 3a
+}%
+\else \if\member J\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbonde}% bond between 7a and 3a
+}%
+\else \if\member B%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(233,0){180}%               %circle (five-membered)
+\else \if\member A%left aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(203,-342){240}%            %circle (six-membered)
+\else 
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{3a}\def\aay{7a}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{68}{-360}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-452}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-452}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-360}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putratom{196}{-30}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+   \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@nonah
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+\@tmpclipfalse
+%position 7 should be treated before 
+%position 1 (using the same \if@clip)
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){%
+%%\@clipfalse%2003/5/1 bugfix by Shinsaku Fujita deleted/2006/9/5
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{11}{3}{7}{-1}%
+% \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \global\@gcliptrue \fi%
+% \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \global\@fcliptrue \fi%
+% \@eclipfalse \if@clip \global\@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \@gcliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+ \@eclipfalse \if@clip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@clipfalse%2006/9/5added
+\storeclipinfo
+}%substituents on 5 to 7
+%%\developclipinfo%%2006/9/5 deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{5}{1}{5}{-1}%
+%   \if@aclip \global\@acliptrue\fi
+%   \if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+%   \if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 1 to 3
+%%\developclipinfo%%2006/9/5 deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{-3}{0}{2}{0}%
+% \@aclipfalse \if@aclip \global\@hcliptrue \fi%
+% \@aclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \fi
+ \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \fi%%2006/9/5 bugfix
+\storeclipinfo
+}%%substituent on 4
+%%\developclipinfo%%2006/9/5 deleted
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@nonafuseh{#3}%
+  \@iclipfalse%2006/9/5 bugfix by Shinsaku Fujita
+  \@jclipfalse%2006/9/5 bugfix by Shinsaku Fujita
+  \@tmpclipfalse
+%%  \if@iclip \global\@tmpcliptrue \fi
+%%  \if@jclip \global\@icliptrue \fi
+%%  \if@tmpclip \global\@jcliptrue \fi
+  \if@iclip \@tmpcliptrue \fi
+  \if@jclip \@icliptrue \else \@iclipfalse \fi
+  \if@tmpclip \@jcliptrue \else \@jclipfalse \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+%===\clipinfo===
+}% fused positions
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringh{#4}{5}{1}{5}{-1}}%  %substituents on 1 to 3
+{\@clipfalse \if@eclip \@cliptrue \fi%     %substituents on 5 to 7
+ \@eclipfalse \if@fclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@gclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\setsixringh{#4}{11}{3}{7}{-1}}%
+}%
+{\@aclipfalse \if@hclip \@acliptrue \fi%   %substituent on 4
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\setsixringh{#4}{-3}{0}{2}{0}}%
+}%
+{%
+% \@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%change to the next line
+ \@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%2006/9/5
+ \Put@Direct(303,-171){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{4}}%   %9 for 7a position
+}%
+{%
+% \@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%change to the next line
+ \@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%2006/9/5
+  \Put@Direct(103,-171){\setatombond{#4}{-7}{10}}% %8 for 3a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%        %end of \nonaheteroh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@vrtx@nonafuseh| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\nonaheteroh|, where the macro is used to set 
+% a hetero atom on a vertex of a bridgehead location.  
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/05}{New command: \cs{set@vrtx@nonafuseh}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@nonafuseh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@nonafuseh#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa\or\or
+ \or%%%%3
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%             % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpb h%
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `3a' or `8'}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb s%
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `3a' or `8'}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax
+   \else
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `3a' or `8'}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \or\or\or
+ \or%7
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%             % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb h%
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `7a' or `9'}%
+   \else\if\@tmpb s%
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `7a' or `9'}%
+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty\relax
+   \else
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `7a' or `9'}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\or%8 (= 3a)
+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%             % left type
+   \else
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `3a' or `8'}%
+   \fi
+\or%9 (= 7a)
+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty%
+     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%             % right type
+   \else
+      \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden fused position `7a' or `9'}%
+   \fi
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@nonafuseh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The standard skeleton of a six-to-five fused heterocycle is selected 
+% to have the following locant numbers. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************************
+% * nonahetero derivatives           *
+% *  (horizontal type, inverse type) *
+% ************************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%
+%           2   3
+%
+%        1       
+%
+%       (9)7a   3a(8)
+%
+%       7          4
+%
+%           6   5
+%   ____                     ____
+%  |cf.                          |
+%  |        7 (9) 1              |
+%  |        *  7a *              |
+%  |   6  *   * *   *  2         |
+%  |     |     |     |           |
+%  |     |     |     |           |
+%  |   5  *   * -----  3         |
+%  |        *  3a                |
+%  |        4 (8)                |
+%  |        ^                    |
+%  |        |                    |
+%  |        the original point   |
+%  |____                     ____|
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\nonaheterohi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \nonaheterohi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `j' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to j, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The options `A' and `B' represent aromatic circles in two rings. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $9$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  aromatic six-membered ring
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  3,3a-double bond     d    :  4,3a-double bond
+%           e    :  4,5-double bond      f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,7a-double bond
+%           i    :  1,7a-double bond
+%           j    :  3a,4a-double bond
+%           J    :  3a,4a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle (six-membered)
+%           B    :  aromatic circle (five-membered)
+%           {n+} :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 9)
+%           {0+} :  plus (or others) at the center 
+%                    of the five-membered cycle
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 9 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 7
+%
+%            n         : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+%            na        : Hetero atom at 3a or 7b (n=3 or 7)
+%                        e.g. 3a==N (or 8==N) for N at 4a-position
+%                             7a==N (or 9==N) for N at 8a-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 8 (3a position) and 9 (7a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to j; see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \nonaheterohi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \nonaheterohi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\nonaheterohi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringh| several times in 
+% a restricted fashion. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/05}{Add: fused and spiro rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nonaheterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nona@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nona@@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nonaheterohi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonaheterohi{\@ifnextchar({\@nona@heterohi(@}{\@nona@heterohi(@)}}
+\def\@nona@heterohi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@nona@@heterohi(#1)[@}%
+{\@nona@@heterohi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@nona@@heterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@nonaheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@nonaheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@nonaheterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag\iniatom%initialize
+\test@vertix@nonavi{#3}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adjustment for (yl) %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpositionh{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}%   %substituents on 1 to 3
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA
+\ylpositionh{#4}{0}{3}{7}{0}%%substituents on 4 to 6
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{342}\fi
+\else
+{\let\aaa=\hhh
+\ylpositionh{#4}{-6}{0}{2}{0}%%substituent on 7
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{342}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-7}{4}%  %8 for 3a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-303}\def\@@yli{171}\fi
+\else
+{%
+\clipdetection%
+\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+\ylatombondposition{#4}{-8}{10}%%9 for 7a position
+}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-103}\def\@@yli{171}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1200,1200)(-400,-800){nonaheterohi}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begingroup
+\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+{\let\fff=\jjj \let\eee=\iii%
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{a}{a}% bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \hskbonda etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{b}{b}% bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \hskbondb etc
+\set@skel@longbond{#1}{c}{hskbondverti}%
+      % bond between 3 and 3a \@ccc -> \hskbondverti etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{j}{e}% bond between 3a and 7a \@jjj -> \hskbonde etc
+\set@skel@bondh{#1}{i}{f}% bond between 7a and 1 \@iii -> \hskbondf etc
+}%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{h}{a}}%
+  % bond between 7a and 7 \@hhh -> \hskbonda etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{d}{c}}%
+  % bond between 3a and 4 \@ddd -> \hskbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{e}{d}}%
+  % bond between 4 and 5 \@eee -> \hskbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{f}{e}}%
+  % bond between 5 and 6 \@fff -> \hskbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@skel@bondh{#1}{g}{f}}%
+  % bond between 6 and 7 \@ggg -> \hskbondf etc
+}%
+\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff\let\fff=\gggA%
+ \let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondb}% bond between 3a and 7a
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondf}% bond between 6 and 7
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondd}% bond between 4 and 5
+}%
+\else \if\member l\relax%
+\else \if\member a\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbonda}% bond between 1 and 2
+\else \if\member b\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondb}% bond between 2 and 3
+\else \if\member c\relax%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondverti}% bond between 3 and 3a
+\else \if\member d\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii \let\ddd=\eee%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondc}% bond between 4 and 3a
+}%
+\else \if\member e\relax%
+{\let\ddd=\eee\let\eee=\fff%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondd}% bond between 4 and 5
+}%
+\else \if\member f\relax%
+{\let\eee=\fff \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbonde}% bond between 5 and 6
+}%
+\else \if\member g\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\fff=\gggA%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondf}% bond between 7 and 6
+}%
+\else \if\member h\relax%
+{\let\aaa=\hhh \let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbonda}% bond between 7 and 7a
+}%
+\else \if\member i\relax%
+{\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbondf}% bond between 1 and 7a
+}%
+\else \if\member j\relax%
+{\let\ccc=\iii\let\bbb=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,-342){\hbondb}% bond between 7a and 3a
+}%
+\else \if\member J\relax%
+{\let\eee=\iii\let\fff=\jjj%
+ \Put@Direct(0,0){\hbonde}% bond between 7a and 3a
+}%
+\else \if\member B%aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(173,0){180}%               %circle (five-membered)
+\else \if\member A%aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(203,-342){240}%            %circle (six-membered)
+\else
+ \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+  \def\aax{7a}\def\aay{3a}%
+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{68}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 7\relax%
+        \putratom{68}{-360}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-452}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-452}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{272}{-360}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 9\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aax\relax%
+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\ifx\@@tmpa\aay\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 8\relax%
+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putratom{140}{-30}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+% ***********************
+% * setting fused rings *
+% ***********************
+   \expandafter\twoCH@R\member//%
+   \set@fusion@nonahi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{0}{4}{0}%
+%   \if@aclip \global\@acliptrue\fi
+%   \if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+%   \if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}% %substituents on 1 to 3
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{3}{7}{0}%
+%   \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \global\@gcliptrue \fi%
+%   \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \global\@fcliptrue \fi%
+%   \@eclipfalse \if@clip \global\@ecliptrue \fi
+   \@gclipfalse \if@fclip \@gcliptrue \fi%
+   \@fclipfalse \if@eclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+   \@eclipfalse \if@clip \@ecliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%substituents on 4 to 6
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){%
+\@aclipfalse\@bclipfalse\@cclipfalse%2003/05/01 bugfix by Shinsaku Fujita
+\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{-6}{0}{2}{0}%
+%  \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \global\@hcliptrue \fi
+  \@hclipfalse \if@aclip \@hcliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%%substituent on 7
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@vrtx@nonafusehi{#3}%
+%  \if@iclip \global\@icliptrue \fi
+%  \if@jclip \global\@jcliptrue \fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}% fused positions
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents and exocyclic bonds %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\setsixringh{#4}{0}{0}{4}{0}}%   %substituents on 1 to 3
+{\@clipfalse \if@eclip \@cliptrue \fi%     %substituents on 4 to 6
+ \@eclipfalse \if@fclip \@ecliptrue \fi%
+ \@fclipfalse \if@gclip \@fcliptrue \fi%
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\setsixringh{#4}{0}{3}{7}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@aclipfalse \if@hclip \@acliptrue \fi%   %substituent on 7
+\Put@Direct(0,-342){\setsixringh{#4}{-6}{0}{2}{0}}%
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@iclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+ \Put@Direct(303,-171){\setatombond{#4}{-7}{4}}%  %8 for 3a position
+}%
+{\@clipfusefalse \if@jclip \@clipfusetrue \fi%
+  \Put@Direct(103,-171){\setatombond{#4}{-8}{10}}%%9 for 7a position
+}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%      %end of \nonaheterohi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\set@vrtx@nonafusehi| is to set an atom (stored as 
+% |\@memberb|) at one (stored as |\@tmpa|) of the fused vertices 
+% of a six-five ring.  
+% These vertices are incapable of accomodating a spiro group. 
+% On the other hand, the other positions can take spiro groups 
+% (stored as |\@memberb|), which are treated by means of 
+% the command |\set@hetatom@sixh|. 
+% The command |\set@vrtx@nonafusehi| is used in such commands 
+% as |\nonaheterohi| for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@nonafusehi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@vrtx@nonafusehi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@vrtx@nonafusehi#1{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or
+ \or
+ \or%%%%3
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % right type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+ \or%4
+ \or%5
+ \or%6
+ \or%7
+   \if\@tmpb a%
+     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % left type
+   \else\relax
+   \fi
+\or%8 (= 3a)
+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty
+     \global\@icliptrue%
+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % right type
+   \else
+     \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden spiro ring for the 3a position}%
+   \fi
+\or%9 (= 7a)
+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty
+     \global\@jcliptrue%
+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % left type
+   \else
+     \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden spiro ring for the 7a position}%
+   \fi
+\fi\fi}%
+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@nonafusehi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Short-cut commands for fused heterocycles}
+%
+% The macros |\nonaheteroh| and |\nonaheterohi| can be used in the 
+% form of a fixed |ATOMLIST|.  Hence, the resulting commands for 
+% drawing a fused heterocyle with one or more nitrogen atoms 
+% have an argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************************************
+% * heterocycles having fused six- and five-membered rings *
+% *  (horizontal type)                                     *
+% **********************************************************
+%
+%   N-heterocycles:
+%
+%   \indoleh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \indolehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \isoindoleh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \isoindolehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \indolizineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \indolizinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%          (different from the IUPAC numbering)
+%
+%   \purineh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \purinehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%          (different from the IUPAC numbering)
+%
+%   O-heterocycles:
+%
+%   \benzofuraneh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \benzofuranehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \isobenzofuranehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%
+%   \benzoxazoleh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \benzoxazolehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to j, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The optiona `A' typesets an aromatic circle. 
+% The option 
+% `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $9$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  aromatic six-membered ring
+%           []         :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  3,3a-double bond     d    :  4,3a-double bond
+%           e    :  4,5-double bond      f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,7a-double bond
+%           i    :  1,7a-double bond
+%           j    :  3a,4a-double bond
+%           J    :  3a,4a-double bond in the other ring
+%           A    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 9)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%
+%       for 8 (3a position) and 9 (7a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \indoleh{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \indoleh[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\purineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\purinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\purineh{\@ifnextchar[{\@purineh[@}{\@purineh[ra]}}%
+\def\@purineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `purineh' %
+ is based on `nonaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\nonaheteroh[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;7==N}{#2}}%
+\def\purinehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@purinehi[@}{\@purinehi[ra]}}%
+\def\@purinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `purinehi' %
+ is based on `nonaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterohi[#1]{1==N;3==N;5==N;7==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indoleh}
+% \begin{macro}{\indolehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indoleh{\@ifnextchar[{\@indoleh[@}{\@indoleh[rb]}}%
+\def\@indoleh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indoleh' %
+ is based on `nonaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\nonaheteroh[#1]{1==N}{#2}}%
+\def\indolehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@indolehi[@}{\@indolehi[rb]}}%
+\def\@indolehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indolehi' %
+ is based on `nonaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterohi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indolizineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\indolizinehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indolizineh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@indolizineh[@}{\@indolizineh[aceg]}}%
+\def\@indolizineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indolizineh' %
+  is based on `nonaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\nonaheteroh[#1]{7a==N}{#2}}%
+\def\indolizinehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@indolizinehi[@}{\@indolizinehi[aceg]}}%
+\def\@indolizinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indolizinehi' %
+ is based on `nonaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterohi[#1]{7a==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\isoindoleh}
+% \begin{macro}{\isoindolehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\isoindoleh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@isoindoleh[@}{\@isoindoleh[cegi]}}%
+\def\@isoindoleh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoindoleh' %
+ is based on `nonaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\nonaheteroh[#1]{2==N}{#2}}%
+\def\isoindolehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@isoindolehi[@}{\@isoindolehi[cegi]}}%
+\def\@isoindolehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isoindolehi' %
+ is based on `nonaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterohi[#1]{2==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\benzofuraneh}
+% \begin{macro}{\benzofuranehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\benzofuraneh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@benzofuraneh[@}{\@benzofuraneh[rb]}}%
+\def\@benzofuraneh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `benzofuraneh' %
+ is based on `nonaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\nonaheteroh[#1]{1==O}{#2}}%
+\def\benzofuranehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@benzofuranehi[@}{\@benzofuranehi[rb]}}%
+\def\@benzofuranehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `benzofuranehi' %
+ is based on `nonaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterohi[#1]{1==O}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\isobenzofuraneh}
+% \begin{macro}{\isobenzofuranehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\isobenzofuraneh{\@ifnextchar[{\@isobenzofuraneh[@}%
+ {\@isobenzofuraneh[cegi]}}%
+\def\@isobenzofuraneh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isobenzofuraneh' %
+ is based on `nonaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\nonaheteroh[#1]{2==O}{#2}}%
+\def\isobenzofuranehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@isobenzofuranehi[@}%
+ {\@isobenzofuranehi[cegi]}}%
+\def\@isobenzofuranehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `isobenzofuranehi' %
+ is based on `nonaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterohi[#1]{2==O}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\benzoxazoleh}
+% \begin{macro}{\benzoxazolehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\benzoxazoleh{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@benzoxazoleh[@}{\@benzoxazoleh[rb]}}%
+\def\@benzoxazoleh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `benzoxazoleh' %
+ is based on `nonaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\nonaheteroh[#1]{1==O;3==N}{#2}}%
+\def\benzoxazolehi{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@benzoxazolehi[@}{\@benzoxazolehi[rb]}}%
+\def\@benzoxazolehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `benzoxazolehi' %
+ is based on `nonaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterohi[#1]{1==O;3==N}{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Building blocks}
+% \subsection{Six-membered ring unit}
+%
+% The old function (v1.01) of |\sixunitv| as a fusing ring unit 
+% is succeeded by |\sixfusev| and |\sixfusevi|. 
+% The command |\sixunitv| has been changed into a subsidiary 
+% command of |\sixheterov| (v2.00). 
+%
+% The macro |\sixunith| is a six-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another 
+% ring structure to produce a new ring system. The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************
+% * six-membered unit  *
+% *  (horizontal type) *
+% **********************
+%                                   b
+%                                2      3  
+%                            a    -----    c
+%                               *       *
+%   the original point ===> 1 *           * 4
+%          (0,0)                *       *  d
+%                            f    -----
+%                                6      5 
+%                                   e
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\sixunith| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |OMIT| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \sixunith[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{OMIT}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to f, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $6$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  fully saturated
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond
+%           f          :  6,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 6)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \sixhunitv{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}{e}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\sixunith| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringh|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sixunith}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sixunith}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixunith{\@ifnextchar[{\@sixunith[@}{\@sixunith[@]}}
+\def\@sixunith[#1]#2#3#4{\sixheteroh[#1]{#2}{#3}[#4]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{\cs{sixunith}: Old definition deleted.}
+%
+% \subsection{Five-membered ring unit}
+% \subsubsection{Horizonatl type}
+%
+% The old function (v1.01) of |\fiveunith| as a fusing ring unit 
+% is succeeded by |\fivefuseh|. 
+% The command |\fiveunith| has been changed into a subsidiary 
+% command of |\fiveheteroh| (v2.00). 
+%
+% The macro |\fiveunith| is a five-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another 
+% ring structure to produce a new ring system. The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************
+% * five-membered unit *
+% *  (horizontal type) *
+% **********************
+%
+%     3  _____  2
+%       |       *
+%       |         * 1 <===== the original point
+%       |       *
+%     4  -----  5
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveunith| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |OMIT| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fiveunith[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{OMIT}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus (or others) at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fiveunith{1==N}{1==H;2==F}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fiveunith| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringh| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveunith}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fiveunith}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveunith{\@ifnextchar[{\@fiveunith[@}{\@fiveunith[r]}}
+\def\@fiveunith[#1]#2#3#4{\fiveheteroh[#1]{#2}{#3}[#4]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{\cs{fiveunith}: Old definition deleted.}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The old function (v1.01) of |\fiveunithi| as a fusing ring unit 
+% is succeeded by |\fivefusehi|. 
+% The command |\fiveunithi| has been changed into a subsidiary 
+% command of |\fiveheterohi| (v2.00). 
+%
+% The macro |\fiveunithi| typesets a five-membered fragment that can be 
+% fused to another 
+% ring structure to produce a new ring system. The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ************************************
+% * five-membered unit               *
+% *  (horizontal type, inverse type) *
+% ************************************
+%
+%                       2  -----  3
+%                        *       |
+% the original point 1 *         |
+%                        *       |
+%                           _____|
+%                        5        4
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\fiveunithi| has three arguments |ATOMLIST|, |SUBSLIST| 
+% and |OMIT| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \fiveunithi[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}{OMIT}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $5$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus (or others) at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one bond to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edge is regarded as a fused position. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one bond omitted (a, b, c, d, e, or f)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \fiveunithi{1==N}{1==H;2==F}{a}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\fiveunithi| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheteroh|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringh| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fiveunithi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fiveunithi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fiveunithi{\@ifnextchar[{\@fiveunithi[@}{\@fiveunithi[r]}}
+\def\@fiveunithi[#1]#2#3#4{\fiveheterohi[#1]{#2}{#3}[#4]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{\cs{fiveunithi}: Old definition deleted.}
+% 
+% \section{Three-membered heterocycles}
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\threeheteroh| typesets a three-membered ring.  The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * thereehetero derivatives *
+% *  (horizontal type)       *
+% ****************************
+
+%   aaa fff
+%    3
+%    | ` c
+%  b |    1 bbb ccc
+%    |  / a
+%    2/
+%    ddd eee
+%
+% --                                    --
+% | cf. threeehetero                      |
+% | fff 3--------2bbb                     |
+% |     `     /                           |
+% |  ddd  `1/ <===== the original point   |
+% |                                       |
+% --                                    -- 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\threeheteroh| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \threeheteroh(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `c' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $3$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=4$ to $6$) represents a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to c; see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \threeheteroh{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \threeheteroh[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \threeheteroh{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\threeheteroh| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the same unit processes as shown in |\sixheterov|: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item treatment of atom list, 
+% \item placing outer skeletons, 
+% \item placing inner double bonds, 
+% \item setting hetero atoms, and 
+% \item placing substituents by using |\setsixringv| partially. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threeheteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@@heteroh}
+% \begin{macro}{\@threeheteroh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threeheteroh{\@ifnextchar({\@three@heteroh(@}{\@three@heteroh(@)}}
+\def\@three@heteroh(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@three@@heteroh(#1)[@}%
+{\@three@@heteroh(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@three@@heteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@threeheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@threeheteroh(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@threeheteroh(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure of adusting substitution positions is based on 
+% a horizontal six-membered ring, in which the positions 
+% 4 (ddd), 6 (fff), 2 (bbb) are used in place of the positions 
+% 1, 2, and 3 of the three-membered ring. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{d}{f}{b}{@}{@}{@}%tentative use for six-h
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpositionh{#4}{3}{3}{5}{0}%subst 1
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{235}\def\@@yli{-103}\fi
+\else
+\ylpositionh{#4}{-1}{1}{3}{0}%subst 3
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{103}\def\@@yli{-29}\fi
+\else
+\ylpositionh{#4}{4}{5}{7}{0}%subst 2
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{103}\def\@@yli{-171}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(580,700)(-200,-240){threeheteroh}%
+(200,240)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedures of setting skeletal and inner bonds are based on 
+% a vertical six-membered ring, where the bonds c, e, and a are 
+% used in place of the bonds a, b, and c.  Hence, 
+% (1) the bond a of the latter should be related to |\bbb| and |\ccc| at 
+% the one terminal and to |\eee| and |\ddd| at the other terminal; 
+% (2) the bond b of the latter should be related to |\eee| and |\ddd| at 
+% the one terminal and to |\aaa| and |\fff| at the other terminal; and 
+% (3) the bond c of the latter should be related to |\bbb| and |\ccc| at 
+% the one terminal and to |\aaa| and |\fff| at the other terminal. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % retreatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{c}{e}{a}{@}{@}{@}%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{b}{d}{f}{@}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{c}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondc etc
+\Put@Direct(171,-103){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{e}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbonde etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-200){\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{a}}%
+       % bond between 3 and 1 \@ccc -> \skbonda etc
+}%
+%
+% \Put@Direct(0,0){\skbondc}% bond between 1 and 2
+% \Put@Direct(0,-200){\skbonda}% bond between 1 and 3
+% \Put@Direct(171,-103){\skbonde}%bond between 2 and 3
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondc}%
+\else\if\member b\relax\Put@Direct(171,-103){\bonde}%
+\else\if\member c\relax\Put@Direct(0,-200){\bonda}%
+\else\if\member A\relax% aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(70,103){100}%               %circle
+\else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@threeh
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The proceduce of setting hetero atoms on the vertices of 
+% a three-membered ring is based on the macro |\set@hetaromh@sixh|, 
+% where the positions 4, 6, and 2 of a horizontal six-membered ring 
+% are used in place of the positions 1, 2, and 3 of the three-membered ring. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+%\Put@Direct(-235,103){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{3}{3}{5}{0}%
+\Put@Direct(-215,103){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{3}{3}{5}{0}%
+%\if@clip \global\@cliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 1 <--six h 4
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-103,29){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{-1}{1}{3}{0}%
+%\if@bclip \global\@bcliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 3 <--six h 2
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-103,171){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{4}{5}{7}{0}%
+%\if@fclip \global\@fcliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 2 <--six h 6
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-235,103){\setsixringh{#4}{3}{3}{5}{0}}%subst 1
+\Put@Direct(-103,29){\setsixringh{#4}{-1}{1}{3}{0}}%subst 3
+\Put@Direct(-103,171){\setsixringh{#4}{4}{5}{7}{0}}%subst 2
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \threeheteroh macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@threeh| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\threeheteroh| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@threeh|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@threeh}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@threeh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@threeh{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putratom{35}{85}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putratom{80}{85}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putratom{15}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%     % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putratom{15}{120}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%    % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putratom{180}{130}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putratom{20}{-60}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % right type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putratom{20}{230}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%    % right type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@threeh
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@threeh| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@threeh}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@threeh}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@threeh{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{200}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{200}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@threeh
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/3/19}{added \cs{oxiraneh}, \cs{aziridineh}, and \cs{thiiraneh} }
+% \begin{macro}{\oxiraneh}
+% \begin{macro}{\aziridineh}
+% \begin{macro}{\thiiraneh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oxiraneh{\@ifnextchar[{\@oxiraneh[@}{\@oxiraneh[]}}
+\def\@oxiraneh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `oxiraneh' %
+  is based on `threeheteroh'.}\fi%
+\threeheteroh[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\aziridineh{\@ifnextchar[{\@aziridineh[@}{\@aziridineh[]}}
+\def\@aziridineh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `aziridineh' %
+  is based on `threeheteroh'.}\fi%
+\threeheteroh[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\thiiraneh{\@ifnextchar[{\@thiiraneh[@}{\@thiiraneh[]}}
+\def\@thiiraneh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `thiiraneh' %
+  is based on `threeheteroh'.}\fi%
+\threeheteroh[#1]{1==S}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}
+%
+% The macro |\threeheterohi| typesets a three-membered ring.  The following 
+% numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *******************************
+% * thereehetero derivatives    *
+% *  (vertical horizontal type) *
+% *******************************
+%
+%          aaa bbb
+%     c    3
+%       /  |
+% eee  1   | b
+% fff   a` |
+%          2 <---original point
+%          ccc ddd
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macro |\threeheterohi| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% Two optional arguments |SKBONDLIST| and |OMIT| are added to 
+% treat stereochemical information or other bond situations. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \threeheterohi(SKBONDLIST)[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}[OMIT]
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SKBONDLIST| argument contains pairs of two alphabets in 
+% parentheses, e.g. (\{bA\}\{fB\}).  Each pair contains a lowercase 
+% character selected from bond specifiers `a' to `c' and a uppercase
+% character `A' or `B'. 
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one 
+% character selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$ to $3$) represents a plus charge on a hetero atom 
+% at the $n$-position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=4$ to $6$) represents a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `$0+$' typesets a plus charge at the center of the ring. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n          : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 
+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 
+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for ring fusion 
+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 
+%                           for the other ring fusion 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |OMIT| represents one or more bonds to be omitted. 
+% The omitted edges may be regarded as both fused and non-fused 
+% positions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     OMIT:  one or more bonds omitted (a to c; see BONDLIST)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \threeheterohi{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \threeheterohi[c]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \threeheterohi{1==N}{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylposition}, \cs{if@ylsw},
+% \cs{yl@shifti}, \cs{@ylii}, \cs{yl@shiftii}, \cs{@ylii}, 
+% \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{Add: spiro and fused rings}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{The
+% \cs{storeclipinfo} command is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\threeheterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@three@@heterohi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@threeheterohi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\threeheterohi{\@ifnextchar({\@three@heterohi(@}{\@three@heterohi(@)}}
+\def\@three@heterohi(#1){\@ifnextchar[{\@three@@heterohi(#1)[@}%
+{\@three@@heterohi(#1)[@]}}
+\def\@three@@heterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4{\@ifnextchar[%
+{\@threeheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@}%
+{\@threeheterohi(#1)[#2]{#3}{#4}[@]}}
+\def\@threeheterohi(#1)[#2]#3#4[#5]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure of adusting substitution positions is based on 
+% a horizontal six-membered ring, in which the positions 
+% 1 (aaa), 5 (eee), 3 (ccc) are used in place of the positions 
+% 1, 2, and 3 of the three-membered ring. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % treatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{a}{e}{c}{@}{@}{@}%tentative use for six-h
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % adustment of subs positions %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylpositionh{#4}{0}{0}{2}{0}%subst 1
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{171}\def\@@yli{-103}\fi
+\else
+\ylpositionh{#4}{0}{2}{4}{0}%subst 3
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{303}\def\@@yli{-29}\fi
+\else
+\ylpositionh{#4}{3}{4}{6}{0}%subst 2
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{303}\def\@@yli{-171}\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(580,700)(-400,-240){threeheterohi}%
+(400,240)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedures of setting skeletal and inner bonds are based on 
+% a vertical six-membered ring, where the bonds d, b, and f are 
+% used in place of the bonds a, b, and c.  
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % retreatment of atom list %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{e}{c}{a}{@}{@}{@}%
+\test@vertix@sixv{#3}{f}{d}{b}{@}{@}{@}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+{\resetbdsw%
+\@bond@@omit{#5}%
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\set@skel@bond{#1}{a}{d}}%
+       % bond between 1 and 2 \@aaa -> \skbondd etc
+\Put@Direct(-171,-103){\set@skel@bond{#1}{b}{b}}%
+       % bond between 2 and 3 \@bbb -> \skbondb etc
+\Put@Direct(0,-200){\set@skel@bond{#1}{c}{f}}%
+       % bond between 3 and 1 \@ccc -> \skbondf etc
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@tfor\member:=#2\do{%
+\if\member r\relax%
+\else\if\member a\relax\Put@Direct(0,0){\bondd}%
+\else\if\member b\relax\Put@Direct(-171,-103){\bondb}%
+\else\if\member c\relax\Put@Direct(0,-200){\bondf}%
+\else\if\member A\relax% aromatic circle 
+  \Put@oCircle(70,103){100}%               %circle
+\else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond attachment %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+   \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusionadd@threehi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The proceduce of setting hetero atoms on the vertices of 
+% a three-membered ring is based on the macro |\set@hetaromh@sixh|, 
+% where the positions 1, 5, and 3 of a horizontal six-membered ring 
+% are used in place of the positions 1, 2, and 3 of the three-membered ring. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iniflag
+\Put@Direct(-171,103){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{0}{2}{0}%
+%\if@aclip \global\@acliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 1 <--six h 1
+\developclipinfo
+\Put@Direct(-303,29){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{0}{2}{4}{0}%
+%\if@cclip \global\@ccliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+\developclipinfo
+}%subst 3 <--six h 3
+\Put@Direct(-303,171){\set@hetatom@sixh{#3}{3}{4}{6}{0}%
+%\if@eclip \global\@ecliptrue\fi
+\storeclipinfo
+}%subst 2 <--six h 5
+\developclipinfo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\Put@Direct(-171,103){\setsixringh{#4}{0}{0}{2}{0}}%subst 1
+\Put@Direct(-303,29){\setsixringh{#4}{0}{2}{4}{0}}%subst 3
+\Put@Direct(-303,171){\setsixringh{#4}{3}{4}{6}{0}}%subst 2
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+\iniatom\iniflag}%     %end of \threeheterohi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@threehi| is an inner command contained 
+% in the definition of |\threeheterohi| etc., where   
+% the macro is used for setting an additive 
+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 
+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@threehi|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@threeh}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@threehi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusionadd@threehi{%
+      \if\@@tmpa 0\relax%
+        \putlatom{-35}{85}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%
+        \putlatom{-80}{85}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%
+        \putlatom{-15}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%     % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%
+        \putlatom{-15}{120}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%    % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%
+        \putlatom{-180}{130}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%
+        \putlatom{-20}{-60}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%      % left type
+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%
+        \putlatom{-20}{230}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%    % left type
+      \else
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+        \set@fusion@threehi
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+}% 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@threehi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@threehi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@threehi}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@threehi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{200}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{200}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@threehi
+%</hetaromh>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/3/19}{added \cs{oxiranehi}, \cs{aziridinehi}, and \cs{thiiranehi} }
+% \begin{macro}{\oxiranehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\aziridinehi}
+% \begin{macro}{\thiiranehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oxiranehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@oxiranehi[@}{\@oxiranehi[]}}
+\def\@oxiranehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `oxiranehi' %
+  is based on `threeheterohi'.}\fi%
+\threeheterohi[#1]{1==O}{#2}}
+\def\aziridinehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@aziridinehi[@}{\@aziridinehi[]}}
+\def\@aziridinehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `aziridinehi' %
+  is based on `threeheterohi'.}\fi%
+\threeheterohi[#1]{1==N}{#2}}
+\def\thiiranehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@thiiranehi[@}{\@thiiranehi[]}}
+\def\@thiiranehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `thiiranehi' %
+  is based on `threeheterohi'.}\fi%
+\threeheterohi[#1]{1==S}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetaromh.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetaromh.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bb8486a8e4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/hetaromh.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+\def\batchfile{hetaromh.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996,1998,2000,2001,2002, 2004, 2006, 2010, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996 
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1996 (private version)
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.00a Released on November 11, 2000
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.01 Released on August 30, 2004
+Version 4.02 Released on December 20, 2004
+Version 4.03b Released on September 5, 2006
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.01 Released on March 19, 2013
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files hetaromh.dtx and hetaromh.ins
+and the derived file hetaromh.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{hetaromh.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{hetaromh.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{hetaromh.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{hetaromh.dtx}{hetaromh}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lewisstruc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lewisstruc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c09cf229bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lewisstruc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1242 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: lewisstruc.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 2009, 2010, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file (lewisstruc.sty) is a successor to:
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files lewisstruc.dtx and lewisstruc.ins
+% and the derived file lewisstruc.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lewisstruc}
+% \def\versi@ndate{November 03, 2009}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF}% Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lewisstruc}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1697}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.00}{2009/11/03}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/08/02}{bug fix}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{lewisstruc.dtx}[2013/08/02 v5.01 lewisstruc package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{lewisstruc.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Lewis Structures by {\sffamily lewisstruc.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and 
+Mathematical Chemistry \\
+Kanagawa, 258-0019 Japan 
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{lewisstruc.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{lewisstruc:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% lewisstruc & lewisstruc.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lewisstruc>
+\typeout{Part of XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.01}
+\typeout{       -- Released August 02, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{lewisstruc}
+\def\versi@ndate{August 02, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The definition of the macro \verb/\LewisTetrahedralA/ uses the command 
+% \verb/\tetrahedral/ defined in the \textsf{aliphat} package of 
+% the \XyMTeX{} system.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{aliphat}
+%\@ifundefined{tetrahedral}{\input aliphat.sty\relax}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Basic Macros}
+% \subsection{Lone Pairs}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dotnodimension}
+% A basic command \verb/\dotnodimension/ is used to draw a dot (an electron).  
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dotnodimension{\smash{\hbox to0pt{\hss.\hss}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verticalpair}
+% The command \verb/\verticalpair/ is used to draw a vertical lone pair. 
+% \begin{macro}{\horizontalpair}
+% The command \verb/\horizontalpair/ is used to draw a vertical lone pair. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verticalpair{\vbox{%
+\dotnodimension
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.3em
+\dotnodimension}}
+\def\horizontalpair{%
+\hbox{\dotnodimension\kern0.3em\dotnodimension}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nwlonepair}
+% The command \verb/\nwlonepair/ is used to draw a lone pair located at 
+% the northwest position. 
+% \begin{macro}{\selonepair}
+% The command \verb/\selonepair/ is used to draw a lone pair at 
+% the southest posistion. 
+% \begin{macro}{\swlonepair}
+% The command \verb/\swlonepair/ is used to draw a lone pair at 
+% the southwest position.
+% \begin{macro}{\nelonepair}
+% The command \verb/\nelonepair/ is used to draw a lone pair at 
+% the northeast position. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nwlonepair{%
+\vtop{\hbox to0.21em{\hss\dotnodimension}%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.21em
+\hbox to0.21em{\dotnodimension\hss}%
+}}
+\def\selonepair{%
+\vbox{\hbox to0.21em{\hss\dotnodimension}%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.21em
+\hbox to0.21em{\dotnodimension\hss}%
+}}
+\def\swlonepair{%
+\vbox{\hbox to0.21em{\dotnodimension\hss}%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.21em
+\hbox to0.21em{\hss\dotnodimension}%
+}}
+\def\nelonepair{%
+\vtop{\hbox to0.21em{\dotnodimension\hss}%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.21em
+\hbox to0.21em{\hss\dotnodimension}%
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LewisSbond}
+% The command \verb/\LewisSbond/ is used to draw a vertical lone pair 
+% used in a horizontal position. For example, \verb/H\LewisSbond H/ 
+% outputs H:H for representing a hydrogen molecule.  
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LewisSbond{\raise0.12em\hbox to0.25em{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\overpair}
+% The command \verb/\overpair/ is used to draw a horizontal lone pair 
+% at the head of an atom specified by its argument. 
+% \begin{macro}{\underpair}
+% The command \verb/\underpair/ is used to draw a horizontal lone pair 
+% under an atom specified by its argument. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\overpair#1{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+\vbox{\hbox to\wd0{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}%
+\nointerlineskip\kern0.08em
+\box0}}
+\def\underpair#1{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+\dimen0=\wd0
+\vbox to\ht0{\box0
+\nointerlineskip
+\hbox{\vbox to0pt{\kern0.2em
+\hbox to\dimen0{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}\vss}}%
+\vss}}%bug fix 2013/08/02 \vss added
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Atoms Linked by a Lewis Bond}
+%
+% An atom (\verb/OverAtom/) which is attached to the top of an atom (\verb/BaseAtom/) 
+% through a Lewis bond is drawn by the following \verb/\overpairover/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \overpairover{BaseAtom}{OverAtom}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\overpairover}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\overpairover#1#2{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+\edef\temp@@a{#2}%
+\dimen0=\wd0%
+\ifx\temp@@a\empty\box0\else%
+\vbox{%
+\hbox to\dimen0{\hss#2\hss}%
+\nointerlineskip\kern0.2em
+\hbox to\dimen0{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}%
+\nointerlineskip\kern0.08em
+\hbox{\box0}}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% An atom (\verb/UnderAtom/) which is attached to the bottom of an atom (\verb/BaseAtom/) 
+% through a Lewis bond is drawn by the following \verb/\overpairover/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \underpairunder{BaseAtom}{UnderAtom}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\underpairunder}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\underpairunder#1#2{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+\edef\temp@@a{#2}%
+\dimen0=\wd0\dimen1=\ht0
+\ifx\temp@@a\empty\box0\else%
+\vbox to\dimen1{\hbox{\box0}%
+\nointerlineskip
+\hbox{\vbox to0pt{\kern0.18em
+\hbox to\dimen0{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}%
+\nointerlineskip\kern0.08em
+\hbox to\dimen0{\hss#2\hss}%
+\vss}}%
+\vss}\fi}%bug fix2013/08/02
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% An atom (\verb/NWAtom/) which is attached to the northwest of an atom (\verb/BaseAtom/) 
+% through a Lewis bond is drawn by the following \verb/\leftlonepairover/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \leftlonepairover{BaseAtom}{NWAtom}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftlonepairover}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\leftlonepairover#1#2{\leavevmode%
+\edef\temp@@{#2}%
+\ifx\temp@@\empty#1\else
+\hbox to0pt{\hss\raise0.9em\hbox{#2}\kern-0.05em\raise0.8em\hbox{\nwlonepair}\kern-0.1em}#1\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% An atom (\verb/NEAtom/) which is attached to the northeast of an atom (\verb/BaseAtom/) 
+% through a Lewis bond is drawn by the following \verb/\rightlonepairover/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \rightlonepairover{BaseAtom}{NEAtom}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rightlonepairover}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rightlonepairover#1#2{\leavevmode%
+#1%
+\edef\temp@@{#2}%
+\ifx\temp@@\empty\else
+\hbox to0pt{\kern-0.1em\raise0.8em\hbox{\nelonepair}\kern-0.05em%
+\raise0.9em\hbox{#2}\hss}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% An atom (\verb/SWAtom/) which is attached to the southwest of an atom (\verb/BaseAtom/) 
+% through a Lewis bond is drawn by the following \verb/\leftlonepairunder/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \leftlonepairunder{BaseAtom}{NEAtom}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftlonepairunder}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\leftlonepairunder#1#2{\leavevmode%
+\edef\temp@@{#2}%
+\ifx\temp@@\empty#1\else
+\hbox to0pt{\hss\lower0.9em\hbox{#2}\kern-0.05em%
+\lower0.2em\hbox{\swlonepair}\kern-0.1em}#1\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% An atom (\verb/SEAtom/) which is attached to the southeast of an atom (\verb/BaseAtom/) 
+% through a Lewis bond is drawn by the following \verb/\rightlonepairunder/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \rightlonepairunder{BaseAtom}{SEAtom}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rightlonepairunder}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rightlonepairunder#1#2{\leavevmode%
+#1%
+\edef\temp@@{#2}%
+\ifx\temp@@\empty\else
+\hbox to0pt{\kern-0.1em\lower0.2em\hbox{\selonepair}\kern-0.05em%
+\lower0.9em\hbox{#2}\hss}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Atoms (W, X, Y, and Z) which are attached to a central atom (A) 
+% through Lewis bonds are drawn by the following \verb/\LewistetrahedralA/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \LewistetrahedralA{0==A;1==W;2==X;3==Y;4==Z}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%              1
+%              W
+%              :
+%        4 Z : A : X 2
+%              :
+%              Y
+%              3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Each of the atoms can be omitted. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LewistetrahedralA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LewistetrahedralA#1{\begingroup%
+\let\temp@a=\empty%
+\let\temp@b=\empty%
+\let\temp@c=\empty%
+\let\temp@d=\empty%
+\let\temp@e=\empty%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa \edef\temp@a{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or\edef\temp@b{\@memberb}%
+\or\edef\temp@c{\@memberb}%
+\or\edef\temp@d{\@memberb}%
+\or\edef\temp@e{\@memberb}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi
+}%
+\leavevmode%
+\ifx\temp@e\empty
+\ifx\temp@c\empty
+\underpairunder{\overpairover{\temp@a}{\temp@b}}{\temp@d}%
+\else%c not empty
+\underpairunder{\overpairover{\temp@a}{\temp@b}}{\temp@d}%
+\LewisSbond\temp@c
+\fi
+\else%e not empty
+\ifx\temp@c\empty
+\temp@e\LewisSbond\underpairunder{\overpairover{\temp@a}{\temp@b}}{\temp@d}%
+\else
+\temp@e\LewisSbond\underpairunder{\overpairover{\temp@a}{\temp@b}}{\temp@d}%
+\LewisSbond\temp@c
+\fi\fi
+\endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Atoms (W, X, Y, and Z) which are attached to a central atom (A) 
+% through Lewis bonds are drawn by the following \verb/\LewistetrahedralB/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \LewistetrahedralB{0==A;1==W;2==X;3==Y;4==Z}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% 
+%      4  Z         W  1
+%           :     :
+%              A 
+%           :     :
+%      3  Y         X  2
+% 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Each of the atoms can be omitted. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LewistetrahedralB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LewistetrahedralB#1{\begingroup%
+\let\temp@a=\empty%
+\let\temp@b=\empty%
+\let\temp@c=\empty%
+\let\temp@d=\empty%
+\let\temp@e=\empty%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa \edef\temp@a{\@memberb}%central atom
+\or\edef\temp@b{\@memberb}%
+\or\edef\temp@c{\@memberb}%
+\or\edef\temp@d{\@memberb}%
+\or\edef\temp@e{\@memberb}%
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi
+}%
+\leavevmode%
+\rightlonepairover{%
+\leftlonepairover{\leftlonepairunder{%
+\rightlonepairunder{\temp@a}{\temp@c}}{\temp@d}}{\temp@e}}{\temp@b}%
+\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Lone Pairs around an Atom}
+%
+% Four lone pairs which are attached to a central atom (A) 
+% are drawn by the following \verb/\lonepairAitoiv/ command, 
+% where each of the top four argumets takes 0 (absence) or 1 (presence) for 
+% representing the absence or presece of a lone pair. The larst argument 
+% represents the central atom. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \lonepairAitoiv{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{A}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%              1
+%              :
+%        4   : A :  2
+%              :               
+%              3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lonepairAitoiv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lonepairAitoiv#1#2#3#4#5{\leavevmode
+\begingroup\setbox0=\hbox{#5}%
+\dimen0=\ht0 
+\dimen1=1.22\wd0%
+\setbox1=\hbox to\wd0{\hss%
+\smash{%\raise0.01em
+\hbox to\wd0{\hss%
+\ifnum#4=0\relax
+\phantom{\lower0.05em\hbox to0pt{\hss\vbox to\dimen0{\vss\verticalpair\vss}}}%
+\else
+\lower0.05em\hbox to0pt{\hss\vbox to\dimen0{\vss\verticalpair\vss}}%
+\fi%
+\lower0.2em\hbox{\vbox{\ifnum#1=0\relax
+\phantom{\hbox to\dimen1{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+\else
+\hbox to\dimen1{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}\fi%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.08em
+\hbox to\dimen1{\hss#5\hss}%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.2em
+\ifnum#3=0\relax
+\phantom{\hbox to\dimen1{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+\else
+\hbox to\dimen1{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}%
+\fi
+}}%
+\ifnum#2=0\relax
+\phantom{\lower0.05em\hbox to0pt{\vbox to\dimen0{\vss\verticalpair\vss}\hss}}%
+\else
+\lower0.05em\hbox to0pt{\vbox to\dimen0{\vss\verticalpair\vss}\hss}\fi%
+\hss}}\hss}%
+\wd1=\wd0 \ht1=\ht0\box1\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% A common code for transforming a command to another command is 
+% defined as the command \verb/\fromfourobjects/ 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fromfourobjects}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fromfourobjects#1#2{%
+\ifnum#1=1234\relax
+\TEMP@Command{1}{1}{1}{1}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=123\relax
+\TEMP@Command{1}{1}{1}{0}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=124\relax
+\TEMP@Command{1}{1}{0}{1}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=134\relax
+\TEMP@Command{1}{0}{1}{1}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=234\relax
+\TEMP@Command{0}{1}{1}{1}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=12\relax
+\TEMP@Command{1}{1}{0}{0}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=13\relax
+\TEMP@Command{1}{0}{1}{0}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=14\relax
+\TEMP@Command{1}{0}{0}{1}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=23\relax
+\TEMP@Command{0}{1}{1}{0}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=24\relax
+\TEMP@Command{0}{1}{0}{1}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=34\relax
+\TEMP@Command{0}{0}{1}{1}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=1\relax
+\TEMP@Command{1}{0}{0}{0}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=2\relax
+\TEMP@Command{0}{1}{0}{0}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=3\relax
+\TEMP@Command{0}{0}{1}{0}{#2}%
+\else\ifnum#1=4\relax
+\TEMP@Command{0}{0}{0}{1}{#2}%
+\else
+\TEMP@Command{1}{1}{1}{1}{#2}%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command \verb/\lonepairAitoiv/ is converted into 
+% the command \verb/\lonepairA/, where four lone pairs are 
+% specified by a set of numbers 1234, 234, etc as an optional
+% argument. The main argument specifies a central atom. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \lonepairA[1234, etc.]{A}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%              1
+%              :
+%        4   : A :  2
+%              :               
+%              3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lonepairA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lonepairA{\@ifnextchar[{\l@nepairA}{\l@nepairA[1234]}}
+\def\l@nepairA[#1]#2{\leavevmode%
+\begingroup\let\TEMP@Command=\lonepairAitoiv%
+\fromfourobjects{#1}{#2}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Four unpaired electron which are attached to a central atom (A) 
+% are drawn by the following \verb/\tetraradical/ command, 
+% where each of the top four argumets takes 0 (absence) or 1 (presence) for 
+% representing the absence or presece of an unpaired electron. The larst argument 
+% represents the central atom. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \tetraradical{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{A}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%              1
+%              .
+%        4   . A .  2
+%              . 
+%              3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chemradical}
+% \begin{macro}{\tetraradical}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\chemradical{\hbox to0pt{\hss.\hss}}
+\def\tetraradical#1#2#3#4#5{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{#5}%
+\dimen0=\ht0 
+\dimen1=1.22\wd0%
+\setbox1=\hbox to\wd0{\hss%
+\smash{%\raise0.01em
+\hbox to\wd0{\hss%
+\ifnum#4=0\relax
+\phantom{\raise0.02em\hbox to0pt{\hss\vbox to\dimen0{\vss\chemradical\vss}}}%
+\else
+\raise0.02em\hbox to0pt{\hss\vbox to\dimen0{\vss\chemradical\vss}}%
+\fi%
+%\kern0pt
+\lower0.22em\hbox{\vbox{%
+\ifnum#1=0\relax
+\phantom{\hbox to\dimen1{\hss\chemradical\hss}}%
+\else
+\hbox to\dimen1{\hss\chemradical\hss}\fi%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.08em
+\hbox to\dimen1{\hss#5\hss}%
+\nointerlineskip
+%\kern0.2em
+\kern0.12em
+\ifnum#3=0\relax
+\phantom{\hbox to\dimen1{\hss\chemradical\hss}}%
+\else
+\hbox to\dimen1{\hss\chemradical\hss}%
+\fi
+}}%
+%\kern0pt
+\ifnum#2=0\relax
+\phantom{\raise0.02em\hbox to0pt{\vbox to\dimen0{\vss\chemradical\vss}\hss}}%
+\else
+\raise0.02em\hbox to0pt{\vbox to\dimen0{\vss\chemradical\vss}\hss}\fi%
+\hss}}\hss}%
+\wd1=\wd0 \ht1=\ht0\box1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command \verb/\tetraradical/ is converted into 
+% the command \verb/\chemradicalA/, where four unpaired electrons are 
+% specified by a set of numbers 1234, 234, etc. as an optional
+% argument. The main argument specifies a central atom. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \chemradicalA[1234, etc.]{A}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%              1
+%              .
+%        4   . A .  2
+%              .
+%              3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chemradicalA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\chemradicalA{\@ifnextchar[{\chemr@dicalA}{\chemr@dicalA[1234]}}
+\def\chemr@dicalA[#1]#2{\leavevmode
+\begingroup\let\TEMP@Command=\tetraradical%
+\fromfourobjects{#1}{#2}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Four lone pairs which are attached to a central atom (A) in another mode 
+% are drawn by the following \verb/\lonepairBitoiv/ command, 
+% where each of the top four argumets takes 0 (absence) or 1 (presence) for 
+% representing the absence or presece of a lone pair. The larst argument 
+% represents the central atom. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \lonepairBitoiv{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{A}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%         4       1
+%           :   :
+%             A 
+%           :   :
+%         3       2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lonepairBitoiv}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lonepairBitoiv#1#2#3#4#5{\begingroup\setbox0=\hbox{#5}%
+\dimen0=\ht0 \dimen1=1.22\wd0%
+\setbox1=\hbox to\wd0{\hss%
+\smash{\lower0.04em\hbox to0pt{%
+\hss\vbox to\dimen0{\vss%
+\ifnum#4=0\relax \phantom{\nwlonepair}\else
+\nwlonepair\fi%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.45em
+\ifnum#3=0\relax \phantom{\swlonepair}\else
+\swlonepair\fi
+\vss}\kern-0.2em}%
+\hbox to\dimen1{\hss#5\hss}%
+\lower0.04em\hbox to0pt{\kern-0.22em%
+\vbox to\dimen0{\vss%
+\ifnum#1=0\relax \phantom{\nelonepair}\else
+\nelonepair\fi%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.45em
+\ifnum#2=0\relax \phantom{\selonepair}\else
+\selonepair\fi\vss}\hss}%
+}\hss}%
+\ht1=\ht0\box1\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command \verb/\lonepairBitoiv/ is converted into 
+% the command \verb/\lonepairB/, where four lone pairs are 
+% specified by a set of numbers 1234, 234, etc as an optional
+% argument. The main argument specifies a central atom. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \lonepairB[1234, etc.]{A}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%         4       1
+%           :   :
+%             A 
+%           :   :
+%         3       2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lonepairB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lonepairB{\@ifnextchar[{\l@nepairB}{\l@nepairB[1234]}}
+\def\l@nepairB[#1]#2{\leavevmode%
+\begingroup\let\TEMP@Command=\lonepairBitoiv%
+\fromfourobjects{#1}{#2}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Four unpaired electron which are attached to a central atom (A) in an alternative mode 
+% are drawn by the following \verb/\tetraradicalB/ command, 
+% where each of the top four argumets takes 0 (absence) or 1 (presence) for 
+% representing the absence or presece of an unpaired electron. The larst argument 
+% represents the central atom. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \tetraradicalB{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{0 or 1}{A}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%          4       1
+%            .   .
+%              A 
+%            .   .
+%          3       2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetraradicalB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetraradicalB#1#2#3#4#5{\setbox0=\hbox{#5}%
+\dimen0=\ht0 \dimen1=1.22\wd0%
+\setbox1=\hbox to\wd0{\hss%
+\smash{\lower0.009em\hbox to0pt{%
+\hss\vbox to\dimen0{\vss%
+\ifnum#4=0\relax \phantom{\chemradical}\else
+\chemradical\fi%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.7em
+\ifnum#3=0\relax \phantom{\chemradical}\else
+\chemradical\fi
+\vss}\kern-0.05em}%
+\hbox to\dimen1{\hss#5\hss}%
+\lower0.009em\hbox to0pt{\kern-0.05em%
+\vbox to\dimen0{\vss%
+\ifnum#1=0\relax \phantom{\chemradical}\else
+\chemradical\fi%
+\nointerlineskip
+\kern0.7em
+\ifnum#2=0\relax \phantom{\chemradical}\else
+\chemradical\fi\vss}\hss}%
+}\hss}%
+\ht1=\ht0\box1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command \verb/\tetraradicalB/ is converted into 
+% the command \verb/\chemradicalB/, where four unpaired electrons are 
+% specified by a set of numbers 1234, 234, etc. as an optional
+% argument. The main argument specifies a central atom. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \chemradicalB[1234, etc.]{A}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%          4       1
+%            .   .
+%              A 
+%            .   .
+%          3       2
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chemradicalA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\chemradicalB{\@ifnextchar[{\chemr@dicalB}{\chemr@dicalB[1234]}}
+\def\chemr@dicalB[#1]#2{\leavevmode
+\begingroup\let\TEMP@Command=\tetraradicalB%
+\fromfourobjects{#1}{#2}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Nested Structures}
+%
+% The macro \verb/\LewisTetrahedralA/ is defined as an extension of 
+% \verb/\LewistetrahedralA/, where it supports a nestec structures. 
+% As a basic function of \verb/\LewisTetrahedralA/, 
+% atoms (W, X, Y, and Z) which are attached to a central atom (A) 
+% through Lewis bonds are drawn by the following \verb/\LewisTetrahedralA/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \LewisTetrahedralA{0==A;1==W;2==X;3==Y;4==Z}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%              1
+%              W
+%              :
+%        4 Z : A : X 2
+%              :
+%              Y
+%              3
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Each of the atoms can be omitted. The argument of 
+% of the macro \verb/\LewisTetrahedralA/ can accommodate a so-called (yl)-function, 
+% which can draw a nested structure. 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\LewisTetrahedralA}
+% This macro is based on the definition of the macro \verb/\tetrahedral/ 
+% defined in the \textsf{aliphat} package. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LewisTetrahedralA{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@LewisTetrahedralA[r}{\@LewisTetrahedralA[r]}}
+\def\@LewisTetrahedralA#1]#2{%
+\@ifnextchar<{\@@LewisTetrahedralA#1]{#2}}{\@@LewisTetrahedralA#1]{#2}<,,,>}}
+\def\@@LewisTetrahedralA#1]#2<#3,#4,#5,#6>{%
+\begingroup
+\let\Northbond=\Northlonepair
+\let\Southbond=\Southlonepair
+\let\Eastbond=\Eastlonepair
+\let\Westbond=\Westlonepair
+\let\yltetrahedralposition=\ylLewisTetrahedralAposition
+\@@tetrahedral#1]#2<#3,#4,#5,#6>%
+\endgroup
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+}%end of macro LewisTetrahedralA
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Note that the innermacros \verb/\Northbond/ etc.\ used in the definition of \verb/\tetrahedral/ 
+% are replaced by \verb/\Northlonepair/ etc. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Northlonepair}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Northlonepair{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\N@rthlonepair}{\N@rthlonepair[]}}
+\def\N@rthlonepair[#1]{%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \put(0,60){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(0,90){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \putlratom{-40}{120}{\@memberb}%==1 upper substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \put(0,60){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(0,90){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(0,120){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \putlratom{-40}{150}{\@memberb}%==1 upper substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb N\relax%normal single bond
+    \Put@Line(0,52)(0,1){110}%
+    \putlratom{-40}{171}{\@memberb}%==1 upper substituent
+  \else
+    \put(0,60){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \putlratom{-40}{90}{\@memberb}%==1 upper substituent
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Southlonepair}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Southlonepair{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\S@uthlonepair}{\S@uthlonepair[]}}
+\def\S@uthlonepair[#1]{%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \put(0,-60){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(0,-90){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \putlratom{-40}{-180}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \put(0,-60){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(0,-90){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(0,-120){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \putlratom{-40}{-210}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb N\relax%normal single bond
+    \Put@Line(0,-48)(0,-1){110}%
+    \putlratom{-40}{-250}{\@memberb}%==1 upper substituent
+  \else
+    \put(0,-60){\hbox to0pt{\hss\horizontalpair\hss}}%
+    \putlratom{-40}{-150}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Eastlonepair}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Eastlonepair{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\E@stlonepair}{\E@stlonepair[]}}
+\def\E@stlonepair[#1]{%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \put(60,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(90,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \putratom{120}{-33}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \put(60,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(90,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(120,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \putratom{150}{-33}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb N\relax%normal single bond
+    \Put@Line(50,0)(1,0){140}%
+    \putratom{190}{-33}{\@memberb}%==1 upper substituent
+  \else
+    \put(60,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \putratom{90}{-33}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Westlonepair}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Westlonepair{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\W@stlonepair}{\W@stlonepair[]}}
+\def\W@stlonepair[#1]{%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \put(-65,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(-95,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \putlatom{-120}{-33}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \put(-65,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(-95,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \put(-125,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \putlatom{-150}{-33}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb N\relax%normal single bond
+    \Put@Line(-50,0)(-1,0){140}%
+    \putlatom{-190}{-33}{\@memberb}%==1 upper substituent
+  \else
+    \put(-65,-18){\hbox to0pt{\hss\verticalpair\hss}}%
+    \putlatom{-90}{-33}{\@memberb}%==3 down substituent
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro \verb/\LewisTetrahedralA/ supports a (yl)-function, which 
+% is based on the x,y-adjustment due to the \verb/\ylLewisTetrahedralAposition/, 
+% which is defined in a similar way to \verb/\yltetrahedralposition/ used in 
+% the definition of the macro \verb/\tetrahedral/. The original values are 
+% left as commented lines in order to compare with the \textsf{aliphat} package 
+% of the \XyMTeX{} system. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylLewisTetrahedralAposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylLewisTetrahedralAposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\West@bondfalse
+\East@bondfalse
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or%1
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+  \else%
+%   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-52}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+   \gdef\@ylii{45}\gdef\@yli{33}\global\@ylswtrue%N subst. on 1
+  \fi%
+ \or%2
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \else%
+%    \gdef\@ylii{52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+    \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{30}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi%
+  \East@bondtrue%W subst. on 1
+ \or%3
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%S subst. on 1
+  \else%
+%   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{52}\global\@ylswtrue%S subst. on 1
+   \gdef\@ylii{35}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue%S subst. on 1
+  \fi%
+ \or%4
+  \ifno@centeratom%
+   \gdef\@ylii{-72}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%??????
+  \else%
+%   \gdef\@ylii{-52}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%
+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{32}\global\@ylswtrue%
+  \fi%
+     \West@bondtrue%E subst. on 1
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro \verb/\LewisTetrahedralB/ is defined as an extension of 
+% \verb/\LewistetrahedralB/, where it supports a nestec structures. 
+% As a basic function of \verb/\LewisTetrahedralB/, 
+% atoms (W, X, Y, and Z) which are attached to a central atom (A) 
+% through Lewis bonds are drawn by the following \verb/\LewisTetrahedralB/ command. 
+% 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \LewisteTrahedralB{0==A;1==W;2==X;3==Y;4==Z}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% 
+%      4  Z         W  1
+%           :     :
+%              A 
+%           :     :
+%      3  Y         X  2
+% 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Each of the atoms can be omitted. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LewisTetrahedralB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LewisTetrahedralB{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@LewisTetrahedralB[r}{\@LewisTetrahedralB[r]}}
+\def\@LewisTetrahedralB#1]#2{%
+\begingroup
+\let\NEbond=\NEbondlonepair
+\let\SEbond=\SEbondlonepair
+\let\SWbond=\SWbondlonepair
+\let\NWbond=\NWbondlonepair
+\let\ylsquareposition=\ylLewisTetrahedralBposition
+\@squareplanar#1]{#2}%
+\endgroup
+}%end of macro LewisTetrahedralB
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Note that the inner macros \verb/\NEbond/ etc.\ used in the definition of \verb/\squareplanar/ 
+% are replaced by \verb/\NEbondlonepair/ etc. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NEbondlonepair}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NEbondlonepair{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \put(50,50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nelonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(75,75){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nelonepair\hss}}%
+    \putratom{90}{82}{\@memberb}%==1 northeast substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \put(50,50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nelonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(75,75){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nelonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(100,100){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nelonepair\hss}}%
+    \putratom{115}{107}{\@memberb}%==1 northeast substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb N\relax%normal single bond
+    \Put@Line(40,47)(1,1){95}%
+    \putratom{145}{137}{\@memberb}%==1 (northeast substituent)
+  \else
+    \put(50,50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nelonepair\hss}}%
+    \putratom{65}{57}{\@memberb}%==1 northeast substituent
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+\end{sfpicture}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SEbondlonepair}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SEbondlonepair{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \put(50,-50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\selonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(75,-75){\hbox to0pt{\hss\selonepair\hss}}%
+    \putratom{90}{-148}{\@memberb}%==2 southeast substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \put(50,-50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\selonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(75,-75){\hbox to0pt{\hss\selonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(100,-100){\hbox to0pt{\hss\selonepair\hss}}%
+    \putratom{115}{-173}{\@memberb}%==2 southeast substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb N\relax%normal single bond
+    \Put@Line(40,-47)(1,-1){95}%
+    \putratom{145}{-203}{\@memberb}%==2 (southeast substituent)
+  \else
+    \put(50,-50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\selonepair\hss}}%
+    \putratom{65}{-123}{\@memberb}%==2 southeast substituent
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+\end{sfpicture}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SWbondlonepair}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SWbondlonepair{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \put(-50,-50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\swlonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(-75,-75){\hbox to0pt{\hss\swlonepair\hss}}%
+    \putlatom{-90}{-148}{\@memberb}%==3 southeast substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \put(-50,-50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\swlonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(-75,-75){\hbox to0pt{\hss\swlonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(-100,-100){\hbox to0pt{\hss\swlonepair\hss}}%
+    \putlatom{-115}{-173}{\@memberb}%==3 southeast substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb N\relax%normal single bond
+    \Put@Line(-50,-47)(-1,-1){95}%
+    \putlatom{-163}{-203}{\@memberb}%==3 (southwest substituent)
+  \else
+    \put(-50,-50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\swlonepair\hss}}%
+    \putlatom{-65}{-123}{\@memberb}%==3 southeast substituent
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+\end{sfpicture}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NWbondlonepair}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NWbondlonepair{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,300)(0,0)%
+  \if\@tmpb D\relax%
+    \put(-50,50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nwlonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(-75,75){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nwlonepair\hss}}%
+    \putlatom{-90}{82}{\@memberb}%==4 northwest substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb T\relax%
+    \put(-50,50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nwlonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(-75,75){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nwlonepair\hss}}%
+    \put(-100,100){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nwlonepair\hss}}%
+    \putlatom{-115}{107}{\@memberb}%==4 northwest substituent
+  \else\if\@tmpb N\relax%normal single bond
+    \Put@Line(-40,47)(-1,1){95}%
+    \putlatom{-145}{137}{\@memberb}%==4 (northwest substituent)
+  \else
+    \put(-50,50){\hbox to0pt{\hss\nwlonepair\hss}}%
+    \putlatom{-65}{57}{\@memberb}%==1 northwest substituent
+   \fi\fi\fi%
+\end{sfpicture}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro \verb/\LewisTetrahedralB/ supports a (yl)-function, which 
+% is based on the x,y-adjustment due to the \verb/\ylLewisTetrahedralBposition/, 
+% which is defined in a similar way to \verb/\ylsquareposition/ used in 
+% the definition of the macro \verb/\squaraplanar/ (renamed from \verb/\square/). 
+% The original values are left as commented lines in order to compare 
+% with the \textsf{aliphat} package of the \XyMTeX{} system. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ylLewisTetrahedralBposition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ylLewisTetrahedralBposition#1{%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\if@@ylsw\else
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpa
+ \or% 
+%     \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NE subst. on 1
+     \gdef\@ylii{-28}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% NE subst. on 1
+ \or%2
+%     \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SE subst. on 2
+     \gdef\@ylii{-28}\gdef\@yli{35}\global\@ylswtrue% SE subst. on 2
+ \or%3
+%     \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{47}\global\@ylswtrue% SW subst. on 3
+     \gdef\@ylii{35}\gdef\@yli{22}\global\@ylswtrue% SW subst. on 3
+ \or%4
+%     \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{-47}\global\@ylswtrue% NW subst. on 4
+     \gdef\@ylii{35}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% NW subst. on 4
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\endinput
+%</lewisstruc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lewisstruc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lewisstruc.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..96723624e70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lewisstruc.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+\def\batchfile{lewisstruc.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 2009,2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.00 Released on November 03, 2009
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.01 Released on August 02, 2013
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files lewisstruc.dtx and lewisstruc.ins
+and the derived file lewisstruc.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{lewisstruc.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{lewisstruc.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{lewisstruc.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{lewisstruc.dtx}{lewisstruc}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/locant.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/locant.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4f19a5c4c79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/locant.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,343 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: locant.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1993,1996,2001,2002, 2004, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% locant.sty
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files locant.dtx and locant.ins
+% and the derived file locant.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{locant}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{locant}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{locant}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{locant}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{locant}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{locant}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{136}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/06/26}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{Size reduction and Clip information}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{sfpicture environment etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{locant.dtx}[2010/10/01 v5.00 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{locant.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Setting locant numbers by {\sffamily locant.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %% (old address)
+% %% Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% %% Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% %% Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{locant.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{locant:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% locant & locant.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*locant>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.00}
+\typeout{       -- Released October 01, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{locant}
+\def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+\def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Macros for designating locant numbers}
+%
+% \subsection{Font Size of Locant Numbers}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{New command: \cs{locantnumsize}}
+%
+% To change the font size of locant numbers, we can use 
+% |\locantnumsize|, into which a size command (|\scriptsize| etc.)
+% is introduced by using the |\let| command. 
+% The default setting is |\scriptsize| as follows: 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\locantnumsize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\locantnumsize=\scriptsize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Bond indicators for vertical formulas}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dbloocant}
+% \begin{macro}{\dblocant}
+% The macro |\dbloocant| is used to designate six edges (inner double bonds) 
+% of a six-membered ring.  Any character can be asigned to the respective 
+% bond.  
+% The macro |\dblocant| provides a fixed set of aliphabetical charactors 
+% on the six edges. 
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The domain of a picture environment 
+% has been changed from (800,880) to (0,0).}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bdloocant#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+%\begin{sfpicture}(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)
+\putratom{90}{380}{\locantnumsize #1}%
+\putratom{200}{180}{\locantnumsize #2}%
+\putratom{90}{-20}{\locantnumsize #3}%
+\putlatom{-90}{380}{\locantnumsize #6}%
+\putlatom{-200}{180}{\locantnumsize #5}%
+\putlatom{-90}{-20}{\locantnumsize #4}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+\def\bdlocant{\bdloocant{a}{b}{c}{d}{e}{f}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Atom indicators for vertical formulas}
+% \begin{macro}{\sxloocant}
+% \begin{macro}{\sxlocant}
+% The macro |\sxloocant| is used to designate six vertices  
+% of a six-membered ring.  Any character can be asigned to the respective 
+% bond.  
+% The macro |\sxlocant| provides a fixed set of arabic numerals 
+% on the six edges. 
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The domain of a picture environment 
+% has been changed from (800,880) to (0,0).}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sxloocant#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+%\begin{sfpicture}(800,880)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+\putratom{-10}{340}{\locantnumsize #1}%
+\putlatom{150}{260}{\locantnumsize #2}%
+\putlatom{150}{110}{\locantnumsize #3}%
+\putratom{-10}{40}{\locantnumsize #4}%
+\putratom{-150}{110}{\locantnumsize #5}%
+\putratom{-150}{260}{\locantnumsize #6}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+\def\sxlocant{\sxloocant{1}{2}{3}{4}{5}{6}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Bond indicators for horizontal formulas}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dbloocanth}
+% \begin{macro}{\dblocanth}
+% The macro |\dbloocanth| is used to designate six edges (inner double bonds) 
+% of a horizontal six-membered ring.  
+% Any character can be asigned to the respective bond.  
+% The macro |\dblocanth| provides a fixed set of aliphabetical charactors 
+% on the six edges. 
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The domain of a picture environment 
+% has been changed from (800,880) to (0,0).}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bdloocnth#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+%\begin{sfpicture}(880,800)(-\shifti,-\shiftii)%
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\shifti,-\shiftii)%
+\putlatom{10}{80}{\locantnumsize #1}%
+\putratom{180}{210}{\locantnumsize #2}%
+\putratom{380}{80}{\locantnumsize #3}%
+\putratom{380}{-120}{\locantnumsize #4}%
+\putratom{180}{-260}{\locantnumsize #5}%
+\putlatom{10}{-120}{\locantnumsize #6}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+\def\bdlocnth{\bdloocnth{a}{b}{c}{d}{e}{f}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Atom indicators for horizontal formulas}
+% \begin{macro}{\sxloocanth}
+% \begin{macro}{\sixsghlocant}
+% The macro |\sxloocanth| is used to designate six vertices  
+% of a horizontal six-membered ring.  
+% Any character can be asigned to the respective bond.  
+% The macro |\sixsghlocant| provides a fixed set of arabic numerals 
+% on the six edges. 
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{The domain of a picture environment 
+% has been changed from (800,880) to (0,0).}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sxloocnth#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+%\begin{sfpicture}(880,800)(-\shifti,-\shiftii)%
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\shifti,-\shiftii)%
+\putratom{40}{-20}{\locantnumsize #1}%
+\putratom{110}{100}{\locantnumsize #2}%
+\putlatom{290}{100}{\locantnumsize #3}%
+\putlatom{380}{-20}{\locantnumsize #4}%
+\putratom{110}{-140}{\locantnumsize #6}%
+\putlatom{290}{-140}{\locantnumsize #5}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+\def\sxlocnth{\sxloocnth{1}{2}{3}{4}{5}{6}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Locant Numbers for Cyclic Sugars}
+%
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{New command: \cs{sixsugarhlocant}}
+% \begin{macro}{\sixsugarhloocnt}
+% \begin{macro}{\sixsugarhlocant}
+% The macro |\sixsugarhloocnt| is used to designate six vertices  
+% of a horizontal six-membered sugar ring.  
+% Any character can be asigned to the respective bond.  
+% The macro |\sixsugarhlocant| provides a fixed set of arabic numerals 
+% on the six edges. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sixsugarhloocnt#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\shifti,-\shiftii)%
+\putratom{40}{-20}{\locantnumsize #1}%
+\putratom{120}{125}{\locantnumsize #2}%
+\putlatom{400}{125}{\locantnumsize #3}%
+\putlatom{492}{-20}{\locantnumsize #4}%
+\putratom{120}{-160}{\locantnumsize #6}%
+\putlatom{400}{-160}{\locantnumsize #5}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+\def\sixsugarhlocant{\sixsugarhloocnt{4}{5}{6}{1}{2}{3}}
+%</locant>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/locant.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/locant.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d6c75dca397
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/locant.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+\def\batchfile{locant.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+
+Old Versins: 
+Released on August 16, 1996 
+Released on June 20, 2001 (version 2.01) (private version)
+Released on April 30, 2002 (version 3.00)
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.01 Released on August 30, 2004
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files locant.dtx and locant.ins
+and the derived file locant.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{locant.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{locant.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{locant.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{locant.dtx}{locant}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lowcycle.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lowcycle.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3aac86549ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lowcycle.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,892 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: lowcycle.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1993,1996,1998,2001,2002,2004,2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% lowcycle.sty
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files lowcycle.dtx and lowcycle.ins
+% and the derived file lowcycle.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lowcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lowcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lowcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lowcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lowcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lowcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lowcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{lowcycle}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{175}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/06/26}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Size reduction and Clip information}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{sfpicture environment, etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{lowcycle.dtx}[2010/10/01 v5.00 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{lowcycle.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Lower carbocyclic compounds by {\sffamily lowcycle.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %% (old address)
+% %% Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% %% Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% %% Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{lowcycle.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{lowcycle:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% lowcycle & lowcycle.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lowcycle>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.00}
+\typeout{       -- Released October 01, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{lowcycle}
+\def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for lowcycle.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************
+% * lowcycle.sty: list of commands * 
+% **********************************
+%
+%     \cyclopentanev                      \@cyclopentanev
+%     \cyclopentanevi                     \@cyclopentanevi
+%     \cyclopentaneh                      \@cyclopentaneh
+%     \cyclopentanehi                     \@cyclopentanehi
+%
+%     \cyclobutane                        \@cyclobutane
+%
+%     \cyclopropane                       \@cyclopropane
+%     \cyclopropanei                      \@cyclopropanei
+%     \cyclopropaneh                      \@cyclopropaneh
+%     \cyclopropanehi                     \@cyclopropanehi
+%
+%     \indanev                            \@indanev
+%     \indanevi                           \@indanevi
+%     \indaneh                            \@indaneh
+%     \indanehi                           \@indanehi
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf lowcycle.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} etc. for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{threehetero}{\input hetarom.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{sixheteroh}{\input hetaromh.sty\relax}{}
+\unitlength=0.1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Cyclopentane derivatives}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The macros |\cyclopentanev| and |\cyclopentanevi| have an 
+% argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% The macro |\cyclopentanev| draws a five-membered ring with a 
+% flat top bond, while the macro |\cyclopentanevi| draws an 
+% inverse ring with a flat bottom bond. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ******************************
+% *  cyclopentane derivatives  *
+% *  (vertical type & inverse) *
+% ******************************
+%
+%   \cyclopentanev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \cyclopentanevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. The 
+% option `$n+$' ($n=1$--$5$) is used for designating a plus charge on 
+% the $n$-carbon. 
+% The option `$0+$'is used for designating a plus charge at the center 
+% of the five-membered ring. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           none       :  mother nucleus (fully saturated form)
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-carbon atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \cyclopentanev{1==H;2==F}
+%        \cyclopentanev[]{1==H;2==F}
+%        \cyclopentanev[H]{1==H;2==F}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopentanev}
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopentanevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclopentanev{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclopentanev[@}{\@cyclopentanev[]}}
+\def\@cyclopentanev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cyclopentanev' %
+                  is based on `fiveheterov'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterov[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclopentanevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclopentanevi[@}{\@cyclopentanevi[]}}
+\def\@cyclopentanevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cyclopentanevi' %
+                   is based on `fiveheterovi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterovi[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The macros |\cyclopentaneh| and |\cyclopentanehi| have an 
+% argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% The macro |\cyclopentaneh| draws a five-membered ring with a 
+% vertical left bond, while the macro |\cyclopentanehi| draws an 
+% inverse ring with a vertical right bond. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************************
+% *  cyclopentane derivatives    *
+% *  (horizontal type & inverse) *
+% ********************************
+%
+%   \cyclopentaneh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \cyclopentanehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. The 
+% option `$n+$' ($n=1$--$5$) is used for designating a plus charge on 
+% the $n$-carbon. 
+% The option `$0+$'is used for designating a plus charge at the center 
+% of the five-membered ring. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           none       :  mother nucleus (fully saturated form)
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond
+%           e          :  5,1-double bond
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-carbon atom (n = 1 to 5)
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \cyclopentaneh{1==H;2==F}
+%        \cyclopentanehi[]{1==H;2==F}
+%        \cyclopentanehi[H]{1==H;2==F}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopentaneh}
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopentanehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclopentaneh{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclopentaneh[@}{\@cyclopentaneh[]}}
+\def\@cyclopentaneh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cyclophentaneh' %
+                   is based on `fiveheteroh'.}\fi%
+\fiveheteroh[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclopentanehi{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@cyclopentanehi[@}{\@cyclopentanehi[]}}
+\def\@cyclopentanehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cyclopentanehi' %
+                   is based on `fiveheterohi'.}\fi%
+\fiveheterohi[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Indan derivatives}
+% \subsection{Vertical type}
+%
+% The macros |\indanev| and |\indanevi| have an 
+% argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% The macro |\indanev| draws a five-membered ring with a 
+% flat top bond, while the macro |\indanevi| draws an 
+% inverse ring with a flat bottom bond. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************************************************
+% * indane derivatives (fused six- and five-membered rings) *
+% *  (vertical type & inverse)                              *
+% ***********************************************************
+%
+%   \indanev[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \indanevi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to j, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' typesets a six-membered ring with an aromatic circle. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$--$7$) is used for designating a plus charge on 
+% the $n$-carbon. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  aromatic six-membered ring
+%           H or []    :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  3,3a-double bond     d    :  4,3a-double bond
+%           e    :  4,5-double bond      f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,7a-double bond
+%           i    :  1,7a-double bond     j    :  3a,4a-double bond
+%           A    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 7)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 7 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 8 (3a position) and 9 (7a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \indanev{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \indanev[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \indanev[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indanev}
+% \begin{macro}{\indanevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indanev{\@ifnextchar[{\@indanev[@}{\@indanev[rb]}}
+\def\@indanev[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indanev' %
+               is based on `nonaheterov'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterov[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indanevi{\@ifnextchar[{\@indanevi[@}{\@indanevi[rb]}}
+\def\@indanevi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indanevi' %
+              is based on `nonaheterovi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterovi[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal type}
+%
+% The macros |\indaneh| and |\indanehi| have an 
+% argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% The macro |\indaneh| draws a five-membered ring with a 
+% vertical left bond, while the macro |\indanehi| draws an 
+% inverse ring with a vertical right bond. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***********************************************************
+% * indane derivatives (fused six- and five-membered rings) *
+% *  (horizontal type & inverse)                            *
+% ***********************************************************
+%
+%   \indaneh[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+%   \indanehi[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to j, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' typesets a six-membered ring with an aromatic circle. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$--$7$) is used for designating a plus charge on 
+% the $n$-carbon. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     BONDLIST:  list of bonds 
+%
+%           none or r  :  aromatic six-membered ring
+%           H or []    :  fully saturated form
+%           a    :  1,2-double bond      b    :  2,3-double bond
+%           c    :  3,3a-double bond     d    :  4,3a-double bond
+%           e    :  4,5-double bond      f    :  5,6-double bond
+%           g    :  6,7-double bond      h    :  7,7a-double bond
+%           i    :  1,7a-double bond     j    :  3a,4a-double bond
+%           A    :  aromatic circle
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 7)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%
+%       for 8 (3a position) and 9 (7a position)
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \indaneh{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \indaneh[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \indaneh[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe;5==Cl;6==Cl}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indaneh}
+% \begin{macro}{\indanehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indaneh{\@ifnextchar[{\@indaneh[@}{\@indaneh[rb]}}
+\def\@indaneh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indaneh' %
+        is based on `nonaheteroh'.}\fi%
+\nonaheteroh[#1]{}{#2}}
+\def\indanehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@indanehi[@}{\@indanehi[rb]}}
+\def\@indanehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `indanehi' %
+        is based on `nonaheterohi'.}\fi%
+\nonaheterohi[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Cyclobutane derivatives}
+%
+% The macros |\cyclobutane| has an 
+% argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% This macro is based on the \verb/\fourhetero/ command for drawing 
+% four-membered heterocycles. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ***************************
+% * cyclobutane derivatives *
+% ***************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%          c
+%     4  _____  3
+%    d  |     |  b
+%       |     |
+%     1  -----  2<===== the original point
+%          a
+%
+%   \cyclobutane[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to e, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$--$4$) is used for designating a plus charge on 
+% the $n$-carbon. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST: list of inner double bonds 
+%
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  4,3-double bond
+%           e          :  4,1-double bond
+%
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-nitrogen atom (n = 1 to 4)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 5 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \cyclobutane{1==H;2==F}
+%        \cyclobutane[c]{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+%        \cyclobutane[eb]{1D==O;4SA==MeO;4SB==OMe}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclobutane}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclobutane{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclobutane[@}{\@cyclobutane[]}}
+\def\@cyclobutane[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cyclobutane' %
+      is based on `fourhetero'.}\fi%
+\fourhetero[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Cyclopropane derivatives}
+%
+% The macros |\cyclopropane| has an 
+% argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% This macro is based on the \verb/\threehetero/ command for drawing 
+% three-membered heterocycles. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * cyclopropane derivatives *
+% *  (vertical type)         *
+% ****************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%         b
+%     3--------2
+%    c `     / a
+%        `1/ <===== the original point
+%
+%
+%   \cyclopropane[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' is used for designating an aromatic character with a 
+% circle. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$--$3$) is used for designating a plus charge on 
+% the $n$-carbon, while 
+% the case $n=4$--$6$) indicates a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `0+' draws a plus symbol at the center of the ring. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 3 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \cyclopropane{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopropane}
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopropanev}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclopropane{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclopropane[@}{\@cyclopropane[]}}
+\def\@cyclopropane[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cyclopropane' %
+      is based on `threehetero'.}\fi%
+\threehetero[#1]{}{#2}}
+\let\cyclopropanev=\cyclopropane
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\cyclopropanei| has an 
+% argument |SUBSLIST| as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% This macro is based on the \verb/\threehetero/ command for drawing 
+% three-membered heterocycles. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ****************************
+% * cyclopropane derivatives *
+% *  (inverse vertical type) *
+% ****************************
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%        /1` <===== the original point
+%    c /    ` a
+%     3--------2
+%         b
+%
+%   \cyclopropanei[BONDLIST]{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one or more 
+% characters selected from a to c, each of which indicates the presence of 
+% an inner (endcyclic) double bond on the corresponding position. 
+% The option `A' is used for designating an aromatic character with a 
+% circle. 
+% The option `$n+$' ($n=1$--$3$) is used for designating a plus charge on 
+% the $n$-carbon, while 
+% the case $n=4$--$6$) indicates a plus charge outside the ring. 
+% The option `0+' draws a plus symbol at the center of the ring. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           none       :  saturated 
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond
+%           c          :  3,1-double bond
+%           A          :  aromatic circle 
+%           {n+}       :  plus at the n-hetero atom (n = 1 to 3)
+%                      :  n=4 -- outer plus at 1 position
+%                      :  n=5 -- outer plus at 2 position
+%                      :  n=6 -- outer plus at 3 position
+%           {0+}       :  plus at the center of a cyclopropane ring
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 3 substitution positions)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \cyclopropanei{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%   \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Newly added command}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopropanei}
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopropenevi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclopropanei{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclopropanei[@}{\@cyclopropanei[]}}
+\def\@cyclopropanei[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cyclopropanei' %
+      is based on `threeheteroi'.}\fi%
+\threeheteroi[#1]{}{#2}}
+\let\cyclopropanevi=\cyclopropanei
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopropaneh}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclopropaneh{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclopropaneh[@}{\@cyclopropaneh[]}}
+\def\@cyclopropaneh[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cyclopropaneh' %
+      is based on `threeheteroh'.}\fi%
+\threeheteroh[#1]{}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cyclopropanehi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cyclopropanehi{\@ifnextchar[{\@cyclopropanehi[@}{\@cyclopropanehi[]}}
+\def\@cyclopropanehi[#1]#2{%
+\iforigpt \typeout{command `cyclopropanehi' %
+      is based on `threeheterohi'.}\fi%
+\threeheterohi[#1]{}{#2}}
+%</lowcycle>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lowcycle.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lowcycle.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9421c429362
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/lowcycle.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+\def\batchfile{lowcycle.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996,1998,2001,2002,2004,2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996 
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1996 (private version)
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.00 Released on August 30, 2004
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files lowcycle.dtx and lowcycle.ins
+and the derived file lowcycle.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{lowcycle.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{lowcycle.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{lowcycle.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{lowcycle.dtx}{lowcycle}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/methylen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/methylen.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a1581b92206
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/methylen.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,6419 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: methylen.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1998,2001,2002,2004,2005,2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files methylen.dtx and methylen.ins
+% and the derived file methylen.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{July 20, 2005}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.03}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{March 29, 2013}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.01b}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 27, 2013}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.01bbb}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{8103}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{Size reduction and Clip information}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/6/20}{Size reduction and clipping information}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{sfpicture environment, etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Wave bonds}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring and the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \changes{v5.01b}{2013/03/29}{bug fix for \cs{yltrimethyleneposition}}
+% \changes{v5.01bb}{2013/06/22}{another bug fix for \cs{yltrimethyleneposition} etc.}
+% \changes{v5.01bbb}{2013/06/27}{addition: Sd, Su, WU, WV, WA, WB etc. }
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/07/20}{bug fix}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{methylen.dtx}[2013/07/20 v5.01 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{methylen.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Methylene Chains by {\sffamily methylen.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{methylen.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{methylen:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% methylen & methylen.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*methylen>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.01}
+\typeout{       -- Released July 20, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{methylen}
+\def\versi@ndate{July 20, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for methylen.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************
+% * methylen.sty: list of commands * 
+% **********************************
+%
+%  <Switches for drawing substituents and bonds>
+%
+%    \if@adoublebond     \if@bdoublebond
+%    \if@Adoublebond     \if@adoublebond}
+%    \reset@double
+%    \if@linterchainsw   \if@rinterchainsw}
+%    \reset@interchainsw
+%
+%  <Command for drawing substituents and bonds>
+%
+%   \@methsubsta      \@methsubstd   \@methsubstdL
+%   \SKbondA          \SKbondB
+%   \bondA            \bondAA
+%   \bondB            \bondBB
+%
+%  <Basic commands for typesetting aliphatic chains>
+%
+%    \@@trimethylene 
+%    \@@dimethylene 
+%
+%  <Commands for adjusting substitution sites>
+%
+%    \yltrimethyleneposition
+%    \yldimethyleneposition
+%
+%   <Commands for drawing aliphatic chains>
+%   
+%    \trimethylene      \trimethylenei
+%    \dimethylene       \dimethylenei
+%    \tetramethylene    \tetramethylenei
+%    \pentamethylene    \pentamethylenei
+%    \hexamethylene     \hexamethylenei
+%    \heptamethylene    \heptamethylenei
+%    \octamethylene     octamethylenei 
+%    \nonamethylene     \nonamethylenei
+%    \decamethylene     \decamethylenei
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf polymers.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} etc. for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{Westbond}{\input aliphat.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{bzdrv}{\input carom.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{hbonde}{\input hetaromh.sty\relax}{}
+\unitlength=0.1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Setting Substituents}
+% 
+% Substitutions on each methylene of a polymethylene chain 
+% is typeset by macros |\@methsubsta| etc. 
+% The macro |\@methsubsta| is used to place substituents on an 
+% upper-side methylene. A new bond modifier ``W'' is added to 
+% typeset a terminal substituent. 
+%
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/27}{Addition Su, Sd, WU, WA, WB}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@methsubsta}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@wrongbdWa \@wrongbdWafalse
+\newif\if@wrongbdWd \@wrongbdWdfalse
+\newif\if@wrongbdWaL \@wrongbdWaLfalse
+\newif\if@wrongbdWdL \@wrongbdWdLfalse
+\def\@methsubsta{%
+\if@aclip% %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-18,436)(-3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+       \dotorline(18,436)(3,5){60}/(18,436)(72,526)%
+       \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \Put@Line(-18,436)(-3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \Put@Line(18,436)(3,5){60}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%2023/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-18,436)(-3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc V% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(18,436)(3,5){60}%    % wavy single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+       \dotorline(-18,436)(-3,5){60}/(-18,436)(-72,536)%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(18,436)(3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+       \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%
+    \fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(-12,436)(0,1){110}%    % double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(12,436)(0,1){110}%     % double bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+       \dotorline(0,436)(0,1){110}/(0,436)(0,546)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb W%beta single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+      \if@wrongbdWa
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Wrong Bond-Modifier (W)}%
+      \fi
+           \Put@Line(40,382)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putratom{150}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+%2013/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(40,382)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{150}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(40,382)(5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{150}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+          \dotorline(40,382)(5,-3){100}/(40,382)(140,322)%
+           \putratom{150}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% % no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+       \dotorline(0,406)(3,5){72}/(0,406)(72,526)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(3,5){72}%       % single bond at 1
+%2023/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc V% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(3,5){72}%    % wavy single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+        \dotorline(0,406)(-3,5){72}/(0,406)(-72,526)%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(-12,406)(0,1){140}%    % double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(12,406)(0,1){140}%     % double bond at 1
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+       \dotorline(0,406)(0,1){140}/(0,406)(0,546)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb W%beta single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+      \if@wrongbdWa
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Wrong Bond-Modifier (W)}%
+      \fi
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){120}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putratom{130}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+%2013/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){120}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{130}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){120}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{130}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+          \dotorline(0,406)(5,-3){120}/(0,406)(120,334)%
+           \putratom{130}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\@methsubstd| is used to place substituents on a 
+% down-side methylene. A new bond modifier ``W'' is added to 
+% typeset a terminal substituent. 
+%
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/27}{Addition Su, Sd, WU, WA, WB}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@methsubstd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@methsubstd{%
+\if@clip %clipping
+    \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+            \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+       \dotorline(18,-30)(3,-5){60}/(18,-30)(72,-120)%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(18,-30)(3,-5){60}%     % single bond at 4
+%2023/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc V% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(18,-30)(3,-5){60}%    % wavy single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+          \dotorline(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}/(-18,-30)(-78,-130)%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(18,-30)(3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(-12,-30)(0,-1){110}%   % double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(12,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % double bond at 4
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+       \dotorline(0,-30)(0,-1){110}/(0,-30)(0,-140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb W%beta single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putlratom{150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(40,24)(5,3){100}%    % single bond at 4
+      \if@wrongbdWd
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Wrong Bond-Modifier (W)}%
+      \fi
+%2013/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(40,24)(5,3){100}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlratom{150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(40,24)(5,3){100}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlratom{150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+          \dotorline(40,24)(5,3){100}/(40,24)(140,84)%
+           \putlratom{150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%     % single bond at 4
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \else% no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+            \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,-5){72}/(0,0)(72,-120)%
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){72}%        % single bond at 4
+%2023/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc V% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){72}%    % wavy single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-3,-5){72}/(0,0)(-72,-120)%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+%
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(-12,0)(0,-1){140}%     % double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(12,0)(0,-1){140}%      % double bond at 4
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+       \dotorline(0,0)(0,-1){140}/(0,0)(0,-140)%
+   \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+   \else\if\@tmpb W%beta single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \putlratom{150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){140}%    % single bond at 4
+      \if@wrongbdWd
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Wrong Bond-Modifier (W)}%
+      \fi
+%2013/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){140}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlratom{150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){140}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlratom{150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+          \dotorline(0,0)(5,3){140}/(0,0)(140,84)%
+           \putlratom{150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%       % single bond at 4
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\@methsubstdL| is used to place substituents on a 
+% left-teminal down-side methylene. A new bond modifier ``W'' is 
+% added to typeset a terminal substituent. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/27}{bug fix SU to SV, SV to SU. Addition Su, Sd, WU, WA, WB}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@methsubstdL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@methsubstdL{%
+\if@clip %clipping
+    \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+            \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % single bond at 4
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+       \dotorline(18,-30)(3,-5){60}/(18,-30)(72,-120)%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \Put@Line(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           \Put@Line(18,-30)(3,-5){60}%     % single bond at 4
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) beta undefined%bug fix 2013/06/27 V-->U
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) alpha undefined%bug fix 2013/06/27 U-->V
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(18,-30)(3,-5){60}%     % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+%2013/06/27
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+       \dotorline(-18,-30)(-3,-5){60}/(-18,-30)(-78,-130)%
+          \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(18,-30)(3,-5){60}%   % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+%
+    \fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(-12,-30)(0,-1){110}%   % double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(12,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % double bond at 4
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+       \dotorline(0,-30)(0,-1){110}/(0,-30)(0,-140)%
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb U% undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb W%beta single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \Put@Line(-40,24)(-5,3){100}%    % single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % lefttype
+      \if@wrongbdWdL
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Wrong Bond-Modifier (W)}%
+      \fi
+%2013/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-40,24)(-5,3){100}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-40,24)(-5,3){100}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+          \dotorline(-40,24)(-5,3){100}/(-40,24)(-140,84)%
+          \putlatom{-150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,-30)(0,-1){110}%     % single bond at 4
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+            \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%      % single bond at 4
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+       \dotorline(0,0)(3,-5){72}/(0,0)(72,-120)%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){72}%        % single bond at 4
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) beta undefined%bug fix 2013/06/27 V-->U
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) alpha undefined%bug fix 2013/06/27 U-->V
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){72}%        % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+%2013/06/27
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+       \dotorline(0,0)(-3,-5){72}/(0,0)(-72,-120)%
+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(3,-5){72}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type
+%
+    \fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(-12,0)(0,-1){140}%     % double bond at 4
+           \Put@Line(12,0)(0,-1){140}%      % double bond at 4
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+       \dotorline(0,0)(0,-1){140}/(0,0)(0,-140)%
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%       % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb W%beta single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){140}%    % single bond at 4
+           \putlatom{-150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+      \if@wrongbdWdL
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Wrong Bond-Modifier (W)}%
+      \fi
+%2013/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){140}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){140}%    % single bond at 4
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax
+          \dotorline(0,0)(-5,3){140}/(0,0)(-140,84)%
+          \putlatom{-150}{54}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,0)(0,-1){140}%       % single bond at 4
+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi}%end of \@methsubstdL
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\@methsubstaL| is used to place substituents on a 
+% left-teminal upper-side methylene. A new bond modifier ``W'' is 
+% added to typeset a terminal substituent. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/27}{bug fix SU to SV, SV to SU. Addition Su, Sd, WU, WA, WB}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@methsubstaL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@methsubstaL{%
+\if@aclip% %clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-18,436)(-3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+       \dotorline(18,436)(3,5){60}/(18,436)(72,526)%
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \Put@Line(-18,436)(-3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           \Put@Line(18,436)(3,5){60}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) beta undefined%bug fix 2013/06/27 V-->U
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-18,436)(-3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) alpha undefined%bug fix 2013/06/27 U-->V
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(18,436)(3,5){60}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%2013/06/27
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+       \dotorline(-18,436)(-3,5){60}/(-18,436)(-78,536)%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(18,436)(3,5){60}%    % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%
+    \fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(-12,436)(0,1){110}%    % double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(12,436)(0,1){110}%     % double bond at 1
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+       \dotorline(0,436)(0,1){110}/(0,436)(0,546)%
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb W%beta single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           \Put@Line(-40,382)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-150}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+      \if@wrongbdWaL
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Wrong Bond-Modifier (W)}%
+      \fi
+%2013/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(-40,382)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-150}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(-40,382)(-5,-3){100}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-150}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax
+          \dotorline(-40,382)(-5,-3){100}/(-40,382)(-140,322)%
+           \putlatom{-150}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,436)(0,1){110}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\else% % no clipping
+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+       \dotorline(0,406)(3,5){72}/(0,406)(72,526)%
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(3,5){72}%       % single bond at 1
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+    \else\if\@tmpc V%(V) beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc U%(U) alpha undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(3,5){72}%       % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%2013/06/27
+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+       \dotorline(0,406)(-3,5){72}/(0,406)(-72,526)%
+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type
+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) beta
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(3,5){72}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type
+%
+    \fi\fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(-12,406)(0,1){140}%    % double bond at 1
+           \Put@Line(12,406)(0,1){140}%     % double bond at 1
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+       \dotorline(0,406)(0,1){140}/(0,406)(0,546)%
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb W%beta single bond
+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){120}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putlatom{-130}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+      \if@wrongbdWaL
+        \XyMTeXWarning{Wrong Bond-Modifier (W)}%
+      \fi
+%2013/06/27
+   \else\if\@tmpc U%undefined
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           {%
+           \WaveBonds%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){120}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-130}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+           {%
+           \thicklines%
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){120}%      % single bond at 1
+           }%
+           \putlatom{-130}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha
+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax
+          \dotorline(0,406)(-5,-3){120}/(0,406)(-120,334)%
+           \putlatom{-130}{276}{\@memberb}%   % left type
+%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \else%
+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax
+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax
+           \Put@Line(0,406)(0,1){140}%      % single bond at 1
+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+ \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Setting Bonds}
+% \subsection{Outer Skeletal Bonds}
+%
+% The macros |\SKbondB| and |\SKbondA| are used to typeset 
+% outer skeletal bonds of a methylene chain (|\..methylene|)
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SKbondB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SKbondB{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){171}%        %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,406)(5,-3){136}%        %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(35,385)(5,-3){136}%       %bond 1-2
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(35,385)(5,-3){100}%       %bond 1-2
+    \fi%
+   \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SKbondA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SKbondA{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \ifx\aaa\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){171}%       %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,406)(-5,-3){136}%       %bond 1-6
+    \fi%
+   \else%
+    \ifx\aaa\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-35,385)(-5,-3){136}%     %bond 1-6
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-35,385)(-5,-3){100}%     %bond 1-6
+    \fi%
+   \fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\SKbondBi| and |\SKbondAi| are used to typeset 
+% outer skeletal bonds of a methylene chain (inverse type |\..methylenei|).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SKbondBi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SKbondBi{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){171}%           %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(5,3){136}%           %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\ccc\empty%
+     \Put@Line(35,21)(5,3){138}%         %bond 4-3
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(35,21)(5,3){100}%         %bond 4-3
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SKbondAi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SKbondAi{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+    \ifx\aaa\empty%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){171}%          %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(0,0)(-5,3){136}%          %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+  \else%
+    \ifx\aaa\empty%
+     \Put@Line(-35,21)(-5,3){138}%       %bond 4-5
+    \else%
+     \Put@Line(-35,21)(-5,3){100}%        %bond 4-5
+    \fi%
+  \fi\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inner Double Bonds}
+% 
+% The macros |\bondB| is used to place a line of 
+% a double bond in the (5,-3) direction at the lower side 
+% of an outer skeletal bond. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bondB{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(6,364)(5,-3){126}%         %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(6,364)(5,-3){100}%         %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(35,340)(5,-3){100}%        %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(35,352)(5,-3){100}%        %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%                                    % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\bondBB| is used to place a line of 
+% a double bond in the (5,-3) direction at the upper side 
+% of an outer skeletal bond. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondBB}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bondBB{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(42,420)(5,-3){126}%         %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(42,420)(5,-3){100}%         %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(52,412)(5,-3){110}%        %double bond 1-2
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(52,412)(5,-3){100}%        %double bond 1-2
+   \fi%                                    % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\bondA| is used to place a line of 
+% a double bond in the (-5,-3) direction at the lower 
+% side of an outer skeletal bond. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bondA{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-6,364)(-5,-3){126}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-6,364)(-5,-3){100}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-35,340)(-5,-3){100}%       %double bond 1-6
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-35,352)(-5,-3){100}%       %double bond 1-6
+   \fi%                                     % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\bondAA| is used to place a line of 
+% a double bond in the (-5,-3) direction at the upper side 
+% of an outer skeletal bond. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondAA}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bondAA{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-42,420)(-5,-3){126}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-42,420)(-5,-3){100}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-52,412)(-5,-3){100}%       %double bond 1-6
+   \else%
+    \Put@Line(-52,412)(-5,-3){100}%       %double bond 1-6
+   \fi%                                     % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The bond-setting commands with sufix ``i'' are used in the definitions 
+% of commands such as |\...methylenei|. 
+%
+% The macros |\bondBi| is used to place a line of 
+% a double bond in the (5,3) direction at the upper side 
+% of an outer skeletal bond. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondBi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bondBi{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){126}%           %double bond 4-3
+   \else% 
+    \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){100}%           %double bond 4-3
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+    \Put@Line(35,66)(5,3){100}%          %double bond 4-3
+   \else% 
+    \Put@Line(35,60)(5,3){100}%          %double bond 4-3
+   \fi%                                    % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\bondBBi| is used to place a line of 
+% a double bond in the (5,3) direction at the lower 
+% side of an outer skeletal bond. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondBBi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bondBBi{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+%    \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){126}%           %double bond 4-3
+    \Put@Line(42,-14)(5,3){126}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \else% 
+%    \Put@Line(6,42)(5,3){100}%           %double bond 4-3
+%    \Put@Line(42,-14)(5,3){100}%        %double bond 1-6
+    \Put@Line(30,-14)(5,3){100}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\ccc\empty%
+%    \Put@Line(35,66)(5,3){100}%          %double bond 4-3
+%    \Put@Line(52,6)(5,3){100}%       %double bond 1-6
+    \Put@Line(52,0)(5,3){100}%       %double bond 1-6
+   \else% 
+%    \Put@Line(35,60)(5,3){100}%          %double bond 4-3
+    \Put@Line(52,0)(5,3){100}%        %double bond 4-5
+   \fi%                                    % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\bondAi| is used to place a line of 
+% a double bond in the (-5,3) direction at the upper 
+% side of an outer skeletal bond. 
+
+% \begin{macro}{\bondAi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bondAi{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){126}%         %double bond 4-5
+   \else% 
+    \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){100}%         %double bond 4-5
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\aaa\empty%
+    \Put@Line(-35,66)(-5,3){100}%        %double bond 4-5
+   \else% 
+    \Put@Line(-35,60)(-5,3){100}%        %double bond 4-5
+   \fi%                                    % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macros |\bondAAi| is used to place a line of 
+% a double bond in the (-5,3) direction at the lower
+% side of an outer skeletal bond. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bondAAi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bondAAi{%
+  \ifx\bbb\empty%
+   \ifx\aaa\empty%
+%    \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){126}%         %double bond 4-5
+    \Put@Line(-42,-14)(-5,3){126}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \else% 
+%    \Put@Line(-6,42)(-5,3){100}%         %double bond 4-5
+    \Put@Line(-42,-14)(-5,3){100}%        %double bond 1-6
+   \fi%
+  \else%
+   \ifx\aaa\empty%
+%    \Put@Line(-35,66)(-5,3){100}%        %double bond 4-5
+    \Put@Line(-52,6)(-5,3){100}%       %double bond 1-6
+   \else% 
+%    \Put@Line(-35,60)(-5,3){100}%        %double bond 4-5
+    \Put@Line(-52,0)(-5,3){100}%        %double bond 4-5
+   \fi%                                    % line <1OO not available
+  \fi%
+ }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Switches}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@adoublebond}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@bdoublebond}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@Adoublebond}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@adoublebond}
+% \begin{macro}{\reset@double}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@adoublebond \@adoublebondfalse
+\newif\if@bdoublebond \@bdoublebondfalse
+\newif\if@Adoublebond \@Adoublebondfalse
+\newif\if@Bdoublebond \@Bdoublebondfalse
+\def\reset@double{%
+\@adoublebondfalse\@bdoublebondfalse
+\@Adoublebondfalse\@Bdoublebondfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@linterchainsw}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@rinterchainsw}
+% \begin{macro}{\reset@interchainsw}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@linterchainsw \@linterchainswfalse
+\newif\if@rinterchainsw \@rinterchainswfalse
+\def\reset@interchainsw{\@linterchainswfalse\@rinterchainswfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Trimethylene}
+% \subsection{Normal direction}
+%
+% A trimethylene (or propane) and its hetera analogs can be typeset 
+% by the command |\trimethylene|, which is mainly based on 
+% two inner commands: |\yltrimethyleneposition| for adjusting a 
+% substitution site and |\@@trimethylene| for 
+% placing hetero atoms, double bonds, and substituents.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@trimethylene}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@@trimethylene{ATOMLIST}{BONDLIST}{TERMswitch}{Adjust}
+%
+%    <TERMswitch>
+%      0:  all positions 
+%      1:  positions bbb and ccc 
+%      2:  positions aaa and bbb 
+%
+%       bbb
+%        2
+%     a /  `  b
+%     1      3
+%    aaa     ccc
+%
+%    <Adjust>
+%      a positive or negative integer to adjust locant numbers
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@trimethylene#1#2#3#4{%
+\leavevmode
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@trimethy{#1}{#4}%
+%\test@vertix@sixv{#1}{a}{b}{c}{@}{@}{@}%
+\begin{sfpicture}(450,480)(0,0)%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+  \Put@Direct(171,-303){\SKbondB}% bond between 1 and 2
+  \Put@Direct(171,-303){\SKbondA}% bond between 1 and 6
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@adoublebond\relax\Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondA}\fi
+\if@bdoublebond\relax\Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondB}\fi
+\if@Adoublebond\relax\Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondAA}\fi
+\if@Bdoublebond\relax\Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondBB}\fi
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@termcnt=#3\relax
+%\set@hetatom@methyl{#1}{0}{0}{4}{0}%
+\set@hetatom@methyl{#1}{#4}{0}{4}{0}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+   \setBScolor{\if@aclip \@cliptrue \else \@clipfalse\fi
+   \Put@Direct(0,0){\@methsubstdL}}%
+  \or\relax
+  \or
+   \setBScolor{\if@aclip \@cliptrue \else \@clipfalse\fi
+   \Put@Direct(0,0){\@methsubstdL}}%
+ \fi
+\or
+\setBScolor{\if@bclip \@acliptrue \else \@aclipfalse\fi
+  \Put@Direct(171,-303){\@methsubsta}}%
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+  \setBScolor{\if@cclip \@cliptrue\else \@clipfalse\fi
+  \Put@Direct(342,0){\@methsubstd}}%
+ \or
+  \setBScolor{\if@cclip \@cliptrue\else \@clipfalse\fi
+  \Put@Direct(342,0){\@methsubstd}}%
+ \or\relax
+ \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi
+}%
+\end{sfpicture}}% end of \@@trimethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vrtx@trimethy}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{test@vrtx@trimethy}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vrtx@trimethy#1#2{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax \xdef\aaa{}\else\if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \xdef\aaa{@}\else\xdef\aaa{@}\fi\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax \xdef\bbb{}\else\if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \xdef\bbb{@}\else\xdef\bbb{@}\fi\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax \xdef\ccc{}\else\if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \xdef\ccc{@}\else\xdef\ccc{@}\fi\fi
+\fi\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\yltrimethyleneposition| is used to adjust 
+% substitution sites for the command |\@@trimethylene|. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/22}{bug fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yltrimethyleneposition}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \yltrimethylene{ATOMLIST}{BONDLIST}{TERMswitch}{Adjust}
+%
+%    <TERMswitch>
+%      0:  all positions 
+%      1:  positions bbb and ccc 
+%      2:  positions aaa and bbb 
+%
+%       bbb
+%        2
+%     a /  `  b
+%     1      3
+%    aaa     ccc
+%
+%    <Adjust>
+%      a positive or negative integer to adjust locant numbers
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/29}{bug fix on a terminal position}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/07/20}{bug fix}
+%    \begin{macrocode}%
+\def\yltrimethyleneposition#1#2#3#4{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize2013/06/22
+\reset@@yl%%2013/07/20bug fix
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\if\@tmpb s\else%2013/06/22added for bug fix
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+ \or \def\aaa{@}%\def\aaa{\@memberb}%
+ \or \def\bbb{@}%\def\bbb{\@memberb}%
+ \or \def\ccc{@}%\def\ccc{\@memberb}%
+\fi\fi
+\fi
+}%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+   \ifx\aaa\empty
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+   \else
+    \if@linterchainsw%interchain position
+     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \else% terminal position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1%bug fix 2013/03/29
+    \fi
+   \fi
+  \or\relax
+  \or
+   \ifx\aaa\empty
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+   \else
+    \if@linterchainsw%interchain position
+     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \else% terminal position
+     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\or
+   \ifx\bbb\empty
+    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+   \else
+    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+   \fi
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+   \ifx\ccc\empty
+    \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+   \else
+    \if@rinterchainsw%interchain position
+     \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \else
+     \gdef\@ylii{-382}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \fi
+   \fi
+ \or
+   \ifx\ccc\empty
+    \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+   \else
+    \if@rinterchainsw%interchain position
+     \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \else
+     \gdef\@ylii{-382}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \fi
+   \fi
+ \or\relax
+ \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi}}% end of \yltrimethyleneposition
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The counter |\test@termcnt|, which is equal to 
+% the argument \#3 of command |\@@trimethylene|, 
+% is used for testing a terminal point. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@termcnt}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{test@termcnt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\test@termcnt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\set@hetatom@methyl| is used to set a hetero atom 
+% at each vertex in the command |\@@trimethylene|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@hetatom@methyl}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/20}{New command: \cs{set@hetatom@methyl}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@hetatom@methyl#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+%\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+\or%position 1 <--- position 6 of set@hetatom@sixv
+ \ifnum\test@termcnt=1\else%not terminal point (left)
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax%
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{0}{30}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax%
+     \@aclipfalse%
+%     \putlatom{-4}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+     \putlatom{0}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{36}{-23}{\@memberb}% % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+  \fi
+\or%position 2 <--- position 1 of set@hetatom@sixv
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax%
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putratom{171}{53}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax%
+     \@bclipfalse%
+     \putratom{171}{103}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@bcliptrue%
+%     \putratom{140}{53}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+     \putratom{140}{65}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 3 <--- position 2 of set@hetatom@sixv
+ \ifnum\test@termcnt=2\else%not terminal point (right)
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ccliptrue%
+%     \putratom{320}{30}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+     \putratom{330}{30}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@cclipfalse%
+     \putratom{346}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{306}{-23}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+  \fi
+\fi% end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@methyl
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\trimethylene| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\trimethylene}
+% \begin{macro}{\@trimethylene}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       bbb
+%        2
+%     a /  ` b  (or uppercase letters)
+%      /    `
+%     1      3
+%    aaa    ccc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \trimethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character a, A, b, or B
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at a lower-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at a upper-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 3)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \trimethylene{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \trimethylene[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\trimethylene| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item adjusting substitution site by 
+%       |\yltrimethyleneposition|
+% \item treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents by |\@@trimethylene|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \changes{v3.01}{2002/4/30}{Replaced by \cs{ShiftPicEnv}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\trimethylene{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@trimethylene[@}{\@trimethylene[]}}
+\def\@trimethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\reset@interchainsw%
+\yltrimethyleneposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(450,480)(-50,-180){trimethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(50,180)%
+\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue%
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@trimeth%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue%
+\@wrongbdWdfalse%
+   \Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trimethylene{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+%
+%for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy  
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy  
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy  
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@trimeth%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+}% end of \trimethylene \@trimethylene 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@trimeth| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@trimeth}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@trimeth}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@trimeth{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@trimeth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse direction}
+%
+% A trimethylene (or propane) and its hetera analogs can be typeset 
+% by the command |\trimethylenei|, which is mainly based on 
+% two inner commands: |\yltrimethyleneiposition| for adjusting a 
+% substitution site and |\@@trimethylenei| for 
+% placing hetero atoms, double bonds, and substituents.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@trimethylenei}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@@trimethylenei{ATOMLIST}{BONDLIST}{TERMswitch}{Adjust}
+%
+%    <TERMswitch>
+%      0:  all positions 
+%      1:  positions bbb and ccc 
+%      2:  positions aaa and bbb 
+%
+%    aaa      ccc
+%     1       3
+%     a `    / b
+%        `  / 
+%        2
+%       bbb
+%
+%    <Adjust>
+%      a positive or negative integer to adjust locant numbers
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@trimethylenei#1#2#3#4{%
+\leavevmode
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@trimethy{#1}{#4}%
+%\test@vertix@sixv{#1}{a}{b}{c}{@}{@}{@}%
+\begin{sfpicture}(450,480)(0,0)
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+  \Put@Direct(171,0){\SKbondAi}% bond between 1 and 2
+  \Put@Direct(171,0){\SKbondBi}% bond between 2 and 3
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@adoublebond\relax\Put@Direct(171,0){\bondAi}\fi
+\if@bdoublebond\relax\Put@Direct(171,0){\bondBi}\fi
+\if@Adoublebond\relax\Put@Direct(171,0){\bondAAi}\fi
+\if@Bdoublebond\relax\Put@Direct(171,0){\bondBBi}\fi
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@termcnt=#3\relax
+%\set@hetatom@methyli{#1}{0}{0}{4}{0}%
+\set@hetatom@methyli{#1}{#4}{0}{4}{0}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,-303){\@methsubstaL}}%
+  \or\relax
+  \or
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,-303){\@methsubstaL}}%
+ \fi
+\or
+\setBScolor{\if@bclip \@cliptrue \else \@clipfalse\fi
+  \Put@Direct(171,0){\@methsubstd}}%
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+  \setBScolor{\if@cclip \@acliptrue\else \@aclipfalse\fi
+  \Put@Direct(342,-303){\@methsubsta}}%
+ \or
+  \setBScolor{\if@cclip \@acliptrue\else \@aclipfalse\fi
+  \Put@Direct(342,-303){\@methsubsta}}%
+ \or\relax
+ \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi
+}%
+\end{sfpicture}}% end of \@@trimethylenei
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\yltrimethyleneiposition| is used to adjust 
+% substitution sites. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/22}{bug fix}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/07/20}{bug fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yltrimethyleneiposition}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \yltrimethylenei{ATOMLIST}{BONDLIST}{TERMswitch}{Adjust}
+%
+%    <TERMswitch>
+%      0:  all positions 
+%      1:  positions bbb and ccc 
+%      2:  positions aaa and bbb 
+%
+%    aaa      ccc
+%     1       3
+%     a `    / b
+%        `  / 
+%        2
+%       bbb
+%
+%    <Adjust>
+%      a positive or negative integer to adjust locant numbers
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}%
+\def\yltrimethyleneiposition#1#2#3#4{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize2013/06/22
+\reset@@yl%%2013/07/20bug fix
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+%\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\if\@tmpb s\else%2013/06/22added for bug fix
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+ \or \def\aaa{@}%\def\aaa{\@memberb}%
+ \or \def\bbb{@}%\def\bbb{\@memberb}%
+ \or \def\ccc{@}%\def\ccc{\@memberb}%
+\fi\fi
+\fi
+}%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+\or%%%%%%position 1
+ \ifcase#3
+   \ifx\aaa\empty
+%%    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+   \else
+    \if@linterchainsw%interchain position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \else% terminal position
+%%     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+   \fi
+  \or\relax
+  \or
+   \ifx\aaa\empty
+%%    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+   \else
+    \if@linterchainsw%interchain position
+     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+%     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \else% terminal position
+%%     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\or%%%%%%%%position 2
+   \ifx\bbb\empty
+%%    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+   \else
+%%    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{50}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+   \fi
+\or%%%%%%%%position 3
+ \ifcase#3
+   \ifx\ccc\empty
+%%    \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+   \else
+    \if@rinterchainsw%interchain position
+%%     \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+     \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \else
+%%     \gdef\@ylii{-382}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+     \gdef\@ylii{-382}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \fi
+   \fi
+ \or
+   \ifx\ccc\empty
+%    \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+   \else
+    \if@rinterchainsw%interchain position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+     \gdef\@ylii{-342}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \else
+%     \gdef\@ylii{-382}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+     \gdef\@ylii{-382}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 3
+    \fi
+   \fi
+ \or\relax
+ \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi}}% end of \yltrimethyleneiposition
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\set@hetatom@methyli| is used to set a hetero atom 
+% at each vertex in the command |\@@trimethylenei|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@hetatom@methyli}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/20}{New command: \cs{set@hetatom@methyli}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@hetatom@methyli#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%
+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%
+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi
+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%
+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+\or%position 1 <-- \set@hetatom@sixv position 5
+ \ifnum\test@termcnt=1\else%not terminal point (left)
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{0}{70}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@aclipfalse%
+     \putlatom{0}{103}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@acliptrue%
+     \putlatom{36}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+ \fi
+\or%position 2 <-- \set@hetatom@sixv position 4
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@bcliptrue%
+     \putratom{171}{50}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@bclipfalse%
+     \putratom{171}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@bcliptrue%
+%     \putratom{140}{-10}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+     \putratom{140}{-23}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+\or%position 3 <-- \set@hetatom@sixv position 3
+ \ifnum\test@termcnt=2\else%not terminal point (right)
+  \if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{342}{70}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax
+     \@cclipfalse%
+     \putratom{342}{103}{\@memberb}%  % right type
+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position
+   \else
+     \@ccliptrue%
+     \putratom{306}{65}{\@memberb}%   % right type
+   \fi\fi\fi
+  \fi
+\fi% end of ifcase
+\fi\fi\fi}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@methyli
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\trimethylenei| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\trimethylenei}
+% \begin{macro}{\@trimethylenei}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%    aaa      ccc
+%     1       3
+%     a `    / b (or uppercase letters)
+%        `  / 
+%        2
+%       bbb
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \trimethylenei[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character a, A, b, or B
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at a upper-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while a uppercase letter typesets a double bond at a lower-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 3 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 3 
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 3)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \trimethylenei{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \trimethylenei[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\trimethylene| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item adjusting substitution site by 
+%       |\yltrimethyleneiposition|
+% \item treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents by |\@@trimethylenei|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\trimethylenei{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@trimethylenei[@}{\@trimethylenei[]}}
+\def\@trimethylenei[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\reset@interchainsw%
+\yltrimethyleneiposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(450,480)(-50,-180){trimethylenei}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(50,180)%
+\reset@double%
+%\@adoublebondfalse
+%\@bdoublebondfalse
+%\@Adoublebondfalse
+%\@Bdoublebondfalse
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@trimethi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+   \Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trimethylenei{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy  
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy  
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy  
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@trimethi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+}% end of \trimethylenei
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@trimethi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@trimethi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@trimethi}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@trimethi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@trimethi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Dimethylene}
+% \subsection{Normal direction}
+%
+% A dimethylene (or ethane) and its hetera analogs can be typeset 
+% by the command |\dimethylene|, which is mainly based on 
+% two inner commands: |\yldimethyleneposition| for adjusting a 
+% substitution site and |\@@dimethylene| for 
+% placing hetero atoms, double bonds, and substituents.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dimethylene}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@@dimethylene{ATOMLIST}{BONDLIST}{TERMswitch}{Adjust}
+%
+%    <TERMswitch>
+%      0:  all positions 
+%      1:  position bbb 
+%      2:  position aaa
+%
+%       bbb
+%        2
+%     a /
+%     1
+%    aaa
+%
+%    <Adjust>
+%      a positive or negative integer to adjust locant numbers
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@dimethylene#1#2#3#4{%
+\leavevmode
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@dimethy{#1}{#4}%
+%\test@vertix@sixv{#1}{a}{b}{@}{@}{@}{@}%
+\begin{sfpicture}(250,480)(0,0)%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+  \Put@Direct(171,-303){\SKbondA}% bond between 1 and 2
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@adoublebond
+ \Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondA}%upper side double bond
+\else\if@Adoublebond
+ \Put@Direct(171,-303){\bondAA}%lower side double bond
+\fi\fi%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@termcnt=#3\relax
+%\set@hetatom@methyl{#1}{0}{0}{3}{0}%
+\set@hetatom@methyl{#1}{#4}{0}{3}{0}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+   \setBScolor{\if@aclip \@cliptrue \else \@clipfalse\fi
+   \Put@Direct(0,0){\@methsubstdL}}%
+  \or\relax
+  \or
+   \setBScolor{\if@aclip \@cliptrue \else \@clipfalse\fi
+   \Put@Direct(0,0){\@methsubstdL}}%
+ \fi
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+  \setBScolor{\if@bclip \@acliptrue \else \@aclipfalse\fi
+   \Put@Direct(171,-303){\@methsubsta}}%
+ \or
+  \setBScolor{\if@bclip \@acliptrue \else \@aclipfalse\fi
+   \Put@Direct(171,-303){\@methsubsta}}%
+ \or\relax
+ \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}%
+\end{sfpicture}}% end of \@@dimethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\test@vrtx@dimethy}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{test@vrtx@dimethy}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\test@vrtx@dimethy#1#2{%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax \xdef\aaa{}\else\if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \xdef\aaa{@}\else\xdef\aaa{@}\fi\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax \xdef\bbb{}\else\if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \xdef\bbb{@}\else\xdef\bbb{@}\fi\fi
+\fi\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\yldimethyleneposition| is used to adjust 
+% substitution sites. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/22}{bug fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yldimethyleneposition}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \yldimethylene{ATOMLIST}{BONDLIST}{TERMswitch}{Adjust}
+%
+%    <TERMswitch>
+%      0:  all positions 
+%      1:  position bbb
+%      2:  position aaa
+%
+%       bbb
+%        2
+%     a /
+%     1 
+%    aaa
+%
+%    <Adjust>
+%      a positive or negative integer to adjust locant numbers
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/07/20}{Bug fix}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}%
+\def\yldimethyleneposition#1#2#3#4{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize2013/06/22
+\reset@@yl%%2013/07/20bug fix
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\if\@tmpb s\else%2013/06/22added for bug fix
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+ \or \def\aaa{@}%\def\aaa{\@memberb}%2013/06/22
+ \or \def\bbb{@}%\def\bbb{\@memberb}%2013/06/22
+\fi\fi
+\fi
+}%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+   \ifx\aaa\empty
+%    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+   \else
+    \if@linterchainsw%interchain position
+     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \else%terminal position
+     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+   \fi
+  \or\relax
+  \or
+   \ifx\aaa\empty
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+   \else
+    \if@linterchainsw%interchain position
+     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \else%terminal position
+     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\or
+ \ifcase#3 
+   \ifx\bbb\empty
+    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+   \else
+    \if@rinterchainsw%interchain position
+     \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \else%terminal position
+     \gdef\@ylii{-211}\gdef\@yli{-93}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \fi
+   \fi
+  \or
+   \ifx\bbb\empty
+    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+   \else
+    \if@rinterchainsw%interchain position
+     \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \else%terminal position
+     \gdef\@ylii{-211}\gdef\@yli{-93}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \fi
+   \fi
+  \or \relax
+  \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi}}% end of \yldimethyleneposition
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The macro |\dimethylene| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dimethylene}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dimethylene}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       bbb
+%        2
+%     a /      (or uppercase letters)
+%      /
+%     1
+%    aaa 
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \dimethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character a or A, 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at a lower-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at a upper-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc. ) 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 2 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 and 2
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 and 2
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 2)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \dimethylene{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \dimethylene[a]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\dimethylene| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item adjusting substitution site by 
+%       |\yldimethyleneposition|
+% \item treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents by |\@@dimethylene|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dimethylene{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@dimethylene[@}{\@dimethylene[]}}
+\def\@dimethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\reset@interchainsw%
+\yldimethyleneposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(250,480)(-50,-180){dimethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(50,180)%
+\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@dimeth
+\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdfalse
+   \Put@Direct(0,0){\@@dimethylene{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy 
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@dimeth
+\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+}% end of \dimethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@dimeth| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@dimeth}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@dimeth}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@dimeth{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+ \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+ \fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@dimeth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse direction}
+%
+% A dimethylene (or ethane) and its hetera analogs (of inverse direction) 
+% can be typeset by the command |\dimethylenei|, which is mainly based on 
+% two inner commands: |\yldimethyleneiposition| for adjusting a 
+% substitution site and |\@@dimethylenei| for 
+% placing hetero atoms, double bonds, and substituents.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dimethylenei}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@@dimethylenei{ATOMLIST}{BONDLIST}{TERMswitch}{Adjust}
+%
+%    <TERMswitch>
+%      0:  all positions 
+%      1:  position bbb  
+%      2:  positions aaa
+%
+%    aaa
+%     1
+%     a `
+%        `
+%          2
+%         bbb
+%
+%    <Adjust>
+%      a positive or negative integer to adjust locant numbers
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{For bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@dimethylenei#1#2#3#4{%
+\leavevmode
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize
+\test@vrtx@dimethy{#1}{#4}%
+%\test@vertix@sixv{#1}{a}{b}{@}{@}{@}{@}%
+\begin{sfpicture}(250,480)(0,0)%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % outer skeleton %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+  \Put@Direct(171,0){\SKbondAi}% bond between 1 and 2
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner double bond %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@adoublebond
+ \Put@Direct(171,0){\bondAi}%upper side double bond
+\else\if@Adoublebond
+ \Put@Direct(171,0){\bondAAi}%lower side double bond
+\fi\fi%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting hetero atoms %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\test@termcnt=#3\relax
+%\set@hetatom@methyli{#1}{0}{0}{3}{0}%
+\set@hetatom@methyli{#1}{#4}{0}{3}{0}%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % setting substituents %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,-303){\@methsubstaL}}%
+  \or\relax
+  \or
+   \setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,-303){\@methsubstaL}}%
+ \fi
+\or
+ \ifcase#3
+  \setBScolor{\if@bclip \@cliptrue \else \@clipfalse\fi
+   \Put@Direct(171,0){\@methsubstd}}%
+ \or
+  \setBScolor{\if@bclip \@cliptrue \else \@clipfalse\fi
+   \Put@Direct(171,0){\@methsubstd}}%
+ \or\relax
+ \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}%
+\end{sfpicture}}% end of \@@dimethylenei
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The |\yldimethyleneiposition| is used to adjust 
+% substitution sites. 
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/06/22}{bug fix}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/07/20}{bug fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yldimethyleneiposition}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \yldimethylenei{ATOMLIST}{BONDLIST}{TERMswitch}{Adjust}
+%
+%    <TERMswitch>
+%      0:  all positions 
+%      1:  position bbb
+%      2:  position aaa
+%
+%    aaa
+%     1
+%     a `
+%        `
+%          2
+%         bbb
+%
+%    <Adjust>
+%      a positive or negative integer to adjust locant numbers
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}%
+\def\yldimethyleneiposition#1#2#3#4{%
+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize2013/06/22
+\reset@@yl%%2013/07/20bug fix
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\if\@tmpb s\else%2013/06/22added for bug fix
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%
+ \or \def\aaa{@}%\def\aaa{\@memberb}%2013/06/22
+ \or \def\bbb{@}%\def\bbb{\@memberb}%2013/06/22
+\fi\fi
+\fi
+}%
+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa \advance\@tmpaa by#4\relax
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi
+\if@@ylsw
+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit
+\or%%%%%%%%position 1
+ \ifcase#3
+   \ifx\aaa\empty
+%    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+   \else
+    \if@linterchainsw%interchain position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \else%terminal position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+   \fi
+  \or\relax
+  \or
+   \ifx\aaa\empty
+%    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+   \else
+    \if@linterchainsw%interchain position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{40}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+     \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \else%terminal position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-24}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+     \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 1
+    \fi
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\or%%%%%%%%position 2
+ \ifcase#3 
+   \ifx\bbb\empty
+%    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+   \else
+    \if@rinterchainsw%interchain position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+     \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{33}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \else%terminal position
+ %    \gdef\@ylii{-211}\gdef\@yli{-93}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+     \gdef\@ylii{-211}\gdef\@yli{-10}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \fi
+   \fi
+  \or
+   \ifx\bbb\empty
+%    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+   \else
+    \if@rinterchainsw%interchain position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-133}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+     \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{33}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \else%terminal position
+%     \gdef\@ylii{-211}\gdef\@yli{-93}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+     \gdef\@ylii{-211}\gdef\@yli{-10}\global\@ylswtrue% subst. on 2
+    \fi
+   \fi
+  \or \relax
+  \fi
+\fi%end of ifcase
+\fi}}% end of \yldimethyleneiposition
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\dimethylenei| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dimethylenei}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dimethylenei}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%    aaa
+%     1
+%     a `   (or uppercase letter)
+%        `
+%          2
+%         bbb
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \dimethylenei[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character a or A, 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at a upper-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at a lower-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc. ) 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 2 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 and 2
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 and 2
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 2)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \dimethylenei{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \dimethylenei[a]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\dimethylenei| uses a picture environment and 
+% consists of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item adjusting substitution site by 
+%       |\yldimethyleneposition|
+% \item treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents by |\@@dimethylene|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dimethylenei{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@dimethylenei[@}{\@dimethylenei[]}}
+\def\@dimethylenei[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\reset@interchainsw%
+\yldimethyleneiposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnv}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(250,480)(-50,-180){dimethylenei}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(50,180)%
+\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@dimethi
+\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdfalse
+   \Put@Direct(0,0){\@@dimethylenei{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy 
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@dimethi
+\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnv}%
+}% end of \dimethylenei
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@dimethi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@dimethi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@dimethi}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@dimethi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+   \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+\fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@dimethi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Tetramethylenes}
+% \subsection{Normal direction}
+%
+% The macro |\tetramethylene| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetramethylene}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tetramethylene}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       bbb     ddd
+%        2       4
+%     a /  ` b  / c (or uppercase letters)
+%      /    `  /
+%     1      3
+%    aaa    ccc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \tetramethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to c (or A to C), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at a lower-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at a upper-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 4 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 4)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \tetramethylene{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \tetramethylene[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\tetramethylene| uses a picture environment and 
+% is based on |\@@trimethylene| and |\@@dimethylene|, each of which
+% is consist of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item adjusting substitution site by 
+%       |\yltrimethyleneposition| or 
+%       |\yldimethyleneposition|
+% \item treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents by |\@@trimethylene|or |\@@dimethylene|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetramethylene{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@tetramethylene[@}{\@tetramethylene[]}}
+\def\@tetramethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\yltrimethyleneposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\yldimethyleneposition{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(900,480)(-200,-180){tetramethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@tetrameth
+%\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trimethylene{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\@@dimethylene{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@tetrameth
+\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end of \tetramethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@tetrameth| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@tetrameth}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@tetrameth}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@tetrameth{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{513}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+   \fi\fi
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@tetrameth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse direction}
+%
+% The macro |\tetramethylenei| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetramethylenei}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tetramethylenei}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%  aaa      ccc
+%    1       3
+%   a `   b /  ` c  (or uppercase letters)
+%       `  /    `
+%        2        4
+%       bbb       ddd
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \tetramethylenei[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to c (or A to C), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at a lower-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at a upper-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 4 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 4)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \tetramethylenei{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \tetramethylenei[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\tetramethylenei| uses a picture environment and 
+% is based on |\@@trimethylenei| and |\@@dimethylenei|, each of which
+% is consist of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item adjusting substitution site by 
+%       |\yltrimethylenieposition| or 
+%       |\yldimethyleneiposition|
+% \item treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents by |\@@trimethylenei| or |\@@dimethylenei|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetramethylenei{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@tetramethylenei[@}{\@tetramethylenei[]}}
+\def\@tetramethylenei[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\yltrimethyleneiposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\yldimethyleneiposition{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(900,480)(-200,-180){tetramethylenei}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@tetramethi
+%\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trimethylenei{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdfalse
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\@@dimethylenei{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@tetramethi
+\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}%end of \tetramethylenei
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@tetramethi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@tetramethi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@tetramethi}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@tetramethi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{513}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+   \fi\fi
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@tetramethi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Cisoid types}
+%
+% The macros |\tetramethylenecup| and |\tetramethylenecap| are 
+% used to draw tetramethylenes of cisoid types. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  Cup:
+%    aaa           ddd
+%     1           4
+%      `         /
+%     a `       / c (or uppercase letters)
+%        2------3   
+%       bbb  b  ccc
+%
+%  Cap:
+%       bbb  b  ccc
+%        2------3   
+%     a /       ` c (or uppercase letters)
+%      /         `
+%     1           4
+%    aaa           ddd
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros have two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \tetramethylenecup[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \tetramethylenecap[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to c (or A to C), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at a lower-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at a upper-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 4 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 4)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \tetramethylenecup{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \tetramethylenecap[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetramethylenecup}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tetramethylenecup}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetramethylenecup{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@tetramethylenecup[@}{\@tetramethylenecup[]}}
+\def\@tetramethylenecup[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\yldimethyleneiposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\yldimethyleneposition{#2}{#3}{0}{-2}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-371}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(900,480)(-200,-180){tetramethylenecup}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+%bond a and atoms 1 and 2
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@tetracup% for all bonds
+%\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@dimethylenei{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+%bond b
+{\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or \relax%
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\else\if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \xdef\fff{@}\xdef\bbb{@}\else
+     \xdef\fff{@}\xdef\bbb{@}\fi\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\else\if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \xdef\eee{@}\xdef\ccc{@}\else
+     \xdef\eee{@}\xdef\ccc{@}\fi\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+\Put@Direct(68,171){\hskbonde}%
+\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+ \if\member b\relax 
+ \@bdoublebondtrue
+ \Put@Direct(68,171){\hbonde}%
+ \else\if\member B\relax 
+ \@bdoublebondtrue
+ \Put@Direct(68,-171){\hbondb}%
+ \fi\fi}}%
+%bond c and atoms 3 and 4
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member d\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member D\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+ \@wrongbdWafalse
+ \@wrongbdWdLtrue
+\Put@Direct(371,0){\@@dimethylene{#2}{#3}{0}{-2}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@tetracup% for all bonds
+\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end of \tetramethylenecup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@tetracup| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@tetracup}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@tetracup}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@tetracup{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{371}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{371}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{542}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+   \fi\fi
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@tetracup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tetramethylenecap}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tetramethylenecap}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tetramethylenecap{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@tetramethylenecap[@}{\@tetramethylenecap[]}}
+\def\@tetramethylenecap[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\yldimethyleneposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\yldimethyleneiposition{#2}{#3}{0}{-2}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-371}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(900,480)(-200,-180){tetramethylenecap}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@tetracap% for all bonds
+%\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@dimethylene{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa%
+ \or \relax%
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\else\if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \xdef\fff{@}\xdef\bbb{@}\else
+     \xdef\fff{@}\xdef\bbb{@}\fi\fi
+ \or \if\@tmpb s\relax\else\if\@tmpb h\relax
+     \xdef\eee{@}\xdef\ccc{@}\else
+     \xdef\eee{@}\xdef\ccc{@}\fi\fi
+\fi\fi}%
+\Put@Direct(68,-68){\hskbondb}%
+\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+ \if\member b\relax 
+ \@bdoublebondtrue
+ \Put@Direct(68,-68){\hbondb}%
+ \else\if\member B\relax 
+ \@bdoublebondtrue
+ \Put@Direct(68,274){\hbonde}%
+ \fi\fi}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member d\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member D\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+ \@wrongbdWaLtrue
+\Put@Direct(371,0){\@@dimethylenei{#2}{#3}{0}{-2}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@tetracap% for all bonds
+\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end of \tetramethylenecap
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@tetracap| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@tetracap}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@tetracap}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@tetracap{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{371}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{371}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{542}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+   \fi\fi
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@tetracap
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Pentamethylene}
+% \subsection{Normal direction}
+%
+% The macro |\pentamethylene| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pentamethylene}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pentamethylene}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%       bbb     ddd
+%        2       4
+%     a /  ` b  / c` d (or uppercase letters)
+%      /    `  /    `
+%     1      3        5
+%    aaa    ccc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \pentamethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to d (or A to D), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at a lower-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at a upper-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond 
+%           D          :  4,5-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 5)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \pentamethylene{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \pentamethylene[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\pentamethylene| uses a picture environment and 
+% is based on two |\@@trimethylene| commands, each of which
+% is consist of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item adjusting substitution site by 
+%       |\yltrimethyleneposition| 
+% \item treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents by |\@@trimethylene|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pentamethylene{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@pentamethylene[@}{\@pentamethylene[]}}
+\def\@pentamethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\yltrimethyleneposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\yltrimethyleneposition{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1100,480)(-200,-180){pentamethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@pentameth% for all bonds
+%\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trimethylene{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member d\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member D\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdfalse
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\@@trimethylene{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy 
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@pentameth% for all bonds
+\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end of \pentamethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@pentameth| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@pentameth}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@pentameth}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@pentameth{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{0}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{513}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{513}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{684}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@pentameth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Inverse direction}
+%
+% The macro |\pentamethylenei| has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pentamethylenei}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pentamethylenei}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%             (aaa)
+%  aaa      ccc      eee (ccc)
+%    1       3        5
+%   a `   b /  ` c   / d
+%       `  /    `   /
+%        2        4
+%       bbb       ddd (bbb)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \pentamethylenei[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to d (or A to D), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at the upper-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at the lower-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond 
+%           D          :  4,5-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 5 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 5
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 5)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \pentamethylenei{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \pentamethylenei[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The definition of |\pentamethylenei| uses a picture environment and 
+% is based on two |\@@trimethylenei| commands, each of which
+% is consist of the following unit processes: 
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item adjusting substitution site by 
+%       |\yltrimethyleneiposition| 
+% \item treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents by |\@@trimethylenei|. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pentamethylenei{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@pentamethylenei[@}{\@pentamethylenei[]}}
+\def\@pentamethylenei[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\yltrimethyleneiposition{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\yltrimethyleneiposition{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1100,480)(-200,-180){pentamethylenei}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@pentamethi% for all bonds
+%\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trimethylenei{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member d\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member D\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\@@trimethylenei{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@pentamethi% for all bonds
+\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end of \pentamethylenei
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@pentamethi| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@pentamethi}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@pentamethi}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@pentamethi{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if\@@tmpa a\relax%
+        \putlratom{0}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%
+        \putlratom{171}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%
+        \putlratom{342}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%
+        \putlratom{513}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%
+        \putlratom{513}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%
+        \putlratom{684}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D}%
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+   \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@pentamethi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Switches for Selecting Normal and Inverse Directions}
+%
+% The switch |\@normorinvsw| is used to select normal or 
+% inverse direction in the definition of commands for drawing 
+% hexametylenes and higher homologs. The value of this switch is 
+% false for normal direction and true for inverse direction. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@normorinvsw}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@normorinvsw \@normorinvswfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@normaldirection| assigns active commands to 
+% temporary commands in the definition of a command for drawing 
+% hexametylenes or higher homologs of normal direction. 
+% \begin{macro}{\set@normaldirection}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@normaldirection{%
+\@normorinvswfalse
+\let\@yltrinormorinv=\yltrimethyleneposition
+\let\@yldinormorinv=\yldimethyleneposition
+\let\@@trinormorinv=\@@trimethylene
+\let\@@dinormorinv=\@@dimethylene}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\set@inversedirection| assigns active commands to 
+% temporary commands in the definition of a command for drawing 
+% hexametylenes or higher homologs of inverse direction. 
+% \begin{macro}{\set@inversedirection}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@inversedirection{%
+\@normorinvswtrue
+\let\@yltrinormorinv=\yltrimethyleneiposition
+\let\@yldinormorinv=\yldimethyleneiposition
+\let\@@trinormorinv=\@@trimethylenei
+\let\@@dinormorinv=\@@dimethylenei}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Hexamethylenes of normal and inverse direction}
+%
+% Hexamethylene and hetera derivatives are typeset with the commands
+% |\hexamethylene| and |\hexamethylenei|. The former macro 
+% is to draw hexamethylenes of normal direction, while the latter 
+% is to draw ones of inverse directions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  Normal direction:
+%
+%              (bbb)     ((bbb))
+%       bbb     ddd      fff
+%        2       4        6
+%     a /  ` b  / c` d   / e
+%      /    `  /    `   /
+%     1      3        5
+%    aaa    ccc      eee
+%           (aaa)    (ccc)
+%                    ((aaa))
+%
+%  Inverse direction:
+%
+%             (aaa)
+%  aaa      ccc      eee (ccc) ((aaa))
+%    1       3        5
+%   a `   b /  ` c   / d ` e
+%       `  /    `   /     `
+%        2        4         6
+%       bbb       ddd (bbb) fff((bbb))
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros  have  two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \hexamethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \hexamethylenei[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to e (or A to E), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at the upper-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at the lower-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond 
+%           D          :  4,5-double bond in an opposite side
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond 
+%           E          :  5,6-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 6 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 6
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 6)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \hexamethylene{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \hexamethylenei[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros |\hexamethylene| and |\hexamethylenei| are 
+% based on a common inner macro |\@hexamethylene|, 
+% the definition of which uses a picture environment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hexamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hexamethylene{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@normaldirection\@hexamethylene[@}{%
+\set@normaldirection\@hexamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hexamethylenei}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hexamethylenei{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@inversedirection\@hexamethylene[@}{%
+\set@inversedirection\@hexamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Inner temporary commands such as |\@@trinormorinv| and 
+% |\@@dinormorinv| in the common |\@hexamethylene| macro 
+% are replaced by active commands such as |\@@trimethylene| and 
+% |\@@dimethylene|. They carry out the following unit processes.  
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Adjusting substitution site:  
+%    |\yltrimethyleneposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneposition| for normal direction; 
+%    |\yltrimethyleneiposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneiposition| for inverse direction. 
+% \item Treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents:  
+%        |\@@trimethylene| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylene| for normal direction; 
+%        |\@@trimethylenei| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylenei| for normal direction. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@hexamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@hexamethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yldinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-684}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1100,480)(-200,-180){hexamethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@hexameth% for all bonds
+%\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member d\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member D\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member e\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member E\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi}%
+\if@normorinvsw% inverse
+ \@wrongbdWatrue
+ \@wrongbdWdfalse
+\else% normal
+ \@wrongbdWafalse
+ \@wrongbdWdtrue
+\fi
+\Put@Direct(684,0){\@@dinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@hexameth% for all bonds
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end of \@hexamethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@hexameth| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@hexameth}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@hexameth}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@hexameth{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@normorinvsw
+  \if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{684}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@pentamethi
+  \fi\fi
+\else
+  \if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{684}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@pentameth
+  \fi\fi
+\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@hexameth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Heptamethylenes of normal and inverse direction}
+%
+% Heptamethylene and hetera derivatives are typeset with the commands
+% |\heptamethylene| and |\heptamethylenei|. The former macro 
+% is to draw heptamethylenes of normal direction, while the latter 
+% is to draw ones of inverse directions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  Normal direction:
+%
+%              (bbb)     ((bbb))
+%       bbb     ddd      fff
+%        2       4        6
+%     a /  ` b  / c` d   / e ` f
+%      /    `  /    `   /     `
+%     1      3        5        7
+%    aaa    ccc      eee       gggg
+%           (aaa)    (ccc)     ((ccc))
+%                    ((aaa))
+%
+%  Inverse direction:
+%
+%             (aaa)       ((aaa)) ((ccc))
+%  aaa      ccc      eee (ccc)    ggg
+%    1       3        5           7
+%   a `   b /  ` c   / d ` e     /f
+%       `  /    `   /     `    /
+%        2        4         6
+%       bbb       ddd (bbb) fff((bbb))
+%             (aaa)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros have two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \heptamethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \heptamethylenei[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to f (or A to F), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at the upper-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at the lower-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond 
+%           D          :  4,5-double bond in an opposite side
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond 
+%           E          :  5,6-double bond in an opposite side
+%           f          :  6,7-double bond 
+%           F          :  6,7-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 7 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 7
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 7
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 7)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \heptamethylene{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \heptamethylenei[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros |\heptamethylene| and |\heptamethylenei| are 
+% based on a common inner macro |\@heptamethylene|, 
+% the definition of which uses a picture environment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\heptamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\heptamethylene{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@normaldirection\@heptamethylene[@}{%
+\set@normaldirection\@heptamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\heptamethylenei}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\heptamethylenei{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@inversedirection\@heptamethylene[@}{%
+\set@inversedirection\@heptamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Inner temporary commands such as |\@@trinormorinv| and 
+% |\@@dinormorinv| in the common |\@heptamethylene| macro 
+% are replaced by active commands such as |\@@trimethylene| and 
+% |\@@dimethylene|. They carry out the following unit processes.  
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Adjusting substitution site:  
+%    |\yltrimethyleneposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneposition| for normal direction; 
+%    |\yltrimethyleneiposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneiposition| for inverse direction. 
+% \item Treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents:  
+%        |\@@trimethylene| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylene| for normal direction; 
+%        |\@@trimethylenei| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylenei| for normal direction. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@heptamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@heptamethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-684}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1450,480)(-200,-180){heptamethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member f\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member F\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@heptameth% for all bonds
+%\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member d\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member D\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member e\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member E\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member f\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member F\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\if@normorinvsw% inverse
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\else%normal
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdfalse
+\fi
+\Put@Direct(684,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member f\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member F\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@heptameth% for all bonds
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end of \@heptamethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@heptameth| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@heptameth}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@heptameth}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@heptameth{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@normorinvsw
+  \if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{684}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%
+        \putlratom{1027}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@pentamethi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\else
+  \if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{684}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%
+        \putlratom{1027}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@pentameth
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@heptameth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Octamethylenes of normal and inverse directions}
+%
+% Octamethylene and hetera derivatives are typeset with the commands 
+% |\octamethylene| and |\octamethylenei|. The former macro 
+% is to draw octamethylenes of normal direction, while the latter 
+% is to draw ones of inverse directions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  Normal direction:
+%
+%              (bbb)     ((bbb))  (((bbb)))
+%       bbb     ddd      fff      hhh
+%        2       4        6       8
+%     a /  ` b  / c` d   / e ` f /g
+%      /    `  /    `   /     ` /
+%     1      3        5        7
+%    aaa    ccc      eee       gggg
+%           (aaa)    (ccc)     ((ccc))
+%                    ((aaa))   (((aaa)))
+%
+%  Inverse direction:
+%                                 (((aaa)))
+%             (aaa)       ((aaa)) ((ccc))
+%  aaa      ccc      eee (ccc)    ggg
+%    1       3        5           7
+%   a `   b /  ` c   / d ` e     /f `  g
+%       `  /    `   /     `    /      `
+%        2        4         6          8
+%       bbb       ddd     fff          hhh
+%                 (bbb)   ((bbb))       (((bbb)))
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros has two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \octamethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \octamethylenei[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to g (or A to G), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at the upper-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at the lower-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond 
+%           D          :  4,5-double bond in an opposite side
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond 
+%           E          :  5,6-double bond in an opposite side
+%           f          :  6,7-double bond 
+%           F          :  6,7-double bond in an opposite side
+%           g          :  7,8-double bond 
+%           G          :  7,8-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 8 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 8
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 8)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \octamethylene{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \octamethylenei[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros |\octamethylene| and |\octamethylenei| are 
+% based on a common inner macro |\@octamethylene|, 
+% the definition of which uses a picture environment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\octamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\octamethylene{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@normaldirection\@octamethylene[@}{%
+\set@normaldirection\@octamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\octamethylenei}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\octamethylenei{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@inversedirection\@octamethylene[@}{%
+\set@inversedirection\@octamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Inner temporary commands such as |\@@trinormorinv| and 
+% |\@@dinormorinv| in the common |\@octamethylene| macro 
+% are replaced by active commands such as |\@@trimethylene| and 
+% |\@@dimethylene|. They carry out the following unit processes.  
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Adjusting substitution site:  
+%    |\yltrimethyleneposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneposition| for normal direction; 
+%    |\yltrimethyleneiposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneiposition| for inverse direction. 
+% \item Treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents:  
+%        |\@@trimethylene| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylene| for normal direction; 
+%        |\@@trimethylenei| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylenei| for normal direction. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@octamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@octamethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-684}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yldinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-6}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1620,480)(-200,-180){octamethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member f\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member F\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member g\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member G\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@octameth% for all bonds
+%\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member d\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member D\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member e\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member E\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member f\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member F\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(684,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member g\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member G\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi}%
+\if@normorinvsw% inverse
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdfalse
+\else% normal
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\fi
+\Put@Direct(1026,0){\@@dinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-6}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member f\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member F\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member g\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member G\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@octameth% for all bonds
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end of \@octamethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@octameth| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@octameth}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@octameth}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@octameth{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@normorinvsw
+  \if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{684}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%
+        \putlratom{1027}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa g\relax%
+        \putlratom{1027}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{g}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa G\relax%
+        \putlratom{1198}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{G}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@pentamethi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\else
+  \if\@@tmpa e\relax%
+        \putlratom{684}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%
+        \putlratom{855}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%
+        \putlratom{1027}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa g\relax%
+        \putlratom{1027}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{g}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa G\relax%
+        \putlratom{1198}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{G}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@pentameth
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@octameth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Nonamethylenes of normal and inverse direction}
+%
+% Nonamethylene and hetera derivatives are typeset with the commands 
+% |\nonamethylene| and |\nonamethylenei|. The former macro 
+% is to draw nonamethylenes of normal direction, while the latter 
+% is to draw ones of inverse directions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  Normal direction:
+%
+%              (bbb)     ((bbb))  (((bbb)))
+%       bbb     ddd      fff      hhh
+%        2       4        6       8 
+%     a /  ` b  / c` d   / e ` f /g` h
+%      /    `  /    `   /     ` /    `
+%     1      3        5        7       9
+%    aaa    ccc      eee       gggg    (((ccc)))
+%           (aaa)    (ccc)     ((ccc))
+%                    ((aaa))   (((aaa)))
+%
+%  Inverse direction:
+%                                 (((aaa)))
+%             (aaa)       ((aaa)) ((ccc))
+%  aaa      ccc      eee (ccc)    ggg     (((ccc)))
+%    1       3        5           7        9
+%   a `   b /  ` c   / d ` e     /f `  g  / h
+%       `  /    `   /     `    /      `  /
+%        2        4         6          8
+%       bbb       ddd     fff          hhh
+%                 (bbb)   ((bbb))       (((bbb)))
+%             (aaa)       ((aaa)) ((ccc))
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros have two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \nonamethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \nonamethylenei[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to h (or A to H), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at the upper-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at the lower-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond 
+%           D          :  4,5-double bond in an opposite side
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond 
+%           E          :  5,6-double bond in an opposite side
+%           f          :  6,7-double bond 
+%           F          :  6,7-double bond in an opposite side
+%           g          :  7,8-double bond 
+%           G          :  7,8-double bond in an opposite side
+%           h          :  8,9-double bond 
+%           H          :  8,9-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 9 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 9
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 9
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 9)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \nonamethylene{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \nonamethylenei[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros |\nonamethylene| and |\nonamethylenei| are 
+% based on a common inner macro |\@nonamethylene|, 
+% the definition of which uses a picture environment. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nonamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonamethylene{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@normaldirection\@nonamethylene[@}{%
+\set@normaldirection\@nonamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\nonamethylenei}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonamethylenei{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@inversedirection\@nonamethylene[@}{%
+\set@inversedirection\@nonamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Inner temporary commands such as |\@@trinormorinv| and 
+% |\@@dinormorinv| in the common |\@nonamethylene| macro 
+% are replaced by active commands such as |\@@trimethylene| and 
+% |\@@dimethylene|. They carry out the following unit processes.  
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Adjusting substitution site:  
+%    |\yltrimethyleneposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneposition| for normal direction; 
+%    |\yltrimethyleneiposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneiposition| for inverse direction. 
+% \item Treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents:  
+%        |\@@trimethylene| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylene| for normal direction; 
+%        |\@@trimethylenei| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylenei| for normal direction. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nonamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nonamethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-684}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-6}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1790,480)(-200,-180){nonamethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member f\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member F\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member g\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member G\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member h\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member H\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@nonameth% for all bonds
+%\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member d\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member D\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member e\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member E\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member f\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member F\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(684,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member g\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member G\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member h\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member H\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\if@normorinvsw% inverse
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\else% normal
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdfalse
+\fi
+\Put@Direct(1026,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-6}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member f\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member F\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member g\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member G\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member h\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member H\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@nonameth% for all bonds
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end of \@nonamethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@nonameth| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@nonameth}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@nonameth}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@nonameth{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@normorinvsw
+ \if\@@tmpa h\relax%
+        \putlratom{1198}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{h}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa H\relax%
+        \putlratom{1369}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{H}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@octameth
+  \fi\fi
+\else
+ \if\@@tmpa h\relax%
+        \putlratom{1198}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{h}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa H\relax%
+        \putlratom{1369}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{H}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@octameth
+  \fi\fi
+\fi
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@nonameth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Decamethylenes of normal and inverse directions}
+%
+% Decamethylene and hetera derivatives are typeset with the commands 
+% |\decamethylene| and |\decamethylenei|. The former macro 
+% is to draw decamethylenes of normal direction, while the latter 
+% is to draw ones of inverse directions. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  Normal direction:
+%
+%              (bbb)     ((bbb))  (((bbb)))
+%       bbb     ddd      fff      hhh     <bbb>
+%        2       4        6       8      10
+%     a /  ` b  / c` d   / e ` f /g ` h   / i
+%      /    `  /    `   /     ` /    `   /
+%     1      3        5        7       9
+%    aaa    ccc      eee       gggg    (((ccc)))
+%           (aaa)    (ccc)     ((ccc))   <aaa>
+%                    ((aaa))   (((aaa)))
+%
+%  Inverse direction:
+%                                 (((aaa)))
+%             (aaa)       ((aaa)) ((ccc))  <aaa>
+%  aaa      ccc      eee (ccc)    ggg     (((ccc)))
+%    1       3        5           7        9
+%   a `   b /  ` c   / d ` e     /f `  g  / h ` i
+%       `  /    `   /     `    /      `  /     `
+%        2        4         6          8         10
+%       bbb       ddd     fff          hhh       <bbb>
+%                 (bbb)   ((bbb))       (((bbb)))
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros have two arguments |ATOMLIST| and |SUBSLIST| 
+% as well as an optional argument |BONDLIST|.  
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \decamethylene[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \decamethylenei[BONDLIST]{ATOMLIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |BONDLIST| argument contains one character selected from 
+% a to i (or A to I), 
+% each of which indicates the presence of an inner (endcyclic) double 
+% bond on the corresponding position.  A lowercase letter is used 
+% to typeset a double bond at the upper-side of an outer skeletal bond, 
+% while an uppercase letter typesets a double bond at the lower-side of 
+% an outer skeletal bond.  
+% (Note that the option `A' represents an aromatic circle in 
+% commands |\sixheterov| etc.)  
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     BONDLIST = 
+%
+%           [] or none :  no double bond
+%           a          :  1,2-double bond
+%           A          :  1,2-double bond in an opposite side
+%           b          :  2,3-double bond 
+%           B          :  2,3-double bond in an opposite side
+%           c          :  3,4-double bond 
+%           C          :  3,4-double bond in an opposite side
+%           d          :  4,5-double bond 
+%           D          :  4,5-double bond in an opposite side
+%           e          :  5,6-double bond 
+%           E          :  5,6-double bond in an opposite side
+%           f          :  6,7-double bond 
+%           F          :  6,7-double bond in an opposite side
+%           g          :  7,8-double bond 
+%           G          :  7,8-double bond in an opposite side
+%           h          :  8,9-double bond 
+%           H          :  8,9-double bond in an opposite side
+%           i          :  9,10-double bond 
+%           I          :  9,10-double bond in an opposite side
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |ATOMLIST| argument contains one or more heteroatom descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each heteroatom 
+% descriptor consists of a locant number and a heteroatom, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     ATOMLIST: list of heteroatoms (max 10 atoms)
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 10
+%
+%           n==?    : Hetero atom, e.g. N, O, etc. at n-position, 
+%                        e.g. 1==N for N at 1-position
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |SUBSLIST| argument contains one or more substitution descriptors 
+% which are separated from each other by a semicolon.  Each substitution 
+% descriptor has a locant number with a bond modifier and a substituent, 
+% where these are separated with a double equality symbol. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 10
+%
+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom
+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)
+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)
+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom
+%           nW         :  terminal single bond (n=1 or 10)
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Several examples are shown as follows.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%       e.g. 
+%        
+%        \decamethylene{1==N}{1==Cl;2==F}
+%        \decamethylenei[b]{1==N}{1==Cl;4==F;2==CH$_{3}$}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The macros |\decamethylene| and |\decamethylenei| are 
+% based on a common inner macro |\@decamethylene|, 
+% the definition of which uses a picture environment. 
+% \begin{macro}{\decamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decamethylene{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@normaldirection\@decamethylene[@}{%
+\set@normaldirection\@decamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\decamethylenei}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\decamethylenei{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\set@inversedirection\@decamethylene[@}{%
+\set@inversedirection\@decamethylene[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Inner temporary commands such as |\@@trinormorinv| and 
+% |\@@dinormorinv| in the common |\@decamethylene| macro 
+% are replaced by active commands such as |\@@trimethylene| and 
+% |\@@dimethylene|. They carry out the following unit processes.  
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Adjusting substitution site:  
+%    |\yltrimethyleneposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneposition| for normal direction; 
+%    |\yltrimethyleneiposition| 
+%       or |\yldimethyleneiposition| for inverse direction. 
+% \item Treating atom list, 
+%       placing outer skeletons, inner double bonds, 
+%       setting hetero atoms, and 
+%       placing substituents:  
+%        |\@@trimethylene| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylene| for normal direction; 
+%        |\@@trimethylenei| 
+%           or |\@@dimethylenei| for normal direction. 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@decamethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@decamethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+\iniflag\iniatom%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+{\@linterchainswfalse%
+\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}%
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-342}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-684}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswtrue%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yltrinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-6}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{0}\fi
+\else
+{\@rinterchainswfalse%
+\@linterchainswtrue%
+\@yldinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-8}}%
+\fi
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1368}\def\@@yli{0}\fi\fi
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1960,480)(-200,-180){decamethylene}%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+(200,180)%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member b\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member A\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member B\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+%\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member f\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member F\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member g\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member G\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member h\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member H\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member i\relax%dummy
+%\else\if\member I\relax%dummy
+%\else
+%  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+%    \set@fusion@decameth% for all bonds
+%\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{0}{0}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member c\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member d\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member C\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member D\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(342,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-2}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member e\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member E\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member f\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member F\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(684,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-4}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member g\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member G\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member h\relax 
+\@bdoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member H\relax 
+\@Bdoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\Put@Direct(1026,0){\@@trinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-6}}}%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member i\relax 
+\@adoublebondtrue
+\else\if\member I\relax 
+\@Adoublebondtrue
+\fi\fi}%
+\if@normorinvsw% inverse
+\@wrongbdWatrue
+\@wrongbdWdfalse
+\else% normal
+\@wrongbdWafalse
+\@wrongbdWdtrue
+\fi
+\Put@Direct(1368,0){\@@dinormorinv{#2}{#3}{1}{-8}}}%
+%
+%originally for fused rings
+%shifted for coloring skeletal bond 2010/10/01
+%
+{\reset@double%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member a\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member b\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member A\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member B\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member c\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member C\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member d\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member D\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member e\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member E\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member f\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member F\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member g\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member G\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member h\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member H\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member i\relax%dummy
+\else\if\member I\relax%dummy
+\else
+  \expandafter\twoCH@@R\member//%
+    \set@fusion@decameth% for all bonds
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%
+\end{ShiftPicEnvB}%
+}% end \@decamethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The inner command |\set@fusion@decameth| is used for typesetting 
+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 
+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 
+% |\FuseWarning|. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decameth}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/21}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decameth}}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{\cs{FuseWarning} recovered for bond coloring}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fusion@decameth{%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % inner bond fusion %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\if@normorinvsw
+ \if\@@tmpa h\relax%
+        \putlratom{1198}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{h}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa H\relax%
+        \putlratom{1369}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{H}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa i\relax%
+        \putlratom{1369}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{i}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa I\relax%
+        \putlratom{1540}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{I}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@octameth
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\else
+ \if\@@tmpa h\relax%
+        \putlratom{1198}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{h}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa H\relax%
+        \putlratom{1369}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{H}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa i\relax%
+        \putlratom{1369}{0}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{i}%
+      \else\if\@@tmpa I\relax%
+        \putlratom{1540}{103}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused
+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%
+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{I}%
+      \else
+        \set@fusion@octameth
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+\fi%
+\global\let\FuseWarning=\FuseW@rning%added 2010/10/01
+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@decameth
+%</methylen>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/methylen.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/methylen.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d1053e0933c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/methylen.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+\def\batchfile{methylen.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1998, 2001,2002,2004,2005,2010,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1996 (private version)
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.00 Released on August 30, 2004
+Version 4.03 Released on July 20, 2005
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+Version 5.01b Released on March 29, 2013
+Version 5.01bb Released on June 22, 2013
+Version 5.01bbb Released on June 27, 2013
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.01 Released on July 20, 2013
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files methylen.dtx and methylen.ins
+and the derived file methylen.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{methylen.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{methylen.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{methylen.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{methylen.dtx}{methylen}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/polymers.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/polymers.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..728a4c4bace
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/polymers.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,750 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: polymers.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1996, 1998, 2001, 2002, 2004. 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files polymers.dtx and polymers.ins
+% and the derived file polymers.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{polymers}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{polymers}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{polymers}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{polymers}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 20, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{polymers}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver3.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{polymers}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{polymers}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{480}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.00}{1996/07/07}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.01}{2001/06/20}{Size reduction and Clip information}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/04/30}{sfpicture environment, etc.}
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/05/30}{PostScript output and ShiftPicEnv}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Minor additions}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring and the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{polymers.dtx}[2010/10/01 v5.00 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{polymers.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Polymers by {\sffamily polymers.sty} 
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %% (old address)
+% %% Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% %% Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% %% Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{polymers.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{polymers:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% polymers & polymers.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*polymers>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.00}
+\typeout{       -- Released October 01, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{polymers}
+\def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for polymers.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% **********************************
+% * polymers.sty: list of commands * 
+% **********************************
+%
+%  <Delimeters for polymer units>
+%
+%    \leftPMdelim      \rightPMdelim 
+%    \leftpmdelim      \rightpmdelim
+%
+%   \leftPolymer       \leftpolymer
+%   \rightPolymer      \rightpolymer
+%
+%   \leftsqrPolymer    \leftSqrpolymer
+%   \lsqrdelimiter     \leftsqrpolymer
+%
+%   \rightsqrPolymer   \rightSqrpolymer
+%   \rsqrdelimiter     \rightsqrpolymer
+%
+%   \@sqrpolymer
+%   \sqrpolymer        \Sqrpolymer
+%   \mpolymer
+%
+%  <Bonds for polymers>
+%
+%   \WestPbond         \EastPbond
+%   \sbond
+%
+%  <Polymers>
+%
+%   \polyethylene      \@polyethylene
+%   \polystyrene       \@polystyrene
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf polymers.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} etc. for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{Westbond}{\input aliphat.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{bzdrv}{\input carom.sty\relax}{}
+\unitlength=0.1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ****************************************************
+% * For separating an augument list to each argument *
+% ****************************************************
+%
+\def\@forsemicol#1:=#2\do#3{%
+%% \edef\@fortmp{#2}\ifx\@fortmp\@empty%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}%
+  \ifx\@fortmp\@empty%
+    \else%
+    \expandafter\@forl@@p#2;\@nil;\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Delimeters for polymer units}
+%
+% \subsection{Right and left delimeters}
+%
+% A polymer structure has a unit surrounded by 
+% parentheses or other delimeters. For drawing a 
+% parenthesis as the part of a substituent, 
+% the following commands are prepared. 
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Parentheses}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftPMdelim}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftpmdelim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************************
+% * Delimeters for polymer units *
+% ********************************
+\def\leftPMdelim#1{$\mathstrut #1$}
+\def\leftpmdelim{\leftPMdelim{\biggm(}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rightPMdelim}
+% \begin{macro}{\rightpmdelim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rightPMdelim#1#2{%
+ $\mathstrut #1_{\mkern-5mu #2}$}
+\def\rightpmdelim#1{\rightPMdelim{\biggm)}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\leftpolymer| typesets the left parenthesis of 
+% a polymer unit. 
+% The command |\leftPolymer| is the inner commend of |\leftpolymer|, 
+% where a delimeter can be selected as an argument. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftPolymer}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftpolymer}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\leftPolymer#1#2{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+\putlatom{0}{0}{#2}
+\putlatom{120}{0}{$#1$}
+\end{sfpicture}}
+\def\leftpolymer#1{\leftPolymer{\biggm(}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\rightpolymer| typesets the left parenthesis of 
+% a polymer unit along with a repeating number as a subscript. 
+% The command |\rightPolymer| is the inner commend of |\rightpolymer|, 
+% where a delimeter can be selected as an argument. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Rightpolymer}
+% \begin{macro}{\rightpolymer}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rightPolymer#1#2#3{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+\putratom{0}{0}{#2}
+\putratom{-150}{0}{%
+% $\mathstrut#1_{\mkern-3mu \mbox{\scriptsize\rm #3}}$}
+ $\mathstrut#1_{\mkern-2mu #3}$}
+\end{sfpicture}}
+\def\rightpolymer#1#2{\rightPolymer{\biggm)}{#1}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Brackets}
+%
+% The command |\leftSqrpolymer| typesets the left bracket of 
+% a polymer unit. 
+% The command |\leftsqrPolymer| is the inner commend of |\leftSqrpolymer|, 
+% where a delimeter can be selected as an argument. 
+% The bracket selected by the command |\leftSqrpolymer| is 
+% a \TeX{} big mathematical symbol, 
+% the line of which is 
+% boldfaced. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftsqrPolymer}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftSqrpolymer}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\leftsqrPolymer#1#2{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+\putlatom{0}{0}{#2}
+\putlatom{120}{0}{$#1$}
+\end{sfpicture}}
+\def\leftSqrpolymer#1{\leftsqrPolymer{\Biggm[}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\rightSqrpolymer| typesets the right bracket of 
+% a polymer unit. 
+% The command |\rightsqrPolymer| is the inner commend of |\rightSqrpolymer|, 
+% where a delimeter can be selected as an argument. 
+% The bracket selected by the command |\rightSqrpolymer| is 
+% a \TeX{} big mathematical symbol, 
+% the line of which is boldfaced. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rightsqrPolymer}
+% \begin{macro}{\rightSqrpolymer}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rightsqrPolymer#1#2#3{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(0,0)
+\putratom{0}{0}{#2}
+\putratom{-150}{0}{%
+% $\mathstrut #1_{\mbox{\scriptsize\rm #3}}$}
+ $\mathstrut #1_{#3}$}
+\end{sfpicture}}
+\def\rightSqrpolymer#1#2{\rightsqrPolymer{\Biggm]}{#1}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For drawing polymer brackets of thin line width, 
+% we prepare the command |\lsqrdelimiter|.  The height of 
+% the bracket can be designated by the argument of this 
+% command.  The command 
+% is used to define the command |\leftsqrpolymer|. 
+% This command typesets a left bracket of thin line width. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lsqrdelimiter}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftsqrpolymer}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lsqrdelimiter#1{%
+\hbox{\vrule \@width\fboxrule
+$\vcenter to#1{%
+\hrule \@height\fboxrule \@width\fboxsep
+\vfill
+\hrule \@height\fboxrule \@width\fboxsep}$}}
+\def\leftsqrpolymer#1{%
+ \leftsqrPolymer{\lsqrdelimiter{300\unitlength}}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\rsqrdelimiter| is 
+% used to define the command |\rightsqrpolymer|, which 
+% typesets a right bracket of thin line width. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rsqrdelimiter}
+% \begin{macro}{\rightsqrpolymer}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rsqrdelimiter#1{%
+\hbox{$\vcenter to#1{%
+\hrule \@height\fboxrule \@width\fboxsep \vfill
+\hrule \@height\fboxrule \@width\fboxsep}$\kern-\fboxrule
+\vrule \@width\fboxrule\kern2pt}}
+\def\rightsqrpolymer#1#2{%
+\rightsqrPolymer{\rsqrdelimiter{300\unitlength}}{#1}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Pairs of delimeters}
+%
+% The command |\sqrpolymer| typesets a pair of thin-line brackets that 
+% surrounds a polymer unit after measuring the height of 
+% the unit. On the other hand, 
+% the command |\Sqrpolymer| typesets a pair of thick-line brackets. 
+% Both of the commands are based on the inner macro |\@sqrpolymer|, 
+% in which a line width is designated by means of an argument. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sqrpolymer}
+% \begin{macro}{\sqrpolymer}
+% \begin{macro}{\Sqrpolymer}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@sqrpolymer#1#2#3{%
+\begingroup \fboxrule=#1
+ \leavevmode\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}\@tempdima\fboxrule
+    \advance\@tempdima \fboxsep \advance\@tempdima \dp\@tempboxa
+ \@tempdimb=\wd\@tempboxa
+ \advance\@tempdimb by \fboxsep
+ \advance\@tempdimb by \fboxsep
+ \advance\@tempdimb by \fboxrule
+ \advance\@tempdimb by \fboxrule
+   \hbox{\lower \@tempdima\hbox
+  {\vbox{
+  \hbox to\@tempdimb{%
+  \vrule \@height \fboxrule \@width\fboxsep\hfill
+  \vrule \@height \fboxrule \@width\fboxsep}
+  \nointerlineskip
+          \hbox{\vrule \@width \fboxrule \hskip\fboxsep
+          \vbox{\vskip\fboxsep \copy\@tempboxa\vskip\fboxsep}\hskip 
+                 \fboxsep\vrule \@width \fboxrule}
+  \nointerlineskip
+  \hbox to\@tempdimb{%
+  \vrule \@height \fboxrule \@width\fboxsep\hfill
+  \vrule \@height \fboxrule \@width\fboxsep}}}}%
+\kern2pt\lower\@tempdima\hbox{\scriptsize$#3$}\endgroup}
+\long\def\sqrpolymer#1#2{\@sqrpolymer{0.4pt}{#1}{#2}}
+\long\def\Sqrpolymer#1#2{\@sqrpolymer{1pt}{#1}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\mpolymer| typesets a pair of parentheses that 
+% surrounds a polymer unit after measuring the height of 
+% the unit. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mpolymer}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\mpolymer#1#2{%
+ \leavevmode\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1}\@tempdima\fboxrule
+  \advance\@tempdima \fboxsep \advance\@tempdima \dp\@tempboxa
+  \hbox{\lower \@tempdima\hbox{\vbox{\hbox{\hskip\fboxsep%
+  $\left(\vcenter{\vskip\fboxsep \copy\@tempboxa\vskip\fboxsep}%
+  \right)_{#2}$}}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Commands for drawing polymers}
+%
+% \subsection{Bonds for polymers}
+% 
+% The original commands 
+% |\Westbond| and |\Eastbond| are changed into 
+% |\WestPbond| and |\EastPbond|, where each bond is lengthened 
+% for making a space for drawing delimiters.  
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\WestPbond}
+% \begin{macro}{\EastPbond}
+% \begin{macro}{\sbond}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **********************
+% * Bonds for polymers *
+% **********************
+\def\WestPbond{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,100)(0,0)%
+\Put@Direct(-100,0){\Westbond}%
+\Put@Line(-60,0)(-1,0){90}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+\def\EastPbond{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(100,100)(0,0)%
+\Put@Direct(100,0){\Eastbond}%
+\Put@Line(60,0)(1,0){90}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+\def\sbond{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(160,0)(0,0)%
+\Put@Line(0,33)(1,0){160}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Polyethylene unit}
+%
+% The command |\polyethylene| is used to draw polyethylene derivatives, 
+% in which each substituent is designated by the |SUBSLIST|. 
+% The following numbering is used in this macro. 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************
+% * polyethylene unit*
+% ********************
+%
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+%
+%            |   1      6   |
+%            |              |
+%            |   |      |   |
+%        2 ---- (1) -- (2) ---- 5
+%            |   |  (0) |   |
+%            |              |
+%            |   3      4   |0
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The command |\polyethylene| has arguments, 
+% |CALIST| and |SUBSLIST|, as well as an optional argument |AUXLIST|. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \polyethylene[AUXLIST]{CALIST}{SUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The optional argument |AUXLIST| is used for 
+% typesetting auxiliary symbols on central atoms. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%       {n+}  :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |CALIST| is used for indicating center atoms. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     CALIST:  central atom list
+%
+%       for 1  :  cetral atom (e.g. 1==C)
+%           2  :  cetral atom (e.g. 2==C)
+%           0  :  cetral bond (e.g. 0D==)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |SUBSLIST| is used for indicating  substituents. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@centbondsw}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@centatswi}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@centatswii}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@centbondsw \@centbondswfalse
+\newif\if@centatswi \@centatswifalse
+\newif\if@centatswii \@centatswiifalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\polyethylene}
+% \begin{macro}{\@polyethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\polyethylene{\@ifnextchar[{\@polyethylene}{\@polyethylene[]}}
+\def\@polyethylene[#1]#2#3{%
+ \begin{sfpicture}(1100,600)(-400,-300)%
+  \OrigptOutput(400,300){polyethylene}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ************
+% * aux list *
+% ************
+\def\@@@temp{#1}%
+\ifx\@@@temp\empty\else
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+   \expandafter\twoch@@r\member{}{}%
+   \ifcase\@@tmpa%
+    \or\relax\putratom{47}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%
+    \or\relax\putratom{347}{50}{\scriptsize\@@tmpb}%
+\fi}\fi%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************
+% * central atoms *
+% *****************
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+   \expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+   \ifcase\@tmpa \global\@centbondswtrue\Put@Direct(20,0){\Eastbond}%
+   \or\global\@centatswitrue\putlratom{-40}{-33}{\@memberb}%
+   \or\global\@centatswiitrue\putlratom{260}{-33}{\@memberb}%
+\fi\fi}%
+\if@centatswi \else\putlratom{-40}{-33}{C}\fi%
+\if@centatswii \else\putlratom{260}{-33}{C}\fi%
+\if@centbondsw \else\Put@Line(70,0)(1,0){160}\fi%
+\global\@centbondswfalse%
+\global\@centatswifalse%
+\global\@centatswiifalse%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ****************
+% * Substituents *
+% ****************
+\gdef\numrepeated{x}%
+\@forsemicol\member:=#3\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifcase\@tmpa \gdef\numrepeated{\@memberb}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Northbond}}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\WestPbond}}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(0,0){\Southbond}}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(300,0){\Southbond}}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(300,0){\EastPbond}}%
+\or\setBScolor{\Put@Direct(300,0){\Northbond}}%
+\fi\fi}%end of ifcase
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **************
+% * Delimeters *
+% **************
+\Put@Direct(-200,-33){\leftpmdelim}%
+\Put@Direct(400,-33){\rightpmdelim{\numrepeated}}%
+\end{sfpicture}}%end of macro polyethylene
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Polyestyrene unit}
+%
+% The command |\polyestrene| is used to draw polystyrene derivatives, 
+% in which substituents on both the polymer chain and the phenyl group 
+% are designated by the |SUBSLIST| and |PHSUBSLIST|, respectively. 
+% The following numbering is adopted in this macro. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ********************
+% * polystyrene unit *
+% ********************
+%
+%            |   1      6   |
+%            |              |
+%            |   |      |   |
+%        2 ---- (1) -- (2) ---- 5
+%            |   |  (0) |   |
+%            |          |   |
+%            |   3      |   |0
+%                      / `
+%                   6 |    | 2
+%                     |    |
+%                   5 `   / 3
+%                       `
+%                        4
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The command |\polyethylene| has arguments, 
+% |CALIST|, |SUBSLIST| and |PHSUBSLIST|, 
+% as well as an optional argument |AUXLIST|. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \polystyrene[AUXLIST]{CALIST}{SUBSLIST}{PHSUBSLIST}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The optional argument |AUXLIST| is used for 
+% typesetting auxiliary symbols on central atoms. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     AUXLIST = 
+%
+%       {n+}  :  + charge (or another one chararacter) on the center
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |CALIST| is used for indicating center atoms. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     CALIST:  central atom list
+%
+%       for 1  :  cetral atom (e.g. 1==C)
+%           2  :  cetral atom (e.g. 2==C)
+%           0  :  cetral bond (e.g. 0D==)
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |SUBSLIST| is used for indicating  substituents on 
+% the polymer chain. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents
+%
+%       for n = 1 to 4 
+%
+%           nT         :  triple bond at n-atom 
+%           nD         :  double bond at n-atom 
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom
+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The argument |PHSUBSLIST| is used for indicating  substituents on 
+% the phenyl group. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%     PHSUBSLIST: list of phenyl substituents
+%
+%       for n = 2 to 6
+%
+%           n or nS    :  single bond at n-atom
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\polyethylene}
+% \begin{macro}{\@polyethylene}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\polystyrene{\@ifnextchar[{\@polystyrene}{\@polystyrene[]}}
+\def\@polystyrene[#1]#2#3#4{%
+\begin{sfpicture}(1100,1200)(0,-640)%
+  \OrigptOutput(0,640){polystyrene}%
+\begingroup \origptfalse
+\Put@Direct(0,0){\polyethylene[#1]{#2}{#3}}%
+\Put@Line(700,0)(0,1){240}%
+\Put@Direct(300,-646){\bzdrv{#4}}%
+\endgroup
+\end{sfpicture}}%end of macro polystyrene
+%</polymers>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/polymers.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/polymers.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f0811a9020e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/polymers.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+\def\batchfile{polymers.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996,1998,2001,2002,2004,2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996 
+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1996 (private version)
+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+Version 2.01 Released on June 20, 2001 (private version)
+Version 3.00 Released on April 30, 2002
+Version 4.00 Released on May 30, 2002 (private version)
+Version 4.00 Released on August 30, 2004
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files polymers.dtx and polymers.ins
+and the derived file polymers.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{polymers.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{polymers.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{polymers.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{polymers.dtx}{polymers}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/putline.sed b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/putline.sed
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bb8c2dade07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/putline.sed
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+#
+# putline.sed 2002/4/15/
+#
+s/\\begin{picture}/\\begin{sfpicture}/g
+s/\\end{picture}/\\end{sfpicture}/g
+s/\\put(\(.*\)){\\line(\(.*\)){\(.*\)}}/\\Put@Line(\1)(\2){\3}/g
+s/\\put(\(.*\)){\\circle\*{\(.*\)}}/\\Put@sCircle(\1){\2}/g
+s/\\put(\(.*\)){\\circle{\(.*\)}}/\\Put@oCircle(\1){\2}/g
+s/\\put(/\\Put@Direct(/g
+s/\\multiput(/\\Multiput@Direct(/g
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/putput.bat b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/putput.bat
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..b8433d16f42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/putput.bat
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+sed -f putline.sed %1 > %2
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/sizeredc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/sizeredc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fd6bf49f35a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/sizeredc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,351 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: sizeredc.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 1996, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files sizeredc.dtx and sizeredc.ins
+% and the derived file sizeredc.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+%  (old address)
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%  (old address)
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{sizeredc}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 12, 2001}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{sizeredc}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 30, 2002}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{sizeredc}
+% \def\versi@ndate{August 30, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{428}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.00}{2001/06/12}{first edition for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.01}{2002/04/30}{2nd edition for XyMTeX v3.00}
+% \changes{v4.01}{2004/08/30}{Adjust XyMTeX v4.01}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{sizeredc.dtx}[2010/10/01 v5.00 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{sizeredc.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Size Reduction of Structural Formulas 
+by {\sffamily sizeredc.sty} (\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% % (old address)
+% %Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+% %Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+% %Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan
+% %% (old address)
+% %% Ashigara Research Laboratories, 
+% %% Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 
+% %% Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{sizeredc.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{sizeredc:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% sizeredc & sizeredc.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*sizeredc>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.00}
+\typeout{       -- Released October 01, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{sizeredc}
+\def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Size Reduction}
+% \subsection{Division of Integers}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DIVIDE}
+% The macro |\DIVIDE| is used to the devision of an integer 
+% by a divisor.  The result (rounded to an integer) is stored 
+% in a control sequence such as |\Quatient|. 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  \DIVDE{integer}{divisor}\Quatient
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@tempcntx \newcount\@tempcnty \newcount\@tempcntz
+\newif\ifseifuflag \seifuflagfalse 
+\def\DIVIDE#1#2#3{%
+\seifuflagfalse \@tempcntx=#1
+\ifnum\@tempcntx<0 \@tempcntx=-\@tempcntx\seifuflagtrue\fi
+\divide\@tempcntx by#2\relax
+\ifnum\@tempcntx<0 \@tempcntx=-\@tempcntx
+\ifseifuflag \seifuflagfalse \else \seifuflagtrue\fi\fi
+\@tempcntz=\@tempcntx%%store
+\@tempcnty=\@tempcntx \multiply\@tempcnty by#2%
+\ifnum\@tempcnty<0 \@tempcnty=-\@tempcnty\fi
+\@tempcntx=#1%
+\ifnum\@tempcntx<0 \@tempcntx=-\@tempcntx\fi
+\advance\@tempcntx by-\@tempcnty%
+\multiply\@tempcntx by10 \edef\s{\the\@tempcntx}%
+\divide\@tempcntx by#2 
+\ifnum\@tempcntx<0 \@tempcntx=-\@tempcntx\fi
+\ifnum\@tempcntx>4\relax \advance\@tempcntz by1\fi
+\ifseifuflag \xdef#3{-\the\@tempcntz}%
+\else\xdef#3{\the\@tempcntz}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Size Reduction of Formulas}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LineTemp}
+% The macro |\LineTemp| is used to redefine the |\line| commond of 
+% the \LaTeXe{} picture environment. Thereby, the macro 
+% |\LineTemp(a,b){c}| is transformed into the macro 
+% |\drawline(0,0)(c, ca/b)| for epic.sty, where |ca/b| is 
+% calculated by the macro |\DIVIDE| defined above. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@xArg \newcount\@yArg
+\def\LineTemp(#1,#2)#3{\begingroup
+\@xArg #1\relax \@yArg #2\relax
+\ifnum\@xArg<0 \@tempcntx=-#3 \else
+\ifnum\@xArg>0 \@tempcntx=#3 \else \@tempcntx=0 \fi\fi
+\@tempcnty=#3
+\multiply\@tempcnty by\@yArg\relax
+\ifnum\@tempcnty<0 \@tempcnty=-\@tempcnty\fi
+\ifnum\@xArg<0 \@xArg=-\@xArg\fi
+\ifnum\@xArg=0 \edef\RR{#3}\else
+{\DIVIDE{\@tempcnty}{\@xArg}\RR}\fi
+\@tempcnty=\RR%
+\ifnum\@yArg<0 \ifnum\@tempcnty>0 \@tempcnty=-\@tempcnty\fi\fi
+\drawline(0,0)(\the\@tempcntx,\the\@tempcnty)%
+\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% The if-phrase |\ifsizereduction| is to determine whether 
+% size-reduction is carried out or not. 
+% Then, |\LineTemp| is substituted for the original |\line| 
+% if |\sizereductiontrue| is declared and if |\unitlength| 
+% is smaller than 0.1pt. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\line}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifsizereduction}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{epic}%
+\newif\ifsizereduction \sizereductionfalse
+%\let\@ldline=\line
+\def\reduced@line(#1,#2)#3{\ifsizereduction
+\ifdim\unitlength<0.1pt \LineTemp(#1,#2){#3}\else
+\@ldline(#1,#2){#3}\fi
+\else\@ldline(#1,#2){#3}\fi}
+\let\line=\reduced@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The command |\changeunitlength| is used to set |\unitlength| 
+% and to declare |\sizereductiontrue| 
+% if |\unitlength| is smaller than 0.1pt. 
+% The font size of substituents is changed by |\substfontsize| 
+% according to the size reduction. 
+%
+% \changes{v4.00}{2002/5/30}{Added: \cs{substfontsize}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@changeunitlength}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@changeunitlength#1{\unitlength=#1\relax
+\ifdim\unitlength<0.1pt \sizereductiontrue
+\ifdim\unitlength<0.062pt \let\substfontsize=\tiny \else
+\ifdim\unitlength<0.072pt \let\substfontsize=\scriptsize \else 
+\ifdim\unitlength<0.082pt \let\substfontsize=\footnotesize 
+\fi\fi\fi
+\else\let\substfontsize=\normalsize
+\fi}
+\let\changeunitlength=\@changeunitlength
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The reduced setting is the original LaTeX picture environment but 
+% include the size-reduction mechanism. 
+% To switch the size-reduction meachism and the pstricks mechanism, 
+% we can use a switching command such as |\originalpicture|. 
+% \changes{v3.00}{2002/4/30}{New environment: sfpicture}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\reducedsizepicture}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reducedsizepicture{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\reduced@picture}{\reduced@picture[0.1pt]}}
+\def\reduced@picture[#1]{%
+\sizereductiontrue
+\let\sfpicture=\picture
+\let\endsfpicture=\endpicture
+\let\Put@Direct=\put
+\let\Multiput@Direct=\multiput
+\let\thicklines=\@ldthicklines
+\let\thinlines=\@ldthinlines
+\let\line=\reduced@line
+\let\dotorline=\d@t@rline
+\let\Put@Line=\Put@@Line
+\let\Put@sCircle=\Put@@sCircle
+\let\Put@oCircle=\Put@@oCircle
+\xymtexpsswfalse
+\let\changeunitlength=\@changeunitlength
+\changeunitlength{#1}}
+\reducedsizepicture%size-reduction setting
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The command |\lineslope| of epic.sty has been redefined 
+% to give a more precise result. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lineslope}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\oldlineslope=\lineslope%used only in the manual 
+\def\lineslope(#1,#2){%
+\begingroup
+\ifdim #1 <0pt \@xdim= -#1 \else\@xdim=#1\fi
+\ifdim #2 <0pt \@ydim= -#2 \else\@ydim=#2\fi
+%\typeout{LLL= \the#1, \the#2}
+\multiply\@xdim by10\relax%by S. Fujita 2001/6/20
+\multiply\@ydim by10\relax%by S. Fujita 2001/6/20
+%\typeout{xdim,ydim= \the\@xdim, \the\@ydim}
+\ifdim\@xdim >\@ydim \@tempdima=\@xdim \@xdim=\@ydim \@ydim=\@tempdima
+\@flippedargstrue\else\@flippedargsfalse\fi% x < y
+\ifdim\@ydim >1pt \@tempcntx=\@ydim
+            \divide\@tempcntx by 65536% now \@tempcntx=integral part of #1.
+            \divide\@xdim \@tempcntx\fi
+%\typeout{xdim: \the\@xdim}%
+\ifdim\@xdim <.083333pt \@xarg=1 \@yarg=0
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.183333pt	\@xarg=6 \@yarg=1
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.225pt 	\@xarg=5 \@yarg=1
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.291666pt 	\@xarg=4 \@yarg=1
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.366666pt 	\@xarg=3 \@yarg=1
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.45pt 	\@xarg=5 \@yarg=2
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.55pt 	\@xarg=2 \@yarg=1
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.633333pt 	\@xarg=5 \@yarg=3
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.708333pt 	\@xarg=3 \@yarg=2
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.775pt 	\@xarg=4 \@yarg=3
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.816666pt 	\@xarg=5 \@yarg=4
+ \else\ifdim\@xdim <.916666pt 	\@xarg=6 \@yarg=5
+       \else			\@xarg=1 \@yarg=1%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\if@flippedargs\relax\else\@tempcntx=\@xarg \@xarg=\@yarg
+			  \@yarg=\@tempcntx\fi
+\ifdim #1 <0pt \global\@xarg= -\@xarg\else\global\@xarg= \@xarg\fi
+\ifdim #2 <0pt \global\@yarg= -\@yarg\else\global\@yarg= \@yarg\fi
+%%\typeout{closest slope integers = \the\@xarg, \the\@yarg}
+\endgroup}
+%</sizeredc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/sizeredc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/sizeredc.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8a24083df57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/sizeredc.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+\def\batchfile{sizeredc.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1996, 2001, 2002, 2004,2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+Old Versions:
+Released on June 20, 2001 version 1.00
+Released on April 30, 2002 version 1.01
+Released on Auguts 30, 2004 version 4.01 (for XyMTeX 4.01)
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files sizeredc.dtx and sizeredc.ins
+and the derived file sizeredc.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{sizeredc.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{sizeredc.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{sizeredc.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{sizeredc.dtx}{sizeredc}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/steroid.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/steroid.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..20f8f200ab6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/steroid.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1317 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%% File: steroid.dtx
+%
+%  Copyright 2009, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%  Copyright for the XyMTeX system 1993,1996,1998,2001,2002,2004,2005,2009 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.
+%  -------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% steroid.sty
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 
+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 
+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 
+% are based on LaTeX commands. 
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files steroid.dtx and steroid.ins
+% and the derived file steroid.sty.
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa 250-0019 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{steroid}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 15, 2009}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF}% Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1778}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \changes{v1.00}{2009/06/15}{The first version}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring and the LaTeX Project Public License}
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{steroid.dtx}[2010/10/01 v5.00 XyMTeX{} package file]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{steroid.dtx}
+%
+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\title{Steroid derivatives by {\sffamily steroid.sty} 
+of \XyMTeX{} (\fileversion) }
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry, \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun Kanagawa-ken, 258-0019, Japan.
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+%
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{steroid.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{Introduction}\label{steroid:intro}
+%
+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+% \hline
+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline
+% steroid & steroid.sty \\
+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \subsection{Version Information}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*steroid>
+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 5.00}
+\typeout{       -- Released October 01, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\j@urnalname{steroid}
+\def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF}% Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%
+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{List of commands for steroid.sty}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% *********************************
+% * steroid.sty: list of commands *
+% *********************************
+%
+%  <Macros for drawing basic steroids>
+%
+%  \gonane
+%  \gonanealpha
+%  \gonanebeta
+%
+%  \estrane
+%  \estranealpha
+%  \estranebeta
+%
+%  \steroidnochainandrostane
+%  \androstane
+%  \androstanealpha
+%  \androstanebeta
+%
+%  \steroidethylchain
+%  \steroidethylchainpregnane
+%  \pregnane
+%  \pregnanealpha
+%  \pregnanebeta
+%
+%  <Macros for drawing steroids with chains (modern type)>
+%  C22-C23: transoid 
+%
+%  \steroidChain
+%  \steroidChaindiMe
+%  \cholestaneAlpha
+%  \cholestaneBeta
+%  \cholestane
+%
+%  \ergostaneAlpha
+%  \ergostaneBeta
+%  \ergostane
+%
+%  \campestaneAlpha
+%  \campestaneBeta
+%  \campestane
+%
+%  \poriferastaneAlpha
+%  \poriferastaneBeta
+%  \poriferastane
+%
+%  \stigmastaneAlpha
+%  \stigmastaneBeta
+%  \stigmastane
+%
+%  <Macros for drawing steroids with short chains (modern type)>
+%  C22-C23: transoid 
+%
+%  \steroidShortChain
+%  \steroidShortChainMe
+%  \cholaneAlpha
+%  \cholaneBeta
+%
+%  <Macros for drawing steroids with short chains (old type)>
+%  C22-C23: transoid 
+%
+%  \steroidshortchain
+%  \steroidshortchainMe
+%  \cholanealpha
+%  \cholanebeta
+%  \cholanE
+%
+%  <Macros for drawing steroids with chains (old type)>
+%  C22-C23: cisoid 
+%
+%  \steroidchaindiMe
+%  \cholestanealpha
+%  \cholestanebeta
+%  \cholestanE
+%
+%  \ergostanealpha
+%  \ergostanebeta
+%  \ergostanE
+%
+%  \campestanealpha
+%  \campestanebeta
+%  \campestanE
+%
+%  \poriferastanealpha
+%  \poriferastanebeta
+%  \poriferastanE
+%
+%  \stigmastanealpha
+%  \stigmastanebeta
+%  \stigmastanE
+%
+%  <Macros for drawing spirostans>
+%
+%  \steroidspiro
+%  \steroidspirotriMe
+%  \spirostanalpha
+%  \spirostanbeta
+%  \spirostan
+%  \spirostannor
+%
+%  <Macros for drawing furostans>
+%
+%  \steroidfuros
+%  \steroidspirotriMe
+%  \furostanalpha
+%  \furostanbeta
+%  \furostan
+%
+%  <Macros for drawing spiro pyranoses>
+%
+%  \pyranoseChairi
+%  \pyranoseChairii
+%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Input of basic macros}
+%
+% To assure the compatibility to \LaTeX{}2.09 (the native mode), 
+% the commands added by \LaTeXe{} have not been used in the resulting sty 
+% files ({\sf steroid.sty} for the present case).  Hence, the combination 
+% of |\input| and |\@ifundefined| is used to crossload sty 
+% files ({\sf chemstr.sty} for the present case) in place of the 
+% |\RequirePackage| command of \LaTeXe{}. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * input of basic macros *
+% *************************
+\@ifundefined{setsixringv}{\input chemstr.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{steroidchain}{\input carom.sty\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{ylchairiposition}{\input ccycle.sty\relax}{}
+\unitlength=0.1pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The commands |\steroid| and |\steroidchain| for drawing raw skeletons of 
+% steroid derivatives have been already defined in {\sf carom.sty}, which 
+% is loaded automatically as above. 
+%
+% \section{Macros for Steroids with No Side Chains}
+% 
+% By starting from the commands |\steroid| defined in the {\sf carom.sty}, 
+% several intermediate commands are defined to draw steroid derivatives 
+% without side chains. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\gonane}
+% \begin{macro}{\gonanealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\gonanebeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\estrane}
+% \begin{macro}{\estranealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\estranebeta}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***********************************************
+% * For drawing side chains of the common style *
+% ***********************************************
+% *******************
+% * gonane, estrane *
+% *******************
+\def\gonanealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@gonanealpha}{\@gonanealpha[]}}
+\def\@gonanealpha[#1]#2{%
+\steroid[#1]{#2;5A==H;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==H;{13}B==H;{14}A==H}}
+\def\gonanebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@gonanebeta}{\@gonanebeta[]}}
+\def\@gonanebeta[#1]#2{%
+\steroid[#1]{#2;5B==H;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==H;{13}B==H;{14}A==H}}
+\def\gonane{\@ifnextchar[{\@gonane}{\@gonane[]}}
+\def\@gonane[#1]#2{%
+\steroid[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==H;{13}B==H;{14}A==H}}
+\def\estranealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@estranealpha}{\@estranealpha[]}}
+\def\@estranealpha[#1]#2{%
+\steroid[#1]{#2;5A==H;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==H;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H}}
+\def\estranebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@estranebeta}{\@estranebeta[]}}
+\def\@estranebeta[#1]#2{
+\steroid[#1]{#2;5B==H;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==H;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H}}
+\def\estrane{\@ifnextchar[{\@estrane}{\@estrane[]}}
+\def\@estrane[#1]#2{
+\steroid[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==H;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidnochainandrostane}
+% \begin{macro}{\androstane}
+% \begin{macro}{\androstanealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\androstanebeta}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **************
+% * androstane *
+% **************
+\def\steroidnochainandrostane[#1]#2{%
+\steroid[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==CH$_{3}$;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H}}
+\def\androstanealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@androstanealpha}{\@androstanealpha[]}}
+\def\@androstanealpha[#1]#2{\steroidnochainandrostane[#1]{#2;5A==H}}
+\def\androstanebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@androstanebeta}{\@androstanebeta[]}}
+\def\@androstanebeta[#1]#2{\steroidnochainandrostane[#1]{#2;5B==H}}
+\def\androstane{\@ifnextchar[{\@androstane}{\@androstane[]}}
+\def\@androstane[#1]#2{\steroidnochainandrostane[#1]{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Steroids with a Ethyl Chain}
+% 
+% After the definition of the macro |\steroidethylchain| for 
+% drawing steroids with an ethyl chain, several commands for 
+% drawing pregnane derivative are defined. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidethylchain}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\steroidethylchain{\@ifnextchar[{\@steroidethylchain[@}{\@steroidethylchain[Z]}}
+\def\@steroidethylchain[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\yl@steroidposition{#2}%
+\ylposition{#2}{-21}{0}{3}{0}%for 22 and 23 positions
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}%for 20 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-20}{3}{5}{0}%for 24 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1397}\def\@@yli{-709}\fi\fi
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(1850,1500)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+  \iforigpt \typeout{command `steroidethylchain' is based on `steroid'.}\fi%
+\fi
+  \Put@Direct(0,0){\@steroidskeleton{#1}{#2}}%
+  \Put@Line(855,709)(0,1){200}%       %bond 17-20
+  \Put@Line(1026,1012)(-5,-3){171}%   %bond 22-20
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\member//\relax%
+\if\@tmpa Z\relax%
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty%no action
+ \else\if\@tmpb a%
+  \Put@Line(888,735)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 17-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb b%
+  \Put@Line(1020,970)(-5,-3){126}%    %double bond 22-20
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-21}{0}{3}{0}}%for 22 and 23 positions
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}}%for 20 position
+%\Put@Direct(1197,709){\setsixringv{#2}{-20}{3}{5}{0}}%for 24 position
+%\Put@Direct(1397,709){\setatombond{#2}{-24}{4}}%      % for 25
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \steroidethylchain macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidethylchainpregnane}
+% \begin{macro}{\pregnane}
+% \begin{macro}{\pregnanealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\pregnanebeta}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ************
+% * pregnane *
+% ************
+\def\steroidethylchainpregnane[#1]#2{%
+\steroidethylchain[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==CH$_{3}$;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H;%
+{17}SA==\raisebox{-4pt}{~H}}}
+\def\pregnanealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@pregnanealpha}{\@pregnanealpha[]}}
+\def\@pregnanealpha[#1]#2{\steroidethylchainpregnane[#1]{#2;5A==H}}
+\def\pregnanebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@pregnanebeta}{\@pregnanebeta[]}}
+\def\@pregnanebeta[#1]#2{\steroidethylchainpregnane[#1]{#2;5B==H}}
+\def\pregnane{\@ifnextchar[{\@pregnane}{\@pregnane[]}}
+\def\@pregnane[#1]#2{\steroidethylchainpregnane[#1]{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Steroids with Chains (Modern Types)}
+%
+% For drawing steroids with side chains of modern expressions, the command |\steroidChain| 
+% is created in addition to the previous command |\steroidchain| for drawing a side chain 
+% of an old expression. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidChain}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ************************************************************
+% * Raw Skeleton for drawing side chains of the modern style *
+% ************************************************************
+\def\steroidChain{\@ifnextchar[{\@steroidChain[@}{\@steroidChain[Z]}}
+\def\@steroidChain[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\yl@steroidposition{#2}%
+\ylposition{#2}{-21}{0}{3}{0}%for 22 and 23 positions
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}%for 20 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw
+\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi%%set 20 position
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-23}{0}{2}{0}%for 24 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1368}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi%%set 24 positions
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-24}{4}%      % for 25
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1539}\def\@@yli{-909}\fi%%set 25 positions
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-25}{4}%      % for 26
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1710}\def\@@yli{-1012}\fi%%set 26 positions
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-26}{4}%      % for 27
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1539}\def\@@yli{-709}\fi%%set 27 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(2300,1500)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+  \iforigpt \typeout{command `steroidChain' is based on `steroid'.}\fi%
+\fi
+  \Put@Direct(0,0){\@steroidskeleton{#1}{#2}}%
+  \Put@Line(855,709)(0,1){200}%       %bond 17-20
+  \Put@Line(1026,1012)(-5,-3){171}%   %bond 22-20
+  \Put@Line(1026,1012)(5,-3){171}%    %bond 22-23
+  \Put@Line(1197,909)(5,3){171}%      %bond 23-24
+  \Put@Line(1368,1012)(5,-3){171}%    %bond 24-25
+  \Put@Line(1539,909)(5,3){171}%      %bond 25-26
+  \Put@Line(1539,909)(0,-1){200}%      %bond 25-27
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\member//\relax%
+\if\@tmpa Z\relax%
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty%no action
+ \else\if\@tmpb a%
+  \Put@Line(888,735)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 17-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb b%
+  \Put@Line(1020,970)(-5,-3){126}%    %double bond 22-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb c%
+  \Put@Line(1032,970)(5,-3){126}%     %double bond 22-23
+ \else\if\@tmpb d%
+  \Put@Line(1203,952)(5,3){126}%     %double bond 23-24
+ \else\if\@tmpb e%
+  \Put@Line(1372,970)(5,-3){126}%     %double bond 24-25
+ \else\if\@tmpb f%
+  \Put@Line(1545,952)(5,3){126}%     %double bond 25-26
+ \else\if\@tmpb F%
+  \Put@Line(1580,890)(5,3){126}%     %double bond 25-26(alternative)
+ \else\if\@tmpb g%
+  \Put@Line(1580,890)(0,-1){148}%     %double bond 25-27
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-21}{0}{2}{0}}%for 22 position
+\Put@Direct(1192,909){\setsixringv{#2}{-19}{3}{5}{0}}%for 23 position
+\Put@Direct(1368,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-23}{0}{2}{0}}%for 24 position
+\Put@Direct(1539,909){\setatombond{#2}{-24}{5}}%     % for 25
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}}%for 20 position
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \steroidChain macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidChaindiMe}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\steroidChaindiMe[#1]#2{%
+\steroidChain[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==CH$_{3}$;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H;%
+{17}SA==\raisebox{-4pt}{~H};{20}SA==H$_{3}$C;{20}SB==H}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% Sometimes,  |\cholestane[{Z}{Zb}]{}| may be used in place of 
+% |\cholestane[{Zb}]{}| because the latter gives an erroneous 
+% result. 
+% 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cholestaneAlpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholestaneBeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholestane}
+% \begin{macro}{\ergostaneAlpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\ergostaneBeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\ergostane}
+% \begin{macro}{\campestaneAlpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\campestaneBeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\campestane}
+% \begin{macro}{\poriferastaneAlpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\poriferastaneBeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\poriferastane}
+% \begin{macro}{\stigmastaneAlpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\stigmastaneBeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\stigmastane}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************************************************
+% * Intermediate skeletons for drawing                *
+% * cholestane, ergostane, campestane, poriferastane, *
+% * and stigmastane (the modern type)                 *
+% *****************************************************
+\def\cholestaneAlpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholestaneAlpha}{\@cholestaneAlpha[]}}
+\def\@cholestaneAlpha[#1]#2{\steroidChaindiMe[#1]{#2;5A==H}}
+\def\cholestaneBeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholestaneBeta}{\@cholestaneBeta[]}}
+\def\@cholestaneBeta[#1]#2{\steroidChaindiMe[#1]{#2;5B==H}}
+\def\cholestane{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholestane}{\@cholestane[]}}
+\def\@cholestane[#1]#2{\steroidChaindiMe[#1]{#2}}
+\def\ergostaneAlpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@ergostaneAlpha}{\@ergostaneAlpha[]}}
+\def\@ergostaneAlpha[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestaneAlpha[#1]{#2;{24}SA==CH$_{3}$;{24}SB==H}}
+\def\ergostaneBeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@ergostaneBeta}{\@ergostaneBeta[]}}
+\def\@ergostaneBeta[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestaneBeta[#1]{#2;{24}SA==CH$_{3}$;{24}SB==H}}
+\def\ergostane{\@ifnextchar[{\@ergostane}{\@ergostane[]}}
+\def\@ergostane[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestane[#1]{#2;{24}SA==CH$_{3}$;{24}SB==H}}
+\def\campestaneAlpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@campestaneAlpha}{\@campestaneAlpha[]}}
+\def\@campestaneAlpha[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestaneAlpha[#1]{#2;{24}Su==\mbox{C\rlap{H$_{3}$}\kern20\unitlength};{24}Sd==~H}}
+\def\campestaneBeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@campestaneBeta}{\@campestaneBeta[]}}
+\def\@campestaneBeta[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestaneBeta[#1]{#2;{24}Su==\mbox{C\rlap{H$_{3}$}\kern20\unitlength};{24}Sd==~H}}
+\def\campestane{\@ifnextchar[{\@campestane}{\@campestane[]}}
+\def\@campestane[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestane[#1]{#2;{24}Su==\mbox{C\rlap{H$_{3}$}\kern20\unitlength};{24}Sd==~H}}
+\def\poriferastaneAlpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@poriferastaneAlpha}{\@poriferastaneAlpha[]}}
+\def\@poriferastaneAlpha[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestaneAlpha[#1]{#2;{24}SA==\dimethylene{}{1==(yl)};{24}SB==H}}
+\def\poriferastaneBeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@poriferastaneBeta}{\@poriferastaneBeta[]}}
+\def\@poriferastaneBeta[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestaneBeta[#1]{#2;{24}SA==\dimethylene{}{1==(yl)};{24}SB==H}}
+\def\poriferastane{\@ifnextchar[{\@poriferastane}{\@poriferastane[]}}
+\def\@poriferastane[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestane[#1]{#2;{24}SA==\dimethylene{}{1==(yl)};{24}SB==H}}
+\def\stigmastaneAlpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@stigmastaneAlpha}{\@stigmastaneAlpha[]}}
+\def\@stigmastaneAlpha[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestaneAlpha[#1]{#2;{24}Su==\dimethylene{}{1==(yl)};{24}Sd==H}}
+\def\stigmastaneBeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@stigmastaneBeta}{\@stigmastaneBeta[]}}
+\def\@stigmastaneBeta[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestaneBeta[#1]{#2;{24}Su==\dimethylene{}{1==(yl)};{24}Sd==H}}
+\def\stigmastane{\@ifnextchar[{\@stigmastane}{\@stigmastane[]}}
+\def\@stigmastane[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestane[#1]{#2;{24}Su==\dimethylene{}{1==(yl)};{24}Sd==H}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Steroids with Short Chains (Modern Types)}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidShortChain}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ******************************************************************
+% * Raw Skeleton for drawing short side chains of the modern style *
+% ******************************************************************
+\def\steroidShortChain{\@ifnextchar[{\@steroidShortChain[@}{\@steroidShortChain[Z]}}
+\def\@steroidShortChain[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\yl@steroidposition{#2}%
+\ylposition{#2}{-21}{0}{3}{0}%for 22 and 23 positions
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}%for 20 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw
+\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi%%set 20 position
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-23}{0}{2}{0}%for 24 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1368}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi%%set 24 positions
+\fi
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(2000,1500)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+  \iforigpt \typeout{command `steroidChain' is based on `steroid'.}\fi%
+\fi
+  \Put@Direct(0,0){\@steroidskeleton{#1}{#2}}%
+  \Put@Line(855,709)(0,1){200}%       %bond 17-20
+  \Put@Line(1026,1012)(-5,-3){171}%   %bond 22-20
+  \Put@Line(1026,1012)(5,-3){171}%    %bond 22-23
+  \Put@Line(1197,909)(5,3){171}%      %bond 23-24
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\member//\relax%
+\if\@tmpa Z\relax%
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty%no action
+ \else\if\@tmpb a%
+  \Put@Line(888,735)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 17-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb b%
+  \Put@Line(1020,970)(-5,-3){126}%    %double bond 22-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb c%
+  \Put@Line(1032,970)(5,-3){126}%     %double bond 22-23
+ \else\if\@tmpb d%
+  \Put@Line(1203,952)(5,3){126}%     %double bond 23-24
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-21}{0}{2}{0}}%for 22 position
+\Put@Direct(1192,909){\setsixringv{#2}{-19}{3}{5}{0}}%for 23 position
+\Put@Direct(1368,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-23}{0}{2}{0}}%for 24 position
+%\Put@Direct(1539,909){\setatombond{#2}{-24}{5}}%     % for 25
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}}%for 20 position
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \steroidShortChain macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidShortChainMe}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\steroidShortChainMe[#1]#2{%
+\steroidShortChain[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==CH$_{3}$;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H;%
+{17}SA==\raisebox{-4pt}{~H};{20}SA==H$_{3}$C;{20}SB==H}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cholaneAlpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholaneBeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholane}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************************************************************
+% * Intermediate skeletons for drawing choranes (the modern type) *
+% *****************************************************************
+\def\cholaneAlpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholaneAlpha}{\@cholaneAlpha[]}}
+\def\@cholaneAlpha[#1]#2{\steroidShortChainMe[#1]{#2;5A==H}}
+\def\cholaneBeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholaneBeta}{\@cholaneBeta[]}}
+\def\@cholaneBeta[#1]#2{\steroidShortChainMe[#1]{#2;5B==H}}
+\def\cholane{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholane}{\@cholane[]}}
+\def\@cholane[#1]#2{\steroidShortChainMe[#1]{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Steroids with Short Chains (Old Types)}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidshortchain}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ******************************************************
+% * Raw skeletons drawing side chains of the old style *
+% ******************************************************
+\def\steroidshortchain{\@ifnextchar[{\@steroidshortchain[@}{\@steroidshortchain[Z]}}
+\def\@steroidshortchain[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\yl@steroidposition{#2}%
+\ylposition{#2}{-21}{0}{3}{0}%for 22 and 23 positions
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}%for 20 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-20}{3}{5}{0}%for 24 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1397}\def\@@yli{-709}\fi\fi
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(1850,1500)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+  \iforigpt \typeout{command `steroidshortchain' is based on `steroid'.}\fi%
+\fi
+  \Put@Direct(0,0){\@steroidskeleton{#1}{#2}}%
+  \Put@Line(855,709)(0,1){200}%       %bond 17-20
+  \Put@Line(1026,1012)(-5,-3){171}%   %bond 22-20
+  \Put@Line(1026,1012)(5,-3){171}%    %bond 22-23
+  \Put@Line(1197,709)(0,1){200}%      %bond 24-23
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\member//\relax%
+\if\@tmpa Z\relax%
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty%no action
+ \else\if\@tmpb a%
+  \Put@Line(888,735)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 17-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb b%
+  \Put@Line(1020,970)(-5,-3){126}%    %double bond 22-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb c%
+  \Put@Line(1032,970)(5,-3){126}%     %double bond 22-23
+ \else\if\@tmpb d%
+  \Put@Line(1164,735)(0,1){148}%      %double bond 24-23
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-21}{0}{3}{0}}%for 22 and 23 positions
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}}%for 20 position
+\Put@Direct(1197,709){\setsixringv{#2}{-20}{3}{5}{0}}%for 24 position
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \steroidshortchain macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidshortchainMe}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholanealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholanebeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholanE}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***********
+% * cholane *
+% ***********
+\def\steroidshortchainMe[#1]#2{%
+\steroidshortchain[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==CH$_{3}$;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H;%
+{17}SA==\raisebox{-4pt}{~H};{20}SA==H$_{3}$C;{20}SB==H}}
+\def\cholanealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholanealpha}{\@cholanealpha[]}}
+\def\@cholanealpha[#1]#2{\steroidshortchainMe[#1]{#2;5A==H}}
+\def\cholanebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholanebeta}{\@cholanebeta[]}}
+\def\@cholanebeta[#1]#2{\steroidshortchainMe[#1]{#2;5B==H}}
+\def\cholanE{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholanE}{\@cholanE[]}}
+\def\@cholanE[#1]#2{\steroidshortchainMe[#1]{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Steroids with Chains (Old Types)}
+%
+% For drawing steroids with side chains of old expressions, the command |\steroidchain| 
+% defined in {\sf carom.sty} is used. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidchaindiMe}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholestanealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholestanebeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\cholestanE}
+% \begin{macro}{\ergostanealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\ergostanebeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\ergostanE}
+% \begin{macro}{\campestanealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\campestanebeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\campestanE}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ************************************************
+% * cholestane, ergostane, campestane (old type) *
+% ************************************************
+\def\steroidchaindiMe[#1]#2{%
+\steroidchain[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==CH$_{3}$;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H;%
+{17}SA==\raisebox{-4pt}{~H};{20}SA==H$_{3}$C;{20}SB==H}}
+\def\cholestanealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholestanealpha}{\@cholestanealpha[]}}
+\def\@cholestanealpha[#1]#2{\steroidchaindiMe[#1]{#2;5A==H}}
+\def\cholestanebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholestanebeta}{\@cholestanebeta[]}}
+\def\@cholestanebeta[#1]#2{\steroidchaindiMe[#1]{#2;5B==H}}
+\def\cholestanE{\@ifnextchar[{\@cholestanE}{\@cholestanE[]}}
+\def\@cholestanE[#1]#2{\steroidchaindiMe[#1]{#2}}
+\def\ergostanealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@ergostanealpha}{\@ergostanealpha[]}}
+\def\@ergostanealpha[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanealpha[#1]{#2;{24}Su==CH$_{3}$;{24}Sd==H}}
+\def\ergostanebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@ergostanebeta}{\@ergostanebeta[]}}
+\def\@ergostanebeta[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanebeta[#1]{#2;{24}Su==CH$_{3}$;{24}Sd==H}}
+\def\ergostanE{\@ifnextchar[{\@ergostanE}{\@ergostanE[]}}
+\def\@ergostanE[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanE[#1]{#2;{24}Su==CH$_{3}$;{24}Sd==H}}
+\def\campestanealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@campestanealpha}{\@campestanealpha[]}}
+\def\@campestanealpha[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanealpha[#1]{#2;{24}Sd==\mbox{C\rlap{H$_{3}$}\kern20\unitlength};{24}Su==~H}}
+\def\campestanebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@campestanebeta}{\@campestanebeta[]}}
+\def\@campestanebeta[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanebeta[#1]{#2;{24}Sd==\mbox{C\rlap{H$_{3}$}\kern20\unitlength};{24}Su==~H}}
+\def\campestanE{\@ifnextchar[{\@campestanE}{\@campestanE[]}}
+\def\@campestanE[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanE[#1]{#2;{24}Sd==\mbox{C\rlap{H$_{3}$}\kern20\unitlength};{24}Su==~H}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\poriferastanealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\poriferastanebeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\poriferastanE}
+% \begin{macro}{\stigmastanealpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\stigmastanebeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\stigmastanE}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************************************
+% * poriferastane, stigmastane (old type) *
+% *****************************************
+\def\poriferastanealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@poriferastanealpha}{\@poriferastanealpha[]}}
+\def\@poriferastanealpha[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanealpha[#1]{#2;{24}Su==\dimethylenei{}{1==(yl)};{24}Sd==H}}
+\def\poriferastanebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@poriferastanebeta}{\@poriferastanebeta[]}}
+\def\@poriferastanebeta[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanebeta[#1]{#2;{24}Su==\dimethylenei{}{1==(yl)};{24}Sd==H}}
+\def\poriferastanE{\@ifnextchar[{\@poriferastanE}{\@poriferastanE[]}}
+\def\@poriferastanE[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanE[#1]{#2;{24}Su==\dimethylenei{}{1==(yl)};{24}Sd==H}}
+\def\stigmastanealpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@stigmastanealpha}{\@stigmastanealpha[]}}
+\def\@stigmastanealpha[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanealpha[#1]{#2;{24}SA==\dimethylenei{}{1==(yl)};{24}SB==H}}
+\def\stigmastanebeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@stigmastanebeta}{\@stigmastanebeta[]}}
+\def\@stigmastanebeta[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanebeta[#1]{#2;{24}SA==\dimethylenei{}{1==(yl)};{24}SB==H}}
+\def\stigmastanE{\@ifnextchar[{\@stigmastanE}{\@stigmastanE[]}}
+\def\@stigmastanE[#1]#2{%
+\@cholestanE[#1]{#2;{24}SA==\dimethylenei{}{1==(yl)};{24}SB==H}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Spirostans}
+%
+% After the macro |\steroidspiro| is defined as a basic macro 
+% several macros for drawing spirostans are defined. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidspiro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***************************************
+% * Raw skeleton for drawing spirostans * 
+% ***************************************
+\def\steroidspiro{\@ifnextchar[{\@steroidspiro[@}{\@steroidspiro[Z]}}
+\def\@steroidspiro[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\yl@steroidposition{#2}%
+\ylposition{#2}{-20}{1}{3}{0}%for 22 position
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}%for 20 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw
+\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi%%set 20 position
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-22}{0}{2}{0}%for 23 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1368}\def\@@yli{-400}\fi%%set 23 position
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-23}{4}%      % for 24
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1539}\def\@@yli{-909}\fi%%set 24 position
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-24}{4}%      % for 25
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1539}\def\@@yli{-1109}\fi%%set 25 position
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-25}{4}%      % for 26
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1368}\def\@@yli{-1212}\fi%%set 26 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(2300,1500)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+  \iforigpt \typeout{command `steroidspiro' is based on `steroid'.}\fi%
+\fi
+  \Put@Direct(0,0){\@steroidskeleton{#1}{#2}}%
+  \Put@Line(855,709)(0,1){200}%       %bond 17-20
+  \Put@Line(855,909)(1,0){342}%       %bond 20-22
+  \Put@Line(1197,909)(0,-1){140}%       %bond 22-O (down)
+  \Put@Line(1026,606)(5,3){120}%       %bond 16-O
+  \Put@Direct(1197,709){\makebox(0,0){O}}%
+  \dotorline(1197,909)(0,1){140}/(1197,909)(1197,1049)% 22-O (up)
+  {\thicklines
+  \Put@Line(1197,909)(5,-3){171}%       %bond 22-23
+  }%
+  \Put@Line(1539,909)(-5,-3){171}%       %bond 24-23
+  \Put@Line(1539,909)(0,1){200}%       %bond 24-25
+  \Put@Line(1539,1109)(-5,3){171}%       %bond 25-26
+  \Put@Line(1368,1212)(-5,-3){120}%       %bond 26-O (down)
+  \Put@Direct(1197,1109){\makebox(0,0){O}}%
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\member//\relax%
+\if\@tmpa Z\relax%
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty%no action
+ \else\if\@tmpb a%
+  \Put@Line(888,735)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 17-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb b%
+  \Put@Line(888,880)(1,0){276}%    %double bond 20-22
+ \else\if\@tmpb c%
+  \Put@Line(1164,880)(0,-1){116}%    %double bond 22-O
+ \else\if\@tmpb d%
+  \Put@Line(1039,650)(5,3){100}%       %double bond 16-O
+ \else\if\@tmpb e%
+  \Put@Line(1240,930)(5,-3){126}%    %double bond 22-23
+ \else\if\@tmpb f%
+  \Put@Line(1366,848)(5,3){140}%     %double bond 23-24
+ \else\if\@tmpb g%
+  \Put@Line(1504,930)(0,1){148}%     %double bond 24-25
+ \else\if\@tmpb h%
+  \Put@Line(1366,1166)(5,-3){140}%     %double bond 26-25
+ \else\if\@tmpb i%
+  \Put@Line(1366,1166)(-5,-3){110}%     %double bond 26-O
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}}%for 20 position
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-112}{4}{6}{0}}%for 17 position (117 as Exception)
+\Put@Direct(1368,806){\setsixringv{#2}{-25}{0}{2}{0}}%for 26
+\Put@Direct(1368,806){\setsixringv{#2}{-23}{1}{3}{0}}%for 25
+\Put@Direct(1368,806){\setsixringv{#2}{-21}{2}{4}{0}}%for 24
+\Put@Direct(1368,806){\setsixringv{#2}{-19}{3}{5}{0}}%for 23
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \steroidspiro macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidspirotriMe}
+% \begin{macro}{\spirostanalpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\spirostanbeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\spirostan}
+% \begin{macro}{\spirostannor}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **************
+% * spirostans * 
+% **************
+\def\steroidspirotriMe[#1]#2{%
+\steroidspiro[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==CH$_{3}$;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H;%
+{117}FA==H;{20}A==H$_{3}$C;{16}FA==H}}
+\def\spirostanalpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@spirostanalpha}{\@spirostanalpha[]}}
+\def\@spirostanalpha[#1]#2{\steroidspirotriMe[#1]{#2;5A==H;{25}B==CH$_{3}$}}
+\def\spirostanbeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@spirostanbeta}{\@spirostanbeta[]}}
+\def\@spirostanbeta[#1]#2{\steroidspirotriMe[#1]{#2;5B==H;{25}B==CH$_{3}$}}
+\def\spirostan{\@ifnextchar[{\@spirostan}{\@spirostan[]}}
+\def\@spirostan[#1]#2{\steroidspirotriMe[#1]{#2;{{25}}==\null}}
+\def\spirostannor{\@ifnextchar[{\@spirostannor}{\@spirostannor[]}}
+\def\@spirostannor[#1]#2{\steroidspirotriMe[#1]{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Furostans}
+%
+% After the macro |\steroidfuros| is defined as a basic macro, 
+% several macros for drawing furostans are defined. 
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidfuros}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **************************************
+% * Raw skeleton for drawing furostans * 
+% **************************************
+\def\steroidfuros{\@ifnextchar[{\@steroidfuros[@}{\@steroidfuros[Z]}}
+\def\@steroidfuros[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw\reset@@yl
+\yl@steroidposition{#2}%
+\ylposition{#2}{-20}{1}{3}{0}%for 22 position
+\if@ylsw \ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}%for 20 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw
+\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1026}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi%%set 20 position
+\else
+\ylposition{#2}{-22}{0}{2}{0}%for 23 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1368}\def\@@yli{-606}\fi%%set 23 position
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-23}{4}%      % for 24
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1539}\def\@@yli{-909}\fi%%set 24 position
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-24}{4}%      % for 25
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1710}\def\@@yli{-1012}\fi%%set 25 position
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-25}{4}%      % for 26
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1710}\def\@@yli{-1212}\fi%%set 26 position
+\else
+\ylatombondposition{#2}{-26}{4}%      % for 27
+\fi
+\if@ylsw\ifx\@@ylii\empty
+\def\@@ylii{-1881}\def\@@yli{-909}\fi%%set 27 position
+\fi
+\if@ylsw
+ \yl@shiftii=\@ylii
+ \ifx\@@ylii\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\@@ylii\fi
+ \yl@shifti=\@yli
+ \ifx\@@yli\empty\else
+ \advance\yl@shifti\@@yli\fi
+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff
+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff
+ \begin{sfpicture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)%
+ \reset@yl@xydiff%1999/1/6 by S. Fujita
+\else
+ \begin{sfpicture}(2300,1500)(-\shiftii,-\shifti)%
+  \iforigpt \typeout{command `steroidfuros' is based on `steroid'.}\fi%
+\fi
+  \Put@Direct(0,0){\@steroidskeleton{#1}{#2}}%
+  \Put@Line(855,709)(0,1){200}%       %bond 17-20
+  \Put@Line(855,909)(1,0){342}%       %bond 20-22
+  \Put@Line(1197,909)(0,-1){140}%       %bond 22-O (down)
+  \Put@Line(1026,606)(5,3){120}%       %bond 16-O
+  \Put@Direct(1197,709){\makebox(0,0){O}}%
+  \Put@Line(1197,909)(5,3){171}%       %bond 22-23
+  \Put@Line(1368,1012)(5,-3){171}%       %bond 23-24
+  \Put@Line(1539,909)(5,3){171}%       %bond 24-25
+  \Put@Line(1710,1012)(5,-3){171}%       %bond 25-27
+  \Put@Line(1710,1012)(0,1){200}%       %bond 25-27
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\expandafter\twoCH@R\member//\relax%
+\if\@tmpa Z\relax%
+ \ifx\@tmpb\empty%no action
+ \else\if\@tmpb a%
+  \Put@Line(888,735)(0,1){148}%       %double bond 17-20
+ \else\if\@tmpb b%
+  \Put@Line(888,880)(1,0){276}%    %double bond 20-22
+ \else\if\@tmpb c%
+  \Put@Line(1164,880)(0,-1){116}%    %double bond 22-O
+ \else\if\@tmpb d%
+  \Put@Line(1039,650)(5,3){100}%       %double bond 16-O
+ \else\if\@tmpb e%
+  \Put@Line(1240,900)(5,3){126}%    %double bond 22-23
+ \else\if\@tmpb f%
+  \Put@Line(1410,1022)(5,-3){126}%     %double bond 23-24
+ \else\if\@tmpb g%
+  \Put@Line(1582,900)(5,3){126}%    %double bond 24-25
+ \else\if\@tmpb h%
+  \Put@Line(1740,1035)(0,1){150}%     %double bond 25-26
+ \else\if\@tmpb i%
+  \Put@Line(1752,1022)(5,-3){126}%     %double bond 25-27
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-14}{5}{7}{0}}%for 20 position
+\Put@Direct(1026,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-112}{4}{6}{0}}%for 17 position (117 as Exception)
+\Put@Direct(1197,503){\setsixringv{#2}{-21}{0}{2}{0}}%for 22 
+\Put@Direct(1368,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-22}{0}{2}{0}}%for 23
+\Put@Direct(1539,909){\setsixringv{#2}{-20}{3}{5}{0}}%for 24
+\Put@Direct(1710,1012){\setatombond{#2}{-24}{3}}%      % for 25
+\Put@Direct(1539,909){\setsixringv{#2}{-24}{1}{3}{0}}%for 26
+\Put@Direct(1710,606){\setsixringv{#2}{-25}{1}{3}{0}}%for 27
+\end{sfpicture}}%               %end of \steroidfuros macro%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\steroidfurostriMe}
+% \begin{macro}{\furostanalpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\furostanbeta}
+% \begin{macro}{\furostan}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************
+% * furostans *
+% *************
+\def\steroidfurostriMe[#1]#2{%
+\steroidfuros[#1]{#2;8B==H;9A==H;{10}B==CH$_{3}$;{13}B==CH$_{3}$;{14}A==H;%
+{117}FA==H;{20}A==H$_{3}$C;{16}FA==H}}
+\def\furostanalpha{\@ifnextchar[{\@furostanalpha}{\@furostanalpha[]}}
+\def\@furostanalpha[#1]#2{\steroidfurostriMe[#1]{#2;5A==H}}
+\def\furostanbeta{\@ifnextchar[{\@furostanbeta}{\@furostanbeta[]}}
+\def\@furostanbeta[#1]#2{\steroidfurostriMe[#1]{#2;5B==H}}
+\def\furostan{\@ifnextchar[{\@furostan}{\@furostan[]}}
+\def\@furostan[#1]#2{\steroidfurostriMe[#1]{#2}}
+%</steroid>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Macros for Spiro Pyranoses}
+%
+% The macro |\pyranoseChairi| is defined to draw steroid with spiro pyranose rings 
+% The switch |\pyranoseChairalphatrue| is declared to draw an alpha bond (a dashed line). 
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifpyranoseChairalpha}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyranoseChairi}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifpyranoseChairalpha 
+\pyranoseChairalphatrue
+\def\pyranoseChairi{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyranoseChairi}{\@pyranoseChairi[r]}}
+\def\@pyranoseChairi[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylchairiposition{#2}%
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1600,800)(-400,-319){chairi}%
+(400,319)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+% skeletal bonds
+   \thinlines%
+\ifpyranoseChairalpha
+  \dotorline(0,0)(3,4){140}/(0,0)(140,187)% bond 1 to 6
+\else
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,4){140}%         % bond 1 to 6
+\fi
+      \Put@Line(573,91)(-3,1){360}%      %      5 to 6
+      \Put@Direct(130,190){O}%
+      \Put@Line(573,91)(3,1){270}%      %      5 to 4
+   {\thicklines%
+    \molfronttrue%
+      \Put@Line(843,181)(-3,-4){170}%    %      4 to 3
+      \Put@Line(673,-46)(-3,1){403}%     %      3 to 2
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,1){270}%          %      1 to 2
+   }%
+   \thinlines%
+% inner double bonds
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic bonds
+\else \if\member c%%%a%
+       \Put@Line(767,139)(-3,-4){110}%   % double bond 3 to 4
+\else \if\member b%%%d%%%b%
+      \Put@Line(640,-5)(-3,1){343}%      %             4 to 5
+\else \if\member a%%%e%%%%c%
+       \Put@Line(240,111)(-3,-1){190}%   %             5 to 6
+\else \if\member f%%%d%
+      \Put@Line(63,40)(3,4){110}%        %             6 to 7
+\else \if\member e%%%l%
+      \Put@Line(182,187)(3,-1){343}%     %             7 to 10
+\else \if\member d%%%k%%%f%
+      \Put@Line(768,131)(-3,-1){170}%    %             10 to 3
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+% %
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairia}% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairib}% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairic}% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairid}% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairie}% subst. on 5
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairif}% subst. on 6
+\fi %end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}\end{ShiftPicEnvB}}%               %end of \pyranoseChairi macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\pyranoseChairii| is defined to draw steroid with spiro pyranose rings 
+%
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{for bond coloring}
+% \begin{macro}{\pyranoseChairii}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pyranoseChairii{\@ifnextchar[{\@pyranoseChairii}{\@pyranoseChairii[r]}}
+\def\@pyranoseChairii[#1]#2{%
+\@reset@ylsw%
+\ylchairiposition{#2}%
+\def\@@ylii{0}\def\@@yli{0}%
+\begin{ShiftPicEnvB}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)/%
+(1600,800)(-400,-319){chairi}%
+(400,319)%2002/4/30 by S. Fujita
+% skeletal bonds
+   \thinlines%
+\ifpyranoseChairalpha
+  \dotorline(0,0)(3,4){170}/(0,0)(170,227)% bond 1 to 6
+\else
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,4){170}%         % bond 1 to 6
+\fi
+      \Put@Line(170,226)(3,-1){403}%    %      6 to 5
+      \Put@Line(573,91)(3,1){270}%      %      5 to 4
+      \Put@Direct(230,50){O}%
+   {\thicklines%
+    \molfronttrue%
+      \Put@Line(843,181)(-3,-4){170}%    %      4 to 3
+      \Put@Line(673,-46)(-3,1){360}%     %      3 to 2
+      \Put@Line(0,0)(3,1){230}%          %      1 to 2
+   }%
+   \thinlines%
+% inner double bonds
+\@tfor\member:=#1\do{%
+\if\member r%no endcyclic bonds
+\else \if\member c%%%a%
+       \Put@Line(767,139)(-3,-4){110}%   % double bond 3 to 4
+\else \if\member b%%%d%%%b%
+      \Put@Line(640,-5)(-3,1){343}%      %             4 to 5
+\else \if\member a%%%e%%%%c%
+       \Put@Line(240,111)(-3,-1){190}%   %             5 to 6
+\else \if\member f%%%d%
+      \Put@Line(63,40)(3,4){110}%        %             6 to 7
+\else \if\member e%%%l%
+      \Put@Line(182,187)(3,-1){343}%     %             7 to 10
+\else \if\member d%%%k%%%f%
+      \Put@Line(768,131)(-3,-1){170}%    %             10 to 3
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+% %
+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else
+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%
+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%
+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else
+\ifcase\@tmpa%0 omit
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairia}% subst. on 1
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairib}% subst. on 2
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairic}% subst. on 3
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairid}% subst. on 4
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairie}% subst. on 5
+ \or\setBScolor{\@chairif}% subst. on 6
+\fi %end of ifcase
+\fi\fi%
+}\end{ShiftPicEnvB}}%               %end of \pyranoseChairii macro
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.00}{2009/6/15}{Creating \cs{cholestanealfa} etc.}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/steroid.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/steroid.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7d76f014b60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/steroid.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+\def\batchfile{steroid.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 2009, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 
+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 
+is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+=======================================
+Old Versions: 
+Version 1.00 for XyMTeX version 4.04 Released on June 15, 2009
+
+The Present Version: 
+Version 5.00 Released on October 01, 2010
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files steroid.dtx and steroid.ins
+and the derived file steroid.sty.
+
+=======================================
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{steroid.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{steroid.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{steroid.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{steroid.dtx}{steroid}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/xymtex.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/xymtex.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a38ccd0a2af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/xymtex.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,308 @@
+% \iffalse 
+%
+% xymtex.dtx
+% 
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2004,2005,2009,2010,2011,2013 by Shinsaku Fujita  All rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is part of the ChemSci system
+% ========================================
+%
+% This style file is created for submitting a manuscript to 
+% scientific journals. This style file is to be contained in the 
+% ``xymtex'' directory which is an input directory for TeX. 
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+%
+% This work consists of the files xymtex.dtx and xymtex.ins 
+% and the derived files: xymtex.sty, xymtexps.sty and xymtexpdf.sty.
+%
+%=======================================
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% *********************************************************************
+% * Version 1.00  Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita        %
+% * Version 1.00a Released May 22, 1996 by Shinsaku Fujita            %
+% * Version 1.02  Released October 31, 1998 by Shinsaku Fujita        %
+% * Version 2.00  Released December 25, 1998 by Shinsaku Fujita       %
+% *********************************************************************
+% xymtex.sty
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993, 1966, 1998, 2001,2004 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00a}
+% \typeout{       -- Released May 22, 1996 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.02}
+% \typeout{       -- Released October 31, 1998 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 2.00}
+% \typeout{       -- Released December 25, 1998 by Shinsaku Fujita}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{xymtex.sty}
+% \def\versi@ndate{May 22, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00a}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{xymtex.sty}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{xymtex.sty}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{xymtex.sty}
+% \def\versi@ndate{November 17, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.01b}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{xymtex.sty}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 25, 2004}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %<xymtex>\def\j@urnalname{xymtex} \def\journalID{xymtex}
+% %<xymtexps>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexps} \def\journalID{xymtexps}
+% \def\versi@ndate{July 20, 2005}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.02}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %<xymtex>\def\j@urnalname{xymtex} \def\journalID{xymtex}
+% %<xymtexps>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexps} \def\journalID{xymtexps}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 15, 2009}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.04}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %<xymtex>\def\j@urnalname{xymtex} \def\journalID{xymtex}
+% %<xymtexps>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexps} \def\journalID{xymtexps}
+% \def\versi@ndate{November 25, 2009}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.05}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %<xymtex>\def\j@urnalname{xymtex} \def\journalID{xymtex}
+% %<xymtexps>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexps} \def\journalID{xymtexps}
+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 2009}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver4.06}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %<xymtex>\def\j@urnalname{xymtex} \def\journalID{xymtex}
+% %<xymtexps>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexps} \def\journalID{xymtexps}
+% %<xymtexpdf>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexpdf} \def\journalID{xymtexpdf}
+% \def\versi@ndate{October 01, 2010}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% %<xymtex>\def\j@urnalname{xymtex} \def\journalID{xymtex}
+% %<xymtexps>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexps} \def\journalID{xymtexps}
+% %<xymtexpdf>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexpdf} \def\journalID{xymtexpdf}
+% \def\versi@ndate{February 24, 2011}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver5.01beta}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% \typeout{Package `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>\space 
+% [\copyrighth@lder]}
+% %<xymtex> \typeout{xymtex.sty ver5.01beta (for LaTeX2e) 2011/02/24[SF]}
+% %<xymtexps> \typeout{xymtexps.sty ver5.01beta (for LaTeX2e) 2011/02/24[SF]}
+% %<xymtexpdf> \typeout{xymtexpdf.sty ver5.01beta (for LaTeX2e) 2011/02/24[SF]}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 
+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.
+%
+% For the review of XyMTeX, see
+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text
+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, 18, 109--116 (1994). 
+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 
+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:
+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  
+%  (3)  Shinskau Fujita, ``XyMTeX for drwoing chemical structural 
+%    formulas'', TUGboat, 16(1), 80--88 (1995).
+%
+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:
+% Old old address: 
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.
+%
+% Old address:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 
+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+%
+% New address:
+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 
+%   Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry
+%   Kanagawa, 258-0019 Japan
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{70}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%
+%% `xymtex.dtx' ver5.01 (for LaTeX2e) 2013/03/10 
+%%  by Shinsaku Fujita
+%%
+%
+% \section{Initial declaration}
+%
+% \changes{v4.01b}{2004/11/17}{Generaging xymtex.sty and xymtexps}
+% \changes{v4.02}{2004/12/20}{Wedged bonds for xymtx-ps.sty}
+% \changes{v4.03}{2005/07/20}{Wave bonds for xymtx-ps.sty}
+% \changes{v4.04}{2009/06/15}{steoroid.sty added for drawing steroids}
+% \changes{v4.05}{2009/11/25}{lewisstruc.sty added for drawing Lewis structures}
+% \changes{v4.06}{2009/12/01}{harpoons added in the chmst-ps package}
+% \changes{v5.00}{2010/10/01}{PDF mode, bond coloring}
+% \changes{v5.01beta}{2011/02/24}{Added the chemist package and the xcolor package}
+% \changes{v5.01}{2013/03/10}{Bug fix}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    <xymtex>\ProvidesFile{xymtex.sty}
+%    <xymtexps>\ProvidesFile{xymtexps.sty}
+%<driver>\ProvidesFile{xymtex.drv}
+%<driver>         [2013/03/10 v5.01
+%    <xymtex>     ChemSci package ]
+%    <xymtexps>     ChemSci package ]
+%    <xymtexpdf>     ChemSci package ]
+%<driver>     ChemSci package driver (English)
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \section{Driver file for this dtx file}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver> 
+]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{xymtex.drv}
+\title{XyMTeX Packages for Chemists \space\fileversion}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Shonan Institute of Chemoinformatics and Mathematical Chemistry \\
+Kaneko 479-7 Ooimachi, Ashigara-Kami-Gun, Kanagawa, 
+258-0019 Japan
+%(old address)
+%Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology \\
+%Kyoto Institute of Technology \\
+%Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606-8585 Japan 
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+\DocInput{xymtex.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{{\sc docstrip} options}
+%
+% This dtx file provides the {\sffamily xymtex} package 
+% by docstrip processing. 
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+%  \hline
+%   argument & package name \\
+%  \hline
+%   xymtex   & xymtex.sty \\
+%   xymtexps   & xymtexps.sty \\
+%   xymtexpdf   & xymtexpdf.sty \\
+%   driver  & a documentation driver file \\
+%  \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+% 
+% \section{Version information}
+%
+% The old process for typing out version information remains active. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<xymtex>\def\j@urnalname{xymtex} \def\journalID{xymtex}
+%<xymtexps>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexps} \def\journalID{xymtexps}
+%<xymtexpdf>\def\j@urnalname{xymtexpdf} \def\journalID{xymtexpdf}
+\def\versi@ndate{March 10, 2013}
+\def\versi@nno{ver5.01}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+\typeout{Package `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>\space 
+[\copyrighth@lder]}
+%<xymtex> \typeout{xymtex.sty ver5.01 (for LaTeX2e) 2013/03/10[SF]}
+%<xymtexps> \typeout{xymtexps.sty ver5.01 (for LaTeX2e) 2013/03/10[SF]}
+%<xymtexpdf> \typeout{xymtexpdf.sty ver5.01 (for LaTeX2e) 2013/03/10[SF]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xymtexpdf> 
+\DeclareOption{pdf}{\def\pgfsysdriver{pgfsys-common-pdf.def}}
+\DeclareOption{dvipdfm}{\def\pgfsysdriver{pgfsys-dvipdfm.def}}
+\DeclareOption{pdftex}{\def\pgfsysdriver{pgfsys-pdftex.def}}
+\DeclareOption{ps}{\def\pgfsysdriver{pgfsys-common-postscript.def}}
+\DeclareOption{dvips}{\def\pgfsysdriver{pgfsys-dvips.def}}
+\ExecuteOptions{dvipdfm}
+\InputIfFileExists{pict2e.cfg}{}{}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+%</xymtexpdf> 
+\usepackage{epic}
+\usepackage{chemstr}
+\usepackage{carom}
+\usepackage{hetarom}
+\usepackage{hetaromh}
+\usepackage{lowcycle}
+\usepackage{ccycle}
+\usepackage{hcycle}
+\usepackage{aliphat}
+\usepackage{locant}
+\usepackage{polymers}
+\usepackage{methylen}
+\usepackage{fusering}
+\usepackage{sizeredc}
+\usepackage{steroid}
+\usepackage{lewisstruc}
+\usepackage{bondcolor}
+\usepackage{assurelatexmode}
+%<xymtexps>\usepackage{xymtx-ps}
+%<xymtexpdf>\usepackage{xymtx-pdf}
+%<xymtex>\usepackage{chemist}
+%<xymtex>\usepackage{xcolor}
+%<xymtexps>\usepackage{chmst-ps}
+%<xymtexpdf>\usepackage{chmst-pdf}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/xymtex.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/xymtex.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a679b874673
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/base/xymtex.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+\def\batchfile{xymtex.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 2004, 2005, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+
+This file is part of the ChemSci system.
+=======================================
+
+Old versions (.dtx and .ins files were not used): 
+Version 1.00  Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita
+Version 1.00a Released May 22, 1996 by Shinsaku Fujita
+Version 1.02  Released October 31, 1998 by Shinsaku Fujita 
+Version 2.00  Released December 25, 1998 by Shinsaku Fujita
+
+Old versions (.dtx and .ins files were used): 
+Version 4.01b Released Novermber 17, 2004 by Shinsaku Fujita
+Version 4.02  Released December 20, 2004 by Shinsaku Fujita
+Version 4.03  Released July 20, 2005 by Shinsaku Fujita
+Version 4.04  Released June 15, 2009 by Shinsaku Fujita
+Version 4.05 Released November 25, 2009 by Shinsaku Fujita
+Version 4.06 Released December 01, 2009 by Shinsaku Fujita
+Version 5.00 Released October 01, 2010 by Shinsaku Fujita
+Version 5.01beta Released February 24, 2011 by Shinsaku Fujita
+
+Latest version (with .tex and .ins files)
+Version 5.01 Released March 03, 2013 by Shinsaku Fujita
+
+Copyright (C) 1993--2013 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+This style file is created for submitting a manuscript to 
+scientific journals. This style file is to be contained in the 
+``chemist'' or ``xymtex'' directory which is an input directory for TeX. 
+
+For using this file, see 
+  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+  Tokyo Kagaku Dojin, Tokyo (1993), Chapter 16. 
+
+For PostScript output, use chmst-ps.sty together with chemist.sty. 
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. 
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Shinsaku Fujita.
+
+This work consists of the files xymtex.dtx and xymtex.ins 
+and the derived files: xymtex.sty, xymtexps.sty and xymtexpdf.sty.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\generateFile{xymtex.drv}{t}{%
+  \from{xymtex.dtx}{driver}}
+
+\generateFile{xymtex.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{xymtex.dtx}{xymtex}}
+
+\generateFile{xymtexps.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{xymtex.dtx}{xymtexps}}
+
+\generateFile{xymtexpdf.sty}{t}{%
+  \from{xymtex.dtx}{xymtexpdf}}
+
+\endinput